UNIVERSITY  OF  ILLINOIS 
LIBRARY 

?laSS  Book  Volume 

fv^ 


Ja  09-20M 


THE 


ADVENTURES 

OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ.., 

SURGEON’S  MATE, 

LEFT  ASHORE  IN 

1739 

ON  A DESOLATE  ISLAND: 

NARRATED  BY  HIMSELF; 

EDITED  BY 

REV.  W.  H.  ANDERDON,  M.A. 


DUBLIN: 

JOHN  F.  FOWLER,  3 CROW  STREET. 

LONDON:  BURNS  AND  LAMBERT,  PORTMAN  STREET. 

1863. 


£•2-3 


Moat  House,  Llandevodiog, 

in  the  County  of  Glamorgan, 

l£>  this  tenth  day  of  June,  1754. 

2?  Nephew  Owen, 

^ Thy  dutiful  greetings  came  to  hand,  Tuesday 

o was  a week,  with  the  news  of  thy  penning  thine  adven- 
tures  in  foreign  parts : nor  had  I failed  to  thank  thee  by 
the  carrier  on  the  Friday  last  past,  but  that  Watkin- 
^ Penruddock,  the  schoolmaster  at  Cowbridge,  who  is 
^ even  now  putting  down  my  word  of  mouth,  cometh  not 
v °ver  to  our  village  but  thrice  in  the  month,  and  hath 

£ this  day  been  so  moiled  in  teaching  fro  ward  youths,  as 

scarce  leaveth  the  good  man  (with  all  his  painful  benevo- 
lence) time  nor  spirits  to  write  out  this  my  letter  fair.* 

*It  is  to  be  supposed  that  Mr.  Penruddock  felt  himself  bound  to 
discharge  the  part  of  a faithful  amanuensis ; or  he  would  scarcely 
have  inserted  such  a compliment  to  himself.  It  may  be  necessary  to 
add,  that  the  epithet  painful , though  become  rather  antiquated  at  the 
date  of  this  letter  (which  maybe  accounted  for  by  its  being  written 
from  Glamorganshire)  was  still  used  in  England  not  so  very  long  be- 
fore, in  the  sense  of  painstaking,  diligent,  conscientious.  Thus,  we 
read  of  a painful  student , a painful  preacher , etc.  Ed. 


1 27608 


VI 


INTRODUCTION. 


Indeed,  I might  have  asked  our  new  preacher  (whom 
precious  Mr.  Wesley  hath  left  among  us,  to  our  no  small 
contentation)  to  hold  the  pen:  but,  in  fine,  I trouble 
thee  not  with  the  divers  reasons  that  have  made  me  tarry 
till  this  day  to  answer  thine.  It  pleasureth  me  that  thou 
didst  take  in  good  part  the  admonitions  I felt  myself 
bounden  to  write  to  thee  before,  on  thy  return  to 
England,  when  thou  didst  inform  me  of  thy  most  sad 
deflexion*  from  the  protestant  faith.  It  doth  even  now 
seem  a mystery  to  my  poor  understanding,  (but  we  are  all 
frail  creatures,  and  prone  to  lean  on  ourselves,)  that  after 
thy  careful  bringing  up  thou  shouldst  forsake  the  way  of 
thy  fathers,  and  remove  the  antient  landmarks  which  they 
have  set.  And,  for  the  priest,  of  whom  thou  writest,  more 
like  a romancer  than  a reasonable  man,  methinks  he  might 
have  attended  to  his  own  concerns,  or  to  the  Spanish 
bodies  that  came  in  the  ship,  who,  being  bom  papists, 
were  not  to  be  rescued  from  their  darkness ; except  Mr. 
Wesley  had  fallen  in  with  them  on  his  mission  to 
Georgia,  which  it  seems  that  precious  man  never  did. 
That  priest  might  have  let  my  nephew  be,  to  follow  the 
religion  of  all  the  Evanses,  from  father  to  son ; not  to 
speak  of  his  mother’s  blood  of  the  Perkinses,  who  derive 
from  the  Watkinses,  and  they  from  the  Griffiths,  and 
they  from  Owen  Glendower,  and  so  up  to  Evan  Dhu, 
grandson  of  Cassibalaun,  nephew  to  King  Lud,  as  thou 
knowest  well ; for  I have  told  thee  nigh  an  hundred  times. 
Notwithstanding,  I harbour  no  malice  against  the  man ; 
but  will  only  wish  he  may  have  gone  down  quietly  to 
the  bottom  of  the  deep  sea  in  that  open  boat  thou  didst 
write  of,  as  a judgment  on  his  doings  to  my  poor  boy. 
But  thus  much  I indited  to  thee  faithfully,  as  my  duty 

* Probably  intended  for  defection ; but  one  must  not  be  too  severe 
in  criticizing  the  Welsh  schoolmaster.  As  to  the  sentiment  itself, 
whether  it  be  an  unaided  observation  of  Owen’s  aunt,  or  an  interpola- 
tion, the  answer  is  sufficiently  obvious.  The  deputy  harbour-master, 
in  changing  his  religion,  was  but  returning  to  the  way  of  his  fathers ; 
and,  far  from  removing  the  ancient  landmarks,  did  but  investigate  their 
whereabouts,  and  clear  them  of  the  rubbish  accumulated  over  them  in 
later  times.  It  might  also  have  been  worth  the  good  old  lady’s  while 
to  inquire  what  was  the  religion  of  the  ancient  families  from  whom  she 
derived  her  descent  and  (apparently)  her  sense  of  some  importance. 
— Ed. 


INTRODUCTION. 


Vll 


was,  in  a second  letter  also  which  thine  uncle  Pritchard 
carried  in  his  portmantle  as  far  as  to  Newbury,  and  then 
entrusted  to  the  public  post,  under  free  cover  to  Sir 
Llewellyn  Tregyon,  knight  of  the  shire  for  Cardigan, 
then  attending  at  the  parliament  house  in  Westminster; 
the  which  I trust  thou  didst  safely  and  dutifully  receive. 
Wherefore  I touch  no  more  on  that  head  at  this  present ; 
only  hoping  thou  mayest  one  day  come  to  Moat  House 
to  see  thy  old  aunt  once  more,  and  thereat  be  privi- 
leged to  sit  under  zealous  Mr.  David  Williams,  or  may- 
hap even  listen  to  the  precious  Mr.  Wesley  himself:  in 
which  case  I am  fond  to  think  thou  wouldest  quickly 
unlearn  thy  papistry  again.  So  no  more  at  present, 
saving  to  notify  to  thee,  thy  sister  Jane  hath  been  mar- 
ried now  going  for  seventeen  weeks  to  one  Richard 
Davids,  who,  taking  to  newfangled  ways,  electeth  to  call 
himself  Davies,  after  the  English  fashions,  and  so  wnteth 
his  name,  for  he  can  write,  like  thyself,  and  nigh  as 
fairly,  and  liveth  no  nigher  to  this  than  Llanychllwydog 
in  the  County  of  Pembroke,  doing  business  as  a wool- 
factor,  though  not  in  so  gainful  a way  as  I could  have 
desired,  to  Newport  and  Fishguard,  and  is  an  honest 
man  of  decent  parentage,  all  but  his  temper,  which  is 
sudden  and  inconstant,  and  besides,  which  is  my  chief 
contentment  in  it,  is  a joined  member  of  Mr.  Wesley’s 
flock  beside ; and  thy  cousin  Evan  Roberts  died  last 
Martinmas,  though  truly  I should  not  use  that  word, 
which  savoureth  of  thine  own  way  of  thinking,  but 
indeed  he  departed  about  the  middle  of  last  November, 
of  a quinsey : so  no  more  at  present  from 
Thy  loving  aunt, 

Martha  Jane  Evans. 

For  Mr.  Owen  Evans,  Esq.,  Deputy  Harbour-master, 
these  with  care : he  dwelleth  betwixt  the  Old  Jetty  and 
the  Fishermen’s  Hospital, 

Great  Yarmouth, 

Norfolk, 

England. 


Postage  freed. 


CONTENTS. 


Chapter.  Page 

I.  The  island  discovered,  1 

II.  The  landing,  . . 5 

III.  The  start  for  a ramble,  10 

IV.  The  desertion,  . . 13 

V.  It  might  have  been 

worse,  . . .17 

VI.  Night  and  morning,  . 21 
VII.  The  first  meal,  and  the 

first  parliament,  . 25 
VIII.  A disappointment  and 

a danger,  . . .33 

IX.  Dinner,  and  a battle 

after  it,  38 

X.  We  discover  what  a 

priest  is,  . . 44 

XI.  The  best  and  worst 

shot,  . . . .49 

XII.  How  much  goodness  goes 

to  forgiveness,  . . 54 

XIII.  A lesson  out  of  a shark’s 

mouth,  . . .58 

XIV.  We  do  something  un- 

common, . . 60 

XV.  Prayer  hinders  no  work,  65 

XVI.  We  fire  into  the  enemy’s 

camp,  and  retreat  to 
our  own,  . . ' . 68 

XVII.  Fire-side  talk,  . . 72 

XVIII.  A few  little  debts,  . . 75 

XIX.  We  gain  our  prize,  . 79 

XX.  Blown  into  harbour,  , 81 

XXI.  A new  arrival,  . . 84 

XXII.  Doctoring  and  purveying,  88 

XXIII.  We  are  taken  to  be  gods,  91 
XXIV.  A lesson  in  Indian,  . 94 
XXV.  Freedom  or  slavery  ? . 97 

XXVI.  The  white  man  no  hero,  100 
XXVII.  Prodgers  learns  his  les- 
son, ....  103 
XXVIII.  We  design  a safe  retreat,  109 
XXIX.  What  is  truth?  . .113 

XXX.  The  serpents’  hole,  : 118 
XXXI.  Notice  to  quit,  . .122 

XXXII.  The  mother  tongue,  .125 

XXXIII.  Various  discoveries,  . 129 
XXXIV.  A funeral,  and  a lesson 

for  the  living,  . . 132 

XXXV.  Outwitted,  . . .135 


Chapter;  Page 

XXXVI.  We  aim  at  a provision 

store,  . . .138 

XXXVII.  The  first  catechism,  . 141 
XXXVIII.  Worth  thinking  on,  . 145 
XXXIX  A positive  precept,  . 149 
XL.  Rambling  in  walk  and 

talk,  . . . .158 

XLI.  The  swearer’s  button,  . 158 
XLII.  A germ  of  the  future,  . 161 
XLIII.  “Nimble  thought  can 

leap  both  sea  and  land"  164 
XLIV.  Don  Manuel’s  sermon,  . 168 
XLV.  The  archery  club,  . . 175 

XLVI.  Archery  and  pottery,  . 179 
XLVII.  The  castle  with  its  out- 
works, . . . 182 

XLVI1I.  Our  larder  and  farm- 
yard, . . .186 

XLIX.  We  carve  out  a kitchen,  190 
L.  Rock  architecture,  . 195 
LI.  What  we  ought  to  have 

known  before,  . . 199 

LII.  Another  leaf  out  of  the 

catechism,  . . . 203 

LIII.  Spring-tide  labours,  . 209 

LIV.  Sea  and  land,  . . 212 

LV.  Preparing  for  a change  . 215 
LVI.  Other  reasons,  . . 218 

LVII.  Spiritual  Mass,  . . 220 

LVIII.  The  Spanish  Armada,  . 225 
LIX.  Harbour  and  Hospital,  . 229 
LX.  The  treaty  made  and  ra- 
tified  233 

LXI.  The  lieutenant’s  story,  . 237 
LXII.  The  same  continued,  . 242 
LXIII.  Lawful  wrecking,  . 247 
LXIV.  Rumours  and  secrets,  . 250 
LXV.  The  best  discovery  of  all,  253 
LXVI.  Signs  of  another  move,  . 258 
LXVII.  Preparations  thereto,  . 262 
LXVIIL  Departure,  . . . 266 

LXIX.  The  eruption,  . . 270 

LXX  Death  in  more  shapes 

than  one,  . . . 274 

LXXI.  Our  deliverance,  . . 279 

LXXII.  What  happened  to  us 

all  after,  . . . 284 

Supplement : Don  Manuel's  Narrative,  289 


>o  o<  o<>0  <x>0  (X>o  o<>o  ©<>o  0<X)  o<>o  o<>«  o<  o<>o  o<>o  o<>o  <><>©  o<  X>  o< 


tlR->ARY 

UNIVERSITY  'irf  It; ! wois. 


OWEN  EVANS’  MAZE. 


©©it  MANUELS  JMAZ&. 


THE 


CHAPTER  I. 


THE  VOYAGE,  OR  CRUISE — SUSPICIONS  ABOUT  THE  SHIP- 
ISLAND  DISCOVERED. 


-THE 


■ E were  going  under  easy  sail,  about  three  or 
four  knots  an  hour,  with  a light,  fair  breeze, 
which  had  held,  on  and  off,  the  last  couple 
of  days.  But  we  did  not  take  advantage  of 
it ; for  the  captain  was  anxious  to  give  a last 
chance  to  our  consort,  the  Enterprise  of  New- 
haven,  to  whom  we  had  given  the  rendezvous 
these  latitudes,  before  we  bore  away  for  California.  So 
at  least,  he  said ; but  I had  my  suspicions  about  what  he 
might  really  be  intending  ; and  all  along,  a kind  of  misgiving 

1 


m 


2 


TIIE  ADVENTURES  OF 


had  come  over  me,  as  to  the  whole  appearance  and  arrange- 
ments of  the  ship.  For  no  sooner  were  we  fairly  away  from 
port,  than  a couple  of  long  swivel -guns  had  been  hauled  out  of 
the  hold,  and  mounted  on  spare  carriages  upon  the  quarter- 
deck, so  as  to  sweep  fore  and  aft.  Then  the  men  were 
exercised  at.  these  every  day,  sponging  and  working  them 
as  if  in  action,  as  also  at  the  two  short  carronades  we 
carried ; but  so  much  indeed  did  every  trader  of  our  size  carry 
at  that  period.  Our  crew  had  been  increased,  even  while  the 
blue -peter  was  flying  at  the  fore,  by  ten  or  twelve  as  ill- 
looking,  cut-throat  fellows  as  ever  you  saw ; men  of  all 
nations,  Americans,  Malays,  Portuguese,  one  or  two  New- 
foundlanders, and  so  on.  They  knew  none  of  the  rest  of 
the  crew,  who,  on  their  part,  I must  say,  except  a small 
number,  were  no  models  of  good  conduct  in  any  way.  But 
these  new-comers  fairly  outdid  them  in  all  cursing  and  wick- 
edness ; and  they  were  the  very  men  who  were  practised  every 
day  in  working  the  guns,  handling  the  shot  and  powder- 
lockers,  going  through  the  exercise  with  their  cutlasses  and 
marlinspikes,  etc.  In  short,  my  mind  misgave  me  that  the 
captain  was  quite  as  much  on  the  look-out  for  some  weaker 
trader  to  fall  in  with,  as  anything  else ; and  I thought  (if  I 
did  not  misjudge  him)  there  was  a wicked  look  in  his  eye 
when  he  spoke  of  the  Enterprise , as  if  that  was  the  enterprise 
he  was  really  after. 

I got  very  uncomfortable  at  these  signs  of  our  skipper’s 
intentions ; and  the  state  of  my  mind  increased  the  distaste 
I had  conceived  against  a sea-faring  life.  It  was  my  first 
voyage  after  being  certified  for  a surgeon’s  mate;  but  the 
captain  (Aram  Plopkins  was  his  name  : ’t  is  no  breach  of 
charity,  I hope,  to  record  it,*  for  every  one  that  knows  the 
sea,  knows  he  was  hanged,  three  years  after,  on  Staten  Island 
for  a pirate ; though  how  I came  to  know  it,  the  reader  may 
wonder)  asked  me  to  go  the  voyage  in  the  capacity  of  full 
surgeon,  with  my  berth  and  all  supplies  free,  and  promising 
to  show  me  something  of  sea-life.  He  did,  indeed ; and  some- 
thing of  land-life  too,  when  and  where  I least  expected  it. 
Plowever,  my  part  was  to  keep  up  a good  face,  and  seem  as 
careless  as  if  I observed  nothing  out  of  the  way.  This  w~as 
no  easy  matter,  as  the  days  went  on  ; and  I could  see  that 

* Our  friend  Owen  is  mistaken  here,  however.  It  is  always  a breach 
of  charity  to  speak  in  this  way ; though  the  degree  of  wrong  varies 
according  to  the  nature  of  the  charge,  and  the  likelihood  of  its  be- 
coming otherwise  known.  Ed. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


3 


the  captain  eyed  me  with  distrust  from  time  to  time,  and  in- 
deed more  every  day  we  sailed. 

I looked  round  for  some  one  with  whom  I might  'take 
counsel : but  could  not  tell  whom  to  trust.  There  was, 
indeed,  an  honest  fellow  named  Tom  Harvey  among  us,  of 
whom  I shall  have  enough  to  say  by-and-bye : and  I could 
have  spoken  to  him  more  freely  than  to  any  one  of  the  ship’s 
company  beside.  But,  then,  I did  not  know  how  far  Tom’s 
discretion  might  extend : for  my  experience  of  life  has 
taught  me  how  few  people  there  are  who  can  keep  a secret. 
The  same  applied  to  some  of  the  others,  and  I knew  even  less 
of  them.  There  was  a Spanish  priest  on  board,  Don  Manuel 
he  was  called ; who  had  taken  his  passage  on  board  of 
us  for  San  Francisco,  whither  he  was  going  to  establish  a 
mission  of  his  order.  More  than  once  I resolved  to  speak 
to  him  : but  I don’t  know  what  kind  of  feeling  held  me 
back.  I had  been  bred  up  a protestant ; and  though,  at 
that  time,  indeed,  had  not  much  religion  of  any  kind,  still  I 
felt  unwilling  to  open  my  mind  to  a priest,  one  of  a class  of 
men  I had  always  looked  on  with  suspicion. 

This  priest,  in  truth,  seemed  a quiet  man,  who  had  a kind 
word  for  every  one  that  came  across  him,  though  he  did  not 
speak  much.  He  kept  a good  deal  in  the  cabin,  and  was  a 
hard  reader,  when  he  was  not  sea-sick.  Only,  on  fine  days, 
he  would  come  up  and  walk  a little  on  deck,  reading  his  book 
attentively,  and  speaking  to  himself.  I thought,  as  I looked 
at  him,  he  was  saying  his  prayers  ; and  I used  to  wonder  how 
any  man,  priest  or  layman,  could  bear  to  say  so  many  prayers 
in  the  course  of  the  day.  Once  or  twice  he  asked  me  some 
questions  on  medical  subjects ; chiefly  on  the  treatment  of 
wounds  and  fevers,  and  the  use  of  herbs  in  their  cure  : and  I 
could  easily  see  he  had  studied  those  subjects  a good  deal. 
Well,  notwithstanding  our  few  conversations,  the  long  and 
short  of  it  was,  I had  never  spoken  to  a priest  before,  and 
would  not  make  up  my  mind  to  open  my  suspicions  to  him. 

Things  were  going  on  in  this  way,  when,  at  about  eleven 
in  the  forenoon  of  Monday,  August  the  twenty-third,  the 
man  in  the  top  suddenly  sang  out : u Land  on  the  larboard 
bow !”  and  a refreshing  cry  it  was  to  us,  who  had  been  almost 
three  weeks  (including  some  calms),  without  seeing  anything 
to  break  the  everlasting  sea-line  all  round  us.  Up  we  were  at 
once  in  the  shrouds,  in  the  rigging,  out  upon  the  yards,  at  least 
the  more  active,  sure-footed  ones,  all  eyes  straining  to  lar- 
board As  for  me,  who  was  as  eager  as  the  rest,  not  knowing 


4 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


whether  this  accident  (as  we  did  not  expect  land)  would  bring 
any  change  to  the  condition  I was  in,  I made  my  way  up  to 
the  mizen-top,  with  my  own  glass,  and  a very  clear  one  it  was, 
and  proved  a faithful  companion  to  me  afterwards,  where  I 
did  not  expect  to  keep  it  so  long  as  it  and  I staid  together. 

When  I got  into  the  top,  I could  see,  plain  enough,  and 
without  my  glass,  a haze  stretching  away  to  east-south-east  of 
our  course,  like  a thin  bank  of  fog,  and  nothing  more.  It 
lay  some  ten  or  twelve  miles  from  us,  but  so  faint,  I never 
should  have  taken  it  for  a sign  of  land.  The  man  on  the 
watch  was  right,  however,  as  it  proved.  We  were  sailing,  as 
I have  said,  under  a light  breeze,  three  or  four  points  from 
where  it  lay,  our  course  being  almost  due  south.  But  the  cap- 
tain now  put  the  ship  about,  and  we  stood  right  in  for  it. 

As  Ave  dreAV  nearer,  I could  observe  this  haze,  or  heat, 
gradually  melt  away  from  the  land,  and  leave  it  clear.  But 
the  first  thing  to  be  seen  in  the  way  of  land  was  the  peak  of 
a mountain  that  seemed  pretty  near  the  centre  of  the  island 
(for  island  Ave  judged  it  to  be),  but  nearer  to  its  northernmost 
end.  This  ran  up  out  of  the  mist  before  we  could  see  the 
coast  and  lower  grounds.  It  was  in  the  form  of  a sugar-loaf, 
something  like  the  Peak  of  Teneriffe,  though  so  much  smaller  ; 
only  that  it  was  somewhat  flattened  at  the  top.  About  half- 
way up,  it  was  clothed  Avith  trees,  as  far  as  we  could  judge  at 
our  distance,  and  this'  was  better  seen  the  nearer  we  sailed. 
But  all  the  upper  part  looked  bare,  with  streaks  down  the 
sides  of  a greyish  colour : whence  I concluded  it  to  be  a vol- 
cano, or  burning  mountain,  and  that  those  were  streams  of  old 
lava,  or  melted  rock,  that  had  burst  from  the  top  of  the 
mountain,  and  flowed  down  the  sides,  only  hardened  by 
cooling,  perhaps  ages  ago.  For  the  rest  of  the  island,  as  Ave 
sailed  in,  it  appeared  green  and  Avooded,  well  enough.  We 
could  see  some  small  savannahs,  or  meadow-lands,  very  fresh 
and  green,  opening  out  among  the  woods : whence  we  judged 
the  place  must  be  furnished  with  fresh  running  water ; or  the 
heat,  for  we  were  now  Avell  within  the  tropics,  would  surely 
have  burned  them  broA\Tn. 

So  strange  a desire  now  possessed  me,  that  I must  needs  go 
and  visit  this  island,  if  it  Avere  possible,  and  explore  some 
of  those  green  valleys,  to  see  what  they  contained,  and  where 
they  led  to.  I wished  also  to  have  a nearer  view  of  the 
mountain,  having  always  taken  much  interest  in  reading  of 
volcanoes,  and  tracing  out  the  forms  of  some  I had  met  Avith 
in  different  parts,  though  they  had  long  ceased  to  burn,  and 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


5 


had  become  overgrown  with  wood.  In  short,  it  was  of  no 
use  for  me  to  reason  against  myself : I was  determined  that 
if  there  should  be  a landing-party  from  the  ship,  go  I would, 
and  see  what  was  to  be  seen. 

Turning  my  glass  from  it  at  length,  when  I had  scanned  it 
over  and  over  again  from  end  to  end,  from  the  top  of  the 
sugar-loaf  to  a reef  of  low  rocks  that  ran  out  south-west 
from  its  base,  over  which  a strong  surf  was  running,  I gave  a 
glance  down  upon  deck.  There  stood  the  captain  in  earnest 
conversation  with  the  first  mate,  of  which  moreTiereafter. 


CHAPTER  II. 

THE  LANDING. 


^0,  when  preparations  were,  making  to  get. 
ready  the  long-boat  for  shore,  coming  down 
upon  deck  again,  1 walked  straightways  to 
the  captain,  where  he  stood  talking  in  a low 
voice  with  the  mate,  and  asked  that  I might 
be  of  the  party  to  land. 

And  here  I must  make  a very  natural  re- 
flection on  the  two  things  which  this  settled  desire  of  mine  may 
be  taken  in  proof  of : as,  firstly,  the  little  foresight  we  can 
have  of  what  is  to  befal  us  ; nay,  sometimes  the  very  moment 
before  it  will  happen  : as  may  be  seen  in  a thousand  unexpected 
turns,  both  for  good  and  ill,  in  the  progress  of  this  changeful 
life.  The  other  is,  though  I considered  it  not  at  the  time,  to  see 
how  the  providence  of  our  heavenly  Father  orders  all  for  the 
best ; overruling,  aye,  the  most  untoward  events,  and  in  the 
way  we  should  least  have  expected  or  (sometimes)  desired, 
to  work  our  good  in  spite  of  ourselves.  Here  was  I,  a 
youngster,  it  might  be  said,  compared  with  many  of  the  crew, 
starting  in  life  with  fairer  prospects  than  several  of  my 
betters  have  done ; and  now,  blind  mortal  that  I was,  I came 
forward  to  get  leave  for  a few  hours  that  was  not  to  expire 
for  many  years,  and  pronounce  against  myself,  with  my  own 
lips,  a sentence  of  banishment  on  a savage  island ! And  yet, 
this  very  thing  that  I was  now  about  to  do  against  myself, 


G 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


as  it  seemed,  was  the  means  of  my  preservation,  together  with 
that  of  others.  For  I make  no  doubt,  had  I remained  in  the 
ship,  both  I and  five 'more  of  us  had  found  a watery,  aye, 
and  a bloody  grave.  She  soon  after  turned  pirate,  as  I have 
related,  with  all  hands  on  board ; and  we,  if  we  had  been 
there,  would  have  had  the  choice  of  joining  them  on  their 
cruise  of  robbery,  or  have  paid  the  forfeit  of  refusing. 

Often,  since  that,  have  I lifted  up  hands  and  eyes  to 
heaven,  even  with  the  want  of  all  things,  and  on  our  desert 
island,  that  I had  not  long  since  been  tied,  neck  and  heels,  with 
a twelve-pound  shot  to  my  feet,  or  sown  up  in  a hammock, 
to  be  heaved  overboard,  or  made  to  walk  the  plank,  as  the 
Spanish  buccaneers  treat  the  prisoners  they  sentence  to 
drowning.  For  all  these  things  I afterwards  represented  to 
my  imagination,  adding  to  it  (though,  you  may  be  sure,  in  a 
secondary  degree)  the  murder  of  Don  Manuel,  Tom  Harvey, 
and  the  rest  who  were  saved  with  myself.  And  this  I used 
as  a sovereign  remedy  against  such  fits  of  dejection,  and 
almost  despair,  as  came  over  me  in  the  course  of  the  years  I 
am  about  to  give  some  account  of ; when  things  were  so  bad 
with  us,  that  w^were  fain  to  bear  up  against  them  by  consi- 
dering how  they  might  have  been  worse. 

But  to  make  this  short,  let  me  come  back  to  the  day  with 
which  our  troubles  began.  When  I asked  to  go  ashore,  I 
was  surprised,  from  some  experience  of  our  captain’s  surly 
temper,  how  readily  he  granted  my  request.  There  was  a 
look  in  his  eye,  and  I did  not  understand  it ; nor  indeed  (and 
still  less)  did  I understand  the  meaning  of  his  words.  “ We 
shall  not  be  long  before  this  island”,  said  he  ; “but  time 
enough  for  you  to  collect  some  of  your  rare  plants  : for  that, 
I judge  is  what  you  are  after ; so  there  need  be  no  hurrying 
back  to  the  ship”. 

By  this,  the  long-boat  was  ready,  and  fitted  with  her  sail 
as  well  as  oars.  While  the  men  were  lowering  down  two  large 
jars  for  fresh  water,  and  stowing  away  our  day’s  rations,  toge- 
ther with  some  fowling-pieces,  two  muskets,  and  ammunition 
(for  we  were  to  be  provided  against  wild  beasts,  as  well  as 
have  means  of  killing  some  luxury  in  the  way  of  an  antelope, 
or  a goat  or  two  ; and  no  small  treat  that  would  be  to  men  who 
had  tasted  nothing  for  some  weeks  but  salt  junk),  I ran  down 
the  companion-ladder  for  Don  Manuel,  our  Spanish  priest,  to 
ask  him  to  come  ashore  and  see  what  the  island  furnished 
in  the  way  of  strange  plants  and  herbs.  I found  him  pre- 
pared ; for  he,  too,  had  spoken  to  the  captain,  and  got  leave 


OWEN  EVx\NSj  ESQ. 


7 


as  readily  as  I.  He  had  -with  him  a large  portfolio  of  sheets 
of  blank  paper,  to  preserve  such  plants  in  as  would  wither  in 
the  hand ; a pruning  knife  to  cut  them ; and  a small  case  of 
writing  materials,  to  note  anything  worthy  of  observation  in 
his  way  of  remark.  These,  with  his  prayer-book  (his  Bre- 
viary, he  called  it),  that  was  scarce  ever  out  of  his  hand ; a 
staff  shod  with  iron,  for  climbing,  or  pushing  through  the 
bush ; and  a large  cloak  with  sleeves,  such  as  he  told  me  the 
priests  of  his  country  wear  on  their  journeys,  made  up  all  his 
preparations. 

For  my  part,  I hastily  laid  hands  on  some  things  I thought 
I should  want ; as,  my  faithful  companion,  the  telescope, 
which  I slung  across  my  shoulders  ; a rifle  that  had  been  my 
father’s,  and  would  carry  a great  distance,  though  now  some- 
what worn ; a bag  of  rifle-balls  and  large  horn  of  powder,  a 
cutlass  or  hanger,  and  a strong,  serviceable  clasp-knife  in  my 
pocket.  This  last,  together  with  a ball  of  twine,  I took  for  the 
sake  of  any  collection  of  plants  I might  be  able  to  make 
during  our  rambles.  I know  not  by  what  providence  it  was, 
but  surely  from  the  whisper  of  some  good  and  friendly  spirit 
in  mine  ear,  that  I handed  down  into  the  boat  my  fishing-rod 
and  tackle : as,  namely,  a leathern  pouch,  containing  two  or 
three  reels  of  strong  fishing-lines,  and  a book  of  artificial  flies 
for  casting  at  salmon  and  trout.  These  I had  myself  care- 
fully tied,  to  beguile  the  tediousness  of  the  voyage,  having 
been  well  used  to  the  fishing  of  the  streams  in  my  native 
Welsh  mountains. 

The  ship  was  by  this  time  hove-to,  a mile  and  a half  from  the 
island ; for  they  were  afraid  to  venture  further  in,  owing  to 
the  many  small  coral-islets,  and  jags  of  rock,  that  lay  dot- 
ting the  sea  all  about,  as  well  as  the  dangerous  reefs,  some 
of  which  we  could  see  beneath  us,  the  water  being  very  clear. 
Into  the  long-boat  we  got ; seven  seamen,  besides  Don  Manuel 
and  myself : pushed  off  at  once,  and  spread  our  sail,  which 
was  of  the  kind  they  call  a shoulder-of-mutton  sail.  The  wind 
became  less  steady  as  we  neared  the  shore ; and  indeed  there 
came,  now  and  then,  little  puffs  or  flaws  of  wind  from  the 
valleys,  that  were  very  refreshing;  and  we  could  perceive 
the  moist,  fresh  scent  of  the  trees  cast  to  seaward,  so  delight- 
ful as  none  can  tell  who  have  never  known  a long  sea  voyage. 

And  now  we  had  some  ado  to  keep  clear  of  the  reefs, 
which  seemed  to  run  out  in  all  directions  from  this  island. 
’T  is  true,  that  which  I had  observed  from  the  ship’s  top 
appeared  the  most  considerable  and  dangerous,  and  the  surf 


8 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


beat  over  it  violently,  though  there  was  so  little  wind  stir- 
ring. Yet  1 noticed  others  too,  some  above  the  water  and 
more  beneath,  so  that  we  grounded  once  or  twice,  and  had 
like  to  have  been  stopped  altogether. 

We  were  forced  to  take  down  our  sail,  and  trust  to  our 
oars,  that  the  boat  might  answer  more  readily  to  her  helm. 
As  I looked  over  the  gunwale  upon  the  reefs  below  (the  water 
being,  as  I said,  exceedingly  clear),  they  seemed  to  be  of  two 
kinds,  which  I could  distinguish  from  each  other.  The  one 
darker,  and  not  coming  so  near  the  level  of  the  sea ; and 
these  stretched  away  in  lines,  some  very  broad,  from  the 
island.  This  kind  I took  to  be  streams  of  rock,  once  melted, 
and  flowing  down,  ages  ago,  from  the  top  of  the  sugar-loaf 
cone : for  that,  I felt  sure,  was  an  old  burning  mountain, 
though  its  fires  had  been  quenched,  aye,  perhaps  some  hun- 
dreds of  years,  or  more.  The  other  sort  of  reefs  looked  as  if 
they  grew  up  from  the  first  kind,  and  these  came  near  to  the 
surface,  and  sometimes  quite,  but  never  much  above  it.  Some 
were  bright  in  colour,  both  white  and  red,  or  yellow,  by  which, 
and  their  growth,  I knew  them  for  rocks  of  coral.  In  places, 
they  branched  out  under  the  sea,  like  the  specimens  that 
are  brought  home  to  Europe,  only  much  larger : others  were 
so  decked  and  grown  over  with  sea- weeds,  such  as  they  have 
in  the  tropics,  that  there  were,  I may  say,  two  whole  forests 
growing  under  us,  plaiiily  to  be  seen  through  the  water,  the 
forest  of  rock  and  the  forest  of  weeds. 

But  the  end  of  all  this  was,  we  had  a difficult  passage 
towards  land ; and  were  glad  enough  to  find,  after  some 
trials,  a sort  of  winding  channel,  between  two  of  the  dark 
ledges  of  rock  that  came  shelving  down  from  the  mountain, 
and  dipped  at  an  angle  quite  into  the  sea.  These  rocky 
walls  (for  they  stood  pretty  high)  sheltered  us  from  the  surf, 
which  we  heard  breaking  loud  on  other  parts  of  the  shore. 
Only,  indeed,  a roller,  as  they  call  it,  came  once  and  again 
after  us  from  the  open  sea,  and  caught  the  boat’s  stern  with 
some  violence ; sending  us  along  the  channel  we  had  found, 
swifter  than  we  would.  And,  had  not  our  steersman  been  a 
nimble  fellow,  and  well  up  to  his  business,  we  had  most 
likely  been  staved  against  the  rocks  before  we  got  further  on 
our  adventures.  This  afforded  him  ground,  with  two  other 
of  the  men,  to  swear  he  would  not  take  the  boat  further  than 
a corner  which  we  turned  just  after  it  happened.  Here  we 
found  a little  natural  harbour,  worn  in  the  rock,  as  it  seemed, 1 
by  the  high  tides,  when  the  sea  was  swollen  by  the  wind 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


9 


from  south-by-west.  These  men  now  said,  plain  and  rough, 
they  were  in  trust  of  the  boat,  and  would  not  risk  staving 
her,  or  getting  her  back  to  the  ship  in  bad  condition.  They 
bade  us  take  out  our  fowling-pieces,  with  the  jars  for  fresh 
water ; and  explore  the  island  as  much  as  we  would,  if  only 
we  might  reach  the  ship  again  by  the  time  all  hands  were 
piped  to  hammocks.  For  themselves,  they  said,  they  were 
content  to  stay  there  with  the  boat,  or  ramble  about  the 
rocks,  and  try  their  luck  with  fishing  (for  they  had  brought 
some  reels  with  them,  as  well  as  tinder  to  strike  a light),  or 
to  catch  fresh  crabs  and  other  shell-fish,  enough  to  make  a 
broil  of,  in  the  pools  below  high-water  mark. 

I make  no  doubt,  in  looking  back  upon  all  this,  that  they 
parted  thus  readily  with  the  fire  arms,  to  take  away  any  suspi- 
cions we  might  have  of  what  they  intended.  Nor  were  we, 
on  our  side  (we,  I mean,  who  landed  and  left  the  three  men 
there)  so  simple  as  would  appear  at  first  sight : for  their  pro- 
posal came  so  reasonable,  and  was  made  with  such  seamanlike 
frankness,  that  no  ground  appeared  to  entertain  any  thoughts 
against  them.  However  ; be  it  that  we  were  wise  or  foolish 
(for ’t  is  of  small  use  now  to  determine),  sure  I am  we  were 
heartily  glad  to  find  our  feet,  on  land,  and  thought  of  little 
else.  As  to  the  priest,  he  did  not  half  understand  what  they 
said,  so  could  make  no  great  objection.  For  though  he  spoke 
English  pretty  well,  yet  it  was  like  one  who  had  learned  it 
out  of  books,  as  indeed  (he  told  me  afterwards)  was  the  case. 
And  there  were  many  of  the  sea-phrases  in  use  among  the 
crew  which,  to  be  sure,  were  not  found  in  his  books  : so  that 
he,  who  of  the  whole  party  was  like  to  have  made  a calm 
judgment  on  our  proceeding,  chanced  to  be  the  one  who 
least  understood  it. 

Well,  we  scrambled  up  the  rocks,  as  best  we  might;  not 
without  slips  and  bruises,  for  the  sea- weed  was  thickly  grown 
hereabout,  and  slippery  as  ice.  It  was  well  for  us  we  escaped 
without  sprains,  or  worse,  which  might,  as  we  afterwards 
found  ourselves,  have  proved  a serious  matter  to  us.  But 
when  we  got  above  high-water  mark  (and  that  we  did 
with  no  small  trouble),  our  travelling  was  easier,  upon  one 
of  those  streaks  or  pathways  of  rock  leading  up  towards  the 
mountain : like  a sort  of  road  up-hill,  only  rough  on  the  sur- 
face, so  that  soon  it  would  have  worn  our  shoes. 

Before  we  left  the  little  harbour  where  the  boat  lay,  one  of 
the  three  men  came  up  with  our  fowling-pieces : as  to  my 
rifle,  I managed  to  carry  that  with  me.  He  also  threw  us 


10 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


the  ends  of  two  ropes  worked  into  a noose,  and  passed  round 
each  of  the  water -jars,  so  that  we  easily  hauled  these  jars  up 
the  rock  after  us.  Then  they  all  bade  us  not  be  overtaken 
by  night  on  the  island,  and  promised  (with  many  oaths)  they 
would  stay  for  us  where  they  were.  So  we  turned  away 
with  light  hearts  for  our  expedition — and  never  saw  them 
on  shore  again. 


*> 


CHAPTER  III, 

THE  START  FOR  A RAMBLE. 

WENTY  steps,  or  thereabouts,  brought  us  off 
this  rough  rock ; and  then  we  found  ourselves 
treading  over  a thick,  soft  carpet  of  mossy 
meadow,  kept  fresh  by  a little  runnel  of  pure, 
sweet  water,  that  found  its  way  down  to 
the  sea  through  the  same  shaded  valley  that 
was  leading  us  up  into  the  interior  of  the 
island.  Over  our  heads,  the  trees  arched  and  met  one  an- 
other, lacing  their  branches  across,  to  form  a natural  bower, 
which  the  rays  of  the  sun  could  not  penetrate,  or  very  dimly. 
And  many  of  them  were  such  trees  as  we  had  never  seen, 
though  I had  read  of  them  often  ; with  ferns  and  reeds,  from 
ten  to  eighteen  feet  high.  For,  as  we  had  come  from  a colder 
latitude,  and  had  not  touched  land  before,  this  was  our  first 
acquaintance  with  the  vegetation  of  the  tropics. 

The  change  from  our  confinement  on  ship-board,  together 
with  the  freshness  and  perfume  of  the  avenue  through  which 
our  line  of  march  lay,  and  which  you  might  have  supposed 
was  planted  and  kept  in  order  on  purpose  for  our  benefit, 
with  the  knowledge,  too,  that  we  had  some  hours  before  us 
on  this  delightful  island  (so  it  now  seemed)  to  do  what  we 
would  and  range  where  we  pleased ; all  these  things  did  so 
raise  our  spirits,  that  I,  for  my  part,  could  scarce  keep  from 
racing  along  the  avenue:  and  Harvey  and  another  of  the 
seamen  broke  out  into  singing  snatches  of  their  rude  sea- 
songs.  Even  Don  Manuel  appeared  more  excited  than  was 
common  with  him : and  the  whole  party  kept  laughing  and 
talking,  some  saying  one  thing,  some  another,  but  all  merry 
and  contented : till  on  a sudden  I stopped,  and  bade  them 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


11 


remember, we  were  all  in  an  unknown  land,  and  knew  not, 
as  yet,  what  we  might  have  to  encounter.  It  might,  I said,  be 
savages,  or  it  might  be  wild  beasts.  “ Please  God,  it  may  be 
neither”,  said  the  priest,  and  crossed  himself.  “I  hope  so 
too,  sir”,  added  I ; “ but  no  one  of  us  can  tell : and  the  part 
of  prudence  is,  to  guard  against  whatever  may  come”. 

So  we  agreed  to  keep  all  close  together,  and  march  in 
some  sort  of  order.  I volunteered  to  lead  the  vanguard,  and 
told  them  the  reason ; not  that  I claimed  any  authority  over 
them,  (men  being  jealous  enough  about  that,  where  each 
reckoned  himself  as  good  as  his  fellow),  but  because  I was 
better  armed  with  my  rifle,  and  wished  to  take  a full  share 
of  the  danger,  whatever  it  might  be.  After  me,  came  the 
three  men  with  fowling-pieces : the  muskets  had  been  left 
in  the  boat,  as  seemed  only  reasonable,  for  defence  of  those 
who  stayed  in  her. 

And  here  is  a place,  as  good  as  any,  for  giving  a list  of  our 
party  as  we  stood  there,  and  loaded  our  arms  for  our  ramble 
up^;the  country. 

First,  I place  Tom  Harvey  at  the  head  of  the  list ; for  a 
more  active,  honest,  cheerful  fellow  I believe  never  sailed. 
He  became  my  right-hand  man,  always  ready  to  second  me 
in  whatever  was  for  good  order  and  good  feeling  among  our 
party. 

Then  comes  Edward  Hilton ; a well-disposed  lad  enough 
in  himself,  but  easily  led  by  others  of  a firmer  character 
than  he ; and  one  that  gave  me  some  trouble  afterwards, 
on  that  very  score. 

These  two  completed,  in  my  mind,  the  brighter  side  of  the 
picture : for  as  to  the  other  couple  of  seamen,  Kichard 
Prodgers,  and  Harry  Gill,  I had  not  so  much  trust  in  them ; 
though  indeed  they  were  not  quite  the  black  sheep  of  the 
vessel’s  crew,  neither. 

For  Don  Manuel,  I knew  not  as  yet  what  place  to  give 
him  in  my  thoughts.  As  I have  said,  he  was  a Catholic 
priest,  and  I no  Catholic  at  all.  What  I had  seen  of  him 
was  quiet  and  harmless  : but  I had  my  opinion  still  to  form ; 
and,  on  the  whole,  rather  a prejudice  against  him,  except 
when  we  conversed  on  the  subjects  we  had  in  common, 
botany  and  medicine. 

Lastly,  as  to  the  three  we  had  left  in  the  boat,  they  were 
among  the  very  worst  of  the.  crew,  though  the  most  in  the 
captain’s  confidence : and  I was  heartily  glad  when  I found 
they  were  to  be  none  of  our  party. 


12 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


But  now,  our  first  care  was  to  fill  the  jars  with  fresh  water : 
and  this  was  soon  done,  by  placing  them  in  the  channel  of 
the  little  stream  that  was  running  swiftly  by  us.  We 
scooped  out  with  our  hands  so  much  of  its  bed  as  to  sink 
them  to  half  their  depth  in  the  gravel  and  stones ; then  built 
up  the  stones  we  had  displaced,  into  a kind  of  wall,  or  dyke, 
on  both  sides  of  the  jars,  till  the  water  rose  towards  their 
brims.  So  we  left  them  ; knowing  they  would  both  be  filled 
within  a quarter  of  an  hour. 

After  this,  the  important  matter  was,  to  decide  upon  the 
plan  of  our  campaign.  I summoned  a council  of  war ; told 
them,  as  our  time  was  not  long  (about  four  or  five  hours, 
at  the  most,  for  it  was  now  past  three),  we  should  consider 
how  best  to  explore  the  island,  and  the  mountain,  which 
seemed  the  most  remarkable  part  of  it,  while  our  leave  of 
absence  lasted.  That  we  had  come  for  a ramble,  and  a ram- 
ble we  would  have ; for  I supposed  none  of  them  wished  to 
lie  down  under  the  trees,  and  sleep  away  their  time — a thing 
they  might  do  as  well  under  the  shade  of  a sail  on  board 
ship.  At  this  they  all  laughed,  and  declared  for  an  active 
bout  of  it  till  they  must  go  aboard  again.  Then,  said  I,  my 
proposal  is,  to  make  a circuit  under  the  base  of  yonder 
mountain,  following  its  bend,  but  still  keeping  in  the  valley, 
for  plants  and  game.  In  this  we  may  spend  a couple  of  hours, 
or  thereabouts : then  double  back,  and  return  to  this  spot  over 
a part  of  the  mountain  itself,  yet  not  to  ascend  too  high. 
Our  return  will  take  from  two  hours  and  a half  to  three 
hours,  allowing  for  the  ruggedness  of  the  travelling  we  may 
expect  to  find  on  the  mountain.  And  thus,  what  with  our 
progress  through  the  lowlands,  what  with  the  elevation  of 
our  homeward  journey,  we  shall  have  seen  what  the  island 
produces,  had  a view  of  both  sides  of  it  (for  to  all  appearance 
it  cannot  extend  far  beyond  the  mountain),  and  may  chance 
to  meet  with  some  wild  game  on  the  way. 

Such  was  my  plan,  and  I heard  no  voice  raised  against  it. 
Indeed,  as  is  often  to  be  remarked,  where  there  is  no  point 
started  which  touches  their  self-love,  or  interest,  the  nine- 
tenths  of  mankind  are  only  too  glad  to  have  their  plans  laid 
down  for  them,  or  anything  to  save  them  the  trouble  of 
thinking  for  themselves.  This  was  just  the  case  now.  No 
one  amongst  us  had  anything  better  to  propose,  so  they  all 
agreed,  and  we  started.  First,  I led  the  way,  by  general 
consent]:  my  rifle  ready  slung  for  immediate  use,  and  my 
hanger  at  my  side.  Next,  very  naturally,  for  we  had  our 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


13 


specimens  to  collect,,  and  were  the  most  suited  companions, 
came  the  Spanish  priest,  armed  with  such  a staff’  as  they  use 
in  going  over  the  Alps,  and  his  long  cloak  gathered  over  his 
shoulders  for  more  easy  walking.  Then  Prodgers,  Harvey, 
and  Gill,  with  their  fowling-pieces.  Lastly,  Ned  Hilton 
brought  up  the  rear  with  a marlin-spike  which  he  had 
borrowed  out  of  the  boat ; for,  being  an  easy  fellow,  he  let 
himself  be  over-persuaded  by  the  rest,  though  I afterwards 
found  he  could  shoot  with  the  best  of  them,  and  indeed  better 
than  Prodgers,  by  a good  deal.  However,  in  this  world 
(we  all  know),  things  are  carried  away,  not  by  the  most  able, 
but  by  the  most  determined,  to  use  them. 


CHAPTER  IV. 


THE  DESERTION. 

5E  struck  up,  then,  towards  the  inland ; and  at 
first  we  followed  the  channel  of  this  stream, 
which  led  us  up  a ground  that  sloped  away 
towards  the  base  of  the  mountain.  Here 
was  a kind  of  mossy  lane,  over-arched  and 
shaded  by  groves  of  various  trees,  as  bana- 
nas, plantains,  pepul,  banians,  cocoa-nuts, 
and  palm  trees  of  several  kinds,  some  very  tall  and  feathery, 
others  with  a broad  spreading  leaf,  such  as  they  use  to 
thatch  their  houses  in  the  Havannahs  and  Philippine  Islands. 
It  was,  indeed,  a sort  of  alley  that  any  rich  owner  in 
those  plantations  would  give  a good  deal  to  have  near  his 
house ; with  a swift  brook  leaping,  now  to  this  side,  now 
to  that,  through  all  its  length ; which  gathered  itself  up  in 
little  pools  of  still  water,  or  fell  over  the  stones  with  a noise 
that  sounded  refreshing  in  the  great  heat  of  the  day. 

We  determined  not  to  part  company  with  this  stream,  so 
long  as  it  did  not  take  us  out  of  our  course ; for  though  at 
times  we  had  to  climb  over  rough  uneven  ground,  and  swing 
ourselves  round  the  roots  of  such  trees  as  came  too  near  the 
brink,  as  many  times,  indeed,  they  did  quite  overhang  it,  yet 
we  considered  that  this  way  of  travelling  was  easier  than 


14 


TIIE  ADVENTURES  OF 


to  force  ourselves  through  the  close  thicket  on  either  side, 
where  we  might  be  torn  by  the  prickly  shrubs  for  our  pains, 
and  less  able  for  defence  against  a sudden  enemy. 

For  my  own  part,  I was  on  the  look-out  for  an  occasion  of 
getting  up  to  the  higher  ground,  that  so  we  might  be  better 
judges  of  the  whole  extent  of  the  island,  I believe  it  was 
not  laid  down  on  any  of  the  ship’s  charts  : and  this,  I remark 
by  the  way,  appeared  afterwards  to  be  the  reason  why  Hop- 
kins, the  captain,  determined  with  the  mate  to  leave  us  on  it : 
that  he  might  escape  being  tried  for  our  murder,  yet  have  us 
safe  where  we  had  little  chance  of  being  picked  off  again,  to 
give  evidence  against  him  for  his  villainy. 

Now,  however,  suspecting  no  evil,  and  all  in  the  gayest 
mood,  we  judged  ourselves  to  be  the  first  discoverers  of  the 
place ; and  Hilton,  taking  off  his  handkerchief  and  tying  it  to 
the  top  of  his  pike,  struck  that  into  the  soil,  and  took  possession 
(he  said)  of  the  island  in  King  George’s  name.  This  made  us 
laugh  ; as,  indeed,  a little  thing  would  have  made  us  laugh  on 
that  holiday  of  ours.  So,  following  it  up,  we  fell  into  some 
kindly  contention  how  to  name  our  new-discovered  island. 

I proposed  it  should  be  called  Manuel’s  Island,  out  of 
compliment  to  the  priest,  whom,  as  being  of  another  nation, 
we  might  consider  a sort  of  guest,  claiming  hospitality  on 
our  ground.  But  I found  at  once,  by  the  men’s  looks,  this 
was  a notion  they  misliked  altogether,  though  none  spoke, 
except  Don  Manuel  himself.  And  he  at  once  thanked 
me,  with  that  courtesy  which  belongs  to  his  nation,  wherein 
they  are  rivalled  by  few,  I believe,  among  all  people  in  the 
world.  “ Senor”,  says  he,  (that  was  his  Spanish  way  of  ex- 
pressing Sir,)  with  a manner  between  jest  and  earnest,  “you 
are  too  good  to  think  of  me  on  such  an  occasion.  A poor 
priest  has  no  claim  or  title  to  give  his  name  to  any  spot  on 
this  great  earth : he  is  called  to  spend  his  strength,  or  shed 
his  blood,  wherever  his  Master  sends  him ; ’t  is  quite  enough”, 
added  he,  raising  his  looks,  “if  his  name  be  written  in  heaven”. 

“ But”,  continued  the  priest,  and  his  manner  as  he  spoke 
made  us  all  attend ; it  was  so  earnest  and  natural,  withal  so 
courteous  to  each,  that  the  rough  seamen  listened  to  him  as 
if  he  had  dropped  among  them  from  the  trees,  or  the  skies  : — 
“ whether,”  says  he,  “ we  are  really  the  first  who  have  set  foot 
on  this  place  or  no,  it  must  be  acknowledged  on  all  hands 
that  we  have  been  led  hither  by  the  good  providence  of  God”.  ‘ 
And  here  he  bowed  his  head,  lifting  his  hat  as  he  spoke.  “ So 
I propose,  gentlemen,  that  in  honour  of  Him  who  created  us 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


15 


all,  and  has  preserved  us  safe  to  this  moment,  we  call  the 
island  after  some  of  the  great  truths  of  that  religion  He  has 
revealed.  And  surely”,  said  he,  looking  round  on  us  with 
a cheerful  smile,  “ we  may  find  something  sacred  in  which 
we  can  all  agree,  whereby  to  christen  the  place  ?” 

When  he  had  thus  expressed  himself,  I must  candidly  own, 
the  men  looked  at  one  another  as  if  they  had  never  heard 
such  a proposal  before,  and  what  the  priest  said  was  the  very 
last  thing  in  their  thoughts.  I was  taken  aback,  indeed,  at 
the  idea  of  it ; for  at  that  time  I must  confess  myself  to  have 
been  without  any  serious  thought  of  religion  at  all : and  did  not 
feel  to  like  the  priest  more  for  having  proposed  this. 

“Well,  Senores”,  said  he,  observing  our  looks,  as  we  all 
moved  onward  again,  “ among  my  countrymen,  as  you  have 
known  in  the  course  of  your  voyages,  a discovery  like  this 
would  be  marked  by  some  title  borrowed  from  the  gospel, 
and  the  history  of  the  Catholic  Church.  We  should  call 
the  island  after  the  Incarnation  of  the  Son  of  God,  that 
is,  the  Annunciation ; or  in  honour  of  the  Conception  of  His 
most  holy  Mother ; or  after  all  the  saints  ; or  the  True  Cross, 
or  some  special  saint,  Saint  Francis,  Saint  Dominic,  Saint 
Thomas ; and  these  names,  with  many  like  them,  are  familiar 
to  those  of  you  who  have  touched  at  the  Spanish  settlements. 
Some  of  those  titles  could  not  be  expected  in  this  case,  since 
you,  Senores,  do  not  admit  the  thoughts  which  they  express : 
but  why  should  we  not  call  the  place  the  Isle  of  the  Resur- 
rection  ?” 

“And  I propose”,  quoth  Prodgers,  breaking  in  roughly, 
“ that  we  call  it  Wo  Mans  Land ; for  it  belongs  to  us  all 
equally,  and ’t  is  our  property,  until  the  ship  fires  the  even- 
ing gun”. 

“Or  Gill’s  Country”,  said  Harry  Gill,  “for  I first  jumped 
ashore,  and  set  my  feet  on  the  island”. 

“ Aye,  and  measured  it  too”,  remarked  Hilton,  “ for  I saw 
you  sprawling  at  full  length  among  the  sea-weed”. 

So,  with  one  discourse  or  another,  but  all  good-humoured, 
we  accomplished  our  ramble  for  the  two  hours  we  had  allowed 
ourselves.  We  saw  game  in  plenty  ; chiefly  of  the  hare  kind, 
and  a species  of  peccary  or  wild  hog,  with  here  and  there  an 
antelope,  rushing  through  the  thicket  as  we  drew  near.  But 
we  would  not  load  ourselves  with  them  at  that  time,  trusting 
to  a shot  or  two  on  our  return  to  the  boat.  Of  birds  we  saw 
not  many,  except  some  flights  of  macaws  and  parrots,  very 
brilliant  in  colour,  and  noisy,  that  flew  over  our  heads. 


16 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


But  the  wood  now  grew  so  thick  and  pathless,  that  we  nearly 
lost  our  reckoning ; and  quite  lost  our  companion,  the  stream, 
though  we  had  tasted  of  it  several  times  to  slake  our  thirst  on 
this  hot,  weary  march,  for  so  it  now  became  to  us.  Struggling 
hard,  we  scrambled  by  main  force  out  of  this  wood ; and  found, 
by  the  rise,  we  were  on  the  slope  of  the  mountain,  turning  to 
our  left  hand  from  the  direction  of  our  first  entrance. 

At  this  point  we  cried  a halt ; and  sitting  down,  took  out 
what  few  provisions  we  had  brought  with  us,  which  we  divided 
equally  among  our  number,  and  made  a meal  that  was  too 
scanty  to  be  a long  one. 

When  our  repast  was  finished,  11  Now,  my  friends”,  said  I, 
“ a short  climb  will  take  us  high  enough  to  afford  a clear 
view  on  both  sides ; and  we  shall  see  out  to  the  leeward  of 
this  island : then  we  must  push  on  smartly  for  the  boat,  lest 
we  lose  our  way  in  the  dark.  Remember  how  suddenly  night 
comes  on  in  these  latitudes”.  I also  told  them,  though  we 
had  hitherto  reserved  our  fire,  yet  (as  we  had  seen  no  sign  of 
savages,  but  plenty  of  game),  when  once  our  faces  were 
turned  homewards,  or  shipwards  rather,  we  would  let  fly  at 
anything  living  that  came  in  our  way. 

This  being  agreed  to,  we  began  the  ascent ; and  disen- 
tangling ourselves  from  the  last  of  the  brushwood,  soon  found 
we  were  on  the  mountain  indeed : for  it  cost  us  some  hard 
climbing,  this  side  being  the  steepest,  as  we  afterwards  found. 
The  trees  here  were  almost  as  close  as  the  thicket  below,  so 
that  we  partly  lost  our  way  ; and  bending  too  much  back  to- 
wards the  shore,  we  had,  not  a view  of  the  further  side  of 
the  island,  but  a sight  that  did  not  leave  our  eyes  (our  mind’s 
eye , I mean)  for  months,  and  decided  our  fate  for  years. 

For  we  came  at  once  on  a spot  of  clearer  ground,  with  an 
opening  left  in  the  trees,  that  looked  straight  out  to  seaward. 
Whether  it  had  been  so  cleared  by  some  violent  gust  of  wind, 
or  other  natural  cause,  I know  not ; but  we  now  saw,  in  the 
very  middle  of  the  view,  the  long-boat,  using  both  oars  and 
sail,  just  within  a few  strokes  of  the  ship ; then  the  men  we 
left  in  her,  clambering  up  the  vessel’s  sides,  and  at  once 
all  sails  set  for  standing  out  to  sea. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


17 


CHAPTER  V. 


IT  MIGHT  HAVE  BEEN  WORSE. 

you  have  seen  any  one  on  whom  a sudden, 
great  misfortune  has  fallen,  in  the  first  trans- 
ports of  his  grief  and  raging  despair,  trample 
the  ground,  tear  his  hair  wildly,  fling  his 
clenched  hands  abroad,  seek  for  some  one  on 
whom  to  revenge  himself,  and  by  a thousand 
violent  actions  give  vent  to  the  extremity  of 
his  passionate  sorrow,  you  may  have  some  picture  of  the  con- 
duct of  these  men  and  myself,  when  this  most  woeful  sight 
burst  on  us.  We  ran  about,  up  and  down  the  rocks,  stamp- 
ing, yelling  like  madmen  out  of  Bedlam  *.  we  glared  at  each 
other  like  wild  beasts ; and  I know  not  why  some  of  us  did 
not  fling  ourselves  down  the  sides  of  the  mountain,  in  bitter 
grief,  to  die  in  the  gullies  below. 

Then,  at  times  again  we  would  pause,  and  look  eagerly 
towards  the  ship,  as  fain  to  persuade  ourselves  that  all  was 
but  a rude  sailor’s  jest,  intended  merely  to  fright  us.  We  said 
to  one  another,  fiercely,  with  vehemence,  trying  to  believe 
what  we  said,  that  we  should  see  the  long-boat  with  her  sail 
set,  tacking  back  for  us  against  the  breeze,  which  now  blew 

2 


18 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


off  shore.  But  truly,  we  might  have  waited  long  for  such  a 
chance  ; and  all  this  dreadful  suspense  was  ended  when  we 
saw  the  ship  fill  her  sails,  and  stand  steadily  off  on  her  former 
course.  At  the  moment  she  veered  we  saw  a puff  of  smoke ; 
and  then  came  the  report  of  one  of  her  guns,  fired  wantonly 
by  way  of  heaping  insult  on  our  wretchedness  ; which  gave  us 
to  understand,  all  hope  was  over  for  us.  At  the  sight  of 
such  a token  of  savage  cruelty  on  the  part  of  the  crew,  the 
men  broke  out  anew  into  such  curses,  ravings,  and  passionate 
laments,  as  were  more  fit  for  those  transported  beside  them- 
selves, than  for  reasonable  creatures,  who  should  gather  their 
spirits  and  courage  to  make  the  best  of  a bad  case. 

But  indeed  reason  was,  at  that  time,  the  last  thing  to  be 
found  among  us ; and  we  did  but  add  to  each  other’s  grief : 
for  when  one,  exhausted  by  his  violence,  would  be  silent  for 
a while,  another  would  take  it  up,  as  though  he  had  never 
lamented  before ; and  thus  set  all  off  again  by  the  contagion 
of  his  voice  and  looks.  So  that  I believe  there  has  seldom 
been  shown  a more  lively  image  of  the  rage  and  despairing 
lamentations  of  those  who  are  lost  for  ever,  than  in  us  five 
who  then  found  ourselves  left  on  the  island. 

I say,  us  five ; for  we  had  no  thought  of  the  priest  all  this 
while,  nor  leisure  so  much  as  to  observe  how  he  bore  himself 
in  the  common  misfortune  that  involved  us.  We  knew  what 
we  had  lost,  and  were  fully  occupied  with  that : as  for  him, 
we  knew  not,  and  cared  not,  either  what  he  had  lost,  or  what 
he  possessed.  He  had  been  our  companion  in  our  ramble, 
and  pleasant  enough  we  had  found  him  ; but  when  anything 
more  than  a mere  pastime  engaged  us,  we  turned  inward  on 
ourselves,  or  looked  on  each  other  only,  thinking  no  more 
about  him  than  if  he  inhabited  another  world,  or  (to  come 
closer),  another  island  of  desolation. 

At  length,  wearied  out  with  our  long  march,  and  ex- 
hausted by  all  this  raving,  partly  too  by  want  of  food,  we 
sank  into  a kind  of  stupid  and  settled  despair,  casting  our- 
selves down  on  the  place  where  we  had  stood.  There  would 
one  seaman  lie,  burying  his  face  in  his  hands,  and  weeping 
even  like  a child.  Another  would  sit,  clasping  his  knees,  and 
turning  his  face  towards  heaven,  but  without  uttering  a 
prayer.  A third  man,  with  his  teeth  set,  and  his  features 
awry,  more  like  a savage  or  a maniac,  would  watch  the  sails 
of  the  ship,  as  they  came  between  us  and  the  setting  sun ; 
then  shake  his  clenched  hand  at  her  while  she  glided  away, 
muttering  somewhat  most  dreadful  to  listen  to.  As  forme,  I 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


19 


cannot  indeed  boast  that  my  angry  passions  were  more  under 
command  than  theirs,  or  much  more,  to  signify ; yet  reason 
sooner  came  to  the  rescue  with  me,  and  I saw  the  need  of 
not  giving  way,  but  thinking  for  the  rest.  While  I sat,  and 
rested  my  head  on  my  hand,  I began  to  cast  about  with 
myself  what  was  best  to  advise  under  our  unhappy  con- 
dition. After  a while,  chancing  to  turn  my  eyes  aside,  I 
noticed  Don  Manuel,  some  thirty  paces  from  us,  kneeling 
on  the  rock,  with  his  hands  clasped ; and  he  was  plainly  deep 
in  prayer. 

I watched  him  for  some  minutes ; but  he  did  not  stir,  nor 
indeed  did  he  see  me  at  all.  Then  I rose,  and  went  softly  to 
him,  touching  him  on  the  shoulder.  As  he  looked  up,  I 
could  perceive  the  traces  of  tears  on  his  cheeks ; this,  I now 
confess,  was  what  first  disposed  me  more  kindly  towards  him, 
to  see  him  grieve  in  our  common  misfortune,  though  he  had 
taken  it  to  heart  in  so  different  a way  from  the  rest. 

u Sir”,  said  I,  with  as  much  calmness  as  I could,  “ it  be- 
hoves us,  in  these  unhappy  affairs,  to  consult  as  well  for  our- 
selves as  for  those  who  are  nearly  beside  their  wits  with 
grief,  or  rage,  which  you  will : and,  as  night  will  soon  come 
upon  us,  no  time  is  to  be  lost  in  preparing  (since  needs  we 
must)  to  bivouack  upon  this  island”. 

He  rose  at  once,  looked  at  me  in  a friendly  way ; then, 
with  the  manner  of  a prince,  yet  quite  simple  and  humble  too, 
he  motioned  me  to  a seat  beside  him  on  the  rock,  and  taking 
my  hand  with  much  kindness,  said  : 

“ Senor,  we  have  all  suffered  a great  misfortune  together ; 
or  rather  let  me  say”,  and  he  crossed  himself  devoutly,  u we 
have  been  the  objects  of  a great  deliverance.  Nothing  of 
this  has  taken  me  entirely  by  surprise  : for  I have,  this  while 
past,  seen  somewhat  to  be  wrong  with  the  crew,  and  that 
they  would  soon  be  rid  of  some  they  had  on  board.  So  we 
will  give  thanks  to  God,  and  bear  our  lot  with  equal  mind. 
We  are,  indeed,  ill  provided  even  with  things  necessary  to 
continue  our  lives  on  this  place  ; but,  though  I much  desired 
to  give  you  a hint  before  leaving  the  ship,  I could  neither  do 
that  without  being  suspected  by  the  captain,  nor  myself  take 
anything  away  with  me.  True,  I have  little  in  this  world 
but  my  cloak  and  a few  books,  for  which,  I confess,  I grieve  ; 
yet  I grieve  more  for  you.  But  Providence  has  shielded  us 
hitherto,  and  will  shield  us  still”. 

<£  Courage”,  then  said  he,  rising,  and  still  holding  my  hand ; 
“ let  us  go  to  these  poor  men  ; let  us  try  to  console  them,  and 
make  our  preparations  all  together”. 


20 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


So,  stepping  to  the  rest,  he  addressed  them  in  a few 
simple  words.  He  was  sure  (he  said),  as  brave  seamen,  they 
would  bear  up  against  their  misfortune : that  when  a sailor 
leaves  port,  he  commits  himself  to  wind  and  weather,  and  a 
thousand  chances ; he  is  never  certain  how  he  will  live,  nor 
how  die,  nor  where  he  will  be  buried.  But  we  had  reason,  he 
said,  to  be  thankful  to  God  that  our  lot  was  not  a worse  one. 
We  might  have  been  boarded  by  pirates,  massacred,  or  sold 
as  slaves,  or  kidnapped  for  the  plantations;  the  ship  might  have 
been  burnt  at  sea,  and  we  swamped  in  the  boats,  or  perish- 
ing of  hunger.  W e might  all  have  foundered  together  in  deep 
water,  or  suffered  shipwreck,  and  been  cast  by  the  fury  of 
the  waves  on  some  inhospitable  coast  with  nothing  in  our 
hands,  and  perhaps  a defenceless  prey  to  cannibal  savages. 
It  was  the  part  of  brave  men  therefore  not  to  be  cast  down 
so  long  as  a hope  remained  of  repairing  their  fortunes  ; that 
the  preservation  of  our  lives  was  an  instinct  implanted  in  us 
by  the  Author  of  our  being ; and  finally,  that  our  business  for 
the  moment  was,  to  establish  ourselves  in  safety  for  the  night 
upon  this  island,  and  leave  all  further  deliberation  for  the 
morrow. 

In  short,  though  I do  not  pretend  that  he  expressed  himself 
in  these  terms  with  great  readiness,  seeing  he  was  forced  to 
translate  his  thoughts  into  our  language ; yet  he  made  us  so 
moving  a little  discourse,  and  so  persuasive,  partly  from  the 
words  themselves,  partly  from  his  manner  of  delivering  them, 
that  it  was  plain  to  see  the  poor  men  were  strengthened  and 
encouraged  by  it  to  a great  degree.  And  having  so  far 
succeeded,  he  directed  them  to  search  in  the  thickets  for  the 
driest  and  fittest  brushwood  to  kindle  a fire.  With  the  help 
of  my  hanger  and  the  seamen’s  clasp-knives,  it  was  soon  done 
as  he  advised ; and  a space  found  on  the  rock,  that  seemed  like 
a natural  hearth,  hollowed  by  no  hand  of  man  into  a kind  of 
shallow  basin.  This  we  cleared  of  its  earth  and  moss,  and 
disposed  our  brushwood  there  for  our  bonfire.  We  laid  aside 
another  large  heap  of  brush,  and  a quantity  of  dry  turf, 
which  we  pulled  up  in  large  clods  from  the  soil,  enough 
altogether  to  feed  our  fire  through  the  few  hours  of  dark. 
Then,  by  Don  Manuel’s  advice,  each  one  looked  carefully  to 
the  priming  of  his  piece,  and  freshened  it,  lest  the  powder 
might  take  injury  by  the  night  dews,  and  so  render  us  defence- 
less against  any  attack.  For  the  same  reason,  they  were 
reminded  to  keep  the  locks  of  their  fowling-pieces  carefully 
covered  while  they  lay  down  to  sleep.  But  Tom  Harvey 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


21 


volunteered  to  keep  watch  over  us  all,  and  not  to  lie  down 
through  the  night.  I offered  to  share  this  duty  with  him, 
turn  and  turn  about,  in  the  manner  of  dog-watches  on  board 
ship : but  he  said  cheerfully,  it  should  be  my  turn  the  next 
night,  if  I would ; that  he  would  rather  stay  awake  one  night 
and  have  full  rest  another,  than  have  broken  rest  for  two  in 
succession ; which  indeed  is  the  hardest  part  of  all  sea- 
service. 

For  beds  we  were  at  no  loss  : there  was  moss  all  about,  and 
dry  leaves  in  abundance,  very  fragrant,  as  was  the  wood  also 
which  we  burned  on  the  fire.  Don  Manuel  stepped  a little 
aside  to  finish  his  prayers,  as  I could  well  perceive  by  the  fire- 
light; for  now,  the  sun  being  down,  the  darkness  of  the 
tropics  was  upon  us  at  once.  But  we,  without  any  prayers  at 
all,  like  ungrateful  heathen  wretches  that  we  were,  cast  our- 
selves on  these  couches  of  leaves,  with  our  feet  to  the  fire, 
and  so  all  was  still. 


CHAPTER  VI. 


NIGHT  AND  MORNING. 


)OW  the  others  got  through  that  first  night  of 
our  exile,  I scarce  knew  at  the  time ; only 
that  all  was  quiet,  and  Harvey  with  his  gun 
going  to  and  fro,  near  to  our  fire,  feeding  the 
blaze  from  time  to  time  with  fresh  armfuls  of 
the  dry  brushwood  that  he  had  drawn  toge- 
ther in  a heap.  This,  I felt  sure,  would  keep 
off  any  wild  animals  that  might  be  prowling  in  our  neigh- 
bourhood ; it  being  well  known  by  all  hunters,  and  such  as 
have  occasion  to  camp  in  the  woods,  that  even  the  fiercest 
tigers  of  the  Indian  jungles,  unless  they  are  pressed  by  great 
hunger,  will  not  so  much  as  approach  a fire  by  night. 

Being  made  easy  then  on  that  point,  and  indeed  on  that 
only,  I fell  to  considering  our  unhappy  deserted  lot,  which 
did  little  improve  for  being  thought  upon.  For  though, 
’t  is  true,  no  one  of  us  was  cast  ashore  alone  and  solitary,  as 


22 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


Selkirk*  and  some  others  have  been,  yet  the  benefit  of  mutual 
society  by  no  means  outweighed  the  destitute  state  we  were 
in,  unprovided  with  anything  but  our  fire-arms  only.  u How”, 
I reflected,  “ shall  we  build,  or  plant  here  ? how  even  burrow 
out  dwellings  for  ourselves  in  the  earth  or  the  rocks,  like  some 
savage  tribes  ? How  shall  we  so  much  as  cut  down  a tree, 
or  smooth  a plank,  or  snare  the  birds  and  animals  of  the 
island,  to  tame  them  ? By  what  means  can  we  supply  ourselves 
with  clothes,  or  defend  our  lives  against  the  violent  monsoons 
and  rainy  seasons  of  the  tropics  ? And  when  our  small  stock 
of  ammunition  is  once  spent  in  coming  at  our  daily  necessary 
food,  with  what  contrivances  are  we  to  purvey  to  ourselves 
any  living  from  that  time  onward  ?” 

To  these  questions  I found  no  comfortable  answer  in  my 
thoughts ; and,  as  if  I had  turned  Job’s  comforter  against 
myself,  I went  on  further  to  consider  thus  : “You  are”,  said 
I,  addressing  myself  inwardly,  “ surrounded  indeed  by  com- 
panions in  misfortune,  who  have  all  one  common  interest  with 
your  own ; to  wit,  mutual  assistance  and  kindliness  in  better- 
ing their  sad  condition.  But  who  shall  warrant  that  they 
will  view  it  thus  ? For  men,  in  the  very  blindness  of  a selfish 
desire  to  have  their  way,  are  prone  to  run  counter  every 
day  to  their  true  interest  and  that  of  others  with  them.  Or, 
if  things  begin  well,  yet  with  such  rude  materials  as  you  have 
about  you,  how  long  .will  they  continue  so  ? And  what 
authority  can  you  establish  among  them,  for  the  benefit 
of  each  and  all?” 

In  short,  after  tormenting  my  thoughts,  as  many  another 
has  done,  with  the  prospect  of  future  ills,  and  inventing 

* Alexander  Selkirk,  a Scottish  seaman,  owing  to  some  disagree- 
ment with  his  captain,  was  left  ashore  in  1704  on  the  island  of  Juan 
Fernandez,  off  the  coast  of  Chili.  He  had  nothing  with  him  but  his 
clothes,  bedding,  a gun,  and  a small  quantity  of  powder  and  ball ; a 
hatchet,  knife,  and  kettle ; his  books,  and  mathematical  and  nautical 
instruments.  In  this  solitude  he  remained  four  years  and  four  months ; 
employing  his  time  in  chasing  and  taming  the  wild  goats  of  the  island. 
He  constantly  kept  a guard  of  tame  cats  about  him,  to  defend  him  from 
the  rats,  with  which  the  place  was  infested.  He  was  at  length  taken 
off  by  a vessel  from  Bristol,  and  arrived  in  England  by  a circuitous 
route  in  1711.  The  enemies  of  Defoe,  the  author  of  Robinson  Crusoe, 
accused  that  writer  of  having  pirated  many  of  the  details  of  Selkirk’s 
life  from  papers  left  by  the  latter  in  his  hands.  It  is  undeniable  that 
Defoe,  like  Shakspeare,  founded  his  wonderful  fiction  upon  facts,  which 
already  stood  recorded.  Yet  a perusal  of  the  narrative  of  Captain  Rogers, 
who  took  Selkirk  off  the  island,  brief  and  comparatively  meagre  as  it  is, 
forms  the  best  proof  how  little  Defoe  was  indebted  to  any  actual  occur- 
rence for  the  charm,  or  more  than  the  first  idea,  of  his  story. — Ed. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


23 


a multitude  of  possible  and  imaginary  ones,  as,  attacks  from 
cannibal  savages  and  wild  beasts,  poison  from  venomous 
reptiles  or  unknown,  noxious  herbs,  and  I know  not  what 
other  forebodings  of  harm,  I gave  way  to  exhaustion  like 
the  rest,  and  fell  asleep  till  morning.  One  thing  I did  not 
forget ; and  that  was,  to  wind  up  my  watch,  as  I well  knew 
mine  to  be  the  only  time-piece  in  our  whole  colony.  “ Yet  what 
matters  time  to  us”,  I asked  myself,  with  much  sadness,  u now 
that  we  are  commencing  the  life  of  savages  here  ? ’T  will  be 
enough  for  us  to  see  the  sun  rise  and  set,  to  know  another 
day  is  added  to  our  misery.  And  for  the  seasons,  we  shall 
feel  when  it  is  warm  and  cold,  wet  and  dry,  until  we  feel 
nothing  further”.  Thinking  in  this  way,  I did  indeed  know 
nothing  more,  till  I was  awoke  by  the  sun  through  the  trees, 
and  the  screaming  of  the  parrots  over  my  head. 

’T  was  a wonder  I had  not  awoke  before  this  ; for  two  guns 
had  been  fired,  and  with  some  success,  to  procure  us  our 
first  breakfast  on  the  island.  One  of  these  was  Harvey’s  piece, 
and  the  other  Gill’s.  When  I shook  off  my  sleep,  and  came 
to  where  they  were  seated  round  the  fire,  I found  they  had 
brought  in  some  game : for  Tom  had  shot  (at  least  wounded, 
and  then  secured  by  some  hard  running)  a peccary,  such  as 
we  had  seen  the  day  before ; and  Harry  Gill  had  brought 
down  a bird  like  a bustard,  that  he  had  sprung  in  a piece  of 
marshy  ground,  about  a quarter  of  a mile  from  our  encamp- 
ment. 

Though  I considered  it  imprudent  in  a high  degree  to  let 
off  fire-arms  when,  as  yet,  we  knew  so  little  of  the  island,  still, 
the  thing  being  now  done,  and  so  much  remaining  to  be 
settled  when  breakfast  was  over,  I said  nothing,  but  bade 
them  good  morning  as  cheerfully  as  I could,  and  set  to  work 
to  help  in  the  cooking  of  our  meat.  Here  was  indeed  a diffi- 
culty for  us ; for  though  several  of  our  number  (like  most 
practised  seamen)  were  tolerable  cooks,  as  far  as  a plain  boil 
or  stew  on  board  ship  went,  yet  what  will  the  best  cook  do, 
when  he  has  nothing  but  his  meat  and  his  fire  to  work  with  ? 
Here  were  we,  with  no  sign  of  a kettle,  or  pan,  not  so  much 
as  a dripping  ladle  to  prevent  our  meat  burning  at  the  fire ; 
plenty  of  material,  but  no  way  of  making  it  useful  to  us. 
And  though  the  proverb  says,  too  many  cooks  spoil  the  broth, 
I believe  there  have  been  seldom  collected  so  many  cooks  to- 
gether, with  so  little  chance  of  having  any  broth  at  all  among 
them. 

There  was  abundant  proof  of  the  difference  in  men’s  cha- 


24 


TIIE  ADVENTURES  OF 


racters  as  we  all  stood  around  the  fire,  and  looked  at  the  game 
we  could  find  no  means  to  dress.  Some  grumbled  and  swore, 
some  laughed  at  their  own  perplexity,  some  set  about  devising 
first  one  thing,  then  another.  Prodgers  was  chief  among  the 
surly  ones,  as  Tom  Harvey  among  the  jokers.  As  to  Hilton, 
being  (as  I said)  one  of  those  who  take  their  cue  too  much 
from  others,  he  now  swore  with  Prodgers,  and  then  laughed 
with  honest  Tom.  However,  for  want  of  anything  better, 
we  cut  us  some  sharp  straight  reeds  from  a thicket,  of  a kind 
of  bamboo,  to  serv£  for  spits ; we  skinned  the  animal  and 
plucked  our  bustard,  then  spitted  them,  and  prepared  to 
rbast. 

But  who  should  come  to  our  help,  and  show  us  a better 
way  ? The  last  person,  except  a wild  Indian,  we  could  ever 
guess  at.  Don  Manuel  had  been,  up  to  this,  walking  slowly 
at  a little  distance  from  us,  reading  his  book,  as  usual.  He 
now  closed  it,  and  drew  near ; and  in  his  cheerful,  courteous 
way : u A fair  morning  to  you”,  says  he,  “ Senores  and 
brothers  in  misfortune : let  me  try  and  contribute  my  small 
efforts  for  our  common  good”.  And  then  he  explained,  that 
he  had  heard  of  some  natives  of  such  islands  as  abound  in  hogs 
and  goats,  who  had  an  ingenious  way  of  cooking,  or  baking 
their  meat.  They  make,  says  he,  a hole  in  the  earth,  line  it 
with  stones  red-hot  from  the  fire,  to  serve  as  a kind  of  rude 
oven  ; then  put  in  the  meat,  covering  it  carefully  with  several 
layers  of  broad  leaves,  and  overlay  the  whole  with  earth  and 
stones.  u So  now,  if  you  will”,  continued  he,  “ we  will  take 
a hint  from  the  savages,  until  we  find  out  some  better  method 
for  ourselves”. 

We  thanked  him  heartily,  and  with  some  surprise,  at 
discovering  that  he  knew  anything  about  such  matters.  But 
he  said,  with  a smile,  a priest  who  left  his  own  country  upon 
foreign  missions  was  obliged  to  be 

Soldier  or  sailor, 

Joiner  or  tailor, 

Gentleman,  apothecary, 

Whitesmith,  and  all ! 

Where  he  had  picked  up  those  odd  lines  I cannot  guess ; 
but  I know  that  his  cheerful,  friendly  manner  did  more  to 
comfort  us  under  our  hard  lot,  and  put  us  in  good  humour 
with  ourselves  and  each  other,  than  anything  else  at  that 
moment  could  have  done.  Every  one  began  to  feel  a sort  of 
confidence  in  following  his  directions  ; and  the  prospect  of  a 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


25 


good  breakfast  quickened  our  motions.  So,  having  un- 
derstood his  plan,  we  bustled  about  merrily  to  follow  it. 
Some  went  in  search  of  stones  of  the  proper  size  and  shape  to 
heat  in  the  fire  ; and  these  were  put  into  the  hottest  of  the 
flame.  Others  got  a heap  of  dry  brushwood  to  freshen  the 
fire  itself,  which  soon  blazed  out  more  fiercely  than  we  could 
well  stand  to.  One  went  in  search  of  leaves  to  lay  upon  the 
meat  when  the  hot  stones  were  ready  to  put  round  it ; and  a 
fourth  cut  a sharp  stake  or  two  from  the  thicket,  to  make 
shift  for  spades.  With  these  we  turned  ,up  enough  of  earth 
to  bank  over  our  oven.  All  being  now  ready,  we  waited  a 
short  time  till  Don  Manuel  (from  whom  we  took  evety 
direction  without  questioning)  told  us  the  fire  had  heated  the 
earth  and  stones  to  the  right  pitch,  and  that  we  might  clear 
away  the  embers  to  build  our  oven  on  the  rock. 


CHAPTER  VII. 


THE  FIRST  MEAL,  AND  THE  FIRST  PARLIAMENT. 


jND  see,  gentlemen”,  said  the  priest,  pointing 
with  his  hand  to  a tree  that  grew  perhaps 
fifty  yards  from  our  fire  ; “ see  if  a merciful 
Providence  hath  not  sent  us  bread  as  well 
as  meat!  Truly  we  should  be  doubly  un- 
grateful not  to  thank  Him  with  all  our 
hearts”.  The  men  looked  at  him  with  won- 
der, doubting  what  he  spoke  of.  Only,  sure  were  they,  from 
his  manner,  that  he  was  not  jesting  now.  “I  am  much 
mistaken”,  added  Don  Manuel,  turning  to  me,  “ if  yonder  be 
not  one  of  the  bread-fruit  trees  we  have  read  of ; and  the 
first”,  added  he  in  his  cheerful  way,  u who  brings  us  some  of 
the  fruit,  will  be  a herald  of  good  news  to  our  colony”. 

No  sooner  said  than  done : for  Harvey  started  off,  and 
Hilton  with  him,  after  this  new  bread ; while  we  stood  laugh- 
ing at  their  race,  cheering  them  with  our  voices,  and  clapping 
of  hands.  They  reached  the  tree  nearly  together,  and  began 


26 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


shaking  it,  one  on  either  side,  to  make  the  fruit  fall  into  their 
hands.  But  the  trunk  was  too  stout  for  that,  so  that  they  did 
but  lose  their  labour  ; and  the  fruit  itself,  which  grew  in  a 
kind  of  large  apple,  or  gourd,  the  size  of  a good  penny  loaf, 
was  so  high  out  of  their  reach  that,  do  what  they  would, 
there  was  no  getting  at  it,  no,  not  by  jumping  their  best.  u I 
see”,  said  Don  Manuel,  u I must  be  baker’s  man  as  well  as 
cook” ; and  he  moved  towards  them  with  his  long  staff.  But 
Harry  Gill  was  now  beforehand  with  him ; for,  seizing  the 
marlinspike,  he  made  off  at  the  top  of  his  speed,  and  before 
the  other  two  could  pick  off  a single  apple  with  stones,  he 
had  brought  half  a dozen  of  them  to  the  ground. 

Don  Manuel  met  them  half  way.  “ It  is  indeed  the  bread-fruit 
tree !”  exclaimed  he,  when  he  had  examined  the  fruit.  “ Give 
thanks,  my  friends,  for  a great  boon  from  heaven ; as  I doubt 
not  you  have  given  thanks  for  your  deliverance  out  of  the 
ship.  If  this  be  not  a solitary  tree,  which  is  very  unlikely, 
and  if  it  be  the  kind  that  will  grow  from  slips  or  cuttings,  we 
shall  have  enough  of  excellent  bread,  and  to  spare.  So,  let 
us  first  pay  our  tribute  to  the  great  Giver”. 

Seeing  that  none  of  us  stirred  or  assented  (I  am  ashamed 
to  record  it  against  ourselves),  he  then  solemnly  took  off  his 
hat,  laid  it  at  his  feet,  and  holding  one  of  the  fruits  in  either 
hand,  uttered,  with  a loud,  clear  voice,  something  in  Latin, 
which,  though  I was  not  used  to  his  mode  of  pronouncing  the 
language,  I took  to  be  a short  form  of  praise.  Having  spoken 
this  with  his  eyes  raised  to  heaven,  he  kissed  the  fruit,  as 
though  he  had  received  it  straight  from  thence  : then,  turning 
to  us,  said  ; “ And  now,  Senores,  it  is  high  time  to  look  after 
our  breakfast”. 

I know  not  by  what  magic  this  man  seemed  at  once  to 
have  gained  such  an  ascendant  over  our  minds.  Every  one  of 
us  went  hither  and  thither,  and  just  did  this  or  that,  because 
he  so  recommended  it ; yet  there  was  nothing  of  authority  in 
his  words,  which  indeed  would  at  that  time  have  revolted 
our  wills  against  him : but  all  was  quiet  and  gentle,  in  the 
extreme.  But  I greatly  believe  this  influence  he  exercised 
upon  us  arose  from  our  clearly  perceiving  him  to  have  no 
ends  of  his  own  to  serve  in  what  he  proposed  to  be  done ; 
also  because  he  was  ever  willing  cheerfully  to  bear  his  part 
in  every  fatigue  and  inconvenience  that  affected  us : in  which 
disposition  no  one  came  up  to  him,  except  only  Tom  Harvey, 
and  this  we  felt  the  more,  as  time  went  on  and  we  were 
better  acquainted. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


27 


But  now,  to  return  to  our  breakfast,  or  the  preparations  for 
it ; Don  Manuel,  to  our  great  satisfaction,  promised  us  some 
excellent  toasted  bread  with  our  pork : and  though  the  men 
scarce  knew  how  this  was  to  be  purveyed,  for  they  had  never 
seen  or  heard  of  the  bread-fruit  before,  they  put  such  trust 
in  what  he  promised  as  to  believe  it  would,  somehow,  be  as 
he  said.  So,  by  his  directions,  the  hollow  slab  of  rock  where 
we  had  kindled  our  fire  over-night,  was  now  swept  clear  of 
the  burning  wood ; and  the  stones,  which  by  this  were  red- 
hot,  ranged  around  by  the  help  of  our  gun-barrels  and  sticks, 
so  that  an  open  space  was  left,  large  enough  to  hold  the 
game  we  had  killed.  When  we  had  placed  our  peccary 
and  bustard  on  this  heated  rock,  and  surrounded  them  with 
the  stones,  whereon  we  likewise  placed  our  bread-fruits  to 
bake,  by  and  bye  such  a savoury  smell  arose,  as  almost 
tempted  us4;o  fall-to  without  waiting  for  any  further  cookery. 

Prodgers,  in  particular,  who  was  the  most  self-willed,  or 
the  hungriest  among  us,  or  both,  began  to  insist  on  having  his 
portion  at  once.  But  he  was  out-voted  by  the  rest ; and  we 
covered  the  meat  quickly  with  the  palms  and  plantain  leaves 
we  had  gathered : over  these,  again,  we  laid  other  stones,  and 
made  all  tight  by  strewing  on  the  top  a layer  or  two  of  earth 
and  rocky  sand. 

u A short  half-hour,  gentlemen”,  then  said  Don  Manuel, 
“ will  complete  our  arrangements  : and  I propose  that  in  the 
meantime,  we  make  an  expedition  to  the  rocks  on  shore,  to 
see  after  a few  dishes  and  spoons”. 

We  looked  again  at  one  another,  doubtful  what  he  could 
mean  ; but  he  soon  explained  himself,  saying  that  as  we  came 
along  the  rocks  the  day  before,  at  that  part  of  our  island  where 
we  first  landed,  he  had  observed  a bed  of  largish  oysters  that 
lay  within  reach  of  any  active  cliffs-man  among  us.  The  shells 
of  these,  he  said,  or,  however,  the  larger  ones,  would  supply 
our  table  (our  rock,  rather)  with  a rude  kind  of  crockery- ware, 
till  we  had  learned  to  furnish  ourselves  better  in  some  other 
way.  “ And  so,  my  friends”,  added  he,  “ the  fish  and  the  dish, 
you  see,  are  sent  to  us  together ; and  both  from  One  source” : 
then  he  looked  upward  and  smiled  cheerfully.  This  priest' 
seemed  to  have  his  thoughts  continually  on  God ; on  whom 
our  thoughts  were,  I may  say,  never.  But  it  was  out  of  the 
abundance  of  his  heart  that  he  was  speaking  in  this  manner ; 
for  nothing  was  further  from  him  than  any  attempt  to  preach 
to  us,  to  whom,  ’t  is  true,  he  seemed  to  look  for  some  corre-? 
spondence  with  his  grateful  feelings,  and  not  finding  it,  he 


28 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


went  on  all  the  same,  to  himself,  as  it  were,  in  his  expressions 
of  thankfulness  and  trust. 

With  all  our  hardness  of  heart,  at  least  we  felt  cheered 
about  the  oyster  beds  he  spoke  of ; to  find,  on  our  first  settle- 
ment, that  these  new  possessions  of  ours  were  likely  to  be  so 
well  stocked  as  to  place  us  beyond  immediate  want.  But 
before  we  started  that  way,  or  sent  any  of  our  party  on  the 
errand,  we  reckoned  that,  take  what  short  cut  we  might  to  the 
place,  we  should  only  get  back  to  find  our  meat  and  bread-fruits 
burned  to  a cinder.  So  we  gave  up  that  enterprise  for  the 
present ; and  prepared  to  take  our  breakfast  with  sticks,  as 
the  Chinaman  will  pick  up  the  smallest  grain  of  rice  with  two 
chop-sticks  instead  of  a fork  or  spoon.  Well,  we  took  the  lid 
off  our  oven,  and  found  everything  done  passably  well,  for  a 
party  of  famished  sailors  who  were  not  over-nice.  But  Don 
Manuel,  after  saying  grace,  which  he  never  omitted  at  any 
meal  we  ever  partook  of  with  him,  told  us  pleasantly,  had  we 
been  less  hungry  or  more  patient,  our  feast  on  taking  posses- 
sion of  the  country  would  have  been  worthier  the  occasion. 

This  whole  time,  I was  turning  in  my  thoughts  how  I should 
address  our  party  on  some  things  very  needful  to  be  said.  If 
some  order  and  rules  were  not  established  amongst  us  from 
the  first,  then,  I saw  clearly,  we  should  lie  exposed  to  the  un- 
restrained violence  of  several  wills  here  present,  that  boded 
us  no  good.  By  this,  I had  seen  enough  of  Don  Manuel  to 
feel  a confidence  in  consulting  him ; but  I lacked  opportunity, 
for  the  thing  had  to  be  done  at  once,  and  before  our  first 
joint  act  was  undertaken,  whatever  that  might  be.  Hastily 
gathering  my  thoughts  into  the  best  shape  I could,  while  we 
were  all  employed  in  cutting  up  our  game  with  hanger  and 
knives,  and  helping  ourselves  to  the  slices  with  bamboo-sticks, 
I ran  over  in  my  mind  the  characters  of  those  I had  to  deal 
with,  and  what  I would  have  them  lend  a hearing  to.  When 
our  meal  was  ended  (and  they,  poor  fellows,  were  in  no  hurry 
about  it),  feeling  that  if  ever  they  would  be  disposed  to 
listen,  it  was  likely  to  be  now,  I begged  their  attention  for  a 
few  minutes  only. 

So,  getting  upon  a little  ledge  of  rock  which  offered  a 
natural  platform  to  speak  from,  I delivered  myself  as  follows  : 

u Gentlemen”,  said  I,  u as  we  are  so  strangely  cast  into 
society  with  each  other,  and  that  for  such  a time  as  we 
cannot  foresee  its  end,  you  have  to  consider,  in  the  first  place, 
whether  you  will  still  remain  in  community,  or  separate  in 
different  quarters  of  the  place  where  we  are,  and  live  alone 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


29 


and  independent.  For  my  part,  I am  ready  to  adopt  which- 
ever plan  may  seem  good  to  the  greater  number  of  us  ; and  I 
call  upon  you  to  decide”. 

Here  they  interrupted  me  at  once,  and  cried  out,  each  for 
himself,  that  to  disperse  over  the  island  was  a thing  not  to  be 
thought  of.  We  shall  be  devoured,  said  they,  by  wild  beasts, 
if  any  are  here : we  shall  fall,  singly  and  defenceless,  into  the 
hands  of  savages  who  may  inhabit  the  place,  or  visit  it.  Then, 
to  live  alone,  they  declared,  was  a savage,  unnatural  state  of 
existence ; and  they  would  become  barbarians,  little  better 
than  the  wild  animals  themselves,  who  still,  for  the  most 
part,  go  in  herd.  In  short,  never  was  anything  so  concluded 
as  that,  come  what  would,  we  must  still  consort  together. 

u Very  well,  my  friends”,  I continued,  “ and  that  is  my 
own  wish,  too.  I felt  I should  put  both  before  you,  and 
think  you  have  decided  right.  But  then,  see  what  follows 
upon  this.  If  we  live  together,  we  must  have  some  kind 
of  government  established  among  us”. 

When  I had  made  that  announcement,  which  I did  with  a 
resolute  manner  and  voice,  I observed  some  change  in  the 
countenances  of  a part  of  our  small  number.  They  had  no 
idea,  it  seems,  of  living  by  any  law  but  their  own  wills ; and 
they  seemed  to  think  that  to  talk  of  government  was  to  intro- 
duce tyranny  into  our  little  society,  even  in  its  infant  days. 
Richard  Prodgers  at  once  showed  himself  displeased  by  a 
surly  look  ; and  swaying  to  and  fro  with  a dissatisfied  air,  was 
going  to  interrupt  me,  when  I went  on : 

“ Nay”,  said  I,  giving  the  thing  a jesting  turn,  to  persuade 
them  the  more  heartily,  “ do  not  suppose  that  any  one  is 
going  to  set  up  for  a king  here.  We  will  have  no  standing 
army  to  drain  our  pockets : for  we  are  all,  indeed,  the  militia 
volunteers  of  the  place,  ready  to  turn  out  at  a moment’s 
notice,  and  fight  our  enemies  without  pay.  We  will  have  no 
taxes  levied  throughout  the  whole  island  : and  if  the  tax- 
gatherer  do  but  dare  show  his  face,  we  ’ll  warn  him  off  the 
premises  in  a twinkling.  Our  friend,  Don  Manuel  here”,  and 
I made  the  priest  a little  side  bow  as  I spoke,  K will  collect  no 
tithes,  but  with  our  own  free  will.  And  I hope  even,  we 
shall  do  without  any  police,  or  summonses,  or  quarter-sessions; 
no  lawyers,  no  big- wigs,  no  juries,  no  prisoners  at  the  bar,  no 
treadmill ; not  a yellow-jacket  to  be  seen  amongst  us,  nor 
a workhouse,  nor  anything  in  that  way  to  annoy  us”. 

At  this,  they  could  not  avoid  laughing,  do  what  they  would : 
even  Prodgers  was  forced  to  it  with  the  rest.  And  having 


30 


THE  AX) VENTURES  OF 


secured  their  good-will,  I explained,  that  the  kind  of  govern- 
ment I spoke  of,  was  only  that  each  should  bind  himself  [to 
conform  to  some  plain,  simple  regulations  for  his  own  good 
and  that  of  all : and  that  one  should  be  appointed  by  general 
vote,  to  see  them  carried  out.  When  they  heard  this,  they 
were  well  content ; and  after  a little  discussing  among  them- 
selves, they  begged  me  to  tell  them  how  such  rules  should  be 
framed. 

u First,  then”,  I continued,  u we  may  look  upon  ourselves 
as  the  lords  and  masters  of  this  whole  place,  for  everything 
that  appears  to  the  contrary.  If  it  prove  so,  we  must  portion 
out  to  each  man  a certain  measure  of  land,  to  be  chosen  by 
lot;  and  every  one  must  engage  to  help  his  neighbours  to 
build  something  of  a hut,  or  however  you  may  please  to  call 
our  habitations,  and  afterwards  dwell  at  peace  with  them, 
in  mutual  service  and  good  will.  But,  before  all  things  else, 
we  must  needs  discover  whether  there  be  any  other  inhabi- 
tants in  this  little  kingdom  of  ours  : wherefore  let  us  bind  our- 
selves to  stand  by  one  another  to  the  last,  and  unite  in  an 
exploring  party  to  search  the  island”. 

This  proposal  was  very  much  to  their  mind,  and  they 
would  have  set  about  the  thing  at  once.  But  I was  desirous, 
while  they  were  in  so  favourable  humour,  to  impress  on  them 
some  points  to  us  all  needful ; so,  begging  them  to  wait  yet 
a moment,  I then  laid  before  them  the  necessity  of  attending 
.to  the  following  particulars  : 

1.  That  we  had  no  real  government  as  yet;  and  hoped  to 
do  without  so  much  as  naming  the  word  punishment , which 
would  be  no  less  than  the  ruin  of  our  small  society,  and  set 
every  man’s  hand  against  his  brother : and  it  was  therefore  of 
exceeding  need  that  each  one  should  keep  strict  guard  over  him 
self,  his  temper  and  his  words,  to  avoid  all  occasion  of  offence. 

2.  That  whatever  we  possessed,  which  after  all  was  little 
enough,  should  be  looked  upon  from  the  first  as  common 
property ; to  be  distributed,  or  used  by  each  for  the  good  of  our 
society  as  well  as  his  own : namely,  the  three  fowling-pieces  we 
had  brought  with  us  from  the  ship,  together  with  the  ammu- 
nition ; our  clasp-knives,  the  jars  for  water,  and  all  our  small 
store  of  rope-twine.  To  give  an  example,  I threw  my  rifle 
and  hanger  into  the  common  stock.  Later,  I said,  when  we 
had  gained  some  experience  of  what  turn  things  would  take, 
we  could  portion  out  different  offices  according  to  each  one’s 
capacity.  But  in  the  mean  time,  as  every  man  was  to  be 
moderate  in  his  demands,, so  no  one  was  to  be  refused  any 
reasonable  use  of'  this  our  common  property. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


31 


At  any  other  time,  I could  have  smiled  at  making  so  much  of 
a common  seaman’s  clasp-knife,  and  an  earthen  pitcher.  But 
the  circumstances  we  are  placed  in,  quite  alter  our  value  of 
things : and  we  were  now  in  a state  of  life  much  like  that  of 
the  savages,  who  will  give  away  their  gold  dust,  their  ostrich- 
feathers,  and  pearls,  or  whatever  has  most  price  in  the  Euro- 
pean markets,  for  a knife,  and  even  an  old  hoop  of  iron,  or  a 
few  nails. 

They  all  agreed  readily  to  these  proposals : and  indeed,  the 
thing  was  reasonable,  and  to  the  advantage  of  all : let  them 
be  as  self-willed  as  they  might,  they  could  scarce  do  other- 
wise. I was  satisfied  with  this  beginning ; though  I foresaw 
what  difficulties  would  arise  if  I set  about  to  control  and  keep 
together  such  rude  spirits,  who  were  only  in  order  under  the 
captain’s  eye,  and  with  the  fear  of  the  lash  before  them ; and 
who  on  shore  were  accustomed  to  do  just  as  they  pleased. 
“Well”,  said  I in  my  own  mind,  though  with  not  much  spirit  of 
religion  about  me,  u the  morrow  shall  take  care  for  the  things 
of  itself ; and  we  will  live  for  the  day”. 


NOTE. 

We  are  met  by  considerable  difficulties  in  determining  the  probable 
situation  of  Evans’  island.  Had  he  not  mentioned  Newhaven  as  the 
port  whence  the  Enterprise  was  to  sail  for  her  rendezvous  in  the  tropics, 
we  might  have  been  disposed  to  consider  the  place  of  his  exile  as 
among,  or  not  far  from,  those  islands  of  volcanic  and  coralline  for- 
mation which  group  themselves  in  the  South  Pacific.  The  terms,  how- 
ever, of  the  narrative  seem  too  explicit  to  admit  such  a theory : and 
it  becomes  further  probable  that  he  speaks  of  Newhaven  in  the  State  of 
Connecticut,  if  we  consider  that  the  crew  of  Hopkins’  vessel  numbered 
Newfoundlanders  among  the  rest.  Against  this  conclusion,  however, 
it  may  be  urged,  that  Malays  and  Portuguese  are  also  mentioned  as 
forming  part  of  the  crew.  But  the  force  of  such  an  objection  is  much 
weakened  again  by  considering  that  seamen  from  Malacca,  whose 
character  as  roving  pirates  (at  the  date  of  the  narrative)  is  well  known, 
might  be  found  at  any  frequented  port,  ready  to  engage  in  such  an 
adventure ; and  might  be  joined  by  characters  equally  unsettled  from 
among  the  extensive  Portuguese  colonies. 

The  difficulty  is  increased  by  a statement  towards  the  close  of  Chap- 
ter I.,  that  the  vessel  was  “ well  within  the  tropics” ; and  from  its  being 
said,  in  the  opening  of  Chapter  III.,  that,  coming  from  a colder  lati- 
tude, the  crew  had  not  touched  land  before.  These  expressions  clearly 
imply  that  the  northern  tropic,  or  tropic  of  Cancer,  is  referred  to. 
But  how  are  we  to  suppose  that  this  island  should  have  remained 
undiscovered  till  1739,  and  not  laid  down  on  the  ship’s  charts,  if  it  lay 
anywhere  within  an  ocean  continually  traversed  by  vessels  from  such 


32 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


maritime  states  as  England,  Holland,  Spain,  and  Portugal  ? Two  con- 
siderations will  afford  a partial  answer  to  the  objection. 

(1)  We  may  overrate  the  then  extent  of  such  discoveries,  by  re- 
garding them  from  a point  of  view  adapted  to  the  nineteenth  century, 
and  to  the  focus  of  our  own  geographical  knowledge.  Certain  it  is  that 
in  England,  and  probably  the  remark  may  apply  to  Holland  and  the 
Peninsula,  the  discovery  of  America  rather  gave  an  impulse  to  the 
colonization  of  that  vast  continent  itself  than  to  enterprises  of  inter- 
mediate research.  The  date  of  Evans’  narrative  is  nearly  thirty  years 
before  the  first  voyage  of  Captain  Cook,  the  primary  object  of  which 
was  astronomical : and  though  previously,  in  the  reign  of  George  II., 
two  important  voyages  had  been  made,  they  were  for  the  definite 
purpose  of  discovering  the  north-west  passage.  The  expedition  of 
Anson,  the  very  year  after  that  in  which  our  author  and  his  companions 
were  left  ashore,  was  a naval  enterprise  against  the  Spaniards  in  the 
South  Seas,  though  it  resulted,  incidentally,  in  important  discoveries. 
In  short,  it  may  be  said  that  new  continents,  or  new  ways  to  old  ones, 
rather  than  researches  among  islands  and  archipelagoes,  formed  the 
chief  objects  of  such  expeditions  as  had  preceded  the  date  of  this 
narrative. 

(2)  The  discovery  of  islands  in  a wide  ocean  has  been  very  much  the 
result  of  capricious  circumstance,  often  of  mere  accident.  Thus,  the 
island  of  Madeira,  notwithstanding  the  great  height  of  its  volcanic 
peak,  rising  out  of  the  sea,  and  its  favourable  position  for  discovery, 
remained  unknown  (should  we  except  one  account  which  reads  like 
fiction),  till  a vessel,  driven,  if  I remember,  out  of  her  course,  approached 
nearer  than  usual  to  the  fog-bank  in  which  it  had  lain  perpetually  con- 
cealed. Then,  for  the  first  time,  it  was  discovered  that  this  curtain  of 
mist  was  enshrouding  a wooded  island,  the  moisture  of  whose  trees 
partly  formed,  partly  retained,  these  hangings  of  its  airy  veil.  Some- 
thing of  the  same  kind,  though  on  a smaller  scale,  appears  to  have  been 
the  case  with  the  discovery  in  question.  If  then,  we  suppose  Evans’ 
Island  to  lie  on  some  less  direct  route  from  Europe  to  the  New  World ; 
say  at  any  given  point  between  the  Cape  de  Verd  islands  and  Guiana 
or  the  Brazils,  there  is,  perhaps,  no  great  improbability  in  its  remaining 
undiscovered  till  1739.  And  this  is  surely  a more  plausible  theory  than 
to  suppose  a New  haven  on  the  west  coast  of  North  America,  with  all  the 
difficulty  of  the  “ Newfoundlanders”  in  the  way. 

Upon  the  whole,  it  might  be  wished  that  the  author  had  been  more 
explicit  as  to  the  whereabouts  of  his  remarkable  exile.  Probably,  like 
other  unpractised  writers,  he  fell  into  the  error  of  imagining  that  what 
was  very  clear  in  his  own  remembrance  would  be  equally  so  to  the  per- 
ception of  his  readers,  if  readers  he  designed  to  have.  But  the  extreme 
carelessness  of  his  style,  and  his  defiance  of  all  the  recognized  con- 
ditions of  good  writing  (for  one  who,  by  his  profession,  must  be  sup- 
posed to  have  received  a liberal  education),  would  lead  us  to  imagine 
this  account  of  his  misfortunes  to  have  been  jotted  down  merely  for  his 
own  recollection,  lest  anything  should  fade  from  it  which  concerned  so 
eventful  a period  of  his  life. — Ed. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


33 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

A DISAPPOINTMENT  AND  A DANGER. 

expedition  being  now  formed,  we  pro- 
ceeded much  in  the  same  order  we  had 
observed  before ; and  began  to  round  the 
shoulder  of  the  mountain  by  degrees,  still 
ascending  higher  as  we  "went:  so  that  our 
course  took  the  shape  of  a spiral  curve, 
bending  upwards,  to  the  north-east  of  the 
island.  This  we  did  to  gain  a bird’s-eye  view  of  the  other 
side,  both  over  land  and  sea ; to  mark  what  was  the  nature  of 
the  place  itself,  for  soil  and  produce,  and  whether  inhabited, 
as  I partly  feared,  or  desert.  Also,  our  purpose  was  to  certify 
ourselves  what  hopes  we  might  entertain  of  deliverance  from 
that  easterly  quarter  of  our  prison,  by  a chain  of  communi- 
cation with  some  land  further  off.  For  I nourished  within 
myself  a lurking  hope,  that  perchance  this  same  growth  of 
coral  rock  that  increased  our  difficulty  in  landing,  would 
serve  to  help  us  off  again  on  the  further  side.  Could  we  but 
make  shift  to  put  together  a raft  of  branches,  no  matter  how 
rude,  if  only  not  too  hazardous,  then  we  might,  I considered, 
provision  ourselves  for  a short  voyage,  and  drift  from  island 
to  island,  or  from  rock  to  rock  (the  currents  being  supposed 
favourable,  or  some  contrivance  made  to  stand  in  place  of  a 

sail),  till but  here  I stayed  in  my  thoughts,  not  finding 

a way  to  conclude  this  plan  with  any  satisfaction.  And 
certainly,  I would  not  breathe  it  to  my  companions,  fearing 
I might  raise  hopes  only  to  have  them  dashed  again  by  the 
event. 


3 


34 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


As  for  the  side  of  the  island  we  were  leaving,  we  had  suf- 
fered so  much  misery  there  as  quite  made  us  mislike  the 
very  look  of  it.  For  outward  things,  we  know,  take  their 
colour  from  the  hue  and  disposition  of  our  minds,  so  as 
to  appear  bright  or  gloomy  according  to  the  mood  in  which 
we  view  them.  And  now,  this  part  of  the  island,  which  in 
truth  was  fair  enough  in  itself,  for  its  variety  of  landscape, 
appeared  so  odious  to  us  that  we  seemed  to  breathe  all  the 
freer  as  we  quitted  it.  Every  step  we  took  led  us  away  to  a 
new  scene ; and  as  the  life  of  a seaman  is  a changeful  one, 
and  little  secure  from  disaster  day  by  day,  so  these  men  now 
seemed  almost  to  forget  their  past  misfortunes,  being  as  much 
taken  up  with  our  exploring  as  though  it  had,  indeed,  been 
the  party  of  pleasure  on  which  we  came  from  the  ship  the 
day  before. 

When  we  got  higher  on  the  mountain,  a beautiful  sight  did 
truly  unfold  itself  to  us ; for  then  the  extent  of  the  island 
appeared  by  degrees,  until  we  could  see  it  spread  out  before 
us  plainly,  as  a coloured  chart  might  be  on  canvas.  So  far 
as  could  be  measured  by  the  eye,  we  judged  it  about  two 
leagues  in  length,  reckoning  from  the  mountain  southward ; 
and  in  breadth,  where  that  was  greatest,  something  over  a 
full  league.  The  sides  ran  pretty  even  one  with  the  other, 
only  tapering  towards  a point  as  they  drew  near  to  the 
southern  end.  But  I must  not  omit,  that  the  shore  on  either 
side  was  much  broken  by  reefs  of  the  coral  rocks,  which  we 
had  already  gained  some  experience  of  on  the  western  side, 
and  which  now  we  saw  prevailed  yet  more  to  the  east ; so 
that  the  whole  of  that  coast  was  broken  up  into  shoals,  sur- 
rounding that  part  of  the  island  with  fringes  of  rock,  over 
which  the  surf  beat  with  so  great  violence,  that  I was  sure  no 
boat  that  man  ever  built  could  live  through  it. 

Here,  then,  I saw  the  downfall  of  my  cherished  plan  of 
deliverance,  unless  the  north-east  part  of  our  mountain  should 
give  a more  encouraging  prospect  when  we  got  thither.  But 
at  the  same  time,  these  walls  of  rocks  were  the  best  safe- 
guard we  could  desire  against  the  landing  of  savages  on  our 
island ; for  they  formed  such  a natural  rampart,  and  so  for 
midable,  that  not  the  boldest,  though  they  might  be  skilful  in 
managing  their  canoes,  would  attempt  it.  And  thus,  as  often 
is  to  be  found  in  this  chequered  life,  disappointment  and 
comfort  met  us  hand  in  hand. 

We  had  now  travelled  round  three  sides  of  the  mountain, 
or  thereabout ; yet  no  sign  appeared  of  any  other  island  or 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


35 


continent  neighbouring  our  own.  And  this  view  was  made 
complete  when  we  rounded  so  far  as  to  see  to  the  east-north- 
east ; further  than  that  we  needed  not  to  go,  for  the  rest  we 
had  already  viewed  from  the  ship.  All  appeared  open  sea, 
with  only  here  and  there  a table-land  of  rocks,  some  not  ten 
yards  across,  lying  outside  the  fringe  of  our  protecting  reefs : 
at  least,  this  was  as  much  as  the  haze  or  sea-vapour  drawn 
up  by  the  heat  (the  sun  being  now  very  powerful)  allowed 
us  to  discover. 

The  heat  was  by  this  time  become  so  intolerable  over  head, 
and  indeed  under  our  feet  besides,  by  reason  of  the  sun 
striking  on  the  bare  rock,  for  we  were  now  got  above  the 
region  of  trees,  quite  to  the  upper  portion  of  our  mountain : 
the  heat,  I say,  now  forced  us  to  seek  shelter  for  ourselves ; 
so  that  with  one  accord  we  plunged  down  the  descent  into  the 
woods,  not  following  the  course  by  which  we  came  up,  but 
in  a straight  line,  making  towards  the  length  of  the  island, 
as  though  we  were  bent  on  reaching  that  point  to  the  south 
which  we  had  viewed  from  the  height  above. 

Added  to  this  inconvenience  of  the  heat,  was  another  which 
we  had  not  foreseen ; for  we  found  these  parched  rocks 
swarming  with  reptiles,  particularly  scorpions,  and  a large 
kind  of  centipede,  or  what  they  call  in  the  West  Indies  the 
forty  legs;  some  of  these  last  we  saw,  grown  to  be  seven  or 
eight  inches  long,  and  running  about  the  loose  stones ; so  that 
we  feared  to  sit  anywhere  to  rest  ourselves,  knowing  them 
to  be  well-nigh  as  venomous  as  the  scorpions.  Some  serpents 
also  we  heard,  hissing  at  us  as  we  approached,  though  we 
did  not  discover  them : and  altogether,  we  hastened  to  get 
out  of  so  unwelcome  a neighbourhood ; though  in  truth  we 
knew  not  what  might  meet  us  of  that  kind  where  we  were 
going. 

But  as  we  went  down,  an  accident  befel  us  that  had  near 
enough  taken  olf  one  of  our  number  by  a sudden  death.  This 
happened  as  follows : — when  we  had  left  the  upper,  bare 
part  of  that  mountain  of  ours,  and  came  once  more  among 
the  trees,  we  noticed  the  leaves  and  stems  of  some  of  them 
tinged  with  a yellowish  dust,  having  the  smell  and  taste 
of  brimstone.  Any  one  in  his  senses  surely  would  have  been 
made  cautious  by  this  unwholesome  appearance : but  I know 
not  how  it  was,  Don  Manuel  and  I,  who  had  most  knowledge 
oh  such  matters,  were  occupied,  I suppose,  each  with  his  own 
sad  thoughts : and  mine  (I  well  remember)  were  running  on 
the  disappointment  I had  received  from  our  look-out,  at  find- 


36 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


ing  no  way  of  escape,  nor  opening  to  devise  any.  So  when 
Harry  Gill,  who  had  got  ahead  of  us,  called  out  that  he  had 
found  a cave  in  the  woods,  we  thought  not  of  bidding  him 
beware  how  he  ventured  his  head  into  the  lion’s  den,  as  (in 
one  way)  it  proved  to  be. 

This  cave  of  his  was  no  great  things  for  size  ; but  rather  a 
kind  of  crack  or  fissure  in  the  rocks,  and  overhung  by  several 
sorts  of  wild  plants,  all  powdered  with  this  brimstone  dust. 
These  hung  down  so  low  over  its  mouth,  that  he  was  obliged 
to  creep  on  all  fours  to  get  even  a little  way  in  : and  it  was 
well  for  him  he  did  not  go  in  further. 

When  I caught  sight  of  what  he  was  about,  and  that 
Hilton  was  preparing  to  follow  him  so  soon  as  he  should 
be  fairly  within  the  cavern,  I called  to  them  both  to  beware 
of  some  wild  beast  that  might  be  lurking  in  this  den ; “ and 
be  sure”,  added  I,  “you  keep  your  guns  before  you,  ready 
for  action”.  But  almost  before  I had  said  it,  and  while  Gill 
was  about  half  crept  in,  we  noticed  him  drop  on  his  face,  like 
one  who  is  taken  on  a sudden  with  the  falling  sickness,  or  an 
apoplexy.  Then  we  rushed  forward,  and  pulled  him  out 
with  main  force  by  the  heels,  not  without  scraping  his  face 
and  hands  somewhat  roughly  against  the  rocky  bed  of  his 
new- discovered  cave. 

No  sooner  had  we  got  him  fairly  out,  than  I at  once  perceived 
he  had  been  poisoned,  by  some  noisome  vapour  exhaling 
from  the  earth  : for  his  face  was  of  a leaden  colour,  his  eyes 
stark  staring  open,  and  he  foaming  at  the  mouth,  but  quite 
insensible.  There  being  no  water  at  hand  to  dash  into  his 
face,  which  would  have  brought  him  round  more  readily,  we 
did  the  best  by  waving  our  hats  before  him,  to  give  him  air ; 
and  I took  out  my  lancets  (from  which  I parted  no  more  than 
our  priest  from  his  Breviary)  to  breathe  a vein.  But  this  he 
soon  needed  not : for  as  we  were  all  busied  about  him,  some 
unloosing  his  neck-kerchief,  some  fanning  him,  some  clapping 
the  palms  of  his  cold  hands,  or  striking  the  soles  of  his  feet 
as  if  he  were  undergoing  the  bastinado,  we  had  the  satisfac- 
tion to  see  him  slowly  recover  his  senses. 

Soon  after,  he  was  able  to  sit  up  : and  Prodgers,  having  (as 
we  then  found  for  the  first  time)  smuggled  a small  bottle  of 
rum  from  the  ship,  now  relaxed  so  far  from  the  selfishness  of 
his  nature  as  to  offer  poor  Gill  a dram  of  it.  But  when  the 
rest  saw  this  unlooked-for  bottle,  they  all  cried  out,  “A 
prize  ! a prize !”  and  ^began  to  insist  it  should  be  equally 
divided  among  them,  agreeably  to  the  understanding  we  came 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


37 


to  before  starting  on  this  our  expedition.  Prodgers,  on  his 
part,  was  not  the  man  to  yield  up  anything  that  belonged  to 
him  just  because  others  wished  it ; and,  between  half  jest  on 
their  part,  and  whole  earnest  on  his,  words  soon  began  to 
run  high  amongst  them. 

I saw  the  danger  in  our  society  of  any  quarrel  on  what  had 
afforded  the  pretext  for  many  such  since  the  flood ; I mean 
drink.  So,  stepping  at  once  between  them,  and  parting  them 
by  force,  wherein  I was  helped,  though  with  greater  modera- 
tion, by  Don  Manuel,  I cried  out  with  some  heat : 

<c  What,  my  friends  ? and  will  you  wrangle  for  a vile  pint 
of  liquor  over  the  half  dead  body  of  your  comrade  ?” 

This  seemed  to  bring  them  a little  to  themselves  ; and 
Harry  Gill  being  now  pretty  well  recovered  from  his  fit,  or 
swoon,  they  were  eager  to  ask  him  how  it  had  taken  him,  and 
what  he  thought  it  was  owing  to.  As  for  me,  I saw  at  once  that 
the  low  cave  he  had  thrust  his  head  into,  had  oppressed  him 
with  some  heavy,  creeping  vapour,  that  from  its  weight  could 
not  rise  high  ; like  that  grotto  near  the  city  of  Naples,  which 
suffocates  a dog  when  it  goes  into  the  cavern,  while  a man 
standing  at  his  natural  height  escapes  the  choke  of  the 
noxious  gas.  And  this  was  confirmed  by  the  account  which 
Harry  himself  gave  us  of  his  misadventure. 

“ I wanted  to  discover”,  said  he,  “ where  this  hole  in  the 
ground  led  to ; partly  for  a mere  freak,  and  also  methought  I 
might  be  the  first  to  invent  something  of  a fortress  or  habi- 
tation for  ourselves.  So  without  any  other  concern,  I began 
to  creep  in  ; though  there  came  such  a whiff  of  brimstone  hot 
smoke  into  my  nose  and  mouth  as  well-nigh  stifled  me  on  the 
instant.  I resolved  to  go  on,  thinking  I should  soon  be  past 
the  crack  from  which  it  was  coming  up ; but  I had  not 
crawled  three  paces  when  I found  my  head  swim  round  on  a 
sudden ; and  then  I remember  nothing  more  till  I found  my- 
self lying  thus  with  all  of  you  round  me,  and  Richard  here, 
(heart}'  thanks  to  him,)  washing  down  the  brimstone  with  a 
mouthful  of  grog”. 

Well,  we  thought  ourselves  happily  rid  of  the  business  as 
it  turned  out ; and,  forasmuch  as  we  poor  mortals  (this  is  a re- 
flection I borrowed  from  Don  Manuel,  who  made  it  in  his 
own  quiet  and  natural  way  when  the  danger  was  over)  never 
know  what  value  to  put  on  our  advantages,  until  they  are 
like  to  be  taken  from  us,  so  was  it  now.  For  if  Gill  had 
died  there  in  that  sulphurous  hole,  as  he  surely  would  by 
running  on  before  us  further,  and  our  not  missing  him  till  too 


38 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


late,  our  party  had  been  weakened  both  for  mutual  assistance 
and  defence.  I had  a thought  in  my  mind  (but  checked  it) 
that  another  of  our  number  might  have  been  better  spared. 
And  yet  poor  Richard  had  shown  signs  of  something  better 
than  usual : and  altogether,  I reflected,  there  are  few  per- 
sons who  possess  not  a better  side  to  their  character  as  well 
as  a worse,  if  only  we  will  cultivate  them  as  we  would  stub- 
born ground,  and  bring  out  those  good  qualities  to  ripeness. 


CHAPTER  IX. 


DINNER.  AND  A BATTLE  AFTER  IT. 


HTE  whole  of  this  put  me  on  considering 
further  the  nature  of  the  island  we  were  upon : 
and  I concluded  with  Don  Manuel,  as  after- 
experience more  fully  showed,  that  the  entire 
island  had  been  thrown  up  from  the  sea  by 
fires  from  beneath ; except  what  might  have 
been  added  by  the  industrious  coral  insects 
in  the  course  of  ages.  Not  the  mountain  alone,  I felt  sure, 
but  the  plain  country,  was  composed  of  lava  rock,  only  covered 
by  the  depths  of  its  rich  soil.  ’T  was  not  in  the  way  of  spe- 
culation that  I followed  out  this  ; but  for  a practical  end,  and 
one  that  touched  on  our  own  security.  For,  as  all  coun- 
tries that  were  first  formed  by  volcanoes,  are  ever  liable  to 
eruptions  of  fire,  earthquakes,  devastations  of  hot  springs, 
effluvia  of  fatal  gases,  and  other  such  causes  of  disturbance, 
it  was  well  we  should  prepare  ourselves  for  what  we  were  to 
expect  in  that  way,  and  what  to  avoid. 

So  this  accident  to  poor  Harry,  when  the  effects  of  it  were 
over  (and  he  soon  plucked  up  spirits  again  to  join  us  as  if 
nothing  had  chanced,)  might  be  looked  on  as  a wholesome 
warning,  that  we  were  in  a place  where  nothing  was  to  be 
ventured  hap-hazard,  or  beyond  what  we  understood. 

As  we  continued  our  march,  “ See,  my  dear  friends”,  said 
the  priest,  “how  near  we  are  to  peril,  and  sometimes  to  death, 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


39 


when  we  least  think  of  it.  Here  was  our  friend  Geile  (so  he 
pronounced  it,  and  made  us  all  smile,  and  some  of  the  men 
laugh  outright,  at  his  way  of  talking  English,)  was  a strong 
sailor  a quarter  of  an  hour  ago  ; and  now,  see — ” 

“ He ’s  as  weak  as  a cat”,  replied  poor  Harry ; and  indeed, 
so  he  looked. 

At  this,  we  “ shortened  sail  for  him”,  as  Ned  Hilton  ex- 
pressed it : and,  what  with  one  thing  and  another,  we  all 
came  to  a conclusion  that  we  had  earned  a halt  under  the 
shade  of  the  trees  which  now  branched  thick  over  our  heads. 
The  heat  was  indeed  excessive,  and  we  were  glad  of  a breathing 
time.  For  though  on  board  ship,  the  thermometer  had  stood 
at  nearly  the  same  point  (and  I reckoned  we  were  at  least  90° 
in  the  shade),  yet  the  breeze  that  played  over  the  sea,  on  and 
off,  hindered  the  actual  heat  from  oppressing  the  spirits  as  it 
did  in  the  thickness  of  these  our  island  coverts. 

For,  putting  all  things  together,  the  priest  and  I con- 
cluded, though  we  had  not  an  instrument  for  taking  an  ob- 
servation, nor  could  so  much  as  determine  the  points  of  the 
compass  further  than  in  general;  yet,  by  what  had  dropped 
from  the  captain  and  mate  for  a day  or  two  before  they  so 
barbarously  left  us  here,  and  from  some  things  the  men  said 
at  times  in  their  careless  way,  we  concluded,  I repeat,  that  the 
place  of  our  sad  captivity  lay  somewhere  between  ten  and 
twelve  degrees  of  latitude  north  of  the  line,  and  in  about 
the  same  degree  of  heat  with  the  South  Caribbean  Sea.  This 
taught  us  we  might  expect  to  meet  with  both  the  goods  and 
ills  of  such  a latitude,  so  long  as  we  remained  here  ; or, 
indeed,  till  our  deaths,  if  we  were  at  last  to  find  our  graves 
on  this  lonely  place. 

We  then  began  to  ask,  for  what  aim  we  were  hurrying  in 
our  exploring  party  through  the  island  ? We  should  but  reach 
the  end  of  our  tether  the  sooner ; and  there  was  a bitter  feel- 
ing (I  well  knew)  awaiting  us,  when  we  should  arrive  at  the 
southern  point  of  our  prison-yard,  as  we  were  already 
acqainted  with  the  northern.  No  sign  of  an  inhabitant  had 
been  seen  by  any  of  us ; and,  for  aught  that  appeared,  we 
were  the  lords  and  possessors  of  all  we  surveyed ; which  was 
poor  comfort  enough.  So,  this  being  considered,  we  sat  down 
under  the  shade  of  a large  tree  of  the  pimento  kind : and  the 
men,  in  spite  of  the  hearty  breakfast  they  had  made  in  the 
morning,  now  voted  it  to  be  dinner-time.  I forgot  to  say,  we 
had  packed  up  the  remainder  of  our  meat  and  bread-fruit, 
which  Harvey  volunteered  to  carry  on  his  shoulders,  wrapped 


40 


THE  ADVENTCJllES  OF 


in  palm-leaves.  This  was  now  spread  for  us  on  the  grass,  and 
we  fell  to,  some  more,  some  less,  according  to  the  character 
and  appetite  of  each. 

Sailors  mostly  live  for  the  day ; and  are  so  used  to  chances 
and  changes,  that  it  little  matters  to  them  where  they  make 
their  shake-down  when  the  day  is  over.  I could  not  discover, 
from  any  chance  remark  that  fell  from  these  men,  they  had 
any  plan  of  living  settled  in  their  minds  under  these  strange 
circumstances  in  which  we  were  placed.  They  seemed  to 
leave  every  arrangement  to  Don  Manuel  and  me ; though 
they  would  have  shown  themselves  jealous  indeed,  and  rebel- 
lious too,  had  we  assumed  to  dictate  to  them.  It  came  to  be 
the  same  in  the  end ; for  we  had  to  consult,  and  suggest,  for 
the  whole  party,  at  every  turn.  Don  Manuel,  on  his  part, 
seldom  expressed  his  opinion,  except  when  there  was  a ques- 
tion of  right  and  wrong ; or  when  he  thought  he  could  guide 
our  minds  to  the  better  things  whereon  his  own  was  con- 
stantly fixed.  On  those  occasions  he  spoke ; and  always 
with  the  same  even,  cheerful  temper  which  had  gained  him 
our  hearts,  or  some  part  of  them,  from  the  first. 

But  I grow  wearisome  with  these  details : only,  that  the 
few  first  events  of  our  establishment  on  the  island  were  of 
such  weight  in  fixing  our  condition  there  for  years  after- 
wards, that  it  may  be  pardonable  to  dwell  on  them  at  some- 
what greater  length. 

Well,  we  sat  or  lay  down,  to  our  rest,  and  our  early 
dinner,  and  I took  the  occasion  to  speak  again. 

“Let  us  now  consider”,  said  I,  “what  sort  of  habitations 
we  shall  fix  on,  and  how  we  shall  best  seek  to  support  our 
lives  here.  No  more  caves  for  us,  if  you  please,  unless  we 
can  find  one  that  has  no  sulphur  fumes  coming  from  it.  Tell 
us,  Harry,  how  say  you  ?” 

“No,  indeed”,  answered  he,  making  a wry  face,  and  with 
an  oath  that  did  not  add  anything,  but  profaneness,  to  his 
discourse.  And  this  Don  Manuel  gently  reminded  him  of. 
“Well,  I was  wrong”,  added  Gill,  taking  the  reproof  better 
than  I expected  from  him : “ but  I have  n’t  got  the  taste  of 
the  brimstone  out  of  my  mouth  yet,  and  that,  I suppose, 
made  me  to  swear.  Give  us  another  slice  of  cold  pork, 
Harvey : and  a crumb  of  our  outlandish  loaf,  there,  and  no 
more  about  it”. 

“Now”,  said  I,  continuing,  “the  first  thing,  as  appears  to 
me,  is  to  devise  some  method  for  supplying  ourselves  with 
food,  not  for  to-day  or  to-morrow,  but  for  as  long  as  we  may 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


41 


have  to  stay  here.  This  cannot  be  by  shooting  down  our 
game  from  day  to  day : for  we  have  not  powder  and  shot 
among  us  for  more  than  perhaps  forty  or  fifty  rounds  ; and  what 
becomes  of  us  when  these  are  expended  ? So  I propose  that 
we  select,  in  the  first  place,  some  spot  for  a preserve,  in  which 
to  keep  such  animals  as  we  may  snare,  or  wound  by  shooting; 
and  that  we  husband  our  ammunition  as  much  as  possible  for 
future  need”. 

No  one  raised  a voice  against  my  proposal ; so  I regarded 
it  as  passed,  and  went  on. 

“Next”,  I said,  “let  each  of  us  name  some  of  the  things 
we  are  most  in  want  of : and  let  us  see  how  we  are  to  procure 
or  make  them ; and  what  we  must  needs  do  without”. 

At  this,  all  fell  to  considering  what  they  should  name  as 
most  important  to  us  in  our  distress. 

“Come,  Prodgers”,  I went  on,  with  a little  motion  aside 
to  Don  Manuel,  that  I gave  the  surly  old  fellow  this  prece- 
dence to  make  him  more  favourable  : “ what  do  you  propose 
we  should  contrive  for  ourselves  first  ?” 

This  set  Richard  Prodgers  a- thinking;  and  he  began 
searching  his  wits  in  the  way  most  sailors  do  : that  is  to  say, 
he  fumbled  in  his  pockets,  twirled  his  hat  round  once  or 
twice,  turned  a quid  of  tobacco  in  his  cheek,  and  finished  by 
refreshing  his  memory  from  his  bottle  of  rum.  At  that  last 
act  of  his,  the  rest  fell  to  laughing  at  him,  and  insisted  he 
should  mention  what  was  uppermost  in  his  mind. 

“ I think”,  said  Prodgers  slowly,  with  a very  thoughtful 
look,  “ the  first  thing  we  should  provide  is,  a fresh  supply  of 
hog  for  our  dinner  to-morrow”. 

“ And  grog,  I suppose”,  added  Harvey,  seeing  that  the 
bottle  peeped  from  Richard’s  pocket. 

Prodgers  looked  angrily ; but  I took  up  the  discourse,  to 
prevent  any  further  jars  amongst  us ; and  said,  none  could 
doubt  that  our  food  must  be  looked  to  without  delay,  as  I had 
already  expressed.  “And  what  say  you,  Ned  Hilton?”  I 
continued,  turning  to  where  he  had  sat  a moment  before. 

But  Hilton  had  strolled  away  while  we  were  speaking ; and 
was  eyeing  one  of  the  trees  overhead,  which  was  a cocoa-nut 
tree. 

“It  is !”  cried  he,  with  great  glee.  “ Hallo ! messmates  : a 
real  live  monkey ! Look,  there  is  another ; and  a third 
again !” 

Up  they  all  were  at  once,  and  not  another  thought  about 
our  future  plans,  so  eagerly  did  they  enter  into  this  monkey- 


42 


THE  ADVENTURES  OE 


chase.  Indeed,  I must  own,  it  was  a diverting  thing  to  see 
the  monkeys,  great  troops  of  which  we  now  discovered  in  the 
trees,  where  they  had  been  watching  our  movements,  scamper 
off  in  all  directions  with  much  swiftness,  until  they  seemed 
to  think  the  distance  among  the  higher  branches  made  them 
secure  ; then  they  looked  down  at  us  with  such  grimaces  and 
chatterings  as  I believe  would  have  made  an  owl  laugh. 
There  was  no  chance  of  catching  any  of  them  by  climbing 
the  trees,  though  some  of  our  men  could  climb  like  monkeys 
themselves : for  the  trees  grew  so  thick  together  that  their 
branches  interlaced,  and  the  nimble  creatures  could  easily 
have  fled  from  one  end  of  the  wood  to  the  other  without  once 
touching  the  ground.  It  seemed  also  to  make  no  matter  to 
them  whether  they  used  their  hands,  or  feet,  or  tails ; for 
their  tails,  as  we  afterwards  found,  measured  nearly  two  feet 
in  length,  and  were  longer  indeed  than  themselves ; they 
being  of  a smaller  kind  of  monkey,  though  exceeding  active 
and  mischievous. 

It  is  scarce  to  be  believed  how  they  would  hang  themselves 
by  the  very  end  of  these  strong  and  flexible  tails  of  theirs, 
only  just  clasping  a small  branch  with  them,  as  we  might 
hook  up  a rasher  of  bacon  on  a nail  by  a small  hook,  just 
enough  to  keep  it  from  falling  off ; then,  suspended  in  this 
way,  they  would  swing  in  any  direction  they  chose,  till  they 
swung  themselves  near  enough  to  another  branch  to  catch  it, 
or  leap  on  to  it,  and  so  be  as  much  at  home  as  they  were 
before.  They  would  throw  themselves  about  with  such 
astonishing  precision  and  certainty  of  lighting  in  safety,  as 
almost  equalled  a bird  upon  the  wing.  In  short,  they  being 
among  the  trees  in  their  own  natural  element,  as  I may  say, 
and  we  beneath  them  on  the  earth,  which  was  ours,  they 
had  us  at  a considerable  disadvantage  in  this  game : and  this 
they  seemed  to  be  aware  of ; for  leaping  and  shaking  the 
branches  till  all  the  trees  above  us  were  in  a commotion,  by 
their  strange  grimaces  and  chattering  noises  they  appeared  as 
though  they  were  laughing  at  us,  and  bidding  us  come  up 
and  do  our  best  to  catch  them. 

Such  a conduct  irritated  the  men  to  that  degree,  that  they 
ran  for  their  fire-arms  to  shoot  and  bring  some  of  the  mon- 
keys down : but  I entreated  them  to  be  still  for  a while 
longer,  promising  them  some  cocoa-nuts  for  their  forbear- 
ance ; for  an  idea  had  just  come  into  my  head,  and  methought 
I had  hit  upon  a means  of  getting  some  of  these  nuts  with- 
out the  pains  of  climbing  for  them.  So  I bade  my  comrades 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


43 


to  pick  up  some  stones  and  clods  of  earth,  with  which  we 
sent  a volley  into  the  trees,  that  we  might  provoke  the  mon  - 
keys  to  return  our  compliment.  And  so,  indeed,  they  did ; 
for  after  sending  down  upon  us  all  they  could  readily  lay 
hands  on,  as  leaves,  and  a few  dead  boughs,  or  the  like,  this 
not  satisfying  their  vengeance,  they  leaped  with  one  accord 
into  the  cocoa-nut  trees,  of  which  a good  number  grew  here- 
about, and  began  plucking  and  tugging  with  all  their  might 
(at  least  some  of  the  oldest  or  the  strongest  among  them)  at 
the  nuts,  to  get  them  off  to  cast  at  us  ; and  they  held  fast  to 
the  stem  of  the  tree  all  the  while  with  their  tails,  to  keep 
themselves  from  falling.  So  great  was  the  rage  of  these 
creatures,  that  they  put  forth  all  their  strength  upon  it ; and 
if  one  could  not  pull  off  a cocoa-nut  (for  the  nut  was  wrapped 
up  in  its  coarse  outer  rind,  and  stuck  fast  to  the  tree,  just 
under  the  leaves),  then  another  would  come  and  help  him, 
till  they  had  pulled  it  off  with  much  effort  between  them. 

It  was  well  for  our  heads  that  these  monkeys  were  more 
expert  in  getting  off  the  nuts  than  in  taking  good  aim  with 
them,  or  some  of  us  might  have  come  off  the  field  of  battle 
with  cracked  crowns  for  our  pains.  But  the  nuts  were  so 
large,  in  their  outer  cases,  as  well  nigh  overbalanced  the 
monkeys  that  threw  them,  so  that  they  could  not  send  them 
at  us  very  exactly.  Only,  that  some  few  of  the  more  cunning 
of  their  number  (for  it  seems,  among  monkeys  as  among  men, 
there  are  those  who  take  the  lead,  by  reason  of  their  superior 
intelligence,  or  their  greater  watchfulness  and  cunning),  first 
taking  a firm  hold  of  the  tree  with  their  tails,  swung  them- 
selves towards  us,  and  delivered  the  cocoa-nuts  straight  at 
us,  as  a cricketer  would  deliver  the  ball  at  a wicket ; by 
which  it  happened  that,  though  we  kept  our  eyes  about  us, 
as  indeed  we  had  need,  and  jumped  aside  as  nimbly  as  we 
might  to  avoid  these  cannon-balls,  we  were  hit  once  or  twice, 
and  that  smartly  ; for  I must  tell  you,  a full  ripe  cocoa-nut, 
thrown  by  an  angry  monkey  from  a high  tree,  is  no  joke 
upon  your  head  or  arm. 


41 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


CHAPTER  X. 

WE  DISCOVER  WHAT  A PRIEST  IS. 

HE  enemy  having  so  far  gained  a success, 
and  we  having  by  this  a plentiful  supply  of 
cocoa-nuts,  I thought  it  time  to  put  an  end  to 
the  fight  by  the  superior  force  of  our  fire- 
arms : the  more  so,  that  the  cries  of  those  of 
our  assailants,  already  engaged  against  us, 
had  dr^wn  others  of  their  tribe  to  the  spot, 
so  that  their  numbers  increased  continually,  and  the  wood 
seemed  alive  with  them.  For  this  reason,  I gave  the  word 
for  the  three  fowling-pieces,  which  formed  the  main  stock  of 
our  artillery,  to  be  discharged  into  the  trees ; which  the  men 
did  with  a hearty  good  will.  As  the  pieces  were  loaded  with 
a kind  of  swan-shot,  equally  fitted  for  bringing  down  small 
animals  and  the  larger  sort  of  birds,  we  should  have  done 
great  execution  among  the  monkeys ; but  that,  by  a kind 
of  sagacity  or  instinct,  such  as  I cannot  account  for  (see- 
ing they  had  certainty  never  been  fired  at  before  in  all  their 
lives),  no  sooner  did  they  mark  our  preparations,  than, 
slipping  behind  the  stems  of  their  native  trees,  they  placed 
themselves  in  shelter,  so  that  we  could  scarce  touch  them. 
Then  they  would  look  out  cautiously,  and  grin  again  at  us, 
daring  us  to  do  our  worst.  The  end  was,  that  besides  wound- 
ing a few,  which  increased  the  noise,  we  did  but  kill  one 
outright,  and  that  was  a poor  monkey  with  her  two  cubs ; 
one  of  them  she  carried  under  her  arm,  while  the  other 
clasped  its  hands  round  her  neck.  She  was  so  encumbered 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


45 


with  these,  as  not  to  get  nimbly  enough  out  of  the  way.  I 
say,  we  killed  this  one ; but  it  could  not  be  said,  we  brought 
it  down ; for  the  poor  creature  took  firm  hold  of  the  tree 
with  her  long  tail,  and  hung  there,  like  a malefactor  in 
chains,  only  head  downwards,  and  the  cubs  still  clinging,  and 
crying,  like  little  infants,  with  the  fright,  and  strain  of  hang- 
ing on.  I called  out  to  Harvey  that  they  would  soon  drop, 
one  after  the  other  ; and  so  they  did,  while  he  held  his  hat  to 
receive  them,  having  lined  it  with  his  handkerchief  to  break 
their  fall. 

This  was  the  result  of  our  battle  ; one  killed,  and  two 
prisoners,  or  adopted  subjects,  which  you  will.  For  the  rest, 
they  scampered  away  at  the  report  of  the  fire-arms  as  though 
they  could  not  get  far  enough  from  the  scene  of  action,  and 
we  saw  them  no  more  that  day.  As  to  the  dead  monkey,  we 
left  it  in  the  tree,  as  not  being  worth  climbing  for  ; and 
thinking  the  sight  of  it  hanging  there  would  drive  away  the 
rest  from  the  spot,  if  we  made  our  plans  to  return  thither ; 
and  this  indeed  it  did,  in  some  degree. 

So  now,  as  we  went  along  on  our  tour  of  discovery,  we 
took  up  our  debate  again,  as  to  the  kind  of  dwellings  we 
should  furnish  ourselves  with.  Of  natives,  we  had  not  seen 
a trace  ; yet  we  did  not  on  that  account  feel  quite  secure  : 
the  nature  of  savages  being,  to  lie  hid  so  close  in  the  bush  as 
scarce  to  be  discovered  till  (I  may  almost  say)  you  walk  over 
them,  like  a hare  in  her  form ; then,  rising  up,  to  take  you 
unawares,  or  wait  for  a night  attack,  when  they  may  burn 
and  massacre  all  before  them.  And,  if  any  were  here  on  our 
island  (or  rather  theirs),  they  had  certainly  had  notice 
enough  of  our  coming,  what  with  firing  of  guns  from  the 
ship,  and  our  own  fowling-pieces,  together  with  our  heedless 
shoutings  ; and  so  had  been  enabled  to  put  out  their  fires, 
and  hide  their  canoes  in  some  of  the  many  small  creeks  on 
this  eastern  side. 

Yet,  on  the  other  hand,  the  island  being  so  small  as  we 
had  now  made  it  out  to  be,  it  could  not  support  more  than  a 
few  of  such  people  as  lived  altogether  by  chase,  and  knew 
little  of  tilling  the  ground : and  the  game  we  had  already 
seen  was  so  plentiful,  it  was  plain  it  had  not  been  much 
thinned  out  by  hunting.  Also,  I considered,  if  our  enemies 
should  appear,  and  not  in  great  force,  we  had  a vast  advan- 
tage in  our  fire-arms  ; which,  beside  the  deadly  execution 
they  do  among  defenceless  savages,  are  always  known  to 
astonish  more  than  they  kill : being  looked  on  as  dreadful 


4G 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


thunder  and  lightning  from  heaven,  by  such  as  know  only 
bows  and  arrows,  or  darting  spears,  armed  with  fishes’  teeth, 
for  weapons  of  offence. 

By  this  time,  we  were  within  about  three  quarters  of  a 
league  of  that  southern  point  whereto,  we  were  travelling : 
when,  seeing  to  our  left  hand  a little  eminence  rising  up 
somewhat  clearer  of  trees  than  the  thick  woodland,  we  made 
for  that,  in  order  to  take  an  observation.  It  rose,  as  far  as 
we  judged,  seventy  feet,  if  not  more,  above  the  sea-level; 
when  we  gained  the  top,  we  could  see  pretty  well  around  us, 
though  some  lofty  groves  of  cocoa-nut  and  other  tropical 
growths  here  and  there  partly  shut  out  the  view.  But  the 
open  sea  was  clearly  enough  to  be  distinguished  on  both 
sides,  and  to  the  south  also  ; and  more  particularly  we  noticed 
that  the  eastern  coast  was  clearer  of  the  lava  rock,  but  more 
occupied  by  reefs  of  coral.  These  ran  out  into  such  fantastic 
promontories,  with  capes  and  headlands,  creeks  and  bays, 
though  all  in  miniature,  as  not  only  made  up  a beautiful 
prospect,  with  dwarf  cocoa  and  palms  growing  thickly  upon 
them,  dipping  their  broad  leaves  down  to  the  very  edge ; 
but  promised  us  some  quiet  nooks  of  deep  water  where  we 
might  get  good  fishing  for  our  support.  And  so  it  proved 
afterwards. 

We  stayed  some  time  on  this  spot,  which  everything  made 
delightful,  but  for  the  heat  of  the  sun  and  want  of  water ; 
and  finding  the  situation  so  favourable,  we  gazed  on  all  sides, 
each  taking  my  telescope  in  turn,  and  looking  out  sharp 
enough  (you  may  be  sure)  for  any  sign  of  an  inhabitant 
beside  ourselves.  But  we  became  assured  by  degrees,  to  our 
satisfaction  in  one  way,  that  we  were  indeed  the  only  human 
beings  on  the  island.  Don  Manuel  gave  a little  sigh  when  he 
heard  us  express  this  to  one  another. 

“ Why,  sir”,  said  I,  turning  to  him  with  some  surprise, 
“you  would  not  wish  to  find  savages  on  this  place?  and 
should  we  not  be  thankful  to  have  a clear  field  before  us, 
and  no  enemies  to  drive  out  of  it,  or  shoot  down  in  our 
defence  ?” 

“ True,  Senor”,  answered  he,  “ I am  not  saying  anything 
against  that ; we  ought  surely  to  be  thankful  for  every  mercy 
and  deliverance,  and  resigned  under  every  trial”. 

“ But  why,  then”,  I began  again  ; but  stopped  myself,  for 
there  was  a something,  I know  not  what,  about  the  priest, 
that  made  it  difficult  to  question  him,  all  meek  and  cheerful 
as  he  was. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


47 


The  men  listened  attentively,  and  I saw  they  wished,  like 
myself,  to  get  at  the  priest’s  mind  about  all  this.  So  I made 
another  attempt. 

“ You  expressed  a hope,  sir”,  said  I,  “ yesterday,  when  we 
first  landed,  that  we  might  meet  with  none,  man  or  beast,  to 
eat  us  up”. 

“ Indeed,  I did,  my  dear  friend”,  answered  the  priest,  with 
his  frank,  cheerful  smile,  “ and  I do  so  still ; for  I should  not 
like  to  be  devoured  just  yet : unless”,  he  added,  “ it  were 
His  most  holy  will”.  And  he  lifted  his  hat,  as  was  usual 
with  him,  when  he  spoke  in  that  way. 

There  was  that  about  his  manner,  though  I cannot  tell 
exactly  why,  nor  wherein  it  lay,  which  stopped  me  as  if  I had 
intruded  into  his  thoughts ; I was  going  to  let  the  subject 
drop,  feeling  half  inclined  even  to  beg  his  pardon  for  what  I 
had  seemed  to  ask.  But  after  a few  moments,  seeing  us  all 
silent  and  still  looking  at  him,  he  laughed  in  his  quiet  gentle 
way,  and  said  to  us  : 

“Well,  comrades,  don’t  let  me  be  making  mysteries  out  of 
a very  simple  thing.  As  you  take  a little  sigh  so  much  to 
heart,  I will  explain  it  in  a few  words,  and  then  have  done 
about  myself.  Or,  you  shall  help  me  to  do  it.  Tell  me, 
then,  what  is  a priest  ?” 

This  was,  I must  own,  a difficult  question  for  us  to  an- 
swer out  of  hand ; and  I felt  at  once  that,  in  a courteous 
way,  our  friend  had  turned  the  tables  upon  us.  As  he  stood 
there,  leaning  on  his  staff,  with  his  cloak  dropped  about  him, 
his  broad  hat,  and  he  looking  at  us  with  his  friendly  smile, 
expecting  our  answer,  I thought  within  myself,  whatever  other 
priests  might  be  (and  I had  heard,  from  my  boyhood  upward, 
talk  enough  against  them  in  many  ways,)  there  was  one 
whom  I could  respect  as  a being  superior  to  myself,  or  indeed 
to  any  one  I had  ever  fallen  in  with. 

“Well”,  repeated  Don  Manuel  after  a while,  still  looking 
round  at  us,  and  I know  we  felt  awkward  all  over,  as  we 
stood  before  him ; “ well,  my  good  friends,  and  what  is  a 
priest  ?” 

Ned  Hilton  seemed  to  think  it  concerned  the  honour  of  the 
party  that  our  Spaniard  should  get  some  answer.  So,  clear- 
ing his  throat,  and  making  the  best  of  himself,  he  began : 

“ A priest,  sir,  I suppose,  is  a man  who” and  here  he 

stopped,  twitching  the  collar  of  his  sailor’s  jacket,  and  shuffling 
a little  with  his  feet,  as  not  knowing  how  to  go  on. 

“ Who  what,  friend  ?”  asked  the  Don. 


48 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


“ Why,  of  course,  you  know,  is,  — without  any  doubt — why, 
a priest,  I suppose”. 

At  this  explanation,  no  one  could  help  laughing : and  Don 
Manuel,  having  enjoyed  it  a little,  then  said,  more  gravely : 

“ A priest,  my  dear  friends,  is,  or  ought  to  be,  one  devoted 
to  the  service  of  his  Master,  who  has  called  him.  He  ought 
never  to  be  so  happy  as  when  speaking  to  Him,  or  working 
for  Him.  Every  opportunity  of  labour  or  suffering  for  His 
sake,  ought  to  be  welcome.  Each  one  to  whom  the  priest 
may  do  good,  he  should  consider  as  a brother,  a friend,  a 
spiritual  child.  I confess  I have  been  nursing  a hope  within 
me,  that  as  I am  disabled  by  this  great  misfortune  of  ours 
from  proceeding  to  those  among  whom  my  superiors  had  sent 
me  to  labour,  I might  at  least  find  some  poor  heathens  in  this 
place  whom  I might  win  to  God.  It  is  not  to  be  so  : and  now 
you  know  the  meaning  of  that  sigh  which  escaped  from  my 
heart.  May  His  holy  will  be  ever  done,  and  by  us  all.  I 
remain  at  least  your  servant.  And  now,  shall  we  not  be 
moving  onward?” 

There  came  over  each  one  among  us,  I believe,  such  a feel- 
ing while  he  spoke,  as  we  had  never  known  before.  On  we 
moved,  as  if  he  had  ordered  it  so,  and  none  spoke,  for  each 
was  wondering  at  what  he  had  just  heard.  But  I forgot  to 
mention  that  we  agreed,  before  this,  to  give  to  the  place 
the  name  of  Prospect  Hill ; and  it  was  the  first  spot  on  our 
island  that  we  had  named  at  all. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


49 


CHAPTER  XI. 


THE  BEST  AND  WORST  SHOT. 

JEEPING  down  this  hill  again,  and  still  with  a 
southerly  bearing,  we  came,  on  a spring  of 
water  gushing  from  the  hill-side  at  about 
half-way  down,  as  clear  and  fresh  as  that  we 
had  met  on  landing.  We  were  glad  enough 
to  discover  it ; for  all  of  us  were  now  athirst 
with  our  long,  hot  march  : and,  having  oufc 
time  on  our  hands  to  do  as  we  would  with  it,  sitting  down  by 
the  spring,  we  fell  into  talk  again  about  the  mode  of  living 
that  was  before  us. 

The  most  natural  thing  to  determine  was,  how  to  build  us 
some  huts  to  dwell  in.  Here  we  were,  without  any  tools,  or 
prospect  of  finding  or  making  any.  One  chance  we  might 
have,  if  we  could  .meet  with  that  greenish  stone  of  great  hard- 
ness, which  savage  nations  contrive  to  fashion  into  hatchet- 
heads  and  chisels.  But,  then,  our  island  might  furnish  none 
of  these ; or,  when  we  found  them,  we  had  no  means  to  grind 
them  into  shape,  or  give  them  an  edge,  without  great  labour 
and  expense  of  time.  Time,  indeed,  appeared  to  be  the  com- 
modity in  which  we  were  now  most  rich : yet  I considered 
again  that  we  were  drawing  near  the  rainy  season,  which  was 

4 


50 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


like  to  set  fairly  in  ere  a month  or  six  weeks  were  come  and 
gone,  it  being  now  the  last  week  in  August.  We  all  knew  by 
report  the  violence  of  these  rains  when  once  they  set  in ; and 
Harvey  and  Prodgers  had  both  cruised  in  these  latitudes 
before,  and  had  got  many  a wet  jacket  in  the  autumnal 
equinox  and  after.  So  we  had  need  to  do  something  in  the 
way  of  house-building  out  of  hand,  if  only  temporary,  to  last 
us  over  till  next  spring. 

A thought  suddenly  came  upon  me,  as  I looked  at  the  guns 
that  lay  by  our  sides.  “We  must  sacrifice”,  said  I,  “one  or 
more  of  these,  to  make  us  some  tools”.  They  all  looked  at 
me,  surprised  at  what  I said ; and,  plainly,  their  first  thought 
was  to  refuse.  But  I went  on  to  show  that  it  was  needful  to 
the  good  of  all ; that  unless  we  had  a way  to  cut  down  trees, 
we  could  neither  build,  no,  not  the  rudest  hut,  nor  clear  any 
plot  of  ground  for  plantations ; that  our  ammunition,  with 
the  greatest  husbandry  and  care,  would  soon  be  spent,  and 
then  what  was  the  use  of  the  fowling-pieces  to  us  ? To  all 
this  Prodgers,  who  took  on  him  the  office  of  objector-general, 
said,  in  his  surly  way,  what  could  I make  out  of  a gun  ? 
But  1 had  my  answer  ready,  and  told  him  smartly  I could 
make  a gun  into  a gouge.  I believe,  what  moved  the  others 
to  come  into  my  plan  was,  in  part,  that  all  enjoyed  seeing 
old  Prodgers  put  down  so  readily  : then,  too,  it  was  plain  that, 
in  our  unhappy  case,  nothing  better,  could  be  devised. 

“ And  which  gun  is  to  go,  then  ?”  asked  Richard,  jealous 
about  his  own.  Now,  it  so  happened  that  he  was  the  worst 
shot  in  the  whole  party ; so  that,  if  any  one  of  them  had  to 
surrender  his  piece,  it  should  be  this  map : thus  much  every 
one  felt,  except  Prodgers  himself ; and  he  (it  was  just  like 
him)  would  not  hear  of  it. 

But  I had  ere  now  been  going  to  propose  a shooting  match 
among  them,  to  decide  which  should  carry  the  fowling-pieces 
on  our  expeditions;  and  this  seemed  a fitting  occasion  for 
doing  so.  In  short,  no  sooner  did  I mention  it,  than  the  three 
men,  Harvey,  Gill,  and  Hilton,  agreed  at  once ; so  Prodgers 
was  outvoted,  which  he  took  in  no  good  part.  I was  ap- 
pointed umpire  for  this  trial  of  skill ; before  we  made  it,  I pro- 
mised, to  salve  over  any  sore  feeling,  that  the  third  and  fourth 
man  (for  only  two  could  then  carry  fowling-pieces,  if  we 
sacrificed  the  barrel  of  the  third)  should  have  an  equal  use 
between  them  of  the  rifle,  and  I would  only  claim  a shot  now 
and  then. 

This  being  laid  down,  I bade  them  take  notice  of  a fruit  of 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


51 


the  orange  kind,  and  much  of  the  same  size,  which  by  reason 
of  its  bright  colour  was  a good  mark  for  the  eye ; it  grew  on 
a low-sized  tree  of  its  kind,  within  fair  range  for  a fowling- 
piece  from  where  we  stood.  There  were  others  on  the  tree, 
but  not  so  large  or  golden,  and  partly  hidden  with  leaves. 
u Now”,  said  I,  “ he  who  plants  most  shot  in  the  rind  of  this 
fruit  shall  be  first  marksman  among  us,  and  wear  a feather  in 
his  cap  ; and  so  of  the  next”.  Saying  this,  I went  towards  the 
tree ; and  finding,  a little  on  one  side,  another  of  the  wild  fig- 
tree  kind,  with  a stem  broad  enough  to  give  me  safe  shelter,  I 
stepped  behind  it,  and  called  out  to  Prodgers,  as  the  eldest,  to  fire. 

So  indeed  he  did ; but  hit  neither  orange  nor  orange-tree, 
as  I could  plainly  know  by  the  shot  pattering  into  another 
bush  that  grew  near.  However,  I own  that  poor  Dick  made  us 
bounden  to  him,  to  thank  him ; for  he  brought  us  our  supper 
when  he  and  we  least  thought  of  it.  For  in  the  very  bush  he 
fired  into  so  clumsily,  there  sat  a largish  monkey  of  the  same 
kind  that  we  had  put  to  flight  before ; he  had  sat  there,  I 
suppose,  watching  our  motions  from  a distance,  till  he  knew 
too  much  of  us,  poor  fellow,  as  some  of  his  companions  had. 
But  of  this  by  and  bye : at  the  present,  we  discovered  not 
the  execution  Prodgers  had  done ; for  the  monkey  was  killed 
stone  dead,  and  we  found  him  afterwards,  by  accident,  as  I 
shall  relate  in  a moment. 

It  was  now  Hilton’s  turn  to  fire : and,  to  make  all  this 
short,  be  it  said,  he  and  Gill  went  so  near  one  another  in 
their  shots,  as  each  to  plant  some  grains  of  swan-shot  in  the 
orange ; and  both  of  them  distanced  Tom  Harvey,  who  only 
peppered  into  the  branches.  I adjudged  the  fowling-pieces 
to  these  two  men,  and  gave  preference  to  Gill  for  first  choice. 
It  was  easy  to  discover  which  of  the  three  guns  was  oldest 
and  worst ; and  this  we  condemned  at  once  to  be  broken  up, 
stock  and  lock,  barrel  and  trigger,  to  make  such  rude  instru- 
ments as  we  needed  for  our  carpenter’s  work.  So  we  took  it 
with  us,  till  we  could  break  it  up  at  our  leisure. 

Moving  onwards  again,  we  came  to  the  bush  into  which 
Prodgers  had  scattered  the  contents  of  his  blunderbuss ; and 
here  we  found  the  dead  monkey  lying  at  the  roots,  We  took 
him  up,  and  looked  at  as  ugly  a caricature  of  our  poor  human 
nature  as  ever  was  drawn  by  a malicious  pen.  I could  not 
but  wonder,  as  he  lay  there  before  us,  like  a hideous  hump- 
backed creature  as  he  was,  grinning  in  death,  how  any  one  in 
a civilized  country  could  go  and  see  those  monkeys  in  their 
cages : unless  it  were  a philosopher  to  speculate  on  what 
degraded  human  nature  might  grow  like,  if  left  to  itself; 


;)2 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


as  I have  heard  of  an  ancient  nation  where  parents  would 
force  their  slaves  to  get  drunk  in  presence  of  their  children, 
to  show  them,  by  example,  what  a debasing  thing  was  drunk- 
enness. 1 mentioned  this  thought  to  the  priest,  and  asked 
him  how  he  viewed  it. 

“ I think  both  of  them  wrong”,  answered  Don  Manuel ; 
“ both  the  Spartans  of  old,  and  such  parents  and  elders  now, 
as  take  their  children,  or  allow  them  to  go,  to  such  exhibi- 
tions. For  the  sight  of  a drunken  slave,  or  of  a monkey  that 
with  the  shape  has  not  the  conscience  or  soul  that  belongs  to 
us,  brings  no  lesson  that  cannot  be  learned  in  better  ways, 
and  is  in  itself  vile  and  disgusting”. 

On  second  thoughts,  after  all  this,  we  decided  upon  taking 
the  monkey  with  us,  and  cooking  him  for  supper  when  we 
should  halt  for  the  night.  Only,  we  could  not  bear  either  to 
take  him  or  cook  him  as  he  was ; for  the  creature  looked  so 
human  as  well  as  hideous,  that  our  men,  though  no  way 
squeamish,  declared  they  would  not  touch  a bit  of  him  unless 
he  was  cut  up  and  baked  or  broiled  piecemeal.  So  Prodgers, 
as  he  had  the  best  right  to  him,  undertook  the  office  of 
butcher  preparing  for  the  cook;  and  indeed,  he  was  helped 
by  most  of  the  rest.  I contented  myself  with  cutting  off  the 
monkey’s  long  tail  and  putting  it  into  the  hat  of  Harry  Gill, 
instead  of  the  feather  I had  promised  him,  as  best  man  in  the 
shooting-match : and  Don  Manuel  turned  for  awhile  to  his 
prayer-book,  as  he  generally  did  when  there  was  a leisure 
moment. 

However,  we  did  not  neglect  to  pluck  some  of  the 
oranges  off  the  tree,  besides  the  one  that  Harry  Gill  had 
riddled  with  his  shot,  and  which  he  gathered  as  a trophy, 
carving  a ridiculous  face  in  it  by  making  a mouth  and  eyes 
with  his  knife  in  the  rind,  and  trying  to  make  it  look  like  a 
portrait  of  old  Prodgers ; which  he  partly  did,  so  that  Hilton 
could  not  contain  himself  for  laughing  when  he  looked  at  it. 
But  very  soon  Harry  began  to  grin  with  pain  instead  ; for  the 
milky  juice  that  oozed  out  of  the  rind  as  he  cut  it,  was  of  such 
a burning  quality  as  blistered  his  fingers  at  once.  And  well 
for  him,  and  for  us  all,  that  we  were  so  warned  before  we 
began  to  eat  of  the  fruit : or,  I believe,  no  one  of  us  had 
escaped  death  from  inflammation  by  this  poisonous  juice. 

When  Gill  cried  out  in  his  pain,  and  let  Prodgers’  head  (in 
the  orange,  I mean,)  drop  on  the  ground,  we  all  gathered 
round  him  to  see  what  was  the  matter.  But  no  sooner  did 
the  priest  observe  the  fruit,  and  the  tree  on  which  it  grew, 
than  he  exclaimed  : 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


53 


u ’T  is  the  manchineel  tree ! Take  care,  friends  ; do  not 
stand  too  near  it,  or  you  may  feel  its  effects  in  your  eyes”. 
And  he  explained  to  the  men,  that  from  the  juice  of  this  tree 
the  savage  nations  inhabiting  countries  where  it  grows,  extract 
the  poison  in  which  they  dip  their  arrows.  So  virulent  is  the 
burning  of  the  juice,  says  he,  that  when  the  tree  is  to  be  cut 
down  for  making  into  furniture,  for  which  it  is  much  esteemed, 
the  workmen  kindle  a fire  around  it,  to  dry  out  the  sap  first, 
and  so  save  their  eyes. 

We  took  warning  from  Harry  Gill’s  mishap,  and  retreated 
to  a respectful  distance  from  the  tree,  of  which  we  afterwards 
found  our  island  to  furnish  a good  many  specimens.  But  I 
now  applied  myself  to  heal  his  blistered  hands  as  well  as 
might  be,  without  medical  remedies ; and,  casting  about  for 
something  to  assuage  the  pain,  lighted  on  a large  broad  leaf 
that  grew  not  many  paces  from  the  manchineel.  This  leaf 
was  thick  and  pulpy,  containing  a cool  juice  in  its  fibres,  that 
allayed  the  inflammation  caused  by  the  other.  Thus,  as  in 
England  they  say  the  nettle  and  dock  are  found  growing  in 
the  same  hedge,  so  here  were  the  evil  and  the  remedy  side  by 
side.  I gathered  half  a dozen  of  the  leaves,  wrapping  them 
round  Gill’s  hands,  and  tying  them  up  with  our  handker- 
chiefs ; so  that  he  walked  about  in  a pair  of  large  green  gloves, 
that  made  his  companions  call  him  the  dandy  of  their  society. 
But  by  these  means  his  blisters  were  so  reduced,  that  he  soon 
felt  them  scarce  at  all. 

I may  as  well  here  finish  the  history  of  the  two  little 
monkeys  that  fell  into  our  hands  out  of  the  cocoa-nut  tree. 
Harvey  did  all  in  his  power  to  keep  them  alive,  putting  one 
into  each  of  his  jacket-pockets  to  huddle  them  up  warm,  and 
trying  to  feed  them  with  cocoa-nut  milk  : for,  I forgot  to  say, 
we  brought  the  cocoa-nuts  also  with  us,  and  very  refreshing 
we  found  both  the  milk  and  pulp  of  them  in  these  great  heats. 
But  for  the  monkeys,  both  of  them  died  before  the  second 
day  was  out ; and  Harvey,  who  was  much  concerned  at  this, 
buried  them  under  two  tall  palm  trees,  not  far  from  Prospect 
Hill.  Going  that  way  some  time  after,  I found  he  had  placed 
a large  flat  stone  over  them,  and  had  found  means  to  scratch, 
rudely  enough,  this  epitaph  with  the  point  of  his  knife  : — 

“ Here  lyes  ye  bodys  of  two  little  apes, 

Short  was  their  lives,  ugly  their  shapes , 

One  would  ’a  been  Pug,  and  t’  other  Joko, 

But,  alas,  I couldn’t  rear  ’em  on  cocoa. 

T.  H.  1739. 


54 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


CHAPTER  XII. 

HOW  MUCH  GOODNESS  GOES  TO  FORGIVENESS. 

[JR  trial  of  skill  being  thus  over,  we  resumed 
our  march,  and  soon  reached  the  shore  on  the 
S.S.E.  of  our  prison.  As  to  the  point  due 
south,  it  ran  up  into  rather  a high  cliff,  and 
would  have  cost  us  a difficult  climb  to  gain 
it.  We  now  found  ourselves  in  a little  cove, 
wherein  the  water  lay  very  still  under  this 
cliff : the  bottom  being  of  a fine  white  coral  sand,  shelving 
out  by  degrees ; not  getting  to  a great  depth,  as  we  judged, 
till  it  was  some  twelve  or  fifteen  yards  from  the  shore.  After 
that,  indeed,  we  could  see,  by  the  dark  line  below  the  water, 
that  it  went  sheer  down  into  deep  sea.  Also  we  noticed,  that 
in  a part  of  the  cliff  beyond  this  deep  -water  line,  appeared 
the  mouth  of  a very  low  cave,  scarcely  showing  two  feet  above 
the  sea  level.  So  that  at  first  we  doubted  its  being  a cave  at 
all,  and  took  it  for  some  dent  in  the  rock,  which,  at  that  part, 
overhung  it  as  steep  as  the  wall  of  a house.  But  shortly  we 
made  it  out  to  be  indeed  an  inlet  into  the  cliff,  from  the  hollow 
sound  of  the  water  inside  as  it  came  and  went,  though  the  cove 
was  so  still,  as  I have  said. 

u Come,  boys !”  cried  I ; “ here  is  an  adventure  for  us : 
who  will  be  first  to  swim  into  yonder  cave’s  mouth  ?”  Hilton 
and  Tom  Harvey  were  forward  at  once : as  for  Harry  Gill, 
he  shook  his  head,  and  declared  he  had  known  enough 
of  caves  for  one  day.  But  second  thoughts  bade  me  re- 
mind them,  that  it  was  best  one  should  go  alone,  if  indeed 
it  were  worth  the  while  to  do  it  at  all : and  the  rest  stand 
on  the  -watch  to  see  no  harm  happened  to  him.  I did 
not  say  what  had  come  into  my  mind:  but  I own  I felt 
uneasy,  after  I had  proposed  the  swim,  lest  there  should  be 
any  sharks,  with  which  these  seas  are  known  to  abound, 
cruising  about  in  our  neighbourhood.  For  so  great  is  the 
swiftness  and  voracious  hunger  of  this  dreadful  fish,  as  no 
swimmer,  be  he  never  so  active,  can  escape  him : and  the 
number  and  sharpness  of  his  double  rows  of  teeth  is  such, 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


55 


that  it  needs  but  one  bite  from  him  to  take  off  a limb  as 
clean  as  any  surgeon  could  do  it.  There  was  a degree  of  safety, 
’t  is  true,  in  the  coral  reefs  which  seemed,  by  the  surf  dashing 
high  over  them,  to  surround  this  part  of  the  island  at  from 
iifty  to  a hundred  yards  off  shore.  Nevertheless,  I feared 
some  inlet  between  them  into  our  cove,  through  which  these 
gentlemen,  the  sharks  (sea-lawyers,  so  the  men  called  them), 
might  find  their  way,  though  a boat  would  be  stove  without 
remedy  in  the  passage,  by  the  violence  of  the  outer  sea. 

In  short,  it  was  a relief  to  me  when  Don  Manuel  took  up 
the  discourse,  saying  in  his  quiet  way : “I  thought,  my 
friends”  (he  had  left  off  calling  us  Senores,  at  least  mostly, 
since  we  had  known  each  other  so  much  better) ; “ I thought”, 
says  he,  “ we  agreed  to  look  without  delay  for  something  of 
a dwelling  to  house  ourselves  in.  Now  this  cave”,  he  added, 
smiling,  “ whatever  wonders  it  may  contain,  could  hardly 
afford  this  to  us  ; and” — 

“ Begging  your  pardon”,  says  old  rough  Prodgers,  “ I do’nt 
see  that  at  all : for  I ’ve  some  thoughts  of  living  in  it  myself”. 

At  this,  the  three  men  set  up  a shout  of  laughter,  and 
began  to  banter  him,  as  if  he  were  never  to  hear  the  end  of 
it.  One  called  him  the  hermit  of  the  cave,  another  the  old 
man  of  the  sea.  Harvey  said,  he  would  grow  into  Neptune, 
or  become  finned,  or  at  least  web-footed,  or  a Triton ; Hilton 
declared  the  fishes  would  come  and  ask  him  to  reign  over 
them  : “ and  then”,  says  Gill,  “ we  shall  see  his  majesty  drive 
out  for  an  airing  in  a turtle’s  shell  for  a coach,  drawn  by 
six  sword-fish”.  “ With  a body-guard  of  monkeys”,  added 
Hilton  again.  ‘‘Armed  with  fowling-pieces  that  kill  tre- 
mendously, and  all  by  chance”,  concluded  Gill. 

This  last  stroke  was  too  much  for  old  Richard,  who  started 
to  his  feet,  and  challenged  Harry  to  fight  him  on  the  spot* 
The  other  was  no  ways  backward  ; so  off  went  their  jackets, 
and  they  began  in  earnest,  before  Don  Manuel  and  I could 
interfere.  “ Good  humour,  ahoy !”  shouted  Tom  Harvey, 
holding  back  Prodgers,  while  the  priest  and  I tried  to  reason 
with  Gill.  In  short,  we  restored  them  to  peace  with  some 
difficulty ; and  only  by  Harvey  and  myself,  with  Hilton  (who 
joined  the  better  side,  this  time),  telling  them  in  a determined 
way,  if  they  offered  to  strike  another  blow,  we  would  knock 
them  both  down  and  tie  their  hands  behind  them. 

When  they  were  calmed  down,  though  there  was  some 
grumbling  still  on  either  side,  we  made  them  shake  hands, 
and  no  more  ado  about  it.  Don  Manuel  indeed  whispered  to 


56 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


me,  that  it  were  prudent  to  look  after  their  knives,  lest  they 
might  bear  one  another  a grudge,  and  so  take  worse  revenge. 
But  I answered  him  in  a like  whisper,  that ’t  was  the  nature 
of  a jack  tar  to  knock  his  man  down  in  the  first  blush  of  a 
quarrel,  and  then  help  him  up  again ; that  when  once  they 
had  shaken  hands  after  a fight,  where  even  they  might  have 
gone  within  an  inch  of  murthering  one  another,  they  would  be 
the  best  of  friends  and  messmates  the  next  moment,  each 
ready  to  risk  his  life  to  save  the  other’s ; that,  as  to  grudge 
borne  for  a fair  blow,  ’t  was  a thing  unknown  among  them, 
as  little  thought  oji  as  to  fire  into  an  enemy’s  ship  after  she 
had  struck  her  flag  and  you  had  taken  her  in  tow. 

All  this  seemed  to  surprise  him  at  the  time ; and  he  plainly 
thought  it  over,  as  I could  judge  by  his  manner : but  there 
was  no  leisure  then  to  pursue  it.  Only,  next  afternoon,  as 
we  walked  together  at  a little  distance  from  the  rest,  he  took 
up  the  discourse  again,  as  I will  here  relate. 

He  said  then  to  me : “ Senor  Owen,  a strange  thing  was 
that  you  told  me  yesterday  about  anger  and  fighting.  In  my 
country,  it  gives  the  priests  no  small  work  to  try  and  persuade 
people  to  forgive  injuries,  as  these  two  men  now  seem  to  have 
forgiven  and  forgotten  too.  In  Spain,  I am  sorry  to  say, 
owing  to  our  hot  Spanish  blood,  when  a man  thinks  he  has 
received  an  affront  from  another,  his  first  impulse  is  to  vow 
revenge,  and  too  often  he  begins  planning  how  to  compass  it. 
If  he  abandons  himself  to  this  evil  passion,  and  neglects  the 
warnings  of  conscience,  he  will  keep  this  settled  purpose  in 
his  heart,  aye,  sometimes  for  years,  till  he  meets  or  makes  the 
opportunity ; and  then  will  wreak  his  vengeance  to  the  full. 
Now,  how  different  is  the  conduct  of  these  seamen ! They 
seem  as  good  friends  again  as  ever,  after  the  hard  knocks 
they  gave  each  other”. 

“ That  they  are”,  I answered ; u and  believe  me,  if  either 
Prodgers  or  Gill  were  to  fall  into  any  danger,  the  other  would 
pull  him  out  of  it,  if  he  could,  at  the  risk  of  life  or  limb”. 

“ God  forgive  me,  then,  for  a harsh  judgment”,  said  the 
priest,  striking  his  breast  a little ; “ I find  they  are  much 
better  Christians  than  I took  them  to  be”. 

I could  scarce  help  smiling  at  the  notion  of  these  men  being 
good  Christians ; but  I answered  him  respectfully  (indeed  I 
respected  him  as  much  for  his  humbly  accusing  himself,  as  for 
the  other  qualities  I had  marked  in  him),  and  said,  shaking 
my  head : 

“ I fear,  sir,  that  the  most  of  the  Christianity  among  us  is 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


57 


wrapped  within  your  reverence’s  cloak:  though  we  never 
have  professed  anything  else,  to  be  sure.  Yet  I know  not 
how  much  we  have  practised  it ; and  I know,  in  many  ways 
we  have  practised  the  clean  contrary”. 

“ But  how  do  you  tell  me”,  answers  he  quickly,  for  I could 
see  he  now  took  the  character  of  the  men  warmly  to  heart; 
“ how  do  you  tell  me,  Sehor  Owen,  that  they  are  not  good 
Christians,  since  they  have  performed  one  of  the  most 
bounden  duties  of  a Christian,  and  what  is  sometimes  one 
of  the  hardest,  forgiving  injuries,  as  they  did  but  yesterday?” 

“ Well,  sir”,  said  I,  and  felt  rather  puzzled  how  to  answer 
him  : “ I am  no  great  divine,  that  is  certain.  You  asked  us 
yesterday  what  a priest  is : now,  let  me  ask,  what  do  you 
mean  by  a Christian  ?” 

“ A brief  question,  friend”,  replied  the  priest,  “ and  a long 
answer,  if  answered  fully.  I want  to  know,  for  my  part, 
why  these  brave  men  are  not  to  be  reckoned  good  Christians, 
inasmuch  as  they  forgive  ?” 

“ Because”,  answered  I,  readily,  “ it  costs  them  nothing  to 
do  it” 

“ Ah”,  says  he,  drawing  a long  breath,  “ costs  them  nothing, 
you  say?” 

“ Nothing  whatsoever,  sir.  ’Tis  part  of  their  rough-and- 
tumble  life  to  knock  down  and  be  knocked  down  in  turn  ; and 
when  they  jump  up  again,  all  is  forgotten  in  the  tuning  of  a 
fiddle”. 

The  priest  seemed  not  quite  to  understand  my  expressions  ; 
so  I explained  my  meaning  in  other  words,  and  then  con- 
tinued : 

“Now  virtue,  I believe,  sir,  is  doing  good,  or  keeping  from 
evil,  in  spite  of  the  difficulty  we  feel  in  acting  thus.  Am  I 
right  ?” 

“ Certainly”,  answered  the  priest. 

“ So,  if  I do  a thing  that  is  good  in  itself,  without  finding 
it  difficult,  but  do  it  merely  in  an  off-hand  way,  as  I would 
hand  my  neighbour  a portion  at  dinner,  when  I had  enough 
and  to  spare ; there  would  not  be  much  goodness  in  that  ?” 

“ There  may  be  a natural  goodness”,  says  Don  Manuel,  as 
if  he  thought  much  while  he  said  the  words  ; that  cannot  be 
called  supernatural”. 

“ What  do  you  mean,  sir”,  said  I,  surprised  in  my  turn, 
“ by  supernatural  goodness  ? I thought  miracles  had  ceased  ; 
and  a miracle  is  something  supernatural” 

“ I will  tell  you  another  time”,  says  he,  smiling  again. 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


58 


CHAPTER  XIII. 

A LESSON  OUT  OF  A SHARK’S  MOUTH. 

LL  this  I have  set  down  here ; though,  to  go 
by  the  order  of  time,  it  should  be  related 
after.  But  now,  taking  up  the  thread  of  our 
adventures,  as  we  ranged  about  our  cove, 
Tom  Harvey,  who  had  got  out  on  a ledge  of 
rock  that  divided  it  from  another  inlet  to  the 
north-east,  called  to  us,  he  had  found  a 
skeleton  lying  in  shallow  water.  We  started  at  this  sudden 
news  ; our  minds  running  back  on  the  old  apprehensions  of 
some  savage  inhabitants  of  our  island ; and  we  thought  here 
might  be  one.  of  their  dead,  drowned  by  accident  or  killed  in 
war.  However,  when  we  got  to  where  Harvey  stood,  looking 
down  into  the  water  beneath  us,  which  here  was  about  four 
feet  in  depth,  we  saw  the  skeleton  of  a large  fish,  partly 
fallen  in  pieces,  and  the  tail  part  disjointed,  lying  here  and 
there  on  the  white  sand.  The  flesh  (or  fish,  rather)  was 
as  completely  gone  as  though  it  had  been  picked  clean  by 
smaller  fishes,  which  indeed  was  the  case  in  all  likelihood. 
But  the  head-bones  and  jaws  were  entire,  pointing  inland; 
and  as  the  body  of  the  fish  was  turned  on  its  side,  I judged 
it  had  pushed  so  far  into  the  cove  in  pursuit  of  some  prey, 
and  had  stuck  fast  on  the  sand  while  seizing  it,  or  been  left 
by  the  ebb  of  a high  tide  after  gorging  it : the  mouth  of  the 
shark  (and  a large  shark  this  plainly  was),  being  so  formed, 
and  so  far  under  the  snout,  that  it  cannot  seize  nor  swallow 
its  prey  but  when  lying  on  its  back  or  side. 

Don  Manuel,  when  I made  him  observe  this,  remarked 
how  the  providence  of  God,  by  so  ordering  it,  prevented  this 
tremendous  fish  from  thinning  out  all  other  inhabitants  of 
the  ocean ; setting  bounds  to  his  power  of  devouring,  when 
there  were  no  bounds  to  his  appetite  and  cruelty.  But  I, 
meantime,  full  of  other  thoughts,  saw  a valuable  prize  in  this 
discovery.  “Here,  boys!”  cried  I,  “here  is  what  will  turn 
to  our  account  when  the  powder  and  shot  are  gone”. 

“ How  so  ?”  asked  they  all;  looking  down  into  the  water. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


59 


“ See  those  teeth”,  continued  I ; “ and  tell  me  if  they  will 
not  make  the  best  of  arrow-points  for  such  bamboo  arrows  as 
we  ate  our  dinners  with  to-day”. 

11  Hurrah  for  the  bows  and  arrows !”  cried  Hilton  ; and 
with  that  he  jumped  down  into  the  water,  only  throwing  off 
his  jacket,  and  was  followed  by  Harvey  and  Gill.  They 
were  determined,  it  seems,  to  have  the  shark  piecemeal  on 
land.  And  no  light  job  they  had  of  it ; as  well  from  the 
depth  in  which  it  lay,  of  four  foot  water,  as  by  reason  of  the 
size  of  the  fish  itself : the  parts  that  hung  together  being  no 
less  than  ten  feet  in  length  ; and  the  tail  that  was  broken  up 
would  have  made  the  monster  from  fifteen  to  eighteen  feet  in 
the  Whole.  Well,  having  to  dip  their  heads  quite  under 
water  each  time  they  pulled  at  a piece  of  the  skeleton,  and 
not  being  used  to  such  diving,  though  all  of  them  good  swim- 
mers, they  were  exhausted  to  that  degree,  they  were  forced 
to  give  over,  without  getting  more  than  two  or  three  joints 
of  the  back-bone,  which  they  threw  up  to  us  on  the  rock. 
The  reason  was,  that  the  greater  part  of  this  sea  monster, 
that  is,  the  ribs  and  spine,  were  firmly  bedded  in  the  sand, 
whereby  we  concluded  he  had  lain  there  some  time,  having 
settled  down  into  the  sand  by  degrees.  Seeing  they  could 
not  succeed  better  for  this  turn,  I called  to  them  to  leave  the 
body  of  the  fish,  and  try  for  his  head : so,  after  much 
effort,  pushing  with  the  hand-spike,  and  hacking  with  their 
knives  (all  being  under  water,  and  hard  to  manage),  they  got 
the  head  free,  with  no  little  trouble,  from  the  neck  joint,  and 
dragged  it  out  with  them  to  land. 

It  might  have  made  any  one’s  hair  stand  on  end  to  view 
the  monstrous  jaws  of  this  fish’s  skull,  armed  each  of  them 
with  two  rows  of  teeth  as  sharp  as  knives,  and  whiter  and 
more  polished  than  the  knife -handle,  aye,  at  any  nobleman’s 
table.  When  we  felt  the  edges  of  these  teeth,  and  cut  a 
piece  of  twine  readily,  by  sawing  it  across  them,  it  was  easy 
to  credit  all  the  accounts  of  what  a shark  can  do  ; which  I 
(for  one)  had  put  down  among  other  unlikely  sailor’s  tales. 
We  closed  the  jaws,  and  opened  them  again,  marking  how 
the  rows  of  teeth  shut  upon  one  another,  the  outer  on  the 
outer,  and  the  inner  on  the  inner,  so  that  what  was  not  clean 
cut  asunder  in  these  cruel  jaws  would  be  mangled  and  torn, 
as  by  a double  machinery  of  pointed  knives. 

“ A pretty  fellow”,  at  length,  said  Hilton  ; “ a pretty  cus- 
tomer, this,  to  meet  with  on  our  swim  into  the  sea-cave  ! 
We  should  soon  be  past  praying  for,  if  he  got  a snap  at  us”. 


60 


THE  ADVENTURES  OK 


“Past  praying  for?”  asked  Don  Manuel,  not  understanding 
his  way  of  speaking.  “ How,  friend,  can  any  one  be  that, 
who  is  not  certainly  in  heaven,  nor  certainly  in  hell  ?” 

“ I mean”,  says  Hilton,  a little  surly  at  being  taken  up, 
though  it  was  so  gently  ; “ I mean  we  should  surely  go  down 
at  once  to  Davy  Jones’s  locker”.* 

“ Whither  ?”  asks  the  priest  again ; and  it  was  plain  he 
wanted  to  understand  what  the  man  meant. 

“ Why,  of  course”,  broke  in  Prodgers  in  his  own  way,  “ any 
of  us  who  got  into  such  a brute’s  jaws  as  that,  would  be  soon 
dead,  and  something  worse  : that ’s  what  he  means,  I take  it”. 

Don  Manuel  looked  graver  than  was  common  with  him ; and 
turning  upon  old  Prodgers,  mildly,  and  quite  calm,  he  says : 
“ Comrade,  there  is  indeed  one  thing  worse,  after  such  a 
death  : and  there  are  jaws  more  cruel  to  fall  into  than  those 
of  a shark.  If  you  meant  to  allude  to  those  solemn,  whole- 
some truths,  we  thank  you  for  putting  us  in  mind  of  them”. 

Every  one  felt  what  he  would  say,  and  there  was  a silence 
amongst  us.  Prodgers  had  no  answer ; even  he  was  subdued, 
this  time,  by  the  priest’s  manner  of  speaking  his  few  words.  But 
it  was  Don  Manuel’s  way  to  make  us  grave  and  gay  by  turns  : 
though ’t  was  often  a puzzle  to  me  to  account  to  myself  what 
there  was  about  him  that  drew  us  so  to  follow  his  leadings. 
Now,  after  a little  pause,  (for  he  seemed  to  wish  us  to  think 
on  what  he  had  just  said),  he  added,  more  cheerfully : 

“ Well,  my  friends,  acknowledge  that  the  Catholic  Church 
is  a gentle  and  compassionate  mother : for  she  never  reckons 
any  to  be  past  praying  for , as  long  as  she  can  have  a hope 
they  have  died  in  grace”. 


* An  expression  among  sailors  for  the  bottom  of  the  sea. — Ed. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


61 


><3<X>ooOooOooOocX>coOooOooOocx  >oo<>coOoo<>ooOooOooOo 


CHAPTER  XIV. 


WE  DO  SOMETHING  UNCOMMON. 


?UT  for  the  moment”,  continued  Don  Manuel, 
what  we  have  never  settled  is : where  shall 
we  pitch  our  tents  ? For,  like  the  patriarchs, 
we  have  the  land  all  before  us,  to  choose 
what  spot  we  will.  Now  you,  friend  Owen, 
opened  the  parliament  this  morning  with  a 
neat  little  speech ; but  we  did  not  finish  the 
debate  at  that  time.  ’T  is  an  important  question  for  us,  how 
and  where  to  lodge  ourselves ; so  I vote  we  continue  it  now. 
And  who  will  give  us  any  ideas  on  the  subject?” 

Having  thus  put  it  before  us,  he  seemed  waiting  for  us  to 
speak. 

“ Eldest  go  first”,  says  Ned  Hilton,  nodding  at  Prodgers. 

“ Well,  then”,  answered  old  Richard,  gruffly,  “ I mean  to 
take  to  a sea-faring  life,  and  build  myself  a boat  to  fish  in, 
and  steer  round  the  island”. 

No  objection  was  made  to  this ; for  I believe  most  of  us  felt 
it  would  be,  as  the  old  saying  goes,  “ a good  riddance  of  bad 
rubbish”,  if  Prodgers  were  to  take  himself  off  thus.  When  I 
say  most,  there  was  one  who  (I  am  sure)  did  not  feel  this ; but 
it  was  not  myself. 

“ So  you  ’ll  make  the  cave  your  boat-house  ?”  asked  Tom 
Harvey : “ the  difficulty  will  be,  how  to  get  in,  or  out  again”. 

“That’s  my  plan”,  Prodgers  went  on,  not  minding  him; 
“ and  while  I ’m  building  my  boat,  I shall  lodge  somewhere 
about  the  rocks  in  this  cove”. 

“ Now,  Harry”,  said  I,  “ we  listen  to  your  plan”. 

“Well”,  answers  he,  “I  think  I shall  go  across  country, 
and  see  how  I like  the  part  we  came  to  on  our  first  landing. 
There  you  have  shade,  and  clear  water,  as  well  as  our  water- 
jars,  and  all  with  a westerly  aspect.  Besides”,  added  Gill, 
and  looked  very  earnest  as  he  said  it,  “ that  might  be  our 
best  chance  of  seeing  a ship,  and  making  signals  to  be  taken 
off  this  place”. 

I confess,  this  idea  of  Gill’s  had  more  than  once  occurred 


62 


TIIE  ADVENTURES  OF 


to  me ; in  my  mind  I had  debated  which  side  of  onr  island 
had  the  better  prospect  of  some  stray  vessel  touching  there, 
or  sighting  it  from  a distance.  It  was  plain  that  what  Gill 
now  said  had  a great  effect  on  the  men,  who  listened  eagerly, 
and  remained  silent  when  he  had  done. 

“ And  you,  Hilton  ?”  said  I,  at  length. 

Ned  Hilton  was  one  of  those  who  seldom  thought  for  him- 
self ; so  he  just  answered,  he  would  go  for  the  present  with 
Harry  Gill,  and  look  about  him. 

“ Now,  friends”,  says  the  priest,  taking  up  our  debate, 
“ will  you  let  me  give  you  a word  of  counsel?” 

We  listened  to  him ; so  he  went  on. 

u Let  us  keep  together,  then”,  says  he,  “ as  we  first  deci- 
ded; yet  not  so  as  to  dwell  under  the  same  roof.  Tastes 
differ,  my  dear  friends,  and  dispositions  too : we  may  best 
avoid  little  rubs  and  jars  by  having  each  our  own  hut,  meet- 
ing every  day  for  dinner,  and  for  another  thing,  which  we 
have  not  thought  of  much,  as  yet”. 

“ And  what ’s  that  ?”  enquired  Gill. 

“ Prayer”,  says  Don  Manuel,  laying  a great  stress  on  the 
word ; “ prayer,  my  companions,  which  we  owe  to  that 
bountiful  Lord  who  created  us,  and  has  now  kept  us  from  so 
many  dangers.  I do  not  think  we  have  said  one  prayer 
together  since  we  have  been  on  this  island — shall  we  not 
begin  ? Shall  we  not  sq  much  as  thank  Him,  nor  ask  Him  to 
preserve  us  still  ?”  And  he  looked  round  on  us  as  he  spoke. 

Any  one  of  those  he  addressed,  I believe,  would  not  have 
refused  to  kneel  down  with  the  good  priest,  had  he  been  alone 
with  him.  But  there  is  a kind  of  shame,  of  which  the  devil 
is  the  author,  that  holds  men  back  from  manfully  professing 
that  they  feel  the  presence  of  God.  And  we  were  all  so 
hardened  in  wickedness,  and  knew  each  other  to  be  so,  as 
made  none  of  us  willing  to  be  the  first  in  this  new  occupation. 
Prayer  was  what  we  had  not  practised,  I may  say,  for  a length 
of  time ; and  we  were  as  awkward  at  beginning  as  a school 
boy  who  is  called  up  to  repeat  his  task.  We  felt  (to  judge 
them  by  myself)  it  would  be  a kind  of  hypocrisy  to  pray,  and 
then  go  back  and  forget  Him  to  whom  we  prayed,  as  completely 
as  ever.  And  could  we  pledge  ourselves  to  be  good  and  de- 
vout, and  unlearn  our  bad  habits,  and  begin  to  serve  God  ? 
In  a word,  the  enemy,  as  he  often  does,  held  us  back  from 
the  first  right  step,  by  representing  it  to  us  as  insur- 
mountable from  the  difficulty  of  it. 

Thus  we  were  all  ashamed  of  each  other  as  regards  prayer, 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


63 


when  we  had  not  been  so  in  onr  cursing  and  sin.  But  I 
resolved  to  shake  this  off,  and  set  something  of  an  example. 
So  placing  myself  on  my  knees,  and  joining  my  hands  (and 
I verily  think  the  last  time  that  had  been  done  was  by  my 
mother  on  her  death-bed,  five  years  before),  I bowed  to  the 
priest,  and  said  : 

Well,  sir  ; then  let  us  pray”. 

Tom  Harvey,  as  I looked  at  him,  shuffled  a little  ; then, 
as  if  he  were  doing  a strange  thing,  he  blushed  deep,  like  a 
child  that  is  caught  stealing  sugar,  and  went  down  on  his 
knees  beside  me. 

As  I guessed,  so  it  turned  out.  Ned  Hilton  made  the 
third,  though  with  a good  deal  of  hesitation.  But  Gill  and 
Prodgers  stood  where  they  were,  with  their  hands  in  their 
pockets,  looking  straight  before  them,  and  whistling,  as 
sailors  are  used  to  whistle  for  a wind  ; but  Prodgers  -was 
the  more  dogged  in  this,  and  Harry  rather  less  so. 

“ O my  God !”  exclaimed  the  priest  on  his  knees,  his  hands 
clasped,  and  looking  up  to  heaven,  u let  there  be  none  of  us 
resisting  a good  inspiration  : no  mere  spectators  in  this  our 
first  united  prayer!” 

Still  the  two  men  did  not  budge. 

“ Sehor  Gill”,  pleaded  he,  with  such  a manner  as  I think 
few  could  withstand,  u do  you  remember  how  lately  you 
were  all  but  gone  into  the  other  world,  if  that  kind  Pro- 
vidence, to  whom  you  now  refuse  to  bend  the  knee,  had  not 
guided  our  steps  after  you  in  time  to  find  you  lying  senseless 
in  the  cave  ?” 

This  shook  Harry  Gill,  as  I could  see ; but  his  pride  was 
not  yet*broken. 

Just  then,  Tom  Harvey,  who  was  kneeling  beside  me, 
caught  hold  on  my  arm,  pointing  towards  the  cove.  I 
followed  his  hand  with  my  eyes,  and  plainly  saw  the  back-fin 
of  a large  shark  steering  about  over  the  surface.  He  was 
right  between  that  point  of  rock  whence  Harvey  and  the  rest 
had  jumped  into  the  water,  and  the  low-mouthed  cave  in 
the  opposite  cliff,  to  which  they  had  well-nigh  set  out  to 
swim. 

“ God  of  mercy  !”  cried  Harvey,  with  the  tears  in  his  eyes  ; 
“ and  wre  might  have  been  by  this  time  in  his  jaws.  Lord  be 
praised  for  His  goodness  to  us  poor  fellows”. 

“Amen”,  said  Hilton,  as  earnest  as  the  other.  ’T  was 
plain  that  Gill  too,  and  even  Prodgers,  felt  moved  at  this 
sight ; which  did  indeed  seem  like  a reprieve  to  a criminal 


G4 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


when  the  rope  is  round  his  neck,  and  he  just  going  to  be 
turned  off  the  ladder. 

“ Now,  O Lord !”  cried  out  Don  Manuel  from  the  depth  of 
his  heart:  “let  Thy  grace  at  length  triumph!” 

So  indeed  it  was.  Harry  Gill  fairly  gave  way  now,  and 
dropped  on  his  knees,  his  face  to  the  cove,  as  though  he  would 
keep  the  shark  before  his  eyes  to  animate  his  thankfulness. 
The  fish  was  steering  about,  up  and  down,  as  partly  to  seek 
his  food,  partly  to  play  and  bask  in  the  sun ; now  he  would 
break  the  water  into  ripples  with  slight  strokes  of  his  powerful 
tail,  then  he  would  float  lazily  again,  but  kept  so  near  the 
surface  of  the  water  that  the  high  back-fin  was  seen  above. 
He  was  plainly  of  the  white  shark  kind,  like  his  elder 
brother  whose  skull  was  in  our  keeping : and  this  kind  is 
the  fiercest  and  most  devouring  of  all  the  tribe. 

He  seemed  to  me  in  the  water,  what  a savage  bull  is  in  a 
field ; that  paces  up  and  down,  tearing  up  the  earth  and  sods 
with  his  hoofs,  lashing  his  sides  with  his  tail,  and  seeking 
some  one  on  whom  to  vent  his  rage.  As  I looked  at  that 
cruel  fish  (and  he  gave  us  opportunities  to  observe  him  at 
leisure),  I felt  more  real  gratitude  in  my  heart,  than  for  many 
a long  year,  to  our  Father  who  is  in  heaven,  and  rules  all 
things  above  and  below,  for  preserving  us  from  such  a mon- 
ster when  we  were  about  to  rush  into  his  very  jaws. 

We  now  waited  only  for  Prodgers:  as  to  the  rest  of  us, 
we  were  anxious,  some  more  and  some  less,  the  priest  should 
teach  us  how  to  pray.  I had  well-nigh  said,  the  shark  taught 
us  with  as  great  effect ; for  he  kept  moving  about  full  in 
view,  as  though  he  were  a living  witness,  before  our  very 
eyes,  of  the  good  providence  of  God  to  us  sinners.  And 
this  worked  in  Richard’s  mind,  till  he,  too,  could  resist  no 
longer.  He  rubbed  his  eye  with  the  back  of  his  hard  hand, 
and  slowly  went  down  on  one  knee,  as  if  he  would  have 
helped  it  if  he  could,  but  was  pressed  down  by  some  angel’s 
hand  upon  his  shoulder.  Only,  I must  remark,  as  the  priest’s 
prayer  continued,  Richard  went  down  on  both  knees,  like  the 
rest  of  us. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


65 


CHAPTER  XV. 

PRAYER  HINDERS  NO  WORK. 

ON  Manuel  knew  human  nature  too  well  to 
make  this  first  prayer  of  ours  a long  one. 
But  he  poured  out  such  fervent  gratitude 
for  the  mercies  we  had  received,  and  so 
humbly  begged  pardon  for  our  want  of 
thankfnlness  ; he  made  for  us  such  protesta- 
tions of  amendment,  he  put  our  good  resolu- 
tions into  such  simple,  glowing  language,  that  our  very  hearts 
went  along  with  every  word : and  at  last  there  was  no  mis- 
taking the  men,  that  they  were  subdued  and  softened  to  a 
degree.  All  these  rough  sea-faring  men  wept  like  very  chil- 
dren before  the  priest  concluded ; and  I believe  every  one  of 
us  now  felt  a pure  pleasure  in  acknowledging  our  sins  and  the 
divine  mercies,  that  we  had  been  strangers  to  for  years,  if 
indeed  we  had  ever  felt  it  before.  I only  know  I was  in  a 
manner  transported  out  of  myself : a new  world  was  opening 
itself  to  me ; from  my  inmost  heart  there  rose  the  desire, 
“ Oh ! that  this  may  continue !”  Then  I turned  it  into  a 
prayer : u Good  Lord,  let  not  all  this  pass  away  again !” 

But  the  voice  of  the  priest  ceased ; and  there  was  silence 


66 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


among  us : so  deep  that  we  could  hear  (though  we  heeded  it 
not)  the  ripple  of  the  water  that  was  flowing  into  the  cave 
where  some  of  us  had  so  nigh  found  a cruel  death.  Every 
one  staid  on  his  knees,  as  though  he  were  afraid  to  break 
that  newly-found  holy  calm.  And,  as  I stole  a glance  round 
on  them,  surprised  at  this,  I saw  most  of  the  number  with 
their  eyes  closed,  as  men  who  pray  to  themselves,  or  pondered 
on  what  they  had  heard. 

It  may  be  as  surprising  to  others  as  (I  own)  it  was  to  me, 
to  find  a change  like  this  wrought  upon  such  rude  hearts, 
and  in  so  brief  a space.  But  they  that  will  put  all  things 
together ; as,  our  double  escape,  first  from  the  ship,  then  from 
this  monster  of  the  deep,  together  with  the  plenty  and  com- 
fortable prospects  (by  comparison)  we  had  found  on  this 
island,  our  security  from  savages,  as  also  the  influence  Don 
Manuel  had  gained  over  us  all,  and  our  solitude  itself,  the 
nurse  of  devotion  and  calm  thoughts : — I say,  let  any  one 
sum  up  the  total  of  this,  and  he  will,  in  some  measure,  cease 
to  wonder  at  what  I have  now  recorded. 

Be  that  as  it  may,  before  we  wearied  of  our  new  employ- 
ment, the  priest  stood  up  from  his  knees  again ; and,  turning 
to  Prodgers,  who  chanced  to  be  next  him  ; u My  dear  brother”, 
says  he,  “ we  have  given  thanks,  and  confessed  our  sins,  to 
our  common  Creator  and  Lord:  and  now  let  me  beg  your 
pardon  also,  and  through  you  to  the  rest,  for  any  want  of 
good  example  I may  have  given  you  since  we  have  known 
each  other.  You  have  heard”,  added  he,  with  a little  smile, 
“ and  heard  often,  I dare  say,  of  people  confessing  to  the 
priest ; well,  as  you  do  not  do  this,  here  is  the  priest  confess- 
ing to  the  people”.  So  saying,  he  laid  his  hands  on  Prodgers’ 
shoulders,  and  embraced  him  in  the  Spanish  fashion. 

“ Oh,  sir”,  faltered  out  Prodgers,  and  was  scarce  able  to 
speak,  for  his  voice  betrayed  his  emotion,  whether  he  would 
or  no : “ we ’ve  never  seen  anything  in  you,  I ’m  sure,  but 
what  was  good”.  And  a murmur  went  round  the  rest,  echo- 
ing the  same. 

“ Nay”,  says  Don  Manuel,  in  his  cheerful  way,  u we  will 
not  carry  this  on,  friends,  any  further.  But  at  least  shake 
hands  all  round ; and,  as  you  promised  to  stand  by  one  an- 
other as  companions  in  misfortune,  do  so  now  all  the  more  as 
companions  in  consolation  and  prayer”. 

Never,  I believe,  or  seldom,  was  there  such  a shaking  of 
hands  in  Europe  or  out  of  it.  The  men  all  joined  in  a ring, 
and  grasped  each  other’s  hands  hard,  while  the  tears  stood  in 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


67 


their  eyes,  and  they  looked  upward.  At  last  Hilton,  to 
express  himself,  or  get  rid  of  what  weighed  on  his  heart, 
quavered  out  part  of  a hymn  he  had  once  heard  (I  suppose) 
in  some  church  or  other : 

“ Praise  God,  from  whom  all  blessings  flow, 

Praise  Him,  all  creatures” — 

but  he  could  get  no  further : for  his  voice  shook,  and  there 
was  a silence  again. 

“ Now,  friends”,  cried  Don  Manuel  in  a sprightly  tone, 
“ having  done  this,  for  which  I humbly  thank  God  from  my 
heart,  let  us  think  of  our  good  friend,  the  shark  yonder. 
’T  is  time  to  look  after  him,  for  he  has  been  patient  to  wait 
for  us  all  this  while”. 

We  caught  up  our  guns,  eager  for  the  sport:  and  were 
marching  down  to  the  shore,  when  all  at  once  I bethought 
me.  “ Halt !”  cried  I ; “ though  I do  not  take  this  gentleman 
to  be  one  of  your  timorous  kind  among  fishes,  like  a shy 
trout  in  a pool,  that  hides  himself  among  weeds  and  stones, 
yet  there  may  be  such  a thing  as  frightening  even  a shark, 
after  all.  So  let  us  observe  some  generalship,  lest  we  lose 
him.  Our  best  chance  of  killing  is,  to  hit  him  in  the  head ; 
for  otherwise,  the  monster  has  as  many  lives  as  a cat,  and 
will  swim  off  easily  with  all  our  bullets  in  him,  and  laugh  at 
us  as  he  goes”.  “ I think,  though”,  observed  Harvey,  “ it 
were  well  if  one  of  us  aimed  at  the  heart  or  so,  to  have  a 
double  chance  with  him”.  “ But  how  will  you  get  at  his 
heart  ?”  asked  Harry  Gill ; “ for  he ’s  a sturdy  sort  of  fellow, 
mind ; and  I don’t  think”,  he  added,  letting  his  carelessness 
get  the  better  of  him  again,  “ you  ’ll  be  likely  to  soften  him 
as  we  were,  by  asking  him” — Don  Manuel  laid  his  hand, 
quite  friendly,  on  his  shoulder,  and  Gill  stopped  at  once, 
reddened,  and  looked  down. 

“ The  only  way”,  said  the  priest,  without  a pause,  saving 
Harry  from  this  little  confusion  being  noticed,  “ the  only  way 
to  hit  him  in  the  body,  while  he  keeps  under  water,  is  to  fire 
into  the  water,  a little  on  this  side  of  him”.  “ Why  so  ?”  asks 
Prodgers,  questioning  everything  again,  though  not  in  his 
former  rough  way.  “ Because”,  answered  the  Don,  “ by 
that  means  you  make  the  water  convey  your  bullet  at  an 
angle  to  the  mark  you  would  hit,  which  it  does  almost  as  free 
and  forcibly  as  the  air  itself”. 

“Like  the  gun  that  could  shoot  round  a corner”,  says 
Hilton,  laughing.  “And  so  it  could”,  replied  the  priest, 


68 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


good  humouredly,  “ if  there  was  a wall,  or  tree,  at  the  corner, 
for  the  ball  to  glance  from.  Did  you  never  hear  how  William 
Rufus  met  his  death  ?” 

“ I never  heard  of  him  at  all”,  says  Hilton. 


CHAPTER  XVI. 

WE  FIRE  INTO  THE  ENEMY’S  CAMP,  AND  RETREAT  TO  OUR  OWN. 

EE  shark,  all  this  time,  showed  himself  no 
ways  disposed  to  get  out  of  our  reach.  On  the 
contrary,  I think  he  had  caught  a sight  of  us, 
and  was  waiting  to  see  what  chance  he  had  of 
making  a supper  off  some  of  our  number: 
this  I judged  from  his  lifting  his  head  ever 
and  again  over  the  water,  turning  his  eye  in 
our  direction ; for  it  must  be  observed,  the  shark  can  turn  his 
eye  every  way,  like  a human  creature,  which  gives  him  that 
cruel  look  he  has,  as  though  he  meant  mischief.  We  thanked 
him  for  his  good  intentions,  but  resolved  to  be  even  with  him, 
if  we  could  any  way  compass  it.  So  we  formed  our  plan  of 
attack  as  follows : 

Harry  Gill  was  to  get  out  on  the  ledge  of  the  rock  from 
which  Harvey  had  seen  the  skeleton  in  the  shallow ; only  he 
was  to  go  further  out  from  the  cove,  to  be  ready  to  cut  off  the 
enemy’s  retreat,  should  we  only  succeed  in  wounding  him ; 
and  to  give  his  worship  a parting  salute,  to  finish  him  off. 
This  being  agreed  on,  Harry  started,  to  take  up  his  post,  and 
be  in  readiness : but  we  called  out  to  him  to  beware  of  his 
footing,  and  keep  away  from  the  edge  (the  sea-weed  being  as 
slippery  hereabouts  as  on  the  other  side  of  the  island)  ; lest  a 
false  step  should  bring  him  more  than  a ducking,  and  cast  him 
into  the  jaws  of  this  monster,  who  kept  his  eye  on  him  all  the 
while  as  he  drew  nearer,  and  swam  nearer  himself  also,  edging 
towards  the  low  reef  of  rocks  on  which  Gill  was  picking  his  way. 
However,  we  needed  not  to  caution  him ; for  the  danger  was 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


69 


full  in  view,  and  he  -went  on  steadily,  till  he  judged  he  had 
got  far  enough  out  from  the  strand  of  our  cove.  Then  he 
stood  still,  and  looked  back  to  us,  waving  his  hand. 

As  for  the  rest,  we  drew  up  in  a line,  ready  to  give  our 
shark  a volley  on  the  first  sign  of  his  sheering  off.  But,  while 
we  waited  for  the  moment  to  fire,  Don  Manuel  came  in  again 
with  a word  of  counsel. 

“ Throw  him,  friends”,  says  he,  “ a piece  of  the  monkey ; 
and  then  fire  at  his  heart,  as  he  turns  to  seize  it”. 

So  said,  so  done:  Prodgers,  who  had  the  best  right  to 
claim  the  beast  he  had  shot,  took  up  a leg,  and  pitched  it  into 
the  water  with  a good  splash,  and  the  bait  fell  in,  about  half- 
way between  the  fish  and  the  strand;  but  no  sooner  had  it 
touched  the  water,  than  our  friend  the  shark  darted  at  it  like 
a cat  after  a mouse,  lashing  the  sea  into  foam  as  he  swam  to 
it.  <£  Now,  be  ready ! ” cries  Don  Manuel ; and  we  levelled 
our  pieces  at  once.  We  had  not  to  wait  an  instant;  for  the 
shark,  after  trying  to  gorge  the  bait  as  he  darted  at  it,  turned 
on  his  side  to  take  it  into  his  jaws ; and  then  the  under  side  of 
this  huge  fish  was  a fair  mark  for  our  bullets. 

<£  Fire ! ” shouted  I,  and  pulled  my  trigger.  So  did  the 
rest,  with  great  steadiness ; and  thus  the  two  fowling  pieces 
and  my  rifle  (for  we  had  loaded  the  old  condemned  piece  for 
this  turn)  were  all  discharged  at  once ; and  all  took  effect,  as 
we  found  afterwards. 

It  was  getting  so  dark,  the  sun  being  now  sunk  on  the 
other  side  of  the  island,  as  we  judged  by  the  loss  of  light,  that 
we  could  just  see  the  whiteness  of  the  creature’s  side  as  he 
turned  to  gorge  his  prey,  and  the  flashing  of  the  water  as  we 
hit  him.  But  we  could  hear,  plain  enough,  the  kind  of  snort 
he  gave,  from  pain  and  rage,  as  he  shot  off  towards  the  open 
sea  on  receiving  our  charge.  It  was  plain,  also,  as  we  saw 
from  the  motion  of  the  back-fin  above  the  water  level,  that  he 
swam  feebly ; indeed,  spite  of  the  great  strength  and  power 
of  life  possessed  by  this  monster,  he  must  have  been  badly 
wounded,  what  with  my  rifle  ball,  and  the  large  shot  from  the 
other  pieces. 

“ Now,  Gill ! now,  Harry ! ” cried  out  every  one,  as  the 
enemy  sheared  off  from  us  : “ do  n’t  let  him  go,  man  ! Why 
won’t  you  fire  ? Like  a land-lubber,  as  you  are”,  added  Prod- 
gers, in  a heat. 

But  Gill  took  steady  aim,  kneeling  on  one  knee,  and 
propped  his  gun  securely : then,  as  the  fish  went  by  him,  he 
delivered  his  fire  like  a true  marksman,  aiming  at  his  head. 


70 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


There  came  another  kind  of  bubbling  snort,  louder  than  the 
first ; and  the  shark  dived,  or  sank,  under  water,  we  could  not 
tell  which. 

“ ’T  is  all  over  for  to-night”,  observed  Hilton : and  so 
indeed  it  was,  for  we  could  now  scarce  see  the  length  of  the 
muzzle  as  we  pointed  our  guns ; and  there  being  no  moon  at 
this  time,  the  sooner  we  prepared  to  encamp  again  the  better 
for  us.  So  we  followed  our  plan  of  last  night ; gathering  our 
brushwood,  though  we  found  it  not  in  such  plenty  on  this 
part  of  the  island,  nor  of  such  good  stuff  to  burn  readily. 
When  this  was  lit,  we  unpacked  our  supper,  and  spread  it  on 
the  ground.  Then,  what  with  the  monkey,  which  we  ate  (I 
must  say)  with  our  eyes  shut,  and  wry  faces,  what  with  the 
remains  of  our  peccary  and  bread-fruit,  helped  also  by  the 
cocoa  nuts,  we  made  out  our  meal  pretty  well.  But  all  our 
talk  was  of  the  sea-monster,  and  what  chance  we  had  of 
finding  him  in  the  morning.  Gill  made  sure  of  having  hit 
him  in  the  head ; and  indeed  I hoped  so  too,  from  the  noise 
he  made,  and  his  going  down  at  once  on  getting  the  shot. 
“ That”,  said  Hilton,  11  with  what  he  had  got  before  from  the 
rest  of  us,  would  be  enough  to  settle  him  quietly”.  Tom 
Harvey  thought  he  had  managed  to  get  out  to  sea ; and  so, 
though  he  might  be  dead  as  a door-nail,  we  should  be  none 
the  better  of  him.  “Well”,  said  I,  taking  up  the  matter, 
“ if  we  get  him  after  all,  he  will  be  no  small  prize  in  many 
ways”.  “ What  will  he  serve  for”,  asked  Prodgers,  “ more 
than  to  rid  us  of  one  enemy,  while  there  may  be  more  of  his 
tribe  cruising  on  the  same  tack?” 

On  this  I told  them,  if  we  could  capture  our  fish  to-morrow, 
he  would  serve  many  useful  ends  at  once.  First,  his  teeth 
would  furnish  us  with  more  arrow-heads ; and  added  to  the 
stock  we  had,  would  fill  our  quivers,  had  we  been  so  many 
Tartars.  Then,  the  liver  is  known  to  yield  an  abundance  of 
oil ; sometimes  to  several  gallons.  u If  only  we  were  Russians, 
instead  of  Tartars”,  says  Gill,  “ that  would  do  well  enough”. 
“ Besides”,  continued  I,  “ if  we  can  anyhow  contrive  to  skin 
him,  his  rough  skin  will  make  shagreen  for  us,  that  will  come 
in  useful  for  more  things  than  I can  tell  at  this  moment.  And 
his  bones  will  turn  into  several  tools  we  can  hardly  do  without : 
as,  gimlets,  files,  pincers,  and  I know  not  what”. 

In  a word,  like  many  housewives,  more  eager  than  expe- 
rienced, reckoning  their  chickens  before  they  are  hatched,  Ave 
disposed  of  our  shark,  all  to  his  bones,  while  as  yet  we  knew 
not  if  we  should  ever  see  him  again.  And,  having  thus  cut 
him  up  and  finished  him,  we  finished  our  supper  likewise. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


71 


u Now,  my  dear  friends”,  says  Don  Manuel ; “ we  have 
proclaimed  ourselves  this  day  to  be  Christians,  with  a sense  of 
gratitude  in  our  hearts  : and  we  shall  go  to  rest  as  Christians, 
I am  sure  of  it”. 

This  time,  ’t  was  no  new  idea  to  us  to  fall  to  our  prayers. 
Our  good  priest  knelt  down,  making  the  sign  of  the  cross  on 
his  forehead  and  breast ; wherein,  I observed,  Hilton  tried  to 
do  like  him,  though  awkwardly  enough.  Then  Don  Manuel, 
adoring  the  presence  of  God,  and  thanking  Him  anew  for  His 
protection  of  us,  proceeded  to  examine  his  conscience  aloud, 
while  we  listened  on  our  knees,  wondering;  this  being  a 
thing  stranger  to  us  even  than  prayer.  He  asked  himself  how 
he  had  spent  that  day  ; did  he  give  his  first  thoughts  to  God  ? 
— how  often  had  he  recalled  the  divine  presence  ? — what  had 
been  his  thoughts,  his  words,  his  actions  ? — had  he  carefully 
kept  himself  from  sin,  whether  of  anger  or  any  other  kind  ? 
(here  old  Prodgers  gave  a gruff  sort  of  u hem  !”  that  nearly 
set  Hilton  off  laughing :)  had  he  considered  others  with  cha- 
rity, or  provoked  them  to  offend  God?  (and  at  this,  Harry 
Gill  got  rather  red)  : and  so  on  through  a few  other  questions, 
which  were  almost  as  strange  to  us  as  though  he  were  speak- 
ing a foreign  tongue.  Then  lastly,  the  priest  asked  himself, 
what  were  his  resolutions  for  the  time  to  come,  if  his  life  was 
spared  through  the  night  ? — did  he  detest  his  sins  because 
they  were  displeasing  to  the  good  God  ? and,  breaking  forth 
with  fervour,  he  then  said : 

“ O my  God ! I am  heartily  sorry  for  having  offended  Thee ; 
and  I detest  my  sins  most  sincerely,  because  they  are  dis- 
pleasing to  Thee,  my  God ! who  art  so  deserving  of  all  my 
love  for  Thy  infinite  goodness  and  most  amiable  perfections  : 
and  I firmly  purpose,  by  the  help  of  Thy  grace,  never  more  to 
offend  Thee,  and  carefully  to  avoid  all  occasions  of  sin”. 

With  our  souls  thus  refreshed  by  prayer,  we  settled  down 
to  refresh  our  bodies  with  sleep ; and  to  begin,  stirred  our 
fire,  though  we  now  felt  more  secure  against  wild  beasts ; 
yet,  on  these  few  first  nights  of  our  dwelling  in  this  strange 
place,  we  used  it  as  a precaution,  though  more  than  was 
needful,  and  that  we  might  go  to  rest  without  an  anxious 
thought  or  care.  Then,  gathering  round  it  as  we  had  the 
night  before,  we  lay  down  in  full  confidence,  and  most  of  us 
were  sound  asleep  in  a short  space : only  that  Don  Manuel 
stepped  aside  to  finish  his  prayers  by  himself. 


72 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


>ooOctX>oo<>ooOooOcoOooOooOocx  >ooOooOo»*>oo<>ooOooOo. 


»o  o<  >c  o<  >c  0<>0  o<»o  o<>c  o*>c  o<>o  O<>0  0<»0  0<>C  0<>0  o<>o  0<>0  >o  0<>O 


CHAPTER  XVII. 

FIRE-SIDE  TALK. 

HAVE  noted  these  particulars  of  our  two  first 
days  in  this  place  of  our  banishment,  for  as 
much  as  they  remained  fresh  in  the  memory 
of  us  all  for  a long  time  after : but  no  one 
will  expect  (should  this  record  of  the  misery 
of  six  poor  men  ever  chance  to  fall  into  other 
hands),  that  I am  to  go  on  recording  the 
after  part  of  our  exile  with  a like  fulness.  Much  of  our 
time  henceforward  went  by,  one  day  so  like  another,  that  it 
were  tedious  to  put  down  at  any  length  what  befel  us  as  it 
happened.  Indeed,  one  of  my  chief  cares,  which  I imparted 
to  my  kind  counsellor,  the  priest  (for  our  two  heads,  I must 
say,  had  to  think  for  the  rest),  was,  how  to  employ  the  men, 
and  how  to  keep  them  amused.  ’T  is  true,  we  had  (one  would 
think)  enough  to  occupy  our  time ; for  we  had  to  build,  to 
plant,  to  snare  and  tame  animals  for  our  support;  to  fish, 
Avhether  angling,  or  with  such  rude  nets  as  we  might  make 
shift  to  contrive  ; to  practise  shooting  with  arrows  and  javelins 
when  our  powder  was  out ; lastly,  wre  had  to  invent  some 
method  of  weaving,  however  miserable  stuffs,  to  supply  us 
with  clothes.  By  these  needful  employments  the  time  would 
not  hang  heavy,  could  we  but  persuade  the  men  to  keep  up 
to  their  work,  and  in  peace  with  one  another.  This  last 
thought  was,  indeed,  the  one  most  on  my  mind,  how  to  pre- 
serve harmony  amongst  us.  For  a short  time  had  shown  how 
ready  the  men  were  each  to  indulge  his  humours  at  the  ex- 
pense of  his  fellows;  and  how  soon,  with  their  uncurbed 
passions,  provided  with  fire-arms  as  they  were,  some  deadly 
feud  might  spring  up  to  plunge  our  small  society  into  war, 
and  give  our  island  its  first  taste  of  blood. 

As  I sat  by  the  watch-fire,  I mused  in  this  fashion  till  I was 
weary  of  thinking  alone ; and  felt  glad  when  Don  Manuel 
stepped  again  into  the  circle  of  the  fire-light,  and  spread  his 
cloak  for  his  night’s  rest.  I asked  him  if  he  was  too  inclined 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ.  73 

for  sleep  to  talk  with  me  a while ; then  stated  to  him  all  that 
was  in  my  thoughts. 

“ Well,  friend”,  says  he,  cheerfully,  as  was  his  wont;  for 
of  all  men  I ever  knew,  he  was,  I think,  the  cheerfulest : 
seldom  laughing  out  loud,  as  the  rest  would  when  the  fit  took 
them,  but  as  seldom  (after  our  first  great  trial)  looking  any 
ways  downcast,  and  never  sour  or  stern ; “ well”,  says  he,  “ for 
quarrels,  you  see  we  have  been  able  to  build  up  something 
of  a wall  against  them”. 

I could  not  for  the  life  of  me  make  out  what  he  meant  by 
a wall ; and  looking  at  him  to  explain  himself:  “ why,  to  be 
sure”,  says  he,  “by  beginning  to  pray,  and  pray  together”. 

“ I must  confess,  sir”,  answered  I,  “ these  two  turns  that 
we  have  knelt  down  all  in  a body  took  me  by  surprise,  like  a 
new  thing,  and  gave  me  another  notion  altogether  of  what 
praying  means”. 

“ Why  so  ?”  asks  he,  turning  his  face  upon  me  quickly : 
“ you  have  prayed,  of  course,  my  friend,  ever  since  you  were 
a child  ?” 

I felt  overcome  with  shame  to  be  thought  of  so  much  bet- 
ter than  I deserved ; and  to  have  it  taken  for  granted  I had 
done  what  I knew  myself  to  have  been  far  enough  from  doing. 
But  Don  Manuel  went  on,  without  taking  notice  of  my  silence ; 
and  as  if  he  spoke  part  to  himself,  part  to  me : 

“ Prayer”,  he  said,  “ is  the  elevation  or  lifting  of  the  soul 
to  God.  Now,  the  higher  the  soul  is  lifted,  the  nearer  it 
draws  to  Him ; and  the  nearer  it  draws,  the  more  like  Him 
does  it  grow : then,  you  see,  as  God  is  the  eternal  tranquillity 
and  peace,  so  man,  when  he  begins  to  pray,  begins  to  know 
peace;  and  knowing  peace  in  himself,  loves  to  be  at  peace  with 
others.  He  gets  one  degree,  say,  of  this  blessed  love  of  peace 
when  he  prays  once  ; and  is  likely  to  get  another  degree  of  it 
the  next  time  he  prays,  and  so  on : just  as  a mason  or  brick- 
layer lays  one  course  of  stones  or  bricks  for  his  wall,  then 
another  again,  resting  on  that.  At  last,  the  soul  gains  a con- 
firmed habit  of  peace,  and  feels  a great  pain  at  being  out  of 
peace  with  any  one,  or  witnessing  any  breach  of  peace  or 
charity : and  this  is,  as  it  were,  like  topping  the  whole  with  a 
coping-stone.  So,  now,  that  is  what  I call  building  the  wall. 
Is  it  not  good  masonry,  my  dear  friend ; and  is  it  not  worth 
while"  to  raise  such  a wall  against  hatred,  violence,  misery  ?” 

I could  not  answer  him,  I fairly  own ; for  my  heart  filled 
again,  and  well  nigh  overflowed.  I sat  looking  into  the  fire ; 
I felt  the  truth  of  all  this  good  man  had  been  saying.  Yet 


74 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


his  talk  was  as  simple  as  a child’s,  as  to  the  manner  of  it : only 
he  seemed  to  speak  with  much  knowledge  from  having  prac- 
tised his  doctrine,  which  I make  no  doubt  he  had  done  for 
years.  After  a while,  I turned  to  him,  and  pursued  our 
discourse : 

“And  there  are  some  people,  sir”,  said  I,  “who  are  not 
content  to  be  at  peace,  but  strive  to  make  all  others  be  so 
too”. 

He  seemed  a little  confused,  as  if  I had  said  what  he  did 
not  know  how  to  answer,  and  did  not  like  to  hear  addressed 
to  him. 

“Yesterday”,  continued  he,  as  if  to  turn  it  off,  “ when  we 
were  going  up  that  mountain,  we  got  into  clearer  air  the 
higher  we  went,  and  could  see  further  on  every  side  of  us.  If 
any  one  asked  you  why,  you  would  answer:  of  course,  because 
we  were  higher  up.  And  so  it  is  with  our  souls  likewise. 
When  we  struggle  against  the  power  of  things  present  that 
would  draw  us  away  from  God,  be  they  in  the  way  of  plea- 
sure, or  anger,  or  what  you  will,  we  are  climbing  up  the 
mountain ; sometimes  with  difficulty  and  pain,  in  spite  of 
many  weights  that  would  drag  us  down  again.  When  we 
pray,  we  are  climbing.  When  we  give  up  to  others  for  peace 
— when  we  are  obliged  to  stand  against  others  for  principle^ — 
when  we  do  good  to  others  for  charity — we  are  climbing. 
The  oftener  we  do  these  things,  the  higher  we  climb,  and  the 
stronger.  The  higher  we  climb,  the  more  pleasant  is  the 
exertion,  and  the  more  delightful  the  prospect.  I will  give 
you  some  lines,  written  by  a poor  heathen  as  much  as  two 
thousand  five  hundred  years  ago  ; and  then  reflect,  if  even  he 
could  see  all  this  so  clearly,  what  ought  we  Christians  to  think 
about  it  ?” 

Then  he  repeated,  with  his  strong  foreign  accent : 

“ Baseness  is  easy,  chosen  by  the  throng, 

Nor  rough  the  way,  nor  far  to  seek,  nor  long: 

Severer  toil  th’  immortal  gods  have  given 
To  fence  the  narrow  way  that  leads  to  heaven, 

All  strait  and  steep,  until  the  height  be  won ; 

Then  with  a gentler  toil  it  leads  the  traveller  on”.* 

“ You  see”,  continued  Don  Manuel,  when  he  had  concluded 
his  lines,  “ a poor  man  who  had  so  little  idea  of  the  One  true 
God  that  he  calls  his  idols  ‘ the  immortal  gods’,  still  knew 

* These  lines  appear  to  he  a translation  of  the  Tijv  pev  yap  KaKorrjra 
kai  tiXadov  ionv  IXtaQai  of  Hesiod — Ed. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


75 


something,  at  least,  of  the  truth  we  speak  of.  Reason  carried 
him  a certain  way ; though  by  virtue  he  only  meant  a proud 
conformity  of  the  life  to  the  natural  conscience ; and  knew 
nothing  of  that  charity  which  is  the  true  fulfilling  of  the  law”. 

“Nothing  of  charity?”  asked  I. 

“ Certainly  not”,  answered  the  priest,  “ for  charity  is  • a 
Christian  virtue,  and  follows  upon  faith”. 

u Faith  ?”  pursued  I,  as  if  I were  determined  to  make  objec- 
tions : “ but  then  you,  sir,  as  a Catholic,  would  say  that  we, 
who  are  not  so,  cannot  have  faith  ?” 

“ You  cannot,  indeed,  my  dear  friend”,  answered  he,  looking 
at  me  with  much  concern  in  his  face ; “and  the  greater  pity  for 
you.  But  you  may  have  several  things  like  it,  or  leading  the 
way  to  it,  or  producing  some  of  its  effects”. 

I looked  at  him  as  if  I did  not  understand  him,  which 
indeed  I did  not. 

“We  are  both  too  tired  now”,  said  he,  giving  a little  yawn, 
“ to  follow  this  much  further.  But  you  may  have  the  begin- 
nings of  faith,  or  what  is  a preparation  for  it,  or  what  is 
borrowed  from  its  teachings  to  its  own  disciples  ; and  so  may 
do  the  same  things  (to  some  extent)  as  if  you  had  faith,  by 
a kind  of  imitation”. 


pOooOooOooOooOoo<>ooOcioOooOoo<>ooOocXX>oOooOopOc 


, - E>opOooOoo<>oooooOoo<>cio<>oo<>oc 


;>0  0<>00<>00<>00O00<>0 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 


A FEW  LITTLE  DEBTS. 


**F  course  I was  not  satisfied  ; and  he  saw  it. 
“If,  now”,  pursued  he,  looking  upward, 
we  had  a moon  at  this  time,  which  we 
have  not,  and  it  were  shining  over  our  heads : 
_ it  would  be  very  bright,  would  it  not,  and 
JiQypy very  beautiful,  and  would  influence  the  tides 
this  way  or  that,  and  light  the  traveller  on 
his  road,  and  serve  to  read  by,  to  some  degree  ?” 

I nodded  to  this,  but  could  not  see  his  drift  at  all. 


76 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


“ Well,  after  all : would  it  be  the  sun  ?” 

I smiled,  and  waited  to  hear  further. 

“ No”,  pursued  Don  Manuel,  speaking  now  with  so  much 
energy  that  he  half  roused  some  of  the  sleepers ; and  Prod- 
gers  began  to  mutter  an  oath  or  two  in  his  sleep  : “ No  ! take 
that  bright  moon  at  her  full,  when  she  is  most  cloudless  and 
most  powerful ; and  all  her  light  is  borrowed  : it  is  a mere 
reflection  from  the  sun.  She  is  herself  a dark,  dull  body  ; 
only  capable  of  giving  back  and  (as  I may  say)  reporting  the 
light  she  receives  from  the  sun,  the  fountain  of  all  light. 
Take  away  the  sun,  and  the  moon  would  be  absolutely  dark, 
as  she  is  in  a total  eclipse.  But  do  I tire  you  with  this  ?” 

“ By  no  means”,  said  I : “ I do  not  at  all  see  whither  you 
are  going ; but  I wish  to  follow  you  to  the  end”. 

u I am  only  going  to  this  point”,  replied  he,  smiling  ; u that 
the  Catholic  Church,  to  whom  alone  the  mission  of  teaching 
the  nations  is  given,  besides  fully  enlightening  her  children, 
also  enlightens  partly  those  who  reject  her.  She  enlightens 
them,  so  that  they  still  hold,  as  religious  opinions,  some  por- 
tions of  her  teaching,  though  not  by  faith,  nor  in  the  right 
way.  They  get  light  from  her,  as  the  moon  from  the  sun,  by 
reflection.  The  faintest  glimmer  of  twilight,  or  a meteor  that 
shoots  and  expires,  is  better  than  total  gloom ; and  a re- 
flected light,  though  imperfect,  is  light  as  far  as  it  goes.  So 
the  Church  has  lower  and  lesser  benefits  for  those  who  will 
not  accept  her  best  gifts  ; and  at  every  turn  makes  many  her 
true  debtors  who  least  acknowledge  the  debt.  But  come  ; it 
is  time  to  snatch  a few  hours’  sleep”. 

61  Stay  one  moment,  sir,  I beg  you”,  cried  I again,  as  he 
was  settling  himself  to  rest.  u What  you  say  moves  me  very' 
much,  I can  tell  you.  I do  not  half  understand  it,  though. 
Will  you  give  me  an  instance  of  what  you  mean  ? What 
have  we  borrowed  from  your  Catholic  Church  ?” 

Don  Manuel  reckoned  up  on  his  fingers. 

“ First”,  says  he,  the  “ sacred  Scriptures  themselves  ; for 
without  the  authority  of  the  Church  you  would  not  know 
which  of  the  various  writings  were  inspired,  even  of  those 
you  acknowledge”. 

“ Do  not  interrupt  me  now”,  added  he,  with  a good- 
natured  look,  “ if  you  wish  me  to  go  through  my  list ; for 
’t  is  getting  too  late  to  do  more  than  just  read  it  through.  Let 
me  go  on.  Secondly,  you  owe  to  us  the  change  from  the 
seventh  day  to  the  first  day  of  the  week,  as  a day  to  be  kept 
holy ; and  if  it  were  not  for  that,  you  would  be  grievously 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


77 


breaking  one  of  the  commandments  every  Saturday,  and 
practising  a vain  observance  every  Sunday”. 

This  staggered  me,  I confess ; for,  little  as  I had  observed 
the  Sunday  for  many  years,  except  to  idle  it  away,  I did  not 
forget  the  words  of  the  commandment : “ Remember  thou 
keep  holy  the  Sabbath  day  . . . the  seventh  day  thou  shalt 
do  no  manner  of  work”. 

“ Thirdly”,  he  went  on,  “ but  indeed,  I should  have  put  it 
first,  you  owe  to  us,  as  far  as  you  really  hold  them,  the  true 
doctrines  of  the  most  Holy  Trinity,  and  the  Incarnation”. 

“ Nay,  now,  sir,”  cried  I,  breaking  in  with  some  vexation, 
and  feeling  angry  with  him  for  the  first  time  since  our  ac- 
quaintance ; “ how  can  you  say  we  owe  this  to  you  ? Why, 
’t  is  a part  of  our  teaching  too,  I ’ve  always  heard” — 

“Remind  me  as  early  to-morrow  as  you  like”,  answered 
the  priest,  gently,  “ of  the  two  names,  Sabellius  and  Nesto- 
rius;  and  I will  explain  my  meaning.  Would  you  like  me 
to  finish  my  catalogue  ?” 

I made  a sign,  not  a very  gracious  one ; for  I was  much 
put  out  by  what  he  had  said. 

“Fourthly,  then”,  continued  he,  “though  I fear  to  vex 
you  again  by  mentioning  it,  you  owe  to  us  the  rest  of  all  that 
is  found  in  the  Creeds,  the  Apostles’  and  the  Nicene,  as  well 
as  the  Athanasian”. 

“Fifthly,  ’t  is  only  by  authority  of  the  Catholic  Church 
that  you  have  ventured  to-day  to  taste  of  the  peccary  and  the 
bustard,  or  the  monkey,  without  fear  of  sin”. 

By  this,  I quite  thought  he  was  laughing  at  me : no  sooner 
did  he  see  it  in  my  countenance,  than  he  came  nearer,  and 
laid  his  hand  on  my  shoulder  as  I sat,  saying : 

“ You  do  not  suppose  I would  jest  in  that  way  ? I was 
never  more  serious.  It  would  take  some  time  to  explain  what 
I mean : only  remember,  in  a word,  there  was  a divine  com- 
mand against  eating  flesh  with  the  blood  in  it,  issued  before 
the  law  of  Moses,  and  continued  after  it  by  the  Apostles.* 
Now,  unless  the  Church  can  pronounce  that  the  command 
was  not  always  to  bind,  you  are  bound  by  it  at  this  moment. 
The  Council  of  Jerusalem  enforced  it  on  the  disciples,  who 
were  freed  from  the  Mosaic  law.  But  if  you  are  bound  by 
it,  you  have  been  guilty  of  a grievous  sin  this  day,  and  most 
days  of  your  life,  as  I have  stated.  That  is  what  I mean ; 
and  thus,  your  release  from  that  law  of  not  eating  blood  with 
the  meat  makes  your  fifth  obligation  to' the  Catholic  Church”. 

* See  Gen.,  iv.  4;  Acts,  xv.  20,  29. — Ed. 


78 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


I could  not  have  kept  anger  in  my  heart  against  him,  so 
simple  and  frank  was  he ; even  had  he  intended  a jest  upon 
me : but  this  I now  felt  sure  he  did  not.  So  I at  once  begged 
him  to  go  on,  and  all  my  old  trust  in  him  revived. 

“ I ’ve  come  to  the  little  finger  of  my  left  hand”,  says  he, 
smiling,  “ and  give  you  warning,  friend,  I will  not  go  beyond 
the  middle  finger  of  the  other.  Three  more  points,  and  then 
I go  to  sleep. 

“ In  the  sixth  place : do  you  not  owe  to  the  Catholic  Church 
whatever  benefit  you  think  you  have  had  from  confirmation, 
if  you  have  been  confirmed  ? for  she  pronounces  it  a sacra- 
ment, and  they  who  say  otherwise,  have  kept  it  as  a form”. 

“ Seventhly ; as  you  (or  your  teachers)  think  you  have 
among  you  a Christian  ministry,  handed  down  from  the 
Apostles : though  I could  not  honestly  say  you  have,  yet  if 
you  had,  you  could  only  have  it  from  us,  as  your  learned 
writers  acknowledge,  nay,  maintain  tooth  and  nail,  as  their 
best  chance. 

“Eighthly — and  last:  if  it  is  not  from  the  Catholics, 
whence  do  you  get  your  solemn  cathedrals,  that  you  make  so 
little  use  of;  your  beautiful  parish  churches,  each  with  the 
title  of  a Catholic  saint ; your  stately  colleges  and  halls  of 
learning,  whose  very  names,  as  Corpus  Christi,  St.  Mary’s, 
All  Souls’,  Peterhouse,  prove  they  come  from  us ; your  ancient 
almshouses,  where  even  now,  a dole  is  given  daily  (I  am 
told*)  to  the  wayfarer  and  the  mendicant,  as  was  once  done 
at  every  convent  gate ; your  fasts  and  festivals,  neither  of 
which  you  keep  ; your  ruined  abbeys,  which  you  visit  on  parties 
of  pleasure ; your  healing  springs,  that  cure  even  those  who 
believe  them  to  be  nothing  but  chalybeate  or  medicinal 
waters  ; and  so  on,  down  to  the  market-crosses  in  your  pro- 
vincial towns,  which  afford  a pedestal  for  the  town  clock, 
and  a shelter  for  the  town  crier  with  his  bell  on  rainy  days  ? 

“ That  is  enough  for  to-night”,  added  he,  yawning  a little 
again : “ so  I omit  Magna  Charta,  Habeas  Corpus,  and  the 
other  great  bulwarks  of  the  British  Constitution,  together 
with  the  whole  banking  system,  that  would  keep  us  up  till  mid- 
night. So  now,  wholesome  slumbers  and  the  blessing  of  God”. 

The  priest  wrapped  himself  in  his  cloak ; and,  making  again 
the  sign  of  the  cross,  nodded  to  me  with  a kind  look,  and 
was  soon  quietly  asleep. 

* This  is  at  least  the  case  at  the  ancient  hospital,  or  monastery,  of 
Holy  Cross,  near  Winchester,  at  the  gate  of  which  (by  antient  deed,)  a 
piece  of  bread  and  cup  of  beer  may  be  daily  claimed  by  every  wayfarer. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


79 


CHAPTER  XIX. 


WE  GAIN  OUR  PRIZE. 

>^UT  as  for  me,  I sat  there  by  the  fire,  thinking 
on  what  the  priest  had  said ; and  found  much 
in  it  was  very  new  to  me,  and  some  things 
I would  fain  have  answered,  but  could  not : 
until  I dropped  off  in  my  turn. 

We  were  woke  in  the  morning  by  a shout- 
ing that  caused  us  all  to  spring  on  our  feet ; 
we  caught  up  our  guns,  and  looked  at  once  to  the  priming, 
to  be  ready  against  surprise.  Our  first  thought  was  of 
savages,  who  might  have  landed  in  the  night ; but  looking 
round,  seeing  Hilton  was  not  among  us,  we  listened  again, 
and  presently  knew  it  was  his  voice  that  shouted  to  us  from 
the  .cove.  So  we  ran  down  to  him,  eager  to  get  some  news 
of  the  shark ; for  that,  we  judged,  was  the  meaning  of  the 
noise  he  made. 

So  soon  as  we  got  clear  of  the  trees  where  we  had  encamped 
the  night  before,  we  saw  the  shark  indeed,  floating  quite 
dead  (as  it  seemed),  about  a quarter  of  a mile  olf  shore,  and 
Ned  Hilton  almost  beside  himself  with  joy ; he  danced  on  the 
sand  with  extravagant  gestures  ; he  sang  snatches  of  a sea- 
song  ; then  he  shouted,  now  to  us  to  come  quick,  now  to  the 
shark,  inviting  him  to  land : in  short,  I thought  he  had  taken 
leave  of  his  wits,  so  like  a senseless  creature  did  he  behave 
himself.  But  it  is  to  be  considered,  the  interest  we  take  in 
the  objects  round  us  is  measured  by  the  employment  we 
have  for  our  thoughts.  And  I have  read  of  a poor  prisoner, 
chained  for  many  years  in  a dark  dungeon,  who  by  great 
patience  had  tamed  a spider  in  his  cell,  so  that  the  creature 
would  come  to  him,  when  he  whistled  to  it,  out  of  a crack  in 
the  wall ; and  how  fond  he  grew  of  it,  and  made  it  a com- 
panion : how  the  brutal  gaoler,  finding  what  delight  the  poor 
man  took  in  this  reptile,  shook  it  on  the  ground  one  day 
when  he  came  in  and  crushed  it  with  his  foot ; also  how  the 
man  took  it  to  heart,  and  was  like  to  pine  for  the  loss  of  his 
friend  the  spider.  So  that  our  poor  Ned  was  to  be  excused 
for  the  excess  of  spirits  he  showed  when  the  shark  came 


80 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


floating  back  to  us  again : indeed,  I believe  he  was  as  over- 
joyed at  this  discovery  as  ever  a needy  man  who  found  in  his 
garden  a pot  full  of  guineas  to  pay  his  debts  with. 

But  our  concern  was  now,  to  possess  ourselves  of  this 
monster,  and  bring  him  to  land.  First,  we  could  not  be  sure 
he  was  truly  dead : for  these  creatures  keep  their  life  in  them 
so  long,  and  against  all  appearance,  that  I judged  it  fool- 
hardy for  any  one  to  swim  out  to  him  and  fasten  a twine 
around  him,  which  was  what  Hilton  proposed,  but  I would 
by  no  means  consent  to.  After  awhile,  we  had  the  satisfac- 
tion to  see  the  tide  was  now  setting  in  for  the  cove ; and  we 
had  only  to  wait  till  the  carcass  should  drift  in  nearer.  But 
I proposed  to  try  with  the  rifle  (as  the  only  piece  among  us 
that  would  touch  him  at  that  distance),  if  he  were  dead  beyond 
a doubt : and  I complimented  Harry  Gill  by  offering  him 
first  shot  at  our  enemy.  So  Gill  began  by  marking  the 
bullet,  to  know  it  again  when  we  had  gained  our  prize  : 
then,  taking  good  aim,  fired  and  hit  him  again  (as  we  judged) 
under  the  side-fin ; but  he  stirred  not,  nor  gave  sign  of  life ; 
whereby  we  knew  him  for  dead,  and  gave  a cheer  for  Harry 
Gill,  whose  shot  had  killed  him  yesternight. 

After  this,  I raised  no  objection  to  any  one  swimming  off 
to  take  the  shark  in  tow.  Only  I begged,  whoever  went 
would  have  a care,  and  keep  clear  both  of  the  jaws  and  tail 
of  the  fish ; it  being  known  that  a stroke  from  the  tail  of  a 
shark  will  kill  a man,  though  the  fish  be  but  in  a dying 
convulsion.  But  they  all  seemed  content  to  wait  till  the  tide 
should  bring  him  in,  which  it  did  nearer  at  every  beat  of  the 
waves ; a little  wind  blowing  at  the  time  up  the  cove.  As 
he  lay  broadside  on,  he  came  drifting  in  heavily,  till  we  could 
measure  him  with  our  eyes  : then  we  discovered  he  was 
indeed  a monstrous  fish,  and  a good  deal  bigger  than  the 
skeleton  that  lay  in  the  shallow.  We  judged  him  well  nigh 
thirty  feet  in  length,  as  it  afterwards  proved  when  he  came 
to  land.  And,  to  be  short,  the  tide  soon  brought  him  so 
near,  that  the  four  men  waded  into  the  water  with  the  hand- 
spike, and  Don  Manuel’s  walking  staff,  together  with  some 
branches  they  tore  from  the  trees  and  stripped  with  their 
knives.  By  help  of  these,  they  managed  to  turn  the  shark’s 
head  in-shore,  and  so  waited  till  the  tide  should  ground  him, 
which  it  did  about  half  an  hour  after  our  shot. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


81 


CHAPTER  XX. 


BLOWN  INTO  HARBOUR. 


E were  favoured  by  the  wind,  which  kept  still 
blowing  up  the  cove,  and  indeed  freshened 
as  the  morning  advanced : for,  had  it  not,  I 
believe  we  had  never  got  our  prize  high 
enough  on  shore  to  be  of  much  use  to  us. 
And,  to  be  short,  the  wind  increased  so 
much  upon  us  within  half  an  hour  after  the 
shark  touched  land,  as  made  us  look  out  for  a squall : but 
truly,  when  it  came,  ’t  was  no  squall,  but  a hurricane  instead. 
The  sky  grew  blacker  in  the  offing  than  ever  I saw  it  in  my 
country  on  a dark  day  in  November ; on  every  side  the  sea- 
birds flew  screaming  in,  and  swept  close  by  us,  so  that,  had  we 
had  nothing  else  on  hands,  we  could  have  knocked  them  over 
with  our  staves : and  the  power  of  the  wind  was  such  as  bent 
some  palm-trees  near  the  shore,  as  though  they  had  been  so 
many  saplings,  or  whips  of  osier. 

Our  only  safety  now  was  to  throw  ourselves  flat  on  our 
faces ; which  we  all  did  at  once,  but  not  before  the  wind  had 
twirled  away  Prodgers’  hat,  and  sent  it  high  in  the  air,  so  that 
we  found  it  not  for  near  a se’ennight  after,  in  a banana  tree 
some  half  mile  (I  am  sure)  from  the  place  we  were  in.  But 
now  was  no  moment  for  grumbling,  or  thinking  on  hats : for 

C 


82 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


the  storm  waxed  to  an  awful  pitch,  as  it  does  in  the  tropics 
when  it  bursts  in  earnest. 

What  with  the  rending  of  the  branches  of  trees,  and  roar 
of  the  waves,  that  now  came  driving  up  our  cove,  as  fleet  as 
a race-horse,  and  raging  like  a tiger,  tossing  their  foam  high 
as  the  very  trees,  and  drenching  us  with  the  spray  ; and  what 
with  the  thunder  of  the  surf  that  broke  on  the  coral  reef  out- 
side our  little  harbour,  the  scene  was  beyond  anything  I can 
put  down  on  paper.  The  tide  washed  up  so  near  the  place 
where  we  had  anchored  ourselves  at  full  length,  we  were  no 
longer  safe  in  staying  there : I began  to  think  a third  wave 
(as  they  say  the  third  wave  is  ever  the  highest)  would  suck 
us  back  into  the  wild  sea.  So,  choosing  a moment  when 
there  seemed  a lull,  or  at  least  the  wind  not  being  so  raging 
as  before,  we  were  up  and  scudding  before  the  storm  ; till  we 
reached  some  underwood  that  lay  perhaps  two  hundred  yards 
in-shore  : yet  not  under  the  higher  trees,  for  that  we  dreaded, 
lest  they  should  be  torn  up,  or  their  branches  rent  off,  and 
fall  on  us,  and  so  crush  us  out  of  life. 

As  to  our  prize,  that  we  had  been  so  anxious  to  secure  one 
short  hour  before  this  tempest  broke  upon  our  heads,  we 
thought  of  it  so  little,  I believe  all  the  sharks  that  ever  swam 
might  have  floated  out  to  seaward,  without  our  bestowing  a 
thought  on  their  loss  to  us.  So  important  do  things  appear 
to  us  poor  mortals,  tilh  something  more  weighty  comes  in,  to 
wipe  them  clean  out  of  our  minds ! 

But  this  was  not  all : for  the  rain,  or  water -spout  rather, 
began  now  to  pour  down  upon  us  in  a deluge ; so  that  we  were 
forced  from  our  brushwood,  would  we  or  no,  and  driven  to 
seek  some  shelter,  though  already  we  had  not  a dry  stitch  on 
us : a thing  woeful  enough,  seeing  we  had  no  change  of  gar- 
ments awaiting  us  in  this  wide  world.  We  dragged  our  way, 
so  well  as  we  might,  the  force  of  the  wind  not  abating,  into 
the  wood;  holding  on  by  the  bushes,  till  we  were  sheltered 
by  the  trees,  cocoa  and  banana,  with  others,  that  grew  pretty 
thick  hereabouts,  and  plenty.  We  ran  which  way  soever 
the  wind  would  take  us,  not  thinking  of  aught,  but  to  get 
f ree  of  this  deluge  of  rain  : however,  we  guessed  at  the  time, 
we  were  making  for  the  ridge,  or  back-bone  of  rock  that 
formed  the  south  end  of  this  island. 

’T  was  not  long  before  we  saw  the  upper  parts  of  it  tower- 
ng  above  our  heads ; and  the  trees  that  crowned  it,  bending 
and  swaying  every  way  under  the  tornado  of  wind : then, 
working  our  way  somewhat  further,  we  got  under  this  wall  of 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


83 


rock,  which  rose  sheer  up,  much  like  to  the  side  of  a house. 
But  what  comforted  us  most,  was  to  see,  about  twenty  steps 
as  you  turned  to  the  left,  a mass  or  crag  of  rock,  that  had 
fallen  (I  suppose)  from  the  height,  or  been  split  off  from  the 
main  part  of  the  cliff  by  some  earthquake.  This  bent  over  to 
the  cliff  it  had  been  torn  from,  at  an  angle,  so  that  the  upper 
part  I guessed  to  be  within  eight  feet  of  it,  while  the  base 
was  at  least  as  many  yards  distant  from  the  cliff : it  looked 
dangerous,  as  though  it  would  fall  upon  us  if  we  got  under  it: 
till  we  considered  again,  it  must  have  hung  in  that  way  for 
many  ages,  forasmuch  as  trees  of  a large  growth  had  sprung 
up  between  the  two  portions  of  rock;  besides,  the  fallen 
mass  was  covered  with  shrubs  that  grew  upright  on  it,  fea- 
thering* to  its  very  top. 

“ Here”,  says  Don  Manuel,  looking  about  him,  u is  our 
shelter  till  the  hurricane  be  past : and  I see  not  but  it  may  be 
'-so  for  many  a day  to  come  : for  where  will  you  find”,  conti- 
nued he,  “ a better  shelter  than  this  rock  over  head  ? see, 
no  drop  of  the  pelting  rain  hath  reached  us : then,  the  trees 
round  about  will  be  both  shade  and  defence,  and  we  could  so 
plant  ourselves  out  from  the  world,  that  neither  savage  nor 
wild  beast  could  find  out  our  hiding-place”. 

“ Aye,  but”,  persisted  Gill,  going  back  to  his  first  idea, 

we  have  no  view  here  of  the  sea:  a ship  might  touch  at  the 
island,  and  send  her  boat  ashore,  and  we  be  none  the  wiser, 
and  lose  our  chance”. 

u I see  a way  out  of  that”,  says  Tom  Harvey ; u for ’t  is  easy 
to  climb  this  rock,  and  so  to  the  cliff  overhead ; then  we  shall 
have  a clear  look-out  on  both  sides”. 

“ You ’ve  hit  it,  messmate”,  cries  Hilton,  clapping  him  on 
the  shoulder,  u so  here  goes  for  a scramble”  ; with  that,  he 
sprang  up  the  rock,  by  help  of  the  roots  of  the  brushwood 
that  grew  on  it,  as  he  would  up  the  shrouds  of  a ship.  Harvey 
was  after  him ; and  we  all  followed ; for  by  this  time  the 
worst  of  the  hurricane  was  over,  though  the  wind  moaned 
and  the  waves  were  lashing  in  fury,  as  high  as  ever.  But  we 
were  so  wet,  we  feared  neither  rain  or  spray. 

From  the  top  of  our  rock  on  to  the  cliff  was  an  easy  leap  ; 
for,  as  I said,  the  distance  at  top  was  not  more  than  seven 
■or  eight  feet ; and  there  was  a little  dent,  or  landing-place  in 
the  cliff  opposite,  worn  by  rain,  or  a torrent,  or  sawn  out  by 
the  branches  ; it  gave  us  sure  footing,  so  we  sprang  across 
without  a second  thought.  Then  a smart  climb  brought  us  to 
the  rocky  look-out,  from  which  we  could  sweep  the  horizon 


84 


THE  ADVENTURES  OP 


round,  stopped  only  by  our  volcano  (so  I called  it  always)  to 
the  north  of  the  island.  We  gave  a glance  out  to  westward 
of  our  little  kingdom  ; but  all  was  quiet  there,  at  least  by 
comparison  : for  this  gale  had  come  upon  us  from  east -by- 
south,  or  from  that  to  due  east.  Harvey  begged  for  the  loan 
of  my  glass  ; then  laid  himself  down  flat,  pulled  his  hat  over 
his  brows,  and  looked  out  in  the  wind’s  eye. 


CHAPTER  XXI. 

A NEW  ARRIVAL. 


[N  a minute  or  two  I heard  him  say  softly,  to 
himself : “ There ’s  something  out  there  in  the 
offing  I cannot  make  out.  Is  it  another  big 
shark,  or  what  ?”  Then,  after  looking,  long 
and  steady,  he  jumped  up,  and  shouted  out: 
“ Boat,  ahoy !” 

I do  believe,  had  a dead  man  spoken,  we 
could  scarce  have  been  more  taken  aback  than  by  this  cry  of 
Tom  Harvey’s.  All  were  on  the  alert,  and  Prodgers  and  Gill 
scuffled  for  the  glass  between  them  ; but  Tom  gave  it  back 
to  me,  while  I lay  down  flat  to  take  an  observation  of  the 
unlooked-for  stranger.  It  was  indeed  a boat,  I well  saw,  but 
of  what  kind  I could  not  so  well  distinguish  ; only,  from  the 
prow  of  it  running  up  (so  far  as  I could  judge  while  it  sported 
like  a feather  on  the  angry  waves)  into  a high  peak,  like  the 
Indian  canoes  of  the  South  seas,  I set  it  down  for  no  boat 
built  in  Europe  or  the  colonies.  It  came  driving  in;  and 
first  through  the  glass,  then  with  the  naked  eye,  we  could 
see  men  in  it : they  seemed  to  be  three  or  four,  but  could  not 
manage  the  boat,  as  was  plain  from  the  way  she  tossed  and 
drove  before  the  wind.  So  they  came  on  for  the  coral  reef, 
and  we  expected  every  moment  to  see  her  go  to  pieces. 
u Lord,  have  mercy  on  their  poor  souls  !”  cried  the  priest, 
dropping  on  his  knees.  We  all  answered,  Amen  ; for  the 
danger  was  so  great,  we  gave  them  up  for  lost,  and  kept 
looking  on,  and  wondered  to  see  the  boat  hold  out  still. 
Only  Don  Manuel  remained  kneeling,  and  prayed  on  without 
moving.  By  this  the  boat  was  within  a wave  or  two  of  the 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


85 


reef ; and  in  a few  moments  more,  a huge  roller  lifted  her  up, 
stern  foremost,  right  over  into  our  cove,  with  all  on  board : 
she  was  capsized  as  she  came,  and  the  crew  flung  into  the 
boiling  sea. 

At  this,  with  a common  impulse,  we  ran  down  again  at  our 
best  speed  towards  the  shore ; making  for  that  ledge  of  rock 
on  which  Harvey  had  stood,  as  I said,  when  he  found  the 
dead  shark  that  had  so  nigh  decoyed  us  into  the  jaws  of  the 
live  one.  For  this  point  we  made  straight;  judging  in  our 
minds,  as  we  ran,  ’t  would  give  us  our  best  chance  to  deliver 
this  ill-fated  crew,  who  must  else  perish  before  our  eyes  in 
the  water.  The  boat  had  been  flung  clean  over  the  coral 
reef,  as  you  might  cast  a stone  or  weed  over  a garden  wall ; 
she  did  not  appear  so  much  broken  as  might  be  thought : for 
as  we  came  nearer,  we  could  observe  she  floated,  only  keel 
upwards  ; for  she  had  a rude  kind  of  jury-keel  fastened  on 
her,  though  now  partly  torn  away.  At  least,  she  did  not 
fill,  or  go  down,  as  she  would  if  the  wave  that  sent  her  into 
the  cove  had  been  less  full-bodied  or  powerful ; for  then  she 
must  have  knocked  about,  on  and  off  the  reef,  till  she  had 
either  gone  down,  or  fairly  gone  to  pieces. 

But  the  condition  of  the  poor  souls  that  had  manned  her 
was  scarce  less  desperate  than  if  they  had  been  left  outside 
the  reef.  The  surf  was  still  boiling  so  high  and  wild,  we  could 
not  well  see  how  matters  stood  with  these  poor  fellows : but 
soon  we  saw,  to  our  sorrow,  one  of  them  was  dead  already ; 
for  he  floated,  or  rather  was  rolled  over  and  over  again  by  the 
furious  waves,  and  made  no  motion  to  swim.  For  the  rest,  they 
made  a struggle  indeed,  as  well  as  they  might ; but  a weak 
one  it  was,  against  the  fury  of  the  rollers  that  drove  over 
them : two  of  these  savages  struck  out  for  land,  swimming 
manfully,  though  every  other  moment  they  were  underwater 
again.  One  (he  seemed  but  a lad)  clung  fast  to  the  canoe  ; 
this  one,  we  thought,  had  the  best  chance,  if  only  he  could 
hold  out  a while  longer : for  he  had  managed  to  scramble  on 
to  the  keel,  and  held  on  with  the  gripe  of  despair,  while  the 
boat  came  higher  up  the  cove  with  each  stroke  of  the  waves. 
Yet  he  was  not  the  first  to  reach  shore,  neither : for  by  this 
we  had  made  a shift  to  reeve  our  twine  (the  best  cable  we 
had)  into  a noose,  and  Harvey  had  found  a branch  -of  a tree, 
of  a biggish  thickness,  but  short,  to  answer  the  purpose  of  a 
life-buoy,  though  rudely  enough. 

Having  secured  this  log  or  billet  (when  we  had  stripped  it 
hastily  of  some  lesser  branches  and  leaves)  in  the  noose  of 


8G 


TIIE  ADVENTURES  OF 


our  twine,  we  all  stood  as  near  as  we  dared  to  the  margin  of 
our  cove;  and  with  one  heave  hove  it  into  the  sea,  towards 
the  nearest  of  the  men  that  were  struggling  to  reach  us.  The 
Indian,  as  we  had  already  seen  them  all  to  be,  made  for  it 
with  his  remaining  strength,  and  after  catching  it  once  and 
losing  it,  he  caught  it  again,  and  held  it  fast.  Indeed  it  held 
held  him  fast,  too : for  in  the  confusion  of  the  waves  that 
boiled  around  him,  twisting  him  about  like  a straw  in  a mill- 
dam,  he  got  the  twine  round  his  arm,  and  it  cut  him  like  a 
knife,  almost  to  the  bone.  But  this  he  regarded  not : for  what 
will  not  a man  disregard  when  life  itself  is  at  stake  ? besides, 
he  was  by  this  time  so  spent,  I question  if  at  the  moment  he 
much  felt  it.  After  all,  he  ran  a chance  of  being  strangled' 
in  the  water  for  very  weakness : had  not  Hilton  and  Tom 
Harvey  now  ventured  in,  and  pulled  him  by  main  force  to 
land. 

Dead  enough  this  Indian  seemed  to  be,  as  the  priest  and  I 
carried  him  from  the  surf,  and  laid  him  on  the  sand : but  by 
chafing  him  some  time,  with  holding  his  head  so  as  to  disgorge 
the  sea- water  he  had  swallowed,  we  had  the  comfort  to  bring 
him  to  himself.  Then  I left  him,  to  see  after  the  other  two, 
that  were  still  struggling  in  the  waves  ; but  Don  Manuel 
stayed  with  the  first  one,  lest  he  should  faint  again.  His 
fellow-swimmer,  as  we  watched  him,  had  a harder  escape : 
we  judged  him  older  than  the  first,  he  swam  so  feebly ; and 
while  he  still  had  some  little  way  to  make,  we  saw  him  cease 
to  strike  out  altogether,  and  presently  he  sank  slowly. 

At  this,  the  poor  lad  who  still  clung  to  the  canoe,  set  up 
the  most  dismal  howl  you  ever  heard : more  like  the  cry  of 
a wild  beast  at  night,  than  any  sound  from  human  lips. 
We  knew  not  then,  this  old  man  was  the  lad’s  own  father; 
but  his  cry,  and  the  sight  of  the  sinking  Indian,  put  us  all 
to  our  wits’  ends  to  save  him ; but  without  success,  had  it  not 
been  for  Tom  Harvey  again. 

“ Life  is  sweet,  boys !”  cried  he ; “ though  it  be  but  the 
life  of  a savage  Indian.  Join  hands  all  in  a line,  and  I ’m 
foremost  man  at  him !”  Don  Manuel  came  running  down 
to  take  his  share  in  the  action,  and  dashed  into  the  ‘water, 
next  to  Harvey.  Then  came  Gill,  forward  for  anything,  and 
so  the  others,  holding  hands  firmly : so  that  Harvey,  part 
swimming,  part  wading,  after  he  had  been  beaten  back  once 
or  twice,  and  the  chain  of  hands  all  but  broken  by  the  waves 
(though  by  this  they  were  subsiding  apace),  came  up  to  the 
savage,  whose  head  was  now  above  water  again,  driving  on 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ.  87 

for  shore,  though  at  the  last  gasp;  and  seizing  him  by  his 
long  hair,  called  to  the  rest  to  haul  them  ashore. 

But  we  soon  found  our  brave  Tom  had  risked  his  life  in 
more  than  one  way  to  save  this  fellow-creature’s ; for  the 
sinking  man,  feeling  something  to  grapple  with,  clung  round 
Harvey  with  such  a grasp  as  was  more  than  Tom  could  do 
to  shake  off.  In  another  minute,  they  had  both  surely  sunk 
together:  when  Harry  Gill,  without  more  ado,  caught  Don 
Manuel’s  staff  out  of  his  hand  before  he  was  aware,  and 
dealt  the  Indian  such  a blow  with  it  on  the  head  as  sent  him 
under  water  again.  There  came  another  wild  cry  from  the 
lad,  who  was  drifting  in  upon  his  canoe  ; and  he  sprung  off 
it  into  the  waves,  to  try  and  save  his  father. 

It  seemed  a cruel  act  at  the  time ; and  doubtless  admitted 
no  defence,  were  it  not  a balance  between  losing  two  lives 
without  remedy,  and  risking  one  only.  Add  to  this,  Harvey 
was  a Christian  born,  and  so  a more  valuable  life  than  the 
savage’s ; he  was  our  comrade,  and  the  other  a stranger  cast 
upon  our  shore  ; he  had  risked  a life,  too,  that  was  in  no 
danger,  and  that  was  his  own  to  keep,  for  a life  that  was  all 
but  gone ; and  that  life  we  had  a chance  of  saving,  after  we 
had  rescued  Tom’s.  I know  not  what  our  priest  would  have 
said  in  this  case ; for  after  the  thing  was  over,  it  never 
chanced  that  we  discussed  it  among  ourselves.  But  putting 
all  together,  though  my  first  impulse  was  of  indignation 
against  Gill,  yet,  thinking  on  it  after,  I knew  not  how  to 
blame  him  so  much  for  what  he  had  done  on  the  spur  of  the 
moment.  Be  that  as  it  will,  our  first  concern  was  to  fish 
up  the  poor  old  Indian;  which  we  managed  at  length,  with 
no  small  pains : and  brought  him  to  the  surface-,  and  so  to 
land,  dead  as  a door-nail,  so  far  as  we  could  see. 

In  truth,  we  all  were  in  Sad  case  enough,  when  this  was 
over : wet  and  wearied,  and  chilled  to  the  bone  ; Tom  Harvey 
half  choked  with  his  struggle,  and  the  sea-water  he  had 
swallowed ; Don  Manuel  not  much  better : and,  for  our 
captives,  or  guests,  call  them  as  you  may,  one  seemingly 
dead,  notwithstanding  all  our  chafing  of  his  limbs,  for  it 
failed  to  bring  him  to ; the  other  scarce  able  to  sit  up  and 
moan  ; and  the  young  savage  howling  and  tearing  his  hair 
like  a mad  thing  over  the  body  of  his  father.  To  look  at 
us  there  on  the  shore,  one  would  have  thought  a slave-ship 
had  been  wrecked  in  that  hurricane,  and  we,  part  of  the  crew, 
with  a few  of  the  slaves,  escaped  with  our  lives  from  the 
boiling  sea. 


88 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


o<>o  o<>o  0<  >0  <X>o  tx>c  o<>o  0<»0  o<>o  <X>o  o<>o  <X>o  cv*  o<>o  0<>0  0<>O 


>00<>00O00<>00<>u0<>00<>00<>0  0<>00<>00<>00<>00O00<>0X>00<>0 


CHAPTER  XXII. 


DOCTORING  AND  PURVEYING. 

for  the  second  Indian,  with  all  onr  skill  and 
jare  bestowed,  he  came  round  slowly : %ve 
were  busied  around  him,  Don  Manuel  and  I, 
the  mode  of  regular  practice,  and  the 
mg  savage  in  a ruder  way,  for  he  crumpled 
his  father’s  fingers,  and  pulled  his  ears, 
enough  (one  would  think)  to  make  a very 
statue  cry  out.  But  it  was  done  out  of  love,  to  bring  him  to : 
for  I never  saw  more  concern  expressed  than  in  this  poor 
creature  at  what  he  supposed  his  father’s  death.  Now  he 
would  kneel  beside  him  on  the  sand,  using  the  rude  remedies 
I speak  of : now  he  would  fling  himself  on  the  body,  weep- 
ing and  howling : then  he  sprang  up,  stretching  his  clenched 
hands  towards  the  sky,  as  pleading  to  the  gods  he  was  taught 
to  worship,  to  give  him  back  the  life  of  his  father.  At  last, 
espying  a sharp  shell  on  the  sand,  he  seized  it  in  an  access  of 
fury,  and  began  to  inflict  such  wounds  on  his  own  head  and 
cheeks,  that  he  soon  ran  down  with  blood. 

The  men  had  looked  on,  up  to  now,  with  much  concern  on 
their  faces,  to  see  the  wild  grief  of  this  untaught  nature  : but 
when  he  thus  began  to  scarify  himself,  Harvey  and  Prodgers 
seized  each  a hand,  and  stayed  him.  The  young  savage 
struggled  from  them  with  all  his  might ; when  they  took  the 
shell  out  of  his  clenched  fist,  he  turned  upon  them  with 
threatening  gestures,  still  pointing  upward.  This  action  we 
did  not  understand  at  the  time,  until  we  had  learned  to  com- 
municate with  these  savages  in  a mixed  language,  part  Eng- 
lish and  part  Indian  : then,  indeed,  we  made  out  from  the 
lad  that  he  had  offered  his  blood  as  a sacrifice  for  the  life  of 
his  father. 

But  Richard  Prodgers  having  begun  to  practise  charity, 
seemed  inspired  with  another  happy  idea ; and  pulling  his 
flask  of  brandy  out  of  his  pocket,  handed  it  to  me,  saying : 
“Try  the  poor  old  fellow  with  a drop  of  this  ; and  ’t  is  a 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


89 


wonder  I had  n’t  thought  on  *t  before”.  Indeed,  it  was  dull  of 
myself,  too,  not  to  have  thought  of  the  brandy  as  a remedy 
for  drowning.  However,  now  we  applied  it  in  right  earnest, 
and  gave  the  dead  man  (as  he  seemed)  his  first  taste  of  that 
“ fire  water”  which  has  been  so  fatal  to  many  another,  savage 
or  civilized. 

Whether  it  was,  the  brandy  took  more  effect  on  one  who 
had  never  tasted  it,  or  that  all  we  had  done  for  him  began  to 
revive  him  without  giving  a symptom ; certain  it  is,  when  we 
had  poured  some  of  this  down  his  throat,  he  began  to  choke 
violently,  then  sneezed  once  or  twice,  and  opened  his  eyes. 
We  now  lifted  him  up  ; though  he  could  not  stand,  we 
propped  him  up  for  a few  minutes,  then  began  to  walk  him 
about  slowly,  till  he  gained  some  use  of  his  limbs. 

But  you  should  have  seen  the  joy  of  the  son  when  he  saw 
his  father  revive  again.  Nothing  was  too  extravagant  for 
him  to  make  known  his  feelings  by : he  gambolled  and 
capered  on  before  him,  shouting,  talking  to  him  in  his  own 
language,  which  had  the  strangest  discordant  sound,  formed, 
as  it  seemed,  down  in  the  throat : so  he  went  on,  till  the  old 
man,  growing  faint,  pointed  with  his  finger  to  his  mouth,  to 
make  known  to  us  he  wanted  food. 

Want  of  food  seemed  now  the  prevailing  disease  amongst 
us  : every  man  felt  by  this  time  he  had  earned  his  breakfast, 
but  when  we  set  about  preparing  for  it,  we  found  little  enough 
left  in  the  larder.  The  shark  had  devoured  the  last  of  our 
monkey ; and  of  the  remaining  provender,  all  but  a few 
scraps  was  gone,  so  wasteful  had  we  been.  So,  setting  Don 
Manuel,  with  Prodgers  and  Harvey,  to  have  an  eye  to  our 
Indian  friends,  lest  they  might  give  us  the  slip,  and  get  into 
the  woods,  to  be  a trouble  to  us  after  (though  the  poor  fel- 
lows were  too  weak  and  dispirited  to  have  any  thoughts  of  it 
at  that  time),  I took  my  rifle,  and  ranged  with  Hilton  and 
Gill  into  the  thicket,  to  cater  for  the  party.  We  took  the 
young  savage  with  us,  motioning  him  by  signs  to  keep  close 
at  our  heels,  and  not  get  before  us  ; as  well  that  he  might  be 
out  of  danger  from  our  shot,  as  to  prevent  him  from  escaping. 
But  he,  for  his  part,  had  nothing  of  the  kind  in  his  head  : 
being  occupied  with  observing  us,  which  he  did  with  all 
admiration  and  astonishment ; he  regarded  us  (so  we  judged 
from  his  looks)  as  beings  of  some  superior  order  in  human 
shape,  and  much,  I suppose,  as  we  should  regard  an  angel 
that  were  to  appear  to  us  ; but  indeed,  anything  less  like 
angels,  in  appearance  or  spirit,  seldom  has  been  seen  on  this 


90 


THIi  ADVENTURES  OF 


earth.  However,  the  Indian  lad  followed  us  obediently ; and, 
seeing  from  our  actions  what  we  were  about,  he  took  up  a 
smooth  stone  or  two  that  lay  in  his  path,  making  signs  to  us 
that  he  would  knock  down  any  animal  that  came  in  his  way, 
and  kill  it,  and  bring  it  to  us  to  eat.  All  this  we  made  out 
readily  from  his  dumb  show,  which  was  so  expressive,  we 
could  not  mistake  it,  and  so  ridiculous,  we  could  not  choose 
but  laugh  at  it  heartily.  We  answered  him  likewise  by  signs, 
bidding  him  come  along,  and  drop  the  stones  again;  which 
he  did  with  submission,  and  followed  us  like  a very  slave, 
crossing  his  hands  on  his  breast. 

We  had  not  gone  very  far,  till  we  roused  an  animal  out  of 
the  thicket,  such  as  we  had  not  seen  before  : neither  did  we 
often  meet  with  such  in  our  residence  on  the  island ; nor 
could  I well  account  for  our  meeting  this  one  at  the  present. 
Something  it  wras  of  the  hog  kind,  though  not  in  all  things 
like  our  peccary,  neither  ; but  anything  in  shape  of  food  was 
acceptable  to  us  in  our  hunger,  so  I knocked  it  over  with  my 
rifle,  and  Harvey  picked  it  up  stone  dead,  or  drew  it  along, 
rather. 

But  we,  that  were  so  used  to  the  sound  and  effect  of  fire- 
arms, did  not  reckon  on  what  they  would  produce  upon  the 
spirits  of  one  that  never  yet  had  heard  them.  We  were  sur- 
prised to  see  our  young  savage  fall  to  the  earth  on  the  sound 
of  my  piece’s  discharge  : .he  lay  like  a dead  thing,  on  his  face ; 
and  when  we  came  to  him  and  stirred  him,  bidding  him  get 
on  his  feet  again,  he  only  rose  to  his  knees,  supplicating  us 
with  the  most  moving  gestures,  and  pointing  to  the  rifle  I 
held  in  my  hand  : then  speaking  to  it,  as  though  it  were  a 
live  thing,  and  beseeching  it  not  to  kill  him. 

This  made  us  merry  again  ; till  the  distress  of  the  savage 
moved  us  to  some  compassion.  I came  to  him,  and  took  him 
by  the  hand,  holding  my  gun  behind  me,  to  assure  him  I 
meant  him  no  harm,  and  so  raised  him  to  his  feet.  When  he 
had  gained  some  courage,  he  looked  anxiously  about  for  the 
piece  that  had  been  fired  : but  when  I brought  it  forward, 
all  his  fears  revived,  and  I believe  he  would  have  fled  away, 
but  that  by  my  voice  I half  commanded  and  half  encouraged 
him  to  stand  still.  Then  I presented  to  him  the  stock  of  my 
rifle,  and  moved  it  towards  him  : he  trembled  from  head  to 
foot  as  he  eyed  it ; at  length,  falling  on  his  knees  again,  he 
placed  the  butt  of  the  piece  on  his  head,  and  clasped  his 
hands  over  it,  by  which  I saw  he  meant  to  worship  it. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


01 


CHAPTER  XXIII. 


WE  ARE  TAKEN  TO  BE  GODS. 


^ITTLE  religion  as  there  was  amongst  us,  ex- 
cept what  our  priest  had  taught  us  lately,  we 
were  struck  with  horror  (at  least  I speak  for 
myself)  to  behold  this  ignorant  savage  bow- 
ing himself  down  thus  to  the  stock  of  a tree. 
I took  the  rifle  from  him  angrily,  pointing 
upwards  to  the  sky  ; to  make  him  understand 
that  life  and  death  came  from  thence  alone.  He  seemed 
partly  to  understand  me,  and  nodding  his  head  and  smiling, 
pointed  upwards  too,  and  then  to  the  gun  ; by  which  I made 
out  that  he  thought  the  god  whom  he  had  worshipped  (in  his 
blind  way)  had  sent  down  this  piece  upon  earth,  or  had  come 
to  dwell  in  it,  and  so  had  worked  the  wonderful  effects  he 
had  seen  it  produce.  But  when  I handled  the  rifle  again, 
and  began  to  sponge  it  with  my  ramrod,  and  load  it  with 
powder  and  ball,  then  he  changed  his  opinion,  and  began  to 
think,  as  I was  master  of  this  terrible  engine,  and  could  do 
with  it  as  I would,  I must  needs  myself  be  a god. 

He  crept  to  me,  with  all  possible  signs  of  reverence  and 
fear ; touching  the  ground  several  times  with  his  forehead  as 
he  came  ; then,  drawing  nearer,  he  took  my  foot  with  tremb- 
ling, and  placed  it  on  his  head  as  he  lay  in  the  dust.  This  I 
refused  with  a frowning  countenance  ; and  raised  my  hand 
again  to  heaven,  forbidding  him  to  worship  a creature  such, 
as  I : but  all  was  of  no  use.  The  poor  Indian  could  not  get 
it  out  of  his  thoughts  that  we  were  masters  of  the  thunder 
and  lightning,  and  could  do  what  we  would  with  life  or  death. 
So  I gave  it  over  for  the  time ; resolving  to  speak  to  Don 
Manuel,  and  see  what  could  be  done  to  enlighten  this  dark 
soul,  and  teach  him  to  know  something  of  God.  Meanwhile, 
I motioned  to  him  to  take  this  animal  (the  one,  I mean,  that 


92 


TIIE  ADYENTUPwES  OF 


we  had  killed)  on  his  shoulders,  and  run  before  us  to  the 
rest ; which  he  did  willingly,  and  arrived  before  us,  in  spite 
of  the  weight. 

At  sight  of  this  food,  the  savages  were  not  to  be  restrained: 
indeed,  taking  into  account  their  long  fast  (for  we  made  out 
from  them  later,  they  had  not  tasted  bit  nor  sup  for  the  best 
part  of  two  days)  we  thought  it  well  to  let  them  have  their 
way ; so,  cutting  off  a leg  and  shoulder  for  our  own  use,  we 
abandoned  the  rest  to  their  heathenish  gluttony.  And  short 
work,  truly,  did  they  make  of  it,  without  so  much  as  a thought 
about  cookery  of  any  kind.  But  I must  record  here,  on  the 
other  hand,  the  tender  filial  attentions  paid  by  the  poor  lad 
to  his  father  : for,  seeing  the  old  man  still  so  weak  as  scarce 
to  be  able  to  raise  hand  to  mouth,  this  young  savage  (though 
less  a savage  indeed  than  many  a son  more  civilized)  occupied 
his  whole  care  about  feeding  his  father  with  the  choicest 
morsels  he  could  tear  off  with  his  fingers ; putting  them 
lovingly  into  his  mouth,  and  talking  to  him  all  the  while  with 
that  strange  kind  of  jabbering  he  had  used  at  first.  This 
talk,  or  some  part  of  it,  I made  out  to  be  about  the  firing  of 
the  rifle,  and  wonderful  killing  of  the  animal,  without  arrow, 
javelin,  club,  or  even  stone  : for  first  he  pointed  to  it  (or  as 
much  as  was  left  after  their  meal),  then  ran  along  swiftly  on 
his  hands  and  feet,  to  imitate  the  creature’s  running,  which 
he  did  in  the  most  laughable  way  you  ever  saw.  Then  he 
stood  upright  to  take  me  off,  too  : but  that  he  did  not,  till  he 
had  first  inclined  towards  me  with  great  reverence,  crossing 
his  hands  on  his  breast  again,  and  uttering  some  words,  or 
sounds  rather,  that  were  meant  to  show  respect  for  the  per- 
son he  spoke  of.  Then,  stretching  out  his  left  arm  straight, 
and  at  full  length,  pointing  his  finger  by  way  of  muzzle  to  a 
gun,  he  snapped  his  other  fingers  smartly  for  the  click  of  the 
lock,  and  made  a booming  sound,  or  kind  of  rude  bellowing, 
to  express  the  report  of  the  piece.  Then  again,  he  turned 
himself  into  the  animal  I had  shot,  and  went  tumbling  and 
rolling  over  and  over;  then  lay  still,  as  though  he  were  dead, 
and  so  got  up  again,  and  came  back  to  the  rest. 

All  this  pantomime  amused  our  men  heartily  : as  for  Ned 
Hilton,  he  turned  to  Harvey,  and  bade  him  cheer  up,  and  not 
take  on  for  the  loss  of  his  monkeys,  if  they  should  not  live 
(the  two  young  monkeys,  as  I said  before,  were  sickening  at 
this  time,  and  died  very  soon  after)  : “For  here,  messmate”, 
says  he,  u you  have  a young  monkey  in  this  nigger,  as  full 
of  tricks  as  any ; and  you  may  teach  him  to  fetch  and 


93 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 

carry : see,  he  ’s  not  afraid  of  speaking  and  being  put  to 
work”.* 

As  for  the  Indians,  they  seemed  to  think  there  was  nothing 
laughable  in  what  their  young  countryman  told  them  : no 
sooner  had  he  finished  his  account,  than  they  rose  up,  and 
coming  towards  us  with  the  same  gestures  of  submission  he 
had  used  before,  bent  down  before  our  feet ; then  lifted  our 
feet  gently,  and  were  for  placing  them  on  their  heads,  in  sign 
of  servitude,  or  adoration,  I scarce  know  which.  I noticed 
the  only  one  of  our  number  who  seemed  proud  of  this  being 
done  was  Prodgers : as  for  the  rest,  Hilton  and  careless 
Harry  laughed  at  it  with  a will;  Tom  Harvey,  too,  was 
amused  at  the  odd  gestures  of  these  poor  savage  men.  Don 
Manuel  did  what  I had  done  before,  only  in  a better  way,  for 
it  came  more  natural  to  him.  He  took  the  hand  of  the 
Indian  who  had  offered  him  this  homage ; and  that  was  the 
old  man  whom  we  had  fetched  back  from  death  with  so  much 
difficulty,  who  seemed  to  single  out  Don  Manuel  as  the  one 
that  had  best  title  to  reverence.  This  old  Indian  came  creep- 
ing to  him  as  though  he  were  more  than  human : the  priest 
put  that  by,  with  some  marks  of  displeasure,  though  kindly ; 
then,  taking  his  hand,  raised  it  with  his  own  towards  heaven, 
to  make  him  understand,  ’t  was  God  had  saved  him,  and  that 
he  must  adore  God  alone. 

Thus,  our  first  communication  with  these  savages  was,  so 
far,  on  the  side  of  Christianity ; a thing  I am  glad  to  think 
on  now,  reviewing  all  that  befel  us.  “ Too  often”,  said  Don 
Manuel  to  me  when  we  talked  it  over,  “ they  who  ought  to 
have  carried  to  the  heathen  the  light  of  the  Gospel,  have 
only  stirred  for  them  the  fire  of  hell”. 

* The  negroes  in  the  West  Indies  had  a notion  that  the  monkey  was 
human,  and  could  speak  if  he  would ; but  that  he  kept  silence  to  avoid 
being  employed  as  a slave. — Ed. 


91 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


CHAPTER  XXIV. 


A LESSON  IN  INDIAN. 


Hjf'UR  next  thought  was,  how  to  establish  a 
kind  of  language  to  converse  with  these 
new  and  strange  friends  of  ours.  After 
some  consultation,  withdrawing  ourselves 
a little  apart,  the  men  asked  me  to  make 
the  savages  a speech  in  dumb  show*  to  gain 
their  confidence,  but  their  submission  too. 
Don  Manuel  joined  this  request ; and  though  I asked  him  to 
try  it  himself,  he  still  motioned  me  forward.  So  I drew 
near  to  them,  where  they  were  sitting  huddled  together  with 
much  anxiety,  their  chins  resting  on  the  palms  of  their  hands, 
and  eyeing  every  movement  of  ours  with  their  great  rolling 
eyes.  Rut  when  they  saw  me  approach  with  my  rifle,  they 
all  sprang  up  in  terror  again,  and  prostrated  their  faces  in 
the  dust,  making  no  doubt  I had  determined  to  kill  them. 
Nay,  perhaps  they  thought  we  were  going  to  eat  them  too, 
or  at  least  one  among  them : for  the  men  were  even  now 
preparing  a fire  to  cook  some  portions  of  the  hog  for  our 
meal,  and  they  supposed,  it  seems,  I was  come  to  fetch  them 
to  increase  our  good  cheer. 

Finding  this,  I laid  aside  my  rifle,  placing  it  carefully  on 
the  sand ; then  still  advanced  a few  steps,  and  held  out  my 
empty  hand  to  them,  to  show  them  I had  no  such  intention 
as  they  feared.  I could  see  they  watched  all  this  very 
closely ; and  it  gave  them  much  joy,  you  may  be  sure : so, 
seating  themselves  in  a row,  and  with  gestures  of  submission, 
they  listened,  without  interrupting  me  again.  I say,  listened ; 
for  I found  I could  not  get  on  with  my  dumb  show  only, 
but  must  accompany  it  with  words : and  though  it  may 
appear  strange  to  any  one  who  reads  this,  yet  I believe  he 
will  find,  by  placing  himself  in  my  circumstances,  he  would 
help  out  his  actions  by  words,  even  as  one  who  speaks  on 
what  interests  him  much,  is  sure  to  help  out  his  words  by 
action. 

My  address  ran  thus,  or  somewhat  as  follows  : 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ, 


95 


u Friends”,  said  I,  in  a mild  voice,  smiling  on  them  all  the 
while,  u we  have  rescued  you  from  those  waves” ; and  here  I 
pointed  with  my  hand  over  to  the  sea,  which  was  now  grow- 
ing calm  again.  This  action  they  understood  very  well ; and 
bowed  their  heads  to  say,  ’t  was  true,  and  they  were  very 
grateful  to  us  for  saving  them.  “We  are  glad  of  it”,  con- 
tinued I ; “ and  thankful,  as  you  ought  to  be,  to  that  great 
God  who  has  preserved  you  from  death”  (raising  my  hand, 
and  pointing  upwards,  though  I must  say,  my  heart  rebuked 
me  for  preaching  gratitude  when  I had  put  it  so  little  in 
practice.  But  if  we  measured  our  instruction  by  our  own 
practice,  which  of  us  would  say  a word  to  his  neighbour 
for  his  good?)  Well,  this  second  action  of  mine  was  plain 
enough  to  them  too  : only,  while  I pointed  straight  up  to 
heaven,  they  all  pointed  with  both  arms  stretched  out  to  the# 
sun,  to  make  me  know  that  was  the  god  they  thought  had 
saved  them  from  the  sea.  This  made  me  feel  angry  again;  yet 
not  so  much  as  I determined  to  make  show  of,  that  I might 
wean  them  from  that  horrid  idolatry  of  theirs.  So,  putting 
on  a frowning  countenance,  I closed  my  fist,  and  shook  it  at 
them,  to  threaten  them : at  which  they  dropped  their  hands 
again,  and  bowed  their  heads,  as  saying,  it  should  be  just  as 
I would.  I supposed  at  the  time,  and  made  out  from  them 
after,  what  was  their  notion  about  us ; viz.,  that  my  God 
must  needs  be  much  greater  than  their  god,  since  I was 
myself  so  superior  to  them;  also,  that  it  was  my  God  who 
had  saved  them,  and  not  their  own,  inasmuch  as  the  tempest 
had  obscured  the  sun.  However,  I now  went  on,  part  by 
•words  which  they  could  not  understand,  part  by  signs,  which 
they  did ; I made  them  sensible  we  would  be  good  masters  to 
them  if  they  would  behave  themselves  orderly  and  well : 
that  we  would  not  beat  or  ill  use  them  (this  I explained  by 
taking  one  of  the  handspikes,  and  making  as  though  I were 
beating  some  one  severely,  together  with  kicking,  shaking, 
and  beating  with  my  fists : then  threw  the  pike  from  me  with 
every  mark  of  abhorrence,  as  though  all  this  were  what  I 
detested,  and  should  be  sorry  to  be  forced  to). 

’T  was  indeed  strange  to  see,  how  quickly  these  poor 
savages  took  up  my  meaning.  They  nodded  at  me  with 
many  outlandish  grimaces,  crossed  their  hands  on  their 
breasts,  then  placed  them  on  their  heads,  in  token,  they 
devoted  their  lives  to  our  service.  Then  I,  on  my  part,  made 
them  great  promises,  pointing  to  some  cocoa-nuts  that  grew 
at  a little  distance,  pretending  to  fetch  them  the  fruit  to  eat : 


96 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


then  to  some  portions  of  the  hog  that  lay  about,  as  though  I 
offered  to  them  all  good  things  they  needed.  At  this,  they 
clapped  their  hands,  and  broke  out  into  a kind  of  song,  rock- 
ing themselves  to  and  fro  as  they  sat,  with  gestures  of  great 
contentment. 

What  they  sang  sounded  much  as  I here  set  it  down : 

Ooama  atahai,  oora.  oora, 

Tangata  makoee,  kaoo,  toroo ; • 

Eree-hma  wariu ! 

But  it  was  not  till  some  time  later  that  I chanced  to  ask  the 
middle-aged  Indian,  one  day  when  he  was  hoeing  in  our  plan- 
tation, what  was  the  meaning  of  this  song ; and  in  particular, 
• of  the  last  words,  which  they  repeated  again  and  again, 
drawing  out  the  notes  to  a great  length,  and  raising  their 
voices  to  a higher  pitch.  He  told  me,  in  the  broken  English 
we  had  taught  him  to  speak,  ’t  was  a song  of  gratitude  for 
the  promises  I made  them : and  this  is  how  he  put  it  into 
English ; Brown  man  happy , very  good , very  good:  he  work, 
he  laugh , morning , evening:  land  to  him  white  lords! 

After  all,  I thought  it  best  to  show  them,  as  there  was  a 
smooth  side,  there  might  be  a rough  one,  in  our  dealings  with 
each  other.  So,  in  the  best  way  I could,  I began  acting 
another  little  pantomime,  expressing  first  a disobedient, 
fro  ward  servant,  dishonest  to  his  master ; this  I did  by 
catching  up  a cocoa-nut,  and  running  a little  distance  with  it 
as  though  I had  stolen  it : then  came  back,  and  pointed  to 
them,  to  make  them  see  I meant  themselves  by  this ; so, 
pointing  to  myself,  I moved  towards  my  rifle,  catching  it  up 
and  presenting  it  at  them,  as  though  I would  fire.  But  this 
renewed  all  the  poor  fellows’  mortal  fright,  as  indeed  I meant 
it  to  do,  for  a wholesome  lesson  to  them : they  cast  them- 
selves once  more  down  before  me,  stretching  forth  their 
hands ; and  all  at  once  cried  out  with  the  utmost  vehemence, 
Udan , udan!  which  means  in  their  language,  No,  no! 
Whether  they  meant  only  to  beseech  me  this  most  dreadful 
thing  might  not  happen  to  them,  or  to  assure  me  they  would 
not  deserve  it,  I cannot  say ; but ’t  is  like  enough,  indeed, 
they  meant  both. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ., 


D7 


CHAPTER  XXY. 


FREEDOM  OR  SLAVERY.1' 

"UR  party  being  thus  increased  of  a sudden,  it 
perplexed  me  to  know  how  to  secure  these 
new  subjects  of  our  little  kingdom,  or  employ 
them : and  after  our  meal,  which  we  cooked 
and  ate  *n  0Ur  accustome(i  fashion,  I walked 
a apart  with  Don  Manuel  to  consult 

on  the  point,  placing  the  savages  in  charge 
of  Tom  Harvey.  This  I did,  both  for  their  safe  custody, 
also  to  prevent  any  of  the  other  men  playing  off  their  sailor’s 
tricks  on  them,  or  ill-treating  them  with  any  tyrannical  usage; 
a thing  I apprehended,  not  wholly  without  reason.  For,  though 
our  men  were  indeed  improved  by  our  common  misfortune 
and  Don  Manuel’s  influence,  yet  ’t  was  plain  they  regarded 
these  Indians  as  beings  of  a lower  grade,  who  might  be 
employed  as  their  slaves,  or  treated  according  to  the  humour 
of  the  moment.  Indeed,  this  was  the  question  I proposed  to 
the  priest,  how  far  our  savages  were  to  be  looked  on  as  slaves 
whom  we  had  bought  with  our  money,  or  prisoners  taken  in 
war. 

He  answered  me  very  gravely,  and  with  an  earnest  coun- 
tenance, saying,  wre  had  no  right  whatsoever  to  regard  them 
so : for,  putting  aside,  says  he,  the  whole  question  of  slavery, 
which  you  and  I need  not  now  enter  on,  these  poor  men  are 
cast  by  misfortune  on  our  coast ; and  we  owe  to  them  a share 
of  those  rights  which  man  has  with  his  brother  man.  “ If 
we  should  deprive  them”,  he  went  on,  speaking  more  and 
more  strongly,  “ of  their  liberty,  in  what  are  we  better  than 
those  inhuman  wreckers  who  come  down  from  their  cliffs 
like  so  many  sea-robbers,  or  vultures,  to  seize  the  property 

7 


98 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


of  the  luckless  mariners  that  are  cast  on  their  inhospitable 
shore  ?” 

To  this  I saw  no  answer,  indeed : yet,  thinking  awhile ; 

“ These  creatures”,  said  I,  “are  savages,  who  have  no  law  of 
property,  nor  understand  any  right  between  man  and  man, 
except  what  the  strong  arm  gives  over  the  weak”. 

“ But  every  man”,  answers  the  priest,  quick,  “ by  the  law 
of  nature,  has  the  right  to  possess  himself”. 

“I  doubt  not”,  pursued  I,  for  I wanted  to  look  at  this  from 
all  sides,  “ had  we  been  cast  away  on  their  coast,  instead  of 
they  on  ours,  they  had  robbed  and  killed  us  by  this  time, 
aye,  and  eaten  us  besides”. 

“ Even  granting  it”,  Don  Manuel  replied ; “ that  would 
have  been  forasmuch  as  they  are  savages  and  heathens.  Shall 
we  measure  our  conduct  by  their  standard?” 

“Has,  then,  the  heathen  savage”,  I objected,  “the  same 
rights  with  the  Christian  and  civilized  white  man  ?”  But  as 
I spoke,  I felt  a twinge  of  conscience,  to  think  what  sort  of 
civilization  we  owned,  and  above  all,  what  sort  of  Christians 
we  had  proved  ourselves  to  be;  though  Don  Manuel  let  it 
pass  without  notice. 

“We  must  not  confound  two  things  together”,  says  he, 
smiling.  “ By  the  law  of  nature,  the  white  man  and  his 
darker  brother  have  the  same  title  to  life  and  liberty:  though 
by  the  law  of  society  they  may  not  have  the  same  privileges 
in  other  ways”. 

“After  all”,  said  I,  “the  one  is  savage,  the  other  civilized”. 

“ That  is  what  I mean”,  insisted  he,  though  quite  mildly, 
as  was  his  way.  “The  great  difference  between  them  makes 
it  impossible  to  put  equal  power  into  their  hands;  because  the 
savage  knows  not  how  to  use  it  rightly.  You  cannot  trust 
him,  as  you  cannot  trust  a mere  child.  When  the  child  is 
grown  in  years,  in  knowledge,  in  experience,  he  passes  out  of 
the  state  of  a pupil,  and  becomes  a citizen.  You  must 
educate  him  for  his  future  position  ; then  give  it  to  him.  So, 
you  must  train  the  savage,  who  in  many  ways  is  a child ; 
and,  when  he  has  served  his  apprenticeship  to  liberty,  he 
must  be  free,  absolutely  free !”  He  spoke  this  with  some 
warmth,  raising  his  voice  as  we  walked  on. 

“ Then  you  think ’t  is  our  duty  to  educate  these  Indians, 
and  treat  them  as  equals?”  asked  I. 

“ Think,  my  dear  friend  ?”  answered  the  priest,  turning 
short  upon  me;  “I  do  not  think  about  it,  for  I am  sure. 
Educate  them  first,  and  you  thereby  make  them  equals. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


99 


Let  us  take  care”,  he  added,  “ we  do  not  find  them  some  day 
our  superiors”. 

“Just  what  I apprehended”,  said  I,  taking  him  up  wrongly; 
“what  if  some  day  they  should  find  the  means  to  over- 
master us?” 

“ Build  my  wall  round  about  them”,  said  he,  looking 
cheerful : “ for  to  be  encompassed  with  that  wall  is  the  truest 
freedom”. 

I knew  well  what  the  priest  meant ; and,  after  I had 
thought  for  a few  minutes;  “Yes,  sir”,  said  I,  “that  wall 
has  stood  us  in  good  stead,  and  I see  not  but  it  might  do 
much  for  these  poor  fellows,  to  teach  them  to  pray,  too”. 

“ And  not  to  bow  to  the  sun”,  added  he,  sighing  deeply, 
as  he  thought  on  it.  “We  must  clear  away  all  that,  and  a 
great  deal  more,  before  we  can  lay  the  foundations  of  our 
wall”. 

“ Then  it  is  our  duty  to  make  them  Christians,  too?” 

“ Who  can  doubt  it  ?”  answered  he.  “ Duty.!  is  it  not  a 
privilege  ? Are  they  not  sent  to  us  for  that  very  thing  ?” 

He  looked  at  me,  in  wonder  that  I did  not  answer ; which 
I was  indeed  slow  to  do,  for  the  idea  which  filled  his  mind 
was  new  to  mine.  Except  for  what  he  had  said  when  he 
asked  us,  the  day  before,  what  a priest  was,  I must  own  the 
thought  had  never  crossed  me,  of  converting  such  savages  as 
we  might  fall  in  with. 

“ Yes”,  said  the  priest,  speaking  to  himself ; “ therefore 
are  they  come : even  therefore  are  they  come !” 

He  had  scarce  uttered  the  words,  when  our  thoughts  were 
diverted  by  a cry  that  rose  among  the  men  we  had  left : soon 
we  saw  Hilton  coming  towards  us  in  haste,  beckoning  us  to 
come  back.  My  mind  misgave  me,  something  was  going 
amiss  with  the  Indians  ; I ran  back  at  once,  up  a little  slope 
of  ground  that  had  hidden  us  from  view,  and  Don  Manuel 
followed  me  close.  We  had  fetched  a compass  in  our  walk 
of  perhaps  two  hundred  yards  ; but  now,  taking  a short  cut 
through  the  trees,  I was  soon  upon  them,  before  they  were 
aware ; and  saw  at  once  what  I was  sorry  enough,  and  angry 
enough  too,  to  see  going  on. 


100 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


CHAPTER  XXVI. 


THE  WHITE  MAN  NO  HERO. 


EING  left  to  themselves,  and  this  new  game 
afoot,  the  men  (or  some  of  them)  forgot  all 
they  had  gone  through,  in  the  pleasure  of 
tormenting  the  unhappy  Indian  savages : 
seeming  to  regard  them  as  their  absolute 


turned  (this  we  made  out  later  from  Harvey,  and  from  the 
Indians  later  still),  than  Prodgers  and  Gill,  always  our  most 
untoward  members  of  society,  began  such  pranks  as  a school- 
boy might  have  felt  himself  above  practising ; as,  plucking 
the  hair  of  these  poor  ignorant  creatures,  blackening  their 
faces  with  a burnt  stick : in  short,  whatever  tricks  are  played 
off  on  passengers  in  a ship  on  first  crossing  the  line,  were 
devised,  and  executed  too,  by  those  scapegraces,  spite  of  all 
Tom  Harvey’s  efforts  against  it.  He  reasoned  with  them,  and 
defended  the  Indians  to  the  utmost  of  his  power  ; he  ended 
by  threatening  them  outright,  he  would  knock  them  down, 
did  they  attempt  it  further.  And ’t  was  just  at  this  stage  of 
proceedings  we  came  upon  them. 

I ran  up  at  once,  and  spoke  out  my  mind  ; laying  hands, 
roughly  enough,  on  Prodgers’  collar  : bidding  him  desist,  or 
we  would  come  to  blows.  The  rest  joined  in  this ; reasoning 
now  with  him,  now  with  Harry,  to  persuade  them  how  absurd 
as  well  as  cruel  they  had  been : above  all  (for  that  was  the 
thought  came  chiefly  into  my  mind),  how  we  should  destroy 
our  influence  with  these  savages  by  showing  them,  they  whom 
they  had  so  lately  taken  for  gods  were  subject  to  all  the 
caprices  and  fooleries  of  mere  men,  after  all  said  and  done. 

This  had  some  little  effect,  for  both  of  them  now  became 
somewhat  ashamed  of  the  part  they  had  played.  But  pride 
next  came  in,  to  bolster  up  what  could  not  be  maintained  by 
reason : and  Richard  Prodgers,  turning  thoroughly  sulky 
again,  seemed  resolute  to  have  his  own  way,  or  leave,  us 
altogether ; for  so  he  declared  himself. 

“ Hark  ye”,  says  he,  “ I give  you  all  notice,  I,  for  one, 


property,  or  as  so  many  head  of  mere  cattle 
without  souls.  No  sooner  were  our  backs 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


101 


do  n’t  understand  this  submitting  here  and  submitting  there, 
nor  do  n’t  mean  to  practise  the  same.  I mean  to  do  as  I 
please,  for  one : so,  good  bye  t’  ye  all,  if  that ’s  all,  and  no 
more  about  it”. 

With  that,  he  catches  up  his  gun,  and  was  for  making  off. 
But  I saw  at  once,  to  let  him  go  with  his  weapon  in  that  style 
would  never  do ; for  Prodgers  armed,  and  in  dudgeon,  might 
prove  an  awkward  customer  to  the  rest  of  us,  if  he  meant 
mischief.  So,  thinking  to  coax  him  back  to  good  humour,  I 
was  beginning  in  a hail-fellow-well-met  sort  of  way;  but 
Don  Manuel  laid  his  hand  on  my  arm,  as  though  to  say,  such 
would  be  of  no  use  for  the  present.  Nor  indeed,  knowing 
the  man  concerned,  do  I think  it  would  have  been. 

({ At  least”,  said  I,  “ you  do  not  carry  away  the  gun ; for 
we  have  already  voted  that  into  the  common  stock : and  he 
who  withdraws  from  our  commonwealth  has  no  claim  to 
private  property”. 

The  men  closed  in  here,  and  cried  out  I was  in  the  right  of 
it:  but  Richard  Prodgers  was  not  the  man  to  yield  that  point, 
you  may  be  sure:  and  a struggle  followed  for  the  piece,  in 
the  midst  of  which,  I know  not  by  what  means,  it  became 
cocked,  just  as  Don  Manuel,  who  stepped  in  on  one  side  (while 
I,  on  my  part,  pulled  Richard  away),  struck  up  the  muzzle 
with  his  hand.  And,  so  doing,  he  saved  the  life  of  Ned 
Hilton  ; for,  the  next  moment,  the  piece  went  off,  and  some 
of  the  shot  grazed  Hilton  on  his  cheek : but  for  what  the 
priest  had  done  with  a calm  presence  of  mind,  it  had  without 
all  doubt  shot  him  through  the  body.  But  Hilton,  chafed  at 
this,  angry  and  bleeding  as  he  was,  with  one  blow  of  his  fist 
felled  Prodgers  to  the  ground. 

This  put  an  end  to  the  contest ; each  one  being  too  much 
concerned  in  preventing  further  mischief  not  to  make  common 
cause : so  Richard  was  held  down,  till  he  promised  good 
behaviour  if  we  let  him  rise.  But  good  behaviour  meant, 
thrusting  his  hands  in  his  pockets,  and  turning  away  from  us, 
while  we  consulted  apart  what  was  best  to  be  done  Avith  him. 

He  saved  us  much  further  trouble  on  that  head ; for  turn- 
ing to  us  again  with  a determined  air,  u I wish  all  here  a 
good  morning”,  says  he,  “ and  shall  take  myself  off”. 

So  take  himself  off  he  did,  till  we  lost  sight  of  him  among 
the  trees  that  bounded  our  cove  to  northward : but  after- 
wards it  appeared,  from  what  followed,  he  struck  down  again 
towards  the  rocks  on  the  shore  beyond. 

I believe,  none  of  us  felt  sorry  at  the  time  to  be  rid  of 


102 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


Prodgers  so  easily ; only  we  knew  well  he  must  soon  come 
back  to  us  and  beg  for  food : inasmuch  as,  except  his  knife, 
that  would  not  serve  to  kill  wild  game,  he  was  unprovided 
with  anything  whereby  to  support  life  for  so  much  as  a day. 

“He  may  comfort  himself  with  the  rest  of  the  brandy 
bottle”,  said  Gill,  and  then  we  thought  no  more  of  him,  being 
occupied  with  our  savages,  to  see  what  use  we  could  make  of 
them. 

But  first,  Don  Manuel  took  up  that  discourse,  representing 
to  the  men,  as  strongly  as  he  had  to  me  (but  not  in  a like 
way  of  discussing  the  question),  that  we  must  not  think  of 
making  slaves  of  these  Indians,  We  might  call  them  appren- 
tices, he  said,  and  hold  them  as  such,  if  they  chose  to  stay 
with  us.  Only,  we  must  give  them  their  choice,  whether 
they  would  stay  at  all,  or  take  chance  of  the  sea  again  in 
their  canoe.  They  were  free  to  go,  or  remain ; and,  remain- 
ing, had  a right  to  good  treatment,  as  man  should  treat  his 
fellow-man. 

I could  plainly  see,  this  discourse  was  not  well  relished  by 
some  that  heard  it ; and  there  was  silence  among  us  for  a 
little  while,  the  men  looking  first  on  each  other,  then  on  the 
ground.  For  indeed,  to  oppose  the  priest,  who  had  become 
our  benefactor  in  many  ways,  was  a thing  no  one  was  forward 
to  do  : yet,  on  the  other  hand,  Gill,  and  Hilton  too,  who  had 
settled  in  their  minds  they  might  lord  it  over  these  savages, 
and  so  lead  easy  lives  on  the  island  while  the  slaves  worked 
for  them,  now  saw  their  property,  as  it  were,  snatched  from 
their  grasp. 

“ Come,  friends”,  said  the  priest,  after  a pause  : “ do  justice 
to  your  better  thoughts,  and  let  me  be  spokesman  for  you  to 
these  poor  souls,  who  are  created,  like  yourselves,  to  the 
image  of  God”. 

With  that,  he  stepped  to  them;  speaking  in  his  native 
Spanish  to  give  effect  to  his  signs,  he  asked  them  (for  I had 
some  acquaintance  with  that  tongue),  whether  they  would 
stay  on  the  island  with  us : and  here  he  struck  down  his  staff 
on  the  earth,  then  pointed  to  us  with  his  hand.  Or,  says  he, 
will  you  get  into  that  canoe  again  (for  the  canoe  had  by  this 
come  near  the  shore,  but  had  not  righted,  and  was  floating 
keel  upwards),  and  go  back  again  over  the  wide  sea  ? All 
which  he  made  clear  to  them  by  the  signs  accompanying  his 
words. 

Our  Indians  did  not  debate  which  to  choose ; but  all  fall- 
ing on  their  knees,  they  took  up  handfuls  of  the  earth,  and 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


103 


first  kissed  it,  then  put  it  on  their  heads,  after  swallowing  a 
little  of  it,  and  throwing  some  into  the  air : devoting  them  ■ 
selves,  as  we  understood,  to  live  and  die  on  the  place.  Then 
they  pointed  to  the  boat,  and  made  signs  of  disgust,  turning 
away  their  heads,  and  shaking  their  hands  against  it : to 
make  us  know,  they  had  no  wish  to  embark  again,  but  the 
clean  contrary.  At  this,  Don  Manuel  gave  tokens  of  satis- 
faction, and  renewed  for  us  the  promises  of  good  treatment 
I had  made  them  before. 

While  we  were  occupied  in  this  way,  we  heard  the  voice 
of  Richard  Prodgers  cry  out,  as  if  in  terror  or  pain,  from  the 
rocks  beyond  out  of  sight.  In  an  instant  after,  he  shouted 
for  help : we  caught  up  our  guns,  and  dashed  after  him, 
motioning  to  the  savages  to  follow  us.  So  indeed  they  did, 
and  outran  us  too,  having  armed  themselves  with  some  stones 
that  they  caught  up  most  dexterously  as  they  ran.  As  to 
their  running,  they  distanced  us  fairly ; for  such  fleet  crea- 
tures I never  saw  in  human  shape ; all  except  the  old  man, 
who  could  very  hardly  keep  up  with  us.  I thought  it 
dangerous  to  let  the  other  two  go  on,  lest  they  should  escape 
us  altogether ; so  I called  out  to  them  to  come  back,  which 
they  did  with  great  submissiveness ; and  thus  it  chanced  we 
all  came  upon  the  scene  of  action  together. 


CHAPTER  XXVII. 


PRODGERS  LEARNS  HIS  LESSON. 


*0  sooner  had  we  got  clear  of  the  trees,  than 
’t  was  plain  poor  old  Richard  was  not  crying 
for  help  without  a cause : we  found  him 
kneeling  on  the  rocks,  and  he  holding  them 
with  all  his  might,  struggling  against  some- 
what that  pulled  him  to  itself,  with  a force 
greater  than  his  own,  while  he  cried  out 
in  the  extremity  of  his  terror.  We  ran  up  to  him  at  full 
speed,  and  horrible  it  was  to  see  him  in  the  grasp  of  a large 
cuttle  fish,  that  almost  had  gotten  him  within  its  jaws.  This 
monster  had  a body  of  the  bigness  of  a biggish  gourd,  and 


104 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


each  one  of  its  eight  arms  (or  legs,  call  them  as  you  will)  was 
no  less  than  four  feet,  I am  sure,  in  the  length  ; with  suckers 
at  the  end,  such  as  I have  seen  boys  make  in  leather,  and 
pull  up  stones  by  them  at  the  end  of  a string.  It  had  fixed 
one  of  these  suckers  on  Richard’s  face,  leaving  him  scarce 
mouth  enough  to  roar  with  ; and  by  this,  and  three  or  four  of 
its  other  arms,  it  was  pulling  him  towards  its  beak,  hooked 
like  a parrot  or  hawk’s  beak,  that  was  open  to  devour  him ; 
whilst  its  large  fishy  eyes  were  fixed  upon  him,  and  the 
rest  of  the  legs  clasped  the  rocks  with  the  grasp  of  a black- 
smith’s vice. 

We  were  afraid  to  fire,  lest  we  should  miss  the  monster, 
and  hit  our  comrade  instead ; besides,  a bullet  or  two  might 
have  gone  through  the  cuttle-fish,  without  doing  it  much 
hurt,  and  would  not  lessen  the  dreadful  power  of  its  arms, 
that  were  still  drawing,  and  drawing,  till  Prodgers’  face  was 
within  a foot  or  so  of  the  cruel  beak  that  would  have  gored 
it  in  a moment  more. 

Let  me  live  as  long  as  I may,  I never  can  forget  the  look 
of  agony  Richard  cast,  nor  his  shrieks,  as  the  monster  closed 
on  him.  But  just  then  I ran  up,  and  laying  the  edge  of  my 
drawn  hanger  on  the  arm  of  the  fish,  drew  it  swiftly  across, 
and  severed  the  limb  at  a stroke.  Then  the  rest  of  the  men 
fell-to  with  their  knives,  and  we  made  short  work  of  him : 
for  indeed  we  could  find  * no  bones  but  the  back-bone,  and 
all  the  fish’s  strength  lay  in  the  contracting  power  of  his 
muscles,  which  pull  with  a strain  like  a ship’s  cable. 

Our  attention  for  the  moment  was  all  on  our  poor  old 
messmate ; he  had  fallen  into  a deadly  swoon  from  the  fear 
of  what  we  were  just  in  the  nick  of  time  to  save  him  from. 
We  had  some  ado  to  recover  him,  which  we  did  by  the  aid 
of  a few  drops  from  his  own  flask,  with  dashing  some  salt 
water  in  his  face.  At  last  he  opened  his  eyes,  and  nodded 
thanks  to  us  for  our  care,  sitting  on  the  knee  of  Harry  Gill, 
who  thus  repaid  him  for  his  good  offices  of  two  days  ago, 
when  he  got  the  brimstone  choke  in  the  cave.  But  in  another 
minute  or  so  we  saw  Richard  Prodgers  slide  down  on  liis 
knees,  still  holding  by  Harry’s  shoulder:  I thought  at  first 
he  was  going  off  again  into  a swoon,  but  soon  I heard 
him  say,  only  faint  and  low : “ My  God,  I thank  Thee  for 
saving  me  ; 1 am  sorry  for  all  my  sins  against  Thee ! Help 
me  : I intend  to  do  better !” 

On  this,  Don  Manuel  wept  aloud  for  joy ; and  he  that  had 
been  so  calm  up  to  now,  and  calming  the  passions  of  other 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


105 


men,  surprised  us  no  less  by  his  passionate  emotion  than 
Richard  by  his  prayer.  However,  the  priest  took  no  notice 
of  us  or  our  wondering ; he  cast  himself  down  on  his  knees 
beside  Prodgers,  and  throwing  his  arm  over  the  old  sinner’s 
shoulder,  he  looked  up  to  heaven,  and  cried : 

“ It  is  fit  that  we  should  make  merry  and  be  glad,  for  this 
our  brother  was  dead,  and  is  come  to  life  again  ; he  was  lost, 
and  is  found !” 

I know  not  by  what  blessed  contagion  ’t  was,  but  we  all 
cast  ourselves  on  our  knees  together,  and  could  not  help  it ; 
then,  for  the  third  time  since  our  banishment  in  this  place, 
Don  Manuel  prayed  for  our  whole  company,  and  guided  our 
prayer.  He  thanked  the  divine  mercies  for  Richard’s  deli- 
verance ; he  invoked  a blessing  on  his  head  for  his  good  reso- 
lutions, and  prayed  that  he  might  persevere  in  them ; pleading 
for  this  by  what  I shuddered  to  think  we  had  seldom  heard 
mentioned  on  board  ship  but  in  cursing  and  blasphemy — 
the  Blood  and  Wounds  of  Him  who  hung  on  the  cross  to  save 
us  all. 

This  time,  too,  he  ended  before  we  had  wearied  of  our  prayer; 
then  stood  up,  and  we  followed  his  example.  All  of  us,  I think, 
guessed  by  a sort  of  instinct  what  was  coming  next,  as  he  took 
Richard  by  the  hand,  and  led  him  towards  Ned  Hilton.  Ned 
was  still  stanching  his  wounded  cheek  with  his  neck-kerchief. 
Prodgers  put  out  his  hand,  and  did  not  hesitate.  u Forgive 
and  forget”,  said  he,  “ mess-mate ; ’t  was  a mischance  after 
all”.  Ned  seemed  to  debate  with  himself  for  a moment,  then 
grasped  his  hand  in  return,  and  all  was  well  between  them 
from  that  time. 

“ Into  hospital,  gentlemen  !”  cried  the  priest,  gaily ; “ these 
little  accidents  have  laid  us  up,  and  we  must  recover  before 
we  think  of  aught  else,  if  you  please”. 

No  sooner  said  than  done : we  placed  the  wounded  men 
sitting  on  the  rocks,  and  1 began  to  examine  Hilton’s  face, 
that  was  grazed  by  the  shot,  but  not  more  than  that.  Now 
was  the  first  time  the  savages  proved  of  use  to  us ; for  no 
sooner  did  they  remark  what  was  going  on,  than  the  middle- 
aged  Indian  (so  I still  call  him,  but  we  made  out  afterwards 
his  name  was  Rer-mimebolamba,  which  means  Pounder  of  the 
enemies’  heads),  coming  towards  us  with  signs  of  great  reve- 
rence, pointed  first  to  Hilton’s  wounds,  then  stretched  his  hand 
towards  the  woods  in  the  interior  of  the  island : making  as 
though  he  would  gather  something  there,  and  apply  it  to  the 
cheek. 


10  G 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


I was  inclined  to  let  him  have  his  way,  knowing  how  skilful 
savages  are  in  healing  wounds  by  herbs  and  simples,  though 
unpractised  in  other  branches  of  the  healing  art;  and,  surgeon 
as  I was,  1 did  not  disdain  to  take  a lesson  from  the  savage  : 
the  more  so,  as  I had  with  me  no  instruments  or  any  other 
remedies,  these  having  been  left  behind  in  the  ship.  So  I 
bade  Harvey  take  one  of  the  guns,  and  go  with  the 
Indian  into  the  wood,  giving  him  strict  charge  to  prevent 
his  escaping,  and  rather  to  shoot  him  down  than  lose  him  in 
that  way. 

“Stay”,  said  Don  Manuel,  with  much  concern  when  he 
heard  me  say  that ; “ did  not  we  agree,  a while  ago,  these 
men  had  a right  to  life  and  liberty  ? So  no  shooting,  Sehor 
Tomaso,  for  that  would  be  downright  murder”. 

“ But  if  he  escape”,  says  I,  “ he  will  be  dangerous  to  us 
all : he  may  lie  in  wait  for  us  in  the  woods,  and  we  shall 
never  be  secure  of  our  lives  for  a moment : then,  he  may 
signal  to  any  canoe  he  chances  to  espy,  and  bring  other 
savages  on  us”. 

“ You  have  no  right  to  his  life”,  replied  the  priest,  “unless 
it  be  absolutely  needed  to  preserve  your  own”.  And  he  spoke 
this  with  more  authority  than  was  his  wont : for  he  had  at 
times  the  air  of  a prince ; and  when  he  showed  this,  I felt 
awkward  and  shy  before  him,  do  what  I would. 

“ Put  him  in  leading  strings,  if  you  think  it  necessary  to 
your  safety”,  said  he  after  a pause,  and  smiling : “ provided 
he  consent,  for  he  has  a free  choice.  You  have  some  string 
about  you,  I think  I saw : well,  let  me  ask  him  to  become 
our  prisoner  as  well  as  our  apprentice”. 

I handed  him  the  ball  of  twine ; for  indeed,  by  this  time 
he  did  with  us  pretty  well  as  he  would : he  took  it,  and  came 
to  the  Indian,  making  signs  to  him  to  tie  his  own  hand,  and 
pointed  to  the  woods,  to  make  him  know,  he  might  go  thither 
on  his  good  errand  when  he  had  done  this.  John  Pounder 
(for  so  we  called  this  savage  after  a while,  when  he  knew  the 
meaning  of  his  Indian  name)  nodded  and  laughed  at  what 
the  priest  signalled  to  him ; then  took  the  end  of  the  twine : 
with  his  right  hand  and  his  teeth  he  tied  a knot  round  his 
left  wrist  as  cleverly  as  ever  I saw  a sailor  knot  a rope : then 
gave  back  the  ball  into  the  hands  of  the  priest,  and  pointed 
to  the  woods,  as  impatient  to  set  off. 

“ You  see,  friends”,  said  Don  Manuel,  turning  to  us,  “ he 
has  done  himself,  by  dint  of  a little  gentleness,  what  no  one 
had  a right  to  compel  him  to”. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ.  107 

“Give  a man  rope  enough,  and  he’ll  hang  himself”,  says 

Gill. 

“ Not  in  this  case”,  answered  the  Don : “ but  I will  cap 
your  proverb  with  another  we  have  in  Spain ; it  may  be  put 
into  English  thus : 

‘ Up  the  Sierra  Morena 
A green  bough  ’tices  a restive  mule’.* 

Have  you  any  like  that,  friends,  among  the  sayings  of  your 
country  ?” 

“ I take  it”,  said  I,  “ ’t  is  much  what  I have  heard  said,  that 
you  may  draw  folks  round  the  world,  when  you  can’t  drive 
them  a yard”. 

“Ah,  just  so,  just  so”,  said  he,  again  and  again,  looking 
much  pleased:  “kindness  is  the  real  load-stone  that  draws 
everything.  But  now,  off  with  you  to  the  woods,  or  our 
friend  Hilton’s  wounds  will  grow  cold”. 

I must  say,  though,  the  Indian  did  not  seem  so  content  to 
go  with  Tom  Harvey ; for  Harvey  had  the  formidable  gun  in 
his  hand  that  was  to  him  so  supernatural  and  dreadful  a 
thing : the  poor  savage  looked  beseechingly  to  the  priest,  and 
stretched  out  his  hands,  as  begging  him  to  take  him  rather. 
But  Don  Manuel  smiled  upon  him  again,  stroking  his  head ; 
then  laid  his  hand  upon  his  own  heart,  to  make  him  see  he 
pledged  himself  for  his  safety.  This  seemed  to  content  the 
other ; so  he  crossed  his  arms  on  his  breast,  and  they  set  out 
at  a round  trot,  and  soon  were  in  the  woods  out  of  sight. 

Now  I turned  to  Prodgers,  who  by  this  had  pretty  well  got 
back  his  strength : only  his  face  too  had  need  to  be  doctored, 
what  with  the  violent  drawing  of  the  monster’s  paws,  or 
suckers,  grasping  it ; what  with  a kind  of  poison  that  must 
have  exuded  from  them : for  his  face  was  becoming  bloated, 
and  covered  with  a redness,  or  rather  a purple  colour  in  spots, 
that  alarmed  me  for  him.  He  seemed  to  feel  some  fears 
himself : for  he  said  to  me,  in  a subdued  way,  quite  unlike 
his  former : 

“ Do  you  think,  sir,  I am  in  danger  of  dying  ?” 

* It  seems  a pity  that  the  author  has  not  given  us  the  original  of 
this  Spanish  proverb,  the  meaning  of  which,  however,  is  obvious 
enough.  The  Sierra  Morena  is  a rugged  chain  of  mountains  running 
between  Cordova  and  Estremadura ; the  ascent  of  which  was,  in 
earlier  days  at  least,  toilsome  and  difficult,  demanding  some  enticement 
to  the  sumpter  mules  and  other  beasts  of  burden  employed  in  trans- 
porting merchandize  across  the  height. — Ed. 


108 


TI1J5  ADVENTURES  OF 


“ Oh!  I hope  not,  old  fellow”,  answered  I,  wishing  to  cheer 
him  up  ; knowing  that  to  lose  spirits  in  such  cases  only  makes 
the  danger  greater:  “why  should  you  entertain  such  dark 
thoughts  ?” 

“Why,  death v,  says  he  again,  slowly,  “is  an  awful  thing, 
when  you  come  to  think  on  it ; I never  felt  so  much  about  it 
before.  I fell  over  board  once,  ’t  is  now  a good  eleven  years 
ago ; all  the  while  I was  struggling  in  the  water,  I had  not  so 
much  fear  of  death  as  now  that  I am  sitting  on  this  rock. 
To  pass  out  of  life,  what  is  that  ? T is  to  have  one’s  soul 
taken  out  of  one’s  body,  I know ; well,  that  must  be  a shrewd 
wrench ; and  where  does  the  soul  go  to  then  ?” 

God  forgive  me,  but  I gave  some  light  turn  to  this,  to  keep 
up  his  spirits,  as  I thought : when  Don  Manuel,  who  had 
taken  his  prayer-book,  overheard  us,  and  shut  it  again  as  he 
drew  near. 

“Whither”,  said  he,  “do  you  ask?  Why,  you  know,  my 
dear  friend,  as  well  as  I,  the  soul  is  no  sooner  sundered  from 
the  body,  but  it  stands  before  its  Creator,  to  be  judged”. 

At  this,  I pressed  the  priest’s  arm,  to  make  him  sensible  I 
desired  to  keep  all  such  thoughts  from  the  mind  of  my  patient : 
but  he  went  on  more  earnestly,  and  said  a few  simple  things 
about  death  and  judgment  that  seemed  to  go  straight  into 
Prodgers’  very  soul,  so  awe-struck  and  humble  did  he  look  : 
and  Gill  too,  with  Hilton,  listened  in  silence  to  every  word 
he  spoke.  But  that  moment  we  saw  our  Indian  running  to 
us  at  full  speed  from  the  wood  ; for  Harvey  had  released  him 
when  he  had  got  clear  of  the  thicket  on  his  way  back.  His 
hands  were  full  of  herbs,  which  he  brandished  aloft,  laughing 
and  gibbering,  as  he  flew  to  us  with  the  speed  of  a mad  thing. 
And,  to  be  short,  when  he  came  up,  we  let  him  have  his  way, 
which  was,  to  chew  those  herbs  into  a pulp,  and  lay  them  as 
a plaster  on  the  men’s  faces,  making  signs  to  us  to  tie  them 
up  with  their  kerchiefs.  There  being  no  other  remedy  at 
hand,  Hilton  submitted  to  this  with  a tolerable  grace : as  to 
Prodgers,  he  was  tamed  to  that  degree,  he  submitted  like  a 
child.  And,  such  was  the  healing  virtue  of  these  herbs,  they 
soothed  the  wounds  and  inflamed  faces  of  our  patients  so  as 
no  apothecary’s  drugs  could  excel  them : and  soon  the  two 
men  laid  them  down  under  the  shadow  of  the  rocks,  to  snatch 
a sleep ; and  Harry  Gill  followed  their  example. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


109 


CHAPTER  XXVIII. 


WE  DESIGN  A SAFE  RETREAT. 

(Nj^URNING  in  my  mind  all  that  had  befallen  us, 
I felt  yet  more  anxious  how  to  secure  our- 
selves against  attacks  from  without.  For 
’t  was  plain,  though  we  had  found  no  trace 
of  savages  inhabiting  our  island,  we  were 
somewhere  within  reach  of  their  canoes  from 
a distance.  And  if  a small  boat  (I  reasoned) 
setting  forth,  maybe,  on  a mere  fishing  expedition,  or  to  cross 
from  one  island  or  one  shore  of  a creek  to  another,  could  be 
driven  upon  us  in  this  way,  what  might  we  not  expect  from 
a larger  war-canoe,  or,  for  matter  of  that,  an  entire  fleet  of 
them,  fitted  out  for  discovery,  or  missing  their  course,  and  so 
espying  our  mountain,  as  we  had  done  from  the  ship  ? For, 
did  they  once  land,  I felt  sure  their  Indian  cunning  would 
light  on  some  token  of  the  island  being  inhabited  ; and  then 
(I  knew  well)  they  would  never  give  over  their  search  till 
they  had  found  us  out ; and  we  should  beyond  all  doubt  fall 
a sacrifice  to  their  cruelty. 

In  short,  this  gloomy  apprehension  having  once  taken  hold 
on  my  spirits,  I could  not  well  shake  it  off*  again,  do  what  I 
would : but  must  impart  it  to  the  priest,  for  I would  not  at 
that  time  give  a hint  of  it  to  any  of  the  rest.  Don  Manuel, 
I found,  was  prepared  for  what  I said. 

“ The  same  thought”,  says  he,  “ is  present  with  me  ever 
since  we  pulled  these  poor  creatures  out  of  the  water : but  I 
delayed  to  speak  to  you  of  it,  till  I could  propose  some  plan 
for  safety”.  Then  he  went  on  to  say,  that  in  his  country  was 
an  old  deserted  palace,  belonging  once  to  the  Spanish  king ; 
and  in  the  pleasure-grounds  of  it  a labyrinth,  or  maze,  formed 
of  close-cut  hedges  laid  out  in  such-wise,  and  with  so  much 
art,  that  among  a number  of  turns  to  right  and  left,  there 
was  only  one,  and  that  one  difficult  to  hit,  that  would  lead 
to  a summer-house  in  the  centre.  “The  king”,  says  he,  “in 
former  days,  when  kings  had  little  else  to  do,  would  amuse 
hiiuself  at  his  palace- window,  watching  his  servants,  or  others, 


110 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


not  masters  of  the  secret  of  the  place,  how  they  would  turn 
and  wind,  and  run  this  way  or  that:  for  the  most  part  wrong, 
and  forced  to  double  back  again,  or  sit  down  wearied  till 
some  one  who  knew  the  secret  came  to  show  them  out.  Now 
I think,  with  the  help  of  our  apprentices”,  and  he  smiled  on 
me  as  he  used  the  word,  “ we  might  plant  such  a maze  as 
this : for  I have  seen  some  of  the  prickly  pear,  and  other 
close-growing  shrubs,  fit  to  form  the  hedges  of  it,  in  several 
parts  of  our  island  as  we  came  along.  It  will  take  time, 
indeed ; for  we  shall  not  be  secure  till  our  hedges  have  taken 
root  and  grown  thick : but  we  will  pray  that  we  may  not  be 
attacked  before  then.  God  helps  those  who  help  themselves”. 

“ Or  what  do  you  think,  sir”,  said  I,  “ of  going  back  to 
the  cliff  where  we  took  shelter,  and  looking  out  for  some 
cleft  or  natural  cave  that  we  might  enlarge,  and  so  burrow 
deeper  till  we  had  made  us  a house  in  the  rock  ?” 

“ That  is  good,  too”,  observed  he,  thinking : “ but  why 
may  we  not  do  both  ? An  archer  has  two  strings  for  his  bow ; 
and  many  of  the  birds  and  animals  provide  their  summer 
quarters,  and  winter  quarters,  by  the  wonderful  instinct  that 
is  theirs.  At  all  events,  I will  try  and  draw  the  plan  of  my 
maze : come,  here  is  a scrap  of  paper  for  you ; do  you  the 
like,  and  we  will  compare  notes  over  our  fire  to-night”. 

I liked  the  idea  well  enough,  and  I set  to  work,  first  to 
devise  a maze  that  should  be  difficult  for  those  who  had  not 
the  clue,  but  easy  to  those  who  had.  Then  I tried  to  draw 
it  out  on  the  paper  with  one  of  Don  Manuel’s . pens,  but  a 
blotted  work  I made  of  it  after  all : what  with  correcting  here 
and  there,  and  opening  passages  where  I . had  first  closed 
them,  the  thing  was  so  smeared  as  that  I was  half  ashamed 
to  show  it  when  it  was  done.  The  priest  got  on  better  with 
his ; whether  he  was  more  used  to  drawing,  or  more  patient 
in  trying  to  do  each  thing  well  that  he  undertook,  certain  it 
is,  a neater  performance  he  made  when  he  finished  it. 

“ And  now  for  your  other  plan”,  said  he,  rising  and  putting 
by  the  paper,  with  mine  too,  in  his  portfolio:  “for,  having 
got  on  the  track  of  a habitation,  we  must  lose  no  time. 
Remember  the  rainy  season  that  will  soon  be  on  us”. 

By  this,  we  had  come  back  to  our  company,  from  whom  we 
strayed  in  our  talk : Don  Manuel,  seeing  the  three  savages 
eyed  the  monstrous  cuttle-fish  with  longing  eyes,  as  though 
they  would  have  fallen  to,  and  devoured  it  outright,  proposed 
to  give  them  leave ; “ for  none  of  us”,  says  he,  “ will  have 
much  taste  for  him,  I suppose ; and,  to  be  sure,  not  our  poor 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


Ill 


Ricardo,  that  hath  suffered  so  much  from  him  already”.  But 
first,  he  desired  to  secure  a bag  of  inky  fluid,  or  sepia,  as 
painters  name  it,  this  strange  fish  is  always  furnished  with  ; 
whereby  he  can  darken  the  waters  around  him,  and  thus 
escape  from  his  enemies,  whether  fishermen  or  brother-fishes. 
So,  borrowing  Tom  Harvey’s  knife,  he  cut  out  this  ink-bag 
very  dexterously  from  the  dead  fish,  and  filled  his  ink-bottle 
from  it ; then  took  one  of  the  cocoa-nut  shells,  and  poured  the 
rest  into  it,  stopping  the  whole  with  clay ; to  be  able,  he  said, 
to  record  the  rest  of  our  adventures  in  this  place  of  exile. 

But  we  made  up  our  minds  to  secure  some  portion  of  our 
big  fish  for  our  own  supper,  too ; for  I had  read,  ’t  was  a 
delicacy  in  former  times  as  well  as  our  own : so,  slicing  off  as 
much  as  we  thought  to  make  a broil  of  (there  being  enough 
of  the  monster  for  us  all,  and  to  spare),  we  wrapped  this  in 
some  cocoa-nut  leaves,  and  let  the  savages  have  the  rest ; 
after  I had  secured  the  back-bone  to  make  some  polishing 
powder,  and  the  parrot-beak  of  his  mouth,  for  a trophy. 

We  left  the  two  sick  men  asleep  where  they  were,  but  not 
without  devising  a live  telegraph  between  us  and  them.  We 
made  signs  to  the  old  Indian  to  climb  up  a tree,  one  of  the 
highest  in  the  wood  that  lay  between  the  rocks  and  that  cove 
of  ours,  which  we  henceforth  called  always  Shark  Bay.  This 
tree  overlooked  both  sides,  and  we  could  see  the  Indian 
watching  in  it,  too,  as  he  sat  there  among  the  branches. 

As  we  went  along,  taking  the  other  two  savages  with  us, 
I told  Harvey  and  Gill  that,  as  we  had  practised  various 
trades  in  this  our  new  and  strange  life,  we  were  now  to  turn 
masons  and  stone-cutters  also,  to  make  us  a cave  wherein  we 
might  lie  snug  during  the  rainy  season.  They  agreed  to  this 
readily,  expressing  themselves  willing  to  labour,  as  indeed 
they  proved  to  be.  So,  going  as  straight  through  the  second 
wood  as  the  tangled  trees  would  let  us,  we  tried  to  hit  that 
same  cliff  we  had  climbed  up  in  the  morning.  We  judged 
that  to  be  a convenient  spot,  by  reason  of  the  separated  mass 
of  rock  that  leaned  towards  it ; for  the  crag  both  hid  the  place 
where  we  meant  to  burrow  into  the  cliff,  and  gave  us  an  easy 
ascent  to  it : some  of  us  afterwards  called  it  our  hall  door, 
and  some,  our  grand  staircase,  or  companion  ladder. 

’T  was  some  little  time,  indeed,  before  we  found  our  cliff 
again;  in  part,  from  the  thickness  of  the  wood,  but  we  rejoiced 
at  that,  as  giving  security  to  our  hiding-place ; also,  because 
we  now  came  upon  it  from  a different  side.  But  by  keeping 
our  right  shoulders  as  near  the  ridge  of  rock  as  the  thick 


112 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


woods  allowed,  we  knew  we  should  surely  come  on  it  at 
last ; and  soon  we  did,  to  our  joy. 

When  we  placed  ourselves  between  this  leaning  rock  and 
the  cliff  it  had  fallen  from,  we  discovered ’t  was  just  the  place 
that  suited  our  needs ; for  about  the  part  where  these  rocks 
leaned  nighest  together,  there  was  indeed  a kind  of  hole  in 
the  native  cliff,  not  much  bigger  than  I have  seen  a moun- 
tain fox’s  burrow ; but  it  gave  us  hope,  we  should  find  the 
rock  not  too  hard  or  stubborn  to  work.  This  hole  lay 
perhaps  ten  feet  below  the  brow  of  the  cliff,  and  ’t  was  difficult 
to  come  at  it : but  that  fitted  it  the  more  for  our  purpose, 
if  only  we  could  make  contrivance  to  enter  it  from  above,  or 
from  the  leaning  rock  over  against  it.  For  the  time,  we  de- 
termined on  the  first  way,  as  less  dangerous;  so  we  set  about 
contriving  a rope  to  lower  one  of  us  after  another,  in  turn,  to 
work  at  this  hole,  and  enlarge  it  into  a cavern. 

But  where  in  this  wide  world  should  we  provide  us  a rope  ? 
Nothing  in  that  shape  had  we,  but  the  twine,  and  my  fishing- 
lines,  both  much  too  slight  to  bear  our  weight,  put  them  all 
together.  Think  as  much  as  I could,  I could  devise  nothing 
to  the  purpose ; when  Don  Manuel  said,  laughing : 

“Now  you  shall  see  iEsop’s  fable  put  in  practice  in  an 
island  he  never  dreamed  of!  so  true  is  it,  wisdom  is  the  pro- 
perty of  the  human  family  everywhere”. 

I did  not  not  understand  him,  I own : but  by  this  I had 
got  used  to  think  over  what  he  said,  and  find  it  true. 

“Look  at  those  strong  creepers”,  said  he  again,  “how  they 
climb  about  the  trees,  and  lace  in  and  out : well,  no  one  of 
them  would  bear  us  by  itself;  but  put  a dozen,  or  so  together, 
and  bind  them  round  with  our  twine,  and  you  shall  see,  we 
shall  soon  have  rope  enough”- 

“To  hang  us  all”,  broke  in  Harry  Gill,  who  never  could 
keep  back  a joke  that  came  into  his  head. 

“ Or  to  hang  the  captain  and  first  mate,  not  to  say  those 
gentlemen  who  landed  us  here  so  civilly  the  day  before 
yesterday”,  added  Tom  Harvey. 

Don  Manuel  smiled  at  Gill’s  remark,  but  did  not  look 
pleased  at  the  other ; however,  he  went  on  about  his  rope. 

“ Union  is  strength”,  said  he ; “ and  what  is  beyond  the 
power  of  one,  can  be  done  with  ease  when  more  than  one  are 
combined.  You  all  remember  the  fable  of  the  old  man  and 
his  sons,  and  the  bundle  of  sticks,  I dare  say  ?” 

“No  indeed”,  answered  I:  “pray  tell  us,  sir”. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


113 


CHAPTER  XXIX 

WHAT  IS  TRUTH  ? 

CJST  then,  the  old  Indian,  our  watchman, 
shouted  from  the  tree  where  we  had  left  him 
on  the  look-out : we  all  started,  and  caught 
up  our  arms  again ; but  there  was  no  occa- 
sion, for  we  found  he  was  calling  to  the  men 
we  had  left  asleep,  to  show  them  where  we 
were.  Soon,  Prodgers  and  Harry  came  to 
us  through  the  wood ; then  the  Indian  clambered  down  from 
his  perch,  and  joined  us  too. 

Now  we  began  to  reap  advantage  from  having  more  pairs 
of  hands  than  we  had  landed  with  : for  we  no  sooner  showed 
our  Indians  what  we  were  after,  and  that  we  would  have 
them  collect  these  creepers  for  us  to  make  a rope,  but  they 
sprang  up  the  trees  (at  least  the  two  younger)  with  the  nim- 
bleness  of  cats,  and  soon  tore  down  enough  for  us  to  begin 
upon.  I scarce  think  our  trade  of  rope-making  had  come  to 
much,  but  for  these  savages  ; who  showed  themselves  inge- 
nious to  a degree,  in  binding  together  the  green  withs  by 
others  of  a like  kind,  round  and  round,  at  every  three  feet  or 
so : till,  after  a good  two  hours’  work,  we  saw  ourselves  pos- 
sessed of  a passably  strong  and  pliable  rope,  fit  to  bear  a good 
weight,  and  eighteen  or  twenty  feet  long  at  the  least.  We 
were  all  proud  of  our  new  cable,  and  began  bending  and 
straining  it  every  way,  to  try  it : but  it  did  not  part  nor 
untwist,  so  well  had  our  poor  ’prentices  worked  it. 


8 


114 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


Our  next  concern  was,  to  find  something  of  a cross-bar 
to  reeve  into  our  rope,  that  our  mason  might  sit  on,  while  we 
let  him  down  to  work  at  the  entrance  door.  Harvey  and  Ned 
Hilton  went  searching  through  the  woods  for  some  fallen 
branch ; but  I drew  Don  Manuel  aside,  to  impart  to  him  what 
had  come  into  my  mind : for,  as  we  had  to  break  up  the  con- 
demned gun  to  make  chisels  and  other  tools,  I thought  it  best 
this  should  be  done  apart  from  the  savages,  lest  they  might 
lose  their  great  dread  of  those  guns  whereby  they  were  kept 
in  such  awe.  So  we  agreed  to  take  it  deeper  into  the  wood ; 
and  beckoned  Harry  Gill  to  come  along  with  us,  leaving 
Prodgers  to  look  after  the  Indians,  who  were  still  hard  at 
work,  finishing  the  rope.  And  this  we  did  now,  with  no  ap- 
prehension of  their  being  hardly  dealt  with : so  changed  a 
man  was  Richard  Prodgers  become,  and  from  a lion,  or  a bear 
rather,  had  grown  more  like  to  a lamb. 

By  dint  of  much  hammering  with  stones,  and  bending  the 
barrel  back  and  forward,  till  it  broke  at  last,  we  got  two 
long  chisels,  or  augers,  out  of  our  old  gun  : they  were  rude 
enough,  to  be  sure,  but  proved  serviceable.  One  of  them, 
and  that  was  the  shorter,  we  kept  still  fastened  on  to  the 
stock,  to  have  more  purchase  on  it  in  working.  Don  Manuel 
carried  these  back,  wrapped  in  his  cloak,  till  we  could  con- 
ceal them  better  from  the  savages.  But  Gill  went  on  before, 
and  left  us  together. 

I had  gained  that  confidence  in  the  priest,  ’t  would  have 
made  me  uneasy  to  hide  from  him  my  thoughts  when  they 
chanced  to  turn  on  what  was  the  right  or  wrong  of  any  case : 
and  just  then,  a thought  came  into  my  mind  as  we  came  back 
together  out  of  the  wood. 

“ I know,  sir”,  said  I,  “ what  some  people  in  my  country 
would  say  to  what  we  are  doing”. 

“ What  would  they  say,  friend  ?”  answered  he,  and  looked 
me  straight  in  the  face,  walking  on  quietly. 

u Why,  to  be  plain,  that ’t  is  deceiving  these  savages,  to 
break  up  the  gun  by  stealth,  that  they  may  still  think  the 
puns  to  be  something  more  than  they  are”. 

“ Eh,  Senor”,  returned  he,  “ how  long  is  it  ago,  that  you 
thought  we  might  perhaps  even  enslave  them  ?” 

u Well,  sir,  what  I say  is  because  it  came  into  my  head, 
and  I wanted  to  discuss  it”. 

“ True,  my  dear  friend”,  quoth  he,  in  his  own  mild  way  ; 
“ and ’t  is  my  duty  and  pleasure  alike  to  answer  such  ques- 
tions to  the  utmost.  Let  us  see ; you  think  we  ought  to  tell 
them  outright,  gun  is  a gun  ?” 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ.  115 

“ I would  not  like  them  to  think”,  answered  I,  “ a gun  wa 
an  idol,  or  a god”. 

“ Nor  I neither”,  replied  he,  grave  enough ; “ but  are  we 
making  them  think  so,  by  any  act  of  ours  ?” 

“ We  break  up  the  gun  in  the  wood,  out  of  sight”,  persisted 
I ; “ lest  they  should  lose  their  fear  of  our  other  guns”. 

“ I will  answer  you  in  this  way”,  Don  Manuel  said,  after  a 
moment,  smiling.  u When  I was  a boy,  I went  to  a school  in 
my  native  town,  kept  by  one  Lopez  Tuero  d’  Alava ; he  was 
rather  a stern  man,  and  very  stately  in  his  ways.  We  boys 
looked  up  to  him  as  the  greatest  man  alive : and  he  took  care 
to  keep  us  impressed  with  that  belief.  One  day,  the  governor 
of  the  province,  his  Excellency  Don  Pedro  Guzman  da 
Cuen9a,  came  suddenly  to  pay  a visit  to  the  school,  and 
entered  at  the  head  of  all  his  train.  The  school-room  was 
filled  with  guards,  chamberlains,  attendants  of  all  kinds, 
in  waiting  on  the  great  man.  When  our  first  surprise  was 
over,  we  all  looked  anxiously  to  see  what  Lopez  Tuero  would 
do.  Had  he  taken  off  his  hat,  or  made  any  sign  of  sub- 
mission to  the  governor,  perhaps  his  authority  in  his  school 
would  never  again  have  been  what  it  had  been  ; for  we  should 
have  learned,  there  was  a greater  man  in  existence  than  he. 
This  he  knew  quite  as  well  as  we  did.  So,  rising  from  his 
desk  in  his  most  stately  manner,  he  moved  down  the  school 
with  the  air  of  a king  receiving  an  ambassador,  or  any  other 
great  man  treating  with  his  equal ; wearing  his  hat  as  if  it  had 
been  nailed  to  his  head.  High  courtesies  passed  between  the 
two,  till  the  governor  took  his  leave : and  it  was  not  till  after 
1 had  entered  the  University  of  Salamanca,  that  I learned, 
Lopez  went  the  next  day  to  the  governor’s  palace,  cast  himself 
on  his  knees  before  him,  and  humbly  begged  pardon  for 
having  acted  in  a way  he  had  felt  was  best  for  those  he  had 
under  his  charge. 

“ Now”,  pursued  Don  Manuel,  “ was  that  a wrong  deceit  ?” 
T was  more  than  I could  answer  out  of  hand : yet,  think- 
ing a moment,  “ I suppose”,  said  I,  “ he  felt  it  necessary”. 

“ But  was  it  wrong?”  insisted  he  again ; “ because  what  is 
wrong  never  can  be  necessary”. 

u May  not  a lie  sometimes  be  necessary  ?”  asked  I. 

“ Never !”  exclaimed  the  priest,  and  seemed  to  put  his 
whole  soul  into  the  word  as  he  spoke  it. 

“ And  is  a lie  always  wrong  ; under  all  circumstances  ?” 
a Always  ! always !”  repeated  he,  still  in  the  same  way. 
Now,  indeed,  I felt  somewhat  puzzled  ; for ’t  was  the  point 


116 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


I had  in  my  mind  as  to  the  breaking  up  of  our  gun  in  secret. 
Don  Manuel  saw  this ; for  he  had,  I am  sure,  a great  quick- 
ness in  reading  men’s  thoughts  by  their  faces : he  smiled,  and 
saved  my  putting  it  in  words,  which  I was  loth  to  do. 

“ I know  what  you  are  thinking”,  said  he,  “ as  though 
you  said  it ; and  I will  say  it  for  you.  Catholics,  you  have 
always  heard,  think  little  of  truth;  are  careless  about  it: 
and  a priest  is  likely  to  teach  it  to  be  a matter  of  small 
importance.  Is  that  it  ?” 

I was  startled,  I own,  at  the  way  he  put  his  finger  on 
that ; for  it  was  j ust  what  ran  in  my  thoughts. 

“Well,  listen  then”,  he  went  on.  “The  teaching  of  the 
Church  is,  that  a lie  is  in  its  own  nature  evil ; that  it  is  a sin  ; 
that,  being  a sin,  ’t  is  a greater  evil  than  anything  imaginable, 
which  is  not  an  equal  or  a greater  sin  : ’t  is  a greater  evil  than 
any  mere  misfortune,  or  series  of  misfortunes  ; greater  than 
pain,  sickness,  poverty,  bereavement,  death : greater  than 
famines,  pestilences,  earthquakes,  or  the  destruction  of  the 
globe  itself.  For,  these  calamities,  dreadful  though  they  be, 
aff  ct  the  creature  : but  a lie,  as  being  a sin,  is  aimed  against 
the  Creator.  So,  if  by  telling  a lie  I could  save  your  life,  my 
dear  friend,  and  the  lives  of  all  our  companions ; if  I could 
by  one  little  lie  work  out  the  conversion  of  our  poor  savages, 
and  secure  the  salvation  of  us  all ; nay,  of  all  England,  all 
Spain,  all  other  nations  and  countries  together : if  by  telling 
a lie  that  would  harm  nobody,  that  would  only  be  a little 
venial  sin,  I could  empty  Purgatory  (which  you  don’t  believe 
in)  of  all  the  suffering  souls  it  contains ; and  block  up  the 
mouth  of  Hell  (which  I suppose  you  do  believe  in)  that  no 
soul  should  ever  be  cast  into  it  more : I should  be  doing  the 
greater  evil  to  obtain  the  lesser  good.  And  after  this,  what 
do  you  think  of  a lie  ?” 

I remember  these  words,  as  I here  set  them  down,  because 
they  were  so  impressed  on  me  at  the  time  by  his  manner  as 
he  spoke  them.  Then  he  went  on  to  say,  ’t  was  one  thing 
to  deceive  a person  by  word  or  deed,  to  state  falsehood  to 
him,  or  act  falsehood  before  him ; and  quite  another,  to  allow 
him  to  draw  his  own  conclusions  from  what  he  observed, 
when  you  did  nothing  to  lead  him  that  way,  and  when  you 
had  a just  cause  for  letting  him  have  his  opinion,  at  least  for 
a time. 

“ If”,  pursued  he,  “ we  showed  them,  a gun  might  be 
broken  by  working  at  it  with  a stone,  they  might  try  the  ex- 
periment while  we  slept ; and  then  what  becomes  of  our  lives  ? 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


H7 


Another  boat- load  of  savages  might  land  on  the  island;  or 
these  very  men,  with  the  craft  and  cunning  they  have  learned 
at  their  mother’s  knee,  might  take  a fancy  to  sacrifice  us  to 
the  sun  or  moon,  to  secure  a good  voyage  home  again.  Then 
we  are  murdered,  and  they  remain  heathens.  Is  it  not  for 
their  good,  as  well  as  ours,  that  we  should  not  disarm  our- 
selves by  taking  away  their  wholesome  fear  of  our  fire-arms  ?’ 

After  a little  while,  neither  of  us  speaking,  the  priest  added  : 

“ I gave  you  a sort  of  parable  just  now ; well,  let  me  give 
you  another.  Suppose  a furious  murderer,  with  a drawn 
sword,  rushed  suddenly  upon  a child,  and  threatened  to  kill 
it  unless  the  child  told  him  by  what  road  its  father  had  left 
the  house,  that  he  might  go  after  him,  and  take  his  life. 
What  would  you  advise  the  child  in  that  case  ?” 

“ I think  there  is  no  doubt  at  all”,  said  I,  readily. 

“ But  what  ?”  insisted  he. 

“ Of  course,  the  child  might  tell  the  murderer  the  wrong 
road ; nay,  ought  to  do  so,  to  save  its  father’s  life,  or  indeed 
any  other  person’s  life”. 

“Then  the  child  might  tell  a lie  ?” 

“ Could  it  not  point  down  the  wrong  road  ?”  I asked. 

“ That  would  be  a lie  in  act ”,  insisted  he  ; “ and  as  truly  a 
lie  as  one  in  words”. 

“Well,  then,  the  child  might  tell  the  lie,  or  act  the  lie, 
either  way,  for  such  an  object  as  to  save  a life”. 

“ You  are  right  wrong,  my  friend”,  returned  he,  laughing : 
“ for  no  one  ought  to  do  any  such  thing”. 

At  this,  I looked  at  him  in  some  surprise. 

“ Did  I not  say”,  he  went  on,  a that  a lie  is  always  a sin  ; 
and  that  a sin  is  a greater  evil  than  any  mere  misfortune  ? 
INow,  ’t  would  be  a great  misfortune,  doubtless,  for  the  father 
to  lose  his  life,  and  the  child  to  lose  its  father : but  no  child, 
no  any  one,  has  a right  to  make  even  a venial  sin  avert  even 
a great  misfortune”. 

What  he  said  turned  out  so  clean  against  my  expectation, 
and  he  proved  so  much  more  severe  about  truth  than  I had 
supposed  him,  I had  nothing  to  say. 

“You  remind  me,  now”,  pursued  he,  gaily,  “of  a bad 
horseman,  who,  when  you  put  him  up  on  the  horse  at  one 
side,  falls  over  on  t’  other.  A while  ago,  you  stumbled  at 
what  was  lawful ; and  now,  nothing  will  content  you,  but  that 
falsehood  must  be  lawful  in  an  urgent  case.  Extremes ! my 
dear  friend,  extremes!  And  you  see,  extremes  meet  some- 
times”. 


118 


TIIE  ADVENTURES  OF 


“ Aye”,  he  added,  thinking,  and  slowly,  u we  must  always 
go  from  side  to  side  of  the  road,  like  an  unsteady  driver, 
unless  we  have  a sure  guide  and  a sure  track”. 

“ And  who  or  what  [is  that  guide  ?”  asked  I,  for  I felt 
anxious  for  his  answer. 

“Aye,  indeed”,  said  he,  very  slowly,  looking  me  in  the 
face ; and  said  nothing  more. 


X>  cXX>  <X>o  <X>o  <X  X>  cXX>  <XX>  XX)  o<>o  (X>o  o<  >o  cXX)  x >o  XX>  XX>  X)  X 


X>XX>XX>XX>XX)XX>XX>XX>XX>XX)XX)XX)XX)XX>X>oXX> 


CHAPTER  XXX. 

THE  SERPENTS’  HOLE. 

this,  we  had  come  back  to  the  rest ; and 
set  about  our  operations  of  mining  into  the 
rock  : but  first  we  had  to  decide  which  of  us 
should  take  the  lead  in  being  lowered  to  ex- 
plore that  hole.  I thought  of  casting  lots 
for  it,  as ’t  Was  a post  of  honour  and  of  danger 
alike ; for  we  knew  not  what  we  might  en- 
counter down  there,  whether  some  wild  cat-o’-the-mountain, 
or,  more  likely,  a brood  of  serpents  in  their  nest.  But  Don 
Manuel  insisted  on  being  first  to  explore,  in  a way  I knew 
not  well  how  to  answer.  “ If  anything  befall  me,  friends”, 
said  he,  “ you  will  be  little  the  worse  of  it ; but  you  could  ill 
spare  the  help  of  one  another  in  your  exile”.  I would  still 
persuade  him  not  to  venture ; but  he  finished  all  by  saying, 
cheerfully : 

“ ’T  is  on  the  banks  of  the  Ganges,  I have  heard,  children 
are  used  to  eat  their  parents  because  they  are  old  and  useless  : 
and  you  may  as  well  let  the  wild  animals  have  a chance  with 
me  for  the  same  reason”. 

“ You  have  quoted  a heathenish  example  for  us,  sir”, 
answered  I : “ but  I suppose  it  must  be  as  you  will : and  we 
will  stand  watching  you  above,  be  sure,  to  help  to  our  utmost 
in  case  of  need”. 

So,  having  knelt  down  to  a brief  prayer  apart,  and  made 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


119 


the  sign  of  the  cross  over  himself,  he  threw  off  his  long  cas- 
sock ; and  bidding  the  men  knot  our  new  rope  fast  round  the 
roots  of  a cocoa-palm  that  grew  near  the  edge,  and  keep  a 
good  hold,  as  he  said  smiling,  “ for  the  honour  of  the  British 
flag”,  he  slid  from  the  cliff,  and  swarmed  (as  our  sea-phrase 
is)  down  the  rope,  till  he  soon  had  his  feet  resting  on  the  edge 
of  the  hole  : he  carefully  bent  himself  down,  and  looked  in. 

Before  we  could  count  ten,  we  heard  him  cry  out,  “ Pull 
up,  pull  up  quick  !”  We  did  it  with  a will,  yet  so  as  not  to 
scrape  his  hands  and  face  against  the  cliff ; and  soon  we 
caught  him  in  our  hands,  and  had  him  safe  again  on  the  top. 
Then  he  told  us,  we  were  right  in  our  conjecture,  for  that  the 
place  was  swarming  with  serpents. 

On  that  news,  we  determined  to  smoke  them  out  of  their 
hole,  or  smother  them  in  it ; and  making  my  wish  known  to 
the  savages  by  signs,  they  soon  collected  for  us  some  brush- 
wood and  other  branches,  pretty  dry,  in  places  sheltered  from 
the  storm.  But  we  would  not  as  yet  trust  them  out  of  sight, 
and  made  them  know  it  by  our  threatening  gestures ; though 
I believe  the  poor  simple  creatures  had  now  become  so  at- 
tached to  us,  as  well  as  looking  on  us  to  be  some  superior 
beings  whom  they  could  not  oppose,  we  might  have  trusted 
them  all  over  the  island.  However,  they  soon  gathered  us  a 
good  heap,  enough  to  have  smothered  whole  families  of  ser- 
pents; and  did  more  than  that,  too;  for  John  Pounder, 
crying  out,  u Kukui,  kuhuil”  pointed  to  a kind  of  dwarf- tree 
with  grayish  leaves,  that  looked  like  an  olive  at  a distance, 
though  we  had  not  noticed  it  before : making  signs,  ’t  was 
good  for  our  purpose. 

I let  him  have  his  way ; so  off  he  darts  to  the  tree,  and 
comes  back  with  some  biggish  nuts  in  his  hand,  motioning  to 
me  to  cut  a slender  stick  sharp  at  one  end  with  my  knife.  I 
did  this  to  humour  him ; so  he  plants  the  stick  upright  in  the 
earth,  the  sharp  end  uppermost ; and  sticks  three  or  four  of 
the  nuts  on  it,  one  over  the  other.  1 signed  to  the  rest  to  be 
still,  so  Pounder  had  it  all  his  own  way : and  his  next  per- 
formance was  to  get  a light  after  his  country  fashion,  which 
I had  heard  of,  but  never  seen  done  before.  For  he  begged 
so  beseechingly  for  the  use  of  my  knife,  I could  not  deny  him ; 
but  threatened  him  again  to  make  no  bad  use  of  it.  He 
searched  about  a while,  till  he  found  a short  thickish  branch, 
of  the  bigness  of  my  wrist ; he  quickly  brought  the  end  of 
this  to  a point  with  the  knife ; then,  coming  to  a stump  of  a 
tree  that  had  been  broken  off  by  some  former  storm,  quite 


120 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


dry,  and  half  touch-wood,  he  held  the  point  of  the  stick  on  it, 
and  began  twirling  it  about  with  the  palms  of  his  two  hands 
as  swiftly  as  ever  you  saw  a machine  bore  a hole  into  a 
board  with  an  auger.  He  had  not  done  this  for  five  or  six 
minutes,  when  first  there  rose  a little  smoke,  then  the  tree 
smoked  pretty  thick,  and  all  at  once  there  burst  forth  a flame 
of  fire  under  his  hands. 

Our  men  expected  this  so  little,  for  they  had  laughed  at 
Master  Pounder’s  contrivances,  that  now  they  greeted  his  suc- 
cess with  a hearty  cheer : and  the  other  savages  showed,  in 
their  own  fashion,  they  were  glad  he  had  pleased  us,  though 
noways  surprised  at  what  he  had  done;  for  it  seems,  this 
method  of  kindling  a fire  is  their  common  way.  But  now, 
gathering  up  a handful  of  dry  leaves,  he  kindles  them,  and 
comes  to  the  nuts  strung  upon  the  stick ; and  they  took  flame 
readily,  by  reason  of  an  oil  they  are  filled  with.  Then 
Pounder,  while  the  nuts  burned  slowly  down,  like  a candle, 
prostrated  himself  before  us  again,  till  we  bid  him  rise. 

To  find  candles  thus  ready  made,  and  growing  on  a tree, 
pleased  us  greatly  then,  and  more  afterwards,  when  we  came 
to  use  them  in  the  winter  evenings.  But  for  the  time  we  had, 
as  the  saying  is,  other  fish  to  fry  ; for  we  were  to  dislodge  the 
serpents  in  the  hole  by  fire  and  smoke ; and  take  possession 
of  their  lodging.  And  the  way  we  set  about  it  was  this : 

We  tied  up  our  dry s brushwood,  with  the  leaves  inside, 
into  bundles,  or  faggots,  as  many  as  seven  or  eight  of  them, 
ranging  these  in  order  on  the  top  of  the  cliff : but  first,  we 
sent  Pounder  for  some  more  candle-nuts,  and  thrust  a few  of 
them  into  each  bundle,  as  I have  seen  housewives  in  Wales 
bind  up  a pitched  stick  in  a faggot,  to  light  their  fire  the 
better.  When  all  was  ready,  and  nothing  wanted  but  to 
descend  to  the  hole,  and  so  set  fire  to  the  first  bundle,  and 
push  it  in,  with  others  after  it,  to  give  our  gentlemen  there  a 
warm  entertainment,  we  questioned,  which  of  our  number  to 
send  on  this  adventure.  For  now  we  knew  the  fulness  of  the 
danger ; we  felt  sure,  unless  the  man  who  went  down  were 
quick  and  steady,  to  stop  the  mouth  of  the  hole  with  the  very 
first  bundle,  one  of  the  serpents,  or  more,  would  spring  out  on 
him;  and  we  guessed  that  to  be  certain  death.  All  of  us 
stood  looking,  one  on  the  other ; and  at  length,  we  well- 
nigh  thought  to  give  up  the  enterprise,  and  seek  some  other 
place.  But  then,  again,  this  place  was  so  commodious,  or 
might  be  made  so,  for  its  dryness  and  security,  we  took  up 
our  resolution  to  make  the  venture. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


121 


But  this  was  put  an  end  to  by  the  old  Indian ; I may  as 
well  call  him  Mark,  for  that  was  the  name  we  gave  to  him 
when  he  was  baptized  somewhat  later.  He  now  drew  near  to 
us,  with  as  much  reverence  as  before,  holding  John  Pounder 
by  the  hand.  He  made  us  a long  speech  in  his  own  tongue, 
of  which  we  understood  not  one  word  ; but  he  went  on,  partly 
speaking,  and  part  by  signs,  to  offer  Pounder  for  this  ven- 
turesome feat ; who,  for  his  part,  offered  himself  too,  with 
great  eagerness ; expressing,  by  many  odd  gestures,  his  con- 
tempt for  the  serpents : (for  the  savages  had  made  out  from 
our  signs,  ’t  was  serpents  that  inhabited  the  hole). 

The  men  had  gained  that  degree  of  good  feeling,  as  that 
none  of  them  were  willing  to  risk  our  poor  ’prentices  in  this 
service  of  danger.  But,  to  our  surprise,  Don  Manuel  now 
urged  that  Pounder  should  be  allowed  to  go  down. 

“ ’T  is  not  here”,  said  he,  u a question  of  life  against  life, 
nor  of  equal  danger  to  one  or  to  another ; in  that  case  I would 
say,  let  none  of  us  go.  But  I believe  these  savages  are  so 
used  to  deal  with  serpents,  and  disarm  them  of  their  fangs, 
or  can  so  easily  find  a simple  remedy  in  the  woods  if  they 
receive  a bite,  that ’t  is  little  risk  to  them  by  comparison.  I 
could  tell  you  a story  (only  it  would  take  us  too  long  now)  to 
show  this ; but  I have  heard  many  such,  from  trustworthy 
persons”. 

Pounder  seemed  to  understand  his  meaning,  in  great  part ; 
he  nodded  his  head  with  many  grimaces,  then,  taking  up  one 
of  the  green  withs  we  had  bound  about  our  rope,  he  twisted 
it  every  way,  to  represent  a serpent ; wound  it  on  his  arm, 
shook  it  about,  laughing  all  the  time,  and  finished  by  strip- 
ping off  the  end  of  it  with  his  teeth,  to  show  us,  that  was  how 
he  would  bite  off  the  snake’s  head  for  him.  Then  he  pointed 
to  my  knife,  and  the  hanger  by  my  side,  as  begging  me  to 
grant  him  the  use  of  them : so  armed  with  these,  he  went  to 
the  rope,  as  though  he  would  slip  down  it  at  once. 


122 


TI1E  ADVENTURES  OF 


CHAPTER  XXXI. 


NOTICE  TO  QUIT. 


ft  VAST”,  cried  Tom  Harvey;  “were  it  not 
best  we  should  load  a brace  of  the  guns  with 
small  shot,  and  fire  into  the  hole,  to  bid  them 
look  out  for  us  ?” 

We  all  agreed  to  this;  only,  we  thought 
one  of  the  guns  enough,  not  to  waste  powder 
and  shot : we  put  in  a full  charge,  and  gave 
the  piece  to  Gill;  for  since  his  victory  over  the  shark,  he 
was  our  captain  of  marksmen.  But  this  proceeding  was 
very  much  against  the  grain  for  our  savage  friends ; who, 
I truly  think,  would  sooner  have  faced  a wood  full  of  ser- 
pents than  one  discharge  of  our  terrible  guns.  They  cast 
themselves  on  their  faoes,  and  remained  there,  trembling, 
while  Harry  Gill  leaped  back  across  the  gulf  with  his  gun, 
and  clambered  leisurely  down  the  hanging  rock;  and  this  was 
a work  of  danger,  too,  for  he  had  to  go  down  the  under  face 
of  it,  as  it  leaned  over  him.  However,  he  kept  his  footing, 
with  the  gun  slung  over  his  shoulder ; and  went  down  with 
hands  and  feet  two  or  three  yards,  till  he  came  all  but  op- 
posite the  hole.  Then  he  leaned  against  some  twisted  roots 
springing  out  of  the  rock  ; unslung  his  piece,  with  a good  aim, 
and  so  fired  into  the  hole.  The  piece  made  a terrible  report, 
indeed,  being  discharged  in  so  close  a place  ; the  echo  went 
back  and  again  from  cliff  to  crag,  and  from  crag  to  cliff ; and 
the  poor  Indians  were  half  dead  with  fear.  Out  of  the  hole 
there  came  sounds  of  hissing,  by  which  we  knew,  however 
much  execution  the  shot  might  have  done,  yet  Gill  had  not 
killed  all  the  brood.  But,  what  was  worse,  at  that  moment, 
whether  from  the  shock  or  his  weight,  or  both,  the  roots  that 
poor  Harry  had  leaned  against,  now  gave  way  under  him.  He 
had  but  just  time  to  catch  at  some  saplings  as  he  fell ; but  he 
managed  that,  like  a nimble  seaman  as  he  was : and  there  he 


123 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 

hung  by  his  hands,  I am  sure  full  three  fathoms  above  his 
mother  earth. 

We,  who  watched  all  this  from  the  cliff,  were  so  distracted 
at  the  sight,  that  what  to  do  we  knew  not : for,  did  we  pursue 
our  advantage  over  the  serpents,  we  must  leave  our  comrade 
hanging  there,  and  then  drop  he  must  soon,  to  the  peril  of 
his  neck  or  bones : or,  did  we  go  over  to  help  him,  we  feared 
our  enemies  might  escape  from  their  hole,  and  glide  down, 
and  so  get  at  him  if  he  should  fall  before  we  came  to  the 
rescue. 

Amid  the  confusion  of  our  thoughts,  as  we  looked  this  way 
and  that,  the  priest  called  out,  with  all  the  decision  of  a 
general  leading  his  men  to  the  charge,  and  a voice  like  a 
trumpet : 

“You,  friend  Owen,  take  my  cloak;  away  with  you,  and 
Tom,  and  Hilton ! Hold  it  under  him ! Break  his  fall ! 
Ricardo  and  I will  do  the  rest  here !” 

Quick  as  thought,  we  obeyed  the  words : I seized  on  the 
cloak,  and  cleared  the  gulf  at  a bound.  The  other  two 
were  after  me ; and  how  we  found  ourselves  on  firm  ground 
below  with  our  necks  unbroken,  we  never  stayed  to  inquire. 
But  we  spread  out  the  cloak  under  our  messmate,  and  held 
on  hard,  keeping  it  taut,  perhaps  five  feet  off  the  ground. 
Then  we  hailed  him,  and  bid  him  drop  himself  soft  and 
steady.  So  indeed  he  did ; but  withal  his  weight  broke  away 
the  cloak  out  of  our  hands,  pulling  us  all  down  together  in  a 
heap.  Though  his  fall  was  greatly  broken  by  the  cloak,  he 
did  not  altogether  escape,  neither ; and  coming  down  length- 
ways, bruised  and  stunned  his  head  a little,  but  hurt  his 
shoulder  more. 

No  sooner  did  Don  Manuel  see  him  safe  (though  somewhat 
the  worse  of  his  fall),  but  he  beckoned  Pounder  to  go  down 
the  rope ; at  the  same  time,  he  slung  down  a bundle  of  our 
combustibles  to  the  hole’s  mouth,  having  kindled  it  from  our 
stickful  of  nuts,  that  was  burning  still.  The  Indian  went 
down  quick,  as  readily  as  if  there  were  no  serpents  within  a 
mile  of  the  place ; and  with  Don  Manuel’s  staff,  pushed  the 
burning  faggot  right  into  the  hole,  which  it  quite  stopped  up ; 
then  with  my  knife  he  cut  the  twine,  and  the  priest  hauled 
up  the  end  to  tie  another  faggot,  and  let  it  down  to  him.  So 
they  went  on,  faggot  after  faggot,  Master  Pounder  doing  his 
work  well ; though  I believe  he  would  sooner  have  shown 
his  skill  in  wringing  the  serpents’  necks  than  smothering  them 
thus  by  blockade. 


124 


TIIE  ADVENT UltES  OF 


We  made  out  by  the  loud  angry  hissings  that  came  from 
the  hole,  our  enemies  had  no  other  way  of  escape  from  us  ; a 
thing  we  had  rather  feared,  for  in  that  case  our  fire  would 
have  driven  them  out  and  dispersed  them  in  the  woods,  to 
make  the  whole  place  unsafe  for  us.  But  one,  and ’t  was 
a smaller  one,  found  means  to  glide  out  through  some  unper- 
ceived cranny,  and  wriggled  himself  with  great  speed  down 
the  face  of  the  cliff : but  we  had  an  eye  to  him,  and  just 
before  he  alighted,  I scotched  him  with  a stone. 

When  the  last  faggot  had  blazed  out,  John  Pounder, 
swinging  by  the  rope,  made  no  difficulty  of  thrusting  his 
head  and  one  arm  into  the  hole,  though  the  smoke  was  like 
to  blind  or  choke  him  : then,  in  a few  moments,  drawing  back 
again,  he  shouts  out  “ Oora , oora!”  which  in  their  language,  it 
seems,  means  very  good;  laughing  now  to  us,  now  to  Don 
Manuel  above ; and  in  his  hand  was  a serpent,  dead  and  half 
roasted,  that  he  kept  swinging  about,  and  then  flung  it  down 
to  us.  So,  by  degrees,  with  the  end  of  the  staff  and  his  hands, 
he  rakes  out  nine  more  of  them,  great  and  small,  one  after 
the  other,  and  flings  them  down.  When  he  had  finished  this, 
“ Well”,  cried  I up  to  him,  “well,  John,  are  there  any  yet  to 
come  out?”  He  understood  what  I would  ask,  and  shook  his 
head,  laughing,  and  cried  out  again : “ Oora , oora”,  with  a 
wild  whoop,  that  made  the  rocks  ring  about  our  ears.  Then, 
shutting  his  hand  tight  (for  he  held  on  to  the  rope  by  the  other, 
together  with  his  feet),  he  stretched  forth,  first  one  finger, 
then  another,  counting  all  the  time,  till  he  came  to  five ; then 
shut  his  hand  again,  and  so  did  the  same  over  a second  time : 
then  one  finger  alone,  and  so  pointed  to  the  ground,  where 
the  serpents  were  lying  all  about : to  make  us  know,  there 
were  but  eleven  in  all,  and  they  dead  or  dying  there  below. 

This  was  joyful  news,  you  may  be  sure ; we  now  looked  on 
the  place  as  our  own,  and  were  impatient  to  take  possession 
and  begin  our  mason’s  work  at  it.  But  by  this,  the  light 
warned  us,  no  more  was  to  be  done  at  that  time ; and  we 
must  think  of  supper,  and  our  night  quarters.  We  told 
Pounder,  by  signs  (for,  what  with  fire-lighting,  and  his  other 
services,  we  began  to  look  on  him  as  our  special  footman)  we 
would  have  our  fire  kindled : this  he  soon  did,  with  the  help 
of  the  other  two,  who  gathered  the  brushwood  fast  enough, 
while  we  sat  at  our  ease,  and  talked  over  the  day’s  adventures. 
Then  we  supped,  as  we  could,  on  cuttle-fish  ; though  we  found 
it  coarse  and  strong-tasted,  not  the  delicacy ’t  was  said  to  be: 
but  this  fish  was  a largish  one,  which  might  be  the  cause ; 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


125 


though  indeed  not  so  large,  by  far  (if  all  tales  be  true)  as 
they  are  found  in  the  Indian  seas.*  Only  Richard  could  not  be 
prevailed  on  to  taste  a bit : so  we  gave  him  all  the  cocoa-nut 
we  could  spare,  which  was  not  much ; and  he  eked  it  out 
with  a little  sup  from  his  bottle.  As  to  the  Indians,  they 
made  a horrid  meal  on  the  roasted  serpents ; in  which  we 
cared  not  to  disturb  them.  But  when  we  had  done,  and 
Don  Manuel  had  said  grace  for  us,  we  called  the  savages 
to  us  again,  not  to  lose  sight  of  them  in  the  dark. 


cX  ^oH^ooOooOooOooOcoOot^  >oo<>oo<>o>«o<>ooOoo<>ooOooOo 


CHAPTER  XXX11. 


THE  MOTHER  TONGUE. 


[EATED  round  our  fire,  we  whiled  away  the 
time  in  teaching  our  savages  a little  English. 
They  surprised  us,  truly,  by  their  quickness 
in  learning  our  words,  with  some  short  sen- 
tences we  taught  them  by  degrees  ; and  I 
may  here  say,  that  in  four  or  five  days  or  so 
(for  Don  Manuel  and  I worked  at  it  with 
them  a little  every  day)  we  contrived  to  hold  talk  with  them 
pretty  well  about  common  things.  Only,  we  got  out  of  our 
depth,  for  want  of  expressions,  when  we  would  come  at  their 
notions  of  religion,  or  the  nature  of  the  earth,  the  sky,  the 
seas,  and  so  on ; all  which  the  priest  laboured  at  with  great 


* “ Mr.  Pennant,  in  the  fourth  volume  of  his  British  Zoology,  speaking 
of  the  eight -armed  cuttle,  tells  us,  he  has  been  assured  from  persons 
worthy  of  credit,  that  in  the  Indian  seas  this  species  has  been  found  of 
such  a size  as  to  measure  two  fathoms  in  breadth  across  the  central 
part,  while  each  arm  has  measured  nine  fathoms  in  length  ; and  that 
the  natives  of  the  Indian  isles,  when  sailing  in  their  canoes,  always 
take  care  to  be  provided  with  hatchets,  in  order  to  cut  off  immediately 
the  arms  of  such  of  those  animals  as  happen  to  fling  them  over  the  sides 
of  the  canoe,  lest  they  should  pull  it  under  water  and  sink  it.  This  has 
been  considered  as  a piece  of  credulity  in  Mr.  Pennant,  unworthy  of  a 
sober  naturalist.  It  is  certain,  however,  that  a great  variety  of  appa- 
rently authentic  evidences  seem  to  confirm  the  reality  of  this  account. 
The  ancients,  it  is  evident,  acknowledged  the  existence  of  animals  of 
the  cuttle-fish  tribe  of  a most  enormous  size  ; witness  the  account  given 


120 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


patience,  as  I shall  set  down  in  order.  We  were  curious  to 
know  their  names  for  some  things,  as  well  as  impart  to  them 
ours  ; and  we  went  about  it  thus  : 

I would  point  to  the  fire,  then  look  at  them,  nod  to  them, 
opening  my  mouth,  moving  my  lips  as  though  I would  speak, 
but  indeed  not  speaking  at  all ; then  I would  put  my  hand  to 
my  ear  as  though  I listened  for  somewhat  they  were  to  say  : 
thus  I made  them  understand,  I desired  to  hear  their  name 
for  the  thing  I pointed  to.  This  went  on  well  enough ; for 
when  they  once  made  out  my  dumb  show,  they  answered 
very  readily.  Then,  listening  to  what  they  said,  I would  shake 
my  head,  and  look  a little  displeased,  as  though  that  were 
not  the  true  name,  and  I misliked  the  sound  of  it ; then  I 
would  give  the  English,  and  repeat  it  three  or  four  times,  till 
they  caught  the  sound  ; and  I would  do  so  louder  and  louder, 
as  insisting  they  should  repeat  it  after  me,  which  they  did 
willingly,  and  seemed  delighted  with  the  new  name ; for  they 
kept  on  repeating  it  till  they  had  it  perfect. 

by  Pliny  and  others  of  the  large  polypus,  as  he  terms  it,  which  used  to 
rob  the  repositories  of  salt  fish  on  the  coasts  of  Carteria;  and  which, 
according  to  his  description,  had  a head  the  size  of  a cask  that  would 
hold  fifteen  amphorae ; arms  measuring  thirty  feet  in  length,  of  such 
a diameter,  that  a man  could  hardly  clasp  one  of  them,  and  beset  with 
suckers  or  fasteners  of  the  size  of  large  basins,  that  would  hold  four  or 
five  gallons  apiece.  The  existence,  in  short,  of  some  enormously  large 
species  of  the  cuttle-fish  tribe,  in  the  Indian  and  northern  seas,  can 
hardly  be  doubted ; and  though  some  accounts  have  been  exaggerated, 
yet  there  is  sufficient  cause  for  believing  that  such  species  very  far  sur- 
pass all  that  are  generally  observable  about  the  European  seas.  A mo- 
dern naturalist  chooses  to  distinguish  this  tremendous  species  by  the 
title  of  the  colossal  cuttle-fish,  and  seems  amply  disposed  to  believe  all 
that  has  been  related  of  its  ravages.  A northern  navigator  of  the  name 
of  Dens,  is  said  some  years  ago  to  have  lost  three  of  his  men  in  the 
African  seas,  by  a monster  of  this  kind,  which  unexpectedly  made  its 
appearance  while  these  men  were  employed,  during  a calm,  in  raking 
the  sides  of  the  vessel.  The  colossal  cuttle-fish  seized  these  men  in  its 
arms,  and  drew  them  under  water,  in  spite  of  every  effort  to  preserve 
them ; the  thickness  of  one  of  the  arms,  which  was  cut  off  in  the  con- 
test, was  that  of  a mizen-mast,  and  the  acetabula,  or  suckers,  of  the 
size  of  large  pot-lids. 

“ But  what  shall  we  say  to  the  idea  of  a modern  French  naturalist, 
who  is  inclined  to  suppose  that  the  destruction  of  the  great  French  ship, 
the  Ville  de  Paris , taken  by  the  English  during  the  American  war, 
together  with  nine  other  ships,  which  came  to  her  assistance  on  seeing 
her  fire  signals  of  distress,  was  owing,  not  to  the  storm  which  accom- 
panied the  disaster,  but  to  a group  of  colossal  cuttle-fishes  which  hap- 
pened at  that  very  time  to  be  prowling  about  the  ocean  beneath  these 
unfortunate  vessels  ?” — Polehampton’s  Gallery  of  Nature  and  Art,  vol.  5, 
pp.  361-2. — Ed. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


127 


In  this  way  we  learned  some  of  their  Indian,  too.  I sup- 
pose the  language  will  die  out,  if  white  men  come  to  penetrate 
into  those  native  countries  of  the  savages  ; or,  at  least,  ’t  will 
become  mixed  and  changed.  So  I here  set  down  some  of  the 
words  they  gave  us,  till  they  had  got  our  English  so  well,  we 
ceased  to  ask  them  further. 

First,  I will  set  down  the  name  of  their  country,  which  we 
made  out  after  some  pains  ; for  ’t  was  a hard  question  for 
them  to  comprehend : at  last  they  did,  and  gave  the  name  of 
it,  Toonati-nooka.  They  described  it  by  signs,  that ’t  was  an 
island,  with  another  island  lying  near  it,  smaller,  and  either 
not  fruitful,  or  disagreeable  from  some  cause,  or,  maybe,  at 
war  with  the  inhabitants  of  the  first : for  when  they  named 
it,  John  Pounder  shook  his  head  with  a look  of  disgust,  and 
pushed  out  his  hands,  as  though  he  would  push  the  island 
from  him  : this  second  island  they  called  Hai-vavaoo. 

The.  young  savage,  whom  I will  call  by  the  name  he  gave  him- 
self, Poula-failie  (but  later  we  christened  him  Samuel),  drew 
a plan  of  these  two  islands  very  neatly  with  the  end  of  a stick 
in  the  sand,  as  we  sat:  and  while  we  let  him  work  on,  he 
finished  such  an  excellent  raised  map  of  the  two  islands,  as  I 
never  saw  exhibited  in  a museum.  He  hollowed  out  the 
sand,  and  smoothed  it,  to  represent  the  sea-level ; then  got 
some  sharp  stones  and  shells  to  stand  for  the  cliffs  and  head- 
lands of  their  island  ; he  also  stuck-in  a few  leaves  and  sprigs 
for  the  groves  of  trees ; then  he  raised  up  some  little  moun- 
tains in  miniature  (as  the  saying  is,  “ making  a mountain  out 
of  a mole-hill”  ;)  in  a word,  he  worked  at  his  map  with  that 
diligence,  that  soon  he  had  it  completed  in  the  rough.  So, 
standing  up,  he  looked  on  it  with  much  satisfaction ; clapping 
his  hands  together,  he  danced  round  it,  he  leaped  across  it 
back  and  forward,  pointing  now  to  one  island,  now  to  the 
other,  singing  out  all  the  time : u Toonati-nooka !”  then 
“ Hai-vavaoo  !”  But  Pounder,  stopping  in  his  talk  with  us 
to  examine  this  map,  misliked  some  parts  of  it,  and  began  to 
alter  them  : he  pulled  up  one  of  the  groves,  knocked  down 
a cliff  or  two,  or  changed  them  to  other  places  ; carried  away 
a mountain  here,  set  it  down  there,  and  made  such  changes 
as  pleased  him,  but  displeased  Samuel  in  turn  ; in  the  end 
they  appealed  to  the  old  man  as  umpire  in  their  dispute. 
And  the  old  Indian’s  decision  had  all  respect  from  the  other 
two  ; for  no  sooner  had  he  spoken,  and  made  some  alterations 
of  his  own,  than  all  questions  were  set  at  rest. 

I must  not  forget  to  note  down  their  names  for  such  com 


128. 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


mon  things  as  we  pointed  to : some  of  them  we  learned  that 
evening,  and  others  later  on. 

English  Toonati-nookish. 


English.  Toonati-nookish. 

Fire. 

Teta-hai. 

Wood  {plural). 

Oopanee. 

Branch  of  a tree. 

Maneea. 

Green  wood. 

Oopa-poore. 

Dry  wood. 

Oopa-taata. 

Wet. 

Ha-warre. 

Rain. 

Taina. 

Thunder. 

Pateere. 

The  sea. 

Anonohao. 

A rock. 

Epoote. 

A cocoa-nut. 

Efarre. 

A monkey. 

Tohyto. 

A shark  (or  any 
large  fish). 

Kerekaia. 

A canoe. 

Looamao. 

The  head. 

Eoiaa. 

The  eyes. 

Ete-rahai. 

The  nose. 

Pdraou. 

The  mouth. 

Taeea. 

The  tongue. 

Ry-poaeo. 

The  teeth. 

Eneeh&eo. 

The  hands. 

Toolahai. 

The  feet. 

A marehaa. 

To  walk. 

Otooetee. 

To  run. 

Horoee , or 
Maya-fa . 
Makoia . 

To  laugh. 

To  weep. 

Hanoaa. 

To  shout. 

Eraboa. 

To  dance. 

Oomarra. 

To  fight. 

E/iaroo. 

To  kill. 

Ewhaee. 

To  heal. 

Oowhya-da. 

A wound. 

Eeree. 

A scar. 

Eraeea. 

One. 

Oteo. 

Two. 

Enara.. 

Three. 

Paape. 

Four. 

Eheeo. 

Five. 

Honoo. 

Six. 

Paya. 

Seven. 

Teire. 

Eight. 

Myde. 

Nine. 

Paeena. 

Ten. 

Tarooa . 

Twenty. 

Thirty. 

Taroo-nara. 

Taroo-paa. 

Forty. 

Taroo-ehi. 

An  hundred. 

Taroo-ta - 
roone. 

A great  many. 

Eaha-noue. 

A few. 

Poheea. 

None. 

Te-moonea. 

All. 

Moonaee. 

’T  is  likely,  they  who  may  chance  to  read  these  adventures, 
will  by  this  have  had  enough  of  the  language  of  Toonati- 
nooka.  But  I must  observe,  if  the  words  seem  not  so  harsh, 
written  down  on  paper,  as  I described  them  to  be  in  the 
sound,  this  is  because  I cannot  express,  by  any  writing  or 
accents,  the  strange  way  they  had  of  forming  them  down  in 
their  throats,  with  a kind  of  gurgling  noise.  And  on  their 
part,  they  told  us  after  awhile,  our  English  sounded  to  them 
the  most  chirrupping  thing  ; and  when  they  came  to  know  us 
better,  they  called  it  a language  of  birds. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ, 


129 


CHAPTER  XXXIII. 


VARIOUS  DISCOVERIES. 

ROUNDER  told  us,  too  (in  his  way,)  this  larger 
island  took  two  months  to  go  round  it  in  a 
canoe  ; pointing  to  the  moon  (for  a young 
moon  had  begun  to  appear),  then  holding  up 
two  fingers,  and  sweeping  his  hand  round 
Poula-faihe’s  map  of  the  island  ; then  mo- 
tioning with  his  hands  as  though  he  were 
paddling  one  of  their  canoes.  It  was  very  fertile,  he  said,  and 
well  wooded  (so  he  expressed  by  pointing  to  the  trees  round 
us,  then  to  the  leaves  and  sprigs  the  other  had  stuck  in  the 
map,  making  signs  of  pleasure  and  admiration :)  and  that  it 
had  a great  many  inhabitants  ; for  so  he  told  us  by  pointing  to 
himself  and  the  other  two  Indians,  opening  and  shutting  his 
hands  several  times,  and  calling  out  Eaha-noue  each  time  he 
did  it.  And  this  was  all  we  learned  from  him  that  night : 
for  Don  Manuel  called  us  to  prayers  : and  soon  after,  we  were 
all  asleep,  having  wrapped  our  guns  carefully  in  our  jackets, 
and  laid  them  under  our  heads,  together  with  the  broken  one. 
But  we  had  before  agreed,  Ned  Hilton  should  watch  for  us 
to-night,  till  he  saw  the  savages  asleep  : indeed  he  had  not 
long  to  watch  for  it. 


9 


130 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


Oar  hard  day  (so  it  had  been  to  us  all)  made  us  sleep  so 
sound,  we  woke  later  next  morning  than  our  wont ; when 
we  found  a clear  sky,  and  the  wind  quite  gone  down,  as  if  no 
hurricane  had  blown  at  all ; for  indeed  by  this  time  it  had 
blown  itself  out.  A flight  of  parrots  came  screaming  and 
whistling  over  our  heads,  with  troops  of  monkeys,  too,  chat- 
tering after  their  way,  in  the  trees ; so  there  was  noise  enough, 
as  Gfll  said,  to  pipe  all  hands  from  the  hammocks.  Up  we 
rose,  and  shook  ourselves  free  from  sleep ; then,  by  a common 
feeling,  all  looked  for  Don  Manuel,  as  our  chaplain.  He  was 
a few  paces  off,  reading  his  prayer-book  to  himself ; but  so 
soon  as  he  saw  us  risen,  he  put  it  by,  and  came  to  us. 

“ You  have  stopped  your  own  prayers  for  ours,  this  morning, 
Senor”,  said  I,  coming  to  meet  him ; and  I pointed  to  the 
men,  who  were  waiting  ready. 

u I am  happy  to  do  so,  my  dear  friend”,  answered  he ; 
u and  ’t  will  give  me  another  reason  to  say  Gloria  Patri 
when  I begin  them  again”. 

So,  without  more  delay,  he  shook  hands  heartily  with  the 
men,  all  round ; then  we  all  knelt  down  together,  and  the 
three  Indians,  seeing  this,  followed  our  example,  out  of  sub- 
mission, I suppose.  The  priest  led  our  devotions,  praying 
with  us,  and  * for  us ; and  he  put  in  some  little  petitions, 
suited  to  the  change  in  our  state  from  the  arrival  of  the 
savages  : as,  that  we  might  be  kept  from  the  sins  of  tyranny, 
oppression,  and  injustice  to  our  inferiors ; that  they,  too, 
might  remain  submissive  and  peaceable,  and  at  length  have 
grace  to  become  Christians.  This,  with  beseeching  the  Divine 
majesty  we  might  be  kept  from  sin  through  the  day,  and 
from  all  evil  accidents  or  sudden  death,  and  might  advance 
His  glory  and  our  salvation,  made  up  the  priest’s  short  and 
fervent  prayer.  Nor  need  I mention  after  this,  he  had  got 
us  all  so  into  the  way  of  praying,  as  that  we  fell  to  it  regu- 
larly thenceforward : and  soon  the  men  would  as  little  have 
thought  of  going  without  morning  or  evening  prayer  as 
losing  their  breakfast  or  supper. 

Breakfast,  indeed,  now  engaged  us  all ; though  we  had  but 
some  scanty  slices  of  our  enemy,  the  cuttle-fish,  with  a little 
pulp  and  milk  that  remained  of  our  cocoa-nuts.  We  broiled 
the  fish  and  pulp  together,  to  make  out  a meal ; for  I was  in 
haste,  and  they  too,  to  get  down  to  the  shore  and  see  after 
our  shark  : or,  indeed,  our  sharks,  for  we  now  hoped  to  find 
the  hurricane  had  lifted  the  skeleton  one  too,  handier  to  us. 
Prodgers,  though,  could  not  be  got  to  taste  of  the  cuttle-fish  ; 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


131 


being  persuaded,  say  all  we  could  against  it,  there  was  some 
poisonous  quality  in  the  meat  of  the  fish  as  well  as  in  the 
suckers  of  its  limbs,  that  made  his  face  all  of  a smart  even 
now.  As  we  had  dressed  our  whole  larder  already,  poor 
Richard  had  a chance  of  going  without  his  breakfast;  when 
Samuel,  our  young  Indian,  seeing  this,  stood  up,  and  bowing 
down  before  us,  made  a little  speech,  pointing  to  an  open 
space  beyond  the  wood. 

We  could  not  well  make  out  what  he  meant ; only  that  he 
promised  Prodgers  something  to  eat,  out  of  the  earth  : for  he 
made  as  though  he  were  digging,  or  tearing  up  some  vege- 
table with  his  hands.  We  had  gained  confidence  now  in  our 
poor  savages,  that  they  would  not  desert  us,  nor  do  us  harm  ; 
so  I waved  my  hand  to  him  to  be  off  on  his  errand,  and  he 
darted  away  like  an  antelope,  striking  up  for  the  middle  of 
the  island,  as  though  he  would  make  for  Prospect  Hill.  When 
he  had  been  gone  a few  minutes,  I doubted  my  wisdom  in 
letting  him  go  at  all ; and  hallooed  after  him  to  come  back  to 
us : but  presently  he  came  back  through  the  woods  at  another 
point,  and  appeared  laden  with  some  large  vegetables  on  his 
shoulders,  though  he  still  ran  very  fast  under  the  weight. 
When  he  came  panting  up  to  us,  and  threw  them  on  the 
ground,  those  of  us  who  had  been  in  the  West  Indies  (and 
that  was  the  greater  number)  knew  them  to  be  yams. 

This  was  a precious  discovery  to  us ; more  so,  by  far,  than 
if  we  had  found  a mine  of  rubies  or  diamonds  on  our  walk. 
We  might  now  look  on  our  kitchen-garden  as  indifferently 
well  stocked  (what  with  bread-fruits,  cocoa-nuts,  and  now 
yams  beside),  let  us  remain  on  the  island  as  long  as  we  might. 
Don  Manuel  did  now  just  what  he  had  done  when  we  disco- 
vered the  bread-fruit : he  held  a yam  in  each  hand,  having 
first  laid  his  hat  on  the  ground ; he  raised  the  yams  as  a thank- 
offering  to  heaven,  and  said  his  Gloria  Patri.  But  the  dif- 
ference now  was,  he  was  joined  by  us  all  in  this,  as  a matter 
of  course : so  much  can  misfortune  and  good  example  soften 
the  hearts  of  the  rudest. 

Then,  raking  together  the  ashes  of  our  fire,  we  peeled  one 
or  two  of  the  yams,  and  sliced  them ; these,  with  some  oil 
from  our  candle-nuts,  make  out  Richard’s  breakfast  pretty 
well.  But  the  water  hereabouts  was  brackish ; for  I suppose 
the  sea- water  somehow  filtered  in  through  the  soil.  And  this, 
we  saw,  might  prevail  against  our  making  our  abode  here- 
abouts, except  we  could  discover  some  other  spring,  or  find 
means  to  convey  pure  water  hither  from  a distance. 


132 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


The  badness  of  the  water  was  Richard’s  excuse  for  taking 
a little  pull  at  his  bottle : after  that,  he  surrendered  it  to  me 
with  a good  grace,  saying  he  would  hare  it  reckoned  into  the 
common  stock,  and  kept  for  a case  of  sickness,  or  other  need. 
So  we  all  took  our  way  down  to  Shark  Cove. 

We  were  sorry  enough  to  discover,  so  soon  as  we  got  clear 
of  the  trees,  not  the  shark  only  (though  he  was  there,  too)  but 
the  dead  body  of  that  fourth  Indian,  whom  we  had  seen 
drowned  as  their  canoe  capsized  over  the  reef ; the  body  had 
been  flung  by  the  force  of  the  tempest,  high  and  dry,  and  lay 
stretched  on  the  sand.  The  savages  set  up  a loud  wail  on 
seeing  this ; they  ran  to  the  body,  and  began  to  lament  over 
it,  after  their  fashion.  But  I believe ’t  was  more  out  of  custom 
than  much  regard : for  wre  made  out  from  them,  he  was  not  of 
their  kinsmen,  though  of  the  same  tribe  ; and  had  gone  a-fish- 
ing  with  them  when  the  hurricane  caught  them  all,  and  drove 
them  on  the  island.  However,  the  first  thing  we  had  to  do 
was,  to  give  the  poor  savage  decent,  if  not  Christian  burial : 
we  set  to  work  on  a little  rising  ground,  safe  from  the  reach 
of  any  tempest ; for  nothing  but  another  deluge  (we  thought) 
could  touch  it,  though  we  lived  to  find  our  mistake. 


CHAPTER  XXXIY. 


A FUNERAL,  AND  A LESSON  FOR  THE  LIVING. 

HE  grave  was  long  in  digging,  to  make  it 
deep  enough  : though  we  had  nothing  to  dig 
with  but  a kind  of  flat  sharp  stones,  like 
slates,  that  we  found  near  the  spot,  yet,  as 
, we  had  leisure  for  the  work,  we  thought  to 
do  it  thoroughly  ; and  putting  our  hands 
together  we  made  the  grave,  I am  sure,  near 
five  feet  in  depth.  Then  the  old  Indian,  wTho  had  asked  by 
signs,  to  go  into  the  wood,  came  back  with  a load  of  leaves  of 
the  cocoa,  palm,  banana,  and  other  broad  leaved  trees,  together 
with  a quantity  of  the  same  creepers  we  had  made  our  rope 
out  of.  In  these  they  lapped  the  body  of  the  dead  Indian 
from  head  to  foot,  and  bound  it  about ; then,  at  our  bidding, 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


133 


they  lowered  him  carefully  into  the  grave.  When  we  came  to 
know  them  and  their  ways  better,  we  found  they  did  this  out 
of  submission  to  our  will,  thinking  the  white  man’s  way  must 
be  best  in  all  things.  For  their  own  custom  in  disposing  of 
their  dead  is,  to  place  them  on  a ledge  constructed  of  poles,  in 
some  place  apart,  till  with  the  sun,  and  weather,  and  process 
of  time,  they  are  wholly  consumed. 

But  now  Don  Manuel,  standing  bare-headed  over  the  grave, 
lifted  his  voice,  and  said  aloud ; “ May  the  Lord  be  merciful 
to  all  whom  He  knoweth  to  be  His  !”  With  that,  we  shovelled 
in  the  earth,  and  made  the  grave  secure  with  such  large  stones 
as  we  could  find  about;  some,  indeed,  so  large,  we  were 
forced  to  roll  them,  two  and  three  of  us  together,  to  the  spot. 
This  we  did,  to  secure  it  against  being  disturbed  by  any  wild 
animals  of  prey  that  might  haunt  the  island ; though  as  yet 
we  had  seen  none  such.  Then  we  named  the  place  Indian's 
Best , and  so  left  it  behind  us. 

Our  next  concern  was  the  shark,  which  had  been  thrown 
somewhat  further  up  the  shore ; for  he  was  the  sport  of  the 
hurricane  at  its  first  burst,  but  the  Indian  only  came  to  land 
when  it  began  to  abate.  A big,  ugly  monster  did  this-  fish 
look,  truly,  as  he  lay  along  there ; and  called  forth  from  us 
again  some  natural  expressions  of  thankfulness  for  hating 
been  kept  out  of  his  cruel  jaws.  After  consulting,  we  re- 
solved to  skin  him  first,  and  then  cut  him  up  : neither  of  them 
pleasant  things  to  do,  but  useful  to  us  in  our  need.  “ He  is 
a mine  of  wealth  to  us,  friends”,  said  I,  “as  I told  you.  We 
shall  get  shagreen  from  his  rough  skin,  and  then  oil  from  the 
liver,  knives  and  arrow  heads  from  the  teeth,  and  all  kinds  of 
instruments  out  of  the  bones”.  “ And  pickled  pork”,  added 
Hilton,  merrily,  “ from  the  flesh,  could  we  but  salt  it  well,  for 
many  a long  day  to  come”. 

“ From  his  jaws,  too”,  said  the  priest,  “ which  we  will  set 
on  a pole,  we  shall  have  a memento  to  calm  us  into  content 
again,  if  we  are  tempted  to  repine  at  our  present  lot”. 

“ Aye,  indeed”,  chimed  in  Prodgers  and  Harvey  together. 

“I  warrant”,  says  Harry  Gill,  “our  ’prentices” — he  looked 
at  the  priest,  and  laughed  a little,  but  ’t  was  now  in  a civil 
sort  of  way,  “ have  skinned  a shark  for  their  own  use  before 
now.  What  if  we  bid  ’em  do  it,  and  leave  the  job  so  ?” 

This  seemed  fair  enough ; so  putting  our  knives  into  the 
Indians’  hands,  we  made  them  know,  we  would  have  the  mon- 
ster skinned,  and  that  his  skin  should  be  carefully  dealt  with, 
to  preserve  it.  They  set  to  work  cheerfully,  and  with  skill, 


134 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


too : when  I saw  from  their  first  slices,  they  would  do  justice 
to  our  wish,  I proposed  to  the  rest  to  go  back  and  work  at 
our  habitation  in  the  rock.  We  left  Richard,  with  his  gun, 
for  a captain  over  the  savages  : and  now  Don  Manuel  said  he 
would  take  his  turn  at  watching  from  the  tree,  as  the  old  In- 
dian had  watched  before.  “ I have  some  of  my  prayer-book 
to  read”,  says  he,  “ and  can  do  that  as  well  in  the  tree  as  on 
terra  firma”. 

“ I believe  indeed,  sir”,  answered  I,  as  we  all  went  along, 
u you  could  pray  anywhere”. 

“ My  dear”,  he  answered  with  great  affection,  and  his  hand 
on  my  shoulder,  u in  all  parts  of  our  lives,  and  everything 
we  do,  ’t  is  not  so  much  where  we  are,  as  what  we  are”. 

u That ’s  true,  indeed”,  says  Hilton  : “ I little  thought,  when 
an  old  uncle  of  mine  took  me,  I may  say  dragged  me,  by  the 
ears,  to  church  in  our  village,  the  Sunday  before  I ran  away 
to  sea,  the  next  time  I prayed  (except  once  when  I prayed  in 
a storm)  would  be  on  a savage  island  in  some  unknown  lati- 
tude, no  one  knows  where”. 

u In  No  Marts  Land,  eh,  Senor  ?”  asked  Don  Manuel,  looking 
on  him  archly. 

u Ah”,  says  Tom  Harvey,  laughing,  11  that  was  what  old 
Dick  said  when  we  first  landed,  and  he  grumbled  at  having 
the  place  called  Manuel’s  Island”. 

“ I don’t  think”,  said  I,  u Dick  would  make  that  kind  of 
speech  now.  From  the  rough  old  tar  he  once  was,  ’t  is  won- 
derful to  see  him  ’fined  down  into  another  being”. 

<c  Many  people”,  the  priest  said,  taking  up  his  former  vein, 
u think  they  would  be  better  Christians,  and  more  able  to 
save  their  souls,  were  they  in  different  circumstances,  sur- 
rounded by  other  people,  engaged  in  other  duties,  and  I know 
not  what  else.  Now,  ’t  is  true,  each  man  has  a vocation  to  be 
this  or  that,  would  he  take  pains  to  discover  it.  But ’t  is  like- 
wise true,  all  depends  on  the  interior  will,  whether  a man 
shall  be  good  or  bad ; whether,  too,  he  shall  be  slothful  or 
fervent  in  good.  He  may  be  good  in  a camp  of  soldiers,  or 
bad  in  a choir  of  monks  : for  God  gives  him  liberty,  and  suffi- 
cient grace,  which  he  may  use,  or  sin  away,  at  will”. 

“ And  could  he  be  good  in  a ship  like  the  old  Spitfire 
asked  Ned  Hilton,  more  grave  than  was  his  wont.  I had  for- 
gotten to  say,  that  was  the  vessel  we  had  all  embarked  in. 

“ If  any  one”,  answered  Don  Manuel,  “ should  find  himself 
where  he  could  not  be  good,  from  the  flood  of  wickedness  all 
around  him,  he  would  be  bounden  to  depart  out  of  that  place 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


135 


as  soon  as  he  might.  For  he  has  to  save  his  soul  in  the  first 
place,  and  to  fulfil  other  duties  of  life  in  the  second.  That  is 
what  we  Catholics  are  used  to  call,  avoiding  the  occasions  of 
sin.  But  come,  here  is  my  tree ; which  gives  me  the  occa- 
sion of  serving  you.  So  we  will  each  fulfil  what  is  expected 
of  us ; you  to  work  beyond,  and  I to  watch  up  here”. 

“ Watch  and  pray,  sir”,  broke  in  Harry  Gill,  “as  the  par- 
son used  to  say  in  North  Budenham,  where  I was  brought  up”. 

“And  if  the  parson  had  never  said  anything  worse  than 
that”,  answered  the  priest,  rather  gravely,  “ I should  have 
had  some  respect  for  him.  Let  us  not  make  a jest,  friend,  of 
sacred  words”. 

So  saying,  he  clambered  into  the  high  tree,  and  left  us  on 
our  way  to  the  cave. 


CHAPTER  XXXV. 


OUTWITTED. 


£P  the  rock  we  were,  and  sprang  across  the 
chasm,  eager  to  begin  working  at  our  hole. 
It  soon  appeared,  yesterday’s  attack  on  the 
serpents  was  a triumph ; for  we  saw  nothing, 
nor  heard  either,  of  any  more  of  that  family. 
We  were  glad,  too,  that  the  fire  having  burnt 
so  freely  showed  the  place  to  be  free  from 
noxious  vapours  within : for  these  would  have  quenched  any 
fire  as  well  as  quenched  human  life.  So  we  now  cast  lots 
among  us,  which  should  begin  our  mason’s  work ; each  man 
wishing  to  be  first : but  no  two  could  work  together  till  the 
opening  was  made  bigger.  The  lot  fell  on  Ned  Hilton:  so 
down  the  rope  he  went,  merrily ; and  lashing  himself  fast  to 
it  by  aid  of  the  twine,  twisted  with  four  or  five  strands  toge- 
ther, he  made  all  snug,  and  began  chiselling  away. 

He  soon  found,  to  our  satisfaction,  the  rock  was  very  pro- 
per for  our  purpose ; being  composed  of  a dark  sand,  or  sand- 
stone, such  as  I have  read  is  found  in  plenty  about  the  city  of 
Rome,  made  up  (as  is  thought)  of  sand  once  thrown  out  of 
burning  mountains,  hardened  and  compacted  by  time.  It 
worked  freely  under  the  stroke  of  Ned  Hilton’s  chisel,  though 


136 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


that  was  a rude  mason’s  tool  enough : but  we,  who  watched 
from  above,  thought  he  was  making  the  entrance  too  wide  ; so 
we  called  to  him,  to  leave  that  as  small  as  that  a man  could 
creep  in  on  hands  and  knees  (lest  the  place  should  be  dis- 
covered easily),  and  work  more  to  the  inside.  In  forty 
minutes,  about,  of  hard  hewing,  he  fairly  made  his  way  within  ; 
then,  unlashing  himself,  he  called  for  another  to  come  down. 

Harvey  now  begged  for  his  share  of  the  work,  too ; so  I 
sent  him  down,  while  I stood  watching;  and,  to  be  short, 
between  them  they  worked  a passage  of  nine  feet,  or  so, 
into  the  living  sandstone  rock,  wide  enough  for  the  two  to 
work  abreast,  though  not  high  enough  to  stand  upright : for 
they  crept  along  and  chiselled  on  their  knees.  It  seems,  they 
wanted  to  discover  if  the  whole  cliff  were  made  up  of  the  same 
rock ; which  they  found  it  to  be,  with  this  in  their  favour, 
that  it  grew  softer  the  further  they  got  in : at  length  they 
worked  it  easy  enough,  and  threw  out  the  loose  sand  with 
their  feet.  But  crack  or  hollow  they  found  none,  as  they 
hoped,  to  make  their  labour  easier ; so  ’t  was  plain,  we  must 
make  good  every  inch  of  the  way,  by  sheer  labour.  For  my 
part,  I was  glad  of  this  news ; I thought  any  chasm  in  the 
rock  would  be  filled  (more  than  likely)  with  such  poisonous 
vapours  as  had  nearly  been  the  end  of  Harry  Gill  on  our  way 
down  from  the  volcano. 

When  I found,  by  their  voices,  they  were  well  into  the 
heart  of  the  rock,  I must  needs  go  down  too,  and  take  my  part 
in  the  business.  So,  without  bestowing  a thought  on  secur- 
ing the  rope,  I slid  down  to  the  hole  and  crept  in  as  I could, 
for  the  rubbish  hindered  me  greatly.  But  the  rope  had  now 
got  so  loosened  from  the  roots  of  the  tree  we  bound  it  to,  by 
the  weight  of  three  men  straining  upon  it,  one  after  the  other, 
that ’t  was  a mercy  I had  not  broke  my  neck  with  my  want 
of  heed : and  it  gave  occasion  for  some  enemies  of  ours  to 
play  a trick  on  us  that  might  have  cost  us  dear  enough,  as  I 
will  now  tell. 

No  sooner  was  I got  within  the  hole,  than  I heard  a noise 
of  chattering  above,  and  swinging  of  branches,  such  as  I 
could  not  well  account  for.  But  it  made  me  somewhat 
anxious,  as  I well  knew  (by  report,  at  least)  the  cunning  of 
savages,  who  might  have  lain  concealed  in  ambush  all  this 
while,  waiting  for  their  moment  to  take  us  unawares.  And, 
truly,  a more  favourable  moment  for  them  scarce  could,  have 
been;  for  with  their  arrows  and  javelins  they  might  have 
killed  us  all  three  defenceless  in  the  cave  there,  before  we 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


137 


had  brought  our  arms  to  bear  on  them ; or  have  over- 
whelmed us  at  that  disadvantage  by  numbers,  in  spite  of  our 
shot.  I looked  up,  and  unslung  my  rifle,  ready  to  do  what 
I could ; but  before  I had  time  to  fire,  what  was  my  vexation 
to  see  a dozen  monkeys’  faces  that  peered  and  grinned  at  me 
from  the  cliff;  and  the  shaking'  of  the  rope  plainly  proved 
they  were  tugging  at  it  to  loosen  it  from  the  tree*  In  short, 
whether ’t  was  from  mere  imitation  of  what  they  had  seen  us 
do  in  tying  it,  as  they  watched  us  unnoticed  from  the  trees 
around;  or  whether  some  instinct  of  mischief  more  than 
common  is  possessed  by  these  strange  caricatures  of  ourselves, 
I know  not:  but  within  a minute,  at  the  juncture  when  I 
had  got  ready  my  rifle,  to  discharge  it  upward,  with  no  hope 
of  killing,  but  every  hope  of  frighting  them  from  their 
mischief : at  that  very  moment,  I say,  the  rope  came  tumb- 
ling about  my  ears  ; and,  but  that  I caught  one  end,  would 
have  fallen  to  the  ground  below. 

Let  me  be  as  vexed  as  I would  at  this  mishap,  I could  not 
forbear  laughing,  neither,  at  the  cunning  of  our  enemies,  and 
their  success.  But  there  was  no  help  for  it,  but  only  to  go  on 
with  our  work,  and  wait  till  the  rest  came  to  us,  and  so  with 
their  help  make  fast  the  rope  again.  I would  not  throw  it  down 
out  of  my  hand,  though  ; lest  some  unforeseen  chance  might 
cause  us  to  need  it  to  let  ourselves  down ; though  nothing 
less  than  a mere  necessity  could  persuade  us  to  that ; for  the 
rope  did  not  reach  the  ground,  I am  sure,  by  fourteen  feet  or 
so,  and  he  might  have  likely  met  a shrewd  fall  who  should 
attempt  it,  beside  leaving  his  last  comrade  (if  not  two)  im- 
prisoned still  in  the  hole. 

So  we  worked  on,  in  quietness  if  not  content,  for  three  hours 
more,  or  thereabout,  one  resting  always,  and  two  working, 
each  by  turns  ; by  which  time  we  had  got  a prodigious  way 
into  the  living  rock,  considering  our  number  of  hands.  I say, 
one  resting;  but  I mean,  one  was  not  handling  an  instru- 
ment ; but  he  had  work,  all  the  same,  though  of  a lighter 
kind,  in  shovelling  the  loose  sand  with  his  feet  towards  the 
entrance,  then  shovelling  it  over  the  edge,  to  get  rid  of  it. 

We  meant  to  work  straight  inwards,  to  discover  what  we 
might;  but,  having  with  us  no  level,  nor  instrument  to  gage 
our  work  by,  and  keep  us  straight,  we  found  on  looking  back, 
it  was  bad  irregular  work,  indeed  : for  here  it  rose,  and  there 
it  fell  again,  and  here  the  height  was  greater,  and  there 
it  was  less.  Only,  we  had  not  turned  much  to  the  right  or 
left ; at  least,  nothing  to  speak  of : for  in  that  matter  we 
had  guided  ourselves  by  the  light  behind  us. 


138 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


CHAPTER  XXXYI. 

WE  AIM  AT  A PROVISION  STORE. 

*E  were  pretty  tired  now  with  our  morning’s 
work,  and  thought  it  high  time  we  were 
released  out  of  this  hole : the  air,  too,  had 
become  hot  and  stifling,  and  our  limbs  felt 
cramped  to  a degree  by  the  straitness  of 
the  place.  ’T  was  no  good  wishing  to  be 
out,  however ; so,  as  a first  effort,  we  joined 
our  voices  in  as  loud  a halloo  as  we  could  raise  all  together ; 
then  waited  and  listened.  But  whether  the  depths  we  had 
reached  stifled  our  voices  (for  we  could  not  be  at  the  mouth 
all  at  once,  and  were  all  much  in  each  other’s  way),  or 
whether  the  sound  was  beaten  back  by  the  rock  opposite,  we 
got  no  answer  to  our  hail.  Again  we  tried  it,  and  a third 
time ; but  heard  nothing  from  Don  Manuel : we  then  began 
to  think  we  should  have  to  stay  there  till  the  others  had 
finished  their  work  with  the  shark,  and  came  to  look  after  us 
for  dinner,  or  supper,  rather. 

“ Once  more,  comrades”,  said  I ; u with  a long  pull,  and  a 
strong  pull ; as  if  we  were  cast  adrift  on  the  open  sea,  and 
were  hailing  a ship  as  our  last  chance !” 

So,  putting  our  hands  to  our  mouths,  and  our  whole  hearts 
into  it,  we  gave  such  a hail  as  (I  think)  three  men  had  seldom 
given  before ; so  that  Hilton  fell  back  exhausted  after  it. 
But  we  had  now  the  satisfaction  to  hear  Don  Manuel  shouting 
to  us  in  return,  from  his  tree : though  the  sounds  came  to  us 
very  faint.  Nor  could  we  hear  him  at  all  when  he  turned 
the  other  way  (as  he  afterwards  told  us),  and  shouted  to 
Prodgers  and  the  Indians  to  come  to  us  quick,  not  knowing 
what  might  have  mischanced. 

The  savages  were  quick  enough  in  coming ; for  indeed, 
they  were  the  swiftest  creatures  I ever  beheld  a-foot:  all  but 
old  Mark,  and  he,  too,  distanced  Prodgers  in  the  race,  by  a 
good  deal.  No  sooner  did  they  see  our  plight,  than  catching 
at  the  rope’s  end,  Samuel  (who  ran  in  first)  was  up  the  rock 
in  a twinkling,  and  over  the  gulf  in  another,  with  Pounder 
after  him ; and  knotting  the  rope  firmly  again  to  the  tree,  he 
slipped  down,  and  darted  into  the  hole,  to  give  us  help.  By 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ, 


139 


coming  on  us  thus  of  a sudden,  it  is  true,  he  perceived  our 
broken  gun  plain  enough : but  ’t  was  all  one  to  him ; he 
thought  (I  suppose)  we  could  do  as  we  would  with  those  terri- 
ble engines,  so  great  was  the  power  of  white  men.  Nay,  when 
we  bade  him  take  up  the  piece  of  gun,  and  go  on  with  our 
work,  he  did  so  with  great  obedience,  handling  it  with  some 
fear,  indeed,  but  more  curiosity : and  Pounder  creeping  in 
just  after  (for  by  this  time  old  Mark  was  on  guard  at  the 
rope  above)  we  fairly  set  them  both  to  work,  and  gladly 
swarmed  up  the  rope,  to  get  a breathing  of  the  fresh  air. 

We  then  went  down,  as  before,  by  the  hanging  rock,  and 
met  first  Don  Manuel,  and  next  Prodgers,  who  arrived  soon, 
somewhat  the  worse  for  his  race.  Yet  he  found  breath  to  tell 
us  how  the  Indians  had  not  only  skinned,  but  cut  up  the 
shark  too,  in  good  style  ; so  that,  had  we  but  tubs  and  brine, 
all  was  ready  for  pickling  the  monster,  or  some  quantities  of 
him.  Brine,  truly,  was  there  in  plenty,  in  the  great  salt  sea 
on  all  sides  of  us;  but  where  should  we  get  pickling -tubs, 
for  love  or  money  ? However,  talking  it  over,  we  were  so 
possessed  with  this  notion  of  pickled  shark,  as  put  us  on  con- 
triving some  way,  if  even  rude  and  imperfect.  Could  we 
make  shift  to  dig  salt-pans  in  the  earth,  and  line  or  smear 
them  inside  with  somewhat  that  might  serve  us  for  mortar, 
to  keep  the  pickle  from  soaking  away  into  the  ground,  and 
so  slice  up  our  shark,  and  lay  him  in  the  brine,  and  cover  him 
over  air-tight ; could  we,  I say,  have  contrived  all  this,  our 
task  had  been  done.  But  that  was,  to  my  thinking,  as 
reasonable  as  if  I should  exhort  my  companions  to  build  us 
a ship  out  of  the  trees  of  the  island,  and  so  sail  away  from 
our  place  of  exile  ; or  to  do  anything  else  that  was  out  of  our 
power  altogether. 

I gave  them  my  thoughts,  however,  as  we  went  along ; 
and  finding  them  to  catch  at  this  ; <c  Well,  sirs” : said  I,  “ let 
any  one  propose  a method  to  make  a lining  for  our  salt-pan”. 

u Caulk  it”,  says  Harry  Gill,  who  was  ready  always  with 
the  first  word,  “ as  you  would  caulk  the  sides  of  a ship”. 

“ And  where ’s  your  oakum,  then,  and  your  caulking-irons, 
and  your  rosin,  and  your  boiling-pitch  ?”  asked  Prodgers, 
grumbling  a bit,  in  something  of  his  ancient  fashion. 

“ Boiling  pitch !”  says  Don  Manuel,  thinking ; “ ah,  that 
gives  me  an  idea : I should  not  be  surprised  if  on  this  island 
of  ours,  which  was  plainly  once  a burning  mountain,  we  found 
such  a pitch-spring  as  is  met  with  in  other  like  places,  where 
the  pitch  comes  hot  out  of  the  ground,  at  boiling  point  ”. 


140 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


“ Or,  could  we  find  some  such  clay”,  Tom  Harvey  said, 
11  as  might  be  proper  for  the  purpose”. 

“ Nay”,  answered  I,  “ if  we  light  on  any  clay,  we  have 
found  pots  and  stew-pans  in  plenty,  with  a little  care  and 
labour  ; and  we  must  needs  come  to  something  of  that,  if  we 
are  not  to  live  like  savages  to  the  end”. 

But  meanwhile,  we  agreed  to  prepare  some  slices  of  our 
shark  for  dinner,  in  the  way  we  had  taken  for  our  first 
dinner  on  the  island ; and  this  we  did  with  our  own  hands, 
for  we  could  not,  as  yet,  trust  the  savages,  who  might  (we 
thought)  find  means  to  poison  our  food. 

We  dug  an  oven  in  the  ground,  we  gathered  wood,  or  our 
servants  did  it  for  us,  rather ; for  having  them  at  hand,  we 
now  grew  lazy  at  that  kind  of  work : then  Pounder  kindled 
our  fire,  as  he  did  before,  and  we  heated  our  oven  with 
stones,  then  filled  it  with  as  many  slices  of  the  shark  as  ’t 
would  hold,  with  the  remainder  of  our  yams.  So,  banking 
it  over  with  earth,  we  left  it  in  charge  of  Prodgers,  who  was 
the  least  active  among  us  on  a march ; and  Don  Manuel 
stayed  with  him  too. 

We  took  the  savages  with  us,  all  but  old  Mark;  for  he, 
with  the  priest  and  Prodgers,  was  to  do  something  in  the  way 
of  digging  holes  in  the  sand,  to  stow  away  the  rest  of  our 
shark  in,  for  the  chance  of  preserving  him.  The  six  of  us 
started  on  a party  to  explore  the  island  for  a league  or  so 
northward,  along  the  east  shore ; and  particularly  to  look  out 
for  any  potter’s  clay,  or  such  natural  pitch  as  Don  Manuel  had 
spoken  of.  But,  for  this  time,  we  found  nothing  of  the  kind, 
nor  came  to  aught  particular  in  other  ways ; only  that  in  a 
piece  of  marshy  ground  we  lit  on  a self-sown  plantation  of 
bamboo  canes.  We  hailed  these  with  joy,  foreseeing  they 
would  prove  useful  articles  to  us,  as  they  afterwards  did,  for 
several  uses.  Some  of  the  middle-sized  we  tore  up  by  the  roots ; 
though  that  was  a hard  task  (so  deep  were  they  bedded  in 
the  mud),  yet  easier  than  to  cut  them  with  our  knives. 

Having  loaded  ourselves  and  Samuel  (for  I sent  back 
Pounder  to  help  in  the  great  larder  business,  before  we  had 
reached  half  a mile)  ; having,  I say,  got  our  load  of  bamboos, 
perhaps  three  or  four  dozen  in  all,  greater  and  smaller,  we 
found  ourselves  pretty  well  knocked  up  with  our  wading,  knee 
deep  or  more,  through  the  slush  and  mud  that  had  lain  in  our 
way.  For  several  streams,  running  down  from  the  neigh- 
bourhood of  Prospect  Hill,  discharged  themselves  into  the  sea 
on  this  side  the  island ; and  some,  being  blocked  up  with 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


141 


coral  reefs  and  banks  of  sand  when  they  came  to  the  shore, 
rose  on  their  channels,  and  formed  marshes  and  quagmires 
that  made  our  travelling  difficult  enough. 

So  we  turned  our  faces  homewards  (if  we  could  call  it  home ) 
slow  and  weary ; and  glad  enough  we  were  to  cast  down  our 
burdens  of  bamboos  at  length  where  the  skeleton  of.  our  shark 
was  lying  ; for  the  rest  of  our  number  had  so  completely  dis- 
posed of  him,  that  I might  call  him  a skeleton  almost  as  much 
as  the  one  we  dragged  out  of  the  water.  They  had  buried 
portions  (as  much  as  would  last  us  for  months,  if  only  pickled) 
in  six  or  seven  small  pits  they  had  contrived  to  dig ; and  the 
two  Indians  were  cleaning  away  at  the  bones  with  great  dili- 
gence. To  be  brief,  we  lit  our  evening  fire  under  a spreading 
tree,  a little  distance  from  the  shore ; our  supper  of  shark  we 
found  palatable  enough  to  men  who  had  hunger  for  their 
sauce ; then  we  spent  the  dark  hours  talking  over  our  day’s 
adventures,  till ’t  was  time  for  prayer,  and  so  to  bed. 


CHAPTER  XXXYII. 

THE  FIRST  CATECHISM. 

WOULD  fill  a book,  and  a good  one,  to  re- 
late the  talk  that  went  on  between  Don 
Manuel  and  the  Indians,  by  our  watch-fire 
o’  nights.  I will  give  one  of  these  discourses, 
so  well  as  I can  recall  it : only,  as  I do  not 
undertake  to  put  the  savages’  broken  English 
into  fitter  language  (as  I cannot  pretend, 
neither,  to  very  choice  English  myself*),  it  must  be  by  jotting 
down  just  what  they  said,  as  far  as  memory  will  serve. 

“ John”,  said  the  priest  to  Pounder,  who  was  busy  fixing 
some  shark’s  teeth  into  .a  handle,  to  serve  for  a saw ; “ let  me 

* The  state  of  education  in  Wales  during  Owen’s  younger  days  must 
be  taken  into  account  in  criticising  his  entire  production.  Supposing 
him  to  write  fifteen  years,  or  so,  after  the  events  he  records,  and  to 
have  spent  a part  of  that  time  in  civilized  society,  we  have  still  to 
account  for  the  total  want  of  polish,  and  even  accuracy  of  expression, 
which  marks  his  narrative.  It  has  been  thought,  however,  that  it 
would  prove  more  satisfactory  to  the  general  reader  to  have  Evans’ 
plain  unvarnished  tale  presented  to  him.  in  the  dress  in  which  the  author 
clothed  it.  And  it  must  be  remembered,  that  the  “Welsh  school- 
master” of  that  day  stood  as  the  very  type  of  much  that  was  rude  and 
uncultured ; as  the  very  reverse  of  the  “ schoolmaster  abroad” — Ed. 


142 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


see  if  you  remember  what  I said  to  you  yesterday.  Attend, 
now,  for  our  talk  must  be  serious.  How  many  gods  are  there  ?” 

“ White  Sa”,  answered  Pounder  (so  they  called  us,  trying 
to  say,  Sir),  “ he  say,  none  but  one”. 

Don  M.  “ But  do  you  not  see,  yourself,  there  can  only  be 
One  ?” 

Pounder . “ White  Sa,  he  say  yes.  Me  s’pose ; me  no 

know.  Rer-mimebolamba  know  small”.  He  meant  to  say, 
he  was  ignorant,  and  understood  but  little. 

Don  M.  “ But  Rer-mimebolamba  can  think.  If  there 
were  two  Gods,  or  many,  would  they  be  equal,  one  as  great 
as  the  rest,  one  as  powerful  as  the  rest?  or  would  one  be 
greater,  more  powerful  ?” 

On  this,  poor  Pounder  mused  for  some  time  ; then  he  said, 
meekly : “Me  no  know ; me  say  as  White  Sa  he  say.  Ebery- 
ting  all  right”. 

Don  M.  {smiling).  “ Yes,  but  that  will  not  do.  You  must 
know  and  believe  for  yourself,  my  dear.  Listen  to  me  again : 
What  is  God  ?” 

With  much  reverence  he  said  this,  and  raised  his  hat  as  he 
spoke,  bowing  his  head.  Pounder  bowed  his  too,  but  said 
nothing.  Mark,  the  old  man  (his  Indian  name  was  Toefa- 
oloo),  took  it  up  here. 

Marie.  “White  Sa,  Paowanga,  he  our  god.  Erronana- 
toona,  he  our  god.  Taniaete-solloo,  he  our  god.  Havaeo- 
eekee,  he  our  god.  Eaha-noue,  eaha-noue  (great  many, 
great  many),  he  all  our  god”  (he  could  not  express  the  plural, 
they , in  his  English). 

At  this,  Pounder  and  Samuel  nodded,  and  kept  on  saying, 
“ oora , oora”. 

Samuel.  “And  Kongadoowaia”  (pointing  to  the  moon), 
“he  our  god”. 

Mark.  “ Oora,  oora,  Poula-faihe” : as  much  as  to  tell  the 
young  Indian,  he  had  well  spoken. 

Don  M.  “ But  which  of  all  these  gods,  think  you,  is  the 
greatest  ?” 

Samuel.  “ Me  s’pose,  Kongadoowaia,  he  most  most”. 

Pounder.  “Udan,  Udan  (no,  no):  Erronanatoona,  he  most 
most”. 

Mark.  “Udan,  Rer-mimebolamba:  me  s’pose,  Paowanga, 
he  most  most : me  s’pose  Havaeoeekee,  he  most  most”.  (He 
meant  by  this,  he  could  not  decide  in  his  mind,  which  of  the 
two  he  named,  was  the  greatest.) 

Don  M.  “ So,  it  seems  you  are  not  able  to  balance  among 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


143 


them  all.  But  1 say  to  you,  now,  there  cannot  be  more  than 
one  God.  To  say,  many  gods,  is  to  say,  no  God.  None  of 
those  you  tell  me  of,  is  God  at  all”. 

Mark.  “ Me  s’pose,  none  of  ’em  god  at  all”. 

Don  M.  “ Well,  then,  is  there  no  God  ?” 

Mark . “Me  s’pose,  no  god.  Eberyting  all  right,  White  Sa 
he  say”. 

Don  M.  “Ah,  poor  creature!  hast  thou  lived  all  these  long 
years,  and  grown  old,  in  this  dark  state  of  soul  ? Good  Lord, 
assist  me  to  do  somewhat,  and  enlighten  this  soul  which  Thou 
hast  created  ! Now,  Toefa-oloo,  tell  me:  where  does  God  live  ?” 

Mark.  “Me  s’pose,  Erronanatoona,  he  live  here  (pointing 
to  one  quarter  of  the  heavens)  : Tamaete-solloo,  he  live  here 
(pointing  to  another  quarter) : Paowanga,  he  live  Toonati- 
nooka  (the  name  of  the  island  they  came  from)  : Havaeoeekee, 
he  live  in  oloeeo : Eaha-noue,  eaha-noue  (he  meant,  all  the 
rest  of  his  many  gods)  he  all  live  here,  here,  here,  here,  here” 
(pointing  about  on  all  sides,  up  and  down). 

Don  M.  “And  what  is  oloeeof ’ 

Old  Mark  seemed  not  well  able  to  explain  what  he  meant 
by  this : he  sat  for  awhile,  and  looked  into  the  fire,  shaking 
his  head.  Presently,  Don  Manuel  tried  Pounder,  to  make 
him  explain  it  better. 

Don  M.  “ Well,  Rer-mimebolamba,  do  you  tell  us,  what 
is  oloeeo  ?” 

Pounder . “White  Sa,  oloeeo  all  same  as  place  where 
Havaeoeekee  he  live,  he  sleep,  he  stay”. 

Don  M . “ Is  it  up  there,  then  ?”  (pointing  to  the  heavens). 

Pounder , shaking  his  head.  “ Udan,  udan”. 

Don  M.  “ Where  is  it,  then  ?” 

Pounder.  “ Rer-mime  (so  he  called  himself,  for  shortness), 
leave  it  Rer -mime’s  house,  six  suns  back”.  He  would  have 
said,  six  days  before. 

Don  M.  “ Left  it  in  your  house  ? is  it  so  small  ?” 

Pounder.  “Rer-mime  hold  it  so,  so”  (doubling  up  his  hand). 

This  caused  a silence  again  : we  could  none  of  us  make  out 
what  he  meant  by  this  oloeeo.  At  length  Don  Manuel  began 
to  question  him  once  more  : 

“ What  is  it  like?”  says  he,  “ what  is  it  made  of?” 

Pounder  held  up  the  shark’s  teeth  he  was  working  at,  and 
the  handle  he  was  fitting  them  into  ; and  said  : 

“ Oloeeo  this  way”.* 

* In  an  account  of  the  island  of  Madagascar,  of  about  the  same  date 
as  this  narrative,  mention  is  made  of  an  owley  (probably  the  English 


144 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


Don  M.  “And  do  you  think,  one  of  your  gods  lives  in  a 
thing  like  that  ?” 

Mark  interrupted  here,  but  with  great  respect : “ White 
Sa,  Havaeoeekee  he  live  in  oloeeo  this  day,  he  no  live  in 
oloeeo  that  day”,  meaning,  not  always.  “ He  live  in  oloeeo, 
if  no  Paowanga  he  drive  him  out  some  time”. 

In  short,  the  deeper  we  went  into  their  miserable,  dark 
misbelief,  the  fuller  did  we  find  it  of  absurdities,  each  gain- 
saying the  other.  Nor  did  they  seem  to  have  so  much  as  the 
first  rude  notions  of  the  true  God,  nor  capable  of  receiving 
them  from  us  as  yet : though  they  submitted  to  all  the  White 
Sirs  chose  to  say  on  that,  or  any  other  matter.  But  such 
discourses  had  a good  effect  on  our  men,  though  seeming 
lost  on  the  savages : for  after  a while,  Harry  Gill  broke  out 
with  saying  : 

“’Tis  a great  treasure,  Sir  (as  I find),  we  have  had  all 
along ; though,  I fear  me,  I have  little  thought  on  it.  We 
have  always  known  there  was  One  true  God;  and  that  is 
something  these  poor  niggers,  it  seems,  do  not”. 

“ Indeed,  ’t  is  something”,  answered  the  priest,  “ and  much, 
as  the  foundation  of  all  beside.  Then,  also,  you  have  known, 
that  the  true  God  has  spoken  to  you”. 

Harry  Gill.  “ Spoken  to  me,  Sir?  As  how?  I don’t  un- 
derstand that”. 

Don  M.  “ Has  He  never  spoken,  my  friend,  to  your  un- 
derstanding, or  to  your  conscience,  or  to  your  heart  ? And 
did  He  never  speak  to  those  that  went  before  you,  from  whom 
you  have  derived,  at  least,  a part  of  His  message  ?” 

Gill  seemed  puzzled  to  know  how  to  interpret  this : he  re- 
mained for  a little  while  thinking  ; then  said,  in  a low  tone  : 

“ I never  heard  God’s  voice,  Sir”. 

Don  M.  “ Well,  we  have  talked  enough  for  to-night : but, 
if  you  would  desire  to  know  what  I mean,  I will  tell  you  to- 
morrow night,  if  we  live.  May  God  give  us  rest  now,  and 
eternal  rest  in  heaven”. 

version  of  some  native  word),  as  being  an  amulet  in  frequent  use  in  that 
country.  It  is  supposed  to  be  the  residence  of  one  of  the  local  de- 
mons, and,  like  the  Fetish  of  the  African  tribes,  appears  to  be  regarded 
at  once  as  a charm,  or  talisman,  and  an  object  of  quasi-adoration.  These 
owleys  are  described  as  small  and  portable,  “ made  of  a peculiar  wood, 
in  small  pieces,  neatly  joined,  and  making  almost  the  form  of  an  half- 
moon, with  the  horns  downwards,  between  which  are  placed  two  alliga- 
tors’ teeth  ; this  is  adorned  with  various  kinds  of  beads”,  etc.  It  is  not 
difficult  to  suppose  the  narrative  referred  to,  and  this  passage  of  Owen’s 
adventures,  to  present  us  with  something  in  common. — Ed. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


145 


CHAPTER  XXXVIII. 


WORTH  THINKING  ON. 

[OMETHING  in  what  the  priest  had  said  gave 
me  a sleepless  night,  I well  remember : and 
’t  was  chiefly  on  account  of  these  words  of  his ; 
If  we  live . I had  somehow  taken  it  as  a thing 
of  course,  in  spite  of  dangers  and  chances 
that  had  befallen  me,  I should  live  to  a ripe 
old  age,  after  all.  True  it  was,  I had  heard 
of  others  dying  on  a sudden,  when  they  and  their  friends 
least  thought  on  it : I had  seen  even  younger  men  die,  who 
were  shortly  before  in  the  vigour  of  youth  : also,  in  my 
studies  and  practice  of  surgeon,  I had  stood  by  many  a death- 
bed, unable  to  stay  that  cold  hand  of  death  from  grasping  the 
heart-strings  of  others  : all  this  had  scarce  taught  me,  my 
own  time  was  coming  too.  If  I ever  figured  to  my  mind  my 
own  death,  ’t  was  as  an  old  man,  dying  many  years  after : 
the  real  truth  is,  I scarce  ever  imagined  it  at  all. 

But  now,  whether ’t  was  something  had  shocked  me  in  the 
horrid  heathenism  of  our  new  acquaintances,  who  were  living 
“ without  God  in  this  world”,  or  that  those  few  words  spoken 
by  Don  Manuel  in  his  simple  Avay,  as  of  a thought  familiar  to 
himself,  impressed  me  in  a manner  the  same  thing  never  had 
hitherto  done  : I lay  before  the  fire  turning  them  over  in  my 
mind  ; they  now  possessed  a strange  power  with  me,  such  as 
I could  not  shake  off,  It  was  in  vain  to  compose  myself  to 

10 


146 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


sleep  : still  there  came,  as  if  it  were  a small  voice,  that 
whispered  in  mine  ear ; If  you  should  live ; then,  If  you  should 
die  ! Those  two  came,  one  after  another,  ringing  through  my 
brain,  as  it  were,  in  turn  ; like  the  solemn  ding-dong  of  the 
two  old  bells  I have  heard,  times  out  of  number,  chiming  to 
church  in  my  native  hamlet  of  Llanddwy-Cwmyoy.*  If  you 
should  live!  If  you  should  die ! If  you  should  live ! If  you 
should  die!  I almost  thought  I was  dreaming,  at  one  time. 
But  no ; there  I was,  broad  awake  ; and  I did  not  so  much 
think  as  listen  to  the  words  which  some  one  else  seemed  to 
repeat  and  repeat  again  to  me. 

I felt  my  pulse,  and  found  it  somewhat  heated  and  fever- 
ish : this,  I began  to  think,  might  explain  the  whole  : yet,  on 
the  other  hand,  the  voice  (as  I must  call  it)  sounded  so  quiet 
and  gentle,  like  the  voice  of  a friend  anxious  for  my  good, 
and  loving  me  ; and  there  were  no  disturbed  visions  before 
my  sight,  as  would  appear  if  a fever  were  setting  in. 

I now  gave  up  all  thoughts  of  sleep ; I rested  my  aching 
head  on  my  two  hands,  my  hands  on  my  knees,  and  set  to 
work  thinking  in  right  earnest.  If  I should  die!  What  then  ? 
1 began  to  ponder.  After  all  said  and  done,  I was  not  so  ill 
taught  in  some  truths  of  religion,  but  I knew  u after  death 
comes  judgment”.  But  then,  Judgment,  I had  been  used  to 
think,  was  like  to  bear  hard  upon  such  villains  as  thieves, 
murderers,  traitors,  pirates,  spoilers  of  widows  and  orphans, 
robbers  of  churches,  utterers  of  base  coin,  forgers,  and  such 
like  ; of  which  I was  none,  nor  ever  had  been. 

That  was  a comfort,  so  far  as  it  might  go ; but  it  somehow 
grew  lesser,  by  a good  deal,  as  I thought  it  over.  For  then 
I began  to  consider  how  many  good  gifts  I had  had  given  me, 
and  that  I must  be  judged  for  them  all ; what  illuminations 

* Probably  some  obscure  village  in  Glamorganshire,  which  seems 
to  have  been  Owen’s  native  county,  from  his  mention  of  Cardiff  and 
Llantrisant,  both  situated  within  its  confines.  I am  unable  to  assign 
an  exact  meaning  to  the  addition,  Cwmyoy  ; but  the  former  part  of  the 
name  signifies  the  Church  of  St.  David.  This  is  a name  of  frequent 
occurrence  in  Wales  ; many  churches  having  been  dedicated  there  in 
honour  of  the  great  Archbishop  of  Minevia,  the  patron  of  the  entire 
principality,  whose  name  was  given,  after  his  death,  to  the  present 
Catheral  and  diocese  of  St.  David’s.  Thus,  we  have  Llan-ddewibrevy 
(i  e.  the  Church  of  David  on  or  near  the  river  Brevy),  in  Cardigan- 
shire, the  spot  where  the  great  British  Synod  was  held  early  in  the 
sixth  century  against  Pelagius,  at  which  St.  David  assisted.  There  is 
also  Llan-ddewi-Abergwesin,  in  Brecknockshire,  Llanddewi-Skirrid  and 
Llanddwy-Rytherch,  in  Monmouthshire,  and  doubtless  many  others  in 
Wales  proper;  to  which  may  perhaps  be  added  Llandewednack  at  the 
T.izard  Point,  in  the  kindred  Celtic  district  of  Cornwall.  Ed. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


147 


in  my  spirit,  what  a knowledge  of  the  better  path  I had  still 
not  pursued ; how  many  examples  from  others,  warnings  and 
encouragements  both  in  books,  and  in  actual  life  ; lessons  at 
every  turn  : and  I,  like  a perverse,  ungrateful  creature,  had 
closed  my  eyes  and  ears  and  heart,  against  all ! Now,  as  I 
thought  on  them,  they  seemed  to  multiply  before  me  ; just 
as  multitudes  of  stars  come  forth  at  night  when  the  man  at 
the  helm,  or  on  the  watch,  keeps  gazing  into  the  sky ; now 
here  one,  now  there  another,  and  another  again,  till  the 
heavens  appear  full  of  them. 

So  then,  I began  to  see,  every  rational  creature  is  account- 
able for  his  gifts  to  God,  who  gave  them,  if  even  he  never 
hath  offended  against  the  laws  of  his  fellow-creatures : and  a 
man,  ’t  is  possible,  may  be  respectable  and  upright  (though  I 
was  unwilling  enough  to  acknowledge  it),  and  yet  be  con- 
demned, too,  for  offences  against  the  divine  law. 

What  (said  I to  myself),  if  the  great  Judgment  shall  take  a 
like  course  with  that  providence  which  bestows  talents  and 
powers  unequally  on  mankind  ? I have  heard  men  say, 
human  justice  is  a copy  and  image  of  the  divine  : and  what  is 
the  known  rule  in  all  human  courts  ? Criminals  are  recom- 
mended to  mercy,  or  receive  a lighter  sentence,  if  ignorance 
can  be  fairly  pleaded  for  them  : on  the  other  hand,  they  are 
heavily  punished  in  the  degree  of  their  knowledge  or  advan- 
tages. Then  I remembered  what  happened  in  my  boyhood, 
when  once  being  taken  to  the  Cardiff  assizes,  and  I little  more 
than  a stripling,  I heard  the  trial  of  two  men,  one  William 
Lloyd,  and  one  Jones  Pen  Rice,  for  forgery ; who  were  tried 
before  Sir  Peregrine  Tullock  and  Baron  Brainerd,  when  they 
went  the  Welsh  circuit  that  year.  Lloyd  was  a poor  simple 
man,  who  could  write  but  ill,  and  from  journey-man  baker  had 
become  master-baker  in  a small  way,  and  from  that  rose  to 
be  an  exciseman ; but  Pen  Rice  was  a practised  schoolmaster 
all  his  days,  and  for  smartness  of  scholarship  worth  two  of 
the  other.  It  came  out  on  the  trial,  the  schoolmaster  had 
overpersuaded  his  poor  neighbour,  Lloyd,  to  counterfeit  the 
sign-manual  of  the  junior  partner  in  a linen-draper’s  firm, 
while  he  himself  had  forged  the  name  of  the  senior,  to  some 
quittance  or  other.  But  the  upshot  was,  the  exciseman  being 
no  such  adept  as  the  schoolmaster,  his  clumsiness  betrayed 
them  both  : so  that  every  one  that  heard  the  trial  wondered 
how  so  shrewd  a man  should  employ  so  poor  an  instrument 
when  his  neck  was  the  forfeit.  Nevertheless,  all  things  taken 
into  the  account,  Lloyd  got  off  with  seven  years  in  the  hulks ; 


148 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


but  Pen  Rice  was  cast  to  be  hanged,  and  hanged  he  was 
accordingly.  To  make  a long  story  short,  I well  remembered 
the  sentence  of  Justice  Brainerd  in  addressing  the  prisoners, 
(his  brother  judge,  Sir  Peregrine,  being  taken  with  a touch  of 
gout,  and  not  able  to  sit  that  day,  for  the  trial  lasted  two 
days  and  a-half,  so  subtle  a defence  did  Pen  Rice  make  for 
himself  and  his  accomplice). 

“For  you,  Jones  Pen  Rice”,  says  the  judge,  putting  on  his 
black  cap,  “ I can  hold  out  no  prospect  of  mercy  from  the 
Crown.  Your  education,  your  intelligence,  the  sacred  duty 
entrusted  to  you,  of  guarding  the  morals  and  forming  the 
character  of  youth,  the  influence  which,  by  superior  endow- 
ments, you  acquired  over  your  unhappy  accomplice,  and 
which  you  employed  to  so  base  an  end,  all  combine  to  stamp 
your  crime  as  one  unpardonable  in  the  eyes  of  man.  That  you 
may  find  mercy  at  a higher  tribunal  is  my  hope  and  prayer 
for  you : to  that  end,  I exhort  you  to  spend  the  short  time 
remaining  to  you  on  earth,  in  fervent  supplications  to  obtain 
forgiveness  of  your  crimes  from  your  offended  Maker.  The 
sentence  of  the  court  is,  that  you  be  taken  hence  to  the  place 
from  which  you  came,  and  that  on  the  fifth  morning  after  the 
present  day  you  be  drawn  on  a hurdle  from  thence  to  the 
gallows  erected  on  the  place  called  Piper’s  Heath,  and  there 
hanged  by  the  neck  till  you  be  dead,  dead,  dead!  and  may 
the  Lord  have  mercy  upon  your  soul !” 

On  which,  I also  remembered  (for  by  this  I was  all  but  nod- 
ding off  to  sleep  ; and  our  snatches  of  dreams,  we  know,  bring 
strange  fragments  of  recollection,  with  oddly  assorted  words 
and  things,  little  thought  on  during  the  interval),  I remem- 
ber plainly,  I say,  that  when  the  judge  had  solemnly  pro- 
nounced those  words  with  a deep  voice  and  shake  of  his  head, 
and  the  crowded  court  was  hushed,  except  the  poor  wife  and 
daughter  of  the  condemned  man  in  the  gallery,  shrieking,  and 
in  hysterics,  the  head-waiter  of  the  King’s  Arms  elbowing -in 
near  the  judge,  leaned  forward,  and  said  in  a loud  whisper : 
“ So  please  your  lordship,  my  lord,  my  master  bid  me  say, 
the  haunch  of  venison  will  be  ruinated  and  burnt  to  a cinder”. 
On  which  the  court  breaking  up  in  haste,  adjourned  to  the 
duty  of  dining  at  the  King’s  Arms,  to  drink  his  majesty’s 
health,  and  the  rest  of  the  royal  family. 

Just  before  I dropped  to  sleep,  I heard  Don  Manuel,  speak- 
ing to  himself : “ Toonati-nooka  !”  Methought  he  was  prac- 
tising the  name  of  the  savages’  island ; but,  looking  at  him, 
I perceived  he  was  sound  asleep  : then  I guessed,  his  dreams 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


149 


were  taking  him  to  that  heathen  place,  and  he  was  bent  on 
something  for  their  good.  Presently,  he  became  more  rest- 
less, and  began  to  murmur  things  that  I could  not  catch  so 
well : all  at  once,  he  started,  broad  awake,  crying : “ Save 
them  ! Save  them,  or  they  perish  !”  then,  seeing  me,  gave  a 
little  quiet  laugh,  as  though  at  himself,  and  turned  from  the 
light  of  the  fire  ; so  I heard  no  more. 


CHAPTER  XXXIX. 


A POSITIVE  PRECEPT. 

>UT  has  my  truant  pen  run  away  with  me  ? 
When  I began  this  narrative  of  our  mis- 
fortunes, I meant  no  more  than  to  note  the 
heads  of  what  befell  us ; to  guide  my  memory 
more  than  for  any  other’s  sake  beside : and 
already  1 have  blotted  many  sheets  with  the 
history  of  a few  days  of  our  exile  in  that 
place.  Yet  our  situation  on  the  island  was  so  strange  as  few, 
I think,  could  match  by  their  experience ; and,  had  I but  the 
fresh  remembrance,  as  I have  now  the  leisure,  such  uncommon 
things  as  befell  us  there  demand  as  full  an  account,  day  by 
day,  as  I have  given  of  them  up  to  this. 

I know  not  whether  to  record  the  bare  heads  of  the  journal 
I began  to  keep,  after  our  first  week  or  so,  on  some  of  Don 
Manuel’s  folio  paper,  and  with  the  cuttle-fish  ink ; or  to  go 
on  drawing  out  at  full  what  I then  put  down  in  brief : for, 
indeed,  as  I read  those  notes  over,  the  whole  time  and  place, 
and  almost  every  word  then  spoken,  seems  to  start  up  before 
me,  though  now  some  years  agone,  as  fresh  as  anything  I did 
a month  since.  As  I write  now,  in  my  little  parlour-room, 
looking  over  the  harbour,  with  the  pier-head  and  shipping 
right  in  front,  my  wife  beside  me,  and  my  children  round  me, 
I seem  almost  to  hear  with  mine  ears,  and  to  see  with  mine 
eyes,  that  past  and  half-savage  life  come  round  again.  But 
there  is  a portrait  that  hangs  against  my  wall,  the  portrait  of 
my  dear,  most  dear  Don  Manuel — God  rest  his  soul,  if  he  can 
need  such  a prayer — that  looks  down  on  me,  seeming  to  bid 


150 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


me  go  on,  and  recoM  all  and  each,  to  the  best  of  my  memory. 
How  mild  he  shows  there,  and  how  humble  : how  grave,  yet 
how  gay,  both  strangely  mingled!  My  Yarmouth  painter, 
that  I tried  to  describe  him  to,  has  done  his  best  to  produce 
him  on  the  canvas ; but  the  man  has  not  caught  that  look, 
neither,  and  small  blame  to  him.  For  that  portrait’s  sake, 
I will  go  on  as  before : leastways,  till  I have  completed  the 
history  of  a week ; then  we  will  see. 

Above  all,  could  I but  read,  in  turn,  the  thoughts  of  my 
readers  (if  any  there  should  be),  to  discover  the  interest  they 
take  in  what  interests  me  in  the  remembrance,  I should  know 
better  how  to  guide  my  pen.  For  a man  may  be  the  hero  of 
his  own  adventures,  and  to  his  entire  satisfaction  alone : as 
our  old  schoolmaster  at  Llantrisant  was  used  to  describe  some 
conceited  persons  as  sui  amantes , sine  rivali.  But,  rather  than 
be  counted  among  those  self-satisfied  prosers,  who  satisfy  no 
one  beside,  I would  cast  what  I have  here  written  behind 
the  fire,  and  turn  to  use  my  spare  time  somehow  else. 

When  we  woke  the  next  morning,  our  first  thought  (after 
our  prayers),  was  that  pickling  trade  we  had  resolved  to  em- 
bark in : and  it  seems,  we  had  all  been  thinking,  or  dreaming 
of  it,  for  each  one  had  his  plan.  Some  were  for  digging  a pit, 
or  salt-pan,  lining  it,  too,  as  best  we  might,  with  such  earth  or 
clay  as  came  to  hand ; baking  it  hard  with  heated  stones  and 
burning  wood,  as  we  were  now  used  to  bake  our  dinner. 
Some  were  for  hanging  up  the  slices  of  shark’s  meat  to  dry  in 
the  sun,  basting  them  with  salt  and  water,  or  rubbing  them 
with  handfuls  of  salt,  which  we  might  find  in  holes  of  the 
rocks ; so  to  pickle  or  salt  them  dry.  At  last  Hilton  cried  out : 

“ What  about  the  jars  we  left  in  the  stream,  that  day  we 
were  betrayed,  on  ’t  other  side  the  island  ? We  have  not 
bestowed  a thought  on  them ; yet  they  would  serve  us  to  ad- 
miration !” 

We  all  answered  with  one  voice,  that,  indeed,  ’t  was  the 
best  plan  we  had  hit  on  : though  a second  thought  told  us, 
how  unlikely  it  was,  the  villains  who  had  betrayed  us  would 
leave  us  anything  so  good  or  useful  as  the  jars  ; yet  we  deter- 
mined to  make  an  expedition,  and  hark  back  to  that  side  of 
the  island  without  delay. 

“Besides”,  said  Harvey,  “we  shall  have  some  chance  of 
knocking  over  another  peccary,  or  so,  among  the  woods  on 
our  way”. 

“ Or  what  will  be  better”,  added  Don  Manuel,  “ of  getting 
some  of  those  oysters  I saw  on  the  rocks  thereabouts”. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


151 


u Under  favour,  though,  Sir”,  returned  Harvey,  “ I see  not 
how  oysters  are  better  than  peccary  for  us”. 

u Better  for  us  to-day”,  said  the  priest. 

“ To-day  ?”  asked  I,  taking  it  up  here,  and  looking  at  him, 
surprised. 

“ Yes”,  replied  he,  smiling,  u for  the  week  is  running  round, 
friends,  and  this  is  Friday  morning,  you  remember”. 

“ Ah”,  said  I,  after  thinking  a little,  “ Catholics  are  used  to 
take  no  meat  on  a Friday,  I now  remember”. 

11  Catholics,  my  good  friend  ?”  asked  he  : “ certainly.  But 
I have  been  told  by  those  who  know  your  prayer-book  (for 
a fellow-student  of  mine  at  Salamanca  was  preparing  to  be 
sent  as  chaplain  to  our  ambassador  at  St.  James’,  and  he  had 
the  curiosity  to  enquire ;)  it  seems,  I say,  your  own  book  en- 
joins you  to  abstain  from  meat  on  all  Fridays  in  the  year”. 

“ I fear  me”,  said  I,  surprised  at  this,  “ the  Spanish  chap- 
lain knew  more  of  our  English  prayer-book  than  I : all  I 
know  is,  I never  heard  of  this  custom  being  enjoined,  nor 
knew  of  it  practised,  by  any  protestant,  in  my  life.” 

<£  Now  I think  on ’t”,  says  Tom  Harvey,  u there  was  an  old 
aunt  of  my  cousin’s  wife,  that  never  would  touch  meat  on  a 
Friday,  nor  through  the  Lent,  till  she  fell  sick ; but  then  she 
had  been  brought  up  half  a Catholic,  by  her  grandmother ; 
and  she  again  had  this  handed  down  to  her  by  a priest,  who 
came  to  that  side  of  the  country  from  foreign  parts,  and  was 
hanged  soon  after  at  Worcester”. 

“ And  why  was  he  hanged?”  enquired  Don  Manuel,  and 
Hilton,  both  in  a breath. 

“ Indeed”,  said  Harvey,  <e  I cannot  say ; but  he  was  looked 
on  as  a kind  of  rebel,  as  I ’ve  heard  tell ; and  would  not  take 
some  oaths  or  other,  I never  rightly  knew  what”. 

So  that  discourse  dropped  for  the  present. 

I cannot  pretend,  what  the  priest  had  said  on  the  point  in 
hand  came  home  with  that  force  to  us,  that  we  readily  con- 
formed. For  (as  I now  see)  the  precepts  of  natural  religion, 
planted  in  man’s  neart  as  man,  apart  from  revelation  or 
Christianity,  can  appeal  even  to  the  half-awakened  conscience, 
telling  us  such-like  things  as  to  assist  one  another  in  need,  to 
deal  justly  and  fairly,  forgive  injuries,  ask  forgiveness,  abstain 
from  offence,  search  our  own  conduct,  come  before  our  Maker 
in  prayer,  and  so  on.  Whereas,  here  was  a precept  of  posi- 
tive law  declared  to  us,  beyond  anything  laid  down  in  the 
law  of  reason  written  in  my  mind  ; and  the  authority  whereof 
I could  not  at  once  bow  to.  For  my  reason  (if  that  were 


152 


THE  ADVENTURES  07 


all)  would  still  teach  me,  the  animals  I had  a dominion  over 
were  as  much  given  for  my  use  on  Fridays,  as  on  Thursdays, 
Mondays,  or  any  day  whatsoever.  From  this  arose  my 
doubts,  whether  I,  or  the  rest,  could  be  held  bound  by  such 
a law  ; to  which  we  had  never  subscribed,  either  formally  or 
by  any  other  act,  I thought,  that  implied  it ; in  which  none, 
whether  minister  or  layman,  had  instructed  us  by  word  or 
writing ; which  our  elders  and  betters  had  not  observed ; 
which  we  had  not  heard  of,  read  of,  dreamed  of,  till  that  mo- 
ment when  Don  Manuel  brought  it  up  on  a sudden. 

’T  was,  indeed,  a small  matter  enough  in  itself ; nor  any 
denial,  to  speak  of,  for  men  who  were  used  to  fare  hard,  and 
reckoned  a piece  of  salt  junk,  with  a biscuit  half  full  of  weevils, 
and  a horn  of  weak  grog,  little  better  than  bilge-water,  to  be 
feast  for  an  admiral.  But  then,  again,  it  came  with  an  air  of 
authority  : though  I would  have  done  the  thing  ten  times 
over,  and  heartily,  to  oblige  a mess  -mate,  or  relieve  a poor 
disabled  seaman ; my  will  (I  own)  kicked  against  it,  when  it 
claimed  to  bind  us  by  an  obligation. 

In  this  way  I turned  the  question  over  for  a while  : but  for 
breakfast,  was  no  controversy,  for  nothing  but  shark  was  to 
be  had ; and  shark  was  fish,  all  the  world  over : so  to  it  we  set, 
and  broiled  some  pieces,  with  yams  and  bread-fruit,  having 
freshened  our  stock  of  these  from  the  neighbouring  woods,  by 
help  of  the  savages.  But  Savages  I must  call  them  no  longer ; 
for,  if  they  began  by  submissiveness,  they  were  now  devoted 
to  our  service : indeed,  they  told  us  after  (when  they  had 
gained  language  enough)  nothing  could  equal  their  joy  to  find 
by  degrees,  we  were  neither  going  to  eat  them,  nor  sacrifice 
them  to  our  gods : this  being  their  custom,  it  seems,  with  all 
who  are  wrecked  or  cast  on  their  shores,  or  taken  prisoners  in 
war. 

After  our  fish-breakfast,  we  bore  away  north-north-east,  at 
a smartish  pace  ; we  all  desired  to  see  whether  these  jars  re- 
mained to  us  or  no : yet  each,  I believe,  felt  unwilling  (some 
more,  some  less)  to  revisit  that  part  of  the  island  where  our 
great  misfortune  first  had  burst  on  us.  But  after  all,  during 
the  five  days,  or  so,  we  had  spent  in  this  strange  unlooked  for 
way,  our  minds  had  been  so  raised  to  better  things,  our  hearts, 
too,  so  calmed  and  softened,  by  the  society  and  example  (more 
even  than  his  words)  of  the  companion  we  had  all  learned  to 
love  heartily,  that  we  were  prepared,  if  not  willing,  to  look 
again  on  a spot  where  we  had  cursed,  and  raved,  and  ground 
our  teeth,  so  shortly  before. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


153 


CHAPTER  XL. 


RAMBLING  IN  WALK  AND  TALK. 


near  the  top 
stood  three  days 


of  the  mountain,  where 


ago,  viewing  the  ex- 


( sd % 


ROM 

1 we  ! 

tent  of  the  island,  we  had  made  out  its 
length  to  be  some  three  British  leagues : 
that  is,  two  full  leagues  south  from  the 
mountain  top  (as  the  crow  flies),  and  about 
half  as  much  to  the  northward,  on  a rough 
guess.  Coming,  as  we  did  now,  from  the  extreme  south- 
east, or  nearly  so,  with  an  intention  to  leave  the  slopes  of 
the  mountain  well  on  our  right,  we  reckoned  there  lay  before 
us  a march  of  a couple  of  leagues,  or  thereabout.  But  the 
greater  part  of  our  way  took  us  through  the  thick  woods, 
with  high  trees  arching  over ; so  we  did  not  fear  the  heat. 

We  felt,  though,  our  want  of  a compass  on  this  march  ; the 
more  so  when  we  left  the  shore,  plunging  into  the  thick 
growth  of  trees,  that  might  entangle  and  mislead  us,  to  the 
loss  of  our  time.  If  any  chance  reader  should  smile  to  think 
of  our  reckoning  the  value  of  time,  seeing  we  had  nought  in 
this  wide  world  to  do  with  it,  but  to  keep  from  sin  and  save 
our  souls,  as  best  we  might ; let  him  consider  again  (as  we 
did)  that  the  rainy  season  was  at  hand,  and  we  must  needs 
house  ourselves  in  the  cave  before  it  came  on  us.  Indeed, 
we  were  so  anxious  about  this  (I  mean,  the  priest  and  I,  for 
’t  was  our  two  heads  alone  that  seemed  to  forecast  anything, 
if  I make  some  exception  for  Harvey),  I felt  regret  we  should 
lose  a day  upon  our  expedition  ; I think,  had  I not  been 
ashamed  to  abandon  it  now,  I had  more  than  likely  proposed 
to  turn  back  to  our  mason’s  work. 

However,  wdiat  we  had  to  do  was,  to  note  the  position  of 
the  sun,  and  so  guide  ourselves  by  guess-work  towards  that 
channel,  or  inlet,  of  our  first  unhappy  landing.  Could  we 
have  used  the  sagacity  of  our  Indians  here,  I doubt  not  they 
had  struck  out  the  path  for  us  ; but  they  knew  not  whither 
we  were  going,  and  trudged  at  our  heels,  like  as  many  faithful 
hounds.  We  kept  all  together,  to  guard  against  surprise  ; and 
marched  in  this  order  : first  came  I,  with  my  rifle  ready  for 


154 


TILE  ADVENTURES  OF 


action  ; next,  Don  Manuel  with  his  piked  staff ; then  the 
three  Indians,  each  with  a bamboo,  which  he  had  pointed  at 
the  end,  and  burnt  the  end  hard  with  fire,  so  making  it  into 
a formidable  kind  of  javelin,  enough  ; then  Ned  Hilton  and 
Gill,  whose  office  ’t  was  to  keep  a sharp  eye  to  the  savages, 
with  their  guns  ready  against  the  least  sign  of  treachery ; 
next  Prodgers,  last,  Tom  Harvey,  brought  up  the  rear,  each 
armed  with  a bamboo-pike  too. 

Before  we  had  got  on  very  far,  we  were  stopped  by  a 
marsh,  that  spread  out  so  wide  as  made  it  impassable  : for  we 
knew  not  how  deep  it  might  be  in  the  middle.  All  we  could 
do  was  to  strike  up  to  the  right,  keeping  to  firm  ground ; we 
could  see  this  quagmire  was  narrower  to  that  side  than  to- 
wards the  left,  and  so  we  judged  it  to  be  formed  by  some 
stream  that  came  down  from  northward.  Soon  we  found  our- 
selves right  in  supposing  thus  much  ; for  the  soft  ground  grew 
less  and  less,  until  we  traced  the  opening  of  a small  stream 
that  ran  into  it. 

Here  we  came  upon  another  discovery  ; and  ’t  was  due  to 
Hilton,  whose  foot  slipping  on  a sudden,  nearly  brought  Ned 
down  upon  his  nose.  As  he  looked  to  see  what  he  had  slipped 
on,  he  cried  out : “ Clay,  as  I’m  alive !”  We  crowded  round 
the  place,  for  this  was  joyful  news  to  us  all  ; and  found  in- 
deed, he  was  not  mistaken : for  the  east  bank  of  this  small 
stream  was  made  up  of  a greyish  marl,  or  clay,  very  fit  for 
moulding  into  pots  and  dishes,  if  only  we  had  skill  to  bring 
to  our  material.  We  traced  the  clay  (some  of  us  searching 
up  the  stream,  and  some  down)  for  sixty  or  seventy  yards  ; 
then  we  gave  over,  for  we  found  we  were  rich  enough  to  em- 
ploy a score  of  hands,  or  more,  in  the  pottery  trade,  had  we 
been  so  numerous. 

We  rejoiced  at  finding  this,  and  rendered  thanks  to  God  ; 
but  would  not  delay  on  it  for  the  present.  Our  only  concern 
was,  how  to  mark  the  place,  that  we  might  come  hither  again 
when  our  house  was  built  (I  mean,  when  our  cave  was  hol- 
lowed wide  enough)',  and  employ  our  new-found  treasure. 

“ And  let  that  be  soon,  friends”,  said  Don  Manuel  : “ for 
next  to  a lodging,  a good  householder  looks  to  his  furniture. 
In  Holland,  where  I once  was,  the  houses  of  the  better  sort, 
indeed  of  all,  from  the  burgo-master  down  to  below  the 
middle  rank,  are  ornamented  chiefly  with  such  glazed  delft- 
ware  and  tiles  as  they  have  a great  art  in  making  ; and  they 
have  such  a wealth  of  this  pottery-ware  as  descends  from 
father  to  son,  and  is  valued  even  beyond  its  worth.  Though 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


155 


we  cannot  rival  their  native  manufacture,  on  our  first  essay, 
we  may  contrive,  with  care  and  pains,  some  vessel  that  will 
stand  the  fire,  and  cook  a hash”. 

u Or  make  a fish-soup  on  Fridays”,  says  Harry  Gill;  and 
with  that  he  made  a little  wry  face,  but  the  priest  did  not 
see  him.  And  indeed,  though  Harry  had  rather  taken  the 
place  of  being  scape-grace  amongst  us,  which  Prodgers  had 
left  vacant,  there'  was  no  great  malice  in  him,  neither  ; only 
he  did  harm,  so  far  as  it  went,  to  Ned  Hilton.  For  Hilton 
(as  Don  Manuel  once  said  of  him)  was  like  the  animal  they 
call  a chameleon,  that  takes  the  colour  of  everything  ’t  is 
next  to,  and  is  green  among  the  leaves,  but  gray  on  the  bare 
ground. 

To  mark  this  spot,  and  find  our  clay-quarry  again,  we  bade 
Samuel  climb  a high  tree  of  the  fir  kind,  just  over  against  it, 
with  the  saw  that  Pounder  had  made  of  the  shark’s  teeth ; and 
notch  the  rind  with  such  a mark  as  could  be  seen  from  below. 
When  the  young  Indian  made  out  our  wish,  up  he  went,  as 
spruce  as  any  monkey : and  before  five  minutes  he  had  cut 
a cross  deep  into  the  bark  of  the  tree,  on  the  side  looking 
towards  Shark’s  Cove.  Then  he  came  down  again  as  nimbly, 
and  we  went  on  our  way. 

I could  not  but  remark  to  the  priest,  ’twas  strange  how  the 
young  savage,  who  had  not  so  much  as  heard  of  Christianity, 
should  choose  the  sign  of  the  cross  to  cut  into  the  tree.  But 
he  smiled  when  I said  it,  and  answered  me  : 

“ Nature,  friend  Owen,  and  Grace,  both  come  from  the 
same  Lord : is  it  any  wonder,  then,  that  even  nature  some- 
times witnesses  to  the  things  of  Grace  ? Th*e  Arabs,  as  I 
have  heard,  in  the  sandy  desert,  mark  their  camels  with  the 
same  precious  sign,  either  to  know  them  among  others,  or  as 
a sort  of  charm.  Not  that  they  believe  in  the  Cross  (poor 
souls  !)  or  in  Him  who  died  on  it : but,  I suppose,  because  ’tis 
the  most  natural  sign,’  and  comes  first  to  hand,  as  you  may 
see  yourself,  if  you  try.  Children  in  their  games,  when  one 
has  to  make  a sign  against  the  other,  choose  a cross  and  a 
round  o,  because  these  are  the  easiest  made.  Some  of  the 
most  beautiful  flowers  are  cruciform  : and  they  say,  no  plant 
whose  flower  takes  this  shape  is  ever  poisonous.  So  it  is,  that 
our  loving  Lord  speaks  to  those  who  will  listen  to  Him,  and 
prepares  (in  some  degree)  the  minds  of  those  He  has  never 
spoken  to.  But  this  would  lead  us  too  far,  to  follow  it  up”. 

“ Not  too  far  for  me,  Sir”,  said  I ; for  this  man’s  lightest 
sayings  seemed  to  wake  up  unusual  thoughts  in  my  mind : 


156 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


i{  pray  go  on,  if  it  doth  not  weary  you.  You  are  so  used,  and 
I so  little  used,  to  ponder  these  things,  it  must  seem  to  you 
like  teaching  a school-boy  his  A,  B,  C”. 

“ Well,  then”,  pursued  he,  u many  of  our  early  Church 
writers,  or  Fathers,  while  she  was  persecuted  in  her  infancy, 
as  well  as  after,  remark  as  follows : that  in  the  natural  forms 
of  things,  you  often  may  see  the  sign  of  the  cross  where 
there  is  struggle,  contention,  motion,  et  ccetera ; not  so  much 
in  things  that  denote  peace.  In  the  square-yard  of  a ship 
placed  cross-wrays  against  the  mast ; the  outspread  wings  of 
a bird  beating  against  the  air;  the  arms  of  one  who  is  vio- 
lently running  or  struggling ; the  cross-hilt  of  a sword ; a 
cross-bow,  and  the  like.  Mind,  I do  not  affirm  how  much 
there  may  be  in  this  remark,  but  ’t  is,  at  least,  a beautiful 
idea : and  one  that  would  come  home  to  them,  who  were 
called  on  to  bear  the  cross  from  day  to  day,  and  sometimes 
crucified,  to  the  very  letter,  even  as  their  Lord”. 

So  he  went  on,  with  more  than  I can  recall,  about  virtue 
lying  in  the  carrying  the  cross,  in  continual  strife  and  resist- 
ance against  enemies,  within  and  without ; that  we  all  pro- 
fess to  be  soldiers  of  the  cross,  and  must  not  desert  from  our 
standard ; that  if  the  cross  were  thus  impressed  on  mere  na- 
ture (as  Poula-faihe  had  just  shown,  when  he  least  thought 
on  it)  ’t  was,  far  more,  th§  very  foundation  of  all  things  in 
Grace  ; the  sign  of  that  redemption  without  which  we  had  all 
of  us  remained  hopeless  slaves  of  the  devil,  and  the  heirs  of 
hell : again,  how  reasonably  the  Catholic  Church  taught  her 
children  often  to  make  the  sign  of  the  cross,  to  keep  these 
things  (one  and  all)  ever  before  their  eyes  and  hearts.  Then, 
as  I asked  him  to  do,  he  showed  me  the  way  Catholics  had  of 
making  this  sign,  and  repeated  to  me,  in  Latin,  the  words 
wherewith  they  accompanied  it : in  nothing  of  which  I could 
perceive  the  least  departure  from  what  was  lawful  and  rea- 
sonable. 

Such  discourse  was  broken  in  upon  by  our  discovering, 
when  we  had  traced  the  stream  a little  way  up,  this  was  the 
very  same  that  flowed  from  the  southern  declivity  of  Prospect 
Hill.  For  there  was  the  hill  itself  (as  I may  say)  leaning  on 
our  right  shoulders ; but  we  chose  to  give  it  the  name  of 
River-head  now  instead,  and  drank  of  the  fresh  water  again, 
to  the  success  of  our  expedition.  “ And  who  knows,”  quoth 
Hilton,  u but  River-head  may  one  day  become  a famous 
place  in  history  ?”  u I warrant”,  says  Don  Manuel,  “ ’t  will 
have  more  harmless  fame  than  many  a celebrated  spot,  where 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ.  157 

men  have  cut  their  brothers’  throats  by  wholesale,  betrayed 
a town,  or  proved  themselves  villains  on  a large  scale”. 

Going  still  forward,  we  had  scarce  got  two  miles  on, 
when  Pounder  called  out,  pointing  to  something  that  grew  in 
another  swampy  piece  of  ground  to  our  left.  From  the  look 
of  the  plant,  though  the  pods  were  not  yet  burst,  I knew  it 
for  the  cotton-plant,  and  bade  the  Indian  go  and  gather  us 
some.  He  brought  us  a good  handful,  which  Don  Manuel 
and  I examined ; but  we  were  not  so  greatly  rejoiced  at  this 
as  at  our  former  pieces  of  good-luck,  seeing  the  difficulty  of 
weaving  this  cotton  into  any  cloth  for  ourselves.  At  last  I 
said  : “ ’T  is  true,  we  cannot  weave,  for  we  have  no  means  to 
come  by  a loom,  nor  skill  to  make  one  : but  we  can  learn  to 
knit,  I suppose,  and  that  will  answer  us  as  well”. 

At  this,  the  men  all  burst  into  laughter ; they  asked,  when 
were  we  to  begin  this  old -wife’s  trade,  and  sit  at  our  doors 
knitting,  with  spectacles  on  our  noses  ? Then  Gill,  like  a 
luckless  Harry  as  he  was,  turned  round  on  old  Prodgers,  and 
tells  him,  he  would  make  a famous  grandmother  at  that  sort 
of  work.  I know  not  what  Richard  might  have  said  or  done  ; 
nor  how  far  his  new-found  gentleness  had  stood  proof  against 
this  sudden  thrust  of  the  reckless  fellow : but  Don  Manuel 
at  that  moment  laid  his  arm  gently  over  Prodgers’  shoulder, 
and  called  out  good-humourdly  : “I  mean  to  begin  at  it ! see, 
if  I don’t  take  out  a patent  for  the  first  pair  of  stockings  !” 

There ’s  many  a true  word  spoken  in  jest,  says  the  proverb  : 
so,  thinking  it  over,  I made  my  mind  up  to  see  if  we  could 
turn  our  spare  time  to  account  in  this  way  of  cotton-knitting  : 
in  truth,  our  clothes  even  now  were  not  of  the  best ; and  if 
our  exile  was  prolonged  (as  there  looked  every  prospect  of  it) 
that  trade  might  become,  not  a comfort,  but  sheer  necessity. 

But  now  we  journeyed  on ; though  partly  mistaking  our 
way,  we  bore  up  somewhat  too  much  to  northward ; yet, 
when  we  felt  ourselves  getting  on  the  slope  of  the  volcano,  we 
struck  west  again,  and  after  a while  came  upon  the  head  of 
that  little  glen  through  which  the  stream  came  down  that  we 
had  placed  our  jars  in.  We  were  overcome  with  eagerness  to 
see  whether  these  were  left  to  us,  among  our  small  posses- 
sions ; so  we  made  a headlong  rush  for  it,  and  one  or  two  of 
us  fell  into  the  brook  over  the  slippery  roots  of  trees : till  we 
got  into  that  mossy  lane  we  had  travelled  up  before  ; and 
found  (as  indeed  I more  than  suspected),  the  fellows  who 
landed  us  had  no  more  charity  than  we  gave  them  credit  for 
for  one  of  the  jars  was  clean  gone,  and  the  other  lying  beside 


158 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


the  bed  of  the  stream,  broken  into  pieces  ; but  whether  out  of 
sheer  malice,  or  by  some  accident,  is  more  than  I can  say. 

We  uttered  some  exclamations  of  disappointment,  ’tis  not 
to  be  doubted  ; but  I heard  not  a single  curse  among  all  our 
number.  Should  this  appear  to  any  as  a small  matter,  or  not 
one  to  lay  great  stress  on,  to  me,  on  the  other  hand,  who 
knew  the  way  of  seamen,  and  how  glibly  an  oath  slips  from 
the  lips  of  men  that  have  given  themselves  to  uttering  them, 
it  seemed  next  door  to  a miracle,  to  find  how  much  had  been 
done  in  the  line  of  good  within  five  short  days. 

“ True”,  says  the  priest ; for  I seldom  had  a thought  now 
without  imparting  it  to  him  ; “ it  only  shows  that  every  one 
can  keep  from  sin,  with  the  help  of  God,  where  he  is  resolute 
to  watch  over  himself.  I will  tell  you  what  chanced  once 
in  Spain,  on  this  subject  of  swearing,  to  prove  what  I say”. 


CHAPTER  XLI. 


THE  SWEARER’S  BUTTON. 

story”,  says  he,  “is  this:  in  the  town  of 
Espinosa,  in  the  province  of  Toledo,  there 
was  an  officer,  quartered  with  his  regiment ; 
he  was  a good  sort  of  man,  and  in  the  main, 
possessed  with  the  fear  of  God.  But,  from 
living  in  camps,  with  bad  example  around 
him,  having  also  to  deal  with  men  under  his 
command  on  whom  soft  words  seemed  utterly  wasted,  he  had 
contracted  a vile  habit  of  profane  swearing;  and  this  came 
out  on  every  occasion  that  roused  him  to  impatience,  or  anger. 
That  much,  with  the  remainder  of  the  story,  I heard  him  re- 
late afterwards  at  the  table  of  the  bishop  of  Cuidad  Real.  It 
seems  he  made  some  efforts  to  overcome  this  evil  habit  of  his  ; 
but  all  to  no  purpose.  At  length,  the  beginning  of  one  Lent, 
he  applied  to  a Jeronymite  monk,  of  the  convent  in  Espinosa, 
to  explain  his  case.  The  father  asked  him,  was  he  in  earnest? 
did  he  truly  wish  to  unlearn  his  swearing  habits  ? The  cap- 
tain professed  himself,  that  he  did  indeed  desire  it.  Then, 
says  the  other,  will  you  punctually  follow  the  advice  I am 
about  to  give  you?  The  captain  says,  again,  there  was  noth- 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


159 


ing  he  would  not  do  to  correct  himself ; and  so  gave  his  pro- 
mise as  a man  of  honour.  ‘Well,  then’,  says  the  good  monk, 
smiling,  ‘ I will  hold  you  to  it,  hijo  mio:  and  what  you  shall  do 
is  this : The  very  next  time  an  oath  slips  from  your  lips  (re- 
member, you  have  promised  me)  draw  your  sword,  and  cut 
off  the  top  button  from  your  uniform  coat : and  so  on,  a button 
for  every  oath  after  that’. 

“A  bargain  is  a bargain,  among  men  of  honour  : as  this 
officer  had  promised,  he  held  himself  bound  to  perform.  But 
lie  felt  much  confused,  even  beforehand,  at  the  bare  thought 
of  appearing  in  his  uniform  with  a button  less ; and  determined 
by  all  means  to  avoid  the  disgrace.  Well,  he  left  the  monas- 
tery, and  went  back  to  his  quarters,  full  of  good  intentions ; 
scarcely  had  he  set  his  foot  within  the  barrack-gates,  when 
something  went  wrong,  and  one  of  his  men  gave  him  cause  of 
offence.  Out  came  a thundering  big  oath,  according  to  custom ; 
and,  when  he  bethought  himself,  there  was  the  old  evil  done 
again.  How  should  he  act  now  ? Being  a man  of  his  word, 
cost  him  what  it  might,  he  draws  his  sword,  and  cuts  off  the  top 
button,  just  under  his  chin.  Though,  I dare  say,  none  of  his 
fellow-officers  noticed  it,  yet  he  thought  every  eye  was  on  the 
place  where  the  button  should  have  been  ; and  went  about  all 
day  in  a sheepish  kind  of  way,  feeling  something  was  amiss 
with  him  altogether”. 

“Now,”  continued  the  priest,  turning  to  me,  “how  many 
buttons,  think  you,  did  he  lose,  owing  to  that  promise  of  his?” 

“Truly,”  said  I,  “’t  is  to  be  feared,  he  was  left  at  length 
without  so  many  as  would  hold  his  coat  together”. 

“ On  the  contrary,”  says  he  again,  smiling,  “ he  never  had 
to  cut  off  a second ; and  the  careful  guard  he  kept  on  himself, 
lest  he  should  lose  the  next  button,  grew  into  a habit,  that 
cured  him  of  his  swearing”. 

I was  much  struck  with  that  story,  I own  ; and  needed  not 
that  the  priest  should  enforce  its  moral  on  me  : he,  for  his 
part,  did  not  add  another  word. 

Nor  do  I find  any  particular  thing  to  record  in  the  after 
part  of  this  day,  nor  indeed  in  the  next,  which  was  Saturday. 
Hon  Manuel  led  us  to  the  place  where  he  had  observed  the 
oysters;  which  we  found  in  abundance,  and  of  a prodigious 
size  : whether  I am  to  call  them  oysters,  or  cockles  rather, 
they  furnished  us  with  more  food  than  we  desired.*  As  if, 

* For  the  size  to  which  shell-fish  grow  in  the  tropics,  see  Cook's 
Voyage  round  the  World  : “ At  four  o’clock  in  the  afternoon  the  boats 
returned  with  two  hundred  and  forty  pounds  of  the  meat  of  shell-fish, 


160 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


too,  we  were  to  be  rewarded  for  our  obedience  to  the  precept, 
now  first  announced  to  us,  of  eating  no  meat  on  this  day, 

I must  note  that,  even  as  the  people  of  Israel,  turning 
from  the  flesh-pots  of  Egypt,  were  sustained  in  the  wilderness 
by  manna  from  Heaven,  so  now,  besides  our  oysters,  that  were 
(as  our  priest  had  said  before)  both  “ fish  and  dish”,  we  dis- 
covered, in  another  creek  somewhat  to  the  south  of  these 
rocks,  such  a colony  of  fine  cray-fish,  as  made  us  have  no- 
thing more  to  say  to  shark  on  Fridays. 

Indeed,  as  far  as  fish  went,  I concluded  we  had  settled  on 
the  worser  side  of  this  island.  But  we  had  taken  a fancy,  or 
whim  (whichever  I may  call  it),  in  favour  of  our  cave,  and 
determined  to  stick  to  it : as  men  have  stuck  to  things  less 
reasonable,  just  because  they  willed,  and  only  so.  Stewing 
our  cockles  and  cray-fish  in  their  own  shells,  and  dining  ex- 
cellently well,  we  then  loaded  the  Indians  with  some  of  each 
sort,  to  establish  a fish-pond,  or  preserve,  in  Shark  Cove;  and 
set  our  faces  homewards.  Having  but  ill  secured  the  claws 
of  the  cray-fish,  one  of  the  larger  of  them  getting  loose,  gave 
Samuel  a shrewd  nip  on  the  shoulder,  as  he  was  carrying  him. 
The  poor  fellow  started  off  like  a fury,  yelling  louder  than 
any  madman  with  the  pain : he  rushed  through  the  wood,  and 
the  rest  after  him ; shaking  himself  in  vain,  to  be  free  of  his 
tormentor,  then  rolled  on  the  ground,  and  roared  till  the 
echoes  rung  again.  Pounder  now  proved  his  title  to  the  name 
he  bore,  and  finished  the  enemy  by  hammering  at  him  with 
stones.  But  Samuel  was  under  my  hands  for  three  days  after, 
for  the  creature’s  bite  was  no  joking  matter,  believe  me. 

Saturday  was  a day  of  hard  work  at  our  cave,  with  nothing 
more  to  chronicle.  We  took  turn-and-turn  about,  and  made 
progress ; working  on  a regular  plan  : and  for  dinner  we  had 
a young  peccary  that  we  had  met  (to  his  grief)  in  the  woods 
the  day  before ; for  we  killed  him,  at  least,  on  Friday,  with- 
out remorse  or  scruple. 

chiefly  of  cockles,  some  of  which  were  as  much  as  two  men  could  move, 
and  contained  twenty  pounds  of  good  meat”.  Friday,  17th  August, 
1770. 

As  to  the  “ sea  era-fish’’,  or  lobsters,  Anson  (or  his  biographer)  as- 
sures us  that  on  the  island  of  Juan  Fernandez,  “ they  generally  weighed 
eight  or  nine  pounds  apiece,  were  of  a most  excellent  taste,  and  lay  in 
such  abundance  near  the  water’s  edge,  that  the  boat-hooks  often  struck 
into  them,  in  putting  the  boat  to  and  from  the  shore” — Anson’s  Voyage, 
Round  the  World , p.  177,  ed.  1748.  Ed. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ, 


161 


CHAPTER  XLII. 


A GERM  OF  THE  FUTURE. 


*EXT  day  was  Sunday,  thirtieth  of  August, 
1739,  being  the  first  Sunday  we  had  spent 
in  this  exile ; and  so  Don  Manuel  reminded 
us,  while  we  sat  to  breakfast  under  a spread- 
ing tree. 

u And  we  may  see,  friends”  (says  he),  “ how 
wise,  how  loving,  is  the  commandment  to 
keep  one  day  in  seven  as  a day  of  holy  rest : not  only  to  re- 
fresh our  wearied  bodies  from  toil,  but  to  raise  our  minds  to 
that  heaven  where  we  hope  to  be  one  day,  and  for  ever ; re- 
membering, we  are  on  earth  but  for  a short  while,  at  most”. 

u ’T  will  seem  a long  while,  though”,  says  Gill,  rather 
down-cast,  “ if  this  kind  of  life  goes  on,  upon  a desolate  island. 
I don’t  know,  but,  for  my  part,  I ’d  as  lief  be  in  a tight,  well- 
trimmed  craft,  with  a smart  crew,  and  sixty  guns,  or  so,  upon 
a cruise  after  some  of  them  Spanish  galleons,  under  favour, 
Sir”,  says  he,  touching  his  hat  to  Don  Manuel,  “ with  a sharp 
look  out  after  my  share  of  prize-money,  than” — 


11 


162 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


“ Than  in  heaven,  do  you  mean  ?”  asked  the  Don,  quietly. 

“Well”,  pursued  Harry,  shaking  his  head,  “I  suppose  I 
ought  to  say  no  such  a thing  ; but  1 can’t  help  feeling,  all  the 
same,  that  heaven,  d’  ye  see,  is  a place  I ’ve  no  acquaintance 
with ; whereas,  a sea-faring  life,  with  its  ways  of  going  on, 
in  ship’s  companies,  calms  and  breezes,  dog-watches  and  idle 
times,  and  ups  and  downs,  like,  is  what  I have  used,  and  so 
understand  ’em.” 

At  this,  the  priest  smiled  a little,  but  not  much,  seeming  as 
if  he  only  would  not  look  too  grave  at  what  Gill  said.  Ned 
Hilton  chimed  in  with  much  the  same : he  declared,  for  his 
part,  sometimes  he  had  as  soon  be  in  the  Old  Bailey,  or  any 
other  jail,  as  on  this  island. 

“ Nay,  mess-mate”,  cried  Harvey,  breaking  in  here,  “ ’t  is 
not  for  me,  of  all  men,  to  turn  preacher  : but  we  should  be 
unthankful  dogs,  not  to  compare  our  state  with  what  it  might 
have  been : had  we  been  clapped  under  hatches  by  old  Hop- 
kins, now,  how  had  that  suited  us,  I wonder  ?” 

“ Or  left  to  the  tender  mercies  of  the  first  mate  ?”  Prodgers 
added. 

“ And”,  said  the  priest,  “when  you  speak  of  prisons,  never 
forget,  there  are  prisons  more  dreadful,  more  hopeless,  than 
mortal  eye  hath  ever  seen.  You  tell  me,  dear  friends  (or 
some  of  you)  you  had  rather  be  on  earth  than  in  heaven  : 
what  think  ye,  then,  of*  hell  ?” 

With  that,  he  settled  the  question ; leastways,  no  one 
seemed  disposed  to  answer : and  now,  having  an  idle  day 
before  us,  we  began  to  straggle  about  under  the  trees  ; and 
the  men,  from  sheer  want  of  something  to  do,  were  for  throw- 
ing stones  at  a mark,  or  jumping  height  and  distance,  getting 
up  a wrestling  match,  or  anything  else,  to  kill  time.  I fore- 
saw, some  untoward  thing  might  come  of  this  idleness;  for  our 
quarrelsome  passions  were,  as  yet,  only  like  the  candle  that 
is  newly  blown  out,  smoking  still,  and  easy  to  be  kindled 
again.  I whispered  this  to  Don  Manuel,  who  whispered  back 
to  me,  he  had  his  own  fears  about  it,  and  something  must  be 
invented  to  occupy  them.  At  the  same  time,  he  asked  to 
borrow  my  clasp-knife,  to  show  them,  he  said,  a game  played 
by  the  country  folks  in  Spain,  with  four  sticks  laid  across. 

When  he  took  the  knife,  I saw  him  look  curiously  at  it, 
as  being  in  make  and  fashion  different  from  what  are  used  in 
Spain : suddenly,  he  cries  out  with  joy  and  wonder,  so  that 
we  were  startled,  in  a literal  sense,  and  came  crowding  round 
him.  He  remained,  without  noticing  us,  looking  earnestly  on 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


163 


the  knife,  which  he  had  not  opened ; he  spoke  a little  to  him- 
self, then  grew  silent,  as  if  he  pondered  something  deeply,  but 
never  takes  his  eyes  off  the  knife,  the  whole  time.  All  of  us 
were  amazed ; as  we  looked  at  him,  we  grew  afraid  : for  I be- 
lieve, the  rest  thought  as  I did,  he  might  be  losing  his  head. 
Perhaps,  said  I to  myself,  with  much  alarm  for  him,  this 
injustice  we  have  suffered  together,  that  roused  our  angry 
passions  for  a time,  has  gone  deeper  into  this  man’s  soul, 
being  of  a graver  and  a more  reflective  turn  ; it  hath  lain 
working  there  unseen,  till  it  comes  out  at  last  in  this  strange, 
unheard-of  way. 

Soon  he  recovered  himself ; shook  his  head  once  or  twice, 
then  fetched  a deep  sigh,  and  thinking  aloud,  he  says,  “ I fear 
me,  ’t  is  not  possible”.  With  that,  he  opens  the  clasp-knife 
carefully,  and  shakes  something  out  of  it  into  the  palm  of  his 
hand : then  reaching  his  hand  to  me,  showed  me  what  lay  on 
it,  and  said,  with  gravity,  and  a touch  of  sorrow  : “ Look,  here 
is  a grain  of  wheat”. 

I found  it  was  so,  on  examining  it : one  single  grain,  and  a 
good  sound  one,  that  had  stuck  in  the  knife,  between  the  hasp 
and  the  blade : and  now  I remembered  I had  thrust  a hand- 
ful of  it  into  my  pocket  from  the  corn-bin  on  board  ship,  like 
an  idler  as  I was  ; and  thought  I had  ate  it  all.  No  occasion 
had  made  me  open  my  knife  since  we  came  ashore ; for ’t  was 
too  good  a one  to  employ  on  the  shark  or  the  oysters : and  the 
bamboos  would  have  broken  it  outright.  So,  by  a strange 
providence,  indeed,  this  one  grain,  that  might  lay  the  founda- 
tion of  an  entire  harvest,  and  feed  our  whole  population, 
turned  up  at  this  odd  moment,  and  was  the  best  discovery  we 
had  made  hitherto,  by  far. 

But  I could  not  account,  neither,  for  the  sadness  which  Don 
Manuel  showed,  after  being  the  instrument  of  this  good  to 
us.  Indeed,  putting  all  together,  there  was  something  so  out 
of  the  way  in  his  conduct,  we  were  not  yet  assured  he  was 
right  in  his  mind.  He  had  before  told  us  what  made  him 
sorry  to  find  no  savages  on  our  arrival  whom  he  might  con- 
vert : but  we  quite  feared  to  ask  him  anything  about  the  pre- 
sent case,  dreading  to  confirm  our  dark  thoughts  of  his  under- 
standing being  gone.  For  by  this  time,  though  not  of  the 
same  religion,  we  had  learned  to  think  and  feel  about  him  as 
a father,  a guide,  and  a friend. 

He  soon  relieved  us,  however ; for,  fetching  another  sigh 
from  the  very  depth  of  his  bosom : “Friends”,  says  he,  with  a 
sad  smile,  shaking  his  head ; “ I have  been  dreaming  of  other 


164 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


times  and  employments  ; this  little  grain  of  wheat  has  made 
me  do  it”. 

We  looked  at  him,  and  looked  at  one  another ; still  the 
same  idea  running  in  our  minds.  Then  I ventured  to  say, 
watching  his  countenance  narrowly  ; 

“Dreaming  of  what,  Sir,  may  I ask  ?” 

“ Of  Mass”,  answered  he,  and  looked  up  again  to  heaven. 

“Yes”,  he  went  on,  after  a little,  “I  was  thinking  whether 
it  would  be  possible  to  celebrate  that  august  sacrifice  which 
we  have  in  the  Catholic  religion,  even  here,  on  this  desolate 
island.  Most  of  the  essential  things,  I have  felt  all  along, 
were  lacking  and  could  not  be  had ; when  suddenly  I come 
upon  one  of  them,  and  that  is  wheaten  corn.  Still,  where  are 
the  others  ?”  and  again  he  shook  his  head,  and  became  silent. 

“ And  what  are  they,  Sir  ?”  asked  Tom  Harvey. 

“ Several,  friend”,  answered  he,  “ but  chiefly,  the  fruit  of 
the  vine,  and  a consecrated  altar- stone.  Come,  come”,  he 
added  more  cheerfully  again,  like  himself,  “ if  we  cannot  have 
the  reality  of  that  great  blessing,  why  not  unite  ourselves  in 
spirit  with  those  who  have  ? Listen  to  what  I mean”. 


“ NIMBLE  THOUGHT  CAN  LEAP  BOTH  SEA  AND  LAND”. 

drew  his  cloak  round  him,  and  became  so 
earnest  in  voice  and  look,  there  was  no  need 
now  to  bid  us  attend.  “ This  very  day”, 
says  he,  “ many  millions  of  Christians,  spread 
over  the  face  of  the  globe,  of  every  clime, 
colour,  language,  race,  are  kneeling  before 
such  an  altar  as  I vainly  wish  for,  hearing 
Mass  said  by  one  of  God’s  anointed  priests.  They  come,  be- 
cause the  Church,  inviting  them  at  other  times,  commands 
them  to  come  on  Sundays  and  some  days  beside.  But  the 
more  earnest  among  them  come  also  because  they  love  that 
thrice-holy  Sacrifice,  and  feel  they  need  its  benefits,  and  have 
special  intentions  to  bring  to  it.  I say,  this  day ; but  I say 
not,  at  this  hour  alone  : for  all  day  long,  from  early  dawn  to 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


165 


night,  Mass  is  somewhere  being  said  : when ’t  is  early  in  one 
part  of  the  Church,  ’t  is  late  in  another  ; and  she  is  truly  that 
world-wide  empire  on  which  the  sun  never  sets.  That  voice 
of  prayer,  and  still  more,  that  act  of  Sacrifice,  girdles  the 
earth  round ; since  the  habitable  globe  itself  is  the  appointed 
dwelling  of  the  universal  family,  “ the  household  of  faith”  : 
and  the  dawn,  as  it  runs  swiftly  westward,  awakens  freshly 
that  consent  of  hearts,  that  union  of  intentions,  that  one, 
great,  Catholic  act  of  obedience  and  love.  So  is  fulfilled, 
Sunday  by  Sunday,  day  by  day,  a prophecy  of  Malachias,  the 
last  of  the  prophets,  in  which  holy  Mass  was  foretold,  as 
clearly  as  if  the  seer  had  beheld  the  priest  at  the  altar  with 
his  bcdily  eyes  ; yet  four  hundred  years  before  our  Lord  first 
celebrated  it  in  Jerusalem  the  night  He  was  betrayed.  I 
will  try  to  put  the  words  into  my  poor  English,  and  they 
would  run  somewhat  as  this : “ From  the  sunrise  to  the 
sunset,  My  name  is  great  among  the  nations : and  sacrifice  is 
going  on  in  every  place,  and  a pure  oblation  is  offered  in  My 
name  : for  great  is  My  name  among  the  nations,  saith  the 
Lord  of  hosts”.* 

“ Now,  dear  friends”,  added  he,  after  a while,  “ shall  we  not 
join  them  ? shall  we  refuse  to  unite  our  intentions  to  theirs  ?” 

“ How  can  we  join  them”,  asks  Prodgers,  objecting  still, 
but  not  like  the  Prodgers  of  a week  since ; rather  puzzled  than 
objecting,  after  all : “how  can  we  do  that,  Sir,  when  we  don’t 
see  ’em,  and  perchance  are  a thousand  miles  away  from  ’em  ?” 

“ We  can  join  them  in  intention ”,  says  the  priest,  “ though 
not  seeing  them”. 

“ Does  not  your  perspective”,  and  he  turned  to  me,  “ bring 
close  to  you,  as  it  were,  things  that  are  clean  out  of  sight  of 
your  unaided  eye  ? Or  the  captain’s  speaking  trumpet,  does  n’t 
it  make  the  sailors  in  the  main-top  hear  him  above  the  howl  of 
a tempest,  quite  beyond  his  natural  pitch  ? And  will  not  faith 
carry  our  souls  one  degree  further  than  the  perspective  carries 
the  sight,  or  the  trumpet  carries  the  sound  ? ‘We  walk  by 
faith’,  religion  teaches  us,  ‘ not  by  sight’.  If  a dear  friend  of 
mine  were  in  the  next  room  to  me,  and  a thin  partition  between 
us ; while  I heard  his  voice,  would  my  regard  for  him  be  cooled 
or  lessened  because  I did  not  actually  see  him  ? Or,  if  I ceased 
to  hear  his  voice,  yet  if  I knew  he  was  there,  should  I regard 
him  the  less  for  neither  seeing  nor  hearing  him  ? If  I heard 

* Malach .,  i.  11.  Don  Manuel  quotes  the  prophet  with  tolerable  accu- 
racy from  the  Vulgate,  and  even  renders  sacrificatury  perhaps,  more 
literally  than  the  Douay  version. — Ed. 


166 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


him  praying  in  his  room,  would  not  my  heart  unite  itself  with 
his  prayer  ? If  I could  not  hear  him  pray,  but  knew  he  prayed 
at  that  moment,  might  I not  join  my  prayers,  my  intention , 
with  his  ? If  I were  blind,  and  in  the  same  room  with  him, 
could  I not  pray  with  him  just  as  well  ? What  is  there  in  the 
mere  want  of  sight  to  hinder  all  this  ?” 

He  stopped,  looking  round  on  us : I am  sure,  he  read  in 
our  faces,  we  listened  ; yet  no  one  spoke. 

44  If,  now”,  he  went  on,  44  from  our  Cape-Look-Out”  (so  we 
had  named  the  promontory  over  our  cave),  “or  from  your 
volcano,  Senor  Owen,  we  saw  a vessel  in  distress,  though 
leagues  away  on  the  wild  sea ; would  not  you,  with  your  sea- 
men’s eyes,  know  at  a glance  what  was  doing,  and  what  was 
amiss  ; would  not  you,  with  your  hearts  of  men  used  to  dan- 
ger, have  a fellow-feeling  with  the  sufferings  of  the  crew  ? 
Say  that  the  vessel,  amid  all  that  peril,  sheers  out  of  sight ; 
you  would  not  cease  to  think  of  them,  nor  cease  (now  that 
you  have  learned  to  pray)  to  pray  with  them,  because  you  saw 
them  not?  Well,  then,  we  may  assist  at  Mass,  with  intelli- 
gence, and  offer  a 4 reasonable  service’,  in  some  vast  cathe- 
dral, too  far  from  the  priest  to  catch  an  accent  of  his  voice : 
and  we  may  join,  with  true  devotion,  in  the  intentions  of  a 
Mass  that  is  celebrated  a thousand  leagues  from  the  spot 
where  we  kneel”. 

As  he  paused  again,  there  was  something  so  new  to  me  in 
all  this,  I found  neither  words  to  answer,  nor  objections  to 
propose  to  him.  But  I said : 

44  Once,  Sir,  in  Buenos  Ayres,  as  I strolled  about  the  town 
on  some  holiday  or  other,  I turned  in  idly  to  see  the  cathe- 
dral, following  a whole  posse  of  people  who  were  flocking  in 
from  every  side.  Mass  was  going  on,  I believe ; at  least 
something  at  the  altar,  which  I could  not  see  nor  understand, 
being  such  a distance  off.  At  first,  I own  I thought  it  all 
mummery ; the  priests  (there  were  three  of  them,  and  some 
attendants),  none  of  them  took  any  notice  of  the  people ; and 
there  was  bowing  and  burning  incense,  with  movements  from 
side  to  side.  I never  saw  anything  half  so  strange  ; there  was 
nothing  of  common  prayer  about  it,  like  a minister  getting 
into  a desk  to  say,  4 Dearly  beloved,  the  Scripture  moveth  us’, 
or  whatever ’t  is  they  say.  But  I must  own,  as  it  went  on,  a 
something  came  over  me,  like  nothing  else  I ever  felt : 
whether  the  behaviour  of  the  people  (at  least  some  of  them,  for 
others  were  careless,  looking  about  them,  almost  as  we  did  in 
Wales),  whether  ’twas  their  devotion  impressed  me,  or  what, 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


167 


I cannot  say  : but  when  a little  bell  rang,  and  there  was  a 
hush  all  through  the  place,  so  that  you  might  hear  a pin  drop, 
and  the  most  careless  and  fidgetty  went  down  on  their  knees, 
bowing  their  heads,  and  beat  their  breasts, — at  that  moment, 
I knew  not  why,  nor  know  to  this  day — the  words  came  rush- 
ing into  my  mind  (and  where  they  came  from,  I know  not 
well),  “ Put  off  thy  shoes  from  thy  feet ; for  the  place  where- 
on thou  standest  is  holy  ground  ” : and  I found  myself  on  my 
knees  with  the  rest,  calling  on  God  earnestly,  as  they  did, 
mine  eyes  wet  with  tears.  Yet  there  was  no  moving  music, 
nor  fine  discourse,  at  the  moment : nothing  but  silence,  dead 
silence,  broken  by  a little  bell.  What  was  it  spoke  to  me 
thus,  I wonder  ?” 

“ ’T  was  the  presence  of  God”,  said  the  priest,  with  reve- 
rence : “ God  was  really  present  on  that  altar,  yet  you  saw 
Him  not ; as  truly  as  He  was,  even  then,  enthroned  in  the 
heaven  of  heavens  ; and  from  that  altar  He  addressed'you,  yet 
you  heard  not  His  voice.  He  wdio  created  you,  spoke  to  your 
understanding.  He  bade  you  reason  and  think,  a Christian 
assembly,  some  of  them  with  no  small  degree  of  education  and 
intelligence,  representing  a greater  multitude  then  alive  all 
over  the  globe,  and  more  again,  extended  through  seventeen 
hundred  years,  were  not  likely  to  have  met,  Sunday  by  Sunday, 
to  witness  a mere  act  of  mummery,  and  listen  to  a little  bell. 
He  bade  you  suppose,  there  must  be  something  beyond  all 
this;  something  you  could  not  see,  nor  that  multitude  either; 
but  which  they  knew  and  believed,  while  you  did  not.  More 
than  this:  He  who  redeemed  you  with  His  precious  blood 
appealed  to  you  from  that  altar;  He  whispered  to  your 
heart,  that  He  was  there  Himself.  And  you  responded ; not 
by  faith,  for  that  had  been  a miracle,  and  your  conversion 
sudden,  like  Saul’s  on  the  road  to  Damascus — but  by  an 
emotion  of  the  soul  that  prepared  the  way  for  faith,  and 
signified  its  first  dim  awakening.  And  when  was  all  this, 
Senor  O’wen  ?” 

“Nay,  sir”,  said  I,  “ ’t is  three  years  since,  at  the  least”. 

The  priest  lifted  up  his  eyes,  and  said  words  (in  Latin) 
which  I now  know  to  mean  : 

“ As  yet,  the  vision  is  far  off ; and  it  shall  appear  at  the 
end,  and  shall  not  lie  : if  it  make  any  delay,  wait  for  it : for 
it  shall  surely  come,  and  it  shall  not  be  slack”.* 

“ But  what”,  I pursued,  and  the  others  seemed  to  ask  the 
same  by  their  looks  and  manner,  “ what,  after  all,  is  Mass, 
that  I was  present  at  then  ?” 

* Habacuc , ii.  3.  Ed. 


168 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


“ I promise  you  all,  friends”,  says  he,  looking  round  on  us 
kindly,  “ to  answer  that  question  in  full,  the  next  time  you 
ask  it.  For  the  present  we  have  spoken  enough,  and  I fear 
to  weary  you.  ’T  is  now  almost  time  to  think  of  preparing  a 
dinner  for  our  oven  : then  we  can  leave  it  baking,  and  talk 
again  ; and  I propose  a quiet  walk,  after.  But,  as ’t  is  Sun- 
day, and  our  minds  are  turned  on  such  important  subjects  as 
we  spoke  of  a while  ago,  are  you  disposed  to  listen,  if  I can 
scrape  English  enough  together  to  give  you  a little  Sunday 
sermon  ?” 

The  men  all  voted  ’t  would  be  a treat  for  them  ; so  much 
had  they  began  to  respect  and  love  him  already,  that  every 
word  he  spoke  was  winged  the  deeper  into  their  hearts  by 
what  they  saw  his  conduct  to  be.  So,  after  some  quiet 
amusement,  followed  by  dinner,  he  took  us  aside  to  where 
there  was  a shady  bank  of  turf  to  sit  on,  and  a little  platform 
of  rock : and  getting  on  it,  he  said  a few  prayers  with  us, 
wherein  we  joined  heartily  ; then  delivered  himself  much  as 
follows : 


CHAPTER  XLIV. 
don  manuel’s  sermon. 

KNOW  not”,  he  began,  “ dear  friends  and 
brothers,  how  the  words  of  my  text  run  in 
any  English  version ; so  I must  give  them  to 
you  from  our  Latin  Bible : and  they  are 
thus  : — Qua  videntu r,  temporalia  sunt : qua 
autem  non  videntur , ceterna  sunt*  That  means, 
plainly,  that  all  we  now  see  round  us,  above 

* [“  The  things  which  are  seen,  are  temporal:  but  the  things  which 
are  not  seen,  are  eternal” — II.  Co?-.,  iv.  18. — Ed.] 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


169 


us,  below  us,  all  our  eyes  rest  on,  near  or  far  off,  will  only 
last  for  a time  : these  things  have  their  day,  though  it  be  a 
long  one.  Then  they  will  have  their  end ; they  will  pass 
away.  But  there  are  other  things,  that  we  do  not  see  yet : 
we  shall  see  them  soon ; we  shall  find  ourselves  amidst 
them  ; and  they  will  never  pass  away ; never ! they  have  no 
day,  but  the  endless  day  of  eternity.  So,  ‘ the  things  that 
are  seen,  are  for  a time  : but  those  which  are  not  seen,  are  for 
ever’. 

“Yes”,  he  went  on,  “time  is  to-day,  and  the  things  of 
time ; the  trials,  and  the  griefs,  the  temptations,  duties,  op- 
portunities, and  graces,  of  time.  They  are  all  with  us  to-day. 
To-morrow  comes  eternity,  and  the  things  of  eternity ; the  re- 
wards, aye,  or  the  punishments  of  eternity.  Time  ! Eternity  ! 
the  Now,  and  the  Then ! the  passing,  the  enduring ! the 
shadow,  the  substance ! the  labour,  the  reward ! or  the  sin, 
and  the  punishment ! 

“ There  are  only  three  points,  dear  brothers,  I would  have 
you  fix  your  thoughts  on  ; and  I will  be  as  short  upon  them 
as  I can.  Listen  ; they  are  these  : 

“We  are  placed  in  time,  to  prepare  for  eternity : 

“ We  are  only  placed  in  time  once,  once  for  all : 

“ Our  eternity  depends  on  our  use  of  time. 

“First:  We  are  placed  here,  to  gain  a happy  eternity  by 
our  conduct  here.  Here,  I mean  in  life ; though  I might  also 
say,  here  in  this  island : for  why,  think  you,  friends,  do  we  find 
ourselves  here  in  solitude  and  quiet,  removed  from  many  dan- 
gerous temptations,  with  abundant  leisure  to  cultivate  our 
souls?  Why,  but  because  our  loving  Father,  who  knows  our 
weakness,  hath  placed  us  here,  that  He  may  the  sooner  and 
the  surer  take  us  to  Himself?  But,  whether  here  or  else- 
where, we,  and  all  other  men,  even  our  poor  savage  friends 
that  have  been  sent  to  us,  are  all  in  life,  that  we  may  thereby 
inherit  life  eternal.  How,  do  you  ask?  By  obeying  the 
commands  of  God,  keeping  from  sin,  corresponding  with 
grace,  increasing  it,  and  so  growing  like  to  Himself.  And 
by  Avhat  power?  Surely,  by  no  strength  of  our  own,  but 
by  His  grace.  And  what  grace?  Ah!  that  is  a subject  for 
another  time ; one  on  which  I should  have  much  to  say,  and 
you  have  something  still  to  learn. 

“ Well,  then,  if  life  is  the  time  given  us  to  prepare  for  eter- 
nity, is  it  an  important  time  ? Nay  ; who  shall  tell  how  im- 
portant, how  valuable  ? Ask  a man  of  covetous  soul,  whose 
affections  are  centred  on  scraping  money  together,  what  he 


170 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


would  do,  if  one  hour,  just  one  hour,  were  given  him  to  spend 
in  a rich  gold  mine.  If  he  is  honest  in  his  answer,  he  will 
tell  you  plainly,  he  would  spend  that  hour  with  diligence, 
anxiously,  to  the  very  last  minute,  husbanding  every  scrap 
of  time,  to  get  as  much  gold  out  of  the  mine  as  he  could. 
He  would  work  while  his  time  lasted ; he  would  do  the 
utmost  he  was  able ; and  he  would  be  sorry  when  the  last 
moment  was  come. 

“ But  all  this  very  feebly  sets  forth  the  value  of  our  time ; 
very,  very  feebly  indeed.  No  gold  or  precious  metals,  nor 
anything  that  bears  the  highest  price  on  earth,  can  be  weighed 
in  the  same  balance  with  time,  that  can  gain  for  us  a brighter 
crown,  a nearer  place  to  God’s  throne,  and  so  a fuller  measure 
of  bliss,  for  ever  and  ever. 

“ No,  I assert  it,  my  friends,  you  must  be  able  to  measure 
the  distance  from  earth  to  heaven,  you  must  weigh  that  which 
comes  to  an  end  against  what  endures  for  ever,  i the  things 
that  are  seen,  and  temporal’,  against  ‘ the  things  that  are  not 
seen,  and  eternal’,  before  you  can  prize  at  its  true  worth,  any 
hour  of  any  day  of  that  time  in  which  we  are  placed,  to  pre- 
pare for  eternity. 

Eternity  ! but  eternity  has  no  measure,  except  only  itself. 
Eternity  is  not  a number  of  hundreds  of  thousands  of  years, 
nor  any  possible  number  of  them  multiplied  into  itself ; nor 
the  ages  of  millions  of  worlds  multiplied  into  themselves.  In 
this  way  of  calculation,  you  may  get  to  conceive  a sum  so 
vast,  that  your  mind  cannot  really  grasp  it;  no,  not  for  a 
moment.  But  that  is  not  eternity.  That  is  time,  though  a 
vast  sum  of  time ; only  time,  after  all.  If  an  insect  crept 
one  inch  in  fifty  thousand  years,  till  it  travelled  from  here  to 
the  sun ; that  is  not  eternity ; ’t  is  only  time.  Eternity  is  like 
nothing  but  only  itself.  For  ever ! that  has  nothing  to  do 
with  time.  Yes : but  time  has  one  thing  to  do  with  it;  ’t  is 
given  us  to  prepare  for  it. 

“Then,  secondly : all  this  would  be  true,  had  we  several  lives 
to  live,  one  after  another ; could  we  come  back  again  from 
death,  to  repair  the  error  of  a mis-spent  life.  Even  then,  how 
valuable  would  each  life  be,  as  it  was  given  in  turn ! For  it 
would  be  an  opportunity  of  making  up  lost  time  and  lost  ground, 
and  saving  the  soul  in  one  life,  that  had  not  been  saved  in  a 
former.  But  no  such  opportunity  is  given.  Once,  and  once 
only,  and  once  for  all,  we  are  placed  in  time.  Once,  only 
once,  once  for  all,  we  can  prepare  for  eternity.  Once,  only 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


171 


once,  once  for  all,  I say  again,  we  are  able  to  save  our  souls. 
When  this  one  life  is  once  over,  no  second  time  of  trial,  no 
day  of  grace,  comes  after.  As  we  die,  sb  wp  are  judged  ; when 
we  die,  then  we  are  judged.  If  we  die  in  grace,  in  the  favour 
of  God,  we  are  safe,  and  safe  for  ever:  if  we  die  out  of  His 
grace,  we  are  lost,  and  lost  for  ever.  In  the  one  case,  we  are 
safe,  without  fear  of  being  lost ; in  the  other  we  are  lost,  with- 
out hope  of  being  saved.  The  sacred  Scriptures  express  this 
truth  in  a striking  way  : ‘ If  the  tree  fall  to  the  south , or  to  the 
north , in  ivhat  place  soever  it  shall  fall , there  shall  it  be’.* 

u Thus,  dear  brothers,  had  we  been  murdered  on  board  ship, 
we  had  been  taken  away  by  the  hand  of  death  : rather,  con- 
ducted by  the  hands  of  our  guardian  angels,  placed  at  once 
before  our  Judge.  No  more  time  for  us  then  : none  of  those 
prayers,  good  thoughts,  lessons  of  God’s  love  and  providence, 
acts  of  repentance,  we  have  experienced  since.  We  should 
then  have  known  the  worth  of  our  souls,  and  of  the  time  we 
had  to  save  them  in  ; but  we  might  have  known  all  this  too 
late.  Had  we  died  then,  what  state  were  our  souls  in  ? how 
far  prepared  to  meet  our  God,  and  be  judged  ? But  why  do 
I say  then  only  ? No  ; look  back  over  your  whole  lives  ; view 
them  at  a glance,  as  you  will  view  them  when  the  last  mo- 
ment is  indeed  come.  At  any  moment  of  any  day,  you  might 
have  died  a sudden  death,  as  others  have  died  before  you,  as 
others  will  after  you.  That  very  moment  you  would  have 
been  judged  ; sentenced  for  eternity  : for  there  is  a particular 
judgment  awaiting  each  man  at  his  death,  as  well  as  a general 
judgment  for  all  mankind  together.  Once  sentenced,  there  is 
no  reversing,  no  mitigating,  no  recommendation  to  mercy,  no 
appeal  to  another  court,  or  to  a fresh  trial.  As  we  die,  so  we 
remain  ; for  ever ! for  ever  and  ever ! for  evermore,  without 
end!  We  are  placed  in  time  once  ; and  once  for  all.  Are 
these  things  true,  my  dear  brothers  ? Am  I making  them  out 
too  strong,  or  drawing  from  fancy  ? Nay,  you  know  1 am  not. 
If  they  are  true,  what  conclusion  must  we  come  to  from  them  ? 
How  ought  they  to  affect  us  ? What  rules  shall  we  lay  down 
for  ourselves  because  they  are  true  ? 

“ In  the  third  place,  our  eternity  depends  on  our  use  of 
time ; that  is,  we  have  the  power  (by  divine  grace)  to  deter- 
mine whether  the  eternal  state  we  are  hastening  into,  shall 
be  happy  or  miserable  ; an  eternity  of  pleasure,  or  an  eternity 
of  pain.  But  what  happiness  and  pleasure  ? Or  what  misery 
* Eccl xi.  3.  Ed. 


172 


TIIE  ADVENTURES  OF 


and  pain  ? The  greatest,  either  way,  we  can  imagine  or  con- 
ceive. Is  that  all  ? No  ! far  greater  than  we  can  imagine  ; 
far  greater  than  we  can  conceive : such  as  4 eye  hath  not 
seen,  nor  ear  heard,  nor  hath  it  entered  into  the  heart  of  man 
to  conceive’.  And  the  choice  lies  with  us  : with  us!  we  are 
bidden  to  choose ; we  cannot  help  choosing ; we  choose  every 
day,  every  hour  we  live : for  every  day,  every  hour,  we  take 
a step  one  way  or  the  other.  We  step  towards  heaven,  or  we 
step  towards  hell;  one  degree  nearer  to  one  or  the  other,  every 
action  we  perform,  every  word  we  say,  every  thought  we  de- 
liberately think.  O my  brothers ! ’t  is  an  awful  thing  to 
step  towards  hell ; to  take  one  step,  by  one  foot-breadth,  by 
one  hair -breadth,  away  from  God,  towards  the  edge  of  the 
pit ! Can  you  dare  to  do  it  ? 

44  Even  if  you  were  sure  how  many  steps,  exactly,  you  could 
take  that  way,  without  falling  down  the  sides  of  the  pit ; yet 
what  rebellion,  what  ingratitude,  to  take  one  step,  one  little 
step ! But  you  cannot  measure  this  ; you  cannot  tell  which 
step  will  be  the  last,  the  irrevocable  one  ; nor  how  many  steps 
off  it  is  from  you  now,  nor  how  sudden  the  slip  may  be.  4 He 
that  despiseth  little  things,  shall  fall  by  little  and  little’.  He 
who  places  himself,  by  his  own  act  and  deed,  on  the  down- 
ward slope  that  leads  to  the  pit  of  hell,  has  only  himself  to 
thank,  if  he  slip  on  a sudden,  and  never  regain  his  footing. 

44  But  there  is  not  only  a hell  to  be  avoided ; there  is  a heaven 
to  be  gained ! Hell ! Heaven ! Eternity  in  hell ! Or  eternity 
in  heaven  ! 0 my  brothers ! ’t  would  be  impossible  for  any 

soul  to  sin  against  God,  that  had  once  looked  down  into  hell, 
once  looked  up  into  heaven.  Souls  fall  into  hell,  and  lose 
heaven,  because  they  know  nothing  really  of  hell  or  of  hea- 
ven ; nothing  of  eternity.  Strictly  speaking,  they  do  not  dis- 
believe those  things ; they  only  live  as  if  they  had  never  heard 
of  them.  They  live  on,  day  by  day,  as  if  time  were  all,  eter- 
nity nothing : then  they  come  to  die,  some  one  day  or  other, 
and  find  (find  too  late !)  time  was  nothing,  eternity  all ! 

44  Ah,  bring  me  back,  if  you  can,  one  soul  that  has  fallen 
down  into  the  pit  of  hell ; the  soul  that  died  yesterday  ; the 
bad  Catholic  who  died  in  Spain,  the  poor  dark  misbeliever 
who  died  in  England ! Bring  back  the  soul  that  was  con- 
demned yesterday  to  an  eternity  of  torment — to  everlasting 
fire  ! condemned  by  a God,  all-merciful,  all-loving,  but  all- 
just,  to  that  lake  burning  with  sulphur,  to  that  prison-house 
of  pain,  to  that  gnawing  worm,  to  those  chains  of  darkness, 
to  that  company  of  devils,  to  their  merciless  torments  and 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


173 


insults ; above  all,  to  that  banishment  from  God,  that  shame 
and  everlasting  reproach,  that  despair,  that  self-accusation, 
that  hatred  of  God,  of  goodness,  of  self,  of  all ! Bring  back 
that  soul,  that  we  may  question  it : ask  it  what  it  thinks  now 
of  time,  of  eternity.  What  would  it  give  now — now,  when 
too  late,  too  late  for  ever — how  much  would  it  give,  at  what 
price  would  it  redeem,  one  little  month,  one  week,  one  day, 
one  hour,  only  to  repent  ? What  for  a chance,  what  for  a 
loop-hole,  aye,  but  one  ray  of  faintest  hope  ? How  would  it 
despise  wealth,  honour,  pleasure ! how  would  it  make  nothing 
of  pains,  mortifications,  penances  ! Anything,  anything  ! but 
to  set  one  foot  out  of  hell ! A.11  the  wealth  of  the  Indies,  all 

the  crowns  and  diadems  of  earth,  all  the  priceless  gems, 
mountains  of  gold  heaped  one  on  the  other,  any  price  you 
may  name  or  think  of,  would  be  absolute  nothing,  for  one 
little  drop  of  water  to  cool  that  hell-parched  tongue,  that  fire- 
pierced  tongue  ! — that  God-blaspheming  tongue  ! 

“ Or,  could  I call  down  but  one  of  those  happy  souls  who 
have  entered  into  the  eternal  bliss,  who  bask  already  in  the 
countenance  of  God  : the  very  least,  the  lowest,  in  the  kingdom 
of  heaven ; that  one  just  withinside  the  golden  gate ! Ask 
that  soul  now,  what  is  the  value  it  places  on  time  past  ? Does 
it  regret  one  good  action,  done  with  denial  of  its  own  will, 
done  with  difficulty,  toil,  and  pain  ? is  it  sorry  for  time  spent 
in  fervent  prayers?  for  having  overcome  temptations,  and 
been  watchful  over  itself,  and  against  the  demons,  its  cruel 
foes  ? Ah,  no : it  now  blesses  Almighty  God  continually  for 
having  placed  it  amid  so  many  opportunities  to  gain  merit  for 
eternity.  Each  of  those  pains  endured,  those  temptations 
overcome,  is  now  a jewel  in  its  bright  unfading  crown. 

“But,  ask  it  again  : What  would  you  do,  were  you  decreed 
to  return  for  awhile  to  earth  ? if  you  still  had  five,  ten, 
twenty  years  to  spend  in  this  state  of  trial  ? Oh  ! I seem  to 
hear  the  answer  quite  plain.  “ If  I were  sent  back  to  earth”, 
says  that  blessed  soul ; “ if  I were  still  on  my  trial,  and  could 
still  gain  merit,  I would  labour,  without  pause,  to  reap-in  the 
largest  harvest,  to  go  before  my  God  at  the  end  of  my  time 
with  my  hands  fullest.  I would  reckon  myself  to  have  done 
nothing,  while  I could  yet  do  more.  Even  if  I knew  my  sal- 
vation secure,  I would  labour,  I would  delight  in  it,  to  let  each 
moment  and  each  act  have  its  merit.  I would  be  as  the  bee 
in  the  garden  when ’t  was  near  sunset,  laborious  on  one  thing 
alone,  to  be  able  to  fly  home,  laden  with  honey  back  to  the 


174 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


44  And  you,  filii  hominum , O sons  of  men,  whose  salvation  is 
not  secure,  and  who  know  it : usquequo  gravi  corde  ? how  long 
mean  you  to  be  so  dull,  so  heavy  and  slow,  so  indolent,  so 
heedless,  in  the  great  affair  of  salvation?  Ut  quid  diligitis 
vanitatem  ? Why  are  ye  so  in  love  with  all  that  is  empty  and 
unsatisfying,  while  you  miss  the  true,  the  solid  good?  Et 
quceritis  mendacium ? And  wherefore  make  you  as  though  ye 
sought  to  persuade  yourselves  to  a falsehood  ? 

“For  time,  my  friends,  is  a mere  show  and  falsehood,  when 
it  comes  under  any  aspect  but  as  a preparation,  a training, 
for  eternity.  4 What  is  your  life  ?*  asks  the  holy  Apostle. 
4 It  is  a vapour  which  appeareth  for  a little  while,  and  after- 
wards shall  vanish  away’.  What  is  your  life  ? asks  again  St. 
Bernard  : 4 Momentum , unde  pendet  ceternitas\  A moment,  he 
answers  ; but  a moment  on  which  eternity  depends.  Yes,  I say 
again  ; time,  eternity ! time  is  nothing  : eternity  is  all.  Quod 
ceternum  non  est , nihil  est.  That  which  is  not  eternal,  and  has 
no  influence  on  our  eternity,  is  nothing.  But  our  eternity 
depends  on  our  use  of  this  moment  of  time.  Depends!  do  we 
understand  that  ? According  to  our  use  of  minutes,  which 
make  up  days,  which  make  up  years,  you  and  I will  be  in 
heaven  or  in  hell,  when  days  and  years  and  ages  are  no  more  ; 
when  there  is  nothing  but  one  long,  changeless  eternity, 
without  division  of  time,  or  end,  or  death,  or  nothingness  ; 
only  eternity,  and  yet  again  eternity,  and  eternity,  and  eter- 
nity ; in  the  fulness  of  bliss  or  the  extremity  of  torture  and 
despair,  as  long  as  truth  is  truth,  and  goodness  is  goodness, 
and  evil  is  evil,  and  the  soul  is  the  soul,  and  God  is  God ! 

44  Usquequo  gravi  corde ? Let  us  awake,  dear  brothers ; let 
us  begin  really  to  use  our  knowledge  of  these  great  and  tre- 
mendous truths;  let  us  live,  and  not  dream  life  away.  We 
are  here  on  a desolate  island ; but  we  have  duties  even  here  : 
duties  to  God,  to  one  another,  and  to  ourselves.  Let  us 
work,  watch,  pray,  repent,  cultivate  all  the  virtues  within 
our  reach,  and  ask  for  more  ! Live  as  those  who  may  die  any 
moment ; who  must  die  some  moment  ; who  know  not  when. 
Live  as  they  who  are  daily  preparing  to  be  judged  for  the 
whole  of  their  time.  Then  I promise  you  (all  other  things 
supposed,  of  which  I will  speak  hereafter),  I promise  in  the 
name  of  my  Master,  a holy  life  and  a happy  one,  a blessed 
death,  a favourable  judgment,  and  heavenly  joys  for  ever”. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


175 


CHAPTER  X L V. 


THE  ARCHERY  CLUB. 

HAVE  thus  (within  a little)  concluded  the 
history  of  our  first  week  on  the  island  ; and, 
because ’t  were  tedious  to  my  readers  more 
than  to  myself,  to  go  through  with  like  de- 
tails, T shall  be  content  with  a summary  of 
what  befell  us  thenceforward.  We  began  to 
portion  out  our  time  like  a company  of  phi- 
losophers, or  statesmen  ; so  much  to  work,  so  much  to  amuse- 
ment, so  much,  again,  to  ranging  the  island,  which  partook  of 
both  : ’t  was  work  in  the  way  of  providing  us  food,  and 
brought  us  acquainted  with  every  lurking  nook  of  our  do- 
main ; but  ’t  was  recreation,  too,  for  the  variety  of  objects 
and  places  we  came  across,  with  a number  of  little  adven- 
tures, and  dangers  now  and  then,  on  a small  scale. 

A serious  thought,  however,  began  to  engage  us  ; I mean, 
the  wasting  of  our  powder  and  shot,  of  which  we  had  no 
more  than  perhaps  twenty  rounds  left  in  all.  ’T  was  a dismal 
prospect  for  us,  who  had  only  been  a week  on  the  island  : and 
what  to  do  when  that  small  stock  was  spent,  or  how  to  hinder 
the  spending  of  it,  I knew  not ; unless  we  found  means  to 
snare  the  wild  creatures  for  our  food,  or  betook  ourselves 
to  bows  and  arrows,  in  which  we  had  no  skill. 

In  this,  another  consideration  perplexed  me  ; for  what,  said 
I to  myself,  if  you  teach,  the  Indians  the  use  of  this  archery  ? 
or,  if  they  know  such  weapons  already  (as ’t  is  likely),  what  if 
you  put  them  into  their  hands  ? how  can  you  be  secure  they 
will  not  turn  them  against  yourselves  ? Now  came  back  the 
old  fears  of  these  savages  escaping  into  the  woods,  to  run  wild 
there,  and  lie  in  ambush  for  us,  to  harass  us,  and  so  hunt  us 
down  at  last. 

When  I stated  these  thoughts  to  my  companions,  ’t  was 
agreed  not  to  allow  the  Indians  any  use  of  bows  or  arrows  for 
the  time  ; and  to  keep  a close  watch  on  them,  to  hinder  their 
contriving  that  or  any  other  weapon  of  offence.  Not,  I must 
say,  that  we  had  seen  in  them  so  much  as  a sign  of  indepen- 
dence or  conspiracy,  since  they  were  thrown  among  us  ; but 


176 


TIIE  ADVENTURES  OF 


he  that  is  on  the  safe  side  is  secure,  as  Prodgers  remarked, 
when  we  debated  on  it. 

However,  not  to  deprive  them  of  all  means  to  knock  over 
some  food  for  our  common  use,  I made  a trial  of  what  they 
could  do  with  mere  stone -throwing  : and  calling  them  to  me 
on  the  shore,  at  a place  where  the  reef  was  parted  by  an  inlet, 
and  so  the  breach  of  the  sea  had  freer  access  to  wear  the  peb- 
bles smooth,  I set  up  a bread-fruit  for  them  by  way  of  mark, 
on  the  point  of  a rock,  perhaps  seventy  yards  from  where 
they  stood  : telling  them  by  signs  and  words  alike  (for  they 
now  understood  us  better),  I desired  to  see  who  could  knock 
it  over  first.  To  it  they  went,  with  a good  will ; and  proved 
themselves  skilful  marksmen,  too,  considering  the  distance. 
Only,  the  old  man  was  least  expert  of  the  three,  his  hand  not 
being  so  steady  nor  vigorous,  nor  his  eye  as  true,  as  I warrant  it 
had  been  in  his  best  days.  So  Pounder  and  Samuel  had  the 
match  between  them  : after  making  the  rock  ring  again  with 
their  pebbles,  so  close  to  the  fruit,  ’t  was  a wonder  the  stone 
did  not  hit  it  outright,  going  within  such  a hair’s  breadth ; at 
last,  I say,  on  the  sixth  shot,  John  Pounder  voted  with  a 
plumper,  and  sent  the  bread-fruit  skimming  into  the  water 
beyond. 

This  was  enough  for  me,  and  the  rest  who  looked  on  ; for 
we  found  the  savages  would  be  a full  match  for  us  at  that 
work,  should  they  grow  ill-disposed  : and ’t  would  be  little 
odds  to  a dying  man  to  be  sent  out  of  the  world  by  an  arrow, 
or  a dart,  or  by  the  blow  of  a stone.  So  we  bade  them  de- 
sist, somewhat  sternly,  and  this  trial  made  us  a little  jealous 
of  them  again. 

For  ourselves,  we  set  about  to  purvey  us  some  archery 
weapons ; first,  the  bamboo  canes  we  had  pulled  out  of  the 
marsh  proved  quite  serviceable  for  bows,  being  more  springy 
than  English  yew,  and  as  much  to  the  purpose  as  the  hiccory 
wood  of  the  American  forests,  which  the  natives  make  use  of 
for  their  bows.  As  regards  bow-strings,  too,  we  found  means 
to  dress  some  sinews  we  had  met  in  cutting  up  our  shark ; 
which  proved  tough  and  springy  to  a degree,  sending  off  the 
arrow  with  a twang  like  the  sound  of  a Welsh  harp  on  my 
ear.  Only,  our  stock  of  arrows  was  scanty ; we  found  no- 
thing fitter  for  the  purpose  than  the  younger  and  slenderer  of 
the  bamboos  we  had  brought  home  ; and  out  of  the  whole 
bundle  we  contrived  no  more  than  seven  arrows  in  all,  cut- 
ting them  to  the  proper  lengths : measuring  that  from  the 
clenched  fist  of  our  left  hand,  stretched  at  full  length,  to  the 
tip  of  our  right  ear. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


177 


It  cost  us  some  labour  to  smooth  these  canes  for  our  arrow- 
making  : I mean,  to  take  off  the  knots  they  were  encumbered 
with,  of  which  each  several  arrow  had  three  or  four  at  the 
least : but  in  this  work  the  Indians  were  our  journeymen, 
with  help  of  the  shark’s  teeth  and  our  knives ; and  in  two 
or  three  hours  we  managed  to  have  them  as  smooth  as  a 
tobacco-pipe,  or  a gun-barrel  turned  out  complete  by  a Brom- 
wicham  gun-smith. 

Thus,  we  formed  ourselves  into  an  archery  club  ; I mean, 
Gill,  Harvey,  myself,  and  Ned  Hilton,  who  were  like  to  be 
most  expert  at  the  practice ; as  for  Prodgers,  he  volunteered,  to 
our  surprise,  to  stand  near  the  butt  (which  was  the  stump  of 
a tree)  and  fling  back  our  arrows  that  missed  the  mark : also 
to  keep  our  score.  Nor  did  I see  in  anything  more  than  in 
this,  the  change  that  had  come  over  our  old  comrade  : for  he 
that  a while  ago  had  struggled  for  the  gun  with  so  obstinate 
a temper  as  had  like  to  end  in  manslaughter,  now  stood  in 
the  best  of  humour  while  we  shot,  and  gave  us  back  our 
arrows  without  a thought  of  rivalry  or  discontent. 

We  were  careful,  though,  to  send  the  Indians  out  of  the  way 
during  our  first  practisings,  lest  they  might  see  (and  in  this ’t 
was  easy)  we  were  inferior  to  them  in  anything.  Don  Manuel 
engaged  to  lead  them  back  the  first  day  to  the  bamboo-marsh, 
to  fetch  us  a fresh  supply  of  canes.  Telling  Samuel  of  this,  he 
made  him  guide  of  the  party,  and  they  went  off  at  a pace. 
They  were  away  about  three  hours  in  all ; when  they  came 
to  us  again,  ’t  was  with  a good  load  of  bamboos,  mostly  of 
the  smaller  sort:  but  three  or  four,  too,  of  the  oldest  and 
biggest  they  could  meet  with ; and  these  were  Don  Manuel’s 
choice,  he  told  us,  to  make  trial  of  a plan  that  came  into  his 
head  while  they  were  cutting  them. 

For  he  wanted  to  see  if  he  could  make  these  large  hollow 

12 


178 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


canes  any  how  serve  as  a conduit  to  convey  to  our  cave  some 
of  the  fresh  water  from  River-head,  or  elsewhere.  This  was 
a first  necessity,  indeed ; the  water  near  our  castle  (so  we 
began  to  call  that  hole  in  the  rock)  being  saltish  in  taste,  and 
unwholesome,  which  was  the  chief  drawback,  we  began  to  see, 
in  our  choice  of  the  place.  We  now  applied  ourselves  to  this 
work ; we  lit  a strong  fire,  and  thrust  the  longest  piece  of  gun- 
barrel  into  it,  haying  fitted  a smaller  bamboo  to  this,  by  way 
of  a long  handle.  When ’t  was  red  hot,  drawing  it  forth,  we 
thrust  it  into  the  end  of  the  large  cane,  till  we  burnt  quite 
through  the  knot  that'  stopped  the  passage  : at  least,  part 
burning  and  part  boring,  we  got  through  it  somehow.  Then 
we  did  the  same  again  and  again  (there  being  no  fewer  than 
fourteen  knots  within  a length  of  three  yards  or  so)  till,  burn- 
ing through  them,  now  at  this  end,  now  at  the  other,  at  last 
the  hot  barrel  bored  the  length  of  pipe  clear  through. 

But  then,  we  reckoned  how  much  time  it  might  take,  and 
how  many  bamboos  employ,  to  lay  a conduit  from  point  to 
point ; that  is,  from  the  fountain  to  our  cave,  which  we  now 
found  to  be  farther  off  than  it  seemed  before.  This,  with 
cutting  the  bamboos,  and  dragging  them  to  the  spot,  we 
reckoned  would  be  a work  of  months,  and  hard  work  too. 
To  save  ourselves  needless  labour,  we  mad£  some  expeditions 
into  the  woods  on  every  side,  in  parties  of  two  or  three  at  a 
time,  and  all  our  aim  was  to  search  for  water.  But  finding 
none  to  compare  to  the  spring  at  River-head,  and  being  de- 
termined, on  the  other  hand,  not  to  abandon  our  castle,  we 
e’en  made  up  our  minds  perforce  to  go  on  with  the  conduit : 
and  appointed  gangs,  or  working  parties,  to  carry  on  that 
trade,  together  with  the  mason’s  work  we  had  in  hand. 

For  it  is  time  I should  now  inform  the  reader  how  we  dis- 
tributed ourselves  to  these  employments.  It  must  be  noted 
that  we  had  three  great  trades  to  carry  on  ; house-building, 
or  mining ; making  our  conduit ; and  purveying  food  : and 
nine  workmen  to  employ  in  them.  I say,  nine  workmen,  for 
the  priest  would  not  hold  himself  released  from  the  burden, 
neither;  and  when  I told  him  we  were  well  content  if  he 
would  but  pray  for  us,  or  take  such  light  employments  as 
might  turn  up,  he  reminded  me,  Saint  Paul  was  a tent- 
maker,  and  Saint  Peter  and  the  other  apostles,  fishermen  : 
“ as  though”,  says  he,  u to  teach  us,  ’t  is  not  alone  eyes  and 
brain,  heart  and  tongue,  but  hands  and  feet,  thews  and 
sinews,  are  to  be  used  in  the  service  of  our  Master”. 

Thus  we  divided  our  working  gangs  : — Harry  Gill  and  I 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


179 


were  charged  to  provide  our  daily  meal  from  the  woods,  turn 
and  turn  about ; we  charged  ourselves,  too,  above  all  things, 
to  be  very  sparing  of  the  ammunition,  and  never  waste  a shot. 
But  in  no  long  time,  as  I have  just  said,  we  learned  to  spare 
our  guns  altogether,  and  brought  down  everything  by  archery. 
Prodgers  and  old  Mark  were  set  to  bore  the  bamboos  with  a 
hot  gun-barrel,  and  keep  up  the  fire  ; Pounder  had  to  make 
some  mason’s  tools  out  of  shark’s  teeth,  and  flints  hammered 
to  an  edge  (he  fitted  them  into  handles  of  a hard  wood,  which 
we  called  iron- wood,  and  bound  them  in  tight  with  the  shark’s 
sinews) ; Samuel,  w'ho  was  supposed  to  be  more  or  less  under 
the  eye  of  the  priest,  was  always  going  back  and  forward  to 
the  marsh  to  fetch  bamboos ; which  he  did  very  actively,  and 
by  little  and  little  brought  in  a middling-sized  heap.  The 
other  men,  Tom  Harvey  and  Hilton  (wfith  Gill  or  myself, 
whichever  had  not  the  shooting  turn  that  day),  worked  steadily 
at  our  cave,  of  which  more  hereafter. 

Among  these  employments  I know  not  under  what  head  to 
class  our  archery  practice,  which  we  persevered  in  daily, 
always  having  the  Indians  at  a distance,  employed  on  some 
hand-labour,  with  Prodgers  or  Don  Manuel  to  watch  them. 
But  as  a prince  has  his  standing  army  under  continual  discip- 
line, with  great  fi'eld  days,  and  skilful  manceuvering,  no  less 
than  his  finance  or  victualling  department,  and  board  of  works, 
so  we,  in  our  small  kingdom,  reckoned  our  archery  among 
such  military  operations  as  are  always,  I hope,  the  profession 
of  a gentleman. 


0<0O00O00O<50O00O00O00O00O00<  >ooOooOoo<»ooOooOo>oo< 


>0  0O0  o<>o  0O0  0<>0  O<>o  o<  >0  o<  >0  0O0  o<  >o  o<>o  o<  o<  >0  0<>o  ><>o  o<  o< 


CHAPTER  X L V I . 


ARCHERY  AND  POTTERY. 

»E  now  agreed  to  lay  aside  our  guns  altogether, 
and  husband  our  powder  to  the  utmost ; so, 
depending  on  our  archery,  as  though  we  had 
no  guns  at  all,  ’t  is  incredible  what  a skill  we 
attained  within  a few  weeks  of  practice  (for 
we  practised  at  the  least  an  hour  and  a half 
daily),  till  at  length  we  made  nothing  of  hit- 
ting a bread-fruit  without  fail  at  eighty  or  ninety  yards.  I 
said  the  priest  and  Dick  Prodgers  made  none  of  our  party  at 


180 


THE  ADVENTUItES  Oi’ 


this ; but ’t  is  only  true  to  say  so  at  the  first : for,  hearing  of 
our  skill,  they  begged  for  their  share  in  the  practice  too. 
They  came,  indeed,  at  a disadvantage,  being  late  in  the  field  ; 
yet,  by  extra  diligence  they  made  up  for  lost  time : till,  at 
length,  I scarce  could  tell  which  bore  away  the  palm.  But  I 
am  sure,  the  worst  of  us  would  have  been  hailed  a first-class 
shot  at  any  archery  in  England ; and  I question  if  Robin  Hood 
had  many  to  beat  us  in  his  Sherwood  band.  Yet  on  a com- 
parison, though  some  days  one  and  some  another,  again,  would 
shoot  surprisingly  well,  and  then  fall  back  into  the  ranks,  we 
ranged  much  in  the  order  I here  set  down  : — 

Harry  Gill,  captain,  by  consent  of  all ; 

Myself,  fairish,  and  pretty  equal ; 

Ned  Hilton,  unsteady,  better  and  worse  ; 

Tom  Harvey,  diligent,  never  making  a great  miss  ; 

Don  Manuel,  the  same,  only  with  want  of  practice ; 

Richard  Prodgers,  worst,  but  good  humoured  about  it. 

At  this  stage,  we  could  show  ourselves  as  archers  before 
the  Indians,  without  fear  of  being  looked  down  on ; so  one 
day,  taking  them  with  us  on  an  expedition,  our  guns  slung 
over  our  shoulders,  but  our  bows  in  our  hands,  in  the 
course  of  our  ramble  we  knocked  over,  each  of  us,  and 
quite  with  a natural  ease,  a something  to  prove  our  skill : 
one  a bird,  another  a fruit,  a third  fixed  his  arrow  in  the 
knot  of  a tree : in  a word,  we  shot  so  well  that  now  we  gave 
(or  lent , rather)  each  of  the  Indians  a bow  and  arrow  like  our 
own,  and  elected  them  members  of  the  club  : having  provided 
a plenty  of  bamboos,  both  great  and  small,  in  two  or  three 
journeys  we  made  to  the  swamp. 

Let  any  one  explain  it  as  he  may,  but  these  savages,  by 
some  natural  instinct,  gained  ground  quickly  upon  us  in  the 
use  of  their  weapons  ; so  that  soon  we  ceased  to  have  trials 
of  skill,  lest  we  might  be  worsted,  and  confined  ourselves  to 
what  archers  call  ranging , aiming  at  any  chance  thing  that 
met  us  on  our  walks,  instead  of  a butt  or  target. 

So,  to  enlarge  my  list,  I have  put  down  the  Indians  in  the 
order  wherein  we  reckoned  them  (among  ourselves),  though 
we  did  not  let  them  know  it.  Thus  we  stood ; 

John  Pounder,  captain  (without  knowing  it). 

Harry  Gill,  as  before,  but,  stirred  up  to  rivalry  by  Poun  - 
der’s shooting,  improved  daily  ; 

Samuel,  came  very  nigh  to  Harry,  and  beat  him  soon  ; 

Myself  (though  I say  it  that  should  not  say  it)  not  much 
behind  Samuel ; 


181 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 

Ned  Hilton,  mended  his  shooting  as  he  mended  his  cha- 
racter for  steadiness ; 

Tom  Harvey,  got  on  by  degrees ; 

Don  Manuel,  ditto,  but  with  a better  eye  than  Harvey, 
though  his  hand  not  so  strong ; 

Old  Mark,  rather  past  his  shooting,  but  managed  to  hit 
fairly  well ; 

R.  Prodgers  still  brought  up  the  rear. 

While  this  was  going  on,  we  made  some  attempts  to  mould 
the  clay  we  had  found  by  that  stream  I have  spoken  of,  into 
pottery  ware  : but  our  attempts  were  awkward,  and  the  things 
we  produced,  clumsy  to  a degree.  Our  Indians  brought  us 
five  or  six  heavy  loads  of  the  clay,  and  did  what  they  could  to 
help  us  in  the  work  ; but  here  they  were  novices,  as  much  as 
ourselves.  For  (it  seems)  they  had  never  hit  on  any  of  the 
like  manufacture  among  those  savage  tribes ; but  were  con- 
tent with  such  calabashes  and  other  vessels  to  hold  water  as 
they  could  fashion  from  gourds  and  such-like  rinds,  dried  and 
baked  in  the  sun  : as  to  boiling  or  stewing,  they  had  not  a 
notion  of  it,  further  than  to  put  some  pieces  of  flesh  into  a 
calabash  with  water,  and  throw  in  hot  stones  as  a make- 
believe  to  boil,  and  nothing  more.  All  this  we  made  out 
from  old  Mark,  who  wondered,  with  his  brother  Indians,  at 
what  we  were  after.  The  truth  is,  we  were  tired  of  seeing 
nothing  before  us  but  baked  meat  at  table,  (getting  fanciful, 
as ’t  is  human  nature  to  do,  amid  our  abundance),  so,  resolved 
to  persevere  at  this  making  of  pots  and  pans,  till  we  had  pro- 
duced a kettle,  and  so  a boil  or  stew  of  some  sort* 

They  say,  man  can  compass,  by  perseverance,  whatever  is 
possible  in  itself ; and  succeed  we  did,  at  last,  at  least  enough 
for  our  needs : though ’t  were  a curious  catalogue  to  present 
the  reader  with,  did  I number  up  all  the  larger  boiling  kettles 
and  stew-pans,  some  deeper,  some  shallower,  (for  we  tried  all 
ways,  and  all  shapes  and  sizes,)  together  with  such  smaller 
attempts,  as  butter-boats,  drinking  mugs,  oil-flasks,  and  what 
not,  that  we  cracked  in  the  oven,  trying  to  bake  them  hard. 
W e made  a vast  collection  of  dry  wood  for  this  purpose  ; and 
spent  many  hours  experimenting,  now  with  a fierce  fire,  now 
with  a slack  one ; now  we  made  the  clay  so  wet  it  was  mere 
mud,  and  would  scarce  stand  upright ; now  again  we  worked 
it  so  dry,  ’t  was  hard  to  work  it  at  all.  Each  time  we  moulded 
one,  and  heaped  wood  round  it,  setting  it  on  fire,  we  stood 
round  to  watch,  and  hoped  it  was  going  to  be  the  first 
success.  Never,  I believe,  did  a chemist  in  his  laboratory 


182 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


so  eagerly  watch  some  great  experiment  going  on  under  his 
eyes,  as  we  did,  when  we  raked  away  the  ashes  with  great 
care  from  round  our  clay-vessels,  and  drew  them  forth  with 
bamboos ; but  cracked  and  useless,  like  the  former. 

At  last — ’t  was  on  a Saturday,  the  eleventh  of  September, 
just  before  the  rains  set  in,  and  a great  day  in  the  history  of 
our  colony — whether  we  had  tempered  the  clay  better,  or 
got  it  from  a finer  vein,  or  whether  the  fire  had  been  kindled 
more  evenly  all  round  the  clay  at  once,  or  kept  up  steadier 
to  the  right  pitch  (for  both  these  we  discovered  to  be  very 
material  points  in  the  business),  at  length,  I say,  to  our 
inexpressible  joy,  having  slackened  our  fire  for  the  third  time 
that  very  day,  preparing  our  minds  for  a fresh  disappoint- 
ment— to  which  we  had  become  used,  as  the  eels  are  to  being 
skinned — this  one  blessed  time  we  drew  forth,  with  shouting, 
a large,  ugly,  mis-shapen  thing,  but  sound  as  a bell,  and 
burnt  red  as  a brick-bat,  that  would  hold,  I am  sure,  from 
four  to  five  gallons  of  water.  I say,  shouting,  but  I might  add, 
dancing  too  : for  we  began  to  caper,  like  so  many  madmen, 
round  the  work  of  our  hands  ; and  you  might  have  supposed 
us  all  (I  mean  all  but  Don  Manuel,  who  stood  by  and  laughed 
aloud  while  he  shared  our  joy)  to  be  a party  of  wild  In- 
dians, performing  a war-dance  round  some  captive  they  had 
triumphed  over,  before  they  fell  to  eating  him.  At  length, 
when  our  extravagance  had  subsided  somewhat,  we  returned 
to  the  fire  again,  and  found  with  fresh  joy  one  large  flat  dish, 
three  mugs,  and  a plate,  all  equally  good,  beside  a few  that 
were  part  spoiled,  but  could  be  made  to  do  till  better  offered. 
And  from  that  time  we  burned  some  every  day,  with  much 
success,  till  the  rain  drove  us  into  covert  in  our  cave. 


; >00O00<JW0<>«0<>«0<>0 


CHAPTER  XLVII. 

THE  CASTLE  WITH  ITS  OUTWORKS. 

may  surprise  my  readers  that  all  this  time 
we  had  not  looked  after  the  canoe  that  was 
thrown  ashore  ; considering  how  anxious  we 
were,  all  along,  to  devise  some  means  of  es- 
cape from  this  prison  of  ours.  But  the  truth 
was,  Prodgers  in  an  idle  moment  had  strolled 
down  to  that  part  of  the  beach,  and  found 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


183 


the  thing  lying  keel  upAvards,  half  buried  in  the  sand,  and 
so  broken-backed  as  to  be  no  longer  sea-worthy  for  the 
calmest  sea.  When  he  reported  this  to  us,  we  gave  up  all 
thoughts  of  refitting  her,  having  no  tools  proper  for  the  pur- 
pose ; for  knives  and  gun-barrels  never  yet  built  a ship,  nor 
repaired  one  : though,  to  be  sure,  our  Indians  might  have 
done  something  in  that  way,  had  we  so  employed  them. 
But  we  hasted,  as  I said,  to  house  ourselves  before  we  were 
caught  by  the  rains,  which  we  now  expected  to  come  upon  us 
almost  daily : so  that  Avorking  at  our  cave,  together  with 
purveying  our  food,  became  oui  chief  employments.  Nor 
can  I write  the  annals  of  our  little  colony,  though  briefly, 
and  not  give  a word  to  each  of  these  works  of  ours. 

First,  Our  Cave.  By  dint  of  steady  mining  in  gangs  or 
relays,  as  I have  explained,  Ave  had  now  got  some  Avay  in, 
without  finding  crack  or  vein  in  the  rock,  nor  aught  to  give 
us  help,  nor  hindrance  either  : for  all  seemed  of  one  material, 
only  it  got  softer,  the  deeper  we  went.  So  that  at  last  we 
worked  nearly  as  much  with  a large  bamboo  cut  sharp  (some  - 
Avhat  like  a pen,  about  three  feet  long,  and  pointed  Avith  a 
large  flint),  as  with  our  chisels,  which  Ave  spared  as  well  as 
we  could.  In  this  way  we  had  gone  in,  I am  sure,  near 
thirty  feet  before  we  began  to  enlarge  our  cave  in  height  or 
breadth  : but  we  were  soon  forced  to  set  about  that  work 
too,  from  the  heat  and  closeness  of  the  air,  which  scarce  per- 
mitted us  to  breathe  freely,  and  hindered  our  Avorking  long  at 
a spell.  Beginning  with  height,  we  now  worked  over  our 
heads,  till  we  Avere  able  to  stand  upright  at  the  inner  end, 
which  was  a great  relief  to  us  : for  up  to  that,  we  had  gone 
on  nearly  bent  double,  or  upon  our  knees.  So  now,  having 
an  inch  or  two  to  spare  overhead,  we  set  our  faces  (I  mean 
the  two  that  worked  together,  one  hewing  to  his  right,  the 
other  to  his  left),  towards  the  entrance,  and  worked  steadily 
back  on  our  steps : till,  nearing  the  entrance  itself,  we  left 
that  pretty  much  as  we  found  it,  small  and  rude,  like  the 
burrow  of  some  wild  animal,  for  our  greater  security  and 
hiding.  But,  for  the  rest  of  our  cave,  it  grew  more  spacious 
every  day : until,  little  over  a fortnight  from  our  beginning 
to  Avork,  we  found  ourselves  possessed  of  a comfortable  house 
(though  very  dark),  thirty  feet  long,  with  a height  rang- 
ing from  six  to  seven  feet,  and  about  the  same  in  breadth. 
Together  with  these  dimensions,  our  house  or  castle  was  much 
drier  than  many  old  houses  I have  known  in  civilized  parts ; 
there  being  but  one  place  Avhere  we  discovered  the  least  drip 


184 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


of  water.  As  we  found  this  water,  on  tasting  it,  very  cold  and 
pure,  free  from  so  much  as  a taint  of  sulphur,  or  any  other,  we 
reckoned  it  no  small  advantage  to  our  cave,  and  agreed  we 
would  enlarge  it  into  a well  or  reservoir  when  we  had  more 
leisure  on  hand. 

So  far,  we  were  prepared  for  the  rains,  come  when  they 
would.  Only,  the  easier  we  worked,  and  the  further  we 
went  in,  the  larger  grew  the  heap  of  rubbish  we  were  forced 
to  throw  out  of  our  cave  ; till  at  last  it  reached  more  than 
half  way  up  from  the  ground  outside,  to  the  mouth  itself, 
like  a pyramid  of  loose  sand,  leaning  against  the  cliff.  We 
feared  to  leave  it  where  it  was,  knowing ’t  would  easily  be- 
tray our  whereabouts  to  the  cunning  of  any  savages  who 
might  visit  the  island  ; and  the  first  thing  to  do  now  was  to 
clear  it  away,  or  (better  still)  make  it  a part  of  our  defences. 
So,  quitting  our  inside  work  altogether  for  a time,  we  con- 
sidered how  to  dispose  of  this  great  heap  of  soil.  For  let 
any  one  reckon  a mining-work  of  the  measurements  I have 
stated,  and  add  to  it  this  also,  that  the  rock  which  was  com- 
pact in  its  native  quarry,  made  up  a larger  bulk  when ’t  was 
thrown  out  as  loose  soil ; and  he  will  have  some  guess  of 
the  mountain  of  work  that  now  lay  before  us. 

But  the  worst  was,  we  had  no  tools  whatever,  such  as 
shovels,  to  set  to  work  with ; nor  prospect  of  any  but  the 
clumsiest  make-believes  to  stand  in  their  place.  All  we  could 
devise  was  this ; to  fit  some  such  slaty  stones  as  we  had  dug 
the  Indian’s  grave  with,  into  bamboo  handles:  this  we  managed 
passably  well,  but  spent  upon  it  the  remainder  of  our  twine  ; 
yet,  after  all  this  contrivance,  the  slates  were  for  ever  break- 
ing in  the  work,  or  coming  unbound  from  the  handles.  How- 
ever, for  want  of  anything  better,  to  it  we  went ; supplying 
for  the  badness  of  our  tools  by  the  number  of  workmen  (for 
we  now  called  all  hands  to  this,  and  Don  Manuel,  too,  took  his 
day’s  work  like  any  journeyman),  and  by  an  extra  stock  of 
good  will  and  good  humour. 

Our  plan  was,  to  block  up  with  this  sand  the  whole  pas- 
sage between  the  cliff  and  leaning  rock,  on  the  side  by  which 
we  first  entered  our  hiding-place ; for  on  that  side  the  trees 
were  scantier,  and ’t  would  be  more  easy  to  find  us  out.  Then, 
when  the  rainy  season  should  be  over,  and  the  earth  left 
moist  and  easy  to  be  worked,  we  resolved  to  plant  all  outside 
of  this  bank  of  soil,  and  the  bank  itself,  with  young  trees,  or 
shoots*  such  as  we  might  discover  to  grow  quickest,  and  bear 
transplanting ; so  as  both  to  bank  and  plant  ourselves  out 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


185 


from  the  world  altogether.  But  this  was  a mighty  labour  in- 
deed, for  nine  pairs  of  hands  and  nine  awkward  spades ; and 
I question  if  they  who  built  the  pyramids  of  Egypt  had  more 
work  before  them,  considering  the  number  of  workmen,  than 
we  with  our  bank  of  sand.  We  did  the  best  we  could;  though 
’t  was  a bungling  piece  of  business,  after  all ; and  bonded  our 
work  together  with  such  large  stones  as  lay  in  the  neighbour- 
hood, heaving  them  to  the  spot  with  levers  of  bamboo  : then 
using  them  as  masons  use  the  larger  stones  to  bond  a wall. 

Upon  the  whole,  this  was  even  harder  work  than  mining 
into  the  cliff,  and  without  the  interest  of  discovery  to  animate 
us : for  our  Royal  Sappers  and  Miners  (so  we  called  the  two 
workmen)  were  always  expecting,  every  stroke  they  made, 
to  break  into  some  cave  already  formed  in  the  heart  of  the 
rock,  and  so  end  their  labours  at  once.  In  short,  our  sand- 
banking became  so  irksome  and  laborious,  we  had  no  small 
ado  to  keep  the  men  at  it,  during  the  time  (which  was  four 
full  hours)  we  had  agreed  to  devote  to  it  every  day.  The 
weather,  too,  was  sultry,  which  added  to  our  labour,  and 
increased  the  discontent  of  those  who  were  disposed  to 
grumble  : so  that  every  now  and  again,  one  would  throw 
down  his  tool,  and  protest,  for  his  part,  he  was  no  galley- 
slave,  nor  any  slave,  black  or  white,  to  keep  on  at  this  work 
any  longer. 

I had  to  behave  like  the  captain  of  a ship  when  signs  of 
mutiny  begin  to  appear  on  board ; now  I humoured  them, 
now  reasoned,  now  joked  with  them  : sometimes  I w'ent  the 
length  of  a threat,  if  they  would  not  make  common  cause 
in  our  labour,  they  should  be  banished  from  our  common- 
wealth, and  sent  away  to  the  further  side  of  the  island  : 
though  I must  say,  matters  seldom  went  that  length.  But 
what  persuaded  them  to  endure,  more  than  all  words,  was 
the  example  of  our  patient,  cheerful  Spanish  friend ; who 
worked  harder,  in  proportion,  than  any  of  the  rest,  with  a 
smile  and  a word  for  all ; nor  ever  rested,  but  to  take  up  his 
breviary  awhile : though  you  could  see,  he  felt  this  hard 
labour  more,  by  far,  than  the  rough  tars  working  side  by 
side  with  him  ; and  his  very  hands  bore  witness  he  had 
been  used  as  little  to  handle  a spade,  as  a rope  or  an  oar. 

As  to  the  further  entrance,  I mean  that  other  side  of  the 
passage  between  the  cliff  and  our  grand  stair-case,  opposite 
to  that  one  we  were  banking  up  ; we  had  less  care  for  that, 
seeing ’t  was  more  thickly  set  with  trees,  and  turned  away 
more  from  any  practicable  landing-place  : therefore  we  would 


186 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


not  bank  up  that,  but  kept  it  for  our  own  approach  to  our 
castle  below.  Only,  we  contrived  a winding  path  through 
the  trees,  narrow,  and  difficult  to  hit ; clearing  away  some 
bushes  here,  and  matting  them  together  there : besides 
getting  rid  of  a tree  or  two  that  stood  right  in  the  path, 
by  burning  it  all  round,  a little  above  the  roots,  with  our 
gun-barrels  heated  red-hot,  and  sawing  it  through  after- 
wards with  Master  Pounder’s  shark’s  teeth  saws.  In  this 
winding  path  we  also  contrived  several  traps  and  blind 
alleys,  to  mislead  an  enemy  who  had  not  the  secret  of  the 
place  ; though  not  with  so  much  art  as  Don  Manuel  and 
I had  drawn  our  mazes  on  paper  with,  yet  enough  to  puzzle 
a stranger,  or  several  together,  till  we  should  get  ready,  and 
give  them  a warmer  reception.  Moreover,  we  dug  two  or 
three  narrow  pitfalls  here  and  there,  as  deep  as  the  height 
of  a man,  and  as  narrow  as  saw-pits  ; covering  them  with 
small  weak  branches  laced  across,  and  a thin  layer  of  earth 
over  all.  Cunning  places  they  were,  truly,  into  one  of  which 
old  Prodgers  fell,  not  long  after,  by  taking  a wrong  turn  in 
a hurry  ; and  proved  (against  his  will)  the  excellence  of  the 
trap,  not  being  able  to  free  himself  till  we  pulled  him  out 
with  a rope.  All  this  happened  some  time  after ; but  I, 
set  it  down  here  to  show  how  we  made  our  defences  com- 
plete to  the  utmost  we  were  able. 


OUR  LARDER  AND  FARM-YARD. 

(ECONDLY,  Our  Food.  Harry  Gill  and  my- 
self (I  have  said),  being  better  shots  than 
the  rest,  were  mostly  purveyors  to  our  so- 
ciety ; and  after,  when  we  laid  aside  our 
guns,  taking  to  the  bows  and  arrows,  and 
went  ranging  through  the  island  for  prac- 
tice, still  ’t  was  to  us  they  chiefly  looked  for 
securing  the  daily,  meal.  Our  island  furnished  game  in 
plenty,  as  we  were  thankful  to  find,  more  and  more ; so 
we  had  no  lack  of  it.  We  went  on  adding,  too,  to  our  stock 
of  arrows  ; and,  with  our  growing  skill  in  archery,  we  became 
lords  and  masters  of  all  the  live  stock  in  the  place,  four- 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


187 


footed  or  winged  : I might  say,  web-footed  too  ; for  as  time 
went  on,  we  found  amazing  numbers  of  sea-fowl  that  har- 
boured in  the  rocks  on  the  s.w.  quarter  of  the  island,  at  least 
during  several  months  in  the  year. 

But  these  we  rather  looked  on  as  distant  allies,  or  wander- 
ing tribes  on  the  frontier,  than  as  regular  subjects  of  our 
kingdom ; and  spared  them  all  the  more,  fearing  to  lose 
our  arrows  by  aiming  at  them  : nor  did  we  ever  attempt  it 
but  when  the  tide  was  setting  strongly  in-shore.  ’T  was  no 
loss  to  us  to  let  them  alone  ; for  one  or  two  that  we  pierced 
from  time  to  time,  when  they  floated  in,  proved  to  have  an 
indifferent,  fishy  taste,  not  fit  for  the  table  of  gentlemen  who 
had  the  stock  of  an  island  to  pick  and  choose  from.  All 
things,  indeed,  are  by  comparison  ; for  I have  heard  of  some 
poor  fellows  turned  adrift  in  a boat  on  the  open  sea,  to 
whom  a booby  or  a penguin,  when  they  could  knock  them 
over,  have  been  delicious  fare  in  their  hunger;  and  we 
should  have  been  ungrateful  wretches  not  to  acknowledge 
our  better  plight. 

But  one  of  our  great  endeavours  in  the  article  of  food  was 
to  take  some  wild  animals  alive,  so  as  to  preserve  or  tame 
them,  and  make  a farm-yard  around  us  by  degrees.  ’T  was 
some  time  before  we  succeeded  at  all  in  this  ; at  last,  one  day, 
Harry  Gill  and  I being  out  together,  we  came  on  a sudden 
upon  a herd  of  peccaries,  old  and  young.  Or,  I should  say, 
they  came  upon  us,  rather ; for  we  were  in  their  way  in  the 
middle  of  a path  they  had  worn  for  themselves  by  constant 
traffic  through  the  woods,  to  get  at  fresh  water  that  flowed 
between  the  volcano  and  the  w.s.w.  of  the  island.  Now 
the  peccary,  like  many  human  creatures,  is  a much  bolder 
and  fiercer  gentleman  when  he  has  got  numbers  to  back  him, 
than  when  you  take  him  alone ; yet  even  alone  he  is  apt  to 
be  savage,  and  turn  short  on  you  with  his  tusks,  if  you  slightly 
wound  him  and  despatch  him  not  outright.  This  we  knew 
well ; having  at  times  been  forced  to.  dodge  among  the  trees, 
to  get  away  from  a wounded  one,  till  we  could  settle  him  by 
a second  shot.  So  now,  finding  ourselves  face  to  face  with  so 
many  together,  we  gave  them  the  wall  (as  I might  say)  with 
great  respect : slipping  quietly  aside  into  the  jungle  or  bush, 
Harry  Gill  on  one  side,  and  I on  the  other,  to  leave  their  path 
clear. 

On  they  came,  at  a kind  of  shuffling  trot,  grunting  and 
squealing  like  a herd  of  wild  pigs,  as  indeed  they  were  : first 
came  some  of  the  older  and  stronger  of  the  herd,  with  formi- 


188 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


dable  tusks  truly,  like  pioneers  to  clear  the  way ; and,  ’t  is 
my  belief,  had  they  charged  against  a regiment  in  a line,  they 
had  put  many  a veteran  soldier  to  the  rout.  Next  cantered 
on  several  scores  of  others,  led  by  these  brave  captains,  and 
the  little  young  pigs  enclosed  among  them  for  shelter  and  pro- 
tection. But ’t  was  just  one  or  two  of  these  youngsters  we 
had  fixed  our  minds  on  : so,  making  a sign  to  Harry  Gill  to 
get  into  a tree  on  his  side  the  path,  I did  the  same  on  mine  ; 
when,  being  both  well  settled  in  our  perches,  “ Now  !”  cried 
I,  “ aim  at  the  young  pigs,  Harry  ; and  try  to  disable  them, 
not  to  kill  !” 

At  the  sound  of  my  voice,  the  leaders  of  the  herd  stopped 
short ; for  by  this,  they  had  all  but  come  up  to  our  ambush, 
and  began  snuffing  the  air,  grunting  with  rage  to  know  an 
enemy  was  nigh,  yet  not  able  to  see  him.  After  a little, 
when  they  had  poked  about  among  the  bushes,  they  seemed 
not  to  like  the  chances,  and  determined  on  a retreat ; so, 
giving  a deep  grunt  or  two,  as  word  of  command,  they  all 
wheeled  about,  and  were  for  trotting  back  the  way  they 
came. 

That  was  not  the  welcome  we  meant  to  give  them,  by  a 
great  deal ; so,  bidding  Gill  take  good  aim,  and  have  a 
second  arrow  in  readiness,  we  both  let  fly,  and  winged  each 
our  pig ; then,  fitting  at  once  another  arrow  to  the  string,  we 
gave  it  them  again,  before  they  had  recovered  the  first  sur- 
prise and  confusion : on  which  there  rose  such  a grunting 
and  squealing  of  the  herd  as  would  have  sent  a musician  out 
of  his  wits  : however,  the  end  was,  off  they  all  scampered, 
leaving  their  wounded  to  fare  as  they  might.  When  we  saw 
the  coast  was  clear,  and  heard  them  hurry  pell-mell  through 
the  woods,  we  came  down  from  our  trees  to  secure  our  booty  : 
and  I must  take  credit  for  our  archery,  seeing  but  one  out 
of  the  four  we  had  shot  was  dead,  the  rest  only  wounded,  as 
we  designed,  and  one  so  slightly,  it  cost  us  no  little  trouble 
to  secure  him. 

On  this,  we  blew  our  horns  ; which  calls  for  a word  of 
explanation  here.  I should  have  related,  before  now,  we 
had  found  a kind  of  conch,  or  large  winding  shell,  among 
the  rocks,  on  our  first  Friday’s  expedition  to  the  further  side 
of  the  island  ; we  soon  found  means  to  fashion  these  into  a 
kind  of  trumpet ; and  they  served  us  as  well,  as  if  we  had 
been  so  many  Tritons,  giving  forth  a deep  sound,  like  the 
bellowing  of  a bull,  that  might  be  heard  a good  way  off. 
These  horns  soon  brought  to  us  two  of  the  Indians,  Pounder 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


189 


and  Samuel,  who,  from  their  swiftness,  were  the  light  skir- 
mishers of  our  party.  Amongst  us  all,  we  managed  not  only 
to  secure  the  three  piglings,  but  to  bring  them  home,  to- 
gether with  the  dead  one.  But  these  young  peccaries  were 
fiercer  than  their  size  or  age  warranted : and  we  had  some 
ado  to  escape  being  torn  by  their  tusks,  though  small ; in- 
deed, we  did  not  come  off  unscratched  from  the  fight. 

When  we  got  them  home,  we  were  at  a loss  how  to  be- 
stow them  ; for  first,  we  had  to  heal  their  wounds,  and  next, 
to  keep  them  safe  : we  feared  they  would  die  and  be  useless 
to  us,  or  live  and  run  away  to  the  woods  again.  By  degrees 
they  grew  tamer  ; and  we  cultivated  their  friendship  on  the 
same  terms  as  the  slave  who,  fleeing  from  his  master,  took 
refuge  in  the  lion’s  cave,  became  friends  with  the  lion  he 
found  there  with  a thorn  that  festered  in  his  paw  : that  is 
to  say,  we  first  extracted  our  arrows  with  more  tenderness 
than  we  had  shot  them ; then,  by  aid  of  the  Indians,  found 
some  of  those  same  leaves  they  had  plastered  Prodgers’  face 
with,  and  applied  them  to  the  wounded  peccaries.  At 
length,  the  poor  little  beasts  began  to  look  on  us  as  their 
benefactors ; and  we,  on  our  side,  grew  more  liberal  in  giving 
them  such  food  as  they  liked : for  at  first  we  kept  them  on 
short  commons,  to  tame  them  by  hunger. 

All  this  while,  we  had  them  tied  by  the  leg  to  three  trees, 
just  outside  our  encampment,  where  we  could  see  them  from 
the  cave’s  mouth : resolving,  if  ever  we  observed  a sign  of 
savages  visiting  the  island,  to  turn  them  loose  into  the  woods, 
lest  their  squealing  might  betray  us.  To  make  a long  story 
short,  within  a reasonable  time  they  grew  so  tame,  I be- 
lieve we  might  safely  have  cut  the  ropes,  and  they  had 
stayed  with  us : but,  having  come  by  them  hardly,  we 
would  run  no  risk  of  parting  with  them  lightly  : so,  fetching 
a compass  with  them  till  we  found  means  to  mount  them  up 
on  a part  of  Cape  Look-Out,  we  wattled  off  a small  piece  of 
table-land  there  for  a farm-yard,  weaving  branches  of  trees 
in  and  out,  till  we  made  a ring-fence  large  enough  for  them 
to  range  in.  We  strengthened  this  here  and  there  on  the 
outside,  driving  in  some  live  stakes  of  a tree  of  the  nature 
of  a willow:  but  it  took  root  faster  and  firmer,  and  sent 
out  strong  shoots  the  very  next  spring  ; so  that  we  lived 
to  see  our  stakes  form  a circle  of  flourishing  young  trees. 
This  is  the  history  of  our  farm-yard  in  its  infancy ; and  this 
was  the  last  out-door  work  we  engaged  in  before  the  rains 
came  to  shut  us  up. 


190 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


CHAPTER  XLIX. 

WE  CARVE  OUT  A KITCHEN. 


^|OON  after  this,  as  I said,  the  rainy  season 
1 came,  and  came  in  earnest ; those  of  us  who 
had  not  yet  known  the  tropics  during  the 
autumnal  equinox,  had  to  learn  (as  they  now 
did)  what  rain  can  do.  ’T  was  not  a shower, 
nor  a tempest,  and  then  over ; but  it  rather 
came  down  in  sheets  of  water  than  in  the 
way  of  rain ; and  that  too,  both  day  and  night  continually,  as 
though  it  were  poured  out  of  some  mighty  reservoir  in  the 
heavens  above.  Don  Manuel,  on  our  remarking  this,  spoke 
to  us  of  the  great  deluge  that  was  once  sent  upon  the  earth 
for  the  wickedness  of  man  : when  “ the  flood-gates  of  heaven 
were  opened,  and  the  rain  fell  upon  the  earth  forty  days  and 
forty  nights’’,  till  all  the  human  race  was  destroyed  but  eight 
persons  alone.  This,  he  said,  might  stand  as  one  testimony 
of  the  extreme  provocation  of  sin  against  the  Lord  who  com- 
manded His  creatures’  obedience ; so  going  on,  from  one  dis- 
course to  another,  while  we  were  busied  at  work  in  our  cave, 
and  turning  all  into  good,  like  the  old  king  in  the  fable, 
whose  touch  turned  all  into  gold. 

Being  now  close  prisoners  (for  we  could  not  stir  out  without 
being  drenched),  we  set  to  work  on  completing  our  cave  ar- 
chitecture ; we  determined  to  make  it  a regular  habitation, 
and  commodious  enough  to  hold  ourselves  and  our  stores  to- 
gether. Our  first  care  was  to  provide  a kitchen  ; which  1 
hope  the  reader  will  not  take  amiss,  as  though  we  were  grown 
too  fond  of  the  good  cheer  which  the  island  afforded,  but 
will  remember  (as  the  saying  of  some  wise  man  is  reported), 
though  we  did  not  live  to  eat,  we  must  eat  to  live.  Well, 
this  kitchen  of  ours  was  the  part  of  our  mansion  that  gave 
us  most  trouble,  by  far ; and  that,  because  of  the  chimney  it 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


191 


needed,  which  at  first  was  beyond  all  our  engineering.  We 
tried,  once  or  twice,  to  cook  our  meals  in  the  great  vestibule, 
or  cave  itself,  that  we  had  hollowed ; but  we  were  fairly  put 
to  flight,  and  driven  out  into  the  rain,  by  the  stifling  smoke 
that  rose  from  our  wood  fire.  So,  making  a virtue  of  neces- 
sity, we  set  about  smoking  what  meat  we  had  provided,  (as 
several  flitches  and  hams  of  peccary,  together  with  some 
large  wild-fowl  we  had  brought  down  with  our  arrows,)  and 
so  laying  it  up  in  store  to  consume  by  degrees.  Here  we 
employed  our  Indians,  who  were  not  so  much  afraid  of  a 
wetting  as  we  ourselves ; making  them  understand  what  we 
would  have  done,  we  had  the  satisfaction  to  see  them,  under 
our  own  eyes  (for  one  of  us  always  stood  to  mount  guard  at 
the  cave’s  mouth),  set  up  a small  booth,  or  curing-house,  of 
four  trees  thatched  with  leaves,  to  smoke  the  bacon  in.  They 
built  this  booth  within  the  embankment  I have  spoken  of, 
which  we  always  called  our  fortification,  or  outworks,  leaning 
one  side  up  against  the  cliff. 

The  benefit  of  this  plan  was,  it  needed  not  that  we  should 
gather  dry  wood  for  the  business ; but  on  the  contrary,  green 
wood  smoked  the  meat  more  throughly,  and  we  saved  our 
dry  fuel  to  warm  us  by,  or  for  a little  slow  fire  of  very  dry 
sticks,  almost  like  charcoal,  whenever  we  would  boil  our 
vegetables,  or  make  soup  of  a piece  of  flesh,  with  yams  and 
bread-fruit,  in  one  of  our  clumsy  vessels  of  pottery.  Yet, 
after  all,  a kitchen'  and  a chimney  we  must  needs  have,  and 
that  for  three  purposes  at  once ; namely,  first,  to  warm  our- 
selves by,  and  dispel  the  damp  of  our  cave,  if  we  found  the 
rain  to  penetrate ; but  that  it  never  did,  except  in  the  one 
place,  where  it  formed  our  well,  so  our  fears  were  groundless 
on  that  score  : then,  secondly,  to  cook  our  daily  meal,  for 
we  could  not  endure  the  smoke  that  arose  even  from  our 
little  fire  for  boiling  ; and,  thirdly,  for  our  oven  ; inasmuch 
as  we  were  now  grown  too  dainty  to  be  content  with  bread- 
fruit, but  must  have  real  bread  beside.  So  we  set  about 
our  kitchen  as  follows  : 

We  resolved,  as  the  smoke  from  our  chimney  must  find 
some  vent  to  the  upper  air,  this  should  be  turned  as  far  as 
possible  from  that  part  of  the  island  our  Indians  had  been 
driven  upon  : fearing  it  might  invite  a visit  from  some  others 
of  the  fraternity,  not  so  easily  tamed  as  these.  Little  did  I 
think,  indeed,  at  the  time,  what  benefit  a smoke  from  the 
island  was  to  bring  to  us  hereafter.  But  I must  not  outrun 
my  narrative. 


192 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


For  this  purpose,  we  went  to  the  furthest  end  of  our  cave, 
being,  as  I said,  full  thirty  feet  from  the  entrance : then 
turning  left  ways  (for  we  would  not  have  our  fire  in  a line 
with  the  cave’s  mouth,  lest  its  light  should  ever  betray  us), 
we  cut  a passage  nearly  five  feet  wide  into  the  living  rock, 
working  two  at  a time,  in  gangs,  or  relays,  as  before.  When 
we  had  got  from  fifteen  to  eighteen  feet  in,  the  two  workmen 
then  separated,  each  his  own  way,  facing  away  from  one 
another,  and  began  hewing  round  again  in  a half  circle ; 
that  is,  the  right  hand  man  bore  continually  over  towards 
his  right  shoulder,  and  the  left  hand  man  towards  his  left ; 
till  at  length,  after  incredible  labour  (I  am  describing  in  a 
few  lines  what  took  up  several  weeks  to  accomplish),  each 
man  completing  his  half  round,  they  came  out  again,  nearly 
opposite  one  another,  into  the  passage  they  began  by  cutting, 
as  I said,  leading  out  of  the  main  cave. 

To  be  sure,  this  did  not  look  much  like  a kitchen ; for 
’t  was  nothing  but  a circular  burrow,  about  the  height  of  a 
man,  with  a straight  passage,  broader,  running  through  it,  so 
as  to  divide  it  into  two  halves  : as  my  reader  will  see,  if  he 
hath  attended  to  my  rude  account  of  it.  Nevertheless,  this 
was  our  kitchen  in  outline  : and  now,  setting  about  to  com- 
plete it,  we  resolved  in  the  first  place,  we  would  leave  enough 
of  the  rock  on  either  side,  (I  mean,  of  the  solid  rock  round 
which  we  had  mined  this  burrow  of  ours,)  to  stand  as  a na- 
tural pillar,  and  prop  up  the  roof.  For  we  feared  to  leave  so 
large  a stretch  of  roof  without  support ; lest  our  cave  might, 
some  day,  on  a sudden,  prove  our  sepulchre  too.  Thus  we 
went  on,  making  the  passages  wider,  and  reducing  the  two 
masses  of  standing  rock  : now  the  whole  of  our  party  could 
work  at  it  at  once,  and  it  went  on  much  quicker.  Only,  our 
tools  were  so  imperfect,  for  ever  breaking  and  getting  out  of 
use,  it  made  the  work  slower,  and  tried  our  patience  more ; 
the  gun-barrels  were  by  now  much  worn  down  with  constant 
hewing,  and  we  began  to  debate  on  sacrificing  one  of  the  other 
pieces  to  break  up  into  mining  tools.  Indeed,  our  bows  and 
arrows  had  taken  the  place  of  these  weapons,  nor  had  we  burnt 
a single  grain  of  powder  since  we  so  improved  in  archery.  On 
second  thoughts,  prudence  bade  us  keep  all  our  fire-arms  in 
readiness,  in  case  of  any  attack  from  savages  ; for  we  reckoned, 
one  discharge  of  our  guns  would  be  of  more  service  in  terrify- 
ing them,  than  whole  quivers  full  of  arrows,  which  are  their 
own  familiar  weapons,  and  inspire  them  with  no  dread. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


193 


(ground  pan  of  the  (ffnce. 


A.  Hanging  rock  concealing  the  entrance. 

B.  Entrance;  the  serpents’  hole  enlarged. 

C.  Store-room,  with  lockers  pierced  in  the  walls. 

I).  Small  room  for  gunpowder. 

E.  Well,  supplied  by  a drip  from  above. 

F.  Work-room,  and  sleeping  place. 

G.  Chapel,  with  altar  in  the  alcove. 

H.  Kitchen,  with  pillars  and  chimney:  also  used  for  the  Indians 
sleeping-place. 

K K K.  Face  of  cliff. 

L L.  Further  passages  into  the  rock,  afterwards  abandoned. 


But  Pounder  one  day  suddenly  gave  us  more  help  in  the 
way  of  tools  than  any  one  could,  short  of  an  ironmonger : for, 
being  sent  forth  on  a Friday  morning  to  help  Ned  Hilton 
bring  in  some  cray-fish  and  oysters  from  the  other  side  the 
island  (the  rain  having  then  somewhat  slackened),  he  brought, 
besides,  one  or  two  pieces  of  a very  hard  stone,  transparent 
like  glass,  and  splitting  off  to  a sharp  edge  ; such  (I  believe)  as 
learned  people  call  quartz,  and  simple  folks  call  glimmer.  He 
had  found  these  in  a crack  or  vein,  between  two  rocks,  down 
which  ran  a little  rapid  stream,  that  had  loosened  these  pieces 
from  the  rocks ; and  he  said  there  was  a good  quantity  more  of 
the  same  to  be  found  in  that  spot.  By  this  time  we  were  better 
skilled  in  binding  our  stone  hammers,  or  axe-heads,  into  the 
bamboo-handles,  whereby  we  got  on  the  faster  at  our  work. 

13 


104 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


At  la&t  we  had  so  cut  away  the  rock,  we  left  nothing  standing 
on  either  side  the  kitchen  but  two  pillars  of  a biggish  thick- 
ness : and  the  apartment  itself  was  an  irregular  oval  of  about 
fifteen  feet  across,  the  longest  way ; by  twelve,  the  shortest. 
We  would  not  then  stay  to  shape  it  more  to  our  fancy,  nor 
to  carve  out  a seat,  or  transom,  round  the  walls,  as  was  after- 
wards done ; our  immediate  concern  was  to  pierce  a vent, 
or  chimney,  up  through  the  solid  rock,  over  that  part  where 
we  designed  to  make  our  fire,  slanting  to  westward  of  the 
ridge  of  our  look-out. 

This  was  the  hardest  task,  by  far,  we  had  on  hands  ; nor  do 
I think,  except  for  the  lucky  discovery  of  the  glimmer-stones 
(that  cut  sharper  and  easier  than  others),  we  had  ever  accom- 
plished it.  But,  by  help  of  a strong,  determined  will,  and 
often  changing  the  workmen,  we  overcame  all  obstacles  : so, 
hauling  up  two  young  cocoa-palms  into  the  cave,  we  made 
them  into  a rude  ladder;  lacing  them  across  with  those 
same  tough  tendrils  we  had  made  our  rope  of,  which  the 
men  called  supple-jack.  Thus  we  made  a something  between 
a ladder  and  the.  shrouds  of  a ship,  by  help  of  which  we 
mounted  to  the  rocky  roof  of  our  kitchen,  and  began  to 
pierce  it  at  a slant ; so,  still  hewing  on  with  perseverance, 
we  made  us  an  opening  about  three  feet  across,  for  conve- 
nience of  working : and  by  degrees  cut  our  way  upward  into 
rude  steps  that  supported  one  man  at  a time  ; but,  from  the 
cramped  position  he  was  forced  to  maintain,  and  heat  of  the 
place,  no  one  could  work  at  this  more  than  a quarter  of 
an  hour  at  one  spell ; and  we  were  stiff  and  weary  enough 
when  we  came  down. 

After  a full  week’s  work  at  the  chimney  alone,  one  morn- 
ing, when  Tom  Harvey  had  taken  his  turn  at  the  work,  as  he 
was  boring  upward  with  the  gun-barrel  (for  that  we  did  first, 
to  pioneer,  and  then  cut  away  the  sides  with  the  glimmer),  all 
at  once  he  thrust  the  barrel  forward  freely  to  his  arm’s  length  ; 
at  the  same  moment  some  fresh  wet  earth  fell  into  his  eyes 
and  mouth,  and  the  cool  air  blew  down  upon  his  face.  Harvey 
was  blinded  and  half  choked ; and  down  he  came,  floundering 
among  us  in  the  kitchen,  as  we  hewed  at  the  pillars : nor 
could  he  answer  our  questions  but  by  sputtering  with  his 
mouth  full  of  earth.  But  Hilton,  going  to  the  hole,  shouted 
out,  the  thing  was  done  ! and,  sure  enough,  when  we  ran  to 
look,  we  saw  the  light  of  day,  like  a pale  star,  at  the  top. 

The  rest  was  easy  ; for  Harvey  having  left  his  tool  sticking 
out  at  the  top,  when  he  was  thus  saluted  by  mother  Earth 


195 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 

to  his  discomfiture,  we  had  but  to  send  one  of  our  party  on 
to  the  promontory,  and  enlarge  our  chimney-pot  from  above. 
But  we  charged  him  (’t  was  Pounder  that  went)  only  to 
make  it  wide  enough  to  allow  vent  for  the  smoke,  and  be 
careful  to  build  it  round  with  bushes  and  sticks  laid  across ; 
as  well  to  conceal  it  from  human  eyes,  as  to  prevent  any 
wild  animals  paying  us  the  unwelcome  honour  of  a visit 
down  the  chimney. 


CHAPTER  L. 


ROCK  ARCHITECTURE. 

HILE  this  troublesome  work  was  on  hands, 
they  who  were  not  up  the  chimney  were  at 
other  employments ; this  being  one  among 
the  things  we  had  learned  on  the  island,  that 
man  is  destined  to  labour,  even  in  solitude 
and  amid  plenty,  if  he  would  keep  mind  or 
body  in  health.  So,  importing  another  cargo 
of  glimmer,  with  some  fresh  bamboos,  into  our  cave,  we  fell 
to  making  a good  stock  of  mining  instruments.  This  done, 
then,  under  our  priest’s  directions  (who  seemed  to  understand 
such  things  more  than  might  be  thought),  we  marked  out  the 
entrances  to  several  other  rooms  leading  off*  from  our  main 
cave,  and  hewed  them  out,  as  we  had  hewn  the  kitchen. 

To  go  to  work  on  a regular  plan,  we  made  a list  of  the 
rooms  we  designed  to  have,  which  stood  thus  : 

A cliapel , to  serve  for  our  morning  and  night  prayers,  and 
for  our  private  devotions.  For,  I must  say,  we  had  begun 
the  habit  of  praying  by  ourselves  a little,  ere  now  ; and  some- 
times I would  come  on  a sudden  in  our  woods  and  walks 
upon  one  of  our  comrades  on  his  knees,  and  I would  strike 
into  another  path  to  avoid  disturbing  him  ; this  sort  of  thing 
grew  up,  as ’t  were,  by  itself,  and  was  getting  quite  common, 
no  one  noticing  it  as  strange.  This  little  chapel,  too,  was  to 
be  for  our  instruction  on  Sundays  ; for  Don  Manuel  preached 
to  us  now  every  Sunday,  and  some  other  days,  too  ; holy 


196 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


days,  as  he  said,  called  so  for  one  reason  or  another,  which  he 
told  us  as  they  came  round.  Lastly,  on  these  days  and  Sun- 
days our  chapel  served  another  chief  purpose,  as  I will  tell. 

Then,  we  needed  a store-room , as  well  for  our  dried  meats 
as  to  lay  up  fruits  and  vegetables : we  determined  to  make  it 
with  recesses  in  the  wall,  like  cup-boards  without  doors,  all 
round,  to  keep  the  several  stores  apart  from  one  another  : be- 
sides, we  thought  to  die;  a kind  of  shallow  well,  or  vault,  in  the 
floor  of  this  store-room,  at  the  further  end,  and  cover  it  with 
palm  and  other  leaves,  to  keep  such  stores  as  would  spoil  un- 
less they  were  kept  cool,  as  cocoa-nut  milk,  and  such-like. 
For  all  which  reasons,  we  meant  to  have  this  room  as  far  as 
could  be  contrived  from  the  kitchen  fire. 

Item,  one  recess  apart  in  the  driest  and  safest  corner  of  the 
cave,  to  stow  away  securely  our  small  stock  of  powder : ’t 
was  but  a mere  handful,  indeed,  yet  might  prove  the  safety 
of  us  all  in  case  of  attack,  or  be  our  destruction  if  we  were 
heedless  enough  to  let  any  spark  get  to  it. 

Besides,  -we  needed  a work-room,  for  such  employments  as 
would  litter  or  lumber  our  great  cave  (so  we  called  it),  too 
much  to  carry  on  there.  ’T  would  be,  indeed,  a luxury  more 
than  necessity  to  us : nevertheless,  as  it  was  to  be  bought  by 
labour,  and  lawful  to  enjoy,  we  determined  to  have  it,  in  its 
turn : though  it  came  lower  down  on  our  list.  Further,  a 
sleeping-place  or  two  Tor  ourselves,  and  another  for  the 
Indians.  At  one  time,  we  thought  of  contriving  a kind  of 
stable,  or  out-houses  (if  they  can  be  called  so,  that  were  in- 
side the  rock),  for  our  live  stock,  to  protect  them  from  wild 
creatures  of  their  own  kinds,  or  beasts  of  prey.  But  our 
other  works  in  the  cave  took  up  such  a time,  we  were  forced 
to  give  over  this  last  plan,  at  least  for  a while.  Nor  was  it  of 
so  much  importance  as  the  rest,  after  all ; for  our  peccaries 
throve  well  enough  in  the  ring-fence  above  our  heads,  and 
were  never  molested,  at  least,  nothing  to  speak  of : though 
once  or  twice  a sea-eagle  made  a swoop  on  our  farm-yard, 
and  carried  off  a young  pig. 

I say,  a young  one ; for,  what  with  two  or  three  litters 
bred  in  the  farm,  and  some  beside,  that  we  captured  and 
brought  in  from  time  to  time,  we  were  soon  very  thriving 
farmers  of  live  stock ; in  short,  we  had  so  many,  we  were 
rather  concerned  to  thin  them  out,  than  add  to  them.  And 
from  thenceforward  we  never  shot  down  peccaries  for  our 
larder;  for  that  were  like  carrying  coals  to  Newcastle:  but 
when  we  took  our  bows  (and  we  took  them  every  day  again, 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


197 


when  the  rains  were  over)  ’t  was  more  to  keep  onr  hands 
in  practice,  and  to  fetch  in  a dainty,  in  the  shape  of  a wild 
turkey,  or  brace  of  parrots,  or  what  not.  And  at  last,  we 
took  to  shooting  fish,  too,  with  some  success. 

But  to  return  to  the  cave ; I believe  nine  men  (unless 
galley-slaves,  or  exiles  in  the  Siberian  mines)  seldom  worked 
harder  underground  than  we  did,  all  through  the  rainy  sea- 
son : for  it  must  be  observed,  we  were  miners  on  our  own 
account,  and  worked  for  no  task -master ; who,  the  moment 
his  eye  was  off,  had  no  more  work  done  for  him.*  Nor 
were  we  ever  reduced  to  drive  a bargain,  or  haggle  about 
charging  by  the  piece,  or  by  the  time.  All  was  straight  be- 
fore us,  and  all  was  our  own ; our  hands  strong,  our  hearts 
cheery  ; and  being  bound  together  by  one  common  interest, 
each  was  forward  to  help  the  others,  well  knowing  he  would 
be  helped  in  turn.  Don  Manuel  gave  us  the  plan,  indeed, 
for  our  caves ; but  was  far  from  being  like  some  who  insist 
on  doing  good  in  their  own  way,  or  not  at  all.  He  adopted 
on  the  spot  some  changes  we  wished  made  ; and  took  his  turn 
so  cheerfully  in  hewing  the  other  rooms,  we  were  eager  to  help 
him  with  the  chapel.  " 

I will  have  done  with  all  this,  after  a few  words  about  that 
chapel  of  ours.  ’T  was  very  neatly  coved,  or  vaulted  over,  as 
high  as  we  could  well  reach,  standing  mostly  on  a log  and 
some  large  stones.  Having  time  on  hands,  we  took  a pride 
in  smoothing  the  roof  fair  and  even  ; as  to  the  walls,  we  de- 
termined not  only  to  smoothe  them,  but  plaster  them  too,  as 
we  afterwards  did  with  well-kneaded  clay,  tempered  and 
stiffened  with  a gluey  kind  of  sap  that  we  found  oozing  out 
from  some  gum  trees  up  and  down  the  island.  This  with 
small  holes  drilled  here  and  there  in  the  walls,  as  a kind  of 
hold-fasts,  made  the  clay  stick  well  enough,  and  we  were  not 
a little  proud  of  our  plastered  chapel.  But  the  chief  of  our 
care  we  spent  on  the  altar-end ; for  there  we  hollowed  out  an 
alcove  in  the  rock,  vaulting  the  roof  of  it  in  a half  circle.  In 

* If  Don  Manuel  had  heard  (as  perhaps  he  did)  this  remark  of 
Owen’s,  he  would  probably  have  reminded  his  friend,  that  we  are  bid- 
den, in  our  service  to  our  Divine  Master,  not  to  resemble  those  servants 
who  are  only  faithful  as  long  as  they  are  under  their  employer’s  eye. 
“ Servants”,  says  the  Apostle,  “ be  obedient  to  them  that  are  your  lords 
according  to  the  flesh,  with  fear  and  trembling,  in  the  simplicity  of 
your  hearts,  as  to  Christ : not  serving  to  the  eye , as  it  were  pleasing 
men,  but  as  the  servants  of  Christ,  doing  the  will  of  God  from  the 
heart ; with  a good  will  serving,  as  to  the  Lord,  and  not  to  men” — 
Ephes vi.  6.  So  also  Coloss.,  iii.  22, 24. — Ed. 


198 


TIIE  ADVENTURES  OF 


the  midst  of  this,  we  left  the  altar  standing,  being  a block  of 
the  native  stone,  which  we  shaped  by  degrees,  according  to 
Don  Manuel’s  directions. 

Then,  nothing  would  content  us,  but  we  must  paint  this 
end,  as  well  as  plaster  it : so,  while  the  clay  was  still  moist, 
we  contrived  some  red  colour  from  the  juice  of  a wild  berry ; 
the  Indians  fetched  these  to  us,  when  they  understood  what  we 
would  be  at.  They  also  brought  in  some  earth  of  a brownish 
yellow,  like  ochre,  and  this  gave  us  two  colours  ; being  lighter 
in  the  natural  unburnt  state,  and  turning  to  a tawney  red 
when  calcined  in  our  wood  fire.  Some  black  loam,  or  peat,  of 
decayed  leaves  or  fibres,  made  up  our  list  of  colours : with 
these  four,  we  set  to  work  ; first  mixing  them  up  with  our  gum, 
till  they  were  near  as  stiff  as  japan  painting  on  a screen  or 
tea  chest.  Then  we  drew  patterns  within  the  alcove,  on  the 
yellow*white  of  our  clay  plastering  ; marking  it  all  over  with 
regular  lines,  now  in  one  colour,  now  with  another,  sometimes 
with  several  together,  side  by  side,  and  here  and  there  with 
an  imitation  of  trees,  plants,  and  birds.  ’T  was  all  under  our 
friend’s  guidance ; for  he  showed  himself,  indeed,  no  mean 
artist  here : at  length,  our  rock  chapel  was  a wonder  for  its 
decorations,  and,  when  lighted  up  with  candles,  ’t  was  really  a 
sight  to  look  at. 

This  bird  and  tree-painting  (except  only  grinding  and  mixing 
the  colours)  we  pursued  mostly  on  Sundays,  after  our  morning 
devotions,  and  before  evening  prayers,  or  just  before  or  after 
the  sermon  : for  all  these  things  we  had  every  Sunday, 
and  two  of  them,  i.e.  prayers,  twice,  with  no  sermon,  every 
day.  It  surprised  me  a little  that  Don  Manuel,  who  was  so 
exact  in  many  things  where  we  had  seen  no  harm,  should 
even  encourage  us  to  do  this  on  the  Sabbath  day ; but  he  ex- 
plained to  us,  ’t  was  not  servile  work,  which  alone  is  forbidden 
to  Christians  on  Sundays  : artist-paintings  like  these,  espe 
cially  when  done  only  for  pastime,  not  for  gain,  being  a liberal 
occupation,  and  what  rich  men  do  (if  they  have  skill  in  it) 
merely  to  entertain  their  minds,  who  would  scorn  to  receive 
payment  for  it.  From  which  he  took  occasion  to  remark,  how 
needful  it  was  to  have  a surer  guide  on  such  points,  as  to  what 
was  right  and  what  unlawful,  than  men’s  own  wayward  fancies ; 
and  repeated  again  what  he  said  to  me  once  before  (and  vexed 
me  with  him  at  the  time)  about  our  eating  meat  with  the 
blood  in  it,  simply  because  the  Church  said  we  might. 

“ We  must  always  honour”,  says  he,  u a man  for  following 
his  conscience;  unless ’t  is  so  plainly  astray  that  he  ought  to  see 


OAVEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


199 


’t  is  misleading  him.  All  this  great  exactness  about  keeping 
the  Sabbath  comes,  perhaps,  from  a good  principle  ; but  a good 
principle  may  run  mad,  as  it  has  done  in  this  point.  It  aimed 
at  keeping  the  commandment;  and  so  far  well.  But  the 
human  mind,  left  to  its  own  guidance,  fails  to  see  Avhere  the 
commandment  begins  and  ends  ; Avhat  observance  is  retained, 
and  what  is  lawfully  modified.  If  you  obey  the  command- 
ment to  the  letter,  you  ought  to  keep  Saturday  holy,  not 
Sunday  at  all.  Except  for  the  Catholic  Church,  I say  again, 
you  commit  a sin  every  Saturday  of  your  lives,  and  deserve 
to  be  stoned,  as  the  man  was  stoned  in  the  Avilderness,  for 
gathering  sticks  on  the  Sabbath.*  The  Church,  by  the  au- 
thority she  derives  from  her  Lord,  has  changed  the  day  itself, 
and  the  mode  of  its  observance.  Your  teachers,  dear  friends, 
have  kept  the  Christian  day,  but  not  with  Christian  observ- 
ance. Accordingly,  in  England,  I am  told,  Sunday  is  a very 
gloomy  affair,  while  other  evils  are  rife,  which  are  too  lightly 
thought  of.  And  in  your  colony  of  New  England,  the  special 
plantation  of  Puritan  colonists,  they  make  it  criminal  for  a 
citizen  to  smoke  his  pipe  on  Sunday,  or  have  a hot  dinner,  or 
take  a quiet  walk  for  recreation.  Ah,  poor  souls,  poor  souls !” 
continued  he,  Avith  a look  of  pity  : il  well  for  them,  if  that 
Avere  all ! But  they  that  in  vain  observe  vanities,  forsake 
their  own  mercy”. 


CHAPTER  LI. 


WHAT  A\rE  OUGHT  TO  HAVE  KNOWN  BEFORE. 

HJR  evenings  were  spent,  as  they  had  been  out 
of  doors,  round  our  fire ; but  not  idle  time, 
neither : we  scarce  knew  what  it  Avas  to  sit 
with  our  hands  before  us,  as  some  do  who 
have  what  they  call  u time  on  their  hands”, 
and  find  it  weigh  heavy  there  : we  always 
worked  at  someAvhat,  bjr  the  light  of  our 
candle-nuts,  or  lamps  of  shark’s  oil,  or  tallow  of  the  peccaries 
kept  heated,  and  a cotton  wick.  For  in  these  three  Avays  we 

* Numbers,  xv.  32,  36. — Ed. 


200 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


had  contrived  for  ourselves  lamps,  or  candles,  howsoever  you 
please  to  name  them ; and  having  good  store,  both  of  these 
and  dry  wood  for  fuel,  and  no  poor  in  our  community,  for 
whom  we  could  spare  anything,  and  deny  it  to  ourselves,  we 
kept  up  a rousing  fire,  with  plenty  of  light ; so  that  our  cave, 
on  winter  nights,  was  a cheerful  place  indeed. 

If  our  hands  were  busy,  so  were  our  tongues  : for  whether 
we  filed  arrow-heads,  or  fitted  them  to  bamboo  shafts,  new- 
strung  our  bows,  or  plaited  cocoa -fibre,  or  spun  off  our  cotton, 
or  sharpened  knives  and  hatchets  of  glimmer,  yet  talk  we  did, 
all  the  while,  with  that  freedom  that  comes  from  confidence 
and  brotherly  charity. 

Don  Manuel  took  a principal  part  in  this ; and ’t  was  not 
in  the  nature  of  man  to  be  dull  when  he  was  by  : at  one  time 
he  could  entertain  us  with  stories  of  what  had  chanced  to 
himself  in  Spain,  or  since  he  left  it ; at  another,  with  some 
strange  adventure  he  knew  to  have  befallen  others.  Several 
evenings  together,  at  our  request,  he  related  some  passages  of 
his  own  life : and  did  it  in  such  a simple,  unaffected  way,  we 
never  tired  of  listening  to  him,  and  would  sometimes  ask  him 
to  go  over  and  over  again  our  favourite  stories.  ’T  was  plain, 
indeed,  he  had  experienced  many  chances  and  dangers ; and 
the  men,  who  had  encountered  such  themselves,  from  a rest- 
less spirit  that  made  them  scapegraces  at  home,  or  from  neces- 
sity to  earn  their  bread  at  sea,  wondered  at  a man  like  this, 
a gentleman  born  (for  so  he  could  not  but  imply,  though  he 
never  said  it),  a scholar,  and  one  of  studious  habits  and  re- 
fined taste,  braving  the  wildest  adventures  for  the  love  of  God 
and  souls.  All  this  was  even  more  than  a sermon  to  us, 
though  given  under  the  guise  of  pastime  : so  that  even  now, 
having  got  so  far  in  this  poor  record  of  our  own  adventures, 
methinks  a life  of  Don  Manuel  had  been  of  more  interest  to 
the  reader,  had  I earlier  attempted  it.  That,  however,  is  too 
late,  or  must  be  thought  of  at  a future  day. 

Well,  such  discourse  tended  to  good,  whether  by  its  own 
nature,  or  the  turn  he  gave  to  it : so  that,  begin  at  what  point 
we  would,  in  most  cases  we  found  ourselves  end  with  a talk 
about  religion.  And ’t  was  Don  Manuel’s  way  so  to  order 
things,  that  what  he  said  was  suited  both  to  the  Indians  and 
ourselves  : or  now  a bit  for  us,  then  again  something  for  them. 
Besides,  we  practised  their  language  by  this  discourse,  and 
they  ours ; our  talk  being  made  up  of  a jargon  betwixt  Eng- 
lish and  Toonati-nookish,  half  and  half.  Indeed,  I found 
this  mode  of  speaking  so  hard  to  shake  off*,  after  the  years  we 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


201 


spent  at  it,  that  when'll  came  back  to  England  (a  thing  I never 
thought  to  do  at  the  time  I now  write  of),  I was  for  ever 
coming  out  with  Indian  words  unawares : so  that  my  friends 
would  jest  with  me,  saying,  I was  but  a half-reclaimed  savage, 
after  all.  In  particular,  that  exclamation  of  theirs,  Oora, 
oora,  at  anything  that  pleased  them  much,  would  stick  by  me ; 
together  with  tabanna , to  express,  thank  you : and  ebelo , a 
word  signifying  dislike  or  pain  of  any  sort.  But  all  this  is 
by  the  way. 

We  had  begun  in  such  ignorance  of  whatever  religion  we 
were  thought  to  profess,  as  made  a great  part  of  Don  Manuel’s 
discourse  to  the  savages  useful  to  us  also.  At  first,  indeed,  my 
in-bred  dislike  against  priests  and  Popery,  with  all  those  old 
wives’  fables  I had  been  brought  up  in  (though  softened  by 
my  knowledge  of  the  man),  made  me  watch  his  discourse 
narrowly,  to  discover  the  point,  as  I supposed,  where  true 
Christianity  ended,  and  papistry  began.  For  though  I ac- 
knowledged in  my  heart,  the  priest  was  a good  man  indeed, 
and  a model  for  any,  yet  (said  I to  myself),  the  East  Indian 
faquirs  also  lead  austere  lives,  and  Quakers  are  harmless, 
charitable  people : also,  I knew  an  old  man  living  near  Caer- 
philly, that  believed  in  no  rising  again  after  death  ; leaving  it 
in  his  will,  he  should  be  buried  und,er  a rose  bush  at  the  end 
of  his  garden,  with  his  favourite  dog  and  magpie ; yet  gave 
large  sums  to  the  poor  at  Christmas,  and  put  out  to  ’prentice 
no  less  than  five  orphan  children,  besides  other  good  deeds. 
Yet  they  were  all  wrong  in  their  opinions,  of  a surety ; and 
so,  said  I to  myself,  may  our  friend  here  be,  too,  with  all  his 
good  Christian  life. 

However,  one  evening,  when  he  was  speaking  on  a point 
that  gave  rise  to  such  thoughts  in  me,  so  that  I ventured, 
with  respect,  to  remind  him  we  were  protestants,  after  all ; 
he  turns  round  to  me  with  surprise,  and  (speaking  only  in 
Spanish  now,  with  some  little  Latin  intermingled,  that  the 
Indians  might  not  perceive  there  was  a difference  betwixt  us)  : 

“Why,  friend”,  says  he,  “ do  not  you  believe  that,  as  well 
as  I ?” 

“ You  know”,  he  added,  in  a more  affectionate  way,  “ how 
sorry  I should  be  to  give  you  pain : but  let  me  say,  plainly, 
no  one  who  does  not  believe  what  I was  then  saying,  can  be 
called” — And  here  he  stopped,  seeming  not  to  know  how  to 
go  on. 

“A  Catholic,  I suppose  ?”  said  I to  him. 

“Well”,  he  answered,  “ let  us  leave  it  so,  for  a time”. 


202 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


“ A Roman  Catholic  then  ?”  I pursued,  for  I wanted  to  see 
what  he  meant  by  this. 

££  That  was  not  what  I had  on  the  tip  of  my  tongue”,  says 
he,  smiling,  ££  nor  is  there  any  such  distinction  to  be  made 
between  the  terms  : but  shall  I offend  you,  my  friend,  or  shall 
I pain  you,  if  I say  what  I really  was  thinking  ? Would  it  not 
be  better  to  follow  this  out  another  time : — say,  next  time  we 
walk  together  ?” 

u Do  not  fear,  Senor”,  I replied,  ££  for  you  could  not  offend 
me,  unless  you  became  other  than  I have  known  you  up  to 
this.  I will  only  ask  for  the  one  word  you  did  not  say.  The 
man  who  does  not  believe  the  Virgin  Mary  is  to  be  venerated 
as  the  Mother  of  God,  is  not — what  is  he  not  ?” 

££  Did  you  never”,  he  asked,  looking  at  me  kindly,  ££  begin  a 
sentence,  and  then  wish  you  had  not  to  finish  it  ?” 

££  Sometimes”,  I said,  waxing  somewhat  impatient  (for  we 
Welshmen  are  apt  to  get  a little  hot  in  our  tempers  when  we 
are  crossed),  ££  but  that  is  not  the  question  just  now.  Pray 
tell  me,  Sir  ; he  is  not — what  ?” 

“ Well,  then”,  saj^s  he,  speaking  slow,  in  a thoughtful  way, 
££  it  may  be  the  defect  of  his  bringing  up,  and  the  false  tradi- 
tion of  his  fathers ; or  there  may  be  excuses  found  for  him, 
some  of  which  I can  see,  and  others  I cannot  see ; he  may  be 
better  in  practice  than  his  opinions  would  lead  to  ; prepared 
to  receive  the  truth  whenever ’t  is  really  put  before  him  y all 
those  are  favourable  points  in  his  case”. 

££  Well,  well ; granted  : but  he  is  not — what,  if  you  please, 
sir  ?” 

££  Pie  cannot”,  says  the  priest,  ££in  any  true  sense,  be  called 
a Christian ; that  is,  a disciple  of  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ”. 

He  spoke  it  as  if  it  gave  him  real  pain  to  say  the  word ; 
which  now  (looking  back  on  this)  I am  sure  it  did.  But 
at  the  moment,  I only  considered  the  words  themselves  ; and 
felt  staggered,  almost  like  one  who  has  received  a sudden 
blow.  Don  Manuel  saw  this ; and  only  added,  as  tenderly 
as  a woman,  like  ; 

££  Listen,  now ; let  us  see  what  our  Indian  friends  have  to 
say  about  it.  They  have  no  early  prejudices  to  overcome ; 
having  never  heard  of  Christianity  but  through  a Catholic 
priest ; observe  how  these  truths  affect  a simple  mind,  that 
lately  was  like  a blank  sheet  of  paper  on  the  first  ideas  of  the 
Christian  faith : then  weigh  and  balance,  for  yourself,  what 
you  have  been  taught  against  their  convictions ; and  see  if  two 
and  two  do  not  make  four”. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


203 


So  he  took  my  hand  with  more  than  his  wonted  kindness : 
for  we  sat  next  one  another  at  the  fire,  the  other  men  and  the 
Indians  making  up  the  circle,  though  they  had  understood 
scarce  a word.  Then,  turning  again  to  John  Pounder,  he 
went  on. 


CHAPTER  LII. 


ANOTHER  LEAF  OUT  OF  THE  CATECHISM. 


UT  first,  it  seemed  to  strike  him,  the  rest 
might  be  tired  of*  speaking  on  such  grave 
things  for  that  time.  “So  I put  it  to  the 
vote”,  says  lie,  cheerfully.  “Would  you 
like,  friends,  to  strike  into  some  other  dis- 
course, or  shall  I now  continue  ? We  have 
about  a quarter  of  an  hour,  I suppose,  before 
’t  is  time  for  night  prayers,  and  then  to  rest,  after  a hard 
day’s  work”. 

“ Sir”,  says  Dick  Prodgers,  “ I being  the  oldest  here,  least- 
ways  of  us  white  men,  and  so,  ’t  is  likely,  nigher  to  my  dying 
hour,  would  prefer,  if  agreeable,  to  hear  some  more  about  all 
this : for  I remember”,  says  the  old  tar,  in  a way  that  brought 
the  very  tears  into  Don  Manuel’s  eyes,  “ being  told,  not  long 
ago,  the  things  we  shall  soon  find  ourselves  in  the  midst  of, 
being  eternal,  are  of  greatest  moment”. 

So  said  the  other  men,  more  or  less  ; I mean,  each  in  his 
way ; and  Ned  Hilton,  being  half  asleep,  gave  a little  sort  of 
grunt,  to  vote  with  the  rest. 

“ Well”,  Don  Manuel  continued : “ then  I will  go  on 
awhile  ; and  to-morrow  we  will  go  to  something  else  I have 
in  my  mind”. 

“Now,  my  dear  children”,  says  he  to  the  three  Indians, 
“ do  you  know  your  names  ? We  are  going  to  make  you 
Christians,  and  give  you  Christian  ones,  in  place. of  what  you 
have  been  called  by.  Toefa-oloo”  (this  was  the  old  man), 
what  does  your  name  signify  in  Toonati-nooka  ?” 

I must  explain,  in  what  I here  put  down,  Don  Manuel  had 
by  this  become  so  good  a scholar  in  their  language,  he 


204 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


understood  most  things  they  said,  and  spoke  it  passably  well, 
as  indeed  he  deserved  to  do ; having  taken  all  occasions  to 
converse  with  these  poor  creatures,  for  their  good. 

Toefa-oloo.  “ Tadoone”  (it  means,  in  their  langua ge,  father, 
for  by  this  name  the  priest  had  signified  to  us  all  he  had 
rather  be  called ; so  that  we  dropped  the  Don  pretty  much 
from  that  onward) — “Tadoone”,  says  he,  “Toefa-oloo  all 
same  as  Big  Monkey”. 

At  this,  the  men  set  up  a laugh,  and  the  Indians  joined  in  it; 
though  I would  be  bound,  ’t  was  out  of  compliment  to  us  only. 

Don  M.  (smiling).  “ Well,  we  will  find  a better  name  for 
you,  my  dear.  What  did  I tell  you  you  would  be,  when  the 
holy  water  of  life  was  poured  over  you  ?” 

Toeja-oloo.  “ Den  I be  Mark,  Tadoone”. 

Don  M.  “ Yes,  that  will  be  your  name,  I know.  And 
why  shall  I give  you  that  name  ?” 

Toefa-oloo.  “’Cause  of  one  great  much  holy  man;  he 
make  black  strokes  so,  so  (making  with  his  hand  as  though 
he  were  writing),  in  great  holy  book”. 

Don  M.  “ And  what  was  the  book  about  ?” 

Toefa-oloo.  “ He  put  down  in  book  much  what  great, 
great,  great  holy  God  He  say,  He  do,  He  hooroo-hooroo”  (Mark 
could  not  express  suffer  in  English,  so  he  used  here  the  word 
in  his  language). 

Don  M.  “ What  did  He  hooroo-hooroo  ?” 

Toefa.  “ Much  great,  much  great : bad  bad  mans  take^ 
bind,  beat,  beat,  den  (the  rest  he  expressed  in  Toonati-nook- 
ish,  not  finding  words  for  it  in  English,  which  made  me  sorry 
the  others  of  us  did  not  understand  him,  for  they  had  taken 
no  pains  to  learn  any  but  the  commonest  Indian  words)  ; bad, 
bad  men”,  he  went  on,  “took  Him  to  a mountain,  laid  two 
trees  on  the  ground,  one  across  the  other,  laid  Him  on  the 
trees,  beat  great  nails,  longer  than  shark’s  teeth,  quite 
through  His  tender  hands  and  feet,  into  the  trees ; then  set 
up  the  biggest  tree,  and  the  smaller  to  it,  and  Him  on,  till 
He  died  from  pain”. 

Don  M.  (still  in  English).  “ Yes,  that  was  what  He  suf- 
fered, indeed,  and  much  more.  But  why  was  it  He  suffered  ? 
Who  was  He,  all  the  time  ?” 

Toefa.  (bowing  his  head).  “ Great,  great,  great  much 
holy  God”. 

Don  M.  “ And  what  is  His  name”  ? 

Toefa.  (bowing  again,  with  the  sign  of  the  cross  on  his  fore- 
head and  breast).  “ Otooma-Tehe,  Jesus  Christus”. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


205 


I must  explain  here  that  Otooma-Tehe  was  the  word  Toefa 
had  coined  (for  he  had  to  coin  it)  to  express  the  Christian 
idea  of  God,  in  distinction  from  their  word  for  an  idol,  which 
was  henatanoo.  Now,  Otooma-Tehe  is  made  up  of  the  three 
words,  Oteo  (one),  Tooma  (lord  or  chief),  and  Etehe  (spirit) ; 
and  the  poor  Indian  was  not  a little  fond  of  his  new  word : as 
I could  discover  by  his  singing  it  to  himself  in  a low  voice 
while  he  was  at  work,  as  though  he  delighted  to  have  found 
one  true  God  in  place  of  the  multitude  of  his  false  ones.  But 
to  return. 

Don  M.  “ Tell  me  now,  could  not  Otooma-Tehe  do  all 
things  that  He  would  ?” 

Toefa . “ O yes,  O yes ! all,  Tadoone”. 

Don  M.  “What,  more  than  Paowanga?  more  than  Hav- 
aeoeekee  ?” 

The  poor  old  man  looked  up  into  the  father’s  face,  sur- 
prised, to  discover  what  he  meant  by  asking  this.  But  seeing 
the  priest  smiled,  he  laughed  outright,  clapping  his  hands  ; 
then  he  spat  twice  into  the  fire,  to  express  his  contempt  for 
his  former  idols  : each  time  he  did  so,  he  said,  “ Udan,  Pao- 
wanga  he  no  good ! Udan,  Havaeoeekee  he  no  good”. 

On  this,  the  other  two  Indians  began  to  spit  likewise  into 
the  fire ; crying  at  the  top  of  their  voices,  “ Eaha-noue,  he 
he  he  no  good ; Eaha-noue,  he  he  he  no  good !”  till  the  cave 
rang  again. 

Our  thoughtless  Hilton,  being  waked  by  this  out  of  his 
sleep,  and  learning  what  was  going  on,  burst  into  an  up- 
roarious laugh,  and  was  joined  in  it  by  the  rest:  so,  what 
with  their  merriment,  and  what  with  the  poor  Indians  making 
their  act  of  detesting  their  idols  (which  they  did  again  and 
again),  there  was  noise  enough.  When  it  had  ceased  a little, 
though  every  now  and  then  one  would  burst  forth  again,  so 
greatly  did  this  proceeding  take  the  men’s  fancies,  Don 
Manuel  (the  father,  I had  better  say)  went  on  quietly. 

The  Father.  “ True,  my  dear : our  good  Lord  and  God  is 
Almighty  ; He  can  do  everything  He  wills  to  do.  Then,  why 
did  He  let  those  bad  men  take,  and  put  Him  to  pain  and 
death?” 

Toefa.  “ Tadoone,  He  give  His  own  life  up  to  dat”. 

The  Father.  “ And  why  ?” 

Toefa.  “ O,  oh!  give  His  self  to  make  Toefa-oloo  be  happy, 
happy;  and  Rer-mimebolamba  happy,  and  Poula-faihe  happy, 
and  Eaha-noue  in  Toonati-nooka  happy,  all  happy,  all  much 
happy,  for  long  time,  long,  0,  long !” 


206 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


The  Father.  “ And  White  Sas  happy  too  ?” 

Old  Mark  (so  we  mostly  called  him)  seemed  puzzled  to  know 
what  to  answer;  looking  upon  us,  after  all,  as  superior  crea- 
tures; and,  I believe,  something  as  we  look  on  the  angels, 
beings  that  have  never  been  redeemed,  because  they  have 
never  fallen.  On  the  other  hand,  he  was  quite  sure,  if  the 
brown  man  was  to  be  made  happy,  the  white  man  was  (some- 
how) to  be  happier.  So  he  was  there,  I may  say,  in  a cleft 
stick,  and  knew  not  which  side  to  take  : but  sat,  shaking  his 
head,  looking  first  at  one  then  at  another  of  us. 

“Well,  old  mess-mate”,  cried  Harry  Gill,  at  last,  “ do  you 
not  wish  us  to  be  happy  too  ?” 

“ O,  oh!”  he  answered  : “ me  ’spose  white  Sas  much  happy, 
much ; me  ’spose,  white  Sas  happy  one  place,  brown  mans 
happy  one  place” ; he  meant,  each  would  be  happy,  but  sepa- 
rate. “ Brown  here”,  says  he,  stretching  out  his  left  hand, 
“White  here”,  and  stretched  out  his  right. 

“ No,  my  dear  brother”,  cries  the  priest,  and  leaned  for- 
ward to  embrace  him ; “ there  is  one  heaven,  as  there  is  one 
Otooma-Tehe:  and  may  we  all  be  happy  there  together !” 
Then  the  other  Indians,  too,  began  repeating,  Oora , oora! 
nodding  their  heads  again  and  again. 

At  this  moment,  I whispered  to  him,  he  had  not  made  the 
Indian  prove  to  me,  none  but  a Catholic  could  be  a true 
disciple. 

“ Aye,  indeed”,  says  he,  thinking  ; then  turned  to  Toefa- 
oloo  again. 

Don  M.  “ But  tell  me  this ; when  did  our  Lord  Jesus 
Christus  speak  to  moonaee-etoeea  (all  mankind)  ?” 

Toefa.  “ Otooma-Tehe  first  dead,  dead ; then — 

Don  M.  u Stay  awhile  ; how  could  He  die,  if  He  is  God, 
and  Almighty  ?” 

Toefa.  “ Tadoone,  you  me  tell,  Otooma-Tehe  He  no  die, 
no  die  : but  etoee  (that  is  their  word  for  man),  yes,  he  much 
die : Otooma-Tehe  He  make  His  own  self  be  etooe,  so  He, 
etooe,  all  one  : so  He  die”. 

Don  M.  u True  ; God  became  man,  that  He  might  die 
for  us  all ; and  He  is  both  God  and  man  in  One  Person. 
But  how  did  Otooma-Tehe  become  man  ?” 

Toeja.  u O,  Oh  ! Otooma-Tehe  He  make,  He  choose,  one 
much,  much  holy  young  maiden  (he  expressed  this  partly  in 
his  own  language),  He  make  her  love  all  what  Otooma-Tehe 
He  love ; He  place  great  much  strong  matan-geeva  (shield) 
over  :”  (I  now  see  though  I did  not  understand  him  at  the 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


207 


time,  he  meant  to  repeat  something  the  father  had  taught  him 
of  the  Blessed  Virgin  being  preserved  from  all  sin,  and  4 the 
fiery  darts  of  the  most  wicked  one’)  : “ den  He  come,  He  make 
His  own  self  be  her  child”. 

Don  M.  “ And  what  is  this  maiden’s  name  ?” 

Toefa.  (bowing  again)  “Maria  Deotokos”.* 

Don  M.  “ Quite  right ; and  that  means,  Mary  the  Mother 
of  God.  Why  do  we  call  her  that  ?” 

Old  Mark  did  not  seem  to  see  what  Tadoone  could  mean 
by  the  question  : and  looked  up  again  in  his  face,  surprised. 

“ You  see”,  said  the  priest  to  me  in  Spanish,  “ the  question 
in  itself  is  such  a simple  one,  he  thinks  there  must  be  some- 
thing more  in  my  asking  it  than  he  sees  ; and  so  he  does  not 
answer”. 

“ Please  to  make  him  answer,  though,  sir”,  said  I to  him 
again,  in  the  same  language. 

Don  M . (in  English).  “Well,  Toefa,  who  is  Maria  the 
mother  of  ?” 

Toefa.  “Maria  she  O much  mother  Otooma-Tehe,  oora, 
oora,  Tadoone”. 

“ There  you  have  it,  friend”,  says  the  priest  again  to  me,  in 
his  Spanish,  “ what  want  you  more  ? Mary  is  the  mother  of 
our  Lord.  He  is  but  One  Person,  God  and  man : all  that 
takes  place  in  His  human  nature,  being  one  of  His  two  natures, 
takes  place  in  the  Person  of  God ; she  bears  Him  in  her  pure 
bosom,  therefore  she  bears  her  God : quern  genuit , adorcivit: 
she  is  His  mother,  and  so  she  is  most  truly  the  mother  of  God. 
Not  to  believe  this,  would  be  disbelieving  that  He  is  truly  both 
God  and  man ; but  that  is  the  essence  of  the  Christian  faith  : 
hence,  to  deny  Mary  to  be  Mother  of  God,  is  to  deny  the 
Christian  faith”. 

He  saw  me  look  unsatisfied  still : “Well”,  says  he,  gaily, 
“I  will  put  it  to  him  more  closely  for  a moment ; and  then, 
no  more.  John  Pounder  and  Samuel,  go  ; light  the  candles  in 
the  chapel,  we  will  come  in  a minute.  Now,  Toefa,  listen. 
(He  here  began  to  speak  Indian  again.)  What  is  that  you 
used  to  put  over  your  face  (you  told  me)  when  you  went  into 
battle,  to  make  yourself  look  terrible  to  your  enemies  ?” 

Toeja , “ A mask  of  red  bird’s  feathers,  father”. 

Don  M.  “ It  hid  your  face,  and  you  were  behind  it  ?” 

Toefa.  “ Yes,  indeed”. 

* Properly,  Theotokos , the  title  solemnly  given  to  the  Blessed  Virgin 
at  the  Council  of  Ephesus,  a.d.  431,  against  Nestorius,  who  asserted 
the  existence  of  two  distinct  persons  in  our  Lord. — Ed. 


208 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


Don  M.  “ But ’t  was  not  yourself,  all  the  while  ?” 

Toefa  (laughing)  “ Oh,  no,  no”. 

Don  M.  “ Attend,  now.  Was  it  in  that  way  that  God 
became  man  ? Did  He  merely  conceal  Himself  behind  the 
nature  or  appearance  of  man  ?” 

Toefa.  “ No,  my  father ; you  have  taught  me,  He  became 
really,  truly  man  for  us”. 

Don  M.  “ As  truly  man  as  you  and  I ?” 

Toefa.  “ Yes,  praise  and  thanks : but  all  holy,  pure”. 

Don  M.  “Was  He  less  God  than  before,  for  doing  so  ?” 
Toefa.  “ Perfect  God,  perfect  man,  in  one  Person”. 

Don  M.  “ Then,  whom  did  the  Blessed  Mary  bear  ?” 
Toefa.  “ Ah,  father  ! are  you  punishing  me  for  some  fault  ? 
wrhy,  God,  to  be  sure”. 

Don  M.  “ That  will  do.  Blow  the  horn,  and  wake  up  the 
sleepers.  We  are  going  to  prayers”. 

So  we  went  to  our  prayers : and  afterwards  we  heard  (for 
the  first  time)  the  Indians  singing  in  their  part  of  the  cave, 
by  way  of  practice,  a morning  hymn  which  Tadoone  had  com- 
posed for  them ; for  they  were  to  sing  it,  it  seems,  the  first 
thing  next  morning,  which  was  a festival  day.  It  went  to  one 
of  their  wild  Indian  airs  : and  had  a strange  kind  of  pleasing 
solemn  sound  about  it  which  took  the  men  greatly ; so  that  we 
soon  caught  it,  and  made  it  part  of  our  morning  devotions. 
Thus  it  ran : 


Goole  majeela  a bo  tahapai, 

Kowya  reea  teegaro  chee  ; 

Taharo  elan  eroo  mata  liai, 

Mate  ka  waia  tohooda  take. 

Sha'ingala  tiri  laine  moaffa, 

Jesus  aiine  ta  lia  lenehoo  ; 

Teema  Tadoon’  Eteheti  nar’  affa, 

Faida  Maria  pakulle  ta  moo. 

The  meaning  of  it  is,  in  English  : 

On  the  tops  of  our  cocoa  palms  when  first  a light  shines, 

Let  us  arise  to  adore  Him  that  sustained  us  (in  life)  ; 

Most  pure,  most  merciful,  pleased  with  obedient  children, 

Who  on  the  two-trees  (i.e.,  the  Cross)  showed  us  His  great  love. 

He,  the  Redeemer,  speaking  (pleading,  appealing),  claims  our  hearts; 

His  thrice-holy  name  is  Jesus,  born  and  dying: 

Let  us  love  Him,  with  the  Father  and  Holy  Spirit, 

Next  to  them  also  Mary  our  Mother. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


209 


CHAPTER  LIII. 

SPRING-TIDE  LABOURS. 


HUS  employed,  we  got  through  the  rainy 
season : indeed,  the  return  of  fair  weather 
surprised  us,  so  much  had  we  to  do  inside 
the  cave,  and  so  well  used  did  we  become  to 
close  confinement,  with  cheerful  labour.  At 
length  we  issued  from  our  retreat  on  a fresh 
spring  morning,  as  Noe  and  his  family  might 
have  stepped  out  of  their  ark  on  to  the  green  earth,  bathed 
in  the  waters  of  the  flood : we  smelled  the  flowers  and  the 
trees,  and  plucked  the  fresh  shoots  and  blossoms  in  our  abun- 
dance, with  the  birds  singing  round  on  every  side ; and  nature 
seemed  to  burst  forth  at  once  with  the  vigour  of  a tropical 
spring.  “And  if  nature  can  give  such  a new  sense  of  life 
and  joy”,  says  Tadoone,  “by  the  mere  return  of  spring  to  the 
land  of  our  exile,  strewing  such  flowers  on  our  pilgrimage 
path,  what  will  it  be  to  range  the  Paradise  of  God  with  the 
Saints,  where  the  pure,  bright  atmosphere  is  charity,  when 
sorrow  and  sin  shall  have  fled  for  ever  ?” 

Among  the  first  things  we  had  to  do,  was  to  look  to  our 
farm ; for  the  violent  rains  had  damaged  the  fences,  so  that 
if  we  had  not  sent  out  the  Indians  from  time  to  time  to  repair 
some  gaps  in  them,  our  tame  peccaries  would  doubtless  have 
escaped  to  the  woods.  We  now  made  our  ring-fence  stronger, 
by  driving  in  stakes  here  and  there,  of  a kind  of  supple  osier, 
which  quickly  took  root,  and  shot  out  a strong,  tough  branch 
or  tendril  on  all  sides : so  that,  in  the  four  years  and  a-quar- 
ter  we  spent  in  that  exile,  by  lacing  and  weaving  them,  in 
and  in,  every  spring  as  they  shot  forth  again,  we  formed  a 
hedge  that,  for  strength  and  thickness,  would  have  puzzled  a 
whole  herd  of  peccaries  to  break  through. 


14 


210 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


Next,  we  added  to  the  plantation  I spoke  of  before,  to  con- 
ceal the  approach  to  onr  cave ; we  added  to  the  number  of 
winding  passages,  and  the  decoys,  or  wrong  turns,  that  led 
each  to  its  pit-fall,  or  else  to  a blind  alley  so  narrow  that  the 
enemy,  did  he  get  in,  would  scarce  have  room  to  turn  in  it ; 
but,  pushing  on  deeper,  would  find  himself  trapped  much  in 
the  way  they  take  to  snare  wild  elephants  in  India.  We 
contrived  these  with  some  skill,  for  we  had  even  too  great  a 
stock  of  time,  and  we  laid  down  a rule  for  ourselves,  to  work 
a certain  while  every  day,  which  was  four  hours  in  the  cool 
weather  (more  or  less,  for  we  tied  not  ourselves  exactly  to 
it),  and  in  the  heats  from  two  to  two  and  a-half,  early  and 
late.  Such,  I say,  was  our  engineering  craft  in  the  con- 
trivance of  this  maze,  that  we  made  the  pit-falls  be  just  in  a 
point  that  was  overlooked  from  a thicket  right  above  the 
mouth  of  our  cave : so  that  one  or  several  of  us,  concealed 
in  the  thicket,  could  have  poured  our  arrows  upon  the  enemy 
in  his  perplexity,  and  remain  unseen  all  the  while. 

Later  on,  too,  in  our  exile  (for  I may  as  well  finish  about 
this,  once  for  all),  that  is,  in  the  third  rainy  season  we  spent 
on  the  island,  having  then,  as  I shall  presently  relate,  more 
hands  sent  to  us,  whom  we  never  invited  nor  expected,  we 
made  our  cave  still  bigger  : for  then  we  hewed  out  two  more 
sleeping  places,  besides  cutting  shelves  and  cupboards  in 
several  of  the  passages,  up  and  down.  At  length,  the  whim 
seized  us,  we  would  make  us  another  entrance  to  our  cave 
altogether,  to  serve  us  for  an  approach  from  the  western  side, 
or  (as  the  rabbit  makes  two  holes  to  its  burrow)  give  us  an 
escape  in  case  of  our  citadel  being  stormed  by  the  grand 
stair-case.  We  made  a survey  how  the  ground  lay  above, 
treading  up  and  down  the  table-land  over  the  cave,  or  from 
that  to  westward,  to  see  where  the  rock  dipped  nighest  the 
level  of  the  cave,  so  to  have  least  trouble  in  cutting  the  pas- 
sage. At  last  we  found  the  spot  where  (by  pur  closest 
reckoning)  we  had  best  begin : so  then,  dividing  ourselves 
into  gangs,  as  before,  (but  now  with  more  than  double  the 
number  in  each  gang,  as  the  reader  will  see  in  its  place),  wre 
worked  steadily  every  day  for  the  best  part  of  two  weeks,  I 
am  sure  ; and  got  down  a prodigious  way  into  the  rock : fur- 
ther than  we  thought  we  should  have  to  go  at  all,  till  we 
began  to  fear  we  were  out  in  our  reckoning  of  the  depth,  or 
had  cut  at  a wrong  angle  for  the  slope.  All  at  once,  we 
broke  indeed  into  our  cave ; but,  whereas  we  hoped  to  light 
on  a passage  we  had  (before  this  time)  partly  worked  beyond 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


211 


the  kitchen,*  we  found,  instead,  we  had  broken  through  the 
roof  of  our  chapel,  by  its  western  corner,  furthest  from  the 
altar  : and  we  knew  at  once  where  we  had  got  to,  by  hearing 
the  plaster  fall  inward  on  the  floor.  Well,  the  thing  being- 
done,  there  was  no  help  for  it : we  made  us  another  ladder 
of  trees,  with  rounds  of  wood  bound  tight  with  flax  and 
supple-jack,  to  reach  up  from  the  chapel  floor  to  our  new 
passage,  and  so  used  it  from  time  to  time ; but  not  so  much 
as  we  first  thought  of  doing,  and  chiefly  to  bring  down  heavy 
weights,  that  we  could  not  sling  up  by  the  other  door. 

To  go  back  now  from  this  to  our  first  rainy  season : of  all 
our  manufactures,  some  fishing  nets  (we  judged)  would  be 
most  useful;  as  indeed  afterwards  they  proved  to  be.  We 
set  about  them  so  soon  as  we  had  mined  ourselves  fairly 
into  the  rock  ; working  at  them  at  odd  times  in  the  day,  and 
by  our  fire-light  every  evening.  Here,  too,  the  Indians  sur- 
passed us  in  their  ingenious  twisting  of  the  fibres  to  make  the 
nets’  meshes;  so  that  by  degrees  we  left  the  work  in  their 
hands,  and  particularly  in  old  Mark’s,  who  was  less  able  for 
the  hard  work  of  hewing  the  rock.  He  told  us,  they  were 
well  used  in  Toonati-nooka  to  make  a sort  of  draw -net,  or 
seine ; with  these  they  took  large  quantities  of  fish  in  the 
gulfs  and  inlets  of  their  island,  but  mostly  in  the  spring -tide 
of  the  year.  Sometimes  they  would  venture  out  into  the 
deep  sea,  but  then  always  went  in  armed  canoes,  to  defend 
themselves  from  the  fishers  of  Hai-vavaoo,  who  were  for  ever 
coming  out  against  them  in  strong  parties,  to  dispute  the 
fishery ; and  would  now  and  then  run  in  like  so  many  pirates, 
into  the  bays  of  Toonati,  and,  after  a fierce  struggle,  carry  off 
nets  and  fish  together. 

It  seemed,  these  fisheries  were  the  cause,  or  pretence,  of 
that  war  that  was  almost  for  ever  being  waged  between  the 
savages  of  the  two  islands  : though  Toefa-oloo  told  us,  several 
treaties  of  peace  had  been  made  (within  his  own  memory) 
between  them,  in  the  most  solemn  way  they  knew  how. 
Namely,  they  assemble  (said  he)  the  chiefs  of  both  sides,  and 
the  priests  of  that  side  on  whose  shore  the  treaty  is  to  be 
made : or  they  take  the  priests  out  in  a canoe,  if ’t  is  made 
at  sea.  Then  invoking  Paowanga,  who  is  reckoned  to  be  the 
god  of  war  among  them  (but  the  men  of  Hai-vavaoo  have 
another  idol  named  Komo-arrao,  corresponding  to  him  in 
character,  whom  they  invoke  on  their  part),  they  cut  the 

* Probably  at  the  point  marked  L in  the  margin  of  the  ground  plan, 
p.  193. — Ed. 


212 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


throat  of  an  animal,  mostly  of  a goat,  and  each  party  drinks 
a portion  of  the  blood,  with  various  other  ceremonies.  Such 
a treaty  they  profess  to  hold  very  sacred,  at  least  till  interest 
or  enmity  concur  to  break  it  again. 


CHAPTER  LIY. 

SEA  AND  LAND. 

UT  to  return  to  our  own  nets : we  made  them 
carefully,  of  twisted  cocoa-nut  fibres  and  our 
supple-jack,  dried  by  the  fire  and  beaten  out 
like  hemp,  with  thread  also  spun  from  the 
cotton-plants,  of  which  we  found  a planta- 
tion self-sown,  as  I have  related;  and  of 
these  we  found  others  later,  scattered  here 
and  there  in  the  swampy  parts  of  the  island,  towards  the 
centre  of  it,  or  from  that  to  s.w.  The  Indians  told  us,  in 
their  country  they  made  the  nets  stronger  and  more  supple 
with  hairs  from  their  enemies’  heads,  whom  they  slew  in 
battle,  or  took  prisoners ; for  they  never  spared  those  whom 
they  took,  but  offered  them  all  in  sacrifice  to  Paowanga,  first 
shaving  off  their  hair,  or  pulling  it  away  with  the  scalp,  then 
dashing  out  their  brains  with  a club.  The  poor  fellows  here- 
upon offered  to  part  with  the  very  hair  of  their  heads  to  make 
our  fish-nets  ; for  they  wear  it  long,  never  suffering  knife  or 
razor  to  touch  it  after  they  come  of  age,  but  twisting  it  up  on 
the  crown  of  the  head  with  a bone  pin.  However,  we  would  not 
suffer  them  so  to  despoil  themselves  ; only,  hearing  them 
speak  of  these  pins,  we  asked  what  bones  they  were  made  of ; 
and  when  Tadoone  heard,  they  were  the  arm-bones  of  their 
enemies,  he  made  them  untwist  these  trophies  from  their 
heads,  and  buried  them  with  his  own  hand  in  the  wood  near 
our  cave,  speaking  much  to  Mark  and  the  others  about  that 
savage  custom  of  theirs,  and  how  repugnant  it  was  to  the 
feeling  we  should  have  for  the  living  and  the  dead. 

I could  see,  they  parted  with  their  ornaments  with  a bad 
grace,  and  only  because  Tadoone  asked  it : for  it  seems  in 
their  country ’t  is  reckoned  a thing  disgraceful  for  any  one 
who  has  been  in  war,  to  be  seen  without  an  arm-bone  twisted 
into  his  hair ; as  being  a sign  that  he  was  a coward,  and  slew 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


213 


no  enemies  in  battle.  I made  up  the  loss  to  them,  as  well  as 
I could,  by  dividing  a kerchief  of  gaudy  colours  I wore  round 
my  neck,  half  to  one,  and  half  to  the  other : for  as  to  young 
Samuel,  he  had  never  been  in  battle,  so  had  no  right  to  a 
bone.  But  Mark  and  Pounder  were  much  delighted  with 
their  new  head-dress,  and  wore  it  till  the  sun  and  rain  so 
bleached  the  colours,  you  could  scarce  distinguish  them. 

Before  the  rainy  season  was  over,  we  had  made  us  three 
good  fish-nets,  of  a fairish  size  : and  when  the  spring  had  set 
in,  we  were  visited,  about  Shark’s  Cove  and  the  neighbouring 
shores,  by  such  shoals  of  fish,  some  of  them  old  acquaintances 
(as  herrings  and  mackrel),  others  of  a strange  kind,  in- 
habitants of  these  seas,  as  put  us  beyond  all  fear  of  falling 
short  of  Fridays’  fare.  We  were  forced  to  devise  methods  of 
smoking  and  curing  on  the  beach,  the  numbers  we  drew  to 
shore  with  our  long  net,  or  seine,  and  another  which  we  threw 
in  the  manner  of  a cast-net.  In  this  we  succeeded  passably 
well,  after  some  experiments  and  failures : our  Indians  proving 
useful  here  too,  by  pointing  out  one  or  two  kinds  of  fish  that 
were  poisonous,  or,  at  the  best,  unwholesome. 

At  one  time,  we  thought  of  making  a weir,  or  preserve  for 
our  fish,  as  we  had  made  a farm-yard  for  our  four-footed 
stock  on  land  ; we  might  have  done  it  well  enough,  by  driving 
stakes  across  a part  of  our  inlet,  in  Shark’s  Cove,  at  low-water, 
keeping  them  high  enough  above  high-water  mark  to  hinder 
the  fish  floating  back  with  the  tide ; and  weaving  bamboos  or 
cordage  in  and  out,  to  form  a wattle  under  water,  free  enough 
for  the  tide  to  ebb  through,  but  not  the  fish.  We  gave  up 
that  idea,  however,  partly  because,  in  the  fresh  water  conduit, 
and  other  works  then  engaging  us,  we  had  (as  the  saying  is) 
u other  fish  to  fry”  ; but  mostly  because  the  abundance  of 
these  shoals  was  such  as  supplied  us  for  a long  time  together. 
The  smaller  fry  were  followed  into  the  cove  by  large  fish  that 
came  to  prey  on  them;  as  bonitos,  manchorans,  albicores, 
dog-fish,  and  a kind  of  dolphin,  besides  some  of  our  old 
enemies,  the  sharks,  such  of  them  as  were  able  to  thread  their 
way  through  the  inlet  in  the  reef.  We  managed  to  spear 
several,  or  shoot  them  with  arrows  (all  but  the  sharks,  whose 
hide  is  too  strong  for  such  spears  as  we  had,  and  we  would 
not  waste  powder  on  them)  : then,  waiting  till  the  tide  ebbed, 
or  throwing  round  them  a coil  of  our  native  rope,  we  got 
them  ashore  for  their  oil  and  bones,  as  well  as  meat. 

Others  we  pierced  with  arrows,  but  especially  with  spears, 
having  a biggish  piece  of  bark  or  light  wood  attached  to  them 


214 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


by  a strong  twine,  to  act  as  a buoy,  and  prevent  the  fish  get- 
ting away : by  all  these  arts  we  captured  no  less  than  nine 
or  ten  large  fish  that  were  tolerable  eating,  and  might  have 
had  as  many  dozens  for  the  taking,  only  we  grew  lazy  from 
their  very  abundance ; besides  that  we  had  no  means  to  salt 
down  such  a quantity,  and  did  not  care  to  keep  them  dried 
and  tough,  as  they  would  have  been. 

But  I have  left  out  one  employment  in  which  Don  Manuel 
especially  engaged,  and  kept  to  himself ; ’t  was  not  much  in 
the  way  of  labour,  but  more  by  its  importance  to  us.  I mean, 
the  sowing  of  our  two  or  three  chance  grains  of  wheat  in  a 
little  nook  of  earth  lying  open  to  the  south,  which  Tadoone 
carefully  dug,  and  manured  with  some  of  the  refuse  of  our 
fish,  together  with  leaves  and  burnt  sea-weed.  To  speak 
exactly,  there  were  but  three  grains  in  all ; one  that  stuck  in 
my  knife,  as  I have  said,  and  two  more  I found  later  in  my 
pocket.  He  claimed  these  as  his  portion  of  our  goods ; pro- 
mising us  in  return,  if  all  went  well,  he  would  give  us  a good 
quartern  loaf  in  a couple  of  years’  time,  besides  supplying 
himself  with  what  he  needed  for  the  altar,  if  altar  he  ever 
came  by.  We  could  not  but  smile  at  the  promise  of  a loaf 
two  years  to  come  ; but  freely  yielded  up  the  grains  to  him  : 
what  he  did  with  them  was  this  : — 

Having  prepared  the  ground  with  care,  then,  making  a 
little  hole  in  the  soil  with  a stick,  he  dropped  one  of  the 
grains  into  it : then  again,  perhaps  six  inches  from  this,  a 
second  hole,  and  dropped  another  grain ; and  the  third,  at  a 
like  distance.  This,  he  explained  to  us,  he  had  read  in  some 
old  Latin  book  of  agriculture,  was  the  surest  way  of  having 
an  abundant  corn-crop ; as  well,  because  the  grains,  thus 
planted  apart,  are  not  in  each  other’s  way  for  drawing  mois- 
ture and  fatness  from  the  soil,  as  because  this  careful  mode  of 
putting  them  into  the  ground  saves  the  waste  of  grain  that 
takes  place  in  throwing  them  broad-cast  into  furrows. 

True  enough,  the  experiment  prospered  in  his  hands : for 
the  blade  shot  up,  tall  and  strong,  bearing  such  ears  as  I have 
seldom  seen  in  wheat,  before  or  since.  Then  he  chose  out  of 
these  the  largest  grains,  and  such  as  were  most  likely-look- 
ing, for  his  next  year’s  crop,  and  sowed  them  in  the  same 
manner,  some  inches  apart  from  one  another;  by  which 
means,  his  second  harvest  came  up  stronger,  with  a larger 
yield  than  the  first,  even.  After  that,  indeed,  as  I shall  show 
at  another  stroke  of  my  pen,  a wonderful  turn  of  events  made 
him  a less  regular  farmer  than  before,  and  changed  the  whole 
current  of  our  life  in  banishment. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ.  215 


CHAPTER  LV. 


PREPARING  FOR  A CHANGE. 

lAYING  no  mind  to  trouble  the  reader  with 
why  and  wherefore  I determined  finally 
to  embrace  the  Catholic  faith,  I will  say 
little  more  than  this,  (to  vindicate  myself 
and  the  friend  that  became  the  instrument 
to  me  of  so  great  a good,)  I did  nothing  in 
haste,  nor  rashly.  For,  to  make  so  vital  a 
change  without  due  reflection,  said  Don  Manuel,  a change  to 
be  made  once  for  all,  and  involving  an  eternity,  would  be 
wrong  and  perilous  to  the  last  degree;  and,  he  added,  ’twere 
an  insult  to  the  majesty  of  truth  not  to  give  it  calm  and  deep 
reflection.  No  man,  said  he,  as  gifted  with  the  faculty  of 
reason,  would  undertake  a much  less  concern  without  pon- 
dering it  as  well  in  its  motives  as  consequences ; or  would 
have  himself  to  thank  for  failure  and  disappointment. 

I resolved,  then,  to  try  every  step,  and  keep  the  lead-line 
going,  as  the  master  of  a vessel  is  bound  to  do  in  an  unknown 
sea : nor  can  I now  be  grateful  enough  for  this,  inasmuch  as 
it  made  my  way  secure,  and  hath  delivered  me  from  all  doubt- 
fulness ever  since. 

The  priest  (undying  thanks  to  him  for  it)  put  the  matter 
before  me  in  so  plain  a light  as,  while  it  appealed  to  my 
reason,  demanded  my  faith  beside.  For  he  bade  me  remark, 
the  very  notion  of  religion  was  a message  from  God  to  man, 
revealing  His  nature  and  will ; that  it  must  be  received  (when 
made  plain),  not  discussed,  as  being  that  whereof  we  are  to 
be  disciples,  not  judges  nor  critics.  This  revelation,  he  said, 
because  ’t  is  the  message  of  the  Infinite  Being  to  us  poor 
.narrow  souls,  must  contain  mysterious  truths,  whose  depths 
we  cannot  fathom,  though  we  are  enabled  to  accept  them  by 
faith.  That  ’t  is  enough  for  us,  and  ample,  if  we  are  assured 
(by  any  authority  on  earth  that  can  show  itself  to  be  His  ap- 
pointment and  creation),  such  and  such  articles  of  teaching 
are  His  message ; then  our  duty  is,  cordially  to  believe  them  : 
to  fail  in  which,  is  failing  in  the  first  duty  of  the  creature, 
and  so  brings  the  erring  soul  into  a state  of  perdition. 


216 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


God,  he  said,  is  essentially  the  God  of  truth  as  well  as  of 
holiness ; wherefore,  He  demands  from  us  belief  in  His  truth, 
and  all  of  it,  no  less  than  obedience  to  every  part  of  His  holy 
law.  That,  if  we  must  distinguish  between  these  two  (though 
they  were,  indeed,  as  man  and  wife,  whom  God  hath  united), 
there  was  a precedence  and  prior  claim  to  be  noted ; that  faith 
came  before  obedience,  as  its  motive,  for  “ without  faith  it  is 
impossible  to  please  God”  ; though  obedience  must  follow 
faith,  as  its  result,  because  “ faith  without  works  is  dead”. 

Then  he  went  on  to  show  that  Almighty  God,  who  was 
pleased  at  first  to  proclaim  the  truth  of  His  gospel  by  many 
miracles,  wrought  by  Himself  and  His  apostles,  was  pleased, 
before  He  visibly  left  the  earth,  to  set  up  in  it  a great  stand- 
ing sign  or  miracle,  which  He  made  perpetual,  and  promised 
should  be  so : and  that  sign  was  to  be  ever  fresh  and  ever  at 
hand,  while  most  other  miracles  were  shown  but  from  time 
to  time ; and ’t  was  to  be  in  every  quarter  of  the  world  at 
once,  while  others  were  local  and  limited ; and  ’t  was  not 
only  to  stand  ever  for  proof  of  the  gospel,  but  to  instruct  and 
console  them  that  believed  already ; to  cleanse  and  restore 
them  if  they  unhappily  sinned  ; to  strengthen  and  feed  them 
while  they  were  in  grace ; to  keep  them  in  union  with  God, 
and  be  the  means  of  conducting  them  to  heaven. 

And  this  great  sign,  says  he,  is  “ the  Church  of  the  living 
God,  the  pillar  and  ground  of  the  truth”  ; “a  city  set  on  a 
hill”,  visible  to  such  as  do  not  wilfully  close  their  eyes  against 
it;  a “straight  way”,  whereon  the  simplest,  if  only  they  follow 
it  trustfully,  cannot  go  wrong,  nor  stumble.  He  proceeded  to 
say,  that  the  true  Church  is  known  from  all  others  that  pre- 
tend to  her  title,  by  four  great  marks,  that  are  recited  as  such 
even  by  many  who  do  not  belong  to  her,  when  they  say  their 
creed ; that  she  is  One,  Holy,  Catholic,  Apostolic : that  a 
plain  observation  of  facts  assigns  these  four  marks  to  the 
Church  in  union  with  the  See  of  St.  Peter,  and  to  her  alone  : 
that  all  this  was  matter  of  promise  at  the  first,  when  our 
Lord  said  : “ Thou  art  Peter,  and  on  this  rock  (Peter)  I will 
build  my  Church” ; and  has  been  fulfilled  in  the  history  of 
seventeen  hundred  years,  and  will  be,  to  the  end  of  time. 

This  being  so  plain,  says  he,  every  man  is  inexcusable  who, 
having  the  truth  sufficiently  set  before  him,  does  not  embrace 
it : to  behave  thus  is  a grave  offence  against  God,  -who  reveals 
His  truth,  commanding  it  to  be  received;  and  will  be  punished 
with  an  eternal  doom  : but  they  who  accept  it,  obtain  there- 
with abundant  graces  to  their  souls,  through  sacraments,  the 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


217 


channels  made  by  Himself,  enabling  them  to  obey  the  rest  of 
the  Divine  will ; whereby  they  can  merit  an  increase  of  it, 
from  degree  to  degree,  till  they  gain  everlasting  glory. 

This  is  a sketch  of  our  conversations  together. 

What  chiefly  surprised  me  in  them  all,  was  the  stress  the 
priest  laid  on  my  making  the  utmost  use  of  my  reason  in  this 
inquiry,  until  I received  the  gift  of  faith.  For  I supposed,  he 
would  have  required  me  to  surrender  my  reason,  and  believe 
all  I might  be  told,  whether  unreasonable  or  no : having  a 
heap  of  things  put  down  my  throat,  and  bidden  to  swallow 
them  without  inquiry.  Whereas,  here  was  a priest,  and  (as 
I found  by  degrees)  a monk  too,  bidding  me  inquire,  reason, 
and  test  what  he  said,  until  grace  was  given  me  to  believe. 
On  my  telling  him  my  surprise  to  find  this,  he  only  smiled, 
and  asked  me,  was  it  possible  that  faith  and  reason  could  be 
opposed  ? I answered,  it  seemed  so,  inasmuch  as  a vast 
number  of  men,  who  professed  to  go  by  reason,  were  thereby 
led  away  from  faith.  To  which  he  said  again,  they  neither 
knew  what  was  meant  by  sound  reason,  nor  by  true  faith. 
For,  says  he,  as  both  come  from  God,  who  is  “ not  the  God  of 
dissention”,  one  of  His  gifts  can  never  go  against  another. 

“How  is  it,  then,  sir”  (I  urged)  “so  many  things  are  taught 
in  your  Church,  as  miracles,  transubstantiation,  and  the  rest, 
which  contradict  the  evidence  of  our  senses  ? ” “ Contradict, 

my  dear  friend?”  says  he,  looking  pleasantly  at  me;  “there 
can  be  no  contradiction  between  two  things,  when  one  simply 
goes  beyond  the  other”.  “Why,  sir”,  said  I again,  “do  you 
tell  me  there  is  no  contradiction  in  saying  that  bread  and  wine 
are  so  much  more  than  bread  and  wine  as  the  Catholic  Church 
bids  her  members  believe  ?”  “ Certainly”,  answers  he  very 

gravely,  “ it  would  be  a contradiction  to  say  anything  is  what 
it  is  not,  or  more  than  it  is.  But  tell  me  : can  the  senses 
judge  of  anything  that  lies  beyond  themselves  ? Or  can  one 
sense  judge  of  what  is  only  subject  to  another  sense  ? Did 
you  ever  hear  a colour  or  see  a smell  ? ” 

I could  not  but  smile  at  his  questions  ; which,  when  he  saw  : 
“Well”,  pursued  he,  “as  to  that  great  mystery  you  have 
touched  on,  your  senses  can  be  no  judges  of  the  change  of  sub- 
stance into  substance,  because  they  can  only  report  as  to  the 
outward  appearances , which  remain  as  they  were  before  : you 
might  just  as  well  expect  the  sentinel  who  stands  outside  the 
king’s  palace  to  know  what  transactions  are  going  on  in  the 
audience- chamber  or  cabinet,  where  the  king  himself  is  within, 
removed  from  sight.  But  observe ; as  the  eye  is  created,  to 


218 


TIIE  ADVENTURES  OF 


tell  the  soul  many  things  great  and  glorious  which  the  "ear 
cannot  perceive,  so  faith  is  given  to  tell  the  soul  glorious 
mysteries  which  ‘ eye  hath  not  seen,  nor  ear  heard,  neither 
hath  it  entered  into  the  heart  of  man’  So  he  went  on. 


o<>o  0<>C  0<»0  o<>c  o<>o  o<  o<>0  i><>o  OK.  >0  o<>o  o<>o  o<><j  o<>o  o<>o  Ch*  X3  o<X> 


CHAPTER  LYI. 


OTHER  REASONS. 

>UT’  two  chief  reasons  determined  me  beside : 
one,  the  consistent  Christian  example  of  this 
my  good  friend,  whose  conduct  I had  hourly 
opportunities  to  mark,  nor  ever  found  a thing 
in  it  that  did  not  tally  with  his  own  teaching. 
So  that  it  became  impossible  to  me  to  think 
so  true  a disciple  and  good  liver,  one  so 
cheerfully  holy,  humble,  prayerful,  selfdenying,  charitable, 
and  the  rest,  practising  virtue  from  day  to  day,  could  be 
much  in  the  wrong.  The  second  reason  was,  I felt  my  soul 
to  need  such  confession  oT  sins  as  I knew  to  be  practised  in  his 
Church. 

Removed  as  we  were  from  the  world,  spending  much  time 
alone,  ’t  would  not  have  been  in  mortal  man  to  prevent  his 
thoughts  turning  inward  on  himself  and  backward  on  his  life. 
Our  consciences  became  first  awakened,  then  tender  : so  that 
we  recalled  our  past  sins,  which  we  had  utterly  forgotten, 
and  gone  on  as  unheeding  as  if  we  were  guiltless  of  them  ; 
I say,  recalling  these,  they  appeared  to  us  quite  in  another 
light  than  before,  as  heinous  offences  against  the  Divine  law, 
though  perchance  not  crimes  in  the  eyes  of  our  fellow-men. 
Strange,  indeed,  how  old  sins  of  many  years  past  would  start 
out  before  me,  from  some  hidden  nook  in  my  memory ; so  that 
at  last,  numbering  how  oft  I had  sinned  against  my  own  con- 
science, dark  as  it  was,  and  how  little  I had  cultivated  grace 
by  prayer,  to  preserve  me  from  my  evil  self,  I began  to  see 
my  life  had  been  almost  one  continued  sin. 

Nor  could  I find  comfort  in  this  distress  of  mind  from  general 
promises  of  pardon  made  to  man  on  his  true  repentance  : feel- 
ing somewhat  to  be  needed  beside,  to  apply  those  generals  to 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


219 


my  particular  case.  I would  fain  hear  a voice  say  to  me, 
myself,  “ Neither  do  I condemn  thee : go,  and  sin  no  more”. 
“ Thy  sins  are  forgiven  thee  ; depart  in  peace”.  Propounding 
this  difficulty  to  my  friend,  he  then  showed  me,  the  God  of 
mercy  had  vouchsafed  to  meet  this  my  need ; founding  a suc- 
cession of  priests  for  the  express  end  (among  others)  of  assur- 
ing His  pardon  to  the  penitent. 

“ But ’t  is  impossible”,  says  he,  “ without  an  evident  miracle, 
the  priest  should  be  able  to  pronounce  pardon  where  he  knows 
not  the  offence,  nor  the  dispositions  of  the  offender.  Nor 
can  he  apply  the  remedies  best  suited  to  each  several  case, 
nor  give  advice  to  serve  the  soul  of  his  penitent,  unless  the 
state  of  that  soul,  its  deeds,  habits,  failings,  weak  points, 
temptations,  and  so  forth,  be  submitted  to  him.  The  priest 
who  hears  a man’s  confession  is  a judge  commissioned  to  that 
office  by  the  Supreme  Judge  of  all : now,  when  any  one  is 
brought  before  a judge,  there  is  evidence  produced  and  sifted 
narrowly,  and  the  cause  determined  on  it,  lest  the  guilty 
escape,  or  the  innocent  be  cast.  Again,  the  priest  is  a physi- 
cian for  the  soul ; and  what  physician  in  his  right  senses  ever 
prescribed  for  his  patient  without  first  hearing  from  him  the 
symptoms  of  his  disorder  ? ” 

So  he  went  on,  with  much  more  of  the  same  kind  ; which, 
if  I could  recall  precisely,  ’t  would  be  useful  to  set  it  down. 
But  at  the  time,  what  it  did  for  me  was,  it  persuaded  me 
(after  much  reflection)  to  close  with  such  a merciful  offer. 
Whence  it  came  to  pass,  about  three  weeks  after  he  and  I had 
talked  this  over,  I then  first  received  from  him  a conditional 
baptism,  on  a supposition  of  my  never  having  been  baptized 
before  : “for  baptism  with  you”,  says  he,  “is  given  (I  fear) 
with  so  little  of  the  care  that  befits  a sacrament  needful  to  sal- 
vation, as  to  make  it  more  than  doubtful  whether ’t  is  given 
at  all”.  Then,  this  being  secured,  I made  to  our  charitable 
and  patient  Tadoone  a full,  exact  confession  of  my  life,  so 
far  as  I could  recall  anything  that  looked  like  a sin.  And  it 
is  not  for  me  to  set  down  on  paper  the  peace  that  took 
possession  of  my  heart  when  I knew  myself  reconciled  to  God 
whom  my  sins  had  offended.  Nor  can  I describe  how  truly 
I purposed  to  serve  Him  for  the  remainder  of  my  days. 

But  what  is  good  for  one  is  good  for  another,  in  what  con- 
cerns all : so  the  men,  partly  taking  example  by  me,  seeing ’t 
was  not  so  strange  a thing  to  become  a Catholic,  after  all ; 
partly  by  the  simple  goodness  of  our  poor  Indians,  whom 
Tadoone  had  made  Catholics  already;  and  partly  also  by  the 


220 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


reasons  he  showed  them  for  it,  determined  one  and  all  to  do 
likewise.  Not  that  all  did  it  together,  but  in  the  following 
order : 

First  (strange  enough  it  seemed  to  me),  came  Richard 
Prodgers,  and  was  made  into  a good  Catholic,  and  a happy 
one,  in  less  than  a week  after  myself.  Then  Ned  Hilton ; 
and  after  him,  Gill ; whose  parents,  it  seems,  inherited  the 
farm  they  occupied  in  Kent,  from  the  days  of  the  Common- 
wealth, and  traced  up  their  ancestors  to  some  of  Cromwell’s 
followers,  whom  he  had  enriched  with  that  freehold : so  that 
Harry,  careless  sailor  as  he  was,  derived  a smack  of  the  puri- 
tan, leastwise,  in  the  respect  of  prejudice,  that  made  him  hard 
to  convince  of  the  Catholic  doctrine.  However,  he  came  in  at 
last,  though ’t  was  a good  month  or  so  after  Ned,  and  Ned  was 
some  short  time  after  me.  But  Don  Manuel  was  not  the 
man  to  hurry  any  one  ; and  never  showed  more  patience  than 
when  he  reasoned  with  Gill,  and  won  him  by  slow  degrees. 

It  may  seem  strange  that  Tom  Harvey,  who  was  the  best 
conditioned  of  them  all  at  first,  was  the  very  last  to  enter  the 
Church : but  such  was  the  fact,  let  any  one  explain  it  as  he 
may.  I once  asked  Tadoone  whether  ’t  was  a secret  pride 
that  still  kept  Tom  from  submitting : but  he  would  not  hear 
of  such  a reason,  which  (he  said)  had  too  little  charity  about 
it ; that  God’s  ways  are  not  our  ways,  nor  His  times  ours ; 
that  Harvey’s  turn  would  come  yet : — and  so  it  did. 


CHAPTER  L V 1 1 . 

SPIRITUAL  MASS. 

SAID,  a while  ago,  our  chapel  served  us  for 
another  end  besides  daily  prayers  and  weekly 
sermons.  Having  said  that  much,  ’t  would 
be  leaving  my  reader  in  the  dark  not  to 
explain  it ; at  least,  if  I should  get  any 
readers  at  all : though  that  is  the  very  thing 
I am  growing  doubtful  of.  For  a friend  of 
mine,  a bookseller  in  Paternoster  Row,  on  my  carrying  these 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


221 


papers  to  him,  when  I had  written  out  about  a third  of  my 
rough  notes,  discouraged  me  all  he  could  from  going  on : 
telling  me,  the  public  would  never  be  caught  with  such  chaff, 
nor  take  up  with  a dull  matter  of  fact  like  this  ; and  I stood  a 
better  chance  with  some  cut-throat  tale,  full  of  murder  and 
gunpowder,  hair-breadth  ’scapes,  or  the  burning  of  one  or  two 
people  alive.  But  I told  him  then,  what  I now  put  down. 
I was  as  little  fitted  to  be  a romancer  as  a stage-player,  or 
any  other  kind  of  mountebank  : and  if  folks  who  read  books 
were  not  content  with  what  befel  a plain  man  and  his  com- 
panions, in  an  out  of  the  way  place  and  a strange  exile  of  more 
than  four  years,  they  might  e’en  let  it  be,  and  no  harm  was 
done,  except  the  printer’s  bills  to  be  charged  on  my  exe- 
cutors. 

Indeed,  I might  (no  doubt)  have  touched  up  my  story,  or 
dashed  in  some  strong  colours,  like  scene-painters,  who  will 
daub  for  effect  at  a distance  : but  where  then  would  have  been 
the  sober  truth  of  my  narrative  ? Or,  (had  I the  wit  to  do  it, 
which  happily  I lack)  I might  have  given  a freer  rein  to  my 
thoughts,  in  some  such  pieces  as  an  acquaintance  of  mine 
was  bringing  out  in  London  before  I quitted  England,  wrho, 
after  wasting  his  talents  on  such  trifles,  went  over  to  Lisbon 
in  shattered  health,  and  has  gone  further  even  than  Lisbon  to 
give  in  an  account  of  all  his  writings.  But  I,  that  can  admire 
genius  at  a distance,  would  not  change  places  in  the  next 
world,  no,  nor  in  this,  with  him  who  ever  wrote  one  deli- 
berate word  that  might  lead  a fellow  mortal  to  a sin,  be  it 
of  thought  only. 

Here  I am  straying  again  from  my  own  paddock  through 
the  first  gap  in  the  hedge  : so  I come  back  from  my  friend 
the  bookseller  in  Paternoster  Row,  to  our  chapel  in  Assump- 
tion Isle.  I have  all  along  forgotten  to  say,  we  called  the  place 
of  our  exile  so,  from  the  great  festival  that  had  just  passed 
when  we  discovered  it : and  long  after,  we  had  our  joke 
against  old  Prodgers,  who  had  put  aside  any  Christian  name 
for  it,  preferring  to  call  it  No  Man’s  Land. 

Well,  ’t  was  spiritual  Mass  we  used  our  little  chapel  for, 
every  morning,  as  a thing  of  course.  And  Don  Manuel 
explained  what  we  were  going  to  do,  the  first  time  he  pro- 
posed it,  much  after  this  fashion  : 

“You  remember,  dear  friends  and  children  of  mine”,  says 
he,  “ how  you  thought  me  mad,  or  next  door  to  it,  for  being 
so  affected  when  we  found  a grain  of  wheat : and  I told  you, 
at  the  time,  ’t  was  because  the  sight  of  that  little  grain 


222 


TIIE  ADVENTURES  OF 


seemed  to  bring  me  one  step  nearer  to  my  great  desire,  the 
celebrating  of  holy  Mass.  That  desire  we  cannot  realize  in 
act,  from  want  of  other  things  absolutely  needed  for  it ; but 
we  may  still  cherish  it  as  a desire,  and  turn  that  desire  into 
devotion.  You  know,  even  in  man’s  dealings  with  his  fellow- 
man,  the  will  is  often  accepted  for  the  deed.  Many  is  the  time 
we  testify,  that  we  would  do  this  or  that  act  of  kindness  or 
service,  if  we  could:  and  our  neighbour  holds  himself  equally 
obliged  to  us,  as  if  we  had  done  it.  Much  more  does  the 
Searcher  of  hearts  look  into  the  hidden  desires  of  our  souls, 
and  accepts  or  rejects  us  by  what  He  sees  there.  Even  as  to 
baptism,  a sacrament  absolutely  necessary  for  any  one  to  be 
saved,  the  earnest  desire  of  it  is  accepted,  where  the  sacra- 
ment is  impossible.  So,  as  I cannot  have  the  comfort  of 
celebrating  Mass,  we  will  do  all  we  can  in  the  way  of  desire, 
and  may  hope  for  many  blessings  in  answer”. 

He  went  on  to  speak  of  some  revelation  granted  to  a Saint 
(I  cannot  recall  the  name),  that  her  spiritual  communions 
were  to  her  sacramental  communions  as  silver  to  gold ; and 
exhorted  us  to  assist  at  our  spiritual  Mass  with  such  fervour 
as  to  supply  (to  our  best)  for  the  want  of  the  divine  reality. 

“ Holy  Mass”,  says  he,  “ is  celebrated  by  the  priest,  and 
attended  by  the  faithful,  for  several  ends,  as  : 

“ To  adore  Almighty  God  for  what  He  is  in  Himself,  all  His 
own  infinite  perfections,  joining  with  the  blessed  angels  round 
His  Throne,  who  are  ever  crying  aloud  to  Him,  £ Holy, 
Holy,  Holy’ ! And,  if  we  consider  that  He  is  the  One  infinite 
and  supreme,  ’t  will  appear  our  first  duty  to  accompany  the 
adorable  Sacrifice  of  Himself,  which  He  hath  ordained,  by 
such  an  act  of  devout  homage. 

“ To  give  Him  praise  and  thanks  for  all  His  blessings  to 
us,  for  body  and  soul,  which  are  numberless  ; also,  for  His 
benefits  to  others,  especially  those  who  will  not  praise  or 
thank  him  for  themselves.  Also,  under  this  head  of  praise,  to 
adore  Him  for  the  graces  He  has  bestowed  on  His  saints,  from 
the  creation  to  the  present  hour;  and  to  congratulate  the 
blessed  Saints  themselves  on  all  they  have  received. 

“ To  commemorate  the  sufferings  and  death  of  our  Lord 
Jesus  Christ,  whereof  Mass  is  so  lively  a representation,  as  well 
as  a continuance  and  daily  application  of  the  same  Sacrifice. 

“ To  avert  His  anger  from  ourselves  and  all  other  sinners, 
by  a humble  acknowledgment  of  our  offences,  and  deep  un- 
worthiness. 

“To  beseech  Him  to  pour  upon  ourselves,  and  all  for 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


223 


whom  we  are  bound  to  pray,  all  the  blessings  needful  for  us  : 
this  large  intention  including  both  supplication  and  inter- 
cession ; as  to  ourselves,  it  included  all  we  could  need,  for 
body  and  soul,  for  time  and  eternity : as  to  others,  it  embraced 
Catholics  on  earth  and  in  purgatory,  as  well  as  heretics, 
sinners,  sufferers,  the  heathen,  in  a word,  all  God’s  rational 
creatures  who  were  not  in  heaven  nor  in  hell : prayer  for  the 
first  being  needless,  and  for  the  latter,  of  no  avail”. 


Methinks  I have  now  given  as  large  an  account  as  need  be 
(and  perhaps  too  lengthy)  of  that  spell  of  twenty  months,  or 
thereabout,  of  our  life  on  the  island,  while  we  lived  by  our- 
selves, without  the  increase  to  our  society  which  I am  just 
going  to  record.  Our  farm-yard  throve,  and  our  crops 
flourished  passably  well  during  this  time  ; but  afterwards,  the 
great  heat  of  our  second  summer,  that  was  like  a fierce  oven, 
burnt  up  some  of  our  young  plantains  and  bananas,  so  that 
they  withered  and  came  to  nought.  ’T  was,  indeed,  through 
our  unskilfulness  in  the  choice  of  a place  for  them  ; the  spot 
being  too  exposed  to  the  sun  for  tender  plants  : but  we  reme- 
died this  the  following  season,  choosing  a small  savannah, 
partly  shaded  by  the  same  ridge  of  sandy  cliff  that  rose  up 
into  the  bluff,  or  headland,  where  we  dug  our  cave  ; and  partly 
by  a grove  of  cocoa-palms  on  the  other  side.  This  lay  a quar- 
ter of  a mile  from  the  sun-burnt  spot  where  we  failed  before, 
and  was  washed  by  the  stream  that  came  from  Riverhead,  so 
that  we  could  water  our  new  nursery-ground  by  hand. 

As  for  our  peccaries,  too,  a kind  of  murrain  seized  on 
them,  so  that  we  lost  half  our  stock  within  ten  days,  and 
the  rest  were  saved  chiefly  by  the  care  of  Ned  Hilton,  whose 
father,  it  seems,  was  a small  farmer  in  the  county  of  Hunting- 
don, where  Ned  had  become  learned  in  pigs.  But  Don 
Manuel’s  wheat  crop  seemed  to  have  some  particular  blessing 
showered  on  it  from  the  first ; or  else  from  his  choosing  a spot 
sheltered  and  moistened  by  a little  ledge  of  rock  from  the 
great  heats,  it  throve  better  than  our  essays  in  farming.  I 
am  ready  to  think,  ’t  was  both  of  those  causes  together : for 
on  one  hand,  he  was  a kind  of  man  that  undertook  nothing,  but 
first  he  looked  far  onward,  and  weighed  all  he  was  to  do  ; 


224 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


on  the  other,  I am  sure  he  sowed  this  crop  in  tears  of  deep 
desire,  and  trusted  to  reap  it  in  spiritual  joy. 

With  regard  to  our  souls,  that  he  had  been  the  means  of 
saving,  ’t  is  not  for  me  to  turn  trumpeter  to  our  little  com- 
pany : only  I will  say,  if  our  regular  habit  of  confessing  may 
be  taken  as  an  index,  we  scarce  ever  missed  going  to  Tadoone 
once  in  the  week ; generally  on  Fridays,  to  honour  the  Sacred 
Passion  we  had  formerly  so  neglected  to  think  on,  and  done 
so  much  to  dishonour.  The  effect  of  this,  too,  was  clearly 
seen  in  the  men’s  temper  and  dispositions  : as  for  myself,  I 
say  little,  only  that  I ought  to  have  advanced  more  in  good- 
ness, as  my  sense  of  what  it  meant  was  perhaps  clearer. 
But  amongst  us  now,  such  outbreaks  of  passion  as  the  men 
had  given  way  to  on  our  first  landing,  came  to  be  a something 
unheard  of : and,  just  as  the  last  and  most  unlikely  in  a race 
will  sometimes  get  ahead  of  the  rest,  so  the  greatest  change 
seemed  to  be  wrought  in  old  Dick  Prodgers.  He  had  been 
’fining  down  by  degrees,  after  our  first  week  on  the  island  : 
but  when  he  had  made  his  confession,  and  been  baptized 
under  condition,  he  did  indeed  put  on  the  new  man,  and 
surprised  us  by  his  meekness  and  quiet  spirit  of  prayer.  I 
may  say  much  the  same  of  the  rest,  some  more,  some  less. 

But  all  this  made  us  desire  greatly  to  be  able  to  assist  at 
Mass,  and  more  particularly,  to  receive  the  Holy  Communion, 
in  the  nature  and  effects  'of  which  Don  Manuel  instructed  us. 
He  bade  us  pray  that  our  u hunger  and  thirst  after  justice” 
might  be  increased  yet  more,  and  then  satisfied:  and  he  ex- 
horted us  to  make  our  spiritual  communions  with  such  fer- 
vour, as  might  in  some  degree  supply  for  our  great  depri- 
vation in  not  being  able  to  receive  the  Most  Holy.  We 
learned  from  him  to  unite  our  intentions  with  those  of  every 
priest  offering  Mass,  and  all  the  faithful  attending  it,  on  what 
spot  soever  of  earth  assembled. 

Thus  time  slipped  by,  leaving  us  content  in  spite  of  our 
cruel  banishment,  and  in  many  ways  we  might  be  called 
happy ; lords  of  all  we  saw  round  us,  our  dominions  only 
bounded  by  the  ocean,  at  peace  among  ourselves,  and  little 
fearing  enemies  from  without,  though  prepared  to  receive 
them.  All  this,  I say,  till  a strange  thing  befell  us  on  the 
seventeenth  of  April,  the  year  of  Bedemption  1741. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


225 


CHAPTER  L V I II. 


THE  SPANISH  ARMADA. 

E were  startled,  of  a sudden,  on  the  day  I have 
just  named,  by  the  firing  of  a gun  far  out  at 
sea ; the  sound  seemed  to  come  to  us  from 
s.s.w.,  or  thereaway  : but  so  dull  and  faint, 
we  hardly  thought  it  a gun,  till  we  heard  the 
second  ; and  listening  with  eager  ears,  taken 
aback  by  the  surprise,  within  a few  minutes 
there  came  a third  report.  Then  we  knew  it  for  a vessel  firing 
guns  of  distress  ; but  what  help  to  bring  her  we  saw  not,  only 
we  thought  to  inform  her  crew,  there  were  some  at  hand, 
though  not  able,  yet  willing,  to  help  them.  So  we  clambered 
to  the  top  of  our  rock,  and  thence  to  LooJc -out  Point , in  great 
agitation  of  spirits  : we  had,  by  this,  well-nigh  resigned  our- 
selves to  live  and  die  on  the  island  ; and  so  sudden  a prospect 
of  some  European  ship  brought  a conflict  of  emotions  to  us, 
part  of  hope,  part  of  apprehension.  For  we  knew  not  if  we 
were  about  to  encounter  friends  or  foes ; nor  of  what  nation 
she  might  prove,  nor  of  what  disposition  toward  us.  One 
thing  we  determined  on ; to  reconnoitre  with  great  prudence 
before  we  made  any  sign  in  return  for  their  guns. 

My  perspective  glass  served  us  well  here ; by  which  I made 
out  the  hull  of  a large  vessel,  some  three  leagues  away  in  the 
wind’s  eye : she  seemed  to  carry  little  sail,  which  surprised 
us,  till  the  tide,  or  current,  favoured  her  helm,  and  brought 
her  in  nearer ; for ’t  was  plain  she  saw  our  island,  and  was 
making  for  it.  But  when  she  neared  (which  was  very 
slowly),  we  saw  clearly  enough  what  made  her  so  short  of 
sail : for  her  main-mast  was  gone  by  the  board ; also  her 
foremast  had  but  a mean  kind  of  jury  top-mast  rigged,  and 
the  mizen  (for  she  was  a three-master,  though  seemingly  not 

15 


226 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


a first-rate)  was  reduced  to  a stump,  and  carried  a mere  rag 
of  a sail.  Also,  by  her  hull  being  so  low  down  in  the  water, 
as  well  as  the  slowness  of  her  sailing  (though  she  was  well 
in  the  current  which,  I have  said,  set  in  towards  the  island 
from  south  by  south-west) ; from  all  these  signs  we  plainly 
made  out,  she  was  water-logged  to  that  degree,  she  could 
scarce  hope  to  reach  land  at  last. 

This  was  confirmed  when  we  saw  her  boats  lowered,  and  the 
crew  stowing  themselves  into  them : they  had  three,  a long 
boat,  pinnace,  and  shallop,  but ’t  was  some  time  before  they 
put  off  from  the  ship : for  what  cause  we  could  not  at  first 
discover,  but  judged  they  were  landing  provisions,  or  per- 
haps merchandise ; for  they  lowered  into  the  boats  what 
seemed  (at  that  distance)  to  be  eight  or  nine  large  bales,  or 
packages,  and  laid  them  lengthways.  But  as  they  drew 
nearer,  we  made  out  these  to  be  sick  men  in  their  hammocks, 
lying  in  the  bottom  of  the  boats,  and  so  much  in  the  way  of 
the  oarsmen,  as  added  to  their  difficulties  very  much. 

Indeed,  the  whole  look  of  this  crew,  when  wre  could  dis- 
tinguish their  features,  was  as  if  a hospital  had  shipped  itself 
on  board  of  a ship ; for  a more  meagre,  starved-looking  set 
I never  set  eyes  on : and  they  had  scarce  strength  left  among 
them  to  pull  in  the  boats  towards  land.  So  that  ’t  was 
chiefly  through  favour  of  the  current  (which  ran  swifter 
when  it  came  to  near  Cape  Look-out,  and  turned  with  an 
eddy,  or  in-draught,  into  Shark  Cove),  chiefly  by  this  they 
managed  to  make  any  way  at  all ; for  they  had  no  more  to 
do,  but  by  their  oars  and  helm  to  keep  the  boats’  heads  fair 
with  the  stream,  and  catch  what  little  wind  was  abaft. 

This  stream,  though,  took  a swift  turn  when  it  came  within 
a quarter  of  a mile  of  the  point  (our  cape,  I mean)  ; and  shot 
up  to  n.n.e.,  so  bearing  them  towards  the  cove : when  they 
found  this,  fearing  (I  believe)  they  might  be  carried  off  land 
again,  not  liking  to  trust  the  stream,  or  else  wearied  with 
rowing,  they  made  all  efforts  to  shoot  out  of  the  ripple  of  the 
current  into  smooth  water,  under  lee  of  the  shore,  and  so 
land  in  another  little  cove,  that  was  almost  land-locked,  n.e. 
of  Cape  Look-out.  Though  the  stream  carried  them  some 
way  beyond  that  point,  they  got  out  of  the  strength  of  it ; 
and  doubling  back,  rowed  in,  but  feebly  enough,  till  they  lay 
on  their  oars  within  arrow-shot  of  the  shore,  debating  how 
they  were  to  proceed. 

Now  was  our  time  : for  we  did  not  mean  them  to  come 
nearer  without  holding  them  to  parley ; the  more  so,  as  we 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


227 


now  saw  they  had  arms  with  them.  So,  retreating  from  our 
ambush,  we  came  back  to  our  castle  with  all  speed,  then  went 
down  by  our  grand  stair-case  (as  we  called  the  rope)  and 
made  our  way  straight  towards  the  cove.  Then,  still  am- 
bushed in  the  trees,  we  sent  Don  Manuel  forward  as  our 
spokesman,  or  ambassador,  with  full  powers  to  treat  with 
them.  We  crept  as  near  as  we  could,  without  showing  our- 
selves, to  witness  what  passed,  and  support  him  on  the  instant, 
in  case  of  need : for  we  had  brought  all  our  weapons  with 
us,  and  mustered  all  our  troops. 

The  priest  went  forward,  till  he  came  down  near  to  the 
water’s  edge ; then  stood  still,  and  waved  his  hand,  as  about 
to  speak.  But  it  would  have  touched  any  heart  to  witness 
the  joy  of  the  poor  famished  creatures  when  they  saw  the 
form  of  a civilized  man  approach  near  to  them.  Some  of  the 
crew  stood  up  in  the  boats,  waving  their  hats  ; some  clapped 
their  hands ; others  fell  on  their  knees,  raising  their  clasped 
hands  to  heaven  ; all  cried  out,  some  one  thing,  some  another, 
with  such  confused  sounds  of  prayer,  and  surprise,  and 
joyfulness,  we  could  not  at  first  make  out  what  language  ’t 
was  they  spoke  in.  But  Don  Manuel,  having  a quicker  ear 
for  his  native  tongue,  knew  it  from  the  first  for  Spanish. 

One  would  have  thought  this  was  like  to  give  him  great 
satisfaction ; but  he  told  us  afterwards,  the  doubt  came  at 
once  into  his  mind,  they  might  be  a crew  of  buccaneers,*  and 
their  ship  a pirate  vessel,  fitted  out  for  such,  or  run  away 
with  in  a mutiny.  ’T  is  true,  their  action  of  rendering  thanks 
to  God  seemed  to  stamp  them  as  honest  men  ; though,  indeed, 
I have  heard  that  the  very  buccaneers,  with  a kind  of  impious 
piety  strange  to  think  on,  would  invoke  the  divine  protection 
on  their  marauding  expeditions,  and  render  solemn  thanks  on 
every  success. 

Being  still  doubtful  of  these  new  acquaintances,  Don 
Manuel  calls  out  to  them  in  his  own  language,  bidding  them 
come  in  no  nearer,  but  tell  him  truly  what  nation  they  were 
of,  and  whether  honest  men.  On  which  they  all  cried,  as 

* This  seems  a strange  inaccuracy,  considering  that  the  buccaneers, 
strictly  so-called,  were  scarcely  heard  of  after  the  taking  of  Carthagena, 
some  forty  years  before  this  date.  Moreover,  as  that  remarkable 
society  of  pirates  was  chiefly  composed  of  French  and  English  ad- 
venturers, whose  operations  were  directed  against  the  Spanish  colonies, 
they  would  scarcely  have  spoken  Spanish  on  a sudden  emotion,  in  pre- 
ference to  their  native  tongue.  Perhaps  the  word  buccaneer  is  here 
used  for  a pirate  in  general ; or  it  may  be  a mistake  of  Owen’s  for  priva- 
teer.— Ed. 


228 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


with  one  voice,  Espanoles , Espanoles  I and  asked  him,  was  he 
indeed  a Catholic  priest  ? He,  on  his  part,  assented ; then 
they  protested  vehemently,  they  were  good  Catholics  too,  and 
subjects  of  his  most  Catholic  majesty  (so,  it  seems,  the  king 
of  Spain  is  always  entitled)  ; and  that ’t  was  but  three  short 
days  since  they  committed  to  the  deep  their  chaplain  and 
confessor,  who  died  on  board  of  famine,  or  fever,  or  both,  like 
the  rest  of  the  crew,  except  only  themselves. 

On  this,  he  asked  them,  would  they  solemnly  swear,  as  good 
Catholics,  to  submit  themselves  to  the  authorities  on  the 
island  ? Would  they  engage  to  lay  aside  their  arms,  or  de- 
liver them  into  safe  keeping,  during  their  stay  ? And,  if  they 
were  compelled  to  stay  indeed  (as  the  condition  of  the  ship 
rendered  likely),  would  they  enter  into  such  fair  conditions 
as  should  be  laid  down  for  them  by  those  who  had  possession 
of  the  place  ? To  all  this,  with  one  voice,  the  poor  fellows 
professed  they  were  ready  to  swear  on  the  spot.  Then  Don 
Manuel  opened  his  breviary  and  held  it  up  before  them, 
pointing,  as  he  explained  to  them,  to  the  words  of  the  holy 
gospel  in  it,  and  bade  them  swear  to  every  tittle  of  what  he 
had  said. 

They  rose  up,  or  all  that  were  able  to  stand,  uncovered 
their  heads,  and  with  much  gravity  and  reverent  demeanour, 
stretched  forth  their  hands  towards  the  book  he  held  up  to 
them.  Even  the  sick  'men  in  the  hammocks,  when  they 
heard  what  was  going  forward,  did  what  they  could  to  raise 
their  hands  with  the  rest.  Having  all  sworn  to  observe  these 
articles,  Don  Manuel  then  pledged  his  word  as  a priest,  on 
behalf  of  himself  and  his  friends,  who,  he  told  them,  had 
possession  of  the  place,  they  should  meet  all  fair  and  honour- 
able usage,  and  be  received  on  their  parole  of  good  conduct,  as 
well  as  have  their  sick  tended  with  care.  “ But  first”,  says  he, 
“for  a pledge  you  mean  as  you  say,  deliver  up  to  me  the  flints 
out  of  your  muskets”.  On  which,  they  set  to  work  without 
a question,  and  hammered  out  all  the  flints  from  their  pieces, 
and  also  from  the  pistols,  of  which  each  man  had  two  or 
three.  They  wrapped  these  in  a parcel  of  sail  cloth,  and  held 
them  up  to  him,  in  token  they  were  now  unarmed ; for 
indeed,  all  they  had  left  to  them  were  a few  boat-hooks,  and 
two  or  three  hatchets,  with  their  cutlasses,  and  these  too  they 
delivered  up  on  landing. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


223 


CHAPTER  LIX. 


HARBOUR  AND  HOSPITAL. 

AVINGr  thus  drawn  (as  the  old  fable  says) 
uthe  lion’s  teeth  and  claws,  Don  Manuel  went 
/on  : “I  will  now  show  you,  friends”,  says 
/he,  u we  had  the  power  to  enforce  sub- 
mission, had  we  chosen  to  use  it” ; and  wfitli 
that,  he  looks  back  to  us  in  the  wood,  and 
waves  his  hand.  Out  we  marched  at  the 
signal  (for  we  had  already  agreed  on  it),  with  our  guns 
shouldered,  our  bows,  and  quivers  filled  with  arrows,  at  our 
backs  ; or  those  that  had  no  guns,  with  bows  and  long 
javelins  : ranging  ourselves  in  a half-moon  along  the  strand 
of  the  cove,  four  of  us  on  either  side  of  our  ambassador. 
What  with  our  wild  shaggy  looks,  dressed  as  we  were,  or 
disguised,  rather,  in  our  untanned  hog-skins  and  palm-leaf 
helmets  or  hats,  with  formidable  broad  swords  and  wooden 
clubs  set  with  sharks’  teeth,  untrimmed  hair  and  beards,  thus 
fully  armed,  and  attended  by  our  Indians  as  wild  as  our- 
selves ; notwithstanding  the  fewness  of  our  number,  these 
poor  fellows  in  the  boats,  reduced  to  the  last  stage  of  weak- 
ness, were  struck  with  amazement  on  so  sudden  a spectacle. 
But  Don  Manuel  assured  them  once  more,  by  words  and 
signs,  telling  them,  the  bargain  was  struck ; if  they  would  be 
true  to  their  part,  so  would  we  to  ours : and  to  this  he 
pledged  again  his  word  as  a priest. 

It  being  thus  arranged,  we  made  them  motions  of  friend- 
ship ; and  I,  who  was  the  only  one  except  our  priest  that 
spoke  their  language,  (or  anything  to  signify,)  called  out  to 
them,  we  would  truly  befriend  them  in  their  need,  if  only 
their  conduct  justified  it ; and  bade  them  pull  in-shore.  This 
they  did  at  once  ; and  when  the  boat  grounded,  the  poor 
fellows  made  shift  to  get  out  of  her,  but  feebly  and  slow ; 
and ’t  was  with  still  more  pains  they  got  the  sick  on  shore. 
Harry  Gill  and  I stood  to  our  arms  ; and  Pounder,  with 
Samuel,  kept  their  bows  ready : as  to  the  rest,  they  went 


230 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


cheerfully  to  help  at  the  landing,  piling  their  arms  under 
cover  of  our  guns. 

The  first  thing  we  insisted  on  was,  that  all  the  crews’ 
weapons,  whether  muskets,  pistols,  cutlasses,  hatchets,  and 
even  to  the  boat-hooks,  should  be  handed  to  us  out  of  the 
boats ; which  was  done  accordingly,  before  a man  of  them 
put  his  foot  on  dry  ground.  For,  though  we  would  not  mis- 
trust them,  nor  judge  them  hardly,  we  did  not  forget  either, 
the  better  part  of  valour  is  discretion : and,  let  them  be  as 
weak  as  they  might  singly,  yet  they  so  greatly  outnumbered 
us,  as  might  tempt  them,  at  some  favourable  moment,  to  over- 
power us  also.  Being  now  quite  unarmed,  against  a set  of 
men  armed  to  the  very  teeth  (for  we  put  the  flints  into 
their  guns  and  pistols  again,  and  stuck  their  hatchets  and 
cutlasses  into  our  belts,  as  hostages  for  their  conduct),  it 
would  have  been  stark  madness  in  them  to  move  a finger 
against  us.  Indeed,  I was  surprised  from  the  first,  to  see 
the  unshaken  trust  these  poor  men  showed  in  our  honesty ; 
till  a second  thought  told  me,  they  took  our  character  on 
the  word  of  the  priest,  who  (they  knew)  would  not  deceive 
them.  On  our  part,  we  were  slower  to  be  convinced  of 
theirs ; and  stood  jealously  on  our  guard,  till  all  suspicion  of 
them  wore  off  by  degrees. 

But  the  next  thing  to  do,  was  to  land  the  sick  men  that  lay 
in  the  boats ; who  were  nine  in  all,  and  some  of  them  so  far 
gone  as  to  be  already  more  dead  than  alive.  One,  indeed, 
seemed  so  spent,  we  thought  he  would  yield  up  the  ghost 
before  we  could  heave  him  ashore : and  Don  Manuel,  who 
had  waded  into  the  water  to  visit  them  (not  waiting  for  the 
boats  to  be  thrust  nigher  the  beach),  finding  this  poor  man 
in  such  extremity,  called  to  Samuel  to  run  for  a shaddock,  to 
refresh  him  withal.  I could  see,  from  his  sitting  on  the 
boat’s  thwart  close  by  the  hammock  where  the  poor  fellow 
lay,  and  putting  his  ear  close  to  him,  he  had  begun  to  hear 
the  dying  man’s  confession.  Soon  the  young  Indian  came 
running  back  with  a fresh  fruit  or  two,  a bag  of  our  bread, 
and  a crock  of  water.  He  plunged  into  the  sea  to  get  at  the 
boat,  and  between  them  they  tried  to  make  the  Spaniard 
swallow  a bit,  though  never  so  small ; but ’t  was  all  too  late. 
What  with  scurvy  and  famine,  and  pining  every  way,  he  was 
now  too  far  gone  on  his  last  journey,  and  could  hardly 
swallow  some  drops  of  the  water  only.  In  short,  after  a few 
faint  whispers  with  the  priest,  he  died  under  his  hands, 
blessing  the  divine  mercies  with  his  last  breath  (so  we  learnt 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


231 


afterwards  from  the  others  that  lay  round)  for  sending  to 
him  thus  the  comforts  of  his  religion  in  his  dying  hour,  be- 
yond all  human  hope. 

So,  leaving  the  dead  man  for  awhile,  to  wait  on  the  ex- 
treme needs  of  the  living,  we  handed  the  hammocks  out  care- 
fully, one  by  one,  and  laid  these  suffering  creatures  in  a 
row,  eight  of  them,  under  the  shade  of  some  cocoa  palms, 
about  a stone’s  cast  from  the  beach.  Indeed,  several  of  the 
number  seemed  as  near  death’s  door  as  the  one  that  was  gone 
already:  the  priest  and  I attended  them  as  best  we  might, 
each  in  our  way;  though  my  choicest  remedies  were  only 
cocoa-nut  milk,  with  sliced  shaddock  and  yams,  yet  we 
brought  them  round  enough  for  Don  Manuel  to  wish  to  be 
left  alone  with  them  for  their  confessions ; and,  to  be  short, 
the  second  of  them  died  within  two  hours  after  his  landing, 
and  the  third  that  same  night.  As  for  the  rest,  those  other 
two  of  the  five  worst,  recovered  ; one  wholly,  and  lived  to  be 
a strong,  serviceable  member  of  our  little  government ; the 
other  iived  for  some  time  after,  and  then  went  off  in  a 
dropsy.  The  four  who  were  not  so  far  spent  with  weakness 
at  the  first,  got  round  quicker,  one  after  the  other,  when 
they  began  to  taste  our  fresh  meat  and  vegetables ; but  by 
nothing  more  than  by  the  cocoa-nut  milk,  of  which  we  gave 
them  two  or  three  draughts  daily. 

To  return  to  their  first  landing : we  found,  besides  these 
nine  in  the  hammocks,  there  were  thirty-two  able-bodied 
seamen,  for  we  counted  them  as  they  sat,  for  very  weakness, 
on  the  shore.  To  call  them  able-bodied,  must  be  understood 
by  comparison  ; they  were  just  able,  indeed,  to  lay  their  hand 
on  an  oar ; but  I doubt  whether  their  whole  force  united 
eould  have  given  a turn  to  the  capstan,  or  pulled  in  a cable  ; 
and ’t  is  not  to  be  doubted,  had  their  voyage  lasted  a few 
days  longer,  or  had  they  met  rough  weather  on  nearing  our 
island,  not  one  of  them  would  have  landed  alive.  They  were 
reduced  to  that  extremity,  two  or  three  swooned  outright,  and 
lay  for  dead  : I remarked  many  of  them  weep  like  very  chil- 
dren, whether  in  thankfulness  for  escaping  with  their  lives,  or 
from  feeling  a degree  of  weakness  that  is  so  strange  a thing 
to  any  man  reduced  to  it  on  a sudden  from  the  vigour  of 
health  ; while  others  dropped  on  their  knees,  and  begged  us, 
per  V amor  di  Dios , to  give  them  some  food. 

Indeed,  we  should  have  thought  of  this  ere  now ; but 
we  were  distracted  by  all  we  had  to  attend  to : what  with 
mounting  guard  over  the  living,  tending  the  sick  and  dying, 


232 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


helping  the  weakest  to  land,  keeping  the  boats  in-shore,  etc. 
But  by  this,  I had  gone  through  the  wards  of  my  hospital, 
and  done  what  I could  for  the  patients ; so,  leaving  Don 
Manuel  still  engaged  in  his  proper  work  for  their  benefit,  I 
came  forward  to  the  crew,  my  rifle  on  my  shoulder,  and  the 
rest  of  us  behind  me,  fully  armed. 

“ My  friends,  and  gentlemen”,  said  I,  in  my  best  Spanish, 
which  indeed,  would  not  carry  me  very  far  in  the  dialogue : 
(t  you  shall  have  food,  without  doubt,  for  you  are  our  guests, 
and  we  bid  you  welcome.  But”,  I went  on,  “ we  must  under- 
stand one  another  from  the  first:  we  keep  your  arms  safe 
for  you,  till  we  are  better  acquainted ; and  you  make  no  at- 
tempt to  move  from  the  place  we  mark  out  for  you  to  stay 
in.  Otherwise,  gentlemen”,  for  I had  learned  that  much  of 
courtesy  from  our  Spanish  friend,  “ otherwise” — and  I tapped 
my  rifle  with  my  forefinger,  to  make  them  fully  know  my 
resolution. 

Comprehend  they  did,  without  doubt ; and  made  signs  of 
assent  to  all  this.  But  one  among  them,  who  seemed  in 
authority  (we  found  a little  later  he  was  fourth  lieutenant, 
and  the  only  officer  who  had  lived  through  the  starvation,  and 
taken  command  on  the  death  of  the  others)  came  a little  be- 
fore the  rest,  and  answered  me  in  the  purest  Spanish  : “ Your 
gentleness”,*  says  he,  “ may  rest  assured,  we  will  be  faithful 
to  the  word  we  have  already  sworn  to  our  countryman,  the 
priest  yonder.  We  are  men  of  honour”,  laying  his  hand  on 
his  breast,  “ and  subjects  of  his  most  Catholic  majesty : you 
are  our  benefactors;  we  are  bound  to  you  in  honour  and 
gratitude,  both  at  once.  ’T  is  true,  Senores  Ingleses , our 
countries  are  now  at  war  with  one  another  ; but  we  trust  you 
will  not  prosecute  that  war  in  such  remote  regions  as  these. 
*T  is  a quarrel  that  is  none  of  ours,  and  surely  we  may  well 
let  it  lie.  You  have  taken  us  at  disadvantage,  in  the  weak 
state  we  are  in  : but,  as  on  our  part  we  have  pledged  to  you 
our  sacred  word,  we  trust  to  find  men  of  honour  and  Cabal- 
leros in  return.  We  have  delivered  up  to  you  our  arms,  and 
claim  your  hospitality,  and  the  safety  of  our  lives,  liberty, 
with  the  vessel  and  cargo,  or  whatever  we  can  save  from  her”. 

This  was  the  substance  of  his  speech  ; but  he  delivered  it 
with  such  a straightforward,  manly  kind  of  grace  as  took  us 

* Owen  seems  to  be  translating  literally  the  Spanish  expression  of 
courtesy,  XJsted , which  is  said  to  be  a contraction  of  the  words,  Vuestra 
Mercid ; your  mercifulness,  or  your  gentleness,  in  the  same  sense  in 
which  we  use  the  word  gentleman,  and  the  Greeks,  kiruiKgQ — Ed. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


233 


extremely,  and  secured  my  confidence  in  him  from  that  time 
onward.  Parts  of  it,  ’t  is  true,  I did  not  well  understand ; 
above  all,  where  he  spoke  of  our  two  countries  being  then  at 
war  with  each  other.  When  we  were  last  in  port,  ’t  is  true, 
what  with  our  ships  pushing  their  contraband  trade  in  Cam- 
peachy  Bay,  and  other  parts  of  the  Mexican  coast ; with  the 
reprisals  also  of  the  Spanish  guarda-costas,  there  were  abundant 
causes  of  rupture  between  the  governments  of  Spain  and 
England.  Yet,  it  appeared,  we  had  put  to  sea  a little  before 
the  news  could  reach  us,  that  Admiral  Vernon  had  sailed  with 
a fleet  against  the  Spanish  West  Indies,  and  that  open  war 
had  been  declared.  But  this,  together  with  events  following, 
as  the  bombarding  of  Carthagena,  the  taking  of  Porto  Bello, 
and  the  expedition  of  Commodore  Anson  (in  which,  it  seemed 
our  friends  were  nearly  interested),  we  learned  from  the  lieu- 
tenant more  at  leisure. 


CHAPTER  LX . 


A TREATY  MADE  AND  RATIFIED. 

>Y  this,  Don  Manuel  had  joined  us,  and  took 
a chief  part  in  the  conference  with  his  Spanish 
countrymen.  To  be  brief,  we  drew  up  certain 
articles  for  both  sides  to  abide  by : indeed, 
the  dictating  of  terms  was  clearly  on  our 
side,  by  force  of  arms.  And  they  were  as 
follows : 

1.  Neither  party  was  to  regard  the  other  in  the  light  of 
enemies ; but  both  to  act  as  though  war  had  not  been  pro- 
claimed between  our  respective  nations. 

2.  A line  was  to  be  drawn,  to-  portion  off  for  the  Spaniards 
a part  of  the  island,  enough  to  dwell  in  for  the  present ; with 
permission  to  cut  down  wood  to  make  themselves  habitations, 
and  for  firing. 

3.  Water,  if  not  readily  found  within  their  allotment,  to 
be  supplied  by  us,  and  brought  to  the  spot,  free  of  charge. 

4.  We  engaged  to  supply  them  also  in  fish  and  flesh, 
together  with  bread,  vegetable,  and  fruit,  at  a moderate 


234 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


charge  in  money,  tools,  or  other  useful  articles,  if  they  could 
rescue  any  such  from  the  wreck  : otherwise  on  credit,  under 
note  of  hand  from  the  lieutenant  to  the  governor  or  com- 
mander of  some  of  the  Spanish  colonies. 

5.  Two  persons  named  on  their  side,  three  on  ours,  and 
they  alone,  to  have  the  privilege  of  passing  the  boundary 
line. 

6.  Any  other  but  these  two  of  theirs,  caught  on  our  side 
of  the  line,  to  suffer  the  penalties  of  such  as  transgress  martial 
law,  at  our  pleasure. 

7.  The  wreck  itself  to  remain  Spanish  property : we  en- 
gaging to  help  to  our  utmost  to  bring  it  in-shore,  or  land 
such  valuables  from  it  as  could  be  saved.  In  doing  which 
things  alone,  the  boundary  line  of  separation  did  not  hold 
good,  and  might  be  broken. 

8.  In  consideration  of  these  good  services,  and  in  the  event 
(which  seemed  unlikely  enough)  of  their  getting  her  off,  or 
being  rescued  by  some  of  their  countrymen,  we  should  be 
allowed  a reasonable  choice  of  any  of  the  vessel’s  goods  for 
our  own  use. 

9.  Should  the  wreck  be  refitted,  or  any  Spanish  vessel  or 
other  vessel  friendly  to  Spain  touch  at  the  island,  we  were  to 
have  a free  passage  to  any  port  she  might  afterwards  touch 
at,  at  our  choice. 

10.  Likewise,  should'  any  British  vessel,  or  one  from  our 
colonies,  touch  at  the  place,  the  Spaniards  to  be  allowed  a 
passage  on  board  of  her  at  a fair  average  rate  of  passage- 
money,  to  any  port  that  lay  on  their  voyage,  or  which  they 
might  be  driven  into. 

11.  In  the  meantime,  their  fire-arms,  weapons,  and  pow- 
der, whether  now  landed,  or  still  in  the  wreck,  to  remain  in 
our  safe  keeping,  till  we  decided  otherwise  ; their  supplies  of 
food  being  secured  to  them,  as  above. 

12.  All  fair  and  friendly  treatment  to  be  assured  to  either 
party  at  the  hands  of  any  force  on  the  opposite  side,  should 
they  heave  in  sight. 


These  articles  being  once  concluded,  and  solemnly  ratified 
on  both  sides  by  oath,  we  proceeded  at  once  to  supply  the  poor 
famished  men  -with  food ; though  for  the  present  we  did  not 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


235 


eat  with  them  (according  to  articles  2,  5,  and  6 of  our  agree- 
ment), we  took  care  they  should  want  for  nothing  we  could 
furnish.  Therefore  we  sent  the  Indians  in  all  haste  to  our 
store-house,  to  fetch  what  might  be  at  hand  ; as,  smoked 
peccary  and  cod-fish,  with  the  cakes  of  yam  and  bread-fruits, 
made  into  a pulp,  then  strained  and  baked,  such  as  we  had 
learned  by  this  time  to  make  into  palatable  and  wholesome 
loaves  enough.  But  anything,  no  matter  how  coarse  and 
ordinary,  was  a dainty  at  that  moment  to  men  who  had  been 
for  weeks  and  months  on  short  commons,  as  these  our  guests 
had  been  : and  latterly  almost  without  food  at  all.  Our  care 
was  less  to  supply  them  with  victuals  enough  (of  which  was 
no  lack),  but  to  hinder  their  making  too  free  use  of  it.  On 
my  representing  this  to  the  lieutenant,  and  the  danger  of 
sickness,  aye,  and  death  itself,  to  men  who  should  indulge 
to  their  hearts’  content  after  so  long  a fast,  he  entered  at 
once  into  my  views.  Accordingly,  we  established  a strict  dis- 
cipline among  the  crew  in  the  order  of  getting  their  messes, 
and  the  quantity  served  to  them. 

The  sick  came  first ; for,  where  the  disease  was  little  else 
but  scurvy  and  famine,  or  the  exhaustion  after  fever,  then 
Dr.  Diet  (as  Tom  Harvey  said),  was  the  best  doctor  to  call  in. 
Accordingly,  we  divided  the  food  into  small  portions,  giving 
them  more  of  bread  than  flesh-meat,  and  this  moistened  with 
water  into  a panada,  or  bread-sop.  It  seemed  a cruel  thing, 
to  be  sure,  to  deny  so  many  famishing  wretches  as  now  came 
crowding  towards  us : but ’t  was  done  out  of  sheer  kindness, 
to  prevent  the  ill  effects  of  giving  them  too  much  at  once. 
As  they  observed  the  conditions  laid  down,  and  would  not, 
even  pressed  with  hunger  as  they  were,  overstep  the  boundary 
line  we  had  by  this  time  drawn  between  us,  we  passed  down 
on  our  side  the  line,  and  fed  them  in  order.  We  kept  our 
three  Indians  running  at  their  full  speed  up  to  our  castle, 
and  back  to  us,  bringing  more  meat  and  bread,  till  we 
had  given  the  hungry  Spaniards  as  much  as  I judged  well 
for  the  time.  But,  as  we  promised  them  another  meal  soon, 
though  many  longing  eyes  from  their  meagre  faces  were  cast 
at  the  remaining  food,  they  were  fain  to  submit ; and  first 
with  a thanksgiving  to  God,  then  to  us,  retired  a little  from 
the  boundary.  Some  lay  down  for  very  weariness,  more  of 
them  sat  silent ; some  talking  together  in  broken  sentences, 
some  with  us  across  the  line ; and  a few  retired  with  them- 
selves to  converse  with  God,  and  going  upon  their  knees, 
continued  their  thanksgiving  more  at  large.  I am  now  sure, 


236 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


from  what  I knew  of  them  on  better  acquaintance,  there 
would  have  been  more  outward  acts  of  devotion  among  them, 
but  for  the  weariness  that  oppressed  their  famished  bodies 
and  weighed  down  their  souls. 

The  lieutenant  (or  captain,  as  we  must  call  him  — for  death, 
that  took  others  from  over  his  head,  promoted  him  to  com- 
mand all  that  remained  of  a large  crew,  and  the  wreck  of  a 
large  vessel), — this  officer,  I say,  seemed  most  attentive  to  do 
all  that  lay  in  his  power  for  the  comfort  of  his  men.  He 
neglected  his  own  needs,  or  took  a morsel  only  now  and 
again,  till  he  had  given  what  help  he  could  in  ranging  them 
to  receive  their  portions  of  food,  and  aiding  the  sick ; who, 
to  be  sure,  were  more  easily  fed  in  due  order,  being  unable 
to  stir  from  their  hammocks. 

When  the  lieutenant  had  seen  to  this,  and  swallowed  a few 
hasty  morsels  (so  much  as  we  judged  safe  to  allow  him,  which 
he  ate  ravenously,  like  his  men),  his  next  care  was  to  try  and 
save  the  ship,  which  we  expected  to  go  down  every  moment, 
so  water-logged  was  she.  The  tide  had  shifted  her  in  nearer, 
and  saved  her  from  being  carried  off  by  the  current  I spoke 
of ; in  which  case  she  had  beyond  a doubt  been  lost  to  us, 
and  carried  away  to  the  east  of  our  island,  into  open  sea,  or 
else  wrecked  on  the  reefs,  and  broken  up.  Our  only  hope 
for  her  was,  she  might  drift  into  shoal  water  ; this  she  seemed 
likely  to  do,  as  we  all  stood  watching  her  from  the  cove  where 
these  Spaniards  had  landed  at  the  first.  But  it  seems,  the 
leak  had  gained  too  fast  on  her  for  this  : being  now  deserted 
by  her  crew,  who  had  made  still  some  feeble  efforts  at  the 
pumps,  all  the  while  they  remained  on  board. 

’T  was  by  a Providence  the  tide  was  now  at  its  rise,  not 
at  ebb ; though  the  weather  was  so  calm,  with  just  a light 
breeze  stirring,  yet  there  was  a sort  of  spring-tide  on,  and  the 
water  higher  than  common ; for,  had  it  been  neap-tide,  we 
had  either  lost  her  altogether,  or  at  the  least,  all  would  have 
been  spoiled  in  the  water,  as  you  shall  hear.  For,  as  we  de- 
bated with  the  lieutenant,  whether  we  had  now  strength  to 
man  the  boats,  to  board  her,  and  contrive  to  pass  a hawser 
round  the  foremast  and  so  haul  her  somewhat  in-shore,  we 
found  to  our  great  concern  she  was  beginning  to  settle  down, 
and  sink  on  her  larboard  quarter. 

Now  there  was  no  help  for  it,  but  to  wait  on,  and  see  the 
end ; for ’t  would  be  madness,  indeed,  to  venture  on  board  a 
sinking  ship.  But  the  lieutenant  was  in  extreme  grief  at  the 
sight,  being  in  charge  of  the  vessel ; having  also  (as  we  after- 


OWEN,  EVANS,  ESQ. 


237 


wards  learned)  a considerable  interest  in  some  of  her  stores. 
He  gave  utterance  to  this  by  passionate  exclamations,  walking 
up  and  down  the  beach,  and  throwing  his  hands  abroad ; till 
we  reasoned  with  him,  begging  him  to  be  calm,  and  take  the 
dispositions  of  Providence  like  a man  and  a Christian.  This, 
indeed,  he  did,  after  a while  ; but  at  first,  passion  had  its 
way  with  him. 


CHAPTER  LXI. 

THE  LIEUTENANT’S  STORY. 

E rejoiced  to  see,  after  that  one  great  heel 
she  gave  to  larboard,  she  settled  down  no 
lower  for  the  time ; however,  when  nearly 
another  half  hour  was  gone  by,  her  lar- 
board bows  dipped  too,  nigh  upon  a level 
with  the  quarter,  and  so  she  remained  fast, 
never  stirring  after  at  all.  We  thought  it 
might  have  happened  thus,  owing  to  the  position  of  the  leak ; 
next  day,  however,  showed  us  our  mistake  here.  But  now, 
we  began  to  entertain  great  hopes  of  recovering  at  least  a good 
part  of  the  cargo,  if  not  getting  off  the  ship  herself,  when  we 
had  lightened  her : besides  this,  we  hoped  to  be  able  to  do 
somewhat  towards  stopping  the  leak,  and  to  make  her  sea- 
worthy again.  In  short,  wild  schemes  came  into  our  heads 
fast,  at  the  sight  of  this  vessel  lying  so  close  to  us  ; we  began 
to  reason  (in  whispers  among  ourselves)  as  one  good  turn 
deserved  another,  and  we  had  done  the  crew  this  great  service, 
to  give  them  hospitality  in  their  famished  condition,  and  save 
their  very  lives,  ’t  was  the  least  they  could  do  in  turn,  to  refit 
the  ship  with  us,  and  take  us  on  board  on  equal  terms,  and 
land  us  where  we  might  choose. 

Don  Manuel  not  being  with  us  (for  he  was  busied  with  his 
sick  men),  we  kept  this  to  ourselves  for  the  time.  But  of  all 
persons,  he  that  desponded  most  was  the  poor  lieutenant ; for 
knowing  the  condition  of  his  ship,  he  assured  us,  her  timbers 
were  so  strained,  and  the  entire  hull  so  rotten,  he  verily  be- 
lieved she  never  would  float  again. 

By  this  time,  night  being  upon  us,  we  blew  a loud  concert 


238 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


on  our  horns,  to  give  notice,  ’t  was  time  for  all  to  retire  to 
quarters.  We  furnished  our  guests  with  good  store  of  fuel, 
whereof  they  made  a cheerful  fire ; then  toeing  a line  (as  they 
say  at  sea)  we  handed  them  across  the  boundary  a hot  mess 
of  stewed  pork  and  potatoes,  which  the  Indians  had  prepared 
for  them,  in  more  plenty  and  comfort  than  their  former 
meal.  When  they  had  finished  this,  (and ’t  was  soon  done, 
with  hungry  men  as  they  were  still,  both  then  and  for  several 
days  after)  we  assembled  all  together,  each  party  on  their 
own  side,  while  Don  Manuel  said  night  prayers  for  us  : for  we 
said  them  to-night  before  our  own  supper,  to  let  our  weary 
guests  have  their  rest  without  delay. 

’T  was  a sight  to  make  any  one  feel,  who  owned  a heart, 
when  these  poor  men,  so  lately  rescued  from  death,  knelt 
there  by  the  fire-light,  in  the  close  neighbourhood  of  their 
dead  and  dying  comrades,  and  made  their  thanksgiving  aloud 
after  the  good  priest.  A brief  prayer  he  made,  but  a hearty 
one  ; then  gave . them  his  blessing,  and  dismissed  them  to 
rest.  But  we  invited  the  lieutenant  to  be  our  guest  at 
supper;  leaving  Pounder  with  his  bow  and  quiver  as  a 
sentinel,  or  picket,  half  way  between  the  camps.  After  our 
meal,  we  begged  for  some  account  of  the  ship’s  adventures  ; 
which  the  Spanish  officer  gave  us,  almost  word  for  word  as  I 
here  set  it  down. 

“ ’T  is  no  news  to  you,  Senores”,  began  the  lieutenant, 
addressing  us  in  Spanish  as  we  sat  round  our  fire,  “ that  the 
name  of  our  ill-fated  vessel  is  the  Hermiona , of  V alencia ; 
for  you  have  seen  that  name  painted  on  her  boats,  as  you 
will  see  it  again  when  you  are  so  good  as  to  help  us  in 
boarding  the  wreck.  Then,  too,  you  will  see  her  fifty-four 
guns,  with  whatever  equipments  may  remain  ; but  alas ! 
of  the  crew,  five  hundred  strong,  besides  our  complement 
of  soldiers,  you  may  behold  all  that  survive,  in  the  few 
starved  wretches  whom,  under  divine  Providence”,  he  crossed 
himself  devoutly,  “ you  have  saved  from  destruction”.  With 
that,  the  poor  man  paused  a little,  being  overcome  by  his 
feelings,  and  not  well  able  to  proceed. 

After  a while,  having  received  from  us  all  tokens  of  sym- 
pathy, he  recovered  himself,  and  went  on : 

“ We  formed  part”,  says  he,  “of  a squadron  of  six  vessels 
fitted  out  by  his  most  Catholic  majesty,  to  watch  the  motions 
and  cross  the  designs  of  an  English  admiral  (Don  Georgio 
Anson  by  name)  who  had  sailed,  on  the  first  breaking  out  of 
the  war  between  bis  country  and  ours,  with  a counter- 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


239 


squadron  of  five  men  of  war,  a sloop,  and  two  victualling 
ships,  to  attack  our  colonies  in  Manilla  and  the  parts  adjacent. 
Upon  the  first  news  of  this  expedition  being  afloat,  we  were 
ordered  to  put  to  sea ; which  we  did  in  such  haste,  as  caused 
the  greater  part  of  our  disasters  after.  For  we  had  not  with 
us,  on  leaving  the  Spanish  coast,  more  than  four  months’ 
provision  at  the  utmost,  and  even  that,  reckoned  at  short 
allowance  only  ; so  that  our  best  chance  was  to  get  round 
Cape  Horn  before  the  English  admiral  could  arrive  thither, 
and  victual  our  ships  at  leisure,  either  at  Juan  Fernandez  or 
some  point  on  the  western  coast  of  South  America.  But 
first,  we  made  an  attempt  to  procure  us  some  provisions  at 
Buenos  Ayres,  where  we  reckoned  on  a supply ; and  so 
steered  for  the  Rio  de  la  Plata  from  the  leeward  of  the  Ma- 
deiras,  leaving  our  station  near  that  island  early  in  the  No- 
vember of  last  year.* 

“ ’T  was  whilst  we  were  lying  off  Madeira,  to  westward  of 
the  island,  in  the  latter  end  of  the  previous  month  (October), 
we  received  intelligence  from  some  trusty  friends  we  had 
there,  (but  most  secretly,  without  knowledge  of  the  governor) 
that  a squadron  of  ships  had  arrived  in  Madeira  Road,  that  is, 
to  the  east,  or  windward,  supposed  to  be  the  equipment 
under  Commodore  Anson,  against  which  we  were  particularly 
sent  out.  But  as  several  weighty  reasons  made  us  prefer  to 
encounter  him  in  the  South  Seas,  rather  than  near  home,  we 
determined  to  leave  him  a clear  passage,  instead  of  stand- 
ing out  to  meet  him  on  that  side  of  the  island.  So,  after 
sending  in  the  patache  that  waited  on  us,  to  reconnoitre  every 
day  close  in-land,  and  having  occupied  that  station  but  a 
short  week  in  all,  we  made  sail,  as  I have  said,  for  the  Rio 
de  la  Plata,  in  the  very  beginning  of  November ; and,  steering 
direct,  arrived  there  early  in  January  of  this  year. 

“ I now  see  our  great  error,  as,  doubtless,  does  our  gallant 
admiral,  Don  Jos£  Pizarro,  if  he  be  still  in  life  (if  not,  may 
God  receive  his  soul ; for  a brave  seaman  he  was,  and  careful 
of  his  men,)  our  error,  I repeat,  in  not  cruising  round  the 
island,  to  give  battle  to  the  commodore  where  he  lay : in 
which  case,  we  had  either  (through  our  superior  force,  for  we 
numbered  more  guns  and  greater  weight  of  metal,)  captured 
or  dispersed  his  squadron  ; or  at  the  least,  we  had  greatly 
disabled  and  delayed  this  expedition  against  our  colonies  : 
besides  causing  him  much  loss  of  provision-stores.  For  we 


That  is,  the  year  1740.  Ed. 


240 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


knew  he  had  victualled  and  watered  at  the  island  of  Madeira ; 
so  he  would  have  been  forced  to  throw  over  board  vast 
quantities  of  what  he  had  just  taken,  to  clear  his  ships  for 
but  the  chance  of  an  engagement : and  whether  victor  or  no, 
would  have  thereby  suffered  both  loss  and  delay. 

u However,  our  course  was  now  for  Rio,  to  outmatch  him  in 
sailing,  and  get  first  round  the  Horn  ; to  which  end,  parting 
company  with  two  ships  bound  for  the  West  Indies,  we  staid 
not  till  we  dropped  anchor  in  the  bay  of  Maldonado,  at  the 
mouth  of  Rio  itself.  But,  before  we  could  receive  our  stores 
from  Buenos  Ayres,  another  sure  but  secret  intelligence 
reached  us,  our  enemy  was  now  at  Santa  Catarina,  preparing 
to  put  to  sea  again  with  the  utmost  expedition.  Thus  we 
found  ourselves  in  the  hard  choice  of  going  without  the  pro- 
visions we  so  greatly  needed,  with  imminent  risk  of  falling 
short  indeed  ; or  being  beaten  in  our  race  across  the  ocean, 
to  find  the  English  squadron  in  the  South  Seas  before  us. 

te  We  chose  the  first  evil,  as  the  least ; yet  it  turned  out  to 
be  the  greater,  as  you,  Sefiores,  are  now  witnesses.  So,  having 
stayed  seventeen  days  only  at  Maldonado,  thus  narrowly 
missing  all  our  provisions,  which  came  down  into  the  bay 
from  Buenos  Ayres  within  a day  or  two  after  we  sailed,  we 
now  got  under  weigh,  and  put  to  sea  before  the  enemy  : but 
so  close  to  him  in  point  of  time  and  nearness  of  sailing,  that 
one  of  his  ships  (as  we  always  believed,  though  from  the  dis- 
tance we  could  only  conjecture,  for  our  admiral  had  given 
orders  to  the  squadron  to  sail  wide),  mistaking  our  vessels  for 
her  own  consorts,  got  within  gun-shot  of  our  admiral’s  ship, 
the  Asia ; and  we,  who  watched  the  affair  from  our  tops  with 
our  perspective  glasses,  had  great  hopes  she  would  have  been 
made  a prize  of.  But  she  discovered  her  error  so  as  to  put 
about,  barely  in  time,  and  so  get  clear  away”. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


241 


t£  When  we  set  sail  from  Maldonado”,  he  went  on,  u ’t  was 
the  third  week  of  this  present  year  : our  voyage,  too,  was  the 
longest  and  most  perilous  the  greater  part  of  our  crew  had  yet 
made ; and  we  dreaded  the  very  name  of  Cape  Horn,  so  for- 
midable for  the  storms  to  be  encountered  in  doubling  it. 
Our  men  now  became  very  discontented : for  the  weather  had 
been  brewing  up  for  a succession  of  gales,  which  came  on  us ; 
till,  with  every  attempt  to  keep  discipline  aboard,  signs  of 
mutiny  began  to  show  among  the  crew  : and  these  increased 
so  much,  we  had  to  clap  half  a dozen  of  the  ringleaders 
in  irons.  At  length  we  were  forced  to  double  the  sentries 
of  marines,  and  keep  a score  of  men  under  hatches,  lest  they 
might  spread  the  mutiny  among  the  rest. 

u Matters  were  kept  quiet  for  a time  by  an  order  from  the 
admiral,  that  our  seamen  were  to  have  part  of  their  pay  ad- 
vanced to  them  in  specie , that  is,  a portion  was  to  be  assigned 
to  each  man,  of  the  various  goods  for  barter  and  traffic  we 
had  brought  with  us  from  Spain  : that  they  might  dispose  of 
them  in  the  South  Seas,  and  so  be  in  the  way  of  making  their 
fortunes.  For  instances  were  currently  reported,  both  at 
home  and  in  the  fleet,  of  some  who  had  brought  back  from 
our  colonies  a wealth  in  the  precious  metals,  and  even  gems 
of  much  value,  in  barter  for  mere  trumpery  wares  in  calicoes, 
or  inferior  silks,  such  as  a Valencia  tradesman’s  wife  would 
not  wear  on  a holiday  : or  even  what  was  less  than  these,  as 
beads,  nails,  knives,  bits  of  looking-glass,  old  iron  hoops, 
glass,  or  glittering  baubles  of  any  kind.  The  hope  of  such  a 
gainful  traffic  buoyed  our  men  up  for  a while  above  their 

16 


242 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


present  miseries  : for  we  Spaniards  have  always  been  seeking 
an  El  Dorado;  and  there  was  not  a common  seaman,  nor  down 
to  the  cook’s  boy,  who  did  not  picture  to  himself  his  return 
home,  with  a triumph  like  Columbus,  a wonder  of  riches  and 
glory.  This,  with  a strict  watchfulness,  and  some  examples 
made  of  the  most  disorderly  by  our  captain,  kept  down  the 
mutinous  spirit  that  was  still  ever  rising  to  a head. 

“The  time  was  near  the  end  of  February ; by  this,  we  had 
run  down  the  coast  of  South  America,  and,  by  our  reckoning, 
were  in  more  than  fifty-five  degrees  of  south  latitude,  to  give 
us  a fair  sweep  to  double  the  Cape  : which  we  prepared  to  do, 
by  standing  to  windward,  in  the  very  last  night  of  that  month. 
But  (whether ’t  was  by  the  uncertain  currents,  both  of  wind 
and  sea,  that  conflict  with  each  other  round  that  great  pro- 
montory, or  by  what  other  cause  we  never  have  discovered), 
too  certain  it  is,  our  ship,  with  two  more  of  the  squadron,  the 
Guipuscoa  and  the  Esperanza , lost  all  sight  of  the  admiral 
and  the  rest.  We  were  now  greatly  at  the  mercy  of  the 
current ; making  much  lee-way  towards  the  eastward,  or  by 
that  to  south-east,  do  all  we  could  by  luffing  up  into  the 
wind’s  eye : at  length,  after  beating  about  within  sight  of  the 
Falkland  Islands  for  several  days,  our  ship,  together  with  the 
Esperanza , was  able  to  pass  the  straits  between  Tierra  del 
Fuego  and  Staaten  Island  on  the  sixth  of  March ; but  had 
here  the  discomfort  of  losing  sight  of  the  Guipuscoa , which 
we  saw  no  more,  nor  know  to  this  day,  whether  she  has 
gone  down,  or  doubled  the  Horn”. 


CHAPTER  LXII. 


THE  SAME  CONTINUED. 

‘EXT  day”,  continued  the  Spaniard,  u though 
I fear  to  weary  you,  gentlemen,  by  pro- 
longing the  sad  story  of  our  misfortunes, 
we  were  encountered  by  a furious  tempest 
from  the  north-west,  or  thereaway;  for 
’t  was  difficult  to  account  with  any  pre- 
cision for  the  wind’s  quarter,  where  all  was 
a confused  jumble  of  tempest,  head-winds,  and  conflicting 
currents.  All  I know  is,  we  found  it  vain  to  contend  with 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


243 


the  fury  of  the  elements ; had  we  attempted  to  do  anything 
but  just  put  our  helm  about,  and  scud  before  the  wind,  I 
verily  believe  we  had  ere  now  all  been  food  for  fishes. 
Neither  can  I say  whether  our  plight  was  worse  than  what 
befell  the  rest  of  the  squadron,  of  whom  indeed  we  scarce 
caught  a glimpse  now  and  then,  nor  any  at  all,  after  the 
second  day  of  this  furious  tempest.  Once  or  twice,  when 
lifted  from  the  trough  of  the  sea  on  the  back  of  a rolling 
mountain  of  water,  we  thought  we  could  just  catch  sight  of 
one  of  the  squadron,  running  for  it,  close  reefed,  or  partly 
dismasted  (I  could  not  know  which),  far  out  to  the  south-by- 
east. This  we  thought  to  be  the  consort  that  had  stayed 
longest  by  us,  the  Esperanza,  of  fifty  guns,  with  four  hundred 
and  fifty  men  aboard,  not  counting  her  portion  of  an  old 
regiment  of  foot,  many  of  them  broken  down  and  invalided, 
but  now  carried  out  to  strengthen  our  garrisons  on  the  coast 
of  Chili.  Alas ! where  are  all  those  brave  souls  now  ? have 
they  found  a grave  beneath  the  waters,  or  are  they  cast  away 
like  ourselves,  their  unhappy  companions  ?”  And  here  the 
poor  man  stopped  again  for  a little,  and  wept  outright. 

We  were  urgent  with  him  to  take  some  rest  now,  and  let 
the  remainder  of  his  sorrowful  story  stand  over  till  next  day  : 
but  it  seemed  a relief  to  his  pent-up  feelings  to  give  us  the 
tale  of  his  misfortunes  at  once ; so,  after  a little  remonstrat- 
ing, we  let  him  go  on. 

“ These,  one  would  think,  Senores”,  says  he,  “were  cala- 
mities enough ; but  greater  were  in  store  for  us,  as  your 
gentleness  shall  hear.  The  evening  of  that  same  second  day, 
while  we  were  doing  our  best  to  guide  the  ship,  but  with  ill 
success,  and  drove  almost  helplessly  before  the  wind,  came  a 
huge  roller,  indeed  a monster  of  a wave,  that  threatened  to 
swallow  us  at  a mouthful ; struck  us  with  full  force  amid- 
ships ; and,  but  the  Hermiona  is  a well-timbered  sea  boat  (in- 
deed, she  is,  alas ! I must  rather  say  was,  a charming  sailer 
on  a light  wind),  it  had  then  and  there  made  an  end  of  us. 
But  it  gave  us  a shrewd  wrench,  and  one  we  never  got  over : 
the  good  ship  staggered  and  trembled  like  a living  creature 
under  a heavy  blow ; and  when  we  righted  again  (all  but 
three  poor  fellows  that  were  washed  overboard,  and  went 
into  eternity),  we  found  to  our  grief,  almost  to  our  despair, 
the  binnacle,*  with  compass  and  all,  had  been  washed  at  once 
into  the  sea.  We  were  so  ill-provided  with  the  most  neces- 
sary things  for  our  expedition,  owing  to  the  haste  of  our 

* i.e.,  the  box  which  contains  the  compass  for  steering  a ship. — Ed. 


244 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


sailing  from  Spain,  you  would  scarce  believe,  Senores,  this 
was  the  only  compass  we  had  on  board : nor  can  I cease  to 
wonder  now  at  our  improvidence  ; but  so  it  was,  as  we 
know  to  our  cost. 

u Being  thus  left  forlorn  indeed  on  the  open  sea,  and  by  the 
blackness  of  a continued  tempest  shut  out  from  observation 
of  the  stars  to  guide  us,  we  let  ourselves  drive  whithersoever 
the  elements  would  take  the  vessel ; feeling  it  as  likely  we 
might  be  steering  away  from  some  friendly  haven  as  making 
for  it ; and  we  used  the  helm  from  that  time,  only  to  steady 
the  ship  : commending  ourselves  fervently  to  the  good  Provi- 
dence of  God  to  take  us  into  harbour  by  His  own  secret 
guidance,  whose  i way  is  in  the  sea,  and  His  paths  in  many 
waters’.  To  this  we  were  tenderly  exhorted  by  our  good 
chaplain,  Don  Diego  Rodez” — 

“ Diego  Rodez !”  exclaimed  Don  Manuel,  not  able  to  con- 
tain himself  for  astonishment  and  sorrow,  u was  Diego,  then, 
with  you  in  yonder  vessel  ?” 

u Aye,  truly,  father”,  says  the  lieutenant,  surprised ; a he 
was  our  chaplain,  and  sailed  with  us  from  Valencia,  sharing 
all  our  hardships ; and  continued  ever  to  be  the  main-stay 
and  comfort  of  the  crew,  till  he  was  stricken  down  with  fever : 
then  edified  us  all  by  his  holy  death”. 

“ Ah,  Diego,  Diego !”  cried  the  priest,  in  the  first  burst  of 
his  sorrow  : “ my  early  companion  and  friend  ! Ah,  thou 
saintly  one,  whose  example  I ought  to  have  followed  more 
faithfully!  and  thou  art  gone — gone  hence  before  me”: — he 
could  say  no  more  ; but  sat  with  his  face  buried  in  his  hands. 

We  were  all  silent  for  a while ; till  Don  Manuel,  still 
covering  his  face,  said,  in  a broken  voice,  in  Latin,  and  I re- 
peated in  English  : “ May  the  souls  of  the  faithful,  through 
the  mercy  of  God,  rest  in  peace  !”  All  answered,  Amen ; 
after  which  the  lieutanant  went  on  to  us,  in  a lower  tone.  I 
should  rather  say  to  me;  for,  as  to  the  rest,  they  did  not 
understand  much  of  his  Spanish,  and  one  after  another  soon 
dropped  off  to  sleep  round  the  fire. 

“ Well,  Sir”,  says  he,  “ we  found  the  same  sea  that  had 
washed  away  our  binnacle,  had  also  sprung  our  main-mast  to 
that  degree,  that  not  only  was  it  useless  to  carry  sail,  but  we 
feared,  at  every  lurch  the  ship  gave,  the  top-hamper  would 
bring  the  mast  down,  and  kill  some  of  our  men  on  deck.  We 
were  therefore  compelled  to  cut  it  away  by  the  board,  though 
’t  was  like  signing  our  death-warrants  to  do  so : and,  before 
we  had  got  half  through  it,  the  ship  gave  another  great  heel, 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


245 


and  saved  us  all  trouble  for  the  rest,  throwing  the  mast  sheer 
over  her  starboard  quarter.  We  cut  ourselves  free  from  the 
tackle,  and  sailed  on  as  well  as  we  could  ; but  our  steerage 
was  now  so  damaged  by  the  huge  waves  that  had  taken  us 
abaft,  the  ship  would  scarce  answer  her  helm  : and  two  days 
after,  with  the  continual  rolling,  our  mizen  shared  the  fate  of 
the  main-mast,  only  that  it  did  not  go  quite  by  the  board. 
The  Hermiona  was  now  little  more  than  a log  on  the  water ; 
all  we  could  do  was,  to  keep  her  head  pretty  fair  with  any 
ocean-stream  we  might  meet,  and  redouble  our  prayers. 

“ So  far  for  our  sailing  disasters  ; but  the  worst  remains  to 
be  told.  Our  provisions,  always  scanty,  had  fallen  so  fright- 
fully short,  nothing  but  death  by  starvation  now  stared  us  in 
the  face.  It  was  afflicting  to  the  utmost  degree  to  see  brave 
men,  who  had  set  forth  from  their  native  country  full  of  hope 
and  vigour,  now  doomed  to  die  on  the  wide  sea,  like  so  many 
caged  birds,  or  mice,  a death  so  horrible,  and  by  inches.  I 
believe,  never  did  an  impatient  sufferer,  groaning  under  some 
lingering  disease,  call  more  fervently  on  death  to  release  him, 
than  our  poor  fellows  yearned  and  prayed  for  the  English 
squadron  to  heave  in  sight,  that  they  might  at  least  die  at 
their  guns,  for  their  king  and  country.  But  all  no  avail ! 

“We  had  for  some  time  been  reduced  to  half  our  daily 
allowance  ; then  this  again  was  made  less,  till  we  came  down 
to  nigh  a quarter ; then  to  the  quarter  itself.  We  now 
began  to  lose  our  men  very  fast ; a fever  broke  out  together 
with  the  famine,  or  following  on  it : and  we  had  to  throw 
many  overboard  every  day.  Still,  the  provisions  declined 
almost  in  the  same  degree  ; so  that  the  number  of  starving 
mouths  remaining  on  board  made  us  scarcely  to  feel  the 
relief  afforded  by  those  who  had  ceased  to  eat.  At  this 
period  of  our  sufferings,  we  took  to  anything  that  offered,  no 
matter  how  distasteful  to  any  one  in  plenty  : the  rats  in  the 
ship  became  valuable  prizes,  and  were  disposed  of  by  any 
who  was  lucky  enough  to  catch  one,  as  his  hunger  or  avarice 
dictated.  I have  known  a rat  to  fetch  four  or  five  dollars ; 
and  when  they  had  all  disappeared,  more  than  double  that 
price  would  have  been  given  for  them.  Some  of  the  men 
stole  the  ship’s  lanthorns,  cut  the  horn  of  them  into  strips, 
and  kept  themselves  alive  by  chewing  it  in  secret.  Any 
old  piece  of  untanned  leather  was  most  greedily  seized ; the 
soldiers  esteemed  it  an  advantage  to  have  their  gloves  to 
eat ; and  seal-skin  shoes  were  quarrelled  and  fought  for : then 
later  on,  tanned  or  untanned,  all  came  to  us  alike. 


246 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


“ At  length — I tremble  to  think  of  it — one  dreadful  alter- 
native began  to  force  itself  on  our  thoughts.  No  one  spoke 
of  it  at  first ; then,  by  degrees,  it  began  to  be  whispered 
about,  but ’t  was  never  known  who  first  gave  utterance  to  it 
— that,  if  this  extremity  continued,  rather  than  that  all 
should  perish,  one,  or  some,  must  be  sacrificed” — 

Here  he  stopped  again,  overcome : we  shuddered  with 
horror,  too,  to  think  what  he  meant,  and  that ’t  was  possible 
for  Christian  men,  reduced  to  such  straits  of  hunger,  to  turn 
into  very  cannibals,  and  devour  one  another.  u And  how 
were  you  saved  from  this  horrible  thing  ?”  asked  Don 
Manuel,  at  length  : “ for  saved  from  it  you  were,  I trust  in 
God !” 

“ By  him  who  is  gone  to  his  reward”,  answered  the  lieu- 
tenant, crossing  himself  again  : 11  our  good  chaplain,  I mean. 
When  the  gunner  came  to  him,  lying  as  he  was,  exhausted 
with  famine  and  sickness,  and  whispered  to  him,  such  things 
were  beginning  to  be  breathed  among  us,  he  dragged  himself 
up  the  companion-ladder,  more  dead  than  alive,  and  stood 
suddenly  on  deck.  We  shrank  away  from  him,  so  death- 
like he  looked ; some  of  us  doubted  whether  it  were  not  his 
ghost : but  gathering  the  last  of  his  strength,  he  exhorted  us 
so  pathetically,  for  the  love  of  God,  and  by  faith  in  His  pro- 
vidence, to  abstain  from  this  hideous  resource,  that  we  all 
went  down  upon  our  knees  on  the  deck  around' him,  kissing 
the  hem  of  his  garment,  and  swore  a solemn  oath,  we  would 
hold  out  three  full  days  longer.  It  was  the  last  service  he 
rendered  to  his  Lord;  for  he  swooned,  and  lay  for  dead, 
almost  before  the  words  were  out  of  our  lips ; in  truth,  he 
died  that  very  night.  But,  though  we  were  reduced  to  the 
extremity  of  tearing  up  rotten  planks  from  the  deck,  and 
gnawing  the  softer  parts  of  the  wood,  yet  we  kept  our  word 
with  him,  though  with  great  difficulty  ; and  before  the  three 
days  were  quite  out,  we  discovered  your  island  from  the  fore- 
top, and  fired  our  guns,  which  (I  doubt  not)  you  heard.  You 
know  the  rest,  Senores : and  to  you,  after  God,  be  the  thanks 
of  the  perishing  given”. 

Having  thus  ended  his  narrative,  the  poor  man  knelt  to 
Don  Manuel,  to  ask  his  blessing ; then  saluted  us  with  all  the 
courtesy  of  his  nation,  though  by  this  he  could  scarce  speak 
for  weariness,  and  retired  to  his  side  of  the  boundary,  to 
forget  his  sorrows  in  sleep. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


247 


CHAPTER  L X 1 1 1. 


LAWFUL  WRECKING. 

JT  day  break,  next  morning,  the  horns  sum- 
moned us  to  spring  up,  and  begin  an  impor- 
tant day  for  us  all.  First  came  morning 
prayer  and  spiritual  mass,  which  we  never 
omitted ; and  here  I must  pass  by  the  astonish- 
ment and  joy  of  the  poor  Spaniards,  on  find- 
ing that  we  were  Catholics  like  themselves. 
They  had  taken  it  for  granted  that,  because  we  were  English- 
men we  must  needs  also  be  heretics ; and  were  slow  to  believe 
but  that  there  was  some  delusion  here,  and  something  would 
turn  up  afterwards  to  show  we  were  such  as  they  supposed. 
But  when  they  were  fully  convinced  of  the  truth,  I could 
plainly  see  they  not  only  were  well  satisfied  about  ourselves, 
but  regarded  Don  Manuel  with  great  reverence,  as  having 
been  the  instrument  to  us  of  such  a favour. 

Our  after  concern  was  to  snatch  a hasty  breakfast,  which 
was  made  as  plentiful  as  time  permitted,  having  hard  work  to 
do  after  it.  Pounder  and  the  lieutenant,  in  the  meantime,  went 
down  to  the  cove  to  look  after  the  wreck : when  they  came 
back,  each  reported,  in  his  own  fashion,  she  had  not  sunk 
lower,  but  on  the  contrary,  seemed  to  have  been  pushed  by 
the  advance  of  the  tide  further  up  on  the  reef,  whereon  she 
had  grounded.  For  this,  we  made  out,  was  the  reason  why 
she  heeled  so  much  to  larboard ; namely,  her  starboard  bow 
had  been  shoved  by  the  tide  upon  one  of  those  coral  reefs 
that  made  up  our  defences  and  the  peril  of  our  visitors ; so 
the  ship’s  balance  was  overset. 

We  ran  down  to  the  cove,  eager  to  save  what  could  still  be 
got  from  the  wreck : and  we  found,  as  the  lieuteuant  said, 
she  had  changed  her  place  indeed,  but  whether  better  or  worse 
for  our  purpose  was  hard  to  determine.  For  the  whole  of  her 
forecastle  and  greater  part  of  her  starboard  bow  appeared 
now  high  and  dry ; but  then,  to  balance  that,  her  larboard 
quarter  was  deeper  in  the  water,  and  half  the  quarter-deck, 
too,  was  drowned.  So  we  had  little  hope  of  being  able  to 
save  any  of  her  more  valuable  cargo  ; nor,  wha^t  was  of  much 


248 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


more  value  to  us,  her  store  of  powder,  that  lay  too  deep  in 
the  hold  ; nor  whatever  specie  she  might  carry.  But  that 
last,  the  Spaniard  assured  us,  was  little  enough,  and  only 
what  would  settle  the  ship’s  dues  for  provisions  in  port : for 
they  rather  hoped  to  carry  back  silver  to  Old  Spain  than 
were  equipped  to  carry  out  any  ; and  partly  were  designed 
to  relieve  the  galleon  that  sailed  every  year  from  Valparaiso, 
from  making  her  voyage  that  year ; which,  by  reason  of  the 
war  that  had  broken  out,  and  Commodore  Anson’s  expedi- 
tion, would  have  been  hazardous  in  the  extreme. 

However,  by  dint  of  hard  labour,  with  breaking  up  a part 
of  the  main-deck  (though  the  greater  part  lay  a foot  or  two 
under  water)  with  help  of  crow-bars,  and  other  instruments 
we  rummaged  out  on  board,  we  made  our  way  down  to  the 
officers’  berths ; but  found  little  to  repay  our  labour,  except 
some  fine  clothes  and  linen,  that  were  welcome  enough  to  us. 
There  was,  indeed,  some  small  store  of  money,  too,  and  other 
valuables ; but  these  were  so  little  to  our  purpose,  we  had 
almost  pitched  them  into  the  sea,  for  sheer  vexation  at  find- 
ing nothing  beside.  ’T  was  with  great  difficulty  we  got  at 
an  arm-chest ; when  we  had  found  it,  there  was  no  getting 
it  up  whole,  for  the  weight,  and  depth  of  water : for  half  our 
work  was  to  dive,  or  scramble  rather,  under  the  water,  with 
a rope  tied  round  us,  to  be  hauled  up  if  there  was  danger  of 
our  being  smothered.  But,  not  being  used  to  diving,  we  could 
not  stay  under  for  more  than  three  or  four  minutes  at  most ; 
’t  was  blind  work,  too,  after  all,  to  feel  about  for  such  heavy 
things  in  the  dark,  and  dangerous  to  venture  more  than  a 
few  steps  from  the  hole  in  the  deck  by  which  we  entered. 
So,  after  some  hours’  labour,  each  relieving  the  other,  we  got 
little  enough  for  our  pains,  though  Gill  stayed  under  so  long 
at  one  time,  trying  at  the  arm-chest,  to  break  it  open,  that 
when  he  came  up  the  blood  gushed  from  his  nose  and 
ears,  and  ’t  was  some  little  time  before  he  got  his  breath 
again. 

Our  Indians  did  us  the  best  service  here ; for  it  seems,  in 
Toonati-nooka  they  are  all  expert  divers,  and  trained  to  it 
from  their  very  infancy,  going  down  several  fathoms  deep 
after  pearl-oysters  and  other  shell-fish,  or  coral  for  their  orna- 
ments ; and  even  the  children  take  to  the  water  almost  before 
they  can  run  alone.  Pounder  and  Samuel  were  now  delighted 
to  render  us  this  good  turn : while  we  relieved  them  in 
mounting  guard  (for  we  harboured  no  unkind  suspicions  of 
our  new  friends,  yet  would  not  lay  ourselves  open  to  be  taken 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


249 


at  unawares),  they  kept  plunging  in,  turn-and-turn-about,  and 
stayed  under  an  amazing  time  indeed,  by  comparison.  At 
last,  between  them  the  arm-chest  was  broken  into  ; and  they 
came  up  in  triumph,  bringing  now  a musket,  now  a cutlass, 
or  brace  of  pistols,  now  some  heads  of  boarding-pikes:  in 
short,  during  two  or  three  days  (for  I must  go  on  faster  in 
my  account)  working  at  this  employment  only,  we  got  out  no 
less  than  twenty-nine  muskets,  with  seventeen  large  pistols, 
of  the  kind  they  call  a petronel , or  large  horse-pistol,  besides 
six  of  a smaller  sort : and  even  we  made  contrivance  to  unship 
and  get  into  the  boat  a small  brass  mortar  or  short  carronade, 
mounted  on  a swivel,  such  as  would  do  wholesale  execution 
if  it  were  crammed  with  bullets,  or  even  with  nails,  odds  and 
ends  of  iron,  nay,  with  stones  and  pebbles  from  the  beach, 
provided  only  we  found  powder  to  charge  it  with. 

Of  powder,  we  only  found  three  large  horns  in  the  officers’ 
cabins ; one  of  these  was  touched  by  the  water,  so  that  great 
part  was  useless  and  spoiled.  However,  we  brought  it  all 
ashore  ; and  later,  by  drying  the  damaged  part  of  this  powder 
in  the  sun,  we  made  it  serve  passably  well,  as  we  did  also 
the  rest  of  the  wetted  powder  we  got  up  afterwards  from  the 
powder-room  in  casks  : only,  it  would  miss  fire  by  times,  and 
we  were  never  sure  of  it.  But  we  had  learned,  by  this  time, 
not  to  rely  on  our  guns  at  all ; so,  husbanding  all  our  powder 
to  garrison  our  fortress,  we  laid  it  up  in  the  dry  magazine  in 
our  rock,  to  serve  us  in  any  bout  we  might  yet  have  with 
savages,  or  other  encounters. 

And  I may  as  well  mention  here,  we  began  to  make  bows 
and  arrows  for  our  Spanish  friends,  too,  and  taught  them  how 
to  use  them  ; we  went  on  with  our  regular  practice  from  day 
to  day;  at  least,  after  we  had  got  everything  from  the  wreck 
we  could  lay  hands  on.  So  that  we  might  be  reckoned  well 
found  in  weapons  of  offence : having  now  powder  enough  to 
blow  ourselves  and  our  enemies  into  the  air,  besides  such  a 
skill  in  archery  that  we  thought  it  no  rare  feat  to  pick  off  a 
small  bird  from  the  top  of  the  highest  cocoa-palm  in  the 
island.  Our  Indians  made  themselves  javelins  as  well  as 
bows  out  of  the  bamboo-canes,  and  shod  and  pointed  them 
with  shark’s  teeth  or  glimmer : also,  they  hollowed  out  other 
bamboos,  smoothing  the  inside  with  great  care  ; then  fitted  a 
light  arrow  into  them,  and  blew  it  forth  with  their  breath 
with  great  force  and  an  amazing  good  aim  to  a distance.  So 
that,  altogether,  we  were  now  a formidable  body  of  archers, 
six-and-forty  strong ; and  with  our  castle  and  powder-maga- 


250 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


zine,  might  have  given  battle  or  stood  a 6iege  against  more 
than  twice  our  number. 


is  stranger  than  fiction ; and  certain  it  is,  should  any  one 
take  into  his  head  to  invent  such  a tale,  on  the  side  of  the 
Spaniards  or  our  own,  and  put  it  on  paper,  he  would  be 
set  down  as  a romancer,  unworthy  of  belief. 

When  I returned  to  England,  indeed,  some  years  after  (for 
I may  as  well  outrun  my  story  here  a little),  the  war  being 
then  over,  the  commodore*  raised  to  be  a peer,  and  endowed 
with  great  wealth — all  which  he  well  deserved,  not  more  for 
bravery  and  signal  services,  than  for  humane  and  honourable 
conduct  throughout  the  war — I heard,  among  other  rumours 
which  I well  knew  to  be  false,  that  the  Hermiona  was 
thought  to  have  foundered  at  sea,  when  the  Spanish  fleet 
was  driven  back  from  Cape  Horn  by  that  tempest  the  lieu- 
tenant told  us  of. 

Nay,  this  was  even  believed  in  Spain,  as  I learned  from  a 
merchant  of  that  nation  whom  I met  at  a coffee-house  in 
London,  not  so  very  long  since. 

* Anson,  who  returned  to  England  with  his  only  remaining  ship,  the 
Centurion , after  the  capture  of  a rich  Spanish  galleon,  and  nearly  four 
years  after  he  had  set  sail  from  Spithead,  in  command  of  five  ships  and 
a sloop.  He  came  back  with  the  twofold  glory  of  as  much  naval  success 
as  the  vexatious  delays  of  the  government  permitted  him  to  reap,  and 
of  being  ranked  among  the  circumnavigators  of  the  globe:  arriving  at 
Spithead  in  June,  1744.  His  great  success  off  Cape  Finisterre  after- 
wards crowned  his  reputation  as  a brave  and  skilful  commander.  He 
was  thereupon  created  baron  Soberton ; and  having  risen,  through  every 
successive  rank  in  the  service,  to  be  admiral  and  commander- in-chief 
of  his  majesty’s  fleet,  died  in  1762. — Ed. 


CHAPTER  LXIV. 


RUMOURS  AND  SECRETS. 


'OW  began  a new  life  on  our  island,  and  at 
first  a strange  one  ; for  if  our  being  left 
| here  was  beyond  all  expectation,  six  poor 
1 forlorn  men,  to  shift  for  ourselves ; I may 
k say,  ’t  was  yet  more  so  to  find  our  colony 
increased  by  a second  unlooked-for  adven- 
ture like  this.  But  truth,  I have  heard  said, 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


251 


His  story  ran  as  follows  : That,  with  all  the  efforts  of  Pizarro, 
the  Spanish  admiral,  and  the  commanders  of  the  several 
vessels  under  him,  to  prosecute  the  enterprise  that  squadron 
had  set  forth  upon,  finding  the  tempest  too  much  for  them, 
in  the  disabled  condition  of  their  ships  and  crews  (the  one 
shattered  and  dismasted,  growing  leakier  every  day ; the 
other  worn  out  with  fever,  scurvy,  and  famine  alike,  dispi- 
rited with  adverse  fortune,  not  to  speak  of  the  exhausting 
labour  of  constantly  working  the  ships’  pumps  in  that  state 
of  weakness),  they  had  all  been  forced  to  run  for  it  before 
the  wind ; 

That  nothing  was  then  left  to  them  but  to  bear  away  for 
the  Rio'  de  la  Plata,  which  place  the  admiral,  in  his  own  ship 
(the  Asia),  happily  succeeded  in  making,  but  not  till  near  the 
middle  of  May  in  that  year ; 

That  two  other  ships  of  the  squadron,  first  the  Esperanza, 
of  fifty  guns,  with  four  hundred  and  fifty  men  (or  what  re- 
mained of  them),  then  the  San  Estevan  of  forty  guns,  that 
had  taken  from  Spain  a crew  of  three  hundred  and  fifty,  fol- 
lowed the  Asia , and  made  Rio  a few  days  later  than  the 
admiral ; 

That  the  Guipuscoa,  the  largest  ship  of  the  squadron,  a 
seventy- four,  carrying  an  equal  complement  of  men  with  the 
admiral’s,  that  is  to  say,  seven  hundred  strong,  grounded  and 
sank  somewhere  off  the  Brazils ; but  her  crew,  I mean  always 
the  poor  remnant  that  famine  had  not  devoured,  nor  fever 
wasted,  saved  their  lives  in  the  boats,  and  some  found  their 
way  back  to  Spain,  but  others  settled  in  the  Spanish  planta- 
tions ; 

That  the  Hermiona  had  -without  any  doubt  foundered  at 
sea,  since  none  of  her  crew  were  heard  of  after. 

As  to  these  items,  with  other  details  of  the  straits  the  five 
ships’  companies  were  reduced  to  for  want  of  provisions,  and 
the  horrors  of  famine  aboard  ship  (all  which  agreed  very 
well  with  the  Spanish  lieutenant’s  narrative),  I could  readily 
believe  each  and  every  one,  except  the  last  article.  Indeed, 
as  to  the  rest,  with  this  included,  I had  read  it  before  then 
in  the  account  of  Lord  Anson’s  voyage,  by  his  chaplain, 
printed  for  John  and  Paul  Knapton  in  Ludgate  Street. 

If  the  reader  should  now  ask,  why  I have  kept  this 
fact  so  close,  without  giving  (for  I never  have  given)  the 
least  hint  of  it,  whether  to  the  Spanish  or  English  govern- 
ments, nor  even  in  conversation  with  my  friends,  I would 
beg  in  return,  that  he  would  please  to  consider  the  circum- 


252 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


stances  under  which  these  men,  being  at  war  with  my  own 
country,  were  cast  on  that  island  of  which  I might  be 
reckoned  (in  some  sort)  viceroy,  or  governor : how  we  were 
all  there  together,  in  an  out-of-the-way  corner  of  the  world  ; 
how  men,  in  circumstances  so  strange,  in  the  utmost  distress, 
needing  each  other’s  aid  for  very  life,  almost  cease  to  belong 
to  this  or  that  nation,  and  merge  into  the  great  family  of 
mankind.  Let  him  reflect  how  barbarous  and  inhuman  a 
thing  it  were  in  me,  on  touching  my  native  shores,  to  turn 
informer  on  the  whereabouts  of  brave  men  who  had  been  the 
sport  of  such  disasters  ; that,  war  or  no  war,  they  were  my 
brothers  in  misfortune,  fellow-colonists  in  the  island  while 
they  stayed  there,  or  colonists  on  their  own  account,  if  they 
returned ; that,  whether  on  our  island,  or  in  Toonati-nooka 
(if  they  ever  reached  that  place),  they  had  the  same  right  to 
liberty: — but  while  I revise  these  sheets,  three  years  after 
they  were  written,  and  arrive  at  that  word  liberty , I feel 
with  sorrow,  these  are  not  days  in  which  freedom  from  in- 
injustice is  the  portion  of  a seaman,*  of  whatever  merit. 

In  fine,  I have  decided  it  in  my  mind,  that  not  they  only, 
but  their  descendants  for  two,  aye,  and  for  three  generations, 
(in  case  they  have  settled  in  that  country,  without  going 
back  to  Spain)  shall  remain  undisturbed  from  any  quarter, 
so  far  as  I can  provide  for  it ; unless  the  restless  spirit  of 
discovery  and  enterprise  mow  awakened  among  us,  shall  pro- 
duce another  South  Sea  Bubble,  or  another  voyage  round  the 
globe.  My  friend  the  Honble.  John  Byronf  is  perhaps  the 


* This  allusion  seems  to  point  clearly  to  the  death,  in  1757,  of  the 
unfortunate  Admiral  Byng,  who  was  shot  in  that  year  for  an  alleged 
neglect  of  duty,  but  apparently  to  save  the  credit  of  an  unpopular 
and  incapable  ministry.  Owen  Evans  expresses,  in  bis  more  homely 
way,  very  much  the  sentiment  recorded  in  the  Admiral’s  epitaph, 
placed  by  his  family  over  his  remains : “ To  the  perpetual  disgrace 
of  public  justice,  the  Honourable  John  Byng,  Vice-Admiral  of  the 
Blue,  fell  a martyr  to  political  persecution,  on  March  the  14th,  in 
the  year  1757,  when  bravery  and  loyalty  were  insufficient  securities 
for  the  life  and  honour  of  a naval  officer”. 

The  reader  will  observe,  that  reckoning  three  years  after  fifteen  from 
Owen’s  misfortune  in  1739,  brings  us  precisely  to  1757. — Ed. 

f Commodore  Byron,  second  son  to  William,  fourth  Lord  Byron,  and 
grandfather  to  the  unhappily  celebrated  poet,  was  born  at  Nevvstead  in 
1723,  and  went  as  midshipman  in  one  of  Anson’s  ships  (the  Wager ),  in 
1740.  This  vessel  was  wrecked  on  the  coast  of  Patagonia;  whence, 
after  enduring  extreme  hardships,  he  reached  Chiloe,  was  made  prisoner 
by  the  Spaniards,  taken  to  St.  Jago  in  Chili,  and  did  not  return  to 
England  for  more  than  five  years  after  his  departure,  i.e  , from  1740  to 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


253 


most  likely  man  I know  of,  to  ferret  these  my  other  friends 
out  in  their  retreat,  should  he  hoist  his  flag  again  for  those 
parts  where  he  hath  already  suffered  so  great  hardship.  And 
the  knowledge  of  there  being  such  active  spirits  among  us, 
together  with  other  motives  it  were  tedious  to  trouble  the 
reader  with,  have  determined  me  to  leave  these  sheets  in 
trust  with  a discreet  friend  of  mine,  and  with  his  son  and 
grandson  after  him,  their  hereditaments  and  assigns ; never 
to  see  the  light  till  one  hundred  years,  or  thereabout,  shall 
have  come  and  gone,  after  I have  passed  out  of  this  life  into 
the  world  to  come ; when,  sweet  Jesu,  have  mercy  on  my 
soul ! Amen. 


CHAPTER  LXV. 


THE  BEST  DISCOVERY  OF  ALL. 

ROWING  assured  of  the  honest  purpose  of 
these  new-comers,  we  went  all  lengths  (by 
degrees)  in  trusting  them : till  at  last  we 
repealed  some  of  those  strict  laws  we  had 
made  on  their  arrival,  forming  thenceforth 
but  one  commonwealth,  and  having  interests 
and  property  in  common.  aWe  will  have 
nothing  more  to  do”,  says  Don  Manuel,  “ with  those  cold 
words,  mine  and  thine”;  and  went  on  to  say,  in  the  first  days 
of  Christianity,  the  multitude  of  the  believers  threw  all  into 
a common  stock,  none  saying  that  aught  of  the  things  which 
he  possessed  was  his  own.  “ But  what  shall  be  done”,  I 
asked,  “if  any  prove  himself  a worthless  member  of  the 
community,  and  begin  to  disturb  or  injure  the  rest  ?”  “ Let 

him  who  discovers  it  take  that  man  aside”,  answered  the 
priest,  “ and  reason  with  him  in  meekness  and  charity”. 
“Well  but”,  I went  on  (he  and  I were  talking  alone  at  this 
time),  “ and  if  he  still  persist  ?”  “ Then  let  two  or  three  of 

the  elder  and  more  moderate  enforce  on  him  what  the  first 
has  said”.  “ And  if  he  be  obstinate  after  that  ?”  “ Then 

1746.  Eighteen  years  after  this  again  he  took  command  of  an  expe- 
di.ion  of  discovery  to  the  South  Seas  ; and  having  gone  round  the  world, 
returned  in  safety  two  years  afterwards.  He  commanded  on  the  West 
Indian  Station  during  the  American  war,  and  died  in  1768. — Ed. 


254 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


bring  him  to  me”,  says  he,  smiling ; “ and  I will  persuade 
him  by  those  higher  motives  he  possesses  in  virtue  of  being 
a Catholic”.  u And  lastly,  Tadoone,  if  he  remain  deaf,  even 
to  you  ?”  “ Then  we  will  banish  him”,  he  answered,  in  a 

decided  way,  “ to  the  further  side  of  the  island,  till  solitude 
or  hunger  bring  him  back  to  his  senses  and  to  us”. 

This  being  understood,  we  pursued  our  lives  all  together : 
and  making  no  distinction  of  race,  language,  or  date  of  coming, 
we  admitted  the  Spaniards  to  share  our  crops,  farm,  larder, 
cave,  and  all  the  natural  advantages  or  after  contrivances  of 
our  banishment.  They,  for  their  part,  shared  with  us  the 
stores  we  got  from  the  wreck  day  by  day  ; always  with  the 
proviso  we  would  account  for  the  value  of  these,  or  at  least 
give  in  an  estimate  of  our  use  and  consumption  of  them,  to 
any  authorities  of  our  several  countries,  should  a kind  Provi- 
dence one  day  take  us  off  this  place  of  exile. 

Having  arranged  matters  thus,  as  the  only  thing  to  be  done 
under  the  strange  circumstances  we  were  thrown  in,  we  made 
it  a part  of  our  daily  life  to  go  off  to  the  wreck,  and  fetch 
away  all  we  could  lay  hands  on.  We  were  well  content  to 
find  her  settle  down  no  further  in  the  water : indeed,  upon  the 
coral  reef  she  had  struck  on,  that  was  out  of  the  question ; thus 
we  were  encouraged  to  wait  for  some  extraordinary  low  water, 
at  the  neap  tide,  when,  the  sea  being  calm,  we  might  come  at 
some  of  the  stores  below  our  usual  diving.  Meantime,  we 
got  out  of  her  whatever  we  could  reach,  by  tearing  away  parts 
of  the  upper  deck  (to  which  end  we  made  a sacrifice  of  three 
or  four  more  gun  barrels),  and  diving  to  the  orlop  deck : 
though  we  found  that  dangerous,  by  reason  of  the  entangle- 
ments of  the  place  itself,  and  the  broken  bulk-heads  and 
woodwork  that  floated  to  and  fro. 

Indeed,  one  of  our  Spaniards,  Josd  Martinez  by  name,  had 
a narrow  escape  with  his  life  ; being  jammed  in  under  water 
by  a beam  of  wood,  so  heavy  he  could  not  free  himself.  Only 
by  the  strength  and  courage  of  our  noble  Tom  Harvey  he  was 
saved  at  all ; being  quite  senseless  when  Tom  brought  him  up 
with  infinite  difficulty,  and  himself  almost  spent.  As  to  poor 
Jose,  we  could  not  bring  him  round  for  some  time,  with  rub- 
bing, clapping  the  palms  of  his  hands,  blowing  into  his  nostrils, 
and  what  not : so  that  I truly  believe,  had  there  been  a swell 
on,  though  never  so  little,  they  had  been  both  lost  without 
remedy.  But  Josd  never  forgot  the  gratitude  he  owed  his 
preserver : so  that  a close  friendship  sprung  up  between  these 
two,  and  they  made  a compact  together,  they  would  specially 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


255 


serve  and  befriend  one  another  on  all  occasions.  When  this 
came  to  Tadoone’s  ears,  he  was  not  well  pleased  at  it;  and 
sending  for  them,  he  reminded  them  both,  they  were  already 
under  such  a compact,  not  to  each  other  alone,  but  to  all  the 
rest,  and  need  not  make  it  afresh  as  between  particular  per- 
sons. For  being  men,  says  he,  and  being  Christians  besides, 
we  are  bound  to  help,  aye,  and  love  one  another.  As  men, 
we  owe  our  fellow-men  an  obligation  of  mutual  aid  and  good 
will : and  as  Catholic  Christians,  we  are  bound  up  together  in 
the  mystical  body  of  our  Lord,  and  so  are  “ members  one  of 
another”.  I can  have  nothing  (he  added)  to  say  against  a 
true  friendship  between  two  men,  that  is  based  on  their  having 
a like  character  and  tastes,  or  being  companions  in  misfortune 
or  success ; so  that  general  charity  suffereth  not  thereby.  And 
thus  ended  his  little  discourse  to  Josd  and  Tom. 

’T  were  tedious  to  give  a list  of  all  we  got  out  of  the  wreck, 
by  dint  of  hard  working;  but  every  day  saw  our  stores  in- 
creasing in  things  very  useful  to  us  in  our  present  condition. 
We  carried  away  all  that  was  portable,  and  made  attempts 
at  many  things  that  were  not : in  particular,  we  became  rich 
in  damaged  powder,  and  old  iron,  what  with  hoops,  bars, 
nails,  and  clamps ; some  of  them  served  our  needs  in  the 
shape  we  got  them  in,  others  we  contrived  to  forge  into  rude 
spades,  chisels,  javelins,  arrow-heads,  and  what  not,  by  heat- 
ing them  in  the  hottest  wood  fire  we  could  make,  and  ham- 
mering them  into  shape  between  two  stones.  ’T  is  true,  we 
were  young  in  the  smith’s  craft,  as  in  many  other  trades  : but 
necessity,  they  say,  is  the  mother  of  invention ; and,  as  we 
had  only  ourselves  to  please,  we  managed  well  enough.  Also, 
the  planks  and  beams  we  got  from  her,  that  came  away  by 
degrees  as  the  irons  were  loosened,  proved  handy  to  us  in 
many  ways,  chiefly  for  putting  up  divisions  in  our  cave,  and 
for  firewood. 

By  these  instruments,  too,  we  so  enlarged  our  cave  itself, 
as  made  it  more  like  a catacomb,  with  passages  running  one 
into  the  other  at  right  angles : and,  growing  bolder  now,  from 
our  increased  numbers,  with  no  sign  of  savages  coming  to 
molest  us,  we  resolved  to  make  an  entrance  from  below  as 
well  as  above.  So,  going  to  work  within  our  entrenchments, 
we  hewed  a low  arch  into  the  base  of  our  cliff,  till  we  were 
seven  or  eight  feet  in : then  cut  upwards,  and  made  a sloping 
passage  with  steps  notched  in  the  rock,  aiming  (as  near  as  we 
could  guess)  at  the  centre  of  our  cave  above.  We  were  not 
so  far  out  in  our  reckoning,  neither ; for  when  we  had  worked 


256 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


for  the  best  part  of  a week,  we  found  ourselves  coming  up 
through  the  rocky  floor  of  that  short  passage  that  led  out  of 
our  main  passage  into  the  kitchen.  This,  to  be  sure,  was  an 
awkward  place  enough  to  find  ourselves  planted  in,  with  our 
new  stair-case : but  the  thing,  being  done,  was  not  to  be  un- 
done ; and  the  best  remedy  we  could  devise  was  to  cut  us  out 
another  passage  round  about,  avoiding  the  hole  we  had  made 
in  the  floor:  then  we  blocked  the  former  entrance  to  the 
kitchen  with  some  trunks  of  trees,  laid  lengthways,  one  over 
the  other ; and  began  to  use  our  new  stair-case  with  much 
satisfaction. 

To  come  back  to  the  wreck ; among  our  most  valuable  dis- 
coveries was  the  finding  of  the  chaplain’s  vestments  and 
chalice  (Don  Diego  Rodez,  I mean,  that  had  died  on  board). 
The  Spaniards  told  us  they  were  to  be  found  somewhere ; and 
true  enough,  we  lit  on  them  at  last,  stowed  away  in  a chest 
with  a few  other  things,  almost  worthless,  that  had  belonged 
to  the  poor  good  priest,  and  seemed  to  make  up  the  whole  of 
his  worldly  wealth.  As,  a very  old  cassock,  pair  of  shoes  much 
worn,  a shirt  or  two,  ncne  of  the  best,  a crucifix  and  small 
case  of  relics,  his  breviary,  two  little  books  of  devout  prayers 
and  meditations,  a larger  volume,  which  Tadoone  said  was  a 
treatise  on  theology,  and  some  Latin  papers,  with  the  seal  of 
the  bishop  of  Valencia.  These  were  all  much  spoiled  by  the 
salt  water,  and  the  leaves  of  the  books  so  glued  together,  we 
made  sure  no  man  would  ever  read  them  again.  But  Don 
Manuel,  to  whom  (1  could  well  see)  these  books  were  a great 
prize,  by  patient  drying  of  them  in  the  sun,  so  far  restored 
them,  that  a good  part  of  their  contents  became  readable 
again : and  he  took  much  delight  in  making  out  these  parts, 
giving  us  little  choice  bits  of  spiritual  maxims  and  words  of 
comfort,  proper  to  our  condition. 

The  priest’s  vestments  had  suffered  from  the  sea-water  as 
much,  almost,  as  the  books : yet  by  dint  of  care  they  came 
out  pretty  well  at  last.  As  for  the  little  altar-stone  and  linens 
to  suit  it,  they  were  no  ways  damaged.  With  these,  and  the 
sacred  vessels  (with  a case  of  very  pure  Spanish  wine  that  we 
found  in  the  captain’s  cabin),  and  a pound  or  two  of  virgin 
wax  to  make  tapers  of,  Ave  had  every  prospect  of  having  that 
Holy  Sacrifice  among  us,  that  Ave  had  learned  so  much  to 
desire,  and  Avere  so  much  hoping  to  profit  by. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


257 


In  brief,  Don  Manuel,  with  much  joy,  applied  himself 
to  the  bags  (our  Indians  had  woven  them  of  plantain  leaves), 
wherein  he  kept  his  store  of  wheaten  corn,  in  hopes  of  such 
ii n occasion  as  this:  grinding  out  now  a portion  between  two 
flat  stones,  he  kneaded  up  the  paste,  and  made,  with  much 
ado,  some  thin  sheets  of  unleavened  bread,  whereof  (after 
baking)  he  cut  out  round  wafers,  half  as  large  again  as  a rix- 
dollar.  Having  made  some  dozens  of  these,  he  laid  them  up 
in  one  of  the  driest  shelves,  or  cup-boards,  in  our  cave : then 
announced  to  us,  all  things  were  ready  to  celebrate  holy  Mass 
the  morning  after. 

This  was  joyful  news  to  us,  you  may  believe  : our  spiritual 
mass  and  communions  having  prepared  us,  by  a great  degree 
of  longing,  to  welcome  this  chiefest  of  blessings  whenever  it 
should  come  indeed.  We  spent  the  afternoon  in  getting  ready 
for  the  happiest  day  of  our  lives,  all  of  us  going  to  make  our 
confession  : which  occupied  no  long  time,  inasmuch  as  we 
(most  of  us)  did  that  every  week,  and  lived  at  peace  with  our 
neighbours,  except  a little  breeze  (or  so)  now  and  again ; and 
were  happily  removed  out  of  the  way  of  temptation. 

Next  morning  came,  and  with  it  came  the  blessing  of  holy 
Mass  and  Communion.  1 am  a bad  one  to  describe  such 
things  as  these ; so  must  leave  to  my  reader  to  suppose  for 
himself  what  we  felt  as  we  knelt  round  the  altar  which 
Tadoone  had  arranged  in  a little  arbour  we  had  built  for  our 
summer  chapel,  or  part  woven  and  part  built,  lacing  the  sides 
in  and  out  with  tendrils  of  osiers  and  supple-jack. 

One  of  our  Spaniards,  Bartolomd  Ramirez,  served  the 
priest’s  Mass,  having  been  used  to  do  so  (he  told  us)  in  the 
Church  of  the  Augustinians  at  Valencia ; and  so,  all  went  on 

17 


258 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


orderly  and  devoutly : nor  were  we  distracted  by  the  new- 
ness of  it,  having  had  every  part,  and  every  ceremony,  ex- 
plained to  us  by  our  good  Tadoone.  But  in  truth,  as  I recall 
that  morning  to  my  thoughts,  my  eyes  fill  with  tears  I am  not 
ashamed  of:  only,  I had  sooner  drop  my  pen,  and  go  on  my 
knees  to  thank  God,  than  write  any  more  about  it. 


CHAPTER  LXYI. 


SIGNS  OF  ANOTHER  MOVE. 


DNE  thing  only  seemed  now  to  disturb  our  tran- 
quil way  of  life  ; that  was,  the  disturbance 
we  noticed  in  our  friend  and  guide  : for, 
strange  to  say,  he  that  had  upheld  us  often 
in  wayward  desponding  moods,  and  disgust 
at  our  lot,  now  seemed  to  be  unhinged  by 
some  troublous  thoughts  of  his  own.  He 
said  nothing  to  us  oh  the  matter  ; but  kept  it  to  himself, 
whatsoever  it  might  be  ; trying  to  seem  as  cheerful  as  had 
been  his  wont.  Only,  I noticed  him  to  be  now  more  retired 
by  himself : not,  as  before,  when  he  was  engaged  at  his  de- 
votions only,  but  at  odd  times  too,  unless  he  could  help  us 
by  labour,  of  which  he  was  never  shy,  or  advice  on  any  point 
we  needed.  I came  on  him  once  and  again,  seated  with  his 
head  resting  on  his  hand,  gazing  out  on  the  sea  to  that 
quarter  whence  the  canoe  had  been  driven  to  us  by  the 
hurricane,  some  two  years  before.  When  he  observed  me,  he 
would  rise,  and  pass  it  off  with  a remark  on  the  weather  or 
such  common  things  ; but  I could  well  see,  he  was  thinking 
on  something  further  off. 

What  opinion  the  others  had  on  all  this,  I know  not ; for 
I would  not  share  my  thoughts  with  any  upon  it.  They 
looked  at  him,  ’t  is  true,  with  some  uneasiness  ; for  he  had 
become  a necessary  portion  of  our  well-being,  and  the  idea 
of  his  being  taken  from  us  by  death,  or  in  any  other  way, 
was  such  as  we  could  not  endure  : so  much  had  his  gentle 
manners  and  example  softened  down  those  rude  natures  to 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


259 


the  temper  and  affections  of  good  Christians.  But  no  one 
spoke  about  this  change  in  him,  except  in  whispers  one  to  the 
other  : I,  for  my  part,  was  at  no  loss  for  a shrewd  guess  what 
it  meant.  I had  not  forgotten  the  night  when  his  own  words 
showed  he  was  dreaming  about  Toonati-nooka,  and  convert- 
ing the  savages  there  ; I made  no  doubt,  therefore,  ’t  was  on 
that  project  his  mind  was  fixed,  and  that  he  never  would  be 
content  nor  happy  again,  till  he  had  contrived  to  go  over,  and 
visit  them. 

One  afternoon,  that  I found  him  again  in  this  musing  way, 
I made  free  to  approach  him  on  the  subject : I told  him,  in  a 
half -jesting  tone,  methought  I could  read  a little,  too,  in  the 
book  he  was  studying  so  deeply.  He  looked  at  me,  as  some- 
what surprised,  not  seeing  what  I meant ; for  he  knew  not  I 
had  discovered  his  thoughts.  Then,  presuming  on  our  friend- 
ship, I went  on  in  the  like  strain  : I told  him,  I could  put  the 
title  of  the  book  in  one  word.  He  then  asked  me  to  give  him 
the  word.  “ Nay,  father”,  said  I,  “ what  is  the  book  you  have 
nearest  to  your  heart?”  On  this,  he  pulls  out  his  constant 
companion,  his  prayer-book,  and  shows  it  to  me,  with  a smile. 
“ You  see,  friend  Owen,  there  are  two  words  on  the  title ; 
read  them — Breviarium  Romanum:  so  you  are  mistaken  in 
your  guess”.  “Well”,  I pursued;  u may  I put  my  question 
in  another  way  ? ” “ Any  way  you  wish  ”,  says  he.  “ What 
is  the  book,  then”,  I asked,  “ that  is  nearest  to  your  heart,  and 
furthest  from  your  eyes  ? What  is  it,  you  think  on  daily,  and 
gaze  after,  and  the  name  of  which  is  oft  on  your  lips  in  your 
prayers  ? Describe  it  to  me  by  the  name  of  a place”.  “ Truly, 
my  dear  child  ”,  says  he,  “ as  you  are  turned  catechist  on  a 
sudden,  I hope,  perhaps,  ’t  is  heaven”. — “ But  short  of 
heaven?” — “Why,  short  of  heaven,  I desire  to  find  myself 
safe  in  purgatory”. — “But  short  of  purgatory”,  I insisted, 
“ and  a longer  word,  if  not  two  ?”  “Ah”,  says  he,  smiling  still, 
but  shaking  his  head  now  : “ yes,  you  have  read  my  thoughts 
truly,  and  my  book,  I see  : ’t  is,  indeed,  Toonati-nooka ! ” 

With  that,  rising,  he  stretches  forth  his  hand  towards  the 
sea,  that  divided  him  from  the  object  of  his  yearning ; and 
says  to  me  with  the  tears  in  his  eyes  : “ See,  friend  ; below 
that  horizon  are  multitudes  of  precious  souls,  bought,  equally 
with  you  and  me,  at  the  price  of  the  same  Divine  Blood”,  and 
he  lifted  his  hat  with  great  reverence.  “ Ah,  how  greatly 
were  they  beloved  by  that  Heart  that  agonized  for  us  all  on 
the  cross  : yet,  how  far  are  they  from  Him ! how  far  from 
the  knowledge  of  Him,  or  power  to  love  Him]” 


260 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


He  stopped  a little,  overcome  by  what  he  felt : then  laid  his 
hand  on  my  arm,  and  said ; “ Remember  out  of  what  depth  of 
hideous  wicked  heathenism  our  three  Indians  were  rescued  : 
well,  even  in  those  dark  depths  are  countless  souls  now  lying 
there !”  he  repeated,  thrusting  his  arm  again  over  the  sea ; 
“ there,  there !” 

“ I see  them”,  he  went  on,  u as  clearly  as  with  these  bodily 
eyes  \ shedding  one  another’s  blood,  dancing  round  monstrous 
idols,  sacrificing  their  prisoners,  perhaps  their  very  children, 
to  demons,  dropping,  two,  three,  ten  at  a time,  dropping  into 
hell” : his  voice  sunk  to  a whisper,  and  he  covered  his  eyes. 

Soon  he  raised  his  looks  and  hands  to  heaven,  and  said  in 
a pleading  voice,  “ Regina  apostolorum,  ora  pro  illis !” 

His  lips  moved  still  in  prayer,  his  hands  clasped  together, 
the  very  sweat  standing  on  his  brow  from  the  extremity  of 
his  anguish. 

After  a while,  he  returned,  as  it  were,  to  himself,  and 
looked  round.  Observing  me  again,  as  I stood  staring  on 
him,  doubtful  what  to  say  or  do,  he  addressed  me  nearly  in  his 
usual  manner. 

“ My  dear  child”,  says  he,  as  he  calmed  down  again,  “you 
have  never  seen  this  before  : that  is  because  I have  withdrawn 
myself,  that  none  should  observe  it.  You  know  now,  what  it 
is  that  possesses  my  whole  soul.  ’T  is  my  vision  by  day,  and 
dream  by  night.  A voice  is  ever  sounding  in  mine  ears : it 
says,  ‘Come  over  to  Toonati-nooka,  and  help  us’.*  Do  not 
think”,  he  went  on,  smiling  at  me,  for  I stared  upon  him  all 
the  while,  at  a loss  what  to  think  ; “ do  not  suppose  I am  be- 
side myself.  I never  was  more  in  my  right  wits ; and  that 
you  shall  see,  when  we  return  to  the  rest.  I shall  be  calmer 
now,  for  having  told  you  what  is  in  my  heart : hencefor- 
ward, we  can  discuss  it  together,  and  see  what  is  to  be  done”. 

“ And  you  would  leave  us !”  cried  I,  transported  beyond 
myself  with  grief  at  the  thought:  “O  father!  just  when  we 
are  learning,  through  you,  to  love  God ; when  you  have 
brought  us  some  steps  forward  on  the  good  way,  you  will 
leave  the  plants  you  have  planted  and  watered!  leave  the 
sheep  you  have  brought  into  the  fold !” 

“You  may  well  believe”,  answered  he,  struggling  with 
himself,  “ I should  not  leave  you  all  without  pain ; but  there 

* See  Acts,  xvi.  9,  to  which  apparently  the  priest  refers.  He  might 
also  have  had  in  his  mind  “ the  voices  of  the  Irish”,  which  Saint 
Patrick  heard  by  some  supernatural  communication,  urging  him  to 
come  and  teach  them  the  truth. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


261 


is  one  great  sentence,  the  constant  motto  and  motive  of  a great 
saint,  which  expresses  the  rule  we  should  follow  in  all  such 
matters”. 

“ And  what  is  that  ?”  asked  I,  fearing,  I hardly  knew  what. 

“ All  to  the  greater  glory  of  god”,  said  he.  Then  he 
added,  with  vigour ; u Why  should  we  not  all  go  together  ? 
Or  if  that  would  overload  the  boats,  shall  we  draw  lots  to 
see  who  goes  and  who  stays  on  the  first  voyage  of  discovery  ; 
and  they  who  go,  promise  to  bring  back  the  boats  within  a 
reasonable  time  ?” 

In.  short,  soon  after  we  came  again  to  the  rest,  the  priest 
proposed  to  them,  that  a certain  number,  with  himself,  should 
take  two  of  the  boats,  and  set  forth  on  a voyage  of  discovery 
to  Toonati-nooka.  It  might,  he  said,  have  several  advan- 
tages ; for  savages,  living  in  the  state  our  Indians  had 
described  to  us,  would  be  likely  to  welcome  civilized  white 
men,  with  whom  they  were  not  at  war,  nor  had  any  cause  of 
quarrel,  and  who  could  teach  them  the  useful  arts  of  life. 
Should  they  find  the  country  enriched  with  veins  of  silver  or 
gold  (as  was  more  than  likely),  then,  he  said,  they  might 
receive  a benefit  no  less  than  confer  one  : only,  in  that  case, 
he  insisted  that  they  must  deal  fairly  with  the  inhabitants  ; 
not  exact  from  them  more  than  was  just,  nor  attempt  by 
crooked  means  to  get  the  upper  hand,  like  some  discoverers 
who  have  dishonoured  the  Christian  name  by  their  treatment 
of  the  heathen  to  whom  they  went.  For  himself,  he  had  one 
object  in  going ; and ’t-  would  be  his  care  to  choose  among 
them  those  who  were  not  likely  to  thwart  it : he  professed, 
he  gave  them  all  credit  for  upright  intentions,  but  even 
among  the  good,  some  might  be  bettermost,  etc. 

After  this  address,  for  which  he  assembled  us  all  before 
night  prayers  that  evening,  Don  Manuel  said  he  would  wish 
none  to  give  an  answer  till  our  devotions  were  concluded  the 
following  morning,  that  we  might  both  pray  on  it,  and  sleep 
on  it ; inasmuch  as  <£  he  who  goeth  slowly,  goeth  securely”. 
Accordingly,  the  men,  whispering  together  by  their  watch- 
fire,  came  to  different  conclusions,  according  to  their  several 
temperaments,  or  experience  in  chances  and  hardships.  Some 
were  for  going,  to  seek  fresh  adventures  ; others  would  sooner 
stay  quiet  where  they  found  themselves  :•  but  these  were 
chiefly  the  veterans,  who  were  so  beaten  with  the  storms  of 
life,  they  had  learned  to  set  a value  on  repose  and  comfort. 
Nor,  indeed,  could  I blame  them;  seeing  that  (to  human 
reckoning)  ’t  was  a wild-goose  chase  that  was  now  preparing. 


262 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


The  priest  had  his  own  motives,  we  all  knew,  and  went  simply 
to  save  souls  ; as  for  the  rest,  what  they  went  for,  but  a 
spirit  of  roving  adventure,  remained  locked  in  their  own 
bosoms ; and  so,  whether  ’t  were  folly  or  wisdom,  I pre- 
tended not  to  judge. 

But  the  end  of  it  was,  next  morning,  fourteen  of  the  ship’s 
company,  with  two  of  our  Englishmen,  that  is,  Gill  and 
Hilton,  volunteered  to  go. 


CHAPTER  LXYII. 


PREPARATIONS  THERETO. 

CREUPON,  we  spent  many  days  in  making 
provision  for  their  departure.  First  we  gave 
them  the  long  boat  and  shallop  to  carry  them  : 
or  I should  rather  say,  we  lent  these  to  the 
expedition ; for  in  truth  they  belonged  still 
to  the  wreck,  and  so  to  the  Spanish  govern- 
ment, by  the  articles  of  our  treaty.  However, 
Don  Manuel,  who  I am  sure  was  something  more  in  consi- 
deration, or  office,  than  he  seemed,  told  us  we  need,  be 
under  no  concern  on  that  score  ; that  should  any  of  our  party 
arrive  in  Europe,  or  another  Spanish  ship  touch  here,  we 
had  but  to  mention  the  name  by  which  we  knew  him,  and 
that  he  was  our  fellow  passenger  in  the  Enterprise  for  part  of 
the  passage,  and  we  should  find  it  all  right. 

This  being  arranged,  he  would  only  take  ten  of  those  who 
had  volunteered,  putting  back  four,  though  gently,  on  the 
score  of  their  weaker  health  : “ for  we  shall  have  to  rodgh  it, 
friends”,  sa}^s  he,  “ on  the  open  sea,  with  chances  of  weather, 
and  even  if  we  arrive,  it  may  be  in  sorry  plight”.  He  added, 
that  in  case  of  their  provisions  running  short,  ’t  was  a main 
matter  to  have  as  few  mouths  to  feed  on  the  great  wide 
ocean,  as  might  be.  Above  all,  he  bade  us  remember,  there 
were  three  amongst  us  who  had  best  right  of  all  to  take  their 
choice,  whether  they  would  go  or  stay:  namely; The  Indians, 
to  whom  the  opportunity  was  now  given,  to  get  back  to  their 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


263 


own  native  land.  So,  turning  to  them,  he  put  the  choice 
before  them,  one  by  one,  beginning  with  the  old  man,  Poula- 
faihe. 

T was  a touching  thing  to  behold  the  struggles  in  these 
poor  Indians,  when  they  heard  Tadoone  was  going  to  seek  the 
home  whence  they  came.  On  the  one  hand,  they  had  become 
truly  attached  to  us,  and  were  the  most  faithful,  simple  crea- 
tures I ever  knew  of ; with  no  thought  but  to  please  us,  to 
whom  they  owed  their  lives,  and  the  priest,  to  whom  they 
owed  their  faith.  On  the  other  hand,  the  ties  of  blood  were 
strong : we  had  never  asked  them  questions  about  Toonati- 
nooka  without  seeing  how  they  clung  to  the  memory  of  those 
they  had  left  there,  and  the  hope  of  seeing  them  again. 

Pounder,  as  it  appeared,  had  been  left  friendless  in  this 
world : his  father,  elder  brother,  two  uncles,  and  a cousin,  had 
all  been  killed  in  a battle  with  the  warriors  of  another  tribe, 
and  indeed  another  island  or  country,  who  came,  he  told 
us,  in  eight  Avar  canoes,  about  twenty-seven  moons  (so  he 
reckoned)  before  he  was  thrown  on  our  island.  These  savages 
made  a descent  on  that  part  of  the  coast  where  John  Pounder 
(who  was  then  Rer-mimebolamba)  lived  with  his  family  and 
near  neighbours  in  a small  village : here,  paddling  quietly 
along  that  coast,  in  a dark  night,  they  surprised  the  inhabi- 
tants in  their  sleep.  But  I must  not  run  from  one  story  into 
another ; only  to  say,  that  the  warriors  of  the  village,  taken 
thus  at  unawares,  made  a fruitless  resistance,  though  a despe- 
rate one  : the  greater  part  of  them  were  killed  outright,  some 
few  (Avhen  they  saw  all  was  lost)  escaped  into  the  woods, 
carrying  off  some  of  their  children,  with  their  Avives ; and  so, 
striking  up  by  difficult  paths  known  to  themselves,  got  so  far 
into  the  country,  the  conquerors  dared  not  follow  them.  But 
these  were  a very  feAV  out  of  the  number ; our  friend  J ohn  being 
one,  though  with  a wound  on  his  neck,  of  which  he  showed  us 
the  deep  scar. 

The  greater  part  of  the  men  were  killed,  (you  might  say) 
over  and  over  again,  being  savagely  mangled  as  they  lay, 
and  the  women  and  children  carried  off  as  slaves.  Only 
Rere-mime’s  wife  (as  the  poor  felloAV  told  us,  the  tears  stand- 
ing in  his  eyes)  refusing  to  leave  her  hut,  clung  so  fast  round 
the  pole  of  it,  they  could  not  get  her  aAvay : so  dragging  her 
by  the  hair  of  her  head,  but  to  no  purpose,  at  last,  they 
pierced  her  with  their  spears.  This  was  John  Pounder’s 
history  in  brief ; Avhich  explained  why  he  was  most  Avilling 
of  the  three  to  stay  Avith  us,  and  finally  chose  it. 


264 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


As  for  the  other  two  Indians,  ’t  was  both  a happiness  to 
themselves  to  go,  and  a benefit  to  the  expedition : for  they 
would  serve  as  interpreters,  not  for  the  language  alone, 
whereof  Tadoone  also  had  made  himself  master,  but  (still 
more)  for  manners  and  customs,  to  report  what  would  make 
him  acceptable  in  his  mission,  or  might  arm  their  country- 
men’s minds  against  him.  But  all  three,  with  the  rest,  be- 
gan with  equal  zeal  to  help  in  the  preparations : which  con- 
sisted chiefly  in  a stock  of  such  dried  provisions  as  we  could 
store  the  boats  with,  as  well  as  refitting  the  boats  themselves, 
to  get  them  into  condition  with  sail,  oars,  and  rudder. 

All  this  took  some  time ; for  though  we  were  now  rein- 
forced with  hands  enough,  we  had  no  carpenter:  the  carpenter 
on  board  the  Spanish  ship,  and  carpenter’s  mate,  both  having 
died  early  in  their  distresses.  Had  they  been  saved  alive,  I 
truly  think  we  had  made  an  attempt  to  build  a large  boat 
out  of  the  fragments  of  the  wreck,  all  rotten  though  she  was, 
and  fitted  out  an  expedition  of  our  whole  colony;  so  greatly 
did  it  go  against  us  to  part  company  with  any  of  our  com- 
rades. Besides  this,  we  had  a natural  curiosity  to  see  the 
country  they  were  going  to  : of  which  old  Mark  and  the  rest 
gave  us  great  accounts  in  many  ways.  However,  ’t  was 
no  use  to  talk  or  wish,  for  the  boats  would  not  hold  more 
than  the  number  told  off  for  them ; at  least  to  be  safe  for  a 
boat  voyage  on  the  open  sea. 

For  victualling  the  expedition,  ’t  was  clear  no  provisions 
were  to  be  looked  for  from  the  wreck,  in  which  was  not  one 
crumb  of  biscuit  to  be  found,  nor  a single  morsel  of  pork, 
nor  anything  else  in  the  way  of  food.  But  we  got  on  shore 
a small  mill-stone  set  with  a rude  handle ; though  clumsily 
enough,  yet  it  would  work : and  we  made  it  do  service  to 
grind  our  corn,  and  bruise  a quantity  of  yams  and  bread- 
fruit to  a pulp.  We  mixed  this  with  our  wheat-flour,  and 
kneaded  it  up  well,  worked  it  pretty  dry,  then  rolled  it  out 
in  sheets,  cut  them  into  lengths,  baked  them  by  a slow  fire, 
and  presented  the  expedition  with  a store  of  wholesome,  well 
tasted  biscuit,  such  as  many  a ship’s  company  would  be  glad 
enough  to  come  by  on  a voyage.  Beside  this,  we  smoked 
and  salted  a quantity  of  our  native  pork,  together  with  some 
wild  geese  and  other  large  sea-birds ; we  stowed  all  this  in 
three  barrels,  among  those  the  Hermiona  had  carried  her 
salted  stores  in,  and  got  two  into  the  large  boat,  and  one  into 
the  small ; also,  four  tubs  of  fresh  water,  well  caulked  and 
secured.  I gave  them  my  fishing  lines,  doubling  them  for 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


265 


the  deep-sea  fishery ; together  with  the  rod,  which  I judged 
might  be  useful  when  they  landed,  though  not  at  sea.  On 
second  thoughts,  it  ended  by  our  giving  them  one  of  our  best 
fishing  nets  besides ; for  thus  we  put  them  beyond  any 
chance  of  falling  short  of  provender. 

Next  came  the  ordnance  department,  to  furnish  them  with 
weapons  of  defence : and  here,  knowing  how  great  advantage 
the  use  of  gunpowder  gives  to  the  civilized  man  over  the 
strongest  savage,  we  resolved  to  be  liberal  in  our  grants  to 
them.  Indeed,  ’t  was  only  bestowing  on  them  what  was 
already  (in  one  sense)  their  own.  So  we  rolled  down  to  the 
boats  one  barrel  of  gunpowder,  whole  and  untouched,  besides 
more  than  half  of  another,  which  the  water  had  got  at,  and 
spoiled,  as  we  thought  at  the  time : but  spreading  it  on  a 
sail-cloth  to  the  sun,  then  rubbing  it  betwixt  our  fingers,  we 
found,  by  several  trials  in  our  muskets,  the  grain  was  quite 
dried,  and  took  fire  as  well  as  what  was  untouched  by  the 
sea.  Then,  for  fire-arms,  we  gave  them  a musket  a -piece, 
with  two  or  three  to  spare : two  pistols  and  a cutlass  to  each 
man;  nine  pikes  (what  with  our  own  bamboos,  and  some 
that  were  saved  from  the  ship),  and  four  boarding-axes  to 
serve  as  wood-hatchets  as  well  as  weapons. 

Their  greatest  want  now  was  a compass  ; but  that  Ave  saAV 
no  Avay  to  supply  them  with,  there  being  none  known  of  on 
board,  after  the  accident  of  the  ship’s  compass  being  Avashed 
away.  At  last,  by  great  good  luck,  or  a providence  rather, 
Ave  discovered  a small  pocket-compass  at  the  bottom  of  a case 
of  instruments,  such  as  burning-glasses,  and  one  or  two  im- 
plements of  surgery  and  optics,  that  had  belonged  to  one  Don 
Garcia  Nunez,  doctor  of  medicine  and  man  of  science,  to  Avhom 
the  Spanish  Government  had  given  a passage,  for  the  sake  of 
some  observations  he  was  to  make  on  his  way  to  Santiago  ; 
but  he  took  to  his  berth  and  died,  Avhile  the  Hermiona  Avas 
beating  through  the  Straits  Le  Maire.  This  whole  case  of 
instruments  we  put  on  board  for  them  ; all  but  a scalpel  or  so, 
and  some  lint  and  bandages,  which  I kept  back  to  serve  our 
needs. 

In  a word,  Ave  gave  them  Avhatever  might  turn  to  use,  Avhe- 
ther  to  defend  themselves  from  savages,  or  cultivate  their 
friendship,  and  astonish  them  Avith  the  civilized  inventions  of 
Europe.  Each  man,  too,  had  a double  set  of  clothing  complete, 
to  fence  him  from  the  cold  ; moreover,  as  we  found  means  to 
get  at  some  of  the  officers’  chests,  we  rigged  five  or  six  of 
them  out  in  uniform  laced  coats,  and  all  the  bravery  Ave  could 


266 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


invent,  of  liats  and  feathers,  shoulder-knots  and  brocade : 
knowing  such  things  to  impress  ignorant  minds  with  the  im- 
portance of  the  wearers. 


DEPARTURE. 

WAS  a disappointment  to  us,  and  a certain 
loss  to  the  expedition,  that  we  could  not  come 
at  some  of  the  bales  stowed  away  in  the 
Rermioncts  hold ; for  she  carried  (as  the 
lieutenant  had  told  us)  some  Spanish  fa- 
brics, and  English  stuffs  besides,  for  barter 
with  the  Indians  of  Chili,  or  other  parts  of 
the  South  American  coast.  Some  few  of  these,  ’t  is  true,  we 
managed  to  get  up,  by  dint  of  hard  diving ; but  in  general 
they  were  so  carefully  stowed,  and  so  deep  in  the  hold,  they 
were  beyond  our  utmost  efforts.  What  we  got  were  only  some 
inferior  stuffs,  as  we  should  reckon  them  in  Europe  ; though, 
to  be  sure,  they  were  prizes  to  us  in  our  need : we  looked  on 
ourselves  as  very  self-denying,  to  yield  up  the  bales  to  be 
stowed  in  the  boats  for  barter  with  the  savages. 

We  still,  to  be  sure,  had  the  ship  with  us,  as  a mine  from 
which  to  draw  more  of  that  kind  of  wealth  after  the  expe- 
dition was  gone.  But  what  was  more  to  the  purpose,  we  set 
about  to  provide  them  ammunition  ; though  here  we  had  dif- 
ficulty enough,  the  magazine  and  powder-room  both  lying  so 
deep  under  water  (being  in  the  hold  itself)  as  made  us  all  but 
hopeless  to  secure  them  any  powder.  At  last,  by  much  toil, 
taking  turn  and  turn  about  with  the  Spaniards  in  diving 
(wherein  some  of  them  were  expert),  we  secured,  as  I partly 
said  before,  two  barrels  and  five  bags  of  powder,  but  all 
spoiled  (so  we  thought)  by  the  sea  ; or  wetted  at  least.  But  by 
spreading  it  out  in  the  sun,  as  thin  as  we  could  spread  it  on  a 
sail-cloth,  with  turning  and  sifting  it  several  times  in  the  day, 
then  bruising  or  grinding  it  with  much  caution,  in  the  small 
hand-mill  we  found  on  board,  we  contrived  to  save  more  of  it 
than  we  thought  at  first.*  Only,  we  were  careful  to  grind  it 

* There  is  some  repetition  here,  as  well  as  a discrepancy  with  what 
was  said  about  the  gunpowder  towards  the  end  of  the  last  chapter. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


267 


by  very  little  at  a time,  lest  any  should  take  fire  in  tlie  mill, 
and  blow  us  to  atoms  : but  the  parcels  were  so  small,  though 
they  took  fire  once  or  twice,  ’t  was  like  a flash  in  the  pan,  and 
did  us  no  harm.  And  thus  we  were  able  to  save  at  least  four- 
fifths  of  serviceable  poAvder  out  of  all  we  got  from  the  wreck. 
As  to  what  lay  deeper  in  the  hold,  we  gave  up  all  hope  of 
coming  at  that ; nor  in  truth  did  we  much  need  it. 

Everything  was  now  got  ready  for  their  departure : and, 
since ’t  Avas  determined  on,  and  the  Aveather  favouring,  Avith 
a fair  breeze  from  w.n.w.  (such  as  we  made  out  by  the  In- 
dians, and  our  own  observations,  would  be  almost  abaft  for 
their  voyage),  no  reason  appeared  why  they  should  not  cast 
off  the  rope,  and  get  out  to  sea.  Yet  Ave  kept  them,  and  they 
lingered  a couple  of  days  after  this,  under  one  pretence  or 
other;  now  adding  some  stores,  noAV  stoAving  them  aAvay 
neater  in  the  boats,  freshening  the  water  and  vegetables,  caulk- 
ing also  the  boats  themselves  (though  quite  sea-Avorthy)  : in 
short,  anything  to  persuade  our  OAvn  minds  and  theirs,  they 
were  not  delaying  without  reason.  For  in  this  peaceful 
exile  of  ours,  sweetened  by  religion  and  our  kind,  cheerful 
Tadoone,  Ave  had  come  to  have  no  other  thought,  and  scarce 
another  wish  than  to  lay  our  bones  together  in  the  island 
when  our  time  should  come. 

But  Don  Manuel’s  zeal,  with  all  his  patience,  Avould  bear 
no  delay  beyond  those  tAvo  days,  nor  scarcely  that : so  on  the 
third  morning  early,  having  said  the  last  Mass  he  ever  said 
(to  our  knowledge)  on  Assumption  Isle,  and  strengthened  us 
all  by  Holy  Communion  (for  part  of  our  two  days’  prepara- 
tion had  been  spent  by  all  our  small  community  going  to 
confession  for  this  purpose),  Ave  made  him  a fareAvell  feast  by 
Avay  of  breakfast,  which  had  been  a dismal  meal  enough,  but 
that  he  strove  to  cheer  us. 

“ I am  not  going  to  preach  to  you,  my  dearest  children”, 
says  he,  “ for  the  time  is  now  come  to  act  *.  Ave  must  fall  back 
on  all  those  lessons  of  resignation  and  courage  we  have 
striven  to  practise  here  together.  Have  we  not  proved  to 
ourselves,  in  many  Avays,  the  only  blessed  thing  is,  to  do  the 
will  of  God,  and  resign  ourselves  to  what  He  appoints  or 
permits?  Now,  there  can  be  no  question,  that  Holy  Will  is 
taking  us  away,  and  bidding  you  remain.  What  will  come 

But  the  former  may  be  accounted  for  by  the  great  importance  of  this 
article  to  Owen  and  his  companions ; the  latter,  by  the  general  care- 
lessness of  his  writing.— -Ed. 


268 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


of  it  all,  is  more  than  I can  see  ; but  1 we  walk  by  faith,  not 
by  sight’.  As  we  are  bidden  to  pray,  each  day,  for  our  daily 
bread,  so  it  is  always  enough,  on  our  pilgrimage,  to  see  the 
one  next  step.  This  I now  see,  thanks  to  His  providence,  that 
makes  it  possible.  Did  I not  fully  hope  to  come  back  to  you 
within  a short  time,  I would  not  leave  you  at  all : we  would 
stay,  or  go  together.  But  go  you  cannot ; nor  would  you  all 
be  willing.  Go  I must,  for  I never  cease  to  hear  myself 
called.  What  remains,  then,  but  that  we  should  go,  and  you 
should  stay,  as  they  who  are  seeking  the  happiness  of  doing 
the  will  of  our  great  and  good  Master  ?”  “ I am  no  prophet”, 
he  presently  added  (smiling  through  his  tears,  for  he  was 
much  overcome),  u yet  something  tells  me,  though  I know 
not  how,  you  will  not  be  left  long  without  a priest  and  with- 
out a Sacrifice”. 

We  listened  to  him,  wild-looking  and  grisly  savages  as  we 
had  grown  (in  outward  appearance),  with  the  tears  running 
down  our  rough  cheeks  and  beards.  ’T  was  of  no  use  to  re- 
strain, or  attempt  to  hide  them  ; we  were  subdued  to  the  ten- 
derest  grief  at  thus  losing  our  spiritual  father,  and  our 
brethren  besides.  When  he  had  finished  speaking,  Tadoone 
rose  up  ; we  crowded  round  him,  some  on  our  knees,  and 
caught  hold  on  his  garments,  his  hands  ; Ave  kissed  his  very 
hat  and  breviary  in  the  passionateness  of  our  grief.  He  em- 
braced us  all  with  that'  fatherly  tenderness  he  had  ever  shoAvn 
us ; then  pointing  to  the  sun,  reminded  us ’t  Avas  full  time  to 
depart.  He  gave  us  his  solemn  blessing  with  a voice  choked 
by  emotion ; and  Avithout  another  Avord,  gently  freed  himself 
from  us  all,  and  led  the  Avay  down  to  the  boats. 

The  rest  of  the  men  tore  themselves  away  from  their  bre- 
thren, as  best  they  might,  Indian  from  Indian,  Spaniard  from 
Spaniard,  with  great  evidence  of  feeling  at  the  separation.  As 
for  Hilton  and  Gill,  they  Avere  moved,  too,  but  in  a soberer 
Avay,  after  the  manner  of  our  nation,  that  doth  not  (it  may  be) 
feel  the  less  deeply  because  ’t  is  slower  to  manifest  it.  In 
fine,  they  noAv  jumped  into  the  boats  briskly,  to  get  rid  of  sad 
thoughts  ; then  hoisting  sails,  they  began  to  sing  the  Litany 
our  good  priest  had  taught  us,  and  steered  out  into  the  off- 
ing. For  though,  as  belonging  to  different  nations,  and  those 
at  war  Avith  one  another,  they  could  not  sing  any  such  national 
sea-song  as  most  seafaring  countries  possess  of  their  OAvn  (since 
what  was  loyal  in  one  part  might  be  construed  into  an  offence 
to  the  other),  yet,  being  Catholics  together,  they  could  freely 
use  what  belonged  to  them  in  common,  as  members  of  the 


260 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 

great  family  of  the  Church,  and  spoke  not  of  the  interests  of 
time,  but  of  eternity. 

We,  who  remained,  kneeled  on  the  shore  till  they  had 
pulled  so  far  away  (the  wind  also  setting  off  shore)  as  that 
all  sound  of  their  voices  was  lost  to  us ; then  we  stood  up, 
straining  our  eyes  to  catch  the  latest  glimpse  of  them.  One 
of  the  last  things  we  saw  was,  Don  Manuel  stood  up  in  the 
stern  of  the  long-boat,  and  stretched  forth  his  arms  towards 
heaven,  to  invoke  upon  us  a farewell  blessing.  At  this,  we 
dropped  on  our  knees  again,  and  wept  like  children,  to  think 
he  was  gone  for  a time  so  long  and  uncertain,  leaving  us 
orphans  behind  him.  And  so,  when  the  boats  looked  like 
mere  specks  on  the  sea,  and  then  disappeared  altogether,  for 
the  wind  continued  fair,  and  afterwards  blew  a breeze,  we 
left  the  shore  in  much  sorrow,  and  loitered  about  the  rest  of 
that  day,  not  settling  down  to  anything.  We  ate  a cheerless 
supper;  then  I said  night  prayers  (for  I acted  from  that  time 
as  a sort  of  lay  chaplain),  and  we  went  to  rest  early,  to  sleep 
away  as  much  of  our  grief  as  we  might. 

’T  was  a strange  thing  indeed  for  us  to  wake  next  morning, 
and  find  no  Tadoone,  no  meditation,  nor  Mass.  But,  that 
being  our  condition  for  many  a long  day  after,  I need  not 
dwell  on  what  we  became  used  to  by  degrees : only  to  record, 
that  all  things  went  on  with  us,  orderly  enough  ; though  we 
felt  dull  in  our  spirits,  and  could  not  be  reconciled  to  our 
great  loss.  Neither  did  our  tempers  improve  under  the 
change ; and  Dick  Prodgers,  though  he  never  returned  to  be 
what  he  was  before  the  Faith  was  given  him,  yet  now  and 
then  showed  (as  I may  say  most  of  us  did,  some  more, 
some  less)  how  weak  a poor  creature  is  man,  when  he  is 
not  supported  above  himself  by  sacramental  grace.  This, 
indeed,  Tadoone  had  warned  us  of,  beseeching  us  with  tears, 
to  keep  ourselves  in  the  good  dispositions  he  left  us  in.  Nor, 
truly,  was  it  the  disposition  that  failed  us,  so  much  as  the 
execution  of  what  we  had  resolved  on ; for  the  “ spirit  was 
willing,  but  the  flesh  was  weak”. 

We  came  round  again  soon,  after  these  little  outbreaks, 
which  never  grew  to  any  real  breach  of  the  peace : only  they 
gave  us  discomfort,  making  us  out  of  sorts  with  ourselves, 
even  while  we  forgave  one  another.  So  that,  with  all  our 
outward  security  and  prosperous  condition,  we  would  often 
range  up  and  down  the  shore,  and  like  very  children,  stretch 
our  arms  over  the  sea,  and  yearn  for  Tadoone  to  come  back 
to  us  again. 


270 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


CHAPTER  LXIX. 

THE  ERUPTION. 

UT  these  moods  were  broken  in  upon,  and  our 
life  on  the  island  took  a new  direction  (or 
was  cut  short,  rather),  by  something  of  the 
most  unlooked-for  kind,  that  chanced  within 
ten  days  after.  I say,  ’t  was  unlooked-for, 
truly ; for  though  we  might  reasonably  ex- 
pect savages,  or  another  ship  to  touch  at  our 
prison-house  and  take  us  off  again,  or  pirates  to  attack  us,  we 
never  forecast  the  strange  event  I am  now  to  relate. 

The  mountain  that  lay  to  northward  of  our  cave  (though  I 
knew  it  to  have  been  once  on  a time  burning,  indeed  we  al- 
ways called,  it  the  volcano),  had  looked  to  us  as  still  and 
motionless  as  any  other  part  of  the  place.  If  ever  I thought 
on  the  scene  of  devastation  it  had  been  formerly,  ’t  was  much 
as  we  think  of  ancient  history,  the  wars  of  Cassar,  or  the 
Danes.  I little  thought,  at  least,  the  same  convulsions  were 
to  spring  out  from  it  anew  in  our  times  ; still  less  could  I 
prophesy  what  good  that  would  minister  to  us. 

All  this  is  putting  (as  they  say)  the  cart  before  the  horse  ; 
and,  to  begin  this  part  of  my  narrative,  I must  record  that,  for 
some  days,  the  air  had  felt  sultry  beyond  the  common,  and  the 
water  in  the  spring  that  supplied  our  conduit  from  Riverhead 
had  grown  less  and  less.  We  knew  not  why  ; for  ’t  was  the 
first  time  this  happened  during  our  exile  ; winter  and  summer, 
’t  was  always  flowing.  Besides,  the  water  that  now  came  was 
not  only  scant,  but  troubled,  and  had  a bad  sulphurous  taste 
and  smell,  that  made  it  unpalatable,  and  (we  thought)  un- 
wholesome. At  last,  one  day  it  ceased  altogether : we  took 
this  for  a stoppage  in  the  pipe ; but,  going  to  the  spring  to 
discover  the  cause,  we  found  it  as  dry  as  the  very  mountain 
itself. 

This  disturbed  us  much,  not  only  for  the  want  of  water 
(though  that  was  a want  indeed),  but  from  apprehension  of 
what  it  might  portend ; for  I had  read,  and  one  of  the 
Spaniards  confirmed  it  from  his  experience  of  the  South 
American  coast,  that  before  such  burning  mountains  as  we 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


271 


know  of,  for  example,  Vesuvius,  and  others,  break  into  an 
eruption,  the  wells  in  the  district  are  used  to  run  dry.  I 
suppose,  by  some  alteration  in  the  earth’s  veins,  the  water 
finds  its  way  downward  in  place  of  upward  ; and,  turning  to 
hot  vapour,  adds  to  the  force  of  the  volcano  ; or,  by  the 
increased  heat  of  the  mountain  when  ’t  is  about  to  discharge 
its  fiery  streams,  the  neighbouring  springs  become  sucked  and 
dried  up,  as  water  is,  if  poured  into  the  heated  grate  of  a 
chimney. 

Anyhow  (for  I write  of  it  more  coolly  than  I witnessed  it 
at  the  time)  our  mountain  began  meanwhile  to  groan  in  a -way 
most  dreadful  to  hearken  to ; rumbling  beneath  us,  much  as  I 
have  known  a heavity  loaded  waggon  to  shake  the  houses  on 
either  side  of  a narrow  street.  For  the  very  earth  shook,  as 
we  thought ; notwithstanding  we  were  fain  to  persuade  our- 
selves ’t  was  our  fears  suggested  it.  The  air,  too,  turned  to 
an  oppressive  dryness  and  heat,  that  well  nigh  took  away  our 
breathing ; and  all  was  so  heavy  and  so  still,  the  very  birds 
seemed  to  feel  it  as  we  did ; for  though  at  first  they  flew  round 
and  round,  screaming  and  bewildered,  yet  soon  they  betook 
them  to  the  trees,  and  there  perched  in  silence,  as  not  know- 
ing what  was  to  come.  We  noticed  some  animals,  too,  roam- 
ing about  quite  restless,  and  heard  them  cry  out,  each  after 
its  fashion,  as  if  in  distress  and  fear. 

For  ourselves,  we  stood  all  together  on  the  open  shore, 
clear  of  rocks  and  trees,  to  give  our  lives  the  best  chance,  if 
indeed  this  should  prove  an  earthquake,  as  wre  had  foreboded. 
We  knew  not  what  else  to  do  at  the  moment,  to  save  our- 
selves ; fearing  to  go  towards  our  cave,  or  storehouse,  lest  we 
might  be  smothered  in  it  b}>  the  roof  falling  in  : fearing  also 
to  make  for  the  boat,  which  lay  tossing  at  her  moorings ; for 
by  this  time  the  sea  had  risen,  with  a strange,  irregular  tide, 
as  though  it  were  convulsed  from  beneath  : and  we  expected 
every  moment  to  see  our  boat  stove  on  the  rocks.  And  thus 
we  stood,  in  such  an  agony  of  doubt  and  apprehension,  as,  I 
think,  oppresses  most  men,  when  they  can  do  nothing  towards 
their  own  deliverance,  but  must  Avait  afid  look  on  at  a great 
danger,  and  let  it  take  its  course,  even  if  that  be  over  their 
mangled  bodies. 

I say,  we  stood  thus ; but  I should  add  that  first  one,  then 
another,  dropped  cn  their  knees,  and  began  to  pray  fervently 
to  heaven  for  help.  At  last,  there  was  not  one  that  joined 
not  in  this  act ; though  there  was,  indeed,  no  unity  in  the 
words  of  our  prayer,  for  some  prayed  one  thing,  some  an- 


272 


THE  ADVENT UitES  OF 


other : here  one  would  make  an  act  of  hearty  contrition,  and 
cry  out  to  heaven  for  a priest ; there,  another  would  resign 
himself  into  the  hands  of  God,  to  live  or  die : on  this  side 
was  a man  who  vowed  what  he  would  do,  did  he  but  escape 
with  life : on  that  side  was  his  comrade,  struck  dumb,  and 
able  to  do  nothing  but  quake  for  very  fear. 

But  there  was  unity  enough  in  the  intention,  for  we  all 
prayed  with  our  hearts  for  deliverance  out  of  this  great  dan- 
ger, so  sudden  and  awful.  For  my  part,  though  I write 
calmly  of  it  now,  looking  back  on  it  through  years  of  other 
adventures  I afterwards  went  through,  I bring  to  mind  (as  if 
it  were  yesterday)  the  overmastering  sense  that  seized  on  me 
of  the  awfulness  of  God’s  judgments  when  His  hand  launches 
the  arrows  of  vengeance,  or  when  He  speaks  in  the  thunders 
of  His  majesty;  also,  the  comfort  it  was  then  to  me,  though 
trembling  as  a sinner  before  Him,  to  reflect,  I had  used  the 
grace  given  me  to  repent,  while  there  was  time.  For  now, 
while  we  all  seemed  on  the  brink  of  such  a grave,  had  the 
great  work  of  salvation  been  to  commence,  I had  been  tempted 
or  driven  to  despair.  But  now  I recalled  my  past  confes- 
sions : I besought  mercy  for  any  hidden  things  that  might 
be  unconfessed,  because,  after  all  search,  unremembered ; I 
renewed  my  contrition;  I thanked  my  God  for  His  graces 
bestowed  on  me,  resigned  my  life  and  my  soul  into  His 
fatherly  hands,  and  then  did  my  best  to  awaken  such 
thoughts  and  pour  this  comfort  into  the  souls  of  my  com- 
rades likewise. 

While  we  thus  did  what  we  could  for  ourselves  and  one 
another,  on  a sudden,  there  came  the  most  fearful  trembling 
and  upheaving  of  the  ground  beneath  us,  that  ever  (I  be- 
lieve) was  experienced  by  mortal  man.  It  seemed  as  if  the 
whole  island  were  being  wrenched  from  its  base,  and  some 
power  below  were  going  to  fling  it  on  one  side.  All  that 
part  of  the  coast  rocked  to  and  fro ; the  sea  at  the  same 
time  ran  high,  and  boiled  over,  like  a cauldron,  washing  up 
so  near  us,  as  made  it  seem  an  even  chance  whether  we 
were  to  be  swallowed  by  earth  or  ocean.  We  reeled  and 
staggered,  like  so  many  drunken  men,  catching  hold  on  each 
other  for  support : but  this  had  not  lasted  as  long  as  I have 
taken  to  describe  it,  when  a more  violent  heave  flung  us  on 
our  faces,  with  a strange,  whirling  motion  that  partly  spun 
us  round : so  that,  old  seamen  as  most  of  us  were,  used  to 
short,  chopping  seas  and  counter- currents,  this  made  us  feel 
as  sea-sick  as  a landsman  in  his  first  gale  of  wind. 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


273 


Before  we  recovered  our  legs  (which  we  scarce  attempted, 
as  not  knowing  whither  to  flee,  thinking  it  best  to  lie  there) 
we  heard  the  crashing  of  the  rocks  about  our  cave,  by  which 
we  judged  the  cave  itself  to  have  fallen  in : as  afterwards 
we  found  to  be  too  true.  At  the  same  time,  some  large  pieces 
of  rock,  that  were  loosened  from  the  top  of  our  cliff,  came 
rolling  towards  us,  and  threatened  to  crush  us  at  every 
bound.  But  even  this  was  not  so  great  a danger  as  the 
noisome,  sulphurous  vapour  that  rose  out  of  a deep  cleft  in 
the  ground,  not  many  yards  from  where  we  lay,  confused 
and  giddy ; it  volleyed  forth  upon  us,  like  the  smoke  from 
the  broadside  of  a ship  when  all  her  guns  are  discharged  at 
once,  but  with  so  insupportable  a stench  of  brimstone  as  had 
taken  away  our  very  lives,  did  we  remain  there  a moment 
longer.  I called  on  my  companions,  half-stifled  as  I was,  to 
rise  and  run  for  their  lives  : indeed,  our  only  chance  was  to 
rise  to  our  full  height,  and  let  this  heavy,  creeping  vapour 
spread  out  along  the  ground,  while  we  ran  before  it.  But 
some  of  our  number  were,  by  this  time  so  stunned  and 
amazed  by  all  these  new  and  awful  things  coming  upon  us 
in  a heap,  we  had  much  ado  to  pull  them  up  and  put  them 
in  motion.  Whether  the  fumes  of  this  vapour  had  mounted 

18 


274 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


to  their  brain,  stupifying  them,  or  whether  the  fear  alone 
had  quelled  their  animal  spirits,  some  of  them  begged  us  to 
let  them  lie  there,  and  die  in  peace.  And  as  for  one  of  the 
men,  named  Ruy  Perez,  he  was  so  far  gone  in  this  fatal 
drowsiness,  I thought  we  should  never  have  gotten  him  up, 
nor  yet  brought  him  round. 


CHAPTER  LXX. 


DEATH  IN  MORE  SHAPES  THAN  ONE. 


*E  made  the  best  of  our  way  out  of  this  roll- 
ing vapour,  till  at  last  we  got  clear  of  it,  on 
to  a little  jutting  promontory  that  made  us 
safe  from  the  lash  of  the  sea ; for  it  boiled 
with  exceeding  violence,  though  there  was 
next  to  no  wind  stirring.  When  we  all  got 
safe  on  to  this  point,  we  seemed  to  have  been 
conducted  hither  by  some  purpose  of  Providence,  to  make  us 
beholders  of  the  most  awful,  stupendous  sight  the  eye  of  man 
could  well  behold,  short  of  the  last  Judgment.  There  came 
another  rumbling  frotn  beneath,  but  not  so  directly  under 
our  feet  as  the  first,  with  a sound  like  the  falling  of  one 
heavy  bar  of  metal  on  another ; and  this  sound  came  repeated 
four  or  five  times.  Then,  on  a sudden,  an  explosion  like  the 
roar  of  artillery  (only  far  louder,  and  enough  to  crack  the 
drums  of  our  ears,  as  seamen  have  been  deafened  in  a battle) 
came  from  the  mountain  itself,  and  the  whole  island  seemed 
to  tremble  again:  even  the  point  of  land  whereon  we  were, 
rocked  and  heaved,  till  we  thought  it  would  have  fallen  into 
the  sea,  with  us  upon  it.  I could  not  have  counted  ten  after 
this  explosion,  when  a pillar  of  smoke  rose  up  direct  from  a 
great  cleft  riven  in  the  side  of  the  mountain,  nearer  the  top 
than  base,  and  towered  into  the  air,  more  like  a tall  palm- 
tree*  than  anything  I can  liken  it  to  beside.  It  was  followed 


* A curious  coincidence  of  expression  with  the  younger  Pliny’s  ac- 
count of  the  eruption  of  Vesuvius  which  overwhelmed  Herculaneum 
and  Pompeii,  a.d.  79.  “ On  the  23rd  of  August”,  he  says,  writing  to 
Tacitus,  “about  one  in  the  afternoon,  my  mother  desired  him” (the 
elder  Pliny,  who  was  commanding  the  fleet  at  Misenum,  in  the  bay  of 
Naples,)  “ to  observe  a cloud  which  appeared  of  a very  unusual  size  and 
shape.  . He  immediately  arose,  and  went  out  upon  an  eminence,  from 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


275 


by  a shower  of  red-hot  stones  that  went  up  like  so  many 
rockets,  the  smaller  ones  in  great  numbers,  shooting  into  the 
pillar  of  smoke,  then  falling  far  into  the  sea,  as  well  as  nearer ; 
the  larger  went  a little  way  into  the  air,  then  fell,  and  rolled 
down  the  mountain,  chiefly  towards  where  we  stood. 

Ours  was  now  a post  of  no  little  danger : and,  besides  the 
stones  falling  all  round,  there  rained  down  upon  us  such  a 
fine  sand,  or  ashes,  out  of  the  cloud  (that  was,  indeed,  com- 
posed of  it)  as  nearly  took  away  our  breath  again,  together 
with  the  suffocating  heat  of  the  air  itself.  But  what  was 
our  grief,  when  the  greater  number  of  the  stones  fell  (though 
they  were  shot  out  afterwards,  too,  from  time  to  time),  to  see 
one  of  the  poor  Spaniards,  Gutierre  Vasquez  by  name,  stricken 
down  at  our  side,  by  a stone  that  took  him  on  the  head,  so 
that  he  never  spoke  after ; and  another,  Melchor  Baeza,  an 
oldish  marine,  hit  so  sharply  with  a stone  that  rebounded 
from  the  rock  he  stood  on,  as  toppled  him  into  the  deep  sea 
beneath  our  feet,  and  strangled  him  in  the  water,  though  the 
force  of  the  blow  alone  was  enough  to  despatch  him. 

At  another  time,  we  should  have  mourned  at  leisure  for 
these  untimely  deaths  among  our  comrades ; but  at  that  very 
hour,  the  same  fate  seemed  hanging  momently  over  our  own 
heads ; and ’t  was  strange  how  much  a matter  of  course  the 
death  of  others  appeared  to  us,  when  we  might  any  instant 
expect  our  own.  By  this,  we  were  wrapped  round  in  the  dark, 
sulphurous  cloud,  so  thick  and  intolerable  with  the  smell  and 
taste  of  brimstone,  we  had  all  been  smothered  on  the  spot, 
had  we  not  crammed  our  hats  or  neckerchiefs  into  our  faces 
to  escape  its  deadly  choke.  All  at  once,  out  of  this  darkness 
there  flashed  a brilliant  light : then  (the  mountain  all  the 
while  thundering  and  groaning  like  a live  creature  in  direful 
pain)  a sheet  of  liquid  rock,  or  lava,  appeared  mounting  over 
the  brim  of  the  crater,  like  glue  or  pitch  boiling  over ; and 
began  to  descend  in  a broad  fiery  stream  to  where  we  stood. 

which  he  might  more  distinctly  view  this  very  uncommon  appearance. 
At  that  distance,  it  was  not  discernible  from  what  mountain  this  cloud 
issued ; but  it  was  afterwards  found  to  ascend  from  Mount  Vesuvius. 
I cannot  give  you  a more  exact  description  of  its  figure,  than  by  re- 
sembling it  to  that  of  a pine-tree ; for  it  shot  up  a great  height  in  the 
form  of  a trunk,  which  extended  itself  at  the  top  into  a sort  of  branches ; 
occasioned,  I imagine,  either  by  a sudden  gust  of  air  that  impelled  it, 
the  force  ©f  which  decreased  as  it  advanced  upwards ; or  the  cloud  itself 
being  pressed  back  again  by  its  own  weight,  expanded  in  this  manner. 
It  appeared  sometimes  bright,  and  sometimes  dark  and  spotted,  as  it 
was  more  or  less  impregnated  with  earth  and  cinders” — Plin.  JEpist., 
lib.  vl  16. 


276 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


In  its  course,  it  swallowed  up  or  surmounted  every  obstacle  r 
it  swelled  over  the  rocks,  and  poured  down  them  again ; set 
the  groves  and  bushes  that  lay  on  our  path  in  a blaze ; and, 
what  with  the  roar  of  the  conflagration,  the  crackling  and 
hissing  of  this  flood  of  fire,  the  groans  and  thunders  of  the 
mountain  beyond,  and  the  howl  of  the  wind  and  sea,  that 
had  now  both  risen  high,  I could  almost  think  the  last  Day 
itself  had  truly  come. 

We  stood  rooted  to  the  spot,  without  power  to  fly,  as  if  we 
were  spell-bound  by  the  terror  of  this  awful  scene : till  (too 
late)  we  found  we  were  quite  encompassed,  part  by  the  fire, 
that  ran  swiftly  among  the  dry  trees  and  underwood,  part 
by  the  advance  of  this  molten  flood  of  lava,  that  came  on  at 
such  a pace  as  an  active  man  could  walk,  and  spread  itself 
out  broader,  as  it  reached  the  level  space  between  mountain 
and  sea.  It  were  madness  now  to  attempt  to  flee  either  way; 
for  northward  of  our  rock  was  the  red-hot  lava,  much  like  a 
sea  of  iron  running  fresh  out  of  a furnace,  bearing  on  its 
surface  biggish  stones  and  pieces  of  rock,  well  nigh  as  red-hot 
as  itself : and  if  we  turned  our  eyes  to  south,  we  were  met 
by  the  sight  of  a thick  belt  of  wood,  all  a-blaze,  whereinto 
had  we  rushed,  we  had  been  as  so  many  suicides  leaping  on 
their  funeral  pile. 

Which  way  could  we  now  turn,  to  escape  so  frightful  a 
death  ? Two  choices  were  before  us  : the  rock,  or  the  sea. 
Should  we  stay  through  the  frying  heat,  or  swim  for  it  ? As 
I proposed  the  question  to  my  remaining  comrades  (poor 
Melchor  and  Grutierre  being  gone  already),  on  looking  down 
into  the  water  beneath  our  feet,  we  found  a ready  answer  to 
the  question,  that  filled  us  with  horror,  and  drove  us  all  but 
to  despair.  For  though  the  sea  (as  I have  said)  was  now  risen, 
and  began  to  boil  up  from  below,  we  could  plainly  discover 
the  fins  of  two  or  three  large  sharks  (the  reef  being  more  open 
hereabout,  easier  to  steer  through)  plying  up  and  down. 

These  monsters  were  drawn  hither  (no  doubt)  by  the  blaze, 
and  seemed  to  enjoy  the  warmth  of  the  sea : but  they  kept 
eyeing  us  all  the  while,  too,  as  if  they  saw  a double  advantage 
in  keeping  so  near ; and  we  could  not  doubt  they  had  already 
made  a half  supper  on  our  companion,  Baeza.  T was  plain, 
from  that  moment,  our  only  chance  was  to  keep  on  the  rock, 
and  endure  the  suffocating  heat  as  best  we  might.  This  now 
waxed  so  intense,  as  I doubt  if  any  iron*  forger  was  ever  called 
on  to  face  a much  greater ; and  for  us,  who  were  unused  to 
anything  of  the  kind,  it  seemed  out  of  the  question  to  stand 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


277 


it  out  longer,  but  we  must  brave  the  sharks,  and  cast  us  down, 
from  sheer  necessity  of  cooling  our  over-scorched  selves,  into 
the  sea.  I forgot  to  say,  by  this  time ’t  was  night ; and,  had 
we  been  at  a safe  distance,  nothing  could  have  been  now 
grander  than  to  witness  this  great  spectacle ; for  the  light 
from  the  mountain  shot  far  up  into  the  darkness  overhead ; 
the  wreaths  of  red  smoke  curling  along  the  sky  to  leeward, 
with  large  stones  ever  and  again  shot  out,  like  hot  shells  out 
of  a battery  of  bombs : and  fresh  lava,  at  a white  heat  (so  it 
seemed  to  us)  pouring  out  still  from  the  lip  of  that  rent  in  the 
mountain,  and  all  the  trees  of  the  island,  so  far  as  the  eye 
eould  reach,  in  one  great  blaze.  It  is  not  for  my  pen  to  de- 
scribe it ; nor  do  I see  how  any  one  can  imagine  it  that  hath 
not  seen  the  like.  However,  at  that  time,  though  the  majesty 
and  terror  of  the  sight  struck  into  our  hearts,  we  were  taken 
up  only  by  the  thought,  how  we  could  live  through  such  a 
furnace  as  was  round  us. 

At  length,  two  of  our  number,  Domingo  Gonzalez  and 
Fadrique  Correa  by  name,  poor  fellows ! both  having  been 
used  to  the  Barbadoes  trade,  and  to  see  how  the  negroes  there 
will  encounter  the  sharks  that  infest  their  coast,  with  only  a 
knife,  to  plunge  into  the  fish  when  he  turns  on  his  side  to 
seize  them ; they  determined  on  making  a like  trial  of  their 
skill.  Do  what  we  would  to  persuade  them  of  the  madness 
of  their  adventure,  they  were  not  to  be  turned  from  it.  No 
man,  they  said,  could  die  more  than  once ; and  for  their  part, 
they  had  rather  run  the  chance  of  being  strangled  in  the  water, 
or  drowned  outright,  than  wait  to  be  smothered  by  the  into- 
lerable heat  and  noisome  vapours  where  we  were.  Then  I 
bade  them  remember,  no  man  had  a right  to  throw  away  his 
life,  which  was  not  his  own  property  to  dispose  of,  but  a mere 
loan,  or  talent,  lent  him  for  an  appointed  time ; and  this,  I 
saw,  had  some  effect  on  them,  as  Catholics,  who  had  a clear 
view  of  an  hereafter : till  they  answered  me  again,  they  be  * 
lieved  it  to  be  the  best  chance  for  them  after  all : that  if  they 
could  run  the  blockade,  and  clear  these  fish,  or  encounter  them 
with  advantage  (for  they  had  their  seaman’s  clasp-knives 
strung  round  their  necks),  then  were  they  in  better  case  than 
we  who  stayed  on  the  rock : and  more  to  the  same  purpose. 

Seeing  them  not  to  be  deterred  from  this  mad  scheme,  it 
only  remained  to  pray  for  their  safety,  in  which  I bade  the 
rest  unite  with  me  ; and  the  two  poor  men  joined  in  it  them- 
selves with  great  fervour.  Then,  making  over  their  brows 
and  hearts,  the  sign  of  the  cross,  and  commending  themselves 


278 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


to  God,  calling  also  on  tlie  Blessed  Virgin  and  St.  Iago  of 
Compostella,  they  drew  their  knives,  and  plunged  feet  fore- 
most into  the  sea,  crossing  their  feet,  to  cleave  the  water 
better,  and  rise  again  upright.  But  alas  ! we  saw  too  clearly, 
the  moment  after,  what  was  the  sad  fate  they  had  courted. 
For  no  sooner  did  we  hear  the  splash  of  their  fall,  than  we 
also  saw  these  monstrous  sharks  plunge  after  them,  and  they 
never  rose  to  the  surface  again : no,  not  so  much  as  a limb, 
nor  a shred  of  their  garments,  but  all  became  the  instant  prey 
of  those  voracious  bloodhounds.  The  sea,  too,  was  boiling  so 
wildly,  I question  if  some  under- current  would  not  have 
carried  the  poor  fellows  away,  or  rolled  them  over  and  so 
drowned  them,  had  no  sharks  been  on  the  look  out  for  them 
at  all. 

This  dreadful  end  of  our  rash  comrades  filled  us  with 
horror ; and  would  have  done  so  the  more,  but  for  our  own 
fate  before  onr  eyes,  which  seemed  to  come  nigher  at  every 
step,  in  the  shape  of  fire.  For  all  this  while,  the  mountain 
continued  to  groan  and  bellow  like  some  enraged  wild  beast, 
and  poured  out  lava,  fresh  and  fresh,  so  that  now  it  ran 
down  the  sides  swifter  than  before.  Only,  we  were  com- 
forted to  see,  this  time  it  took  a course  more  to  the  due 
south  ; if  I may  call  that  comfort  which  threatened  to  destroy 
all  our  plantations  that  might  have  escaped  hitherto,  as  well 
as  block  up  the  entrance  to  our  cave  itself.  But  the  peril  in 
which  we  were  so  swallowed  up  all  other  thoughts,  we  had 
no  leisure  now  to  care  for  our  possessions,  except  only  our 
dear  lives.  A moment  after,  there  came  a second  shock  of 
earthquake,  under  our  very  feet,  so  that  the  point  of  cliff 
whereon  we  stood,  rocked  and  heaved  beneath  us,  to  and 
fro.  I thought  we  should  have  been  all  thrown  into  the  sea 
together ; for  several  of  us  lost  our  footing,  and  we  had  to 
pluck  one  man  back  from  falling  straight  over  the  edge. 

But  see,  how  the  mercy  of  God  ordereth  events  powerfully 
and  sweetly ; how  all  things  work  together  for  good  in  the 
ways  of  His  providence ! For  this  new  danger,  which  did 
us  no  harm  beyond  the  fright  of  it,  was  the  means  of  deliver- 
ing us  from  the  fiery  flood  that  advanced  upon  us  with  open 
jaws,  to  swallow  us.  When  our  rock  ceased  to  tremble, 
looking  forth  again,  as  well  as  we  might,  through  the  heavy 
sulphur-smoke,  we  saw  the  earthquake  had  made  a great 
opening,  or  dyke,  between  us  and  the  stream  of  lava ; and  in 
a few  minutes  more,  we  heard  it  pouring  heavily  over  the 
brink,  down  to  the  gulph  in  the  earth  below.  At  the  same 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


279 


time  the  breeze,  freshening,  blew  away  partly  this  cloud  of 
hot  vapour  that  wrapped  us  round,  and  gave  us  a clear 
glimpse  out  to  sea. 

Never  may  I forget  (like  an  unthankful  wretch,  as  I should 
be),  what  I felt  when  Prodgers,  after  shading  his  eyes  with 
his  hand,  cried  out,  “ Sail  ho ! to  windward”  : and  all  of  us, 
eagerly  turning  our  eyes  thereaway,  saw  the  red  light  of  the 
volcano  reflected  on  the  sails  of  a ship ! 


CHAPTER  L X X I . 

OUR  DELIVERANCE. 

HE  was  steering  right  in  for  the  island,  and 
soon  hove-to,  seeming  fearful  of  venturing 
in  nearer.  We  doubted  not  but  they  who 
commanded  her  were  using  their  perspec- 
tives to  view  the  eruption  of  our  mountain. 
The  hope  of  our  near  deliverance  now  anima- 
ting us,  we  all  rose  to  our  full  height,  and 
waving  our  arms  abroad,  joined  in  one  shout,  as  long  and 
loud  as  we  could  make  it.  We  learned  from  them  after- 
wards, that  being  to  windward  they  did  not  hear  our  shout- 
ing at  all : but  saw  ourselves,  which  was  more  to  the  pur- 
pose ; for  our  forms  were  clearly  traced  to  them  against  the 
light  of  the  fire.  They  lowered  their  long-boat  at  once,  and 
the  crew  pulled  cheerily  towards  us : their  steerage  being 
marked  out  for  them  by  the  glow  from  the  mountain  and 
the  burning  woods ; though  they,  and  we  who  waited  for 
them  with  the  utmost  impatience,  narrowly  escaped  death 
from  the  hot  stones  that  volleyed  forth  at  times  from  the 
crater.  Indeed,  one  or  two  on  both  sides  were  hit,  though  not 
seriously,  at  least  not  to  kill : at  length  they  came  up  with  us, 
and  lying-to  under  lee  of  our  rock  of  refuge,  they  threw  up 
a rope  to  us.  By  help  of  this,  we  lowered  ourselves  one  by 
one  into  the  boat ; and  in  good  time  truly,  for  the  heat  was 
become  so  intolerable  now,  I question  if  any  of  us  had  lived 
another  half  hour.  We  went  to  work  carefully;  for  a slip 
might  have  handed  us  over  to  the  tender  mercies  of  our 


280 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


friends  the  sharks,  who  were  prowling  about,  up  and  down, 
expecting  another  morsel  from  among  us. 

Our  men,  twenty-nine  in  number,  got  down  safely  into  the 
boat : I was  the  last ; for  having  (from  one  cause  or  other) 
some  authority  among  them,  I thought  it  behoved  me  to  be 
last,  as  the  captain  always  is,  on  leaving  a wreck.  I did  my 
best  to  secure  the  rope  round  a point  of  the  rock,  and 
weighted  it  with  stones : notwithstanding  it  loosened  as  I 
went  down,  and  I got  a shrewd  tumble  on  the  boat’s  thwarts, 
that  had  like  to  have  broke  my  neck,  and  did  lay  me  up  for  a 
week  after ; though ’t  was  happy  I fell  into  the  boat,  not 
among  the  sharks  into  the  sea. 

We  got  safe  on  board  ship,  though  I had  to  be  hauled  up 
the  side  in  a whip,  being  not  able  to  stir  hand  nor  foot.  She 
proved  to  be  the  Gloneux , of  thirty-six  guns,  commanded  by 
Captain  Dumontier,  chartered  from  Brest,  cruising  in  these 
latitudes  with  sealed  orders,  and  not  friendly  to  our  flag. 
But,  on  the  relation  of  our  calamitous  history,  the  captain, 
with  the  spirit  of  a brave,  generous  man,  waived  all  distinc- 
tion of  race  or  flag,  and  took  us  on  board  in  quality  of  pas- 
sengers, to  be  set  ashore  at  any  point  most  convenient  to  us 
to  make  our  wray  homewards.  “To-morrow”,  says  this  gal- 
lant seaman  to  us,  “ we  will  speak,  Messieurs,  of  your  future 
plans  : to-night,  do  me  the  honour  to  be  my  guests”.  So  after 
a hearty  and  hospitable  supper,  which  the  fatigues  and  great 
anxieties  of  the  day  made  necessary  to  us,  through  exhaus- 
tion of  our  animal  spirits,  we  turned  into  our  hammocks  with 
thankful  hearts  and  very  short  prayers.  Meanwhile,  the 
captain  put  the  helm  about,  and  stood  off  to  a safe  distance 
from  the  island,  the  wind  now  setting  fresher  in-shore. 

We  were  up  again  at  day-break,  to  watch  the  progress 
made  in  this  destruction  of  our  island;  for  such,  indeed,  it 
proved,  and  nothing  less,  at  least  as  regards  the  e.  and  s. 
sides  of  it.  The  lava  had  flowed  on,  while  we  slept,  as  some 
of  the  creAV  told  us ; for,  beside  the  watch,  nearly  all  the 
ship’s  company  had  staid  out  of  their  hammocks,  best  part  of 
the  night,  watching  that  great  spectacle.  As  for  ourselves, 
we  were  so  clean  exhausted  with  all  we  had  gone  through,  I 
verily  believe  we  could  have  slept  through  a salvo  of  artillery, 
or  a general  engagement.  And  truly,  the  noise  from  the 
mountain,  at  times,  was  not  much  less  than  that. 

But  now,  in  the  morning  light,  ’t  was  a desolate  spectacle 
indeed  : for  the  conflagration  of  our  woods,  having  well  nigh 
burnt  itself  out,  presented  such  a view  of  bare  and  blackened 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


281 


trunks  of  trees,  or  stumps,  with  rocks  split  by  the  violent 
heat ; our  stream,  too,  either  dried  up,  or  forced  from  its  bed 
down  some  of  the  great  rents  or  cracks  in  the  ground,  sending 
out  its  hot  vapours,  together  with  the  sulphur,  as  it  boiled 
below : altogether  (I  say)  the  prospect  was  in  miniature  what 
I suppose  the  great  globe  itself  will  be  when  u the  heavens 
shall  pass  away  with  a great  noise,  and  the  elements  shall 
melt  with  fervent  heat,  and  the  earth,  and  the  works  on  it 
shall  be  burnt  up”. 

And  here  we  saw  an  end  to  all  our  labours  for  four  years 
past,  at  a stroke  : not  that  we  considered  that  so  much  at  the 
time,  but  were  occupied  wholly  by  the  great  deliverance 
granted  to  us,  against  hope,  both  from  the  fiery  mountain, 
and  the  banishment  itself  we  had  spent  on  our  island.  On 
this  part  of  our  adventure  the  French  captain,  when  he  heard 
our  story  from  me  (in  my  bad  Spanish,  for  he  spoke  Spanish 
himself  passably  well),  wished  us  heartily  joy  of  our  libera- 
tion ; only,  he  said,  he  must  perforce  carry  us  partly  on  his 
own  course,  which  was  to  Tobago : but  promised,  again, 
he  would  set  us  ashore,  under  a flag  of  truce,  at  any  English 
plantation  in  the  West  Indian  islands,  which  the  chance  of 
war  made  him  able  to  touch  at.  But  first  he  asked  us,  from 
our  knowledge  of  the  island,  the  likeliest  place  to  find  fresh 
water  for  his  ship  : on  our  telling  him  of  that  stream  to  west- 
ward where  we  had  first  so  unhappily  landed,  he  then  wore 
the  ship  round,  and  gave  the  island  a wide  berth,  for  fear  of 
the  reefs  we  told  him  of : then,  sending  a man  to  the  mast- 
head to  help  our  piloting,  the  sea  being  very  clear,  it  could 
plainly  be  seen  from  that  height  how  the  reefs  ran  under 
water.  Thus  in  four  tacks,  and  no  more,  we  came  in  the 
afternoon  off  the  mouth  of  that  self-same  channel  into  which 
the  traitor  Hopkins  had  sent  the  long  boat  with  us,  poor 
victims  of  his  treachery.  When  I remarked  this  to  the  cap  • 
tain  (for  we  easily  made  out  the  opening  in  the  rocks,  by  help 
of  our  perspective  glasses),  he  made  to  us  his  compliments 
again,  on  the  mercies  that  had  shielded  us  then  from  a violent 
death,  and  preserved  us  ever  since.  This  was  said  too,  more 
in  particular,  by  the  chaplain  he  had  on  board ; being  a 
French  priest  and  a seminarist,  of  whom  I might  have  much 
to  say,  but  that  these  up  and  down  memoirs  have  spun  out 
too  long  a yarn  already.  In  fine,  the  priest  was  a good  man, 
and  a kind  one ; though,  to  be  sure,  we  never  felt  towards 
him  as  to  our  father  that  brought  us  into  the  fold,  ’t  was  a 
comfort  to  find  ourselves  again  within  reach  of  the  ministries 


282 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


of  the  Church  ; and  we  began  to  experience,  from  this  very 
change  of  hands,  the  Catholic  is  always  at  home  when  he  can 
have  the  privileges  of  that  universal  family  he  belongs  to. 

It  seems,  this  Captain  Dumontier  was  known  as  a good 
Christian  man,  as  he  was  also  a first-rate  seaman ; and, 
having  some  influence  with  the  government  of  his  country, 
had  petitioned  for  a chaplain  to  sail  with  him  on  his  voyage, 
when  some  of  his  craft  were  likelier  to  petition  against  any- 
thing so  irksome  to  a wilful  sinner  as  the  presence  of  a priest : 
by  which  it  came  to  pass,  we  had  the  blessing  of  Mass  on 
board  when  the  weather  was  fair ; nay  (the  priest  being  a 
good  sailor,  even  in  rough  weather),  having  a bit  of  a sea  on 
did  not  hinder  his  being  lashed  to  a bulk-head  in  the  captain’s 
cabin,  by  a rope  that  was  long  enough  to  let  him  both  kneel 
and  stand  at  a small  altar  there : so  (like  some  of  the  early 
martyrs)  he  celebrated  the  Holy  Sacrifice  in  bonds.  Nor  can 
I forget  the  first  time  I attended  at  Mass  on  board  the  Gtorieux , 
how  that  prophecy,  or  hope,  of  our  dear  Don  Manuel  came 
into  my  mind,  we  should  not  be  long  without  a priest  and 
without  a Sacrifice. 

I had  well  -nigh  forgot  that  when  we  doubled  the  point  that 
shut  in  Shark’s  Cove  to  the  south,  and  came  within  sight  of 
the  Spanish  wreck,  we  found  that  by  some  upheaving  of  the 
reef  from  below,  the  wreck  had  been  thrown  almost  high  and 
dry,  and  almost  her  own  length  (so  we  judged)  nigher  to  land. 
Though  this  delayed  us  not  on  the  watering  expedition  (two 
of  the  ship’s  boats  being  sent  forward  with  the  water-casks), 
yet  the  captain  judged  it  worth  while  to  board  her,  and  over  - 
haul her  stores.  We  could  now  indeed,  get  down  below  the 
orlop-deck  without  hindrance,  and  so  into  the  hold  (with  some 
little  pumping  of  the  bilge-water) ; but  we  found  little  that 
was  worth  the  carrying  away.  ’T  is  true,  she  had  more  stuffs 
and  other  merchandize  on  board  than  was  usual  for  a ship  of 
war,  as  the  Spanish  lieutenant  had  explained,  together  with 
the  reason  why.  But  then,  having  been  hastily  packed,  the 
bales  of  this  merchandize  of  stuffs  (as  silks,  cottons,  and  other 
wares)  had  loosened,  so  that  the  water  had  got  at  and  spoiled 
a great  part : and,  though  we  got  them  out  of  the  hold  indeed, 
we  found  them  so  rotten  as  that  they  came  in  shreds  when 
we  handled  them  never  so  lightly.  The  same  account  may 
be  given  of  the  iron- ware  and  knick-knacks  on  board  for  bar- 
ter with  the  Americans  ; for  they  were  eaten  with  rust  to  that 
degree,  we  flung  the  greater  part  of  them  into  the  sea  again. 
However,  we  saved  some  that  had  lain  deeper,  or  been 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


283 


packed  more  tightly ; and  we  got  out  five  or  six  bales  in 
fairly  good  condition.  These  the  captain  took  on  board,  as 
payment  for  the  good  turn  he  was  doing  ns ; for  though  the 
brave  man  himself  would  gladly  have  done  that,  and  more, 
without  fee  or  reward  (being  the  kind  of  frank,  open-hearted 
creature  who  I had  been  foolishly  taught  could  not  be  found 
in  that  nation,  and  more  like  a British  tar  than  a Mounseer , 
as  Harvey  said),  yet  he  had  others  to  consider  beside  himself: 
and  in  brief,  we  begged  him  to  do  it. 

But,  to  make  a long  story  short,  as ’t  is  time  (though,  while 
years  creep  on,  that  make  men  more  talkative,  I could  turn 
scribbler,  to  the  weariness  of  my  readers)  the  captain,  who 
was  not  the  man  to  burn  daylight,  sent  his  boats  in  at  once, 
and  Pounder  with  them,  to  show  the  way  : then,  having  com- 
pleted his  watering  from  what  remained  of  that  former 
abundant  stream  (for  the  greater  part  had  been  dried  up  by 
the  volcano,  too,  or  found  some  other  channel  amid  the  earth- 
quake), and  shipping  on  board  what  cocoa-nuts  and  other 
fruits  were  at  hand,  without  long  search,  he  stood  off  on  his 
former  course,  making  for  the  Garribean  Islands  ; so  that  at 
sunset,  on  that  eleventh  day  of  November,  1743,  we  took  our 
last  look  of  Assumption  Isle  from  the  main-yards  of  the 
Glorieux;  first,  we  gave  three  cheers  that  we  were  well  away, 
then  we  said  a thanksgiving  with  the  good  chaplain,  for  our 
merciful  deliverance  from  such  a hopeless  exile. 

But  truly,  whether  we  improved  our  condition  by  thus 
going  back  into  a world  of  danger,  is  more  than  I can  pro- 
nounce on  a review  of  our  strange  adventures  ; or  whether,  in 
the  light  of  eternity,  it  had  not  proved  best  for  us  to  live  and 
die  in  that  secure  retirement.  However,  since  matters  were 
so  ordered,  that  our  priest  was  taken  from  us  first,  and  (with 
him)  our  best  consolation,  we  had  no  fancy,  any  of  us,  to  stay 
there  lonely  and  deserted : had  not  this  ship,  the  harbinger 
of  a kind  Providence,  touched  at  the  place,  we  had  found  no 
other  resource  than  looking  out  and  praying  for  Don  Manuel’s 
return. 

As  to  him,  whether  he  ever  did  return,  and  the  men  with 
him,  must  now  (I  suppose)  remain  hid  from  us  till  the  day 
when  all  things  shall  be  made  known.  Sure  I am,  if  ever  he 
came  back,  it  was  for  our  sakes  alone : wherefore  I the  rather 
hope  that  success  in  his  mission  detained  him ; though  I will 
believe,  no  success,  not  even  the  conversion  of  all  Toonati- 
nooka,  could  make  him  false  to  his  promise,  or  careless  of  us, 
his  children  in  the  faith.  He  would  have  come,  or  leastways 


284 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


sent,  to  see  after  us  and  fetch  us  off.  And  sometimes  in  my 
dreams,  even  now,  after  so  many  years,  I seem  to  see  a war- 
canoe  of  Toonati-nooka,  but  manned  by  Christians  whom 
Tadoone  has  made  so,  steering  in  for  Shark’s  Cove,  and  the 
crew  rowing  up  and  down  the  island  in  search  of  us.  And 
there  is  Tadoone  himself,  now  grown  gray-headed  with  labour 
and  care,  but  with  his  kind  smile  and  quiet  ways,  leading 
them  to  our  cave  (or  the  ruins  of  it)  and  Riverhead,  and  all 
the  parts  of  the  island  where  they  would  be  likeliest  to  find 
us,  and  sorrowing  to  see  no  trace  of  us  anywhere.  But  that 
is  a dream  only ; and  I will  end  by  another  word  on  what  did 
indeed  befal  us  after. 


►ooOooOooOooOooOo^OosOc^oOooOooOooOooOooOooOo^ 


o<>o  o<>o  o<>o  o<>o  CXX>  0<>O  0<>0  o<>o  >o  0<  0<>O  o<>o  0<>O  o<>o  o<  >0  o< 


CHAPTER  LXXIL 


WHAT  HAPPENED  TO  US  ALL  AFTER. 


[O  begin  with  old  Dick  Prodgers  : his  sea- 
going days  being  now  well-nigh  over,  and 
he  stiffening  with  age,  having  learned  also  to 
love  quiet,  and  (as  he  said)  to  make  up  his 
soul,  he  no  sooner  landed  at  Tobago  than  he 
declined  further  adventures,  and  got  em- 
ployed in  several  offices  about  the  port,  from 
which  he  picked  a comfortable  living  enough  ; and  I have 
little  doubt  but  he  lived  and  died  there,  as  good  a Catholic  as 
he  had  been  on  our  island.  Nor  did  his  religion  stand  in  his 
way  in  a colony  like  that,  wherein  men  of  all  nations  were  to 
be  found,  as  it  would  have  done  nearer  home ; and  that  I 
found  to  my  cost.  So,  beyond  being  now  and  then  called  a 
turn-coat  by  some  ignorant  fellow,  who  knew:  not  which  side 
his  own  coat  was  turned,  nor  if  he  wore  any  habit  of  religion 
on  him  at  all,  I well  believe  Dick  Prodgers  slipped  through 
the  rest  of  his  life  easily,  and  hath  found  (I  trust)  a better 
one  beyond. 

Tom  Harvey,  the  only  other  of  our  original  English  crew 
that  we  carried  away  with  us,  staid  not  long  in  these  parts, 
but  making  his  way  back  to  England,  was  taken  by  a press- 
gang  for  his  Majesty’s  service,  as  empowered  by  the  Sea- 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


285 


man’s  Bill  to  authorize  impressment,  which  passed  the  very 
year  after  we  were  left  on  the  island.  So  Tom  was  carried 
on  board  the  Pembroke , of  sixty  guns,  where  he  served  for 
some  time,  with  an  excellent  character.  At  length,  the  ship 
being  one  of  the  fleet  under  Admiral  Boscawen,  in  his  expe- 
dition to  the  East  Indies,  was  (rather  better  than  five  years 
back  from  the  day  I now  write,*  and  nearly  twice  that  space 
of  time  after  the  day  when  Hopkins  marooned  us  on  the  de- 
solate island)  overtaken  by  a dreadful  tempest  at  Calderoon 
point,  in  the  road  of  Fort  St.  David’s:  when,  out  of  nigh 
three  hundred  and  fifty  brave  men  she  had  on  board,  only 
twelve  persons  were  saved  from  the  wreck.  I grieve  to  re- 
cord it,  that  poor  Tom  was  not  among  those  fortunate  few ; 
as  I found  too  surely,  seeing  the  list  with  my  own  eyes  at 
the  Admiralty,  some  time  after  that  terrible  disaster,  when 
I myself  had  returned  to  England. 

As  to  the  Spaniards,  most  of  them  landed  at  Tobago,  and 
thence,  I believe,  found  their  way  to  other  ports  of  the 
Spanish  West  India  plantations : but  five  remained  in  the  ship 
then,  and  after  I left  her,  entering  themselves  on  the  ship’s 
books  for  regular  service.  Indeed,  during  their  exile,  they 
may  be  said  to  have  belonged  to  no  nation ; and  when  our 
little  republic  was  broken  up,  ’t  was  natural  they  should  take 
so  fair  an  offer  as  this  good  captain  made  them.  The  five 
were  named  Pedro  Dolea,  Christoval  Ramirez,  Rodrigo 
Melandez,  Fadrique  Santaens,  and  Estevan  Guaxardo.  I 
heard  after,  in  a roundabout  way,  but  without  certainty, 
that  Estevan  and  Rodrigo  (unless  it  was  some  chance  name- 
sakes of  theirs),  when  the  Glorieux  was  paid  off  at  Brest, 
volunteered  into  the  Elizabeth , a French  ship  of  sixty-six 
guns,  bound  for  the  Scottish  coast,  to  convoy  thither  the 
prince  whom  some  folks  called  the  Pretender,  and  others  the 
Chevalier.  But,  being  encountered  by  the  Lion  man  of  war, 
the  ship  was  handled  so  severely  as  to  be  forced  back  into 
Brest,  with  considerable  loss:  and  among  the  killed  and 
wounded  were  our  two  poor  comrades ; that  is,  Estevan 
killed,  and  Rodrigo  wounded  severely.  After  that,  I never 
heard  news  of  him  more. 

To  go  from  grave  to  gayer,  Rer-mimebolamba  had  the 
most  laughable  escape  from  bondage  you  ever  knew.  For, 
on  our  touching  at  Guadaloupe  (whither  we  went  from  To- 

* The  Pembroke  foundered  as  Owen  here  states  on  the  13th  of  April, 
1 749 ; so  that  his  casual  notice  of  the  vessel  may  be  taken  as  another 
proof  of  his  having  written  his  adventures  in  1754.— Ed. 


28G 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF 


bago  with  a flowing  sheet  and  a spanking  breeze),  when  the 
French  officers  boarded  us,  to  overhaul  our  papers,  and  give 
us  a clean  bill  of  health  from  the  yellow  fever,  that  was 
raging  in  some  of  the  adjacent  islands,  what  should  they  do, 
but  seize  on  our  poor  John  Pounder  for  a runaway  negro 
slave ! Do  all  I could  to  claim  him  for  a British  subject, 
they  would  not  hear  of  it,  and  bade  me  remember  (with  inso- 
lence enough)  the  freedom  that  had  been  guaranteed  to  Tom 
Harvey  and  myself  by  the  French  captain,  ought  to  suffice  us. 
Plainly  intimating,  that  (had  they  got  their  way)  the  parole 
which  this  good  captain  had  given  us,  that  our  liberty  should 
not  be  molested,  had  gone  for  little  or  nothing. 

However,  as  to  Pounder,  in  the  teeth  of  all  our  remon- 
strating, and  that  of  the  captain  beside,  who  threatened  them 
with  I know  not  what,  on  his  return  to  France,  the  end  was, 
our  poor  Indian  was  marched  off  between  two  files' of  soldiers 
to  the  residence  of  the  governor,  who  was  for  claiming  him  at 
once  as  a slave.  This  was  a man  consequential  to  a degree, 
yet  so  ignorant  as  not  to  see  the  differences  of  skin  and  fea- 
ture that  mark  off  the  African  black  from  the  Indian  of 
Toonati-nooka,  which  are  clear  enough  to  a close  observer. 
And  this  my  candid  reader  will  allow,  if  he  looks  on  the  por- 
trait of  poor  Pounder  that  was  taken  of  him  two  years  after, 
or  more,  in  Nova  Scotia ; which  I have  left  in  my  will  to  be 
copied  and  prefixed  to  these  adventures  of  mine  : nay,  even 
more  so  than  I think  are  there  portrayed.  But ’t  was  of  no 
purpose  to  insist  on  this  to  the  governor ; and  things  were 
going  hard  with  Rer-mime,  till  at  last  I bethought  me  of  an 
experiment  in  the  way  of  language  to  decide  the  question. 
So,  calling  in  a negro  who  had  purchased  his  freedom,  and 
then  lived  in  the  island  as  a sort  of  overseer,  or  slave-driver, 
to  one  of  the  planters,  I asked  the  captain  to  prevail  on  the 
governor  to  have  this  man  put  on  his  oath  to  tell  u the  truth, 
the  whole  truth,  and  nothing  but  the  truth”.  And  that  much, 
with  some  ado,  the  governor  consented  to  at  last. 

This  old  negro  was  one,  most  of  whose  life  had  been  spent 
in  slavery  ; he  was  brought  away  from  his  native  coast,  near 
Sierra  Leone,  when  he  was  not  yet  sixteen  years  of  age  : but 
he  had  kept  the  perfect  use  of  his  mother-tongue,  by  con- 
versing with  his  fellow-slaves,  together  with  a smattering  of 
bad  French  he  had  learned  on  the  island.  When  he  was  had 
into  court,  I confronted  him  with  Pounder;  then,  in  the 
presence  of  some  of  the  chief  men  of  the  island,  for  learning 
and  understanding  (who  chanced  to  be  in  town  for  a kind  of 


OWEN  EVANS,  ESQ. 


287 


assizes  then  being  held,  and  were  drawn  to  the  court-honse  by 
the  novelty  of  this  proceeding,  no  less  than  by  the  other  causes 
going  forward  there),  I asked  him  on  a sudden  to  repeat  to  me 
the  Ten  Commandments  in  his  native  tongue  : begging  the 
audience  to  give  close  attention.  This  he  did,  glibly  enough  ; 
for  I must  say,  the  negroes  of  those  French  islands  are  well 
taught  in  their  religion,  when  the  priests  are  not  thwarted  in 
their  efforts  by  some  selfish,  grasping  planter,  more  intent  on 
scraping  money  together  than  on  the  welfare  of  his  slaves. 
While  the  old  man  was  speaking,  I took  down  on  a paper 
some  sentences  he  uttered;  then,  asking  the  court  to  take 
notice  that  Pounder  was  ignorant  of  the  French  tongue,  and 
knew  not  what  the  other  had  been  required  to  repeat,  I bade 
the  Indian  repeat  the  Commandments  in  the  language  of 
Toonati.  This  he  did  at  once,  and  without  a fault,  thanks  to 
Don  Manuel’s  careful  teaching : and  their  two  languages  were 
hereby  shown  to  be  so  unlike  each  other,  that  the  court  went 
no  further,  but  quashed  proceedings,  and  decreed  the  Indian 
to  be  given  back  to  us  out  of  hand.  Several  members  of  it 
even  expressed  themselves  to  me  in  a way  I will  not  repeat, 
on  what  they  were  pleased  to  term  my  ingenuity  in  mani- 
festing the  truth  before  them  all.  They  insisted,  moreover,  on 
giving  us  an  entertainment  before  we  tripped  our  anchor ; at 
which  sentiments  were  uttered,  full  of  good  feeling  toward 
us.  Tom  Harvey  made  them  a speech,  of  which  they  under- 
stood not  a word  ; as  he,  for  his  part,  could  make  out  none  of 
their  lingo:  and  I followed  in  his  wake,  with  not  much  better 
success.  Our  good-will,  though,  was  accepted  instead  of 
language ; so  that  at  parting  they  declared,  we  were  such 
good  fellows,  ’t  was  a thousand  pities  we  were  not  born 
Frenchmen. 

From  this  point  I met  with  some  other  adventures ; none 
of  them  (I  think)  worth  troubling  the  reader  with,  nor  any 
that  surpassed  the  common  run  of  sea-faring  haps  and  mis- 
haps. I was  shipwrecked,  ’t  is  true,  some  eighteen  months 
after,  in  the  Racehorse  packet,  that  went  to  pieces  on  the 
rocks  in  the  Bay  of  Fundy ; when  all  hands,  except  eighteen 
seamen  and  three  passengers,  were  lost.  Pounder  had  the 
good  fortune  to  be  saved  with  me  and  the  rest  in  the  long 
boat,  and  we  made  our  way,  after  some  hardships,  to  Halifax. 
Here  I set  up  in  my  profession,  and  had  some  practice  for 
five  or  six  years,  with  Pounder  as  half  companion,  half 
servant ; and  a faithful  fellow  and  good  Christian  he  proved. 
After  that,  my  sight,  that  had  been  threatening  me,  so  far 


288 


THE  ADVENTURES,  ETC. 


failed  as  to  disqualify  me  for  practice  ; so,  gathering  together 
what  little  I had  contrived  to  save,  I bade  farewell  at  once  to 
my  profession  and  to  foreign  parts ; but  not  before  I had 
married  in  Halifax  a French  wife,  of  about  my  own  age  and 
station,  whose  family  came  from  Montmagny,  nigh  to  Que- 
bec : a good  Catholic  she  was  and  is,  and  keeps  me  up  to 
my  religion. 

After  various  chances  in  London,  where  being  a Catholic 
stood  in  my  way  at  every  turn,  and  kept  me  low  in  the 
world,  at  length,  through  the  kindness  of  Captain  Byron,  who 
was  above  such  narrow  prejudice,  though  he  had  no  taste  for 
my  religion,  I was  appointed  deputy  harbour -master  in  the 
place  from  which  I now  write:  viz.,  Great  Yarmouth,  in 
Norfolk,  under  a worthy  man,  Mr.  Thomas  Williamson,  well 
known  to  the  elder  brethren  of  the  Trinity  House,  and  who 
carries  an  honourable  wound  (indeed,  ’t  is  the  loss  of  three 
fingers,  beside  a severe  splinter- scar)  from  the  action  off  Cape 
Finisterre. 

And  here  I bring  to  a close  this  record  of  some  years  out 
of  a life,  that  hath  nothing  in  it  so  remarkable  as  a course  of 
providences  exerted  for  one  most  unworthy,  who  can  but 
make  some  feeble  efforts  to  be  not  wholly  ungrateful. 


NOTE. 

If  it  should  appear  strange  that  the  irregular  and  in  some  respects 
confused  account,  now  presented  to  the  reader,  should  not  have  been- 
written  till  eleven  years  had  elapsed  from  Evans’  leaving  the  island,  a 
parallel  case  (at least)  maybe  furnished  by  Commodore  Byron,  referred 
to  at  p.  252,  whose  account  of  his  early  sufferings  on  the  coast  of  Chili 
in  1740,  were  “written  by  himself,  and  now  first  published”,  in  1768. 
In  his  preface  he  says : “ As  the  greatest  pain  I feel  in  committing  the 
following  sheets  to  the  press,  arises  from  an  apprehension  that  many  of 
my  readers  will  accuse  me  of  egotism,  I will  not  incur  that  charge  in 
my  preface,  by  detaining  them  witli  the  reasons  which  have  induced 
me,  at  this  time,  to  yield  to  the  desire  of  my  friends.  It  is  equally 
indifferent  to  the  public  to  be  told  how  it  happened,  that  nothing  should 
have  got  the  better  of  my  indolence  and  reluctance  to  comply  with  the 
same  requests,  for  the  space  of  twenty  years”. — Ed. 


SUPPLEMENT 


VERSION  OF  A LATIN  MS. 

PICKED  UP  AT  SEA  BY  H.M.S.  RAMILLIES, 
COMMANDER  GEORGE  DUTTON, 
may  14th,  1773,  in  w.  long.  43°;  s.  lat.  24°  5^. 

PRECEDED  BY 

CAPTAIN  DUTTON’S  REPORT  TO  THE 
ADMIRALTY. 


19 


H.  M.  S.  Ramillies,  off  Spithead, 
June  8th,  1773. 


TO 

THE  RIGHT  HONOURABLE  THE  EARL  OF  SANDWICH, 
FIRST  LORD  OF  HIS  MOST  GRACIOUS  MAJESTY’S  ADMIRALTY, 

K.G.,  P.C.,  &C.,  &C. 


My  Lord, 

I have  the  honour  of  forwarding  to  your  Lordship,  toge- 
ther with  the  Ramillies ’ log,  the  accompanying  manuscript , 
picked  up  (as  your  Lordship  will  observe  by  the  entry  in  the 
log  itself,)  the  fourteenth  of  last  month,  on  our  homeward 
voyage.  It  is  curious,  from  the  materials  that  compose  it ; 
being  written  on  the  leaves  of  the  palmetto,  or  some  other 
broad-leaved  tree ; and  from  the  manner  in  which  we  found  it 
secured.  It  was  attached  to  an  unpainted  buoy  of  light  wood, 
rudely  shaped  by  a hatchet  or  some  other  iron  instrument  ; 
but  the  whole  thing  was  so  covered  (at  least  the  under  part) 
with  barnacles  and  other  shell-fish,  and  so  eaten  with  sea- 
worms  throughout,  that  it  had  evidently  been  a considerable 
time  in  the  water.  I should  say,  from  the  condition  of  old 
ships,  that  not  a vessel  in  his  Majesty’s  service  (and  I have 
been  in  some  dangerous  ones)  would  be  allowed  afloat  after 
so  long  an  immersion,  without  careening. 

This  buoy  was  furnished  with  a kind  of  outriggers,  made 
of  rude  boards  of  the  same  sort  of  wood,  ingeniously  attached 
to  it  by  cords  of  twisted,  or  rather  plaited,  cocoa-fibres,  much 
decayed  by  the  water ; though  they  appeared  to  have  been 


292 


SUPPLEMENT  : 


steeped  in  oil  to  prevent  it.  On  the  top  was  a small  flag  staff, 
still  carrying,  pinned  into  it  by  wooden  pegs,  a shred  of  some 
woollen  stuff,  almost  gone,  which  we  judged  to  have  been 
once  a seaman’s  jacket,  fastened  there  in  order  to  make  the 
buoy  more  visible  at  sea. 

Observing  the  buoy,  I slackened  sail,  and  sent  a boat  to 
bring  it  on  board.  When  we  hoisted  it  on  deck,  we  found 
lashed  to  it  a case  or  covering  of  laths,  neatly  spliced,  some- 
what in  the  form  of  a small  keg,  bound  tightly  with  the  same 
kind  of  fibre,  and  payed*  all  over  with  a coating  of  Indian 
gum,  which  lay  on  it,  in  some  places,  three-quarters  of  an 
inch  thick.  So  careful  had  the  writer,  or  his  friends,  been  to 
preserve  the  MS.  from  injury.  Notwithstanding,  in  one  place 
the  gum,  or  Indian  rubber,  had  slightly  given,  perhaps  from 
the  case  getting  foul  of  the  buoy  in  some  shifting  of  the  cur- 
rents, floating  exposed,  and  cracking  in  the  sun.  From  this, 
as  your  Lordship  will  perceive,  the  writing  on  a few  of  the 
outerf  leaves  is  damaged  past  recovery.  I forward  it,  however, 
in  the  condition  in  which  we  found  it  on  opening  the  case. 
This  case  itself,  together  with  the  buoy  and  its  appurtenances, 
I intend  to  have  the  honour  of  presenting  to  the  Admiralty 


* A seaman’s  expression,  meaning  to 'daub  or  anoint  the  surface  of 
any  body,  in  order  to  preserve  it  from  the  injuries  of  the  water  and 
weather,  etc. — Ed. 

t Captain  Dutton  does  not  explain  how  the  earlier  instead  of  the 
later  portion  of  the  M.S.  came  to  receive  injury  from  the  water,  which 
got  at  the  outer  leaves.  It  must  be  remembered,  however,  that  the 
palm-leaves  on  which  it  was  written  were  not  folded  together  like  so 
many  sheets  of  paper  in  a packet,  where  the  commencement  of  the 
M.S.  would  be  the  portion  best  defended  from  external  injury.  They 
would  be,  on  the  contrary,  laid  together  without  folding,  in  the  order 
in  which  they  were  written  ; and  probably  bound  round  with  other 
leaves,  or  cocoa-nut  fibre,  so  as  to  form  a solid  mass.  In  this  case,  it 
would  depend  on  the  accident  of  the  Indian  gum  cracking  on  one  side 
or  the  other  of  the  outer  covering  of  laths,  whether  the  portion  of  the 
M.S.  rendered  illegible  would  be  the  commencement  or  the  end.  The 
collection  of  Sir  Hans  Sloane  is  well  known  to  have  formed  the  nucleus 
of  the  present  British  Museum : and  perhaps  the  courtesy  of  the  at- 
tendants in  that  great  public  institution,  or  in  the  other  collections  of 
which  Captain  Dutton  speaks,  may  enable  the  curious  reader,  if  not  to 
discover  the  original  M.S.,  at  least  to  elucidate  the  subject  by  a com- 
parison with  other  writings*>f  a similar  nature. — Ed. 


captain  dutton^s  report. 


293 


Museum,  or  to  the  collection  belonging  to  the  Royal  Society, 
or  that  of  Sir  Hans  Sloane,  at  your  Lordship’s  discretion ; as 
a specimen  of  work  which  I take  to  be  that  of  savages,  assisted 
by  some  one  more  acquainted  with  the  arts  of  civilization. 

As  to  the  contents  of  the  leaves,  having  forgotten  what- 
ever little  acquaintance  I once  had  with  the  language  they 
are  written  in,  and  our  chaplain  unfortunately  having  been 
set  ashore  at  Falmouth,  besides  that  they  are  written  close, 
in  a foreign  hand,  and  the  ink  (of  whatever  sort  originally)1 
now  extremely  faded  by  time,  I think  it  best  to  forward  them 
to  your  Lordship  without  further  comment.  When  they  were 
picked  up,  we  were  at  least  twenty  leagues  from  any  land 
laid  down  on  the  ship’s  charts ; whatever  colony  or  mission 
of  discovery  they  refer  to,  was  perhaps  ten  times  the  distance 
from  us  at  that  moment ; and  must  have  prospered  or  decayed 
beyond  need  or  possibility  of  help,  when  the  papers  were 
committed  to  chance  of  winds  and  waves.  All  this  con- 
sidered, I stood  on  my  course,  without  any  vain  attempt  to 
trace  the  fate  of  the  writer. 

As  soon  as  some  remaining  duties  may  permit,  I shall  come 
from  Portsmouth  within  the  next  two  days,  and  present  my- 
self to  your  Lordship  and  the  Board  of  Admiralty  : awaiting 
which  honour 

I am,  my  Lord, 

Your  Lordship’s  most  faithful, 
obedient  servant, 

George  Dutton, 

Commander. 

P.S. — Mr.  Symes,  your  Lordship’s  cousin,  desires  me  to  add 
his  respectful  duty.  I shall  have  the  pleasure  to  report  well 
of  his  conduct  in  detail,  together  with  that  of  my  other 
officers:  but  I cannot  forbear  particular  mention  of  Lieut. 
Pilkington,  of  whose  deserts  and  claims  on  your  Lordship’s 
favour  for  promotion,  I shall  take  occa^fbn  to  speak  more  at 
large. — G.D. 


0tt 


mmH 


m mtw> 


5ttQ^B5t^S VSJ^* 


[rtMtoERE  followeth  the  t]rue  rel[ati]on  of[me,  Manuel 
W . . *]  ex-pr[ovincial,  concerning  the  st[ate  of  thir]- 
teen  companions,  with  my]self,  on  an  unkpown 
island,  be]ing,  so  well  a[s  we  c]an  gu[ess  some]where  to  the 
so[uth  of *] 

I bes]eech  you,  bro[ther,  w]hoso[ever  you  be,  who  by] 
the  Divi[ne  permission  may]  find  these  writings,  to  tians]- 
mit  the  [same,  or]  a cop[y  of  them,  so  soon  as  it  shall  be 
po]ssible  for  [you,  to  my  m]ost  Re[verend  Lord  and  Fa]ther 


or  to  m]y  Very  R[everend  and  bel]oved  Fa[ther,  the 

prov]incia[l  for  the  t]ime  b[eing,  of  the  0]rder  [of ;* 

or]  at  the  l[east,  to]  del[iver  them  to  the]  B[ish]op  or 
Gpyernor  of  any]  city  in  old  [Spain,  or  in  the  Spanish 
col]oni[es,  w]hereat  [ye  shall  touch : and  may  the]  merc[iful 
Lord  therefore  rew[ard  you,] 

These  are  to  mak[e  known  to  the  glor]y  of  God,  and  to 
ob[tain  help  for  the  strengthening  of  this  mi[ssion,  that 
we]  have  been  one  ye[ar  and  . . . .]  months  in  [this  heathen 
and  sa]vage  place,  [without  prospect  of  being  vi[sited  or 
re]lieved  b[y  any  Euro]pean  ship.  Hi]ther  we  ca[me, 
imp]elled  by  [the  desire  of]  annopncing  to  the  In]dians  the 
sav[ing  truths  of  eter]nal  life  : and  [came  by  a ser]ies  of 
won[derful  proy]idences,  mark[ed  with  the  ha]nd  of  God  ; 
ha[ving  been  first  des]erted  on  one  i[sland,  (sufficiently 

dis[tant  from]  this)  by  [ ] made  the  instruments 

in  His]  hand  who  bri[ngs  good  from]  evi[l  in  His  own  ti]me 
and  way,  [first,  of  sa]ving  a peri[shing  crew]  on  that  pl[ace, 
subj]ects  of  his  Ca[tholie  maj]esty ; and  now,  far[ther 

* It  is,  of  course,  impossible  to  supply  for  these  blanks  in  the  MS. 
with  any  approach  to  certainty,  or  even  probability. — Ed. 


in  God,  Don  Ped[ro 


!,  bis]hop  of  Barc[elona, 


don  manuel’s  narrative.  295 

(which]  is  the  greaper  wor]k)  of  brin[ging  the  gosjpel  to  a 
po[pulous  heajthen  land. 

We  we[re  received  at  fir[st  with  s]ome  mis[trust,  bec]ause 
of  ou[r  landing]  with  ar[ms  in  our]  han[ds  ; yet,  to]  have 
gone  thi[ther  defenceless  [would  have  be]en  thro[wing 
need]lessly  our  [lives  away.  The]  inha[bitants  cro]wded 
dow[n  upon  the]  shore,  fil[led  with  wo]nder,  rat[ther  than 
an]imated  b[y  enm]ity  or  fear.  They  [had  never  bejfore 
seen  the  whi[te  faces  of]  the  children  of  Eu[rope.  But,  as] 
we  had  taken  with  us  [two  of  their  o]wn  nation  (thrown  [by 
Provi]dence  on  the  is[land  when]ce  we  came,  and  by  gr[ace 
conv]erted  and  baptized)  our  communication  wi]th  them 
was  soo[n  established.  For  the  moment,  w[e  arranged]  a 
barter  with  th[em  for]  food,  by  means  [of  some  tr]ifles  we 
had  brought  with  [us  ; mere  n]ails  and  bits  of  glass,  [or 
scraps]  of  iron,  which  [to  them]  were  worth  hogs,  goats, 
vegetables,  fr]uits,  fresh  wa[ter  in  g]ourds,  and  any  oth[er 
production  of  their  country. 

Two  [swift  mess]engers  started  up  into  the  [interior]  to 
announce  our  arri[val  to  their]  king,  or  cacique,*  who  lives 
in  [a  village]  half  a day’s  journey  up  [the  counjtry  : in  the 
meantime,  they  [assigned]  to  us  for  a temporary  ab]ode  a 
narrow  strip  [of  land]  on  the  shore,  almost  sur[rounde]d  by 
water.  Though  [they  er]ected  a strong  and  high  pa[lisade 
of]  pointed  stakes  across  the  neck  [of  this  la]nd  to  prevent 
our  [passing  be]yond  it,  and  also  made  [us  pro]mise  that  we 
would  not  use  [our  boa]ts  (of  which  we  had  two)  [to  pass]  to 
any  other  point  of  their  country ; yet,  on  [the  oth]er  hand, 
they  showed  great  fri[endli]ness ; and  crowds  were 
constantly]  coming  and  going  with  in[satiabl]e  curiosity  to 
look  [at  us,  and]  speak  with  us  through  the  bars  of  the 
palisade.  It  was  chiefly  [with  our]  two  Indians  and  myself 
that  they  [conversed ;]  for  I had  gained  (through  these  two) 
a sufficient  knowledge  of  their  language  to  speak  [it  with 
ea]se.  They  had  numberless  questions  to  [ask  abou]t  our 
nation,  king,  laws,  cusftoms,  reli]gion,  wars,  dress,  barter, 
productions,  down  [to  the  mo]st  minute  details  of  our  lives  : 
and  they  [would  scar]cely  allow  us  time  to  sleep,  nor  me, 
unwor[thy  prie]st,  leisure  to  read  my  breviary,  so  eager 

* Don  Manuel  is  probably  incorrect  in  giving  to  the  King  of  Toonati- 
nooka  a name  which  he  irust  have  borrowed  from  his  knowledge  of 
the  native  chiefs  of  Chili,  Peru,  and  the  other  Spanish  settlements  of 
South  America. — Ed. 


2% 


SUPPLEMENT  : 


were  they,  [day  and]  night,  to  listen  to  everything  we  cbul[d 
tell]  them. 

I was  glad  to  be  able  thus  to  comm[ence  m]v  mission 
among  them  ; and  announced  to  them,  with  cau[tion  an]d 
not  ex  professo , some  of  the  first  trufths  of  re]ligion,  the  unity 
of  God,  the  punishments  of  sin,  eto.  [But  the  wo]rk  became 
so  fatiguing  (the  crowds  increasing  contin[ually,  as]  the  re- 
port of  our  arrival  flew  abroad),  I was  truly  gl[ad  when  a] 
cry  arose,  from  those  who  were  furthest  [from  the  p]alisade, 
“ Tooma , toomaT  which  is  th[eir  word]  for  king,  or  principal 
lord ; by  which  I concluded  the  kin]g  himself  had  come 
down  to  see  us. 

He  came,  surrou[nded  by  his  g]uaras,  who  could  scarcely 
keep  off  the  crowds,  even  [by  bea]ting  them  severely  with 
the  staves  of  their  s[pears.  All  those]  who  could  approach 
him  performed  the  usual  ce[remony  in  to]ken  of  submission, 
which  is,  licking  the  king’s  feet.  He  [bade  the  t]wo  Indians 
and  myself  come  forth  to  [him,  to  the]  other  side  the  pali- 
sade. This  we  were  not  prepared  for,  be[ing  quite  uncer- 
tain of  his  relation  towards  us  : at  first  I designed  to  [make 
the  ki]ng  and  his  chief  men  (for  he  was  surrounded  by  many 
who[m  it  was]  easy  to  remark  as  persons  in  authority,)  take 
an  [oath,  in  the  so]lemn  manner  of  their  country,  that  our 
persons  should  [be  sa]fe  among  them.  On  second  thoughts, 
[however,  I]  remembered  that  such  oath  was  likely  to  [con- 
sist in]  some  idolatrous  rite,  and  the  invocation  of  [one  of 
th]e  many  demons  worshipped  among  them;  and  I re- 
solved rather]  to  trust  myself  in  the  merciful  hands  of  God 
than  count en[ance  such]  an  act. 

I answered,  however,  [with  an]  air  of  authority,  that  we 
were  messengers  [from  a gr]eat  king,  who  had  sent  us  hither 
on  a negoci[ation  of  thej  utmost  importance  to  Toonati- 
nooka ; that  my  King  had  [done  me  the  ho]nour  to  admit 
me  near  His  person,  and  had  laid  on  me  an  of[fice  that 
usu]ally  kept  me  employed  about  His  throne  ; that  we  came 
as  amb[assadors,  not]  as  supplicants,  and  for  the  benefit  of 
himself  [and  his  pe]ople,  not  for  any  necessity  or  advantage 
[of  our  own]..  I went  on  to  say,  though  we  were  few  in  num- 
ber, comp[ared  to]  those  who  surrounded  us,  yet  the  weapons 
in  [our  han]ds  (for  each  of  our  men  carried  two  muskets,  and 
had  three  or  f[our  pistols]  in  his  belt)  were  of  so  tre- 
mendous a kind  as  made  us  capable  of  slay[ing  num]bers,  if 
we  were  so  disposed,  though  we  came  on  an  embassy  of 
peace.  Therefore,  if]  we  were  to  treat,  it  must  be  on  equal 


297 


don  manuel’s  narrative. 

terms : that  I,  as  ambassador,  would  present  my[self  before] 
the  king,  if  his  guards  (all  but  two  only),  would  lay  aside 
their  spears  for  the  present,  and  the  rest  of  his  [subjects 
keep  to  a distance  of  three  spears’  lengths  around  us : also,  if 
two  hostages  of  their  chief  [men,  u]narmed,  would  pass  in- 
side the  palisade,  for  every  one  of  us  who  went  beyond  it. 

These  terms,  together  with  the  to[ne  I ass]umed,  asto- 
nished the  king ; and  he  called  his  chiefs  around  him  to  de- 
liberate on  what  I had  said.  After  [a  while,  he]  sent  to  us 
one  of  the  oldest  among  them,  a sensible  man,  who  told  me 
these  were  new  and  unheard-of  things  for  a stranger  to  pro- 
pose ; that]  our  coming  was  unlooked  for,  and  our  appearance 
unusual : in  a word,  that  the  king  desired  some  proof  of  the 
power  we  brought  with  us,  such  [as  should  n]ot  harm  liis 
people,  whilst  they  convinced  himself  and  his  chiefs. 

Upon  this,  I turned  to  one  of  my  companions,  who  was 
reckoned  the  best  marks  [man  amo]ng  us  with  his  gun;  and, 
pointing  to  a sea-eagle  wheeling  above  us  at  no  great  height, 
I bade  him  take  steady  aim,  and  shoot  in  the  name  of  God  and 
Sa[int  ....  * May  our]  good  Lord  forgive  me  if  I was  guilty 
of  any  presumption  in  this ; but  I trusted,  not  alone  to  my 
faith  and  poor  prayer,  [but  to  the  man]’s  known  skill  with 
his  weapon.  Also,  I was  sure  that,  did  he  hit  or  did  he 
miss,  the  effect  on  the  savages  would  only  differ  in  degree, 
and  that  [the  drea]dful  noise  and  sudden  surprise  of  the  ex- 
plosion would  not  fail  to  impress  them  with  reverence  for  us, 
and  dread  of  our  weapons. 

As  I supposed,  so  it  turned  out.  No  sooner  had  the 
sai[lor  discharged  his  piece,  than  such  a yell  arose  from  the 
multitude,  as  if  an  earthquake  or  other  terrific  thing  hap- 
pened. The  greater  part  of  them  [fell  to  the]  earth,  hiding 
their  faces ; some  ran  like  scared  creatures  into  the  woods : 
others  called  on  their  gods  to  save  them.  But  what  was  their 
astonishment  when  the  ea[gl'e,  trans]fixed  with  the  ball, 
fluttered  down,  bleeding  and  dying,  and  fell  in  the  very 
midst  of  the  assembly.  From  that  time  we  had  no  need  to 
assert  our  equality  with  them ; for  they  acknowledged  us  [at 
once  as  su]perior  beings.  So  great  was  their  dread  of  us 
now,  it  was  not  easy  to  find,  among  all  their  bravest  warriors, 
six  who  would  come  within  the  palisade  as  hostages.  We 
on  our  [part,  made  all  si]gns  of  friendship ; and  told  them, 
this  dreadful  thunder  and  lightning  (so  they  called  our 


Probably  Saint  James,  the  patron  saint  of  Spain. — Ed 


298 


SUPPLEMENT  : 


weapons)  was  only  used  against  our  enemies ; that  we  had 
it  so  completely  under  our  con[trol,  it  would  on]ly  explode 
when  we  pleased : and  we  solemnly  assured  them,  by  the 
great  King  who  sent  us,  if  they  attempted  not  to  harm  us, 
it  should  never  [explode  against]  them. 

On  this,  they  took  heart  again,  and  six  chiefs  (who  were 
afterwards  rewarded  by  the  king  with  a string  of  shells 
a-piece  for  this  act  of  daring)  came  in  among  our  men,  while 
our  two  In[dians  and  m]yself  were  received  outside  by  the 
king,  his  guards  having  laid  aside  their  arms  as  I had  re- 
quired. 

His  first  demand  was,  to  see  one  of  these  wonderful  wea- 
pons nearer ; but  that  [it  should  no]t  make  the  noise,  nor 
shoot  forth  the  fire,  again.  I called  back  to  the  man  who 
fired,  to  pass  his  musket  to  me  through  the  palisade ; and 
holding  it,  I [addressed  the]  king,  telling  him,  he  should 
judge  by  what  I was  now  about  to  do,  whether  I had  spoken 
truly  that  these  weapons  would  fire  or  not,  as  we  willed.  I 
made  him  remark,  I w[as  going  to  do]  what  the  man  had 
done  before  : pledging  my  truth  as  an  ambassador,  it  should 
make  no  more  noise  than  the  king  himself  would,  by  snapping 
his  fingers.  There  w[as  to  be]  no  fire,  I said,  but  one  spark 
only : and  if  it  thundered  forth  as  before,  or  anything  like  it, 
he  might  disbelieve  my  message,  and  send  [us  away]  as  im- 
postors. 


king  and  all  the  assembly  were  half  afraid  of  the 
thing  being  done  over  again ; but  I solemnly  assured 
them,  I would  rest  the  whole  credit  of  my  mission  [on 
the  res]ult : then,  amid  a breathless  silence  in  the  vast  con- 
course, I pointed  the  gun  upward,  as  though  I took  aim  at 
some  other  bird,  and  so  pulled  the  trigger.  When  the  king 
[heard  the  sn]ap,  and  saw  the  spark  from  the  flint,  and 
nothing  furthermore,  he  threw  his  arms  into  the  air,  and 
shouted  out,  that  we  were,  since  we  had  absolute  control 
over  these  dreadful  creatures,  ra[ther  gods  th]an  men.  Then, 
in  spite  of  our  agreement,  his  chiefs  pressed  round  us,  and, 
do  what  I would  to  prevent  it,  they  all  licked  my  feet,  after 
the  custom  of  the  country.  [I  seized]  the  opportunity  to 
proclaim  the  true  God,  asking  the  king  to  judge  if  we,  who 


don  manuel’s  narrative. 


299 


were  but  the  poor  servants  of  Him  in  whose  name  we  came, 
could  do  such  mighty  wonders,  what  must  be  His  [own  power 
a]nd  majesty ! And  thus  we  already  disposed  both  him  and 
his  nation  to  receive  the  faith. 

Then  he  asked  me,  on  what  terms  was  he  to  treat  with  this 
great  King  ? What  did  He  require  ? I an[swered,  my] 
King  required  nothing  but  what  was  to  make  the  king  of 
Toonati-nooka  and  his  subjects  happy  : that  for  this  very 
purpose  had  I been  sent;  that  my  K[ing,  being  more] 
powerful  than  all  others,  and  more  abounding  in  possession 
of  wealth  and  happiness,  needed  nothing  as  being  necessary 
to  Him : being  as  good  and  merciful  as  He  was  rich  [and 
power]ful.  His  delight  was  to  make  all  other  kings  and 
their  subjects  happy  : and  again,  that  being  as  wise  as  He 
was  powerful,  rich,  and  happy  in  Himself,  He  sent  His  am- 
bassadors in  [to  every]  quarter  of  the  earth,  to  proclaim  the 
laws  and  ordinances  by  which  alone  men  could  be  happy 
while  they  lived,  and  happy  after  they  were  dead.  Lastly,  I 
repeated,  it  was  for  this  and  no  other  object  that  I was  come 
and  had  brought  hither  my  companions. 

[I  told  him]  I sought  not  the  gold  or  wealth  of  his  king- 
dom ; that  my  King  willed  that  he  should  still  occupy  his 
throne  and  be  obeyed  by  his  subjects ; that  the  best  security 
for  his  person  and  kingdom  w[ould  be,  to]  submit  himself, 
and  cause  them  also  to  submit,  to  my  King’s  wise  and  bene- 
volent laws,  which  teach  men  to  be  obedient  to  lawful  autho- 
rity, and  not  do  only  what  they  must  needs,  but  what  is  right 
because  it  is  right.  Other  things  of  the  like  kind  I added  ; 
and  though  he  see[med  inc]apable  of  understanding  what  I 
said  about  right  and  justice,  yet,  seeing  him  listen  attentively, 
I resolved  not  to  lose  the  occasion. 

The  king  pondered  grea[tly  on  w]hat  I said,  and  sat  silent 
for  some  space  ; then,  calling  to  him  the  grave,  venerable 
chiefs  who  were  his  counsellors,  he  deliberated  with  them  z. 
and  they  declared  it  was  good,  though  new.  This  th[ey 
rep]eated  several  times,  as  though  surprised  at  its  being  new 
and  unheard-of,  yet  approving  it  as  good.  And  I heard  them 
repeating  this  often  to  themselves,  to  one  another,  and  to  the 
king  : new\_,  but  go~\od;  new , but  good. 

Then  the  king  went  on  to  ask  me  many  questions  about 
the  laws  and  ordinances  I had  come  to  proclaim ; and  whether 
any  of  them  would  be  against  the  laws  established  in  his 
kingdom  by  those  who  had  been  before  him.  This  ques- 
[tion,  as]  being  difficult  to  answer,  I evaded  for  the  time : 


300 


SUPPLEMENT  : 


for  the  Gospel  of  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ  must  needs  be 
in  opposition  to  the  idolatrous  and  wicked  customs  of  the 
heathen  ; as  said  the  apostle : “ What  fellowship  hath  light 
with  darkness  ? And  what  [concord  h]ath  Christ  with  Belial  ? 
Or  what  part  hath  the  faithful  with  the  unbeliever  ?”  There- 
fore I answered  him,  that  as  yet  I was  not  acquainted  with 
the  customs  of  his  kingdom,  and  could  not  speak  as  to  parti- 
culars ; but  sure  I was,  the  laws  of  a king  so  wise,  so  just,  so 
benevolent  [as  mine]  needs  be  the  best  and  happiest  possible ; 
and  that,  did  it  chance  any  of  those  in  Toonati-nooka  differed 
from  them,  it  would  be  for  his  happiness  to  conform  to  my 
king’s  laws  without  delay. 

He  seemed  to  think  all  this  was  reasonable,  as  did  his  coun- 
sellors too : they  sat  silent  again,  pondering  on  all  I had  ad- 
vanced ; now  one,  n[ow  another,  nodding  with  his  head,  and 
saying  it  was  good.  At  length  the  king  rose  up,  and  taking 
off  his  head-dress  of  feathers,  placed  it  on  me,  as  a mark  of 
special  favour  and  inviolable  hospitality.  He  also  chewed 
one  half  of  a betel-nut,  and  invited  me  to  chew  the  other. 
Then  he  bade  me  to  a feast,  which  had  been  preparing  u[nder 
a gr]ove  of  trees,  while  we  were  in  conference.  He  promised 
at  the  same  time,  to  send  abundance  of  provisions  to  our  men, 
which  he  amply  fulfilled : and  allowed  me  to  send  back  the 
younger  of  my  two  Indians  to  the  enclosure,  to  serve  as  in- 
terpreter, and  carry  messages  to  and  fro. 

Our  feast  was  as  ceremonious  as  a state  banquet  ever  was ; 
indeed,  many  ceremonies  were  especially  o]bserved  in  my 
honour,  and  I was  glad  to  find,  they  were  not  accompanied 
by  any  superstitious  observances,  which  I could  not  have 
joined  in.  But  before  it  concluded,  there  came  in  a number 
of  slave  dancers,  to  dance  before  the  king  and  his  guestsr 
whose  performance  was  heathenish  to  a degree,  and  wound- 
ing to  Christian  eyes.  On  this,  I told  the  king,  my  Master 
forbade  His  ser[vants  to]  be  present  at  such  exhibitions ; and 
begged  him  to  let  the  dancers  retire.  He  answered,  laugh- 
ing: “O  honourable  ambassador!  what  matters  it  for  the 
time,  inasmuch  as  your  king  sees  you  not  ?” 

To  which  I replied  by  asking  him  respectfully,  would  he 
consider  any  of  his  subjects  faithful,  who  only  obeyed  his 
laws  while  his  eye  was  upon  them  ? He  considered  awhile, 
then  said,  wi[th  a frojwning  countenance  : “No,  indeed  ; if  I 
knew  of  any  one  transgressing  my  laws  at  a distance,  I would 
send  to  him  this  my  servant”.  On  which,  he  beckoned  the 
public  executioner  (who  always  attends  him),  a tall,  athletic 


don  manuel’s  narbative. 


301 


man  of  ferocious  aspect,  with  a large  sword,  made  of  a wood 
almost  as  hard  as  iron,  and  quite  as  heavy.  “ This  is  the  mes- 
senger”, says  he,  “I  send  to  all  my  subjects  who  forget  their 
duty.  Tell  me,  O slave”,  he  [continued,  addressing  the 
executioner,  “ how  many  notches  hast  thou  on  thy  sword  ?” 
“ O king”,  answered  he,  “ they  are  six,  fifty,  and  two  hundred”, 
(so  they  always  reckon  backwards  in  this  country).  “ Good !” 
cries  the  king,  laughing ; then  turned  to  me  and  explained, 
the  custom  was  for  the  executioner  to  make  a notch  on  his 
weapon  for  every  malefactor’s  head  he  cut  off.  “ And  thy 
father  before  thee”,  continued  the  king ; “ how  [many  n]otches 
did  he  make  in  his  time  ?”  “ O king !”  answered  the  execu- 

tioner, “ my  father  had  two  swords,  given  him  by  the  king 
your  father ; and  they  were  so  full  of  notches,  there  was  not 
room  to  make  one  notch  more”. 

“You  see,  now,  O ambassador”,  says  the  king  to  me,  “we 
know  how  to  punish  those  who  transgress  our  laws”.  “ And 
my  Master,  O King”,  answered  I,  “ has  not  one  ambassador 
only,  nor  [one  exjecutioner,  nor  one  army,  but  more  than  I 
can  count,  all  ranged  round  His  throne.  The  swords  of  His 
executioners  are  of  fire,  and  pestilence,  famine,  and  death. 
One  of  them,  once  sent  out  by  my  King,  slew  seventy 
thousand  men  in  three  days  : another  went  forth  alone  against 
the  King’s  enemies,  and  in  one  night  slew  five  thousand,  and 
eighty  thousand,  and  an  hundred  thousand”.* 

On  this,  the  king’s  nephew,  who  had  [just  com]e  in  from  a 
hunting  party,  and  had  heard  nothing  of  what  had  passed  be- 
fore, burst  out  laughing,  and  showed  signs  of  incredulity  as 
to  what  I asserted.  But  the  king  reproved  him  with  an 
angry  countenance,  and  related  to  him  at  large  the  firing  of 
the  gun ; asking  if  such  were  the  dreadful  creatures  carried 
by  an  embassy  of  peace,  what  might  not  be  expected  of  the 
war  implements  and  executioners’  swords  of  so  great  a King  ? 

“ But  I do  not  understand,  O ambassador”,  continued  he, 
“ how  your  King  secures  your  obedience  to  His  laws  when 
you  are  out  of  His  sight  ? My  subjects”  (he  went  on  whisper- 
ing in  my  ear)  “ observe  my  laws  carefully,  because  they  know 
I have  spies  in  every  part  of  my  kingdom  who  would  report 
them  on  their  disobedience.  But  if  I sent  them  on  a distant 

* The  reference  here  is  evidently  to  the  three  days’  pestilence  re- 
corded in  II.  Kings,  xxiv.  18,  and  to  the  destruction  of  the  host  of 
Sennacherib,  IV.  Kings,  xix.  35.  It  would  appear  to  be  the  idiom  in 
Toonati-nooka,  as  among  the  ancient  Greeks,  in  stating  a high  number, 
to  proceed  from  the  lesser  numerals  to  the  greater.  Ed. 


302 


SUPPLEMENT  : 


embassy,  like  yours,  I believe  they  would  think  little  of  dis- 
obeying every  law  my  forefathers  enacted”. 

To  which  I answered,  though  my  King  was  indeed  out  of 
my  sight,  yet  I was  not  out  of  His  ; that  His  eyes  pierced  into 
every  place ; that  He  had  servants  and  [messe]ngers  innu- 
merable, who  could  fly  with  the  speed  of  light  to  give  Him 
notice  of  all  that  passed  over  the  whole  earth ; yet  that  He 
needed  them  not,  though  He  was  pleased  frequently  to  employ 
their  services,  which  they  rendered  most  willingly,  with  a 
great  love  of  their  King : finally,  that  (by  some  of  His 
courtiers)  He  kept  a great  book,  in  which  were  written  down 
all  the  actions  of  every  one  of  His  subjects,  even  to  the 
meanest  and  poorest  person,  even  the  smallest  action,  or  the 
least  whisper  of  a word ; and  according  to  these  entries  in  the 
book,  the  King  rewarded  or  punished  His  subjects  without 
fail,  sooner  or  later,  as  His  wisdom  decreed. 

On  this  he  pondered  a little  at  the  first ; then  laughed,  and 
said,  it  must  needs  be  a large  book,  indeed,  and  a great  deal 
of  trouble  to  keep  it : and  asked  how  many  scribes  were  em- 
ployed on  this,  and  what  kind  of  writing  they  used.  To  this 
I returned  an  evasive  answer,  not  wishing  to  give  him  more 
to  think  of  at  that  time ; and  turning  the  discourse,  I said  to 
the  king,  though  he  had  been  pleased  to  comply  with  my  re- 
quest, and  send  away  his  dancers,  yet  my  King  did  by  no 
means  forbid  any  amusement  that  was  harmless ; and  if  he 
would  condescend  to  witness  a war  dance  of  my  countrymen 
(so  I called  their  exercising  with  their  weapons),  he  would 
see  how  regularly  they  could  perform  it. 

The  king  seemed  highly  delighted  with  this  proposal ; only 
he  made  me  promise,  these  javelins  of  lightning  (so  he  called 
our  guns)  should  not  be  shot  forth  again  without  his  express 
permission.  I did  this ; and  moreover,  on  my  sacred  charac- 
ter as  ambassador  to  the  Great  King,  the  men  were  to  return 
to  their  palisade  when  the  dance  was  over,  at  least  for  that 
night,  until  the  king  had  determined  how  he  would  receive 
us  into  the  country. 


.HIS  being  concluded,  I called  out  to  the  men  in  Spanish, 
that  eight  of  them  (five  of  whom  had  been  marines  in 
our  wrecked  ship,  and  the  other  three  veteran  invalided 
troops  of  the  line)  should  march  out  in  order,  shouldering  their 
arms,  and  should  give  a great  example  of  discipline.  Accord- 


don  manuel’s  narrative. 


303 


ingly,  they  came  forth  with  fixed  bayonets,  marching  in  step, 
and  filing  in  front  of  the  king,  suddenly  wheeled  round,  and 
presented  themselves  in  a line  before  him,  grounding  their 
arms,  which  made  a great  clash  on  the  ground.  But  this 
startled  both  him  and  his  chiefs,  who  expected  nothing  less 
than  that  all  the  muskets  would  explode  together.  He  rose 
up  in  consternation,  throwing  a thick  shield  of  bull’s  hide 
before  him,  and  crouching  down  behind  it:  several  of  his 
chiefs  betrayed  their  fear  by  running  behind  the  trees,  and 
of  the  multitude,  a great  number  fell  on  their  faces  again,  and 
set  up  loud  cries.  On  this,  I came  before  him  again,  smiling, 
and  with  outstretched  hands  asked  him  whether  he  had  for- 
gotten that  I had  pledged  my  word,  the  javelins  should  not 
explode?  This  brought  him  and  the  chiefs  to  themselves 
again ; some  of  them  seemed  rather  ashamed  of  the  fear  they 
had  shown;  and  the  king  told  me  he  wished  the  war-dance 
to  proceed. 

On  which,  strictly  charging  the  men  not  so  much  as  to 
level  their  guns  in  any  direction  where  spectators  were  as- 
sembled (who,  indeed,  surrounded  us  on  all  sides),  I bade 
them  go  through  some  of  their  common  exercises.  They  did 
so  with  great  precision,  under  the  command  of  one  of  thfc 
veterans,  who  was  a sergeant,  and  had  seen  much  service. 
The  exercise,  or  war  dance,  so  delighted  the  king,  that  before 
it  was  half  concluded,  he  leaped  from  the  ground  where  he 
was  seated,  laughed,  shouted,  clapped  his  hands  ; then,  calling 
for  his  spear  and  shield,  rushed  with  a wild  yell  into  the  midst, 
with  violent  gesticulations  ; brandishing  his  weapons.  He 
then  began  to  shout  a tremendous  war-song  at  the  top  of  his 
voice.  This  example  so  excited  his  chiefs  to  warlike  fury, 
tha^they  followed  him  to  the  very  letter.  They  seized  their 
spears,  and  formed  a circle  round  him,  joining  him  in  the 
war-song ; moving  round  at  first  more  slowly,  then  quicker 
and  quicker,  as  the  excitement  or  passion  of  battle  increased: 
at  times  they  struck  their  spears  into  the  earth  as  though  they 
were  slaying  an  enemy ; and  the  song  became  louder  con- 
tinually, till  they  seemed  to  lose  all  command  of  themselves, 
and  rushed  round  and  round,  their  eyes  inflamed  and  coun- 
tenances distorted  with  phrensy,  shrieking  out  their  battle-cry 
like  so  many  furies. 

The  converted  Indians  now  drew  near  to  me,  and  said  with 
alarm,  that  we  were  in  much  danger  from  them ; that  when 
this  excitement  seized  them,  they  became  unable  to  dis- 
tinguish friends  from  foes;  and,  moreover,  when  the  king 


304 


SUPPLEMENT : 


thus  joined  in  a war-dance  with  his  chiefs,  it  seldom  ended 
without  their  striking  their  lances  through  several  of  the 
spectators.  On  this  news,  I drew  our  men  together  in  line, 
bidding  them  present  their  bayonets  in  self-defence  towards 
these  furious  savages,  in  case  they  showed  any  further  sign  of 
hostilities  : then  with  my  two  Indians,  I commenced,  at  the  full 
pitch  of  our  united  voices,  a simple  hymn  which  I had  com- 
posed for  them  in  their  native  language.  At  the  first  strains, 
I could  perceive  the  fury  of  those  war-dancers  somewhat 
abate ; and  we  had  not  sung  half  a dozen  times,  before  they 
subsided  into  something  of  their  former  tranquillity.  We 
continued  steadily  looking  on  them  with  unmoved  coun- 
tenances ; and  before  the  hymn  ended,  they  stood  listening, 
having  cast  aside  their  weapons,  fixed  with  curiosity,  and  a 
kind  of  rude  reverence,  or  fear. 

We  finished  our  hymn  as  we  walked  back  quietly  to  the 
place  where  the  king  had  now  re-seated  himself ; and  by  this, 
all  danger  and  disturbance  had  ceased.  He  expressed  his  ap- 
proval, nodding  his  head  several  times  ; then  asked  us,  what 
what  was  the  meaning  of  what  we  had  sung.  Was  it  a war 
song,  or  a lament  over  those  who  had  fallen,  or  a 6ong  to  one 
of  the  gods  -of  our  country,  or  the  history  of  some  famous 
warrior  ? To  this,  I answered,  it  was  one  of  our  modes  of 
addressing  my  King.  Were  those  words,  then,  asked  he,  ad- 
dressed to  the  King  who'  sent  you?  I signified,  yes.  But, 
pursued  the  king,  we  never  sing  any  song  of  so  solemn  a 
nature,  unless  to  lament  over  the  dead,  or  to  address  our 
gods.  “ Stand  forth,  Ta-kaeeuga”,  continued  he,  turning  to  his 
chief  bard,  or  priest,  “and  sing  us  my  ancestor’s  song  to  Ha- 
vaoeekee”. 

On  this,  I could  scarcely  restrain  my  converted  Indians 
from  giving  expression  to  their  disgust  at  hearing  the  name  of 
the  idol  they  had  once  worshipped.  I,  for  my  part,  was  equally 
determined  the  idolatrous  hymn  should  not  be  sung  in  our 
presence ; therefore,  turning  to  the  king  with  a resolute 
countenance,  I told  him,  my  King  was  much  more  powerful 
than  Havaoeekee,  or  any  of  the  gods  of  the  island : that  to 
sing  a hymn  in  his  praise,  while  we  were  by,  would  be 
reckoned  an  insult  to  my  King,  of  which  I felt  sure  the  king 
of  Toonati-nooka  would  not  be  guilty,  were  it  onty  out  of  hos- 
pitality, but  which  my  King  could  punish  on  the  spot,  if  it 
were  persisted  in : and  a good  deal  more  to  the  same  purpose. 
He  listened  with  the  greatest  wonder  and  astonishment,  as 
did  also  his  chiefs.  When  I had  done  speaking,  he  conferred 


don  manuel’s  narrative. 


305 


some  time  -with  them,  then  beckoned  me  again  to  come  to  him 
alone,  where  he  was  seated.  Here  he  caused  a mat  of  honour 
to  be  spread  for  me  beside  his  own : a distinction  to  which 
none  of  his  chiefs  pretended,  and  generally  reserved  for  his 
nephew  alone,  who  was  to  succeed  him  in  the  kingdom. 
Then,  taking  my  hand,  and  looking  me  very  seriously  in  the 
face : “ Tell  me,  O ambassador  of  the  great  King  !”  says  he ; 
“is  your  King  truly,  truly,  greater  than  Havaeoeekee ; greater 
than  Paowanga ; greater  than  all  the  rest  we  worship  ?” 

“ 0 king !”  answered  I,  “ it  is  true  indeed ; as  true  as  that 
you  have  honoured  me,  His  ambassador  and  servant,  and 
placed  me  by  your  side.  Let  us  only  rest  to-night  after  our 
weary  voyage ; to-morrow,  if  you  have  courage,  I will  show 
you  a proof  of  the  power  of  my  King”. 

He  laughed  at  the  idea  of  his  not  having  courage,  or  not 
so  much  courage  as  I,  who  was  a man  of  peace ; till,  his  eye 
resting  again  on  our  muskets,  he  checked  himself,  remem- 
bering the  fears  he  had  felt  at  them  before. 

By  this  time,  the  evening  began  to  close  in ; but  as  there 
was  light  enough  still  for  a farewell  shot,  I thought  it  best  to 
wind  up  all  I had  said,  by  repeating  this  evidence  of  our 
powers.  I therefore  reminded  him,  we  had  faithfully  kept  to 
our  promise  of  not  exploding  the  fire-javelins  hitherto  ; but 
asked  him,  would  he  now  desire  to  see  how  much  stronger 
they  were  than  any  lance  or  bow  in  his  country  ? I promised 
that,  to  prove  this,  they  should  only  explode  once,  as 
before. 

He  hesitated  awhile  at  this  proposal ; then  consulted  again 
with  his  chiefs,  amongst  whom  also  there  was  a difference  of 
opinion.  Some  appeared  to  think,  once  was  quite  enough  for 
such  an  experiment ; but  others  had  arrived  on  the  spot  since 
our  conference  began,  and  were  eager  to  witness  what  they 
had  heard  so  much  talk  of ; till  the  rest,  I suppose,  were 
ashamed  to  show  how  great  Avas  their  dread.  At  length,  the 
king  gave  a sort  of  unwilling  consent : on  which,  I asked  for 
the  strongest  shield  among  his  warriors  to  be  brought  before 
me.  It  was  of  hard  wood,  clumsily  fashioned  into  a rude 
board  of  some  thickness,  which  was  strengthened  with  a 
double  covering  of  untanned  goat’s  hide.  This  was  indeed 
the  king’s  own  second  shield,  borne  after  him  in  battle  by  his 
shield-bearer,  in  case  of  the  first  being  pierced  or  broken.  I 
caused  the  shield  to  be  placed  upright,  supported  by  two 
spears,  at  about  half  musket  shot  from  Avhere  Ave  sat.  Then, 
calling  aloud,  I said,  “ O Avarriors  of  Toonati-nooka ! strong 

20 


306 


SUPPLEMENT  : 


are  your  arms  ; swift  and  sharp  are  your  spears ! Do  your 
worst  on  yonder  shield ; then  stand  aside,  to  see  what  the 
servants  of  my  King  can  do !” 

At  the  king’s  command,  three  of  the  strongest  chiefs  now 
stepped  out ; and,  after  choosing  their  sharpest -pointed  jave- 
lins, one  after  another  hurled  them  against  the  shield.  It 
was  considered  much  above  the  average,  in  the  way  of  dar- 
ting, that  their  weapons  should,  at  that  distance,  pierce 
through  the  two  goat’s  hides,  and  remain  quivering  in  the 
wood  of  the  shield.  When  they  had  each  delivered  their 
spears,  with  the  utmost  force,,  the  king  turned  to  me  with  an 
air  of  triumph,  asking  me  what  more  I could  do.  I answered' 
him,  u O king ! this  is  indeed  well  done;  and  I believe  the 
arm  of  the  strongest  man  could  hardly  do  more.  But  my 
King  has  allowed  us  to  possess  weapons  that  put  the  weak  on 
a level  with  the  strong.  To  prove  this,  I will  call  on  one  of 
our  warriors  who  was  nearly  dying  a short  time  since,  and 
has  not  yet  recovered  his  strength” : and  here  I beckoned  to 
one  of  the  veteran  invalids,  whose  pale,  sickly  looks  confirmed 
what  I had  said  of  him.  He  was  a very  steady  shot,  how- 
ever; and  I committed  the  proof  to  him  with  confidence. 

When  he  stood  forth,  the  musket  in  his  hands,  there  was 
the  greatest  consternation  among  those  who  had  heard  the 
last  gun  fired,  and  the  greatest  curiosity  among  those  who 
had  not,  I think,  by  this  time  all  the  population  of  that 
part  of  the  country  must  have  been  assembled  on  the  spot. 
There  could  not  have  been  less  than  fifteen  thousand  men 
immediately  about  us;  and  the  surrounding  hills  were  covered 
with  women  and  children.  It  was  a sea  of  dark  faces  and 
eager  eyes,  all  fixed  upon  our  marksman.  Indeed,  when  I 
considered  the  importance  of  the  stake  on  which  I had  now 
set  everything,  I almost  wished  I had  not  risked  it.  I be- 
took myself  inwardly  to  prayer,  that  all  might  go  well. 

We  made  the  king  understand,  a lane  or  avenue  must  be 
cleared  behind  the  shield,  to  avoid  all  danger  to  his  people  : 
to  which  he  showed  himself  very  indifferent,  in  comparison 
with  his  curiosity.  So  dense  was  the  crowd,  it  was  with 
difficulty,  and  not  without  many  blows,  this  was  effected.. 
When  all  was  ready,  I again  commended  the  matter  to  God,, 
and  bade  the  soldier  fire. 

The  report  of  his  gun  produced  even  greater  effects  than  the 
former.  There  rose  a shriek  from  the  multitude,  and  from, 
the  hill,  such  as  I never  heard  before,  nor  ever  wish  to  hear 
again.  The  whole  assembly  fell  upon  their  faces,  thinking 


don  manuel’s  narrative. 


307 


they  were  wounded  by  the  flash ; and  only  by  degrees,  first 
one  and  then  another  rose  again,  feeling  their  heads  and  arms 
to  see  whether  they  were  whole.  Then  the  chiefs  ran  to  the 
shield ; and  were  astonished  to  find  the  two  bullets  (for  the 
piece  was  double-loaded)  had  gone  through  hides,  wood,  and 
all,  and  lay  on  the  ground  beyond.  These  they  brought  to 
the  king,  together  with  the  shield  itself. 

But  when  he  had  seen  with  his  own  eyes  the  passage  cut 
by  the  bullet,  and  examined  the  ball  itself,  he  was  the  more 
confirmed  in  his  belief,  that  it  was  the  veritable  thunder  we 
carried  in  our  guns.  For  it  seems  that  meteor-stones  had 
been  known  to  fall  in  Toonati-nooka,  in  the  midst  of  great 
thunder-storms : and  he  was  fully  persuaded,  the  bullets 
(which  were  beaten  out  of  shape  in  their  passage  through  the 
shield)  were  some  such  stones,  only  under  our  command,  to 
launch  or  keep  back  as  we  pleased.  This  circumstance 
crowned  our  reputation ; the  king  ordered  a robe  of  honour 
(a  red  and  yellow  cloak  of  birch-bark  and  bird’s  feathers)  to 
be  brought,  and  thrown  over  my  shoulders : also,  he  rewarded 
the  marksman  with  a string  of  berries  which  he  took  from  his 
neck,  and  two  hogs ; which  were  sent  to  the  palisade. 

WE  were  now  surrounded  by  the  chiefs,  who  said  a 
great  many  things  in  our  honour.  But  I bade  them 
only  pay  honour  to  the  King  who  had  sent  me; 
that  we  were  but  His  servants,  and  all  the  power  we  pos- 
sessed came  from  Him  ; that  He  had  commanded  me  to  show 
other  wonders  beside  these,  and  to  tell  all  the  people  of 
Toonati-nooka  some  very  good  news,  which  we  reserved  till 
the  following  day : but  that  now  we  craved  leave  to  retire. 

They  crowded  so  closely  round  us,  showing  such  anxiety  to 
ask  a multitude  of  questions,  that  we  had  great  difficulty  in 
making  our  way  back  to  the  boats.  Our  men,  however, 
needed  rest ; therefore,  after  taking  our  leave  of  the  king 
(who  would  scarcely  let  us  go),  we  were  making  our  way  back, 
when  the  chief  bard,  whose  office  was,  to  chronicle  the  valiant 
deeds  of  the  king  and  his  warriors,  stepped  before  me  and 
chanted,  to  a kind  of  rude  lute  with  five  strings,  the  following 
verses : 

“ Great  is  the  King  who  sent  His  ambassador, 

Bearing  in  canes  the  thunder  and  lightning ! 

Strong  are  the  warriors  of  Toonati  nooka, 

Stronger  the  pale  men  beyond  the  salt  water’'. 


308 


SUPPLEMENT  : 


This  song  was  taken  up  by  the  multitude  and  the  chiefs ; 
nay,  the  king  himself  did  not  think  it  beneath  his  dignity  to 
join  in  it  : and  it  swelled  into  a deafening  shout,  as  they 
formed  a procession  to  accompany  us  to  the  palisade.  Indeed, 
every  one  was  now  anxious  we  should  come  from  this  separa- 
tion, and  be  with  them : but  I foresaw,  it  would  be  quieter 
and  more  secure  for  us  to  stay  there,  at  least  for  the  time.  So 
they  accompanied  us  to  our  quarters ; then,  with  many  greet- 
ings, we  dismissed  the  six  chiefs  who  had  been  kept  as  host- 
ages : they  were  wild  to  know  all  that  had  taken  place.  The 
multitude  remained  a great  part  of  the  night  outside  the  pali- 
sade, lighting  up  large  fires,  and  chanting  the  same  song,  and 
others  which  they  made  in  our  praise  : so  that  it  was  difficult  to 
get  any  rest  for  the  noise. 

At  day-break  the  next  morning,  the  king  sent  (in  respect- 
ful terms)  to  beg  we  would  come  to  him.  As  I was  engaged 
in  reciting  my  breviary,  I sent  back  word,  that  I was  then 
employed  in  the  service  of  my  King,  but  would  come  to  him 
as  soon  as  possible.  Meanwhile,  the  crowd  collected  in  such 
numbers  outside,  and  kept  up  such  a continual  talking  with 
our  two  Indians,  as  greatly  disturbed  me,  and  them  also.  At 
length,  seeing  no  other  help  for  it,  I called  them,  with  the 
other  men,  to  morning  prayers,  telling  the  savages  we  were 
going  to  speak  to  our  King,  and  they  must  remain  silent.  So, 
indeed,  they  did,  with  the  utmost  respect,  not  once  interrupt- 
ing us.  When  this  was  finished,  I opened  my  breviary  again, 
and  bade  the  Indians  precede  me,  singing  one  of  the  hymns  I 
had  composed  for  them  in  their  own  language.  So  we  all 
walked  out  very  slowly,  while  I managed  to  recite  my  office. 
The  multitude  crowded  round  us,  leaving  us  just  room  to 
walk ; and  they  supposed  this  was  some  solemn  procession 
we  were  engaged  in.  Nor  did  they  offer  to  disturb  us  ; but 
now  and  then  they  would  break  out,  singing  the  verse  their 
bard  had  made  the  night  before : some  who  were  nearest, 
and  could  catch  the  words  that  our  two  Indians  sang,  joined 
in  them  as  well  as  they  could : whence  it  came  to  pass,  that 
they  pronounced  the  sweet  names  of  Jesus  and  Mary  before 
they  knew  the  meaning  of  the  words. 

We  found  the  king  surrounded  by  his  priests,  preparing  to 
offer  a sacrifice  to  the  idol  of  the  place,  Paowanga.  He 
greeted  me  joyfully,  with  respect,  and  threw  another  string 
of  berries  round  my  neck,  inviting  me  to  take  part  with  him 
in  the  ceremony.  But  I answered,  I was  then  engaged  in 
communicating  with  my  King,  who  was  much  greater  than 


don  manuel’s  narrative. 


309 


Paowanga,  as  I had  told  him  last  night.  On  this,  the  priests 
became  very  angry ; and,  pointing  to  where  the  idol  stood, 
asked  me,  was  my  King  more  powerful  than  this  great  lord  of 
Toonati-nooka  ? I looked,  and  saw  at  a little  distance,  a 
monstrous  and  hideous  idol,  rudely  carved  out  of  the  stump 
of  a large  tree.  This  idol  was  of  a terrible  countenance, 
having  an  enormous  mouth  armed  with  shark’s  teeth : into 
which,  it  seems,  the  poor  deluded  people  used  to  put  their 
offerings,  such  as  hogs,  goats,  etc.  (for  the  idol’s  mouth  would 
easily  contain  one  of  those  animals),  together  with  yams,  po- 
tatoes, bread-fruit,  or  whatever  offering  they  brought.  Some- 
times, I believe,  they  did  the  same  with  human  sacrifices. 
They  supposed  that  Paowanga  devoured  all  these  things ; but 
the  priests,  who  had  their  dwelling  in  a sort  of  college  behind 
a palisade  close  to  the  image,  had  contrived  a trap-door  in 
the  back  of  his  head,  and  came  to  take  out  by  night  what  the 
poor  worshippers  had  put  in  by  day  ; and  so  lived  very  com- 
fortably, in  great  indolence. 

Part  of  this  I had  learned  through  our  Indians  ; but  the  par 
ticular  fraud  of  the  trap-door  was  discovered  after  what  I am 
going  to  relate.  For  the  present  I answered  the  priests  (who 
had  already,  as  I could  see,  become  our  enemies),  that,  if  the 
king  permitted,  when  I had  done  speaking  to  my  King,  we 
would  see  which  was  greatest,  my  King,  or  Paowanga.  Then 
I walked  quietly  on,  reading  my  book,  my  two  Indians  with 
me,  still  singing  their  hymns.  As  to  the  people,  they  seemed 
divided,  whether  they  should  follow  us,  or  attend  the  sacrifice  : 
but  by  far  the  greater  part  came  with  us,  and  I believe  Pao- 
wanga never  had  so  thin  an  attendance ; for  this  was  a solemn 
sacrifice,  which  took  place  “twice  every  moon”,  as  they  ex- 
pressed it. 

I went  some  little  distance,  out  of  sight : but  could  not  get 
beyond  the  sound  of  their  heathenish  shoutings  round  the 
idol,  nor  the  noise  of  the  great  instruments  like  drums,  they 
beat  in  his  honour,  and  which  I afterwards  found  to  be  made 
of  the  skins  of  their  enemies  slain  or  taken  in  battle. 

I knelt  down,  and  prayed  for  some  time  with  all  the  fer- 
vour I could  command,  that  our  good  Lord  would  inspire  me 
with  wisdom  and  courage  for  what  was  to  follow.  I also 
asked  the  two  Indians,  in  a whisper,  whether  they  were  pre- 
pared to  share  the  danger  I resolved  to  incur  for  the  glory  of 
God,  to  open  the  eyes  of  those  idolaters  at  one  bold  stroke. 

They  answered  me,  that  they  were  prepared : for  they 
were,  in  truth,  so  deeply  imbued  with  our  holy  faith,  I beliere 


310 


SUPPLEMENT  : 


they  would  have  felt  no  greater  joy  than  to  embrace  martyr- 
dom on  the  spot.  Seeing  the  danger  was  so  near,  they  asked 
for  a little  time  for  their  confessions,  which  allowed  me  to 
finish  great  part  of  my  office.  After  this,  I heard  them,  first 
the  elder,  then  the  younger ; motioning  the  savages  to  keep  a 
little  distance.  They  looked  on  with  a respectful  silence,  as 
on  something  mysterious,  which  they  understood  not. 

When  this  was  concluded,  returning  as  leisurely  as  we 
came,  we  found  the  heathen  sacrifice  just  over,  and  all  around 
the  king,  waiting  for  us. 

“ Now,  O king”,  said  I,  “ if  you  will  permit  me  to  return 
to  my  companions,  I will  fetch  a proof  that  Paowanga  is  no 
god  at  all : and  if  I fail  to  prove  it”,  added  I,  turning  to  the 
priests,  “ I will  give  you  leave  to  put  me  straight  into  his 
mouth”.  At  this,  the  king  laughed  greatly;  but  I noticed 
the  idolatrous  priests  to  look  at  me,  full  of  malice,  and  whis- 
per to  one  another.  “ Go”,  then  said  the  king,  “ O ambas- 
sador ! but  how  long  will  you  be  away  ?”  “ Before  the  sun”, 
said  I,  “ has  travelled  over  the  little  space  between  yonder 
tree-tops,  I will  come  again”. 

On  this,  I took  one  of  the  two  Indians  with  me ; but  the 
other  was  kept  back  by  the  king,  who  wished  to  entertain 
himself  by  asking  him  a thousand  questions  about  us  and  our 
ways  and  customs.  When  I got  to  the  boats,  I asked  the 
gunner’s  mate  of  the  wrecked  vessel  (who  was  one  of  our 
party)  to  make  me  up  quickly  a strong  packet  of  powder, 
containing  about  three-quarters  of  a pound,  with  a slow  bur- 
ning match,  a few  inches  in  length.  While  he  was  doing  this, 
I selected  from  a case  of  philosophical  instruments  which  we 
had  saved  from  the  wreck,  a strong  burning-glass,  or  magni- 
fier ; for  I had  already  formed  my  plan.  When  the  packet  of 
gunpowder  was  ready,  I went  back  with  it  in  my  hand,  and 
arrived  within  the  time  I had  promised. 

Presenting  myself  before  the  king,  I spoke  as  follows : 

“ O king!”  I said,  “when  two  chiefs  contend  in  battle,  or 
wrestle  in  a trial  of  strength,  if  one  is  able  to  lift  the  other 
off  his  feet,  and  throw  him  to  the  ground,  is  he  not  the 
strongest  ?”  “ Yes,  indeed”,  cried  out  the  king  and  the  chiefs  ; 
and  all  the  multitude  repeated  it  after  them.  “ But”,  I con- 
tinued, “if  the  chief  sends  one  of  his  mere  servants,  with  no 
weapon  in  his  hand  ; and  the  servant  is  able  to  throw  down 
that  other ; what  will  you  say  of  the  strength  of  the  chief 
who  sent  him  ?”  “ O,  O,  0”,  cried  they  all,  in  great  surprise ; 
and  listened  for  what  I should  say  next.  “Now  tell  me”,  I 


don  manuel’s  narrative. 


311 


went  on : “ is  Paowanga  a mighty  god  ?”  “ Oh,  mighty, 

mighty !”  cried  out  all  the  priests  in  chorus ; and  the  king, 
with  some  of  his  chiefs,  said  it  too ; but,  I perceived,  not  with 
so  much  vigour:  for  they  had  begun  to  disbelieve  in  him 
since  they  had  spoken  with  me.  “ But  how  can  you  show 
me”,  said  I,  “ he  is  so  mighty  ?”  “ Oh”,  said  one  of  the 

principal  among  the  priests,  pointing  to  the  idol,  “ see  how 
much  he  can  eat!”  In  truth,  one  of  the  hind  legs  of  a 
goat  was  even  then  sticking  out  of  the  huge  mouth  ; the  rest 
having  disappeared  into  the  cavity  of  the  trunk.  And,  it 
seems,  among  these  savages,  it  is  reckoned  one  of  the  great 
qualities  of  a chief  to  be  able  to  devour  enormous  quantities 
of  food. 

“Well”,  said  I,  laughing,  “I  am  going  to  give  him  some- 
thing to  eat,  too ; and  if  it  does  not  prove  too  much  for  him, 
I shall  think  him  very  strong  indeed”. 

So  saying,  I moved  towards  the  idol  with  my  packet  of 
.gunpowder. 

Here  the  priests,  suspecting  some  harm  to  their  favourite, 
began  to  urge  the  king  not  to  allow  me  to  proceed.  But  he, 
with  his  chiefs,  overcome  by  curiosity,  seemed  anxious  for 
nothing  but  to  see  the  end.  I promised,  on  my  part,  having 
once  put  something  into  Paowanga’s  mouth  for  him  to  eat,  I 
would  not  approach  him  again.  “ I have  no  wish”,  said  I, 
“ to  be  near  him,  since  he  is  an  enemy  and  rival  to  my  King”. 
They  scarce  knew  how  to  interpret  all  this ; but  there  was  the 
greatest  silence  and  wonder  among  chiefs  and  people  alike : 
except  only  the  priests,  who  kept  murmuring  and  scowling 
at  me. 

I walked  up  to  the  idol,  inwardly  praying  to  God  to  direct 
me ; then  mounting  the  rude  blocks,  piled  up  like  so  many 
steps,  by  which  worshippers  came  to  make  their  offering  to 
his  mouth,  I cried  aloud,  so  that  all  might  hear : “ O Pao- 
wanga ! it  is  not  to  honour  or  praise  you,  not  to  do  you 
komage,  that  I now  put  this  into  your  mouth : but,  on  the 
contrary,  to  show  this  king  and  all  his  people,  that  my  King 
who  has  sent  me  hither  is  alone  to  be  honoured  or  worshipped 
as  God”.  With  that,  I thrust  the  gunpowder  into  the  idol’s 
mouth,  taking  care  to  expose  the  slow  match  to  the  sun : then, 
swiftly  pulling  out  my  burning-glass,  I brought  the  sun’s 
rays  to  bear  on  the  end  of  the  match,  which  instantly  lighted. 
Then  I put  the  glass  again  into  my  pocket,  came  down  the 
steps,  and  walked  quietly  back  to  the  king. 


SUPPLEMENT : 


312 


LL  the  people  were  standing  at  a respectful  distance 


from  the  idol,  and  I was  not  much  afraid  of  their 


being  hurt  by  the  explosion.  Notwithstanding,  I 


begged  the  king  to  command  them  to  remove  farther  off, 
which  he  did,  and  they  reluctantly  obeyed.  I motioned  with 
my  hand,  that  no  one  should  stir ; but  there  was  no  need  to 
command  silence ; all  being  in  anxious  expectation  of  some- 
thing, .they  knew  not  what.  Their  eyes  went  continually 
back  and  forward,  first  to  the  idol,  then  to  me ; and  I could 
see,  they  began  to  feel  some  contempt  for  him,  for  his  not 
having  avenged,  by  some  great  judgment,  the  public  affront 
I had  offered  him. 

But  in  two  or  three  minutes,  the  match  having  now  burnt 
to  the  powder,  all  on  a sudden,  there  came  a more  terrific 
explosion  than  any  thunder- clap  they  had  heard  in  their 
lives  before.  The  image  was  rent  from  the  top  to  the  bot- 
tom ; his  monstrous  head  cleft  in  twain,  the  shark’s  teeth 
scattered  into  the  air : and  the  whole  trunk,  loosened  from 
the  earth,  tottered  for  a moment,  then  fell  forward  on  its  face, 
down  the  steps.  It  is  impossible  to  describe  the  astonish- 
ment, the  dread,  that  seized  on  the  whole  assembly.  They 
fell  down,  as  before,  stopping  their  eyes  and  ears ; no  one 
ventured  to  breathe  or  look  up : until  I ran  and  stood  forth 
in  the  midst,  having  taken  the  king’s  spear  into  my  hand. 
“ So  falls  Paowanga”,  I cried  with  a loud  voice  : “ he  falls  by 
the  hand  of  the  'meanest  servant  of  the  great  King!  So, 
soon  or  late,  must  fall  every  enemy  of  my  King  and  my 
Lord”.  With  that,  I struck  the  spear  deep  into  the  pros- 
trate trunk. 

The  people  all  answered  with  a shout,  again  and  again 
repeated,  in  honour  of  my  King  above  all  other  kings,  and 
of  my  God  above  all  gods.  Then  they  commenced  yelling 
forth  frantically  the  verse  they  had  learned ; and  the  sound, 
from  so  many  thousands  of  throats,  was  like  the  roar  of  a 
cataract,  and  was  taken  up  from  the  hills  by  the  shriller 
voices  of  the  wromen  and  children  ; 


only  now,  they  altered  the  third  line,  to  suit  the  occasion^ 
and  sang, 

“ Strong  was  our  god  Paowanga  but  yesterday  : 

Stronger  the  pale  man  beyond  the  salt  water  I” 


“ Great  is  the  King,  who  sent  His  ambassador. 
Bearing  in  canes  the  thunder  and  lightning” : 


don  manuel’s  narrative. 


313 


As  to  Paowanga’s  priests,  they  knew  not  which  way  to 
turn,  and  would  fain  have  made  their  escape ; but  the  people 
hemmed  and  pressed  them  in.  They  were  afraid  for  their 
lives,  and  began  to  supplicate  for  mercy : on  all  sides  they 
were  met  by  indignation  and  contempt.  All  at  once,  the 
king  was  seized  with  a fury  of  hatred  against  his  former 
instructors  : he  caught  up  his  second  spear,  and  shouting  out 
the  battle  cry  of  his  nation,  hurled  it  amongst  them,  and 
struck  down  one  of  the  highest  in  rank,  who  died  instantly 
from  the  wound.  This  was  the  signal  for  the  chiefs  and  the 
people,  who  rushed  upon  them,  and  commenced  an  instant 
massacre.  I was  horror-struck  at  the  sight,  and  flew  after 
the  king,  entreating,  imploring,  in  the  name  of  my  King,  who 
desired  not  (I  exclaimed)  the  death  of  His  enemies,  but  that 
they  should  turn  to  be  His  friends. 

It  was  all  in  vain ; the  movement  had  been  too  sudden,  and 
my  voice  was  drowned  in  the  uproar  of  shrieks  and  yells  that 
rose  from  the  midst  of  the  massacre.  I could  save  the  lives 
only  of  three,  by  staying  the  arms  of  the  chiefs  as  they  were 
hurling  their  spears ; and  succeeded  at  last  in  making  my 
voice  heard.  But,  to  my  grief,  when  the  tumult  subsided, 
there  were  no  less  than  nineteen  dead  bodies  lying  on  the 
ground. 

llichly  as  these  idolatrous  priests  had  deserved  their  death, 
for  the  impositions  they  had  practised  on  the  people,  I was 
afflicted  beyond  measure  at  their  tragical  end ; having  pro- 
mised myself  (it  may  be,  presumptuously)  the  gratification 
of  presenting  to  my  Lord  this  whole  nation,  converted  to 
Him  without  the  shedding  of  one  drop  of  blood.  I cast 
myself  on  my  knees  beside  the  mangled  corpses,  endeavour- 
ing to  staunch  their  wounds,  or  to  find  so  much  as  a token 
of  life  among  them.  Some,  it  is  true,  yet  breathed ; but  one 
after  another  they  died  under  my  hands,  so  sure  and  forcibly 
had  the  spear  been  hurled. 

It  was  a fresh  cause  of  astonishment  to  the  king,  to  see  me 
thus  engaged : he  could  not  forbear  to  ask  me  the  reason  of 
it.  u Have  I not  said,  O king !”  I replied,  u that  my  King  is 
all  goodness  and  love  ? He  has  no  enemies,  but  those  who 
make  themselves  so ; and  even  those,  He  wins  back  by  His 
patience  and  benefits”. 

“ Then  why”,  answered  the  king,  “ did  he  not  try  and  win 
back  Paowanga?” 

“I  will  tell  you,  0 king!”  said  I,  amid  tears  and  sighs, 
“ when  my  mind  is  more  calm  : at  present,  I grieve  for  those 


SUPPLEMENT  : 


314 

unhappy  souls,  who  have  been  sent  out  of  the  world,  enemies 
of  my  King”. 

But  it  was  time  to  follow  up  the  advantage  God  had  given 
us.  Wherefore,  placing  the  few  priests  who  remained  alive, 
together  with  the  families  of  them  all,  in  charge  of  the  elder 
of  my  two  Indians,  I solemnly  appealed  to  my  King  (raising 
my  hand  to  heaven)  to  witness,  that  they  were  thencefor- 
ward under  His  own  protection,  and  no  man’s  hand  must  be 
raised  against  them.  This  I said  in  the  presence  of  the  king 
and  his  chiefs,  with  a resolute  countenance ; by  which  they 
seemed  in  a manner  over-awed,  and  at  length  promised  it 
should  be  so.  I then  led  him  to  the  idol,  on  which  the  mul- 
titude were  by  this  time  heaping  all  kind  of  insults,  hacking 
and  hewing  it  to  pieces.  I showed  the  king  the  trap-door 
that  was  made  in  the  back  of  Paowanga’s  neck,  by  which 
the  offerings  placed  in  his  mouth  were  appropriated  to  the  use 
of  the  priests  and  their  families.  This  roused  his  indignation 
again,  and  that  of  the  people ; forasmuch  as  these  ministers 
of  an  idolatrous  worship  were  supported,  besides,  by  a liberal 
contribution  made  throughout  the  district  every  new  moon. 
But  I reminded  him  of  his  promise  ; sooner  than  a hair  of  their 
heads  was  touched,  I demanded  from  him  that  the  priests  and 
their  families  should  be  given  to  my  King,  as  His  special  ser- 
vants. This  he  readily  granted ; and  from  that  time  I was 
looked  on  as  their  special  protector  ; the  people  (for  my  sake) 
being  so  afraid  of  injuring  them,  they  would  not  even  go  near 
them : though  it  was  plain,  they  still  regarded  them  with 
much  hatred  and  contempt. 

It  needed  now  but  a short  time  to  cleave  the  idol  in  pieces, 
and  set  him  on  fire.  While  this  was  preparing,  the  king  de- 
sired to  see  my  breviary,  in  which  he  had  seen  me  read  from 
time  to  time  ; and  asked  me  whether  it  was  my  oloeeo . This 
is  a word  whereby  they  express  a sort  of  charm,  or  amulet, 
in  which  they  believe  another  of  their  false  gods,  named 
Havaeoeekee,  resides.*  I had  heard  of  these  amulets  before, 
from  our  Indians  ; and  this  appeared  a favourable  occasion  of 
finishing  the  work  we  had  begun. 

“No,  Oking!”  answered  I ; “this  is  no  oloeeo;  nor  does 
my  King  permit  His  servants  to  keep,  or  to  believe  in,  any 
such  thing.  Oloeeo,  and  Havaeoeekee,  who  (you  say)  lives  in 
it,  are  watee , wat.ee  (naught,  naught),  even  as  Paowanga”. 

On  this,  the  king  and  his  chiefs  all  cried  out  again.  Per- 


* See  above,  p.  143. — E». 


don  manuel’s  narrative. 


315 


haps  it  was  destroying  their  gods  a little  faster  for  them  than 
prudence  might  warrant ; yet  I seemed  to  myself  only  to 
employ  the  occasion  that  notv  presented. 

“ How  ?”  said  the  king  at  length,  “ do  you  tell  us,  O won- 
derful man ! that  Havaeoeekee  is  no  more  than  Paowanga, 
whom  you  have  destroyed  ?” 

“ I will  leave  you  to  judge,  O king !”  answered  I.  “ If 
Paowanga  were  indeed  a god,  would  he  not  have  avenged  on 
me  the  insult  I offered  him  ?” 

“ True”,  cried  the  king,  and  his  chiefs  assented  ; “ we  ex- 
pected every  minute  to  see  you  struck  dead  for  that”. 

“ And  what  do  you  think  of  Paowanga  now  ?”  I asked 
smiling. 

Upon  which,  the  king  and  all  around  him  made  a gesture 
of  the  utmost  contempt. 

“Well”,  I continued  “Havaeoeekee  will  do  me  no  more 
harm  than  the  other  : and,  if  you  will  collect  for  me  all  the 
oloeeos  you  can  find,  I will  burn  them  in  the  same  fire  with 
Paowanga”. 

“ O ! O !”  cried  they,  aloud  ; for  it  seems  they  were  in 
greater  dread  of  these  charms  than  of  the  idol  itself.  Never- 
theless, as  I persisted  in  it,  and  assured  them,  if  there  were 
any  vengeance,  it  would  fall  on  me  alone,  the  king  gave  the 
word,  and  six  or  seven  of  these  amulets  called  oloeeos  were 
collected  from  the  neighbouring  huts.  Then,  seeing  that  the 
people  had  by  this  time  made  a mighty  heap  of  fuel,  and 
placed  on  it  the  prostrate  stump,  and  all  other  pieces  of  the 
idol  they  could  gather  after  the  explosion,  I stood  in  the 
midst,  my  two  hands  full  of  oloeeos , and  cried  aloud  : 

“ 0 Havaeoeekee  ! if  indeed  thou  art  a demon  inhabiting 
these  things,  and  not  a vain  imagination  of  this  deluded  peo- 
ple, then  thou  knowest,  O foul  spirit,  thou  hast  no  power 
against  my  King  : of  which  I now  give  proof,  by  burning  thy 
house  over  thy  head  !”  On  which,  I cast  the  oloeeos  on  the 
top  of  the  pile,  and  bade  the  by-standers  set  fire  to  it.  Then, 
while  it  blazed  up,  fanned  by  the  wind  into  a mighty  confla- 
gration, the  two  Indians  and  I took  up  our  hymn  again  and 
sang  it  slowly,  till  the  multitude  caught  it  from  us  ; and  there 
arose  from  that  vast  assembly  the  words  of  a Christian  hymn 
of  praise  to  God,  in  regular  cadence,  louder  than  the  roaring 
of  the  fire. 

When  the  blaze  died  down  (and  the  whole  thing  was  over 
in  a short  time,  the  people  fanning  the  fire  continually  with 
mats,  fly-fans,  or  anything  they  could  lay  hold  on),  the  mul- 


316 


SUPPLEMENT  : 


titude  rushed  over  the  embers,  treading  them  out  and  stamp- 
ing them  into  dust  with  their  feet ; as  though  they  could  not 
show  contempt  enough  for  the  idol  by  which  (and  his  minis- 
ters) they  had  been  so  long  deluded. 

celebrate  this  great  event,  the  king  now  proclaimed 

Jfl  a festival  to  be  held  by  all  his  subjects ; of  whom  the 
numbers  that  flocked  around  us  were  ever  increasing. 
Presents  from  these  poor  simple  savages  were  offered  to  us 
without  measure  ; so  that,  had  our  purpose  been  to  enrich  our- 
selves, we  should  have  been  able  to  do  so  on  the  spot.  For 
they  laid  at  my  feet  many  silver  ornaments,  and  even  some  of 
gold  ; whereby  I knew  they  had  in  their  mountains  some  veins, 
at  least,  of  these  precious  metals,  were  they  but  skilled  in 
working  them.  But  \ put  these  presents  all  aside,  remem- 
bering that  the  Apostle  was  able  to  say  to  his  converts,  as  a 
model  for  all  pastors : Argentum  et  aurum , aut  vestem  nullius 
concupivi , sicut  ipsi  scitis :*  and  I explained  to  them,  the  purpose 
for  which  my  King  had  sent  me  was  to  do  good  to  them,  not 
to  grow  rich  upon  them.  I do  believe,  this  answer  surprised 
them  almost  as  much  as  the  blowing  up  of  Paowanga  himself : 
they  had  been  so  used  to  the  extortion  and  tyranny  of  their 
petty  chiefs,  even  up  to  the  king,  that  anything  like  disinter- 
ested charity  came  to  them  as  a novelty  and  a wonder.  I 
seized  the  occasion  to  preach  to  them  something  (in  a guarded 
way)  of  the  power  and  attributes,  especially  the  gratuitous 
love,  of  the  One  True  God  ; to  which  they  listened  with  eager 
ears,  especially  those  of  the  poorer  sort.  Truly,  the  gospel 
has  ever  been  the  emancipator  of  the  oppressed. 

However,  I did  not  feel  justified  in  withholding  from  the 
brave  seamen  who  had  come  to  share  my  perils,  any  advantage 
they  might  derive  from  the  good-will  of  the  Toonati-nookans. 
I no  sooner  made  this  known,  than  the  natives  pressed  upon 
them  the  acceptance  of  those  presents  I had  refused.  But, 
consulting  for  their  interest,  and  wishing  to  obtain  for  them 
something  more  permanent  than  the  heap  of  presents  that  lay 
before  us,  I conferred  with  them  apart  to  know  what  were 
their  views  regarding  their  future  lot.  ‘For  myself,  I said,  I 
was  bound  by  engagement  to  return,  after  a certain  time,  to 
the  island  whence  we  had  come  ; nor  could  I think  (apart 

* “ I have  not  coveted  any  man’s  silver,  gold,  or  apparel,  as  you 
yourselves  know” — Acts,  xx  33.  Ed. 


don  manuel’s  narrative. 


317 


from  my  promise)  of  remaining  absent  from  our  friends 
there,  more  than  from  eight  to  ten  months,  at  most.  I de- 
clared, however  great  this  work  of  converting  the  heathen 
might  prove  (as  it  promised  fair,  hitherto),  I must  not  abandon 
those  children  of  the  faith  whom  our  Heavenly  Father  had 
thrown  by  such  a providence  within  reach  of  the  Sacraments. 
What  I chiefly  hoped  (I  said),  was  to  be  able  to  establish  some 
regular  communication  between  that  island  and  Toonati- 
nooka ; and  so  either  fetch  off  our  friends  thence,  if  they 
were  disposed  to  come  and  join  us,  or  send  some  of  our 
savages  thither  (after  making  good  Christians  of  them)  to 
help  to  plant  and  settle  the  place  as  a colony.  That,  in  that 
case,  having  two  flocks  in  different  islands,  I should  think 
time  and  labour  well  spent  in  making  passages  in  the  long- 
boat, from  one  to  the  other,  to  attend  to  their  spiritual  needs 
so  long  as  God  might  spare  me. 

They  deliberated  not  long  upon  this ; but  all  with  one 
voice  exclaimed,  they  desired  nothing  better  than  to  stay  on 
this  island,  where  they  had  plenty  for  their  needs,  and  the 
good  will  of  the  inhabitants ; to  say  nothing  of  the  consola- 
tions of  their  religion,  which  they  possessed  so  long  as  I re- 
mained with  them.  To  all  these  reasons  I assented,  only 
bidding  them  remark,  they  were  now  doubly  bound  to  show 
a good  Christian  example  to  the  savages  among  whom  they 
were  ; that  all  eyes  would  be  on  them,  from  day  to  day,  and 
every  action  scanned : and  I implored  them,  for  the  love  of 
all  they  held  sacred,  not  (like  too  many  who  call  themselves 
Christians)  to  throw  any  scandal  in  the  way  of  the  heathen 
that  might  hinder  their  conversion  to  the  faith.  This  they 
seriously  promised,  one  and  all : and  to  prove  their  sincerity, 
they  bound  themselves  on  the  spot  to  approach  the  sacrament 
of  penance  once  a fortnight,  or  in  three  weeks  at  the  furthest. 
Indeed,  as  it  turned  out,  I am  thankful  to  record,  the  greater 
part  of  them  exceeded  this  measure ; and  not  more  than  two 
fell  off  from  it,  of  whose  retributive  and  miserable  end  (if 
time  permit),  I shall  have  to  speak  in  sorrow : if  not  in  this 
writing,  yet  to  those  who  may  come  hither  in  my  life-time. 
For  it  affords  a striking  example  of  the  just  judgment  of  God 
on  such  as  sin  against  light,  and  with  scandal. 

Having  their  determination  made  known  to  me,  I came 
back  from  where  we  had  spoken  together,  to  the  king  and 
his  chiefs  (who,  I found,  were  called  tayakee , a word  signi- 
fying at  once  a brave  warrior  and  a man  of  rank),  and  then 
the  feast  proceeded : but,  to  my  great  satisfaction,  I had  not 


318 


SUPPLEMENT  : 


to  petition  the  king  this  time  to  send  away  his  dancers.  He 
had  given  express  orders  they  should  not  appear,  since  it 
displeased  the  white  ambassador  (so  he  called  me)  : though  I 
learned  afterwards,  it  was  an  invariable  custom  for  the  king 
to  be  thus  entertained  at  his  banquets.  He  made  me  sit 
next  to  him,  and  on  his  left  hand ; which  with  them  is  the 
place  of  honour,  because  it  gives  more  facility  to  the  enter- 
tainer, whether  king  or  chief,  to  put  morsels  of  food  with  his 
own  hand  into  the  mouth  of  his  guest.  This  was  a distinc- 
tion with  which  I would  gladly  have  dispensed,  had  it  been 
possible ; since  the  royal  hands  might  have  been  much  im- 
proved by  some  ablution.  His  nephew,  who  usually  occupied 
the  left  hand,  being  his  heir  and  successor  in  the  kingdom, 
was  for  this  time  placed  on  the  right.  His  discontent  at  what 
he  considered  a slight  put  on  him  by  his  uncle,  began  even 
then  to  work  in  his  jealous  mind,  and  soon  caused  us  troubles 
which,  even  as  I write,  seem  likely  instruments  of  the  enemy 
of  souls  against  the  reaping-in  of  the  abundant  harvest  we 
might  else  have  hoped  for. 

The  king,  both  then  and  afterwards,  plied  me  with  num- 
berless questions  about  my  country,  my  King,  the  number  of 
His  subjects,  where  He  chiefly  resided,  what  was  the  form  of 
His  palace,  how  far  was  His  capital  from  Toonati-nooka,  how 
he  should  send  an  embassy  to  return  the  favour  my  King  had 
conferred  upon  him  by  Sending  us  hither,  and  more  enquiries 
than  I can  here  put  down. 

I now  found  it  necessary  to  answer  him,  that  the  great 
King  by  whose  will  I had  come,  was  indeed  the  King  of  kings 
and  Lord  of  lords ; that  His  dwelling  was  in  heaven,  and  His 
dominion  over  heaven,  earth,  and  all  things  : that  under  Him, 
only  by  His  permission,  other  kings  reigned,  but  quite  in  a 
different  way ; some  over  islands,  some  over  continents : that 
they  were  mere  men,  like  the  king  of  Toonati  himself,  and  me, 
but  with  a lawful  authority  which  their  subjects  must  obey, 
so  long  as  they  commanded  nothing  against  the  Great  King 
in  heaven. 

Here  he  interrupted  me,  asking  with  great  eagerness, 
whether  I was  indeed  only  a man  like  himself?  I answered 
him,  I was  so  in  truth,  and  nothing  more ; born  like  himself, 
and,  like  himself,  soon  to  die.  “ But  where”,  said  he,  “ will 
you  go,  O white  prince,  when  you  die  ?”  To  this  I replied, 
if  I was  found  faithful  to  my  King  when  the  great  book  was 
opened  I had  told  him  of  before,  I should  be  taken  up  into 
the  palace  of  my  King,  and  be  with  him  for  ever.  “ Oh”, 


don  manuel’s  narrative. 


319 


said  he  again,  “ Oh  ! you  are  faithful,  faithful ! you  will  go  to 
Him,  be  sure  you  will  go”.  “ Nay”,  said  I,  “ my  King  reads  all 
the  thoughts  of  my  heart,  always,  and  He  sees  many  faults 
which  no  man  can  see.  I cannot  be  sure  of  going  to  Him  ; 
for  He  has  lent  me  many  things  to  use  for  Him,  and  will 
reckon  with  me  for  them  all”. 

He  asked  me,  “ What  things  ?”  then,  pointing  to  the  guns, 
which  were  piled  up  together,  with  one  of  the  mariners 
mounting  guard,  to  prevent  the  savages  from  touching  them  : 
“Were  those  dreadful  lightning-tubes”,  he  asked,  “the 
things  my  King  had  lent  me  ?”  To  this  I answered,  by  re- 
minding him,  I had  said  there  were  many  kings  reigning  ora 
earth,  men  like  ourselves  ; that  one  of  them,  the  king  of  Spain, 
was  my  earthly  master,  and  the  lightning-tubes  belonged  to 
him.  “ Then”,  asked  he,  “ which  king  sent  you  here  to  us, 
the  king  of  Spain,  or  the  great  King  above  ?”  I replied,  that 
being  in  attendance  on  the  great  King,  I had  received  no 
direct  orders  from  the  king  of  Spain  on  this  subject ; that  I 
was  bound  to  obey  the  latter  in  all  things  lawful  and  tempo- 
ral, but  the  great  King  at  all  times,  in  all  things  and  places* 
This  I tried  to  make  as  plain  to  him  as  I could ; but  it  was 
difficult  to  put  such  things  in  a language  ill-fitted  to  express 
them  : nor  did  he  seem  to  apprehend  my  meaning  clearly. 
But  one  thing,  I could  see,  gave  him  satisfaction  ; for  he  per- 
ceived we  had  come  on  no  mission  from  the  king  of  Spain  to 
disturb  his  temporal  authority,  nor  sought  to  dethrone  himy 
nor  lower  him  in  the  eyes  of  his  subjects. 

The  king  then  returned  to  his  questions,  and  asked,  if  the 
guns  belonged  to  the  king  of  Spain,  and  we  were  his  subjects, 
but  not  sent  by  him,  how  did  we  become  possessed  of  them  ? 
Had  we  taken  them  from  the  king  without  his  leave  ? In 
reply,  I gave  a brief  account  of  my  being  first  left,  with  a 
few  others,  on  the  island  from  which  we  came ; then  of  a 
Spanish  wreck  that  was  drifted  in  thither : all  which  is  too- 
long  to  detail  here,  and  belongs  not  to  the  purpose  of  my 
writing.  Then  he  asked  again,  how  long  ago  had  the  great 
King  bidden  me  to  come  ? I told  him,  for  some  time  I had 
been  having  it  made  known  to  me,  more  and  more  ; but  had 
not  at  first  been  able  to  leave  others  to  whom  my  King  had 
sent  me.  On  this  he  asked,  with  what  voice  the  great  King 
spoke  to  His  servants  to  make  known  His  commands  ? I en- 
deavoured to  explain  something  about  the  revelation  made 
by  God  to  His  creatures,  first  through  His  prophets,  then 
through  His  Church : distinguishing  it  from  the  interior  in- 


320 


SUPPLEMENT : 


spirations  whereby  He  speaks  to  our  individual  hearts.  I 
told  him,  it  was  in  this  latter  way  that  I knew  my  King’s 
will  in  this  case,  being  out  of  reach  of  those  who  could  tell  it 
me  by  an  exterior  voice,  and  with  authority  from  Himself. 

“ Ah,  then”,  said  he,  “ you  have  priests  among  you  also, 
as  we  have?”  I replied,  that  I myself  was  a priest  of  this 
great  God  ; but  that  others,  again,  were  over  me,  and  nearer 
to  my  King : and  I was  bound  to  consult  them  when  it  was 
possible,  and  take  my  commands  from  them  in  all  things  that 
concerned  my  duty.  “But,  O white  prince!”  pursued  he, 
bowing  towards  me,  “ if  even  you  are  an  inferior  priest,  what 
greater  powers  have  they  who  are  nearer  the  King  ? Have 
they  more  lightning-tubes  (so  he  continued  to  call  our  guns) 
at  their  command  than  you  have?”  I could  not  forbear 
smiling  at  the  idea  of  Church  authority  being  measured  by 
an  armament  of  musketry  ; and  I answered,  that  was  not  the 
kind  of  power  I meant ; that  these  lightning-tubes  were  the 
property  of  the  kings  of  the  earth,  and  were  employed  by 
them  in  their  wars, , one  against  the  other,  even  as  he  em- 
ployed javelins  and  clubs  against  the  King  of  Hai-vavaoo. 

He  then  asked,  what  the  superior  priests  could  do,  that  I 
could  not  ? This  made  me  enter  upon  the  distinction  of 
orders  in  the  Church,  the  powers  of  the  episcopacy,  the  suc- 
cession of  priests  maintained  by  the  Sacrament  of  Order,  the 
supremacy  of  one  Bishop'  of  bishops  in  the  centre  of  Christen- 
dom, and  similar  topics.  I scarcely  touched,  however,  on  the 
sacraments  at  all ; fearing  to  open  at  once  to  him  the  mystery 
of  the  Incarnation,  with  its  stupendous  consequences  : and  I 
resolved  to  keep  this  for  a later  conference.  But  it  was  diffi- 
cult to  evade  his  questions,  so  prompt  and  eager  were  they. 
His  tayahees , or  chiefs,  sat  round  us,  drinking  in  every  word 
with  the  most  fixed  attention : and  at  times^  when  any  point 
of  the  discourse  pleased  them,  saying  Oora,  oora!  or  else  they 
turned  to  one  another  to  express  their  satisfaction  in  a low 
tone. 


XN  short,  I felt  the  providence  of  God  had  (so  far)  placed 
the  conversion  of  these  precious  souls  in  my  hands,  all 
unworthy  as  I was  of  such  a favour  : and  lifted  my  heart 
sincerely  to  Him,  to  beseech  that  no  sin  of  mine,  nor  want  of 
prudence  in  speech  or  act,  might  mar  the  working  out  of  this 
great  purpose.  But  for  the  present,  I intimated  to  the  king, 


don  manuel’s  narrative. 


321 


with  much  respect,  we  had  spoken  enough.  He  seemed  dis- 
appointed ; but  I had  resolved  rather  to  give  him  less  to  think 
on,  than  to  weary  him  with  too  much  of  these  matters. 

After  this,  turning,  to  another  subject,  he  asked  how  long 
we  purposed  to  stay  with  him ; at  the  same  time  saying,  he 
should  esteem  it  a happiness  to  himself  and  his  kingdom,  to 
keep  us  so  long  as  we  choose  to  remain.  To  which  I answered, 
for  my  own  part,  I had  come  to  deliver  to  him  the  message  of 
my  King,  and  had  no  wish  but  to  remain  as  long  as  the  ob- 
ject of  my  embassy  required  ; that  when  I departed,  it  would 
only  be  for  a time,  to  confer  with  some  whom  I had  left  be- 
hind on  the  island  I had  spoken  of;  that,  with  the  king’s 
leave,  I would  give  them  the  choice,  to  remain  in  that  place, 
or  come  back  with  me,  and  settle  in  Toonati-nooka.  Or,  if 
he  preferred,  I would  carry  over  with  me  some  of  his  subjects 
to  colonize  that  small  island,  and  so  ply  backwards  and  for- 
wards, extending  his  dominions  there,  while  I proclaimed  my 
King’s  message  here.  This  was  the  substance  of  my  discourse, 
to  which  all  listened  eagerly ; and  the  tayaJcees  began  to  whis- 
per to  one  another,  but  so  rapidly,  and  in  such  a low  tone, 
I could  not  catch  their  meaning. 

All  that  I said  appeared  to  please  the  king ; who  at  once 
offered  my  followers  as  much  land  a-piece  as  one  of  their  rude 
ploughs,  drawn  by  two  men  (for  they  have  neither  oxen  nor 
horses  in  the  island)  could  mark  out  within  the  space  of  an 
hour.  But,  after  thanking  him  for  the  offer,  I preferred  for 
them,  and  for  myself,  a visit  to  his  capital,  and  a journey 
through  the  island  : after  which,  I said,  we  would  determine 
whether  to  disperse  ourselves  through  his  dominions,  or  locate 
our  party  in  one  spot,  and  form  a colony  of  white  men.  He 
agreed  readily  to  give  us  our  choice ; and  so  the  affair  ended 
for  that  time. 

The  king  soon  after  signified  his  intention  of  carrying  us 
with  him  to  his  capital  the  following  day,  at  day-break.  To 
this  I agreed,  only  stipulating  for  an  hour’s  delay,  that  I 
might  offer  a solemn  sacrifice  to  my  King.  He  seemed  de- 
lighted at  this  proposal,  and  said,  the  best  of  the  hogs  and 
goats  in  that  part  of  the  island  should  be  at  my  service. 
But  I smiled,  and  told  him,  my  King  was  not  pleased  with 
such  offerings  as  these  ; but  had  prepared  a Victim,  the  only 
one  worthy  of  being  offered  to  Himself : and  had  committed 
this  sacred  function  to  my  hands.  On  his  inquiring,  with 
great  eagerness,  what  this  victim  was,  I excused  myself  for 
the  time  from  further  explanation  ; but  I said,  during  my 

21 


322 


SUPPLEMENT  : 


residence  with  him  I should  have  much  to  say  on  this  subject ; 
and  even  thus,  I coidd  scarce  free  myself  from  his  urgent 
curiosity  on  the  subject. 

I had  brought  with  me  all  things  needful  for  the  celebra- 
tion of  the  holy  Sacrifice ; and  I determined  to  offer  it  on  the 
very  spot  whence  we  had  thrown  down  Paowanga : making 
the  steps  that  once  led  to  that  hideous  idol’s  devouring 
mouth,  become  the  steps  of  a true  Christian  altar.  Accord- 
ingly, no  sooner  did  I see  the  first  dawn  of  light,  than  I pre- 
pared and  blessed  a quantity  of  holy  water,  wherewith  I 
sprinkled  the  whole  place  round  about ; the  steps  also  them- 
selves, and  some  blocks  of  trees  the  natives  brought  at  my 
request,  which  I disposed  as  a rude  altar,  and  laid  on  them 
the  small  altar-stone  I had  brought,  and  some  clean  linen 
•cloths. 

The  heathens,  all  this  while,  stood  round  us  in  vast  multi- 
tudes, and  breathless  silence,  watching  everything  I did. 
When  they  saw  the  devotion  with  which  my  companions  re- 
ceived the  aspersion  of  holy  water,  they  came  pressing  round 
by  one  impulse,  and  begged  for  their  share.  I imparted  it  to 
them  willingly,  hoping  it  might  be  a prelude  to  their  future 
baptism.  But  I soon  had  reason  to  repent  of  my  rashness ; 
for  the  crowds  who  were  behind,  eager  to  receive  the  asper- 
sion, pressed  so  much  on  the  front  rank,  as  to  throw  them 
into  confusion ; and,  forcing  them  in  upon  me  and  my  com- 
panions, we  were  all  but  suffocated  by  the  mere  pressure  of 
the  crowd.  I cried  out  to  them,  in  their  own  language,  to 
keep  some  order  ; happily  my  voice  reached  one  or  two  of  the 
chiefs,  who  came  running  to  the  spot  with  their  spears,  and 
laying  about  them  vigorously  with  the  butt-ends,  preserved 
our  lives ; or  I truly  believe  we  should  have  been  trodden 
underfoot  by  the  unreasoning  zeal  of  these  poor  savages.  This 
made  me  feel  yet  more,  how  large  a field  was  opened  to  me 
for  missionary  labour,  if  only  I could  occupy  it.  Yet,  while 
I was  thankful  for  being  sent  to  so  promising  a harvest,  I 
could  not  but  deplore  finding  myself  alone,  where  ten  times 
the  number  would  hardly  suffice  for  the  work  before  me. 
But  His  strength  is  perfected  in  weakness ; nor  ever  is  His 
hand  more  visible,  than  where  no  human  forces  appear  to 
account  for  a great  result. 

Putting  such  thoughts  aside,  except  to  direct  my  intention 
in  offering  the  holy  Sacrifice,  I now  prepared  to  say  the  first 
mass  that  was  said  in  Toonati-nooka  since  the  world  began. 
I had  brought  with  me  all  things  needful  for  the  celebration  ; 


don  manuel’s  narrative. 


323 


having  received  them  (I  may  say)  by  the  ministry  of  the 
winds  and  waves,  when  the  wreck  had  drifted  upon  the  island 
whence  I came.  When  all  was  ready,  with  a great  illumina- 
tion of  candle-nuts  on  the  altar,  beside  my  waxen  tapers,  I 
vested,  with  the  usual  prayers.  I could  not  repress  an  abun- 
dance of  tears  at  the  thought  of  that  solemn  moment,  the  sanc- 
tification of  another  spot  on  God’s  earth  to  His  true  worship 
and  by  His  sacramental  presence.  Then,  standing  on  the  altar 
steps,  I turned  to  the  many  thousands  watching  me  with  eager 
eyes ; and  raising  my  voice,  spoke  to  them  much  in  this  way : 

“ O men  of  Toonati-nooka  !”  I exclaimed,  “ many  new  and 
wonderful  things  have  you  seen  since  we  came  among  you ; 
and  we  have  given  you  tokens  of  the  powers  we  bring  with 
us,  for  your  good,  not  your  destruction.  But  what  I am  now 
to  do  is  far  more  wonderful  than  anything  I have  hitherto 
done  in  this  island ! Though  you  will  see  nothing,  and  hear 
nothing,  yet  I pledge  my  truth  as  an  ambassador  of  the  great 
King”  (here  I lifted  my  hand  to  heaven),  “ that  He  is  Himself 
about  to  come  down,  and  be  present  among  you,  enthroned 
on  this  altar”. 

When  I had  said  that,  the  multitude  was  thrown  into  great 
agitation ; and  began  to  cry  out,  as  with  one  voice,  beseech- 
ing me  that  the  great  King  might  not  come  so  near  to  them : 
for,  it  seems,  they  made  sure  they  should  be  consumed  by 
fire,  or  struck  dead  with  the  thunder,  at  the  awful  presence 
of  my  King.  The  king  of  Toonati-nooka  himself,  with  his 
chiefs,  showed  signs  of  much  uneasiness  at  hearing  what  was 
to  take  place : he  sent  one  of  his  principal  chiefs  personally 
to  me,  where  I stood,  beseeching  me  to  intercede  with  my 
King,  not  to  come  personally  among  them : that  he  would  send 
Him  any  tribute  from  the  island,  and  acknowledge  himself 
and  all  the  inhabitants  as  His  vassals,  if  only  He  would  spare 
them  that  dread  visit.  But,  in  order  to  quiet  their  fears,  I 
continued,  with  a smiling  countenance : 

“Do  not  imagine,  O king  and  people  of  this  island,  the 
great  King  is  coming  to  you  in  any  way  but  extreme  kind- 
ness and  condescension.  No ; He  is  so  filled  with  good-will 
to  you  all,  and  so  greatly  wishes  to  manifest  it,  and  to  benefit 
you,  that  while  He  comes  because  He  loves  you,  He  comes 
concealed,  lest  He  terrify  you.  You  could  not,  it  is  true, 
endure  the  unveiled  majesty  of  His  presence ; for  He  is  ten 
thousand  times  brighter  and  more  glorious  than  this  sun  now 
rising  over  the  mountains.  His  voice  causes  the  great  powers 
of  His  court  to  tremble,  while  they  bow  before  Him.  His 


324 


SUPPLEMENT : 


frown  is  unendurable  in  terror.  But  now,  even  as  a prince 
may  walk  among  his  subjects  under  disguise,  in  poor  raiment, 
so  the  great  King  is  coming  down  among  you ; yet  you  will 
not  see  Him,  you  will  not  hear  Him.  I,  His  ambassador, 
promise  you  this.  You  will  hear  nothing  even  so  loud  as  my 
voice  is  at  this  moment  that  I address  you.  He  is  coming  by 
reason  of  His  love  for  you,  to  teach  you  to  be  happy  in  loving 
Him.  I only  ask  you  to  believe  me,  that  He  will  be  in  the 
midst  of  you  unseen.  When  you  hear  this  little  shell  sound, 
(here  I showed  them  a small  bell  we  had  made  for  Mass  out 
of  a sea-shell),  then  throw  yourselves  on  your  knees ; pray 
the  great  King  to  make  you  able  to  know  Him  and  to  love 
Him.  I too,  will  ask  of  Him  the  same  favour  for  you  all”. 

This  discourse  struck  them  with  the  greatest  astonishment. 
Of  course,  they  could  not  comprehend  my  meaning,  nor  so 
much  as  guess  at  it : but  they  were  over-awed,  and  in  sus- 
pense, at  what  was  about  to  take  place.  Having  thus  pre- 
pared them,  I proceeded  with  holy  Mass,  my  companions 
kneeling  around,  and  the  younger  of  the  two  Indians  (for  this, 
I thought,  would  impress  them  more)  serving  at  the  adorable 
Sacrifice.  The  most  profound  silence  reigned  through  the 
vast  multitude,  though  it  was  the  silence  of  intense  expecta- 
tion, not  the  reverence  of  faith.  At  length,  when  young 
Samuel  sounded  the  little  shell,  I heard  a rush  behind  me, 
around  me,  of  thousands  falling  on  their  knees  at  the  same 
moment.  It  was  like  the  sound  of  a mighty  cataract ; it 
almost  overcame  me  with  emotion,  but  served  to  direct  my 
intention  more  earnestly  for  the  conversion  of  these  poor 
heathens,  for  whom  I was  offering  the  Spotless  Lamb  to  the 
Eternal  Father.  Through  the  remainder  of  the  holy  Sacri- 
fice there  was  no  sound,  nor  interruption  from  them : they 
remained  kneeling,  and  looked  on  with  the  same  intense  cu- 
riosity, till  they  saw  it  was  over,  and  I began  to  take  off  my 
vestments  again.  Then  the  king  approached  me,  and  bade 
me  to  the  morning  meal : but  I excused  myself,  till  I had 
spoken  a little  farther  to  ray  King ; to  which  he  consented, 
and  left  me  for  a while. 


»HEN  I joined  the  king  at  table  shortly  after,  he 
plied  me  with  questions  as  to  what  I had  just  been 
doing.  I answered  with  much  reserve;  telling 
him,  these  things  were  not  yet  lawful  for  me  to  speak  to  him 


don  mantjel’s  narrative. 


325 


about : that  he  could  not  know  what  they  meant  till  the  holy 
water  of  life  had  been  poured  over  him.  They  were  (I  said) 
such  hidden  mysteries  as  he  could  not  so  much  as  conceive 
of : but  they  formed  the  highest  mode  of  communication 
with  my  King,  one  that  He  had  especially  appointed,  and 
by  means  of  which  He  became  most  truly  present  to  His 
subjects. 

I could  see  that  he  wondered  all  the  more  at  my  speaking 
so  : but,  turning  the  conversation,  I asked  him,  to  what  part 
of  his  dominions  he  was  now  about  to  carry  us.  He  answered, 
that  all  the  island  was  open  to  us,  to  visit  or  settle  in  as  we 
chose ; but  said,  he  wished  first  to  take  us  to  his  capital,  and 
show  us  to  the  queen,  as  well  as  to  his  mother  and  the  rest  of 
his  family  : also,  that  many  things  had  come  into  his  mind 
in  whieh  he  was  sure  I and  my  companions  could  improve  the 
condition  of  his  people : a favour  he  begged  me  earnestly  to 
grant.  I answered,  all  the  servants  of  my  King  were  bound 
to  assist  those  who  were  in  want,  either  by  imparting  know- 
ledge, or  in  any  other  needful  way  of  help.  It  was  true  (I 
said)  that  in  our  own  country  we  had  a better  method  of 
building  than  was  shown  in  the  rude  huts  around  us  ; also, 
of  cultivating  the  ground,  so  far  as  I observed.  In  this  lat- 
ter respect ; however,  my  King  had  been  very  good  to  him 
and  his  subjects  ; giving  them  a favourable  climate  and  a fer- 
tile soil,  that  needed  little  care,  and  produced  of  itself  the 
fruits  and  vegetables  they  needed.  I then  described  to  him 
a winter  in  Europe  ; having  in  the  course  of  my  life  been 
both  in  the  Netherlands  and  Poland,  I told  him,  I had  seen 
the  ground,  the  hills,  the  rivers,  and  the  very  roofs  of  the 
houses,  all  muffled  in  a covering  of  white,  colder  than  the 
coldest  rivers  in  Toonati-nooka,  that  lay  in  some  places  se- 
veral feet  thick,  for  weeks,  nay,  months,  together.  The 
rivers  and  lakes,  I said,  became  as  hard  as  a stone,  and  so 
smooth,  that  the  inhabitants  fastened  pieces  of  iron  or  bone 
to  their  feet,  by  means  of  which  they  ran  for  miles  upon  the 
surface  of  the  water,  much  faster  and  easier  than  they  could 
run  on  the  ground,  more  like  to  birds  flying  through  the  air : 
and  even  little  children  could  become  skilful  in  this. 

Nothing  could  exceed  the  astonishment  with  which  I was 
listened  to  by  the  whole  assembly.  They  interrupted  me 
several  times,  and  shouted  with  wonder,  after  their  manner ; 
then  imitating  the  actions  of  skating  and  sliding,  as  I de- 
scribed them,  they  besought  me  to  give  them  this  power,  or 
obtain  it  for  them.  The  king  urgently  asked  the  same  : add- 


326 


SUPPLEMENT  : 


ing  a request  that  (if  it  were  possible)  he  and  some  of  his 
chief  warriors  might  be  furnished  with  eagle’s  wings,  that 
they  might  soar  above  the  men  of  Hai-vavaoo  in  battle,  and 
pounce  down  on  their  villages.  To  all  this  I replied,  that  my 
King  gave  different  gifts  and  powers  to  His  servants,  as  it 
pleased  Him  in  His  great  wisdom : that  Toonati-nooka  had 
been  placed  by  Him  so  near  the  sun  which  He  made  to  warm 
the  earth,  that  this  white  covering  would  never  come  on  the 
ground,  nor  the  water  harden.  But  if  he  could  not  hope  to 
see  that  wonderful  sight,  I assured  him,  he  and  his  people 
were  preserved  from  much  suffering  which  the  men  of  those 
countries  had  to  endure  ; then  I told  him,  the  cold  there  was 
sometimes  so  great  as  caused  the  fingers  and  toes,  nay,  the 
very  noses  of  the  inhabitants  to  drop  off,  and  even  took  away 
their  lives,  by  casting  them  into  a deep  sleep.  Then  I de- 
scribed the  sagacity  of  the  dogs  of  Mount  Saint  Bernard,  in 
finding  travellers  over  that  mountain,  who  were  perishing  in 
the  snow  ; but  first  (I  found)  I had  to  give  some  description 
of  a dog,  of  which  they  have  no  notion,  there  being  none  in 
the  whole  island,  nor  in  Hai-vavaoo. 

To  his  second  request  I made  answer,  that  my  King  (whom 
I now  began  to  call  by  the  name  which  came  nearest  to  ex- 
press the  True  God,  Utumatahee*)  had  not  granted  wings  to 
human  creatures ; though  He  had  countless  servants  and 
messengers  who  could  fly  with  the  speed  of  light : that  for  us, 
here  below,  there  was  a hope  held  out  of  one  day  being  as 
swift  and  glorious  as  they ; but  this  great  privilege  was  to 
be  gained  by  obedience  to  the  King  until  the  moment  of  our 
death.  “ But  will  you,  0 white  ambassador”,  asked  the  king, 
u one  day  shine  as  bright  as  the  sun  above  us  ?”  I answered 
that  he  himself,  with  every  one  of  his  subjects,  if  they  would 
acknowledge  my  King  for  the  true  God,  and  have  the  water 
of  life  poured  over  them  in  His  name,  and  if  they  thencefor- 
ward lived  according  to  His  laws,  might  attain  even  to  such  a 
giory. 

This,  again,  was  something  quite  new  to  them  : for  it  seems, 
their  highest  notions  of  future  happiness  were,  to  be  trans- 
ported after  death  to  a large  island  beyond  the  setting  sun, 

* The  reader  will  observe,  on  referring  to  Owen  Evans’  narrative,  at 
pp.  205,  a slight  discrepancy  in  the  names  of  their  idols,  as  given  here 
by  Don  Manuel;  though  not  more,  perhaps,  than  may  be  accounted  for 
by  the  difference  of  the  same  foreign  word  when  pronounced  by  two 
persons,  especially  when  their  own  native  languages  also  differ  from 
each  other.  Ed. 


don  manuel’s  narrative. 


327 


where  the  good  (that  is,  the  brave,  for  courage  was  their 
chief  standard  of  goodness)  would  spend  an  existence  between 
hunting  immortal  buffaloes  and  other  wild  animals,  and  in- 
tervals of  a drunken  sort  of  repose.  To  secure  their  friends’ 
enjoyment  of  this  heathenish  heaven,  they  had  a custom  of 
burying  with  them  two  javelins,  as  well  as  their  bow  and 
arrows,  and  a drinking  cup  of  cocoa-nut  shell,  the  best  they 
could  procure  ; this,  they  imagined,  would  be  filled  with  some 
intoxicating  beverage,  better  than  the  best  palm  wine : one 
draught  of  which  would  make  them  forget  all  the  sorrows 
and  pains  of  this  life,  and  the  agony  of  death  itself. 

Coming  back  to  the  other  point  on  which  I thought  to  im- 
prove the  temporal  condition  of  the  men  of  Toonati-nooka,  I 
mean  their  buildings,  I explained  to  the  king  how  we  built 
stone  houses  in  Europe;  that  we  joined  the  stones  by  a 
cement,  or  mortar,  made  of  burnt  lime  and  sand,  and  roofed 
them  with  a kind  of  flat  stone,  more  durable  than  leaves  : 
how  many  rooms  we  made  in  them,  how  high  we  raised  them, 
how  strong  they  were  to  resist  winds  and  weather,  etc.  He 
listened  with  the  utmost  interest,  and  then  asked  me  to  tell 
him  truly,  how  high  were  our  highest  houses.  I feared  to 
compromise  my  character  for  truth,  even  when  I was  answer- 
ing him  most  truly.  But  knowing  that  simplicity  is  almost 
always  the  truest  wisdom,  I measured  with  my  eye  some  tall 
cocoa-palms  that  grew  near  the  scene  of  our  banquet,  then 
recalled  to  my  mind  the  tower  of  the  cathedral  of  Seville ; 
and  I answered  the  king,  we  did  not  reckon  a building  ex- 
traordinary high  that  was  three  times  the  height  of  those 
palm-trees.  This  caused  another  shout  of  wonder;  till  I 
showed  them  in  miniature  our  mode  of  building;  piling  up 
some  small  stones,  while  I bade  them  remark  how  to  make 
the  stones  rest  one  on  the  other,  like  a pyramid,  or  strengthen 
each  other  like  an  arch.  But  this  instruction  came  to  little 
in  the  end ; for  I learned  that  the  island  was  subject  to 
shocks  of  earthquake  ; though  not  very  frequent  nor  (in 
general)  so  violent  as  in  other  volcanic  countries,  yet  enough 
to  make  them  prefer  light  huts  of  reeds  or  slight  timber,  of 
one  story  high. 

All  being  now  ready  for  our  departure  to  the  interior,  I 
bade  my  companions  draw  together  in  marching  order,  and 
keep  in  strict  discipline  : for  we  were  surrounded  by  such 
crowds  as  might  (with  all  their  dread  of  our  guns)  have  over- 
whelmed or  trodden  us  down  at  any  moment.  But  the  king 
commanded  his  own  body-guard  to  keep  close  to  us,  and 


328 


SUPPLEMENT  .’ 


fence  off  the  multitude : so  that  my  men  suffered  little  incon- 
venience. For  myself,  the  king  insisted  on  my  being  carried 
in  a covered  litter  or  palanquin,  next  to  his  own,  and  with 
precedence  over  his  own  nephew.  Urge  what  I might,  he 
would  not  be  overruled  in  this : at  length,  after  several 
denials,  I was  forced  to  yield,  though  I not  only  disliked  the 
honour,  but  foresaw  how  it  would  embitter  the  mind  of  this 
savage  (whose  name  was  Toohaeca)  still  more  against  us. 

Before  leaving  the  boats,  I placed  one  of  our  men  in  each, 
with  the  young  Indian  to  serve  as  interpreter : not  satisfied 
with  this,  I begged  the  king  to  command  his  subjects  to  leave 
them  untouched.  He  did  this  sternly  enough  ; and  besides, 
he  proposed  to  me  to  declare  the  men,  the  boats,  and  all  the 
stores  they  contained,  emoe*  or  holy,  and  not  to  be  touched 
by  any  one  for  two  moons,  on  pain  of  death.  But,  in  spite 
of  the  advantage  to  be  secured  from  this  proposal,  I could  not 
bring  myself  to  accept  it ; feeling  it  was  probably  an  obser- 
vance in  some  way  connected  with  their  idolatry.  I there- 
fore preferred  to  trust  to  our  good  God  for  the  safety  of  the 
men  and  boats : and  I charged  them  to  stand  off  shore  and 
keep  on  their  guard,  never  sleeping  all  at  one  time,  day  or 
night.  I promised  that,  if  all  turned  out  well  with  me,  I 
would  come  or  send  for  them  within  four  days  ; and  I left 
with  them  five  muskets  and  two  brace  of  pistols  among  them, 
strictly  charging  them  not  to  fire  for  mere  amusement,  but 
endeavour  in  every  way  to  keep  the  natives  friendly,  at  the 
same  time  keeping  them  at  a safe  distance. 

I then  left  them,  with  my  blessing ; and  returning  to  the 
king  and  those  around  him,  found  everything  ready  for  our 
departure.  The  king  had  only  waited  for  me ; and  imme- 
diately stepped  into  his  palanquin,  which  was  lying  on  the 
ground,  inviting  me,  by  waving  his  hand,  to  do  the  same  with 
mine.  Then  Toohaeca,  the  nephew,  likewise  entered  his  pa- 
lanquin, with  a scowl  of  rage  at  my  precedence,  which  the 
king  still  insisted  on.  These  palanquins  are  made  of  a frame- 
work of  light  bamboo,  very  easy  and  springy,  lined  with  soft 
grass  or  moss ; they  are  borne  on  the  shoulders  of  four  men 
a- piece,  who,  in  consideration  of  such  service,  have  many  pri- 
vileges, and  are  exempted  even  from  war,  except  in  case  of 
invasion.  They  carried  us  swiftly,  at  a round  trot ; and  the 

* Something,  it  may  be  supposed,  like  the  mysterious  taboo  existing 
in  the  islands  of  Polynesia,  which  appears  to  be  some  religious  restric- 
tion affecting  persons,  places,  and  even  things  ; but  the  nature  of  which 
has  never  been  fully  ascertained.  Ed. 


don  manuel’s  narrative. 


329 


swinging  of  the  palanquin  was  so  easy,  that  after  the  excite- 
ment and  fatigue  I had  gone  through,  it  lulled  me  into  a deep 
sleep,  so  that  I lost  the  opportunity  of  observing  much  of  the 
country  we  passed  through,  on  our  way  to  the  capital. 


capital,  indeed,  when  at  length  we  reached  it,  was 
a wretched  collection  of  bamboo  huts,  built  without 
order  or  plan : each  hut  was  little  more  than  a 
number  of  bamboo  poles,  stuck  into  the  ground  in  a rude 
circle,  made  to  meet  at  the  top,  and  bound  loosely  together 
with  the  tough  tendrils  of  a creeping  plant,  leaving  a vent 
for  the  smoke  of  the  cooking  fire  to  escape.  The  huts  of  the 
tayakees , or  chiefs,  it  is  true,  were  built  with  somewhat  more 
care,  and  were  larger  than  those  of  the  common  sort ; but 
even  these  were  ill-built,  comfortless  places : and  all  the  skill 
of  the  natives  seemed  to  have  been  spent  on  the  royal  hut, 
which  occupied  the  north  side  of  a square,  or  cleared  space, 
measuring  about  fifty  yards*  every  way.  This  hut,  or  series 
of  huts,  differed  from  the  rest  in  having  upright  posts  of 
larger  trees  driven  into  the  ground  for  the  walls  or  supports. 
These  were  woven  in  and  out  with  oziers  and  young  bamboos, 
laid  horizontally,  and  the  interstices  stuffed  with  moss,  bark 
of  trees,  and  long  grass  from  the  savannahs  or  meadow 
lands.  The  roof  was  formed  of  bamboo  poles  placed  slopingly 
on  the  uprights,  to  shoot  off  the  wet  in  the  rainy  season ; and 
was  thatched  with  the  leaves  of  the  cocoa-palm,  and  another 
large  and  tough  leaf  from  some  tree  which  I had  never  yet 
seen. 

Around  the  king’s  own  hut,  just  under  the  eaves,  I ob- 
served a horrid  barbarous  ornament  indeed  ; being  a row  of 
human  heads,  some  of  them  dried  in  the  sun,  till  the  skin 
looked  like  tanned  leather  ; some  wasted  away,  till  little  more 
than  the  skull-bones  remained.  Four  other  heads  were  stuck 
on  poles  before  the  entrance,  two  on  either  side  : besides  these, 
I saw  a number  of  the  larger  human  bones  grouped  in  fanci- 
ful patterns  over  the  door  and  by  the  door-posts.  I after- 
wards learned  that  the  heads  under  the  house-eaves  had  been 
those  of  some  of  the  bravest  of  the  king’s  enemies,  either 
killed  in  battle,  or  reserved  (according  to  their  dreadful  cus- 
tom) to  be  sacrificed  and  eaten  on  their  return  home  after  a 
victory  ; but  the  heads  on  poles  were  those  of  noted  rebels, 

* Six  hundred  palms.  Ed. 


330 


SUPPLEMENT : 


who  had  attempted  to  usurp  the  kingdom,  once  in  the  reign 
of  the  king’s  father,  Matai-tehepa,  and  still  further  back,  in 
that  of  his  great  -uncle,  Eyca-Sousaeoo. 

By  this  time,  our  palanquin  had  been  set  down  before  the 
entrance  ; and  the  king,  observing  my  eyes  fixed  on  those  hi- 
deous proofs  of  their  barbarous  customs,  exclaimed  several 
times,  in  great  delight,  “ Hai-vavaoo  !”  to  make  me  know 
these  trophies  had  come  from  that  hostile  island  ; at  the  same 
time  brandishing  his  spear.  Then,  seeing  from  my  looks  what 
I thought  of  the  whole  scene,  he  took  my  hand,  in  order  to 
divert  my  attention,  and  led  me  into  the  hut. 

Here  we  found  the  queen,  surrounded  by  her  attendants, 
prepared  to  receive  and  welcome  us : for  the  news  of  our  ar- 
rival, and  of  all  the  wonders  we  had  worked  at  the  sea-coast, 
had  come  before  us  on  a thousand  tongues.  It  was  all  I 
could  do  to  prevent  the  queen  from  falling  at  my  feet,  by 
telling  her  I was.  nothing  in  myself  but  a poor  mortal,  like 
those  who  surrounded  me : that  I claimed  all  honours  for  my 
King,  none  for  myself;  and  that  the  truest  way  to  pay  Him 
the  reverence  due  to  Him,  was  to  listen  to  His  message. 

She  answered  with  much  humility,  that,  by  all  accounts,  I 
had  given  proofs  enough  of  my  embassy  from  a great  King  ; 
that,  in  spite  of  my  disclaimers,  every  one  in  Toonati-nooka, 
from  the  king  downwards,  felt  prepared  to  acknowledge  us  as 
a race  of  demi-gods,  rather  than  men  ; that,  for  her  part,  she 
was  only  desirous  to  learn  what  was  the  will  of  that  mighty 
King  from  whom  I came,  to  fulfil  it  in  all  things  not  contrary 
to  the  customs  of  her  nation  and  the  will  of  her  royal  hus- 
band : with  much  more  to  the  same  effect. 

All  this  was  delivered  with  a natural  and  simple  grace, 
that  augured  well  for  her  candour  and  good  dispositions  to 
receive  the  truth.  The  king  also  showed  his  approval : then, 
thinking  I must  be  weary,  he  led  me  into  a separate  hut  that 
had  been  prepared  for  me  ; and,  telling  me  a feast  would  be 
held  in  an  hour’s  time  to  celebrate  my  coming  to  his  capital, 
advised  me  to  sleep  till  then.  I inquired  after  my  compa- 
nions, and  what  preparations  had  been  made  for  them.  He 
assured  me  they  had  been  well  taken  care  of;  that  some  of 
the  principal  people  in  Ehoto-boe,  his  capital,  had  vied  with 
each  other  for  the  privilege  of  entertaining  them  ; and  that 
most  of  them  were  lodged  in  the  chiefs’  huts  : all  which  I 
found  to  be  true.  However,  I felt  anxious  to  warn  the  men 
again,  and  put  them  on  their  guard  as  to  their  behaviour 
with  the  savages  ; so,  begging  the  king  for  some  escort  who 


don  manuel’s  narrative. 


331 


would  show  me  their  lodging,  he  gave  me  one  of  the  chiefs 
who  always  attended  him,  and  a youth  who  was  of  the  blood- 
royal  (though  not  in  a direct  line  of  succession)  to  go  with 
me. 

We  made  the  round  of  the  principal  huts  in  the  place, 
where  I found  the  men  treated  with  great  honour  and  dis- 
tinction, after  the  rude  fashion  of  their  entertainers.  But,  as 
they  had  made  little  or  no  progress  in  the  language  of  Too- 
nati-nooka,  their  conversation  was  carried  on  chiefly  by  signs, 
with  a few  words  of  each  language,  which  had  been  picked  up 
by  either  party,  and  were  now  repeated  amid  shouts  of  merri- 
ment by  these  new  allies.  I warned  my  companions  one  by 
one,  how  necessary  it  was  to  remain  at  peace  with  the  natives, 
giving  no  cause  of  offence,  but  keeping  on  the  watch,  espe- 
cially with  regard  to  our  guns,  in  which  lay  our  superiority 
against  their  overwhelming  numbers.  But  they  assured  me, 
the  natives  had  still  so  great  a dread  of  these  weapons,  they 
had  shown  uneasiness  till  they  had  been  safely  put  away : 
accordingly,  they  showed  me  their  guns,  which  every  man 
had  put  in  the  corner  of  the  hut,  keeping  still  his  pistols  in 
his  belt.  As  the  natives  had  never  seen  any  of  the  pistols 
fired,  they  had  more  curiosity  about  them  than  dread  ; and 
even  when  their  use  was  explained  to  them,  seemed  rather 
amused  at  them  than  otherwise.  They  supposed  them  to  be 
worn  for  ornament,  and  called  them  by  a phrase  which  may 
be  translated,  pigmy  thunder -cases. 

This  duty  performed,  I returned  to  my  hut,  still  accompa- 
nied by  my  two  guides,  who  seemed  to  think  it  a part  of  the 
obedience  they  owed  to  the  king  to  keep  close  to  me.  In- 
deed, they  helped  me  in  ways  I could  have  dispensed  with  ; 
for,  on  our  walk,  did  we  but  come  to  a broken  path,  a little 
brook,  or  any  impediment  which  in  their  eyes  justified  the 
proceeding,  they  fairly  lifted  me  in  their  arms,  and  carried 
me  over. 

By  this  time  the  feast  was  prepared  ; we  were  summoned 
to  it  by  three  stout  trumpeters,  who  blew  such  a blast  on 
hollow  goats’  horns  as  rather  sounded  like  a charge  to  battle. 
The  banquet  was  as  abundant  as  goats’  flesh,  sea  and  other 
birds,  and  the  vegetables  of  the  island,  could  make  it : but  I 
observed  that  no  kind  of  corn  was  produced,  though  the  na- 
tives make  a sort  of  bread,  or  thin  cake,  as  a great  delicacy, 
from  the  roots  of  a certain  tree,  grated,  dried,  and  baked.  I 
was  pleased  to  think  I should  be  the  instrument  of  giving 
them  so  great  a blessing  as  that  of  wheaten  corn,  of  which  I 


332 


SUPPLEMENT  1 


had  brought  a bag  with  me.  This  I explained  to  the  king, 
who  seemed  impatient,  from  my  description,  to  possess  so 
great  a treasure ; and  said,  they  need  no  longer  make  their 
bread  out  of  a poisonous  root,*  but  from  the  white  man’s 
wholesome  grass , this  being  the  only  word  in  their  language 
by  which  I could  express  corn.  He  asked  me  various  ques- 
tions about  our  mode  of  growing,  grinding,  and  the  other 
arts  of  the  farmer  and  the  baker  ; but  nothing  astonished  him 
so  much  as  the  description  I gave  of  ship-biscuit,  and  the  me- 
thod employed  in  our  dock-yards,  of  rolling  it  out  and  cutting 
it  up. 

Neither  the  queen  nor  her  attendants  took  any  part  in  this 
banquet,  it  being  against  the  laws  of  their  forefathers  for  the 
women  to  eat  with  the  men.  Indeed,  in  this,  as  in  all  other 
heathen  countries,  these  poor  creatures  seemed  to  be  looked 
on  as  inferior  beings,  and  were  condemned  to  hoe  in  the 
fields,  bear  .heavy  burdens,  and  in  a word,  to  slave  throughout 
the  day,  almost  as  if  they  were  captives  taken  in  war  ; while 
their  lords  and  masters  took  their  ease  in  smoking  and  con- 
versing, when  they  were  not  absent  at  war  or  in  the  chase. 
The  king  asked  me  how  all  this  was  arranged  with  us  ; but  I 
answered  him  with  caution,  fearing  to  make  him  despise  our 
holy  religion  by  telling  him  anything  so  strange  as  that  the 
Gospel  had  raised  to  a spiritual  equality  with  men  those  be- 
ings whom  heathenism  oppressed  and  degraded. 

The  feast  was  scarcely  over,  when  we  saw  two  men  running 
with  the  utmost  swiftness  from  the  direction  of  the  coast 
whence  we  had  journeyed.  No  sooner  were  they  perceived, 
than  the  whole  assembly  cried  out,  something  must  be  amiss  ; 
and  my  mind  instantly  misgave  me  about  the  boats,  and  the 
men  I had  left  in  them.  Some  of  the  tayakees  darted  off  at 
full  speed  to  meet  these  messengers,  and  learn  their  tidings : 
they,  however,  persisted  in  coming  on  to  the  king,  though  so 
much  exhausted  by  running,  that  when  they  reached  the 
mat  where  he  was  seated,  they  fell  down  before  him  panting, 
and  were  unable  to  utter  a word.  But  by  degrees,  in  broken 
sentences  they  made  it  known,  our  men  had  been  surprised 
in  the  boats  by  some  of  the  natives,  and  been  deprived  of 
their  arms  ; and  that  the  boats  themselves  had  been  dragged 
ashore,  broken  up,  and  burnt. 

Instantly  the  king  broke  into  the  most  terrific  rage  I ever 

• Probably  the  manioc , from  which  the  cassava  bread  of  the  West 
Indies  is  baked,  after  carefully  grating  the  root  and  pressing  it  with 
heavy  weights,  to  extract  the  poisonous  juice.  Ed. 


don  manuel’s  narrative. 


333 


beheld  in  mortal  man.  Forgetting  his  late  contempt  for  his 
idols,  he  called  for  the  vengeance  of  Paowanga,  Havaeoeekee, 
and  the  rest,  on  these  violators  of  our  rights  ; assured  me 
they  should  receive  the  punishment  they  deserved : then, 
turning  to  his  executioner,  bade  him  depart  at  once  for  the 
coast  village,  and  bring  him  the  heads  of  all  who  had  been 
concerned  in  this,  with  those  of  their  wives  and  children. 
At  the  same  time  he  beckoned  out  two  or  three  chiefs  to  go 
and  assist  to  carry  out  this  decree  of  blood. 

®UT  I threw  myself  before  them,  entreating  them  to 
pause ; then  appealed  to  the  king,  that  as  the  offence 
was  committed  against  me,  so  I might  judge  the 
case  myself,  with  the  prisoners  brought  safely  before  me.  It 
was  with  much  difficulty  I prevailed  in  this ; so  greatly  was 
his  rage  excited  against  the  criminals  in  this  lawless  deed. 
He  felt,  indeed,  his  authority  over  his  subjects,  and  his 
honour  towards  myself,  both  equally  touched  by  what  had 
been  done. 

At  length,  when  I represented  that  my  King  was  always 
angered  when  vengeance  took  the  place  of  justice  in  the 
hands  of  human  kings,  and  when  they  made  the  innocent 
suffer  for  the  guilty,  he  gave  way,  and  signified  that  I should 
have  my  will.  It  was  now  arranged  that  the  young  Indian 
should  go  with  three  chiefs,  bearing  the  king’s  wand  of  peace 
(which,  truly,  wTas  sent  by  him  much  less  often  than  the 
sword  of  execution),  in  token  that  no  blood  was  to  be  shed  on 
the  spot.  They  took  with  them  some  forty  or  fifty  armed 
men,  and  were  to  arrest  all  against  whom  there  was  probable 
evidence  that  they  were  parties  to  this  outrage ; but  none 
others : they  were  to  bring  these  to  us,  bound,  without  tor- 
ture or  ill-usage.  Least  of  all  were  they  to  harm  the  fami- 
lies or  relations  of  the  accused.  All  this  charge  I delivered 
to  my  young  Indian  : whose  discreet  behaviour  on  receiving 
it,  together  with  the  mildness  of  the  injunction,  produced  a 
great  effect  on  the  bystanders.  Their  sense  of  justice  (so  far 
as  they  had  it)  taught  them  to  compare  this  line  of  conduct 
with  the  outbursts  of  ferocious  vengeance  they  had  been  so 
long  used  to.  All  agreed,  there  must  be  something  very 
happy  in  living  under  the  laws  of  that  great  King  I served, 
whose  service  I desired  to  teach  them.  Thus,  all  tended  to 
good  under  the  Hand  of  Providence  : this  very  event,  disas- 
trous in  itself,  became  a vehicle  for  the  gospel. 


334 


SUPPLEMENT  : 


1 was  now  surrounded  for  hours  by  eager  crowds,  listen- 
ing to  all  I had  to  say  about  the  justice  which  man  owed  to 
his  brother  man,  and  the  charity  which  linked  each  true 
Christian  soul  to  his  fellow  Christian.  Then  I described  the 
unity  and  perfection  of  God  ; the  impossibility  of  there  being 
more  than  One  ; that  idolatry  was  invented  by  a bad  spirit, 
the  enemy  of  mankind,  to  lead  men  away  from  God,  and 
make  them  miserable  with  himself  here,  and  after  death,  etc. 
When  I had  wound  them  up  to  a great  pitch  by  saying  this, 
I started  up  on  a sudden,  crying  out : “ Down  with  all  idols  ! 
There  is  no  God  but  One !”  The  whole  multitude  caught  up 
the  cry  : and  pulling  me  by  the  skirts  of  my  cassock  towards 
a huge  idol  near  the  king’s  palace,  besought  me  to  put  thun- 
der into  his  mouth , as  I had  done  to  Paowanga. 

But  this  time,  I resolved  it  should  be  their  own  act  and 
deed.  So  I reasoned  with  them,  saying,  my  King  would  be 
more  pleased  with  them  for  using  their  own  hands  than  mine 
to  destroy  His  enemies  : that  I had  blown  up  Paowanga  and 
burnt  the  oloeeos , while  they  still  believed  in  them  ; but  now, 
they  having  confessed  my  King  for  the  true  God,  I gladly 
committed  the  work  to  them.  Upon  which,  they  assented 
with  much  joy,  and  I gained  time  to  recite  my  office  while 
the  work  of  destruction  went  on.  So  many  were  the  hands 
employed,  and  so  great  the  zeal,  that  before  the  sun  went  on, 
almost  all  the  oloeeos  in  Ehoto-boe  (except  a few  remaining  in 
the  houses  of  some  obstinate  old  idolaters,  whom  I had  to 
protect  from  the  public  indignation)  were  consumed  in  one 
blazing  pile,  together  with  the  fragments  of  the  three  great 
idols  worshipped  in  the  capital,  viz.,  Tamata-Sollu,*  who  in 
their  system  represents  the  sun,  Chondadueea,  or  the  moon, 
and  our  former  acquaintance,  Paowanga,  who  was,  indeed,  be- 
fore these  two  eventful  days,  the  established  idol  of  all 
Toonati-nooka.  In  short,  I had  to  interfere  several  times  to 
settle  disputes  among  these  poor  savages,  who  in  their  new- 
born zeal  were  anxious  to  have  each  his  morsel  or  chip  of  the 
idol,  to  carry  to  the  flames. 

On  a review  of  all  this,  I could  not  but  wonder  at  the 
rapid  progress  of  Truth  in  the  minds  of  these  idolaters,  who 
now  first  heard  it.  Yet,  knowing  the  subtlety  of  the  enemy 
of  mankind,  and  taking  into  account  the  inconstancy  of  most 

* Here  again,  on  a comparison  with  Evan’s  narrative,  p.  142,  will  be 
found  that  degree  of  discrepancy  between  two  Indian  words,  which 
would  result  from  their  being  caught  by  the  ears,  and  repeated  by  the 
lips,  of  Europeans  belonging  to  different  nations.  Ed. 


don  manuel’s  narrative. 


335 


savage  dispositions,  I prepared  myself  for  any  check  or  reverse 
that  might  occur.  Seldom  has  the  Gospel  been  sown,  but  in 
the  blood  of  those  who  carried  forth  the  precious  seed.  On 
this  reflection,  I offered  my  life  anew  to  my  Lord;  beseeching 
Him  that,  whether  by  my  labour,  or  suffering,  or  both,  His 
truth  might  be  sown  abundantly  in  the  hearts  of  those  around 
me ; and  that  in  the  end  u coming  I might  come  with  joy, 
bearing  my  sheaves”. 

But  the  thing  which  above  all  afflicted  me,  was,  that  this 
great  task  of  converting  a large  island  to  the  faith,  was  com- 
mitted to  one  feeble  pair  of  hands  ; seeing  it  might  well 
exercise  the  zeal  of  a whole  college  of  priests  and  catechists. 
I also  ardently  longed  for  the  presence  and  gentle  humanizing 
influence  of  some  consecrated  sisters  of  religion,  to  speak  to 
the  poor  heathen  women,  who  were  sunk  in  a state  of  dark- 
ness and  degradation  equal  to  that  of  their  savage  lords.  I 
could  do  no  better  than  send  up  sighs  from  my  inmost  heart 
to  heaven,  that  our  merciful  Lord  would  deign  to  fit  me  to 
gather  in  some  handfuls,  at  least,  of  this  wide  harvest. 

The  last  thing  we  did  that  evening  was,  to  build  up  an 
altar  for  my  Mass  of  the  morrow ; for  I had  brought  all 
requisites  with  me  from  the  sea- coast,  and  thus  the  most  pre- 
cious of  our  possessions  had  been  saved  from  the  robbery.  I 
no  sooner  made  known  my  wishes  to  prepare  this  altar,  than 
the  crowds  around  all  began  to  supplicate  for  a share  in  the 
work.  They  urged,  with  the  simple  earnestness  of  children,  that 
as  they  had  a hand  in  destroying  the  idols,  I should  allow  them 
to  take  part  in  erecting  an  altar  to  my  King.  As,  however,  the 
confusion  caused  by  so  many  would  have  hindered  instead  of 
helping  the  work,  I selected  twelve  strong  men  who  stood 
nearest  to  me,  and  eight  others  by  lot ; directing  them  how 
to  proceed,  and  to  bring  large  stones  to  the  centre  of  the 
space  cleared  for  the  royal  palace,  or  hut : arranging  these 
stones  in  a square  form,  and  to  a convenient  height. 

While  I was  thus  employed,  raising  my  eyes,  I beheld  the 
enemies’  skulls  that  decorated  the  palace-door  and  eaves, 
grinning  on  me  hideously ; and  I observed  also  the  bones  and 
other  trophies  of  war.  These,  I determined,  should  be  re- 
moved before  the  sacrifice  of  the  Spotless  Lamb  was  celebrated 
in  that  place.  At  the  same  time,  knowing  that  I wras  now 
about  to  lay  the  axe  to  the  very  root  (or  one  great  root)  of 
the  poison- tree  of  their  heathenism,  and  was  likely  to  offend 
their  warlike  pride,  I resolved  to  proceed  with  caution. 
Wherefore,  going  to  the  king  (who  had  bidden  his  attendants 


SUPPLEMENT  : 


336 

admit  me  at  all  times  to  his  hut),  I represented,  that  among 
the  titles  my  King  most  delighted  in  was,  Prince  of  Peace  ; that 
war,  indeed,  might  be  undertaken  on  a just  cause,  but  then 
must  be  conducted  with  as  much  mercy  as  the  success  of  it 
made  possible  ; that  to  insult  a vanquished  foe  by  hanging  up 
his  mortal  remains  was  a thing  contrary  to  the  spirit  of  my 
King,  and  to  right  reason.  This  was  the  way  I put  it ; since 
to  speak  to  savages  of  the  duty  of  avoiding  barbarous  and 
savage  acts,  would  be  a foreign  language  to  them  indeed. 
There  was  a difference,  I acknowledged,  between  the  case  of 
enemies  and  malefactors ; by  which  I excused  his  keeping  in 
some  place  the  heads  of  those  traitors  on  poles,  to  warn  others 
against  following  their  evil  deeds.  But  I pleaded,  that  as  I 
was  about  to  offer  a solemn  sacrifice  to  the  King  of  Peace,  all 
such  mementos  of  crime  and  blood  should  be  removed  from 
this  particular  spot : otherwise,  said  I,  myself  will  remove, 
and  complete  this  holy  solemnity  in  some  place  apart. 

On  this,  the  king  cried  out,  he  desired  above  all  things 
the  same  sacrifice  he  had  seen  performed  in  the  coast -village, 
Maheine-taho,  should  be  repeated  in  the  court  before  his  own 
dwelling ; and  though,  he  acknowledged,  I had  asked  a hard 
thing,  and  what  was  unheard  of  before,  seeing  these  trophies 
were  reckoned  so  many  proofs  of  the  valour  of  himself  and  his 
tay'akees , yet,  sooner  than  appear  to  slight  my  King’s  will,  he 
would  order  them  to  be  removed.  This  was  accordingly 
done,  much  to  the  wonder  of  the  multitude,  who  could  not 
comprehend  the  reason  of  it,  and  for  the  first  time  showed 
some  symptoms  of  murmuring.  However,  the  skulls,  poles 
and  all,  were  taken  into  the  king’s  hut,  and  set  up  over  the 
place  where  he  was  used  to  dine,  and  also  to  receive  audiences 
and  administer  justice:  at  least  such  justice  as  was  known  in 
Toonati-nooka  ; of  which  I was  soon  to  have  a specimen.  As 
to  the  other  heads,  bones,  scalps,  and  the  rest  of  those  bar- 
barous trophies,  I persuaded  him  at  length,  though  with  much 
difficulty,  to  let  them  all  be  buried  in  one  pit  beyond  the  pre- 
cincts of  the  court-yard. 

I promised,  on  my  part,  if  he  would  consent  to  this,  I would 
write  an  inscription  over  the  spot,  both  in  his  native  language 
and  my  own,  setting  forth  the  valour  and  triumphs  of  Para- 
marama  and  his  brave  tayakees.  This  idea  pleased  them  all 
exceedingly : and  the  king  himself  became  so  impatient  to 
have  it  done  at  once,  that  he  seemed  to  have  forgotten  what 
he  was  so  eager  about  a few  moments  before,  the  sacrifice  to 
my  King.  I was  content,  however,  with  directing  the  pit  to 


don  manuel’s  narrative. 


337 


be  dug  under  a spreading  tree  with  a soft,  white  wood,  like  a 
plane-tree,  into  which  I cut  the  inscription  next  day,  accor- 
ding to  my  promise.  Having  had  the  bones  deposited  in  it, 
I now  went  on  with  preparations  for  holy  Mass ; which  were 
continued  until  the  sun  set,  and  the  sudden  darkness  of 
the  tropics  came  on  us. 


morning  early,  we  were  awakened  by  confused 
U outcries,  partly  of  angry  shouts,  partly  of  supplica- 
hI  tion  and  wailing.  These  made  me  know  that  the 
chiefs  and  warriors  had  returned  with  their  prisoners  from 
Maheine-taho.  Indeed,  it  appeared,  in  their  zeal  to  bring 
them  before  us,  they  had  hurried  them  on  through  the  night ; 
so  that  the  poor  wretches  were  half  dead  with  fatigue  as  well 
as  terror ; covered  with  mud,  from  being  dragged  through 
swampy  ways ; and  bleeding  from  the  cuts  and  wounds  they 
had  received  from  rocks  and  the  prickly  shrubs  of  the  island. 
On  questioning  Samuel,  the  young  Indian  Christian,  he  assured 
me  he  had  done  all  in  his  power  to  prevent  this  rough  treat- 
ment being  used ; but  he  found,  the  utmost  his  wand  of  peace 
would  do  was,  to  preserve  their  lives : had  it  not  been  for 
that,  the  natives  would  have  brought  back,  not  the  offenders 
themselves,  but  their  heads  only. 

I now  requested  of  the  king,  as  I was  to  judge  the  accused, 
so  I might  dispose  of  them  before  the  trial;  which  I proposed 
should  take  place  after  the  sacrifice  I was  about  to  offer.  He 
readily  consented  to  this ; supposing  I meant  to  keep  them 
without  food,  blindfolded,  and  pinioned  above  the  elbow,  ac-L 
cording  to  their  custom.  But  he  was  much  surprised  when 
I gave  directions  to  have  them  taken  into  my  own  hut,  and 
tended  by  the  Christian  Indians,  who  fed  them  and  washed 
their  wounds.  All  this  was  above  his  comprehension  ; but  I 
could  see  by  their  looks  that  many  among  the  multitude  ap- 
proved of  it,  though  they  dared  not  say  anything.  It  gave 
me  an  opportunity  of  repeating,  that  my  King  loved  both  jus- 
tice and  mercy  ; and  I said,  it  was  neither  merciful  nor  just 
to  treat  men  before  their  trial  as  though  they  had  been  found 
guilty.  I was  on  the  point  of  saying,  too,  that  my  King  had 
once  come  down  on  earth,  and  when  there,  had  washed  the 
feet  of  His  own  followers  ; but  I forbore,  feeling  it  was  only 
by  degrees  that  anything  so  supernatural  as  the  sacred 

22 


338 


SUPPLEMENT  : 


mysteries  of  the  Incarnation  could  be  imparted  to  these 
barbarous  minds. 

“ But”,  said  the  king,  turning  to  me,  u how  will  you  per-  ' 
form  the  trial,  since  you  have  burnt  all  the  oloeeos  ?”  I ought 
to  have  said,  that  among  the  superstitious  uses  those  objects 
were  put  to,  they  were  usually  brought  forth,  with  solemn 
incantations  and  many  ceremonies,  and  used  in  some  way  to 
decide  all  accusations  and  disputes ; being  first  smeared  with 
blood  drawn  from  the  arms  of  both  the  contending  parties. 
But  in  offences  committed  (or  supposed  to  be  so)  against  the 
king  himself,  I found  he  was  in  the  habit  of  simply  sending 
his  executioner  to  bring  him  the  head  of  the  accused  person, 
without  further  inquiry  by  oloeeo  or  any  other. 

For  the  present,  I only  smiled  at  his  question,  and  told 
Para-marama  he  should  see  something  of  the  way  in  which  we 
administered  justice  in  my  country.  Then,  finding  from  the 
Indians  that  the  accused  had  eaten,  and  were  refreshed,  I 
placed  a guard  at  the  door  of  the  hut  in  which  they  were 
kept,  and  forbade,  on  pain  of  my  severe  displeasure,  that  any 
one  should  enter.  This  had  its  effect ; and  I proceeded  to 
vest  for  Mass. 

This  time,  I had  no  need  to  exhort  the  multitudes  to  silence 
and  reverence : for  those  who  had  come  with  us  from  Ma- 
heine  -taho  (or  had  run  on  wildly  before  us),  had  already,  as 
I afterwards  found,  translated  to  the  people  of  Ehoto-boe, 
nearly  word  for  word,  the  short  address  I had  made  before 
celebrating  holy  Mass  there.  The  same  intense  curiosity  now 
prevailed,  mingled  with  awe  : and  I observed  that  the  queen 
and  her  attendants  were  kneeling  within  the  door  of  the  royal 
hut.  I thought  it  best,  however,  to  give  the  multitude  an 
exhortation,  as  I had  done  at  the  coast-village  : and  this  time 
I drew  somewhat  nearer  to  the  great  mystery  of  the  Incarna- 
tion ; telling  them,  my  good  Lord  and  King  was  so  filled  with 
love  for  all  mankind,  that  He  came  from  time  to  time  to  visit 
them,  and  remained  on  earth  among  them,  now  in  one  way, 
now  in  another : I enlarged  on  those  words,  delicice  mece  esse 
cum  filiis  hominum:*  I promised  that  hereafter  I would  ex- 
plain to  them  the  great  way  He  had  taken  to  dwell  thus  among 
men  for  thirty-three  years.  That,  I said,  was  a long,  long 
time  ago,  before  the  reign  of  Matai-tehepa,  before  Eyca- 
sousaao,  before  the  kings  their  predecessors,  for  thousands 
upon  thousands  of  moons. 

When  I mentioned  so  long  a time  back,  as  they  were  little 

* “ My  delights  are  to  be  with  the  sons  of  men” — Prov viii.  31.  Ed. 


don  manuel’s  narrative. 


339 


used  to  any  long  reckoning  of  time,  what  I said  to  them  struck 
them  with  wonder : they  broke  into  murmurs  of  surprise, 
saying,  “ Too-pooe , too-pooe !”  which  means,  strange , or,  won- 
derful. I resumed  my  discourse,  saying,  they  must  not  be 
surprised  at  this ; for  I had  much  greater  wonders  to  tell 
them  as  to  the  length  of  time  (they  had  no  word  in  their  lan- 
guage, till  I afterwards  made  one,  to  express  eternity)  that  my 
King  had  reigned,  and  shown  His  love  to  His  subjects.  But, 
to  come  back  (I  said)  to  His  more  especial  residence  among 
them,  when  the  thirty-three  years  were  expired,  the  period 
He  had  determined  to  remain,  and  when  He  was  to  go  up  to 
His  Throne  in  heaven,  He  decreed  another  wonderful  method 
by  which  He  should  still  be  with  His  subjects  below. 

“ So”  (continued  I,)  u the  great  King  is  upon  earth  by  one 
method,  and  in  heaven  by  another.  Besides,  His  power  is  so 
great,  that  He  can  be  in  many  places  on  earth  at  one  and  the 
same  time  : and,  in  truth,  He  is  so.  Furthermore,  there  are 
places  which  He  comes  thus  to  visit,  from  time  to  time,  as  He 
is  now  coming  (for  the  first  time  in  this  particular  way)  to 
Ehoto-boe.  You  cannot  understand  these  things,  O men  of 
Toonati-nooka ! but  they  are  true,  and  most  true.  Believe 
me  when  I tell  you ; for  this  is  part  of  the  message  of  the 
great  King  to  you,  and  for  your  good”.  Then  I added  much 
the  same  exhortation  as  at  Maheine-taho  ; beseeching  them 
to  make  an  act  of  belief  in  the  Presence  of  the  great  King, 
and  to  adore  Him  on  the  altar  when  they  heard  the  little 
shell  sound.  I bade  them  ask  Him,  as  a great  gift,  to  make 
them  able  to  believe  in  His  Presence,  and  do  His  will. 

Then  I proceeded  with  holy  Mass.  As  regards  the  beha- 
viour of  the  vast  multitudes  now  collected  on  the  spot  (and 
I believe  we  had  there  the  great  majority  of  the  inhabitants 
of  this  island),  it  was  a repetition  of  what  had  taken  place  the 
day  before  on  the  coast,  only  on  a larger  scale.  A more 
strange  and  solemn  spectacle,  I think,  was  seldom  witnessed 
since  the  days  of  the  Apostles,  than  this  crowd  of  simple  sa- 
vages, thirsting  for  the  waters  of  life,  prepared  to  believe,  and 
only  desirous  to  be  instructed.  Thus,  for  the  second  time 
within  two  days,  the  Adorable  Victim  offered  Himself  by  my 
unworthy  hands  for  their  salvation. 

While  I made  my  act  of  thanksgiving  after  Mass,  my  com- 
panions who  had  been  left  in  the  boats,  arrived;  having 
travelled  hither  more  at  leisure  than  the  accused  men  had 
been  dragged  along.  The  new  comers  shared  in  all  the 
honours  of  the  feast  that  was  now  prepared  for  myself  and 


340 


SUPPLEMENT  : 


the  rest : the  king  showing  no  small  anxiety  to  wipe  from 
our  remembrance  the  insult  offered  to  us  at  Maheine-taho. 

The  banquet  over,  I proceeded  at  once  to  the  trial.  For 
this,  I told  the  king  that,  as  I was  not  come  to  deprive  him  of 
his  lawful  authority,  I requested  him  to  preside  over  the 
whole  proceeding,  and  to  confirm  the  judgment  I should  pro- 
nounce. He  consented  to  this:  only,  as  such  a ceremony 
was  totally  new  to  him,  he  stipulated  that  he  should  be  called 
on  to  do  no  more  than  sit  upon  a seat  elevated  above  mine, 
while  I conducted  the  trial.  I was  therefore  placed  on  a mat, 
on  the  king’s  left,  but  raised  enough  to  enable  the  crowd  to 
see  and  hear  me ; while  the  king  sat  on  a rude  throne  of  logs, 
four  or  five  feet  higher.  When  the  accused  Indians  (who 
were  but  eleven  in  all,  some  of  the  rest  having  escaped  up 
the  country)  were  brought  before  us,  I perceived,  from  their 
looks  of  terror,  they  expected  nothing  but  instant  death,  or 
perhaps  lingering  tortures. 

I therefore  spoke  to  them  mildly ; saying,  the  crime  they 
were  charged  with  was  (no  doubt)  a grave  one : that  all 
nations  held  the  ambassador  from  a great  king  to  be  a kind 
of  sacred  person,  and  this  they  knew,  from  the  respect 
wherewith  the  envoys  between  Toonati  and  Hai-vavaoo  were 
treated  on  both  sides.  But  I assured  them,  not  only  should 
they  have  a patient  hearing,  but  the  evidence  brought 
against  them  should  be  carefully  sifted,  and  every  doubtful 
point  allowed  in  their  favour.  Whatever  could  be  urged 
as  a fair  or  pardonable  motive  for  their  act,  should  be 
taken  in  the  best  sense,  and  weigh  on  their  side.  In  short, 
I tried  my  best  to  state,  in  this  savage  place,  the  prin- 
ciples of  equity  that  guide  (or  ought  to  guide)  our  Christian 
courts  of  justice  in  Europe.  It  was  plain  to  see,  all  this  was 
new  to  them ; once  or  twice,  the  king  and  his  tayahees  showed 
signs  of  displeasure  and  impatience  at  what  they  heard.  But 
the  poor  oppressed  people  drank  in  all  I said  with  eager  ears  ; 
and  as  far  as  they  dared  in  the  presence  of  those  who  had 
acted  so  differently  to  them,  testified  their  assent  and  joy. 

After  this  (having  taken  care  that  the  witnesses  should  be 
kept  separate,  without  opportunity  of  conferring  together),  I 
entered  upon  the  trial,  by  summoning  them,  one  after  an- 
other, to  give  evidence.  The  rest,  meanwhile,  were  placed  under 
guard,  by  my  orders,  out  of  ear- shot : and  each  witness,  after 
saying  what  he  had  to  say,  and  being  cross-examined  by  the 
accused,  (in  which  they  exhibited  great  shrewdness  and  inge- 
nuity) ^as  marched  off  under  custody  of  one  of  the  king’s 


don  manuel’s  narrative. 


341 


guards,  to  a rising  ground  beyond,  where  he  could  not  hear 
what  was  going  on.  This  I provided,  in  case  they  might  be 
summoned  back  on  some  point  of  evidence : but  it  was  the 
least  popular  part  of  my  proceedings ; both  witnesses  and 
guards  being  so  intensely  curious  to  hear  everything  of  this 
new  process,  that  the  utmost  vigilance  was  needed  to  prevent 
their  stealing  back  to  the  spot.  At  last,  I put  them  all  in 
charge  of  the  old  Indian,  and  gave  him  six  of  the  men  with 
their  muskets  to  over-awe  them,  and  keep  them  aloof. 


XT  needed  no  small  patience  to  thread  the  maze  of  such 
counter-evidence,  mutual  accusations,  noise,  rage,  wail- 
ing, entreaties,  protestations,  denials,  as  now  arose.  The 
accused  being  eleven  in  number,  and  the  witnesses,  altogether, 
as  many  as  thirty-six,  the  process  was  long  and  intricate.  But 
I soon  found,  many  of  these  pretended  witnesses  had  seen 
nothing;  so  that  their  evidence  was  worthless.  They  had 
trumped  up  a story  in  concert,  which  broke  down  at  every 
turn.  This  they  had  done,  partly  from  motives  of  private 
revenge  towards  certain  of  the  accused,  partly  to  curry  fa- 
vour with  the  king  and  myself:  thinking  we  should  be 
pleased  with  the  punishment  of  some,  at  least,  guilty  or  not, 
to  satisfy  us  for  the  outrage  committed. 

I thought  it  well  to  make  an  example  of  these  false  wit- 
nesses ; so,  after  three  cases  of  such  deliberate  lying  had 
been  proved,  I interrupted  the  trial  to  give  them  a summary 
punishment. 

First,  I explained  to  the  by-standers,  and  the  offenders 
themselves,  how  heinous  a crime  they  had  been  guilty  of. 
I told  them,  though  they  did  not  as  yet  know  all  the  laws  of 
my  King,  they  had  a law  written  in  their  own  hearts,  bidding 
them  act  justly  and  speak  truth.  This  law,  I said,  bound  at 
all  times,  and  even  in  trivial  things  ; how  much  more,  then, 
when  the  life  of  a fellow-creature  was  at  stake  ? What  crime 
could  well  be  more  hateful,  than  to  swear  away  another 
man’s  life  by  a false  oath  ? Proceeding  in  this  way,  I then 
said,  it  was  a very  lenient  sentence  I was  about  to  inflict, 
that  each  false  witness  should  receive  a dozen  strokes  with  a 
bamboo  cane,  one  half  on  the  soles  of  his  feet,  the  other  half 
on  his  shoulders. 

The  multitude  greatly  applauded  this  sentence,  which  was 
executed  without  delay ; and  the  cries  of  the  sufferers 


342 


SUPPLEMENT : 


formed  a sort  of  proclamation,  more  relished  perhaps  by  the 
people  than  by  the  king  and  his  tayakees , that  upright  justice 
was  thenceforward  to  be  the  rule  in  Toonati-nooka. 

Having  cleared  away  this  mass  of  false  evidence,  I found 
there  was  only  proof  remaining  against  five  or  six,  at  the 
most,  as  being  implicated  in  the  attack  on  the  boats : and, 
though  many  appeared  to  have  been  more  or  less  abettors  or 
sympathizers,  I kept  strictly  to  such  evidence  as  went  against 
the  actual  transgressors.  These  few,  moreover,  were  proved 
to  be  among  the  men  of  Ehoto-boe  who  had  been  most  for- 
ward to  welcome  us  on  our  arrival.  They  had  expressed 
themselves  delighted  at  our  coming,  and  had  persuaded  some 
of  their  kinsmen  and  others,  not  so  well  disposed,  to  treat  us 
with  hospitality.  Several  witnesses  also  appeared  to  speak 
for  their  general  character.  On  the  whole,  it  became  evi- 
dent that  the  attack  had  been  made  in  no  hostile  spirit,  but 
was  dictated  by  an  irresistible  desire  to  keep  us  amongst 
them,  and  prevent  all  chance  of  our  sailing  from  Toonati- 
nooka  again. 

All  this  was  confirmed  by  evidence  of  our  two  white  men, 
and  the  Indian,  left  in  the  boats.  They  declared,  the  attack- 
ing party,  though  resolute  for  the  destruction  of  the  boats, 
had  treated  themselves  with  as  much  gentleness  as  they 
could,  under  the  circumstances.  They  had,  indeed,  disarmed 
our  men  by  force,  coming  on  them  suddenly  while  they  were 
overcome  by  sleep  in  the  heat  of  the  day.  And  so  far,  our 
men  frankly  acknowledged  the  fault  was  in  great  measure 
their  own : for,  had  they  observed  my  strict  charge,  and 
kept  one  always  on  the  watch,  this  great  disaster,  which  has 
perhaps  determined  our  fate  for  the  rest  of  our  days,  never 
had  happened.  But,  beyond  securing  the  boats,  to  destroy 
them,  the  Indians  gave  our  men,  and  their  own  countryman, 
all  possible  good  usage : even  carrying  them  ashore  on  their 
backs,  so  that  not  a thread  of  their  clothes  was  wetted. 
They  also  entreated  them,  on  their  knees,  not  to  be  offended 
at  what  they  had  done  : they  assured  the  two  Europeans 
(through  the  Indian  interpreter)  it  had  been  only  to  secure 
the  happiness  of  having  the  “ white  lords”  reside  among 
them,  for  the  good  of  themselves,  their  families,  and  the 
whole  island  and  nation.  Finally,  they  had  besought  them  to 
intercede  with  the  king,  and  myself,  to  screen  them  from  the 
punishment  which  they  (reasonably)  feared  was  hanging  over 
their  heads. 

All  this  considered,  I felt  bound  to  make  every  distinction 


DON  MANUEL’S  NARRATIVE. 


343 


between  the  degree  of  fault  on  the  part  of  the  aggressors,  and 
the  amount  of  misfortune  we  suffered  thereby.  True,  this 
destruction  of  the  boats  has  probably  made  our  leaving 
Toonati-nooka  for  ever  hopeless,  by  destroying  our  indepen- 
dence of  action.  For  I scarcely  think  we  shall  be  able  to 
persuade  the  king  to  grant  us  a war  canoe  to  return  to  As- 
sumption Isle,  whence  we  came.  And,  the  more  valuable 
and  important  we  become  to  him,  as  I trust  we  may,  by  the 
conversion  of  himself  and  his  subjects  to  faith  and  civilization, 
the  less  likely  will  he  be  to  consent.  Yet,  on  the  other  hand, 
this  very  obstacle  may  turn  to  a benefit,  if  it  settles  the 
minds  of  our  white  men  to  become  colonists  in  the  place  : and 
for  myself,  it  has  solved  (in  a way  I little  thought  of)  a pain- 
ful doubt  that  vexed  me : being  under  promise  to  return  to 
my  little  flock  in  Assumption  Isle,  yet  seeing  so  wide  a field 
of  labour  for  souls  opening  on  me  here. 

The  end  of  the  trials  was,  the  culprits  were  let  off  with  a 
slight  punishment ; much  slighter  than  that  inflicted  on  the 
false  witnesses:  and  this  difference  made  between  the  two 
classes  of  offenders  was  another  instruction  to  the  minds  of 
the  savages  on  the  nature  of  truth,  of  justice,  and  the  rights 
of  man. 

I have  little  more  to  add,  but  that  since  our  first  landing, 
the  grace  of  God  and  the  power  of  the  evil  one  have  been 
contending  for  the  possession  of  these  poor  heathens*  souls. 
They  listen  to  me,  indeed,  with  great  eagerness,  and  ac- 
knowledge the  goodness  of  my  Master’s  laws.  They  are  most 
grateful,  too,  for  my  interference  with  the  king  and  his  tayakees 
on  their  behalf,  and  for  the  temporal  improvements  I have 
effected,  and  the  arts  of  life  I have  taught  them.  On  the 
other  hand,  the  power  of  corruption  is  strong : they  shrink  from 
the  holiness  of  the  Christian  laws ; and  I foresee,  one  great 
obstacle  to  its  being  received  will  be  the  absolute  necessity  of 
their  renouncing  some  of  their  heathenish  customs,  and  poly- 
gamy. 

The  enmity  of  Toohaeca,  the  king’s  nephew,  is  likely  to 
prove  another  source  of  trouble  to  us,  or  even  danger.  I am 
credibly  told,  he  has  vowed  vengeance  against  us ; and,  though 
hated  by  the  generality  for  his  cruel  and  overbearing  disposi- 
tion, he  has  a small  party  of  the  tayakees  with  him  : men  of 
like  mind,  who  have  taken  him  for  their  leader.  They  would 
side  with  him  more  openly,  were  it  not  for  their  dread  of  the 
king,  who  favours  us  in  so  signal  a way.  How  long  that 
favour  may  last,  or  how  soon  the  enemy  of  souls  may  succeed 


344 


SUPPLEMENT  : DON  MANUEL’S  NARRATIVE. 


in  troubling  our  peace,  is  known  to  God  alone.  Upon  His 
loving  providence  we  repose  securely.  And,  with  a prayer 
that  the  wild  elements  may  be  overruled  to  waft  this  my 
narrative  to  hands  capable  of  sending  us  help,  I commit  it  to 
the  waves,  on  this,  the  thirteenth  anniversary  of  my  religious 
profession,  and  of  our  residence  in  Toonati  the  seventh  month 
of  the  second  year. 


John  F.  Fowler,  Printer,  3 Crow  Street,  Dame  Street,  Dublin. 


